OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R007C02 Hardware Description 03

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02

Hardware Description Issue

03

Date

2013-05-16

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions Product Name

Version

OptiX OSN 8800

V100R007C02

OptiX OSN 6800

V100R007C02

OptiX OSN 3800

V100R007C02

iManager U2000

V100R008C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT

V100R008C00

Intended Audience This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board. This document is intended for: l

Network Planning Engineer

l

Hardware Installation Engineer

l

Installation and Commissioning Engineer

l

Field Maintenance Engineer

l

Network Monitoring Engineer

l

Data Configuration Engineer

l

System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ii


About This Document

Symbol

Description

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

Diagram Conventions The diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description Indicates the flow of optical signals. Indicates the flow of electrical signals. Indicates an optical module.

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


iii


About This Document

Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-05-16) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

LOA Functions and Features

Deleted the InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G services.

FIU Panel

Changed the description of the MON/OUT port power split ratio for the TN13FIU02 board into the following sentence: The MON port is a 0.1/99.9 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB).

TOA Functions and Features

Deleted the FE electrical port feature for the TOA board.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-04-20) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the issue 01, the manual of this issue contains the SPC100 and SPC200 related information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Update

Description

Whole manual

Changed the required U2000 version from V100R008C01 to V100R008C00.


iv


About This Document

Update

Description

1 Cabinet

l Optimized the cabinet descriptions. The N63B and N66B cabinets are described through comparison. l Added requirements on subrack configurations inside a cabinet.

LTX Application ND2 Application NO2 Application NQ2 Application NS3 Application NS4 Application

Revised the description of relay mode of line boards as follows: When optical-layer ASON and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. Added information about latency measurement.

14.22 TTX 14.20 TSC 13.12 LOA

Added information about InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE LAN services.

NPO2E Functions and Features

Added information about electrical-layer ASON.

NPO2 Functions and Features ENQ2 Functions and Features

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Added information about the TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, TN52NS201M02, TN52ND2T04, TN14LSX, TN54TTX, and TN54TSC boards. Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports the TN12LDM, TN12LOM, TN13LQM, TN12LSX, TN14LSX, TN12LSXL, TN52TOM, TN12LWXS, and TN11LWX2 boards.

21.12 TN16UXCM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Added information explaining that the TN16UXCM board supports centralized grooming of ODU4 signals.


v


About This Document

Update

Description

14.7 NS4

Added information explaining that the NS4 and NO2 boards can be used as line boards on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

14.3 NO2 14.11 TEM28

Added information explaining that the TEM28 board newly supports the 10GE WAN service.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Compared with the manual for the issue 02, the manual of this issue contains the SPC200 related information. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Optimized the subrack ventilation system diagram. l Changed the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration. l Added descriptions of the mounting ear.

13.11 LEX4

Added the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.

13.10 LEM24

Revised the descriptions of the TBE board cross-connect capacity.

14.8 TBE 14.11 TEM28 13.19 LSC

Changed the board power consumption.

13.25 LTX 14.7 NS4

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Only the issue number is updated. Update

Description

Whole manual

Added information about the TN23SCC board. Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA, TN12LSC, TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, and TN12LDX boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


vi


About This Document

Update

Description

13.19 LSC

Deleted the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.

13.10 LEM24

Added information showing that the LEM24 board supports the OptiX OSN 3800.

13.19 LSC

Added the SDFEC error correction mode and 55000ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN optical modules for these boards.

13.25 LTX 14.7 NS4 14.7 NS4

Deleted the information that shows the NS4 board supports OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks, and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

14.3 NO2

Deleted the information that shows the NO2 board supports OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.


Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. Added descriptions of PDU (DPD63-8-8). Added descriptions of the TN52AUX, TN15AUX, TN15EFI, TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2, TN55NO2, TN54NS4, TN12TD20, TN11TM20, TN55TOX, TN12OPM8, TN15PIU, TN11RAU2, TNK2USXH, TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, TN16UXCM and TNK2UXCT boards. Moved the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description".

13.19 LSC

Added the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.

13.10 LEM24

Added service-based LPT for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards.

13.11 LEX4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

20.8 RAU1

Added the following fiber types for the RAU1 board: TWPLUS, SMFLS, G.656, G.654A, TERA_LIGHT, and G.654B.

14.11 TEM28

Added the ERPS function for the TEM28 board.

22.5 ST2

Added the 80-km OSC modules for the ST2 board.

23.3 OLP

Added the TN12OLP04 board to the TN12OLP board series.


vii


About This Document

Update

Description

24.2 MCA4 24.3 MCA8

Added the function to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals for the TN11MCA402 and TN11MCA802 boards when the boards work with the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software.

14 Tributary Board and Line Board

Added the standard mode for the TN54NS3, TN54THA, TN54TOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX boards.

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-05-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.

13 Optical Transponder Unit

Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1 port pair to receive/transmit the service.

23 Optical Protection Board

A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.

22 Optical Supervisory Channel Board

The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is changed to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards is changed to 40.5 dB.

SCC Switch and Jumper

The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are revised and optimized.

TBE Functions and Features

The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


viii


About This Document

Update

Description


Adjusted the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description" part.

14 Tributary Board and Line Board 13 Optical Transponder Unit

Added information about the TN15LSXL board.

TOM

Revised the TN11TOM board application 5 diagram.

14.6.6 Valid Slots

Revised the slot limitations for the TN55NS3 board when it is used as a regeneration board.

11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame

Updated fiber management tray information.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks.

14.13 TOA

Added the HD-SDIRBR service for the TOA board.

13.21 LSX

Modified the function description for the LSX and LDX boards, specifying that they do not support test frames.

13.9 LDX 13.10 LEM24 13.11 LEX4

Modified the function description for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards, specifying that they do not support optical-layer ASON.

21.15 AUX

Modified the jumper descriptions for the TN11AUX01 board.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ix


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

Deleted the TN15LSXL board.

13.12 LOA

Added the following optical modules for the TN11LOA, TN12LOG, TN12LOM, TN54TOA, TN52TOM, and TN54THA boards: 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.

13.13 LOG 13.14 LOM 14.13 TOA 14.15 TOM 14.12 THA 17.7 FIU

Added the application in OptiX OSN 3800 systems for the TN14FIU and TN11RAU1 boards.

20.8 RAU1 A.4 Board Indicators

Added the maintenance blinking mode for the STAT indicator.


Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the TN12LSC, TN11LTX, TN15LSXL, TN54TEM28, TN55NS3, TN54TSXL, TN11RAU1, TN14FIU, and TN13OAU106.

14.10 TDX

Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards: 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP.

14.19 TQX

21.15 AUX

Revised the schematic diagram of the TN11AUX board jumpers in the "Jumper" section for the AUX board by changing the dotted lines to solid lines. Figure 21-74 shows the revised diagram. The solid lines indicate that the jumpers must be capped.

14.13 TOA

Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA, and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports" sections.

14.12 THA 13.12 LOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


x


About This Document

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-05-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.


Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1 port pair to receive/transmit the service.


A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.


The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is changed to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards is changed to 40.5 dB.

SCC Switch and Jumper

The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are revised and optimized.

XCS Functions and Features

For the TN11XCS board, the cross-connect capacity description is modified. For ODU1 and ODU2 signals, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s. For GE services, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capability of 140 Gbit/s.

TBE Functions and Features

The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.

SFIU Valid Slots

The slots for the SFIU board inside an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis are changed to IU2-IU5 and IU11.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xi


About This Document

Update

Description

5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement

Updated the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800.

14.2 ND2

Explicitly specified that the TN12ND2 board does not support the 8800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP module.

13.12 LOA

Updated the specifications of client-side FC400 and FC800 optical modules.

20.4 HBA

Revised the application diagram of the HBA board by deleting the HBA board at the receiving site.

14.10 TDX

Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards: 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP.

14.19 TQX

Updated the power consumption specification of the FAN board for the OptiX OSN 8800.

21.15 AUX

Revised the schematic diagram of the TN11AUX board jumpers in the "Jumper" section for the AUX board by changing the dotted lines to solid lines. Figure 21-74 shows the revised diagram. The solid lines indicate that the jumpers must be capped.

14.13 TOA

Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA, and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports" sections.

14.12 THA 13.12 LOA

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2S0A, TN55NPO2S0B, TN55NPO2ES02, and TN55NPO2ES04 boards. l Deleted descriptions of the TN55NPO2S05 and TN55NPO2S07 boards. l Deleted slot IU22 from the valid slots for the TN16AUX board in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xii


About This Document


Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN13OAU1, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN55NPO2E, TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN16SCC, TNK4SXH, TNK4SXM, TNK4XCT, N3EAS2, TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards. l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are added. l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".

13 Optical Transponder Unit 14 Tributary Board and Line Board

l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

16 PID Board 14.13 TOA

l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex. l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table.

14.12 THA

l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table. Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

14.15 TOM

Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xiii


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards. l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are added. l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".

13 Optical Transponder Unit 14 Tributary Board and Line Board

l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

16 PID Board 14.15 TOM

Revised the port working modes for the TN52TOM board. The details are as follows: l In cascading mode: – Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to "ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)" to "ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)" to "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)". l In non-cascading mode: – Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to "ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)" to "ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1)" to "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)" to "ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)".

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xiv


About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX, TN12OBU1P1, and TNK2SXH boards. l Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards.


Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. l Added descriptions of the TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ, and TN11WSMD9 boards l Added the "Optical-layer ASON" and "Electrical-layer ASON" rows to the "Functions and Features" table.

13.14 LOM

Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.

16.7 NPO2

Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.

21.7 TN52UXCM

Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the third official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xv


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

Changed optical module names to ensure that the name of each optical module is unique. Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

16 PID Board

Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX board (specific only to OptiX OSN 8800).

21.7 TN52UXCM

Added information about the TN52XCM02.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

13.22 LSXL

Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.

C Quick Reference Table of the Units 13 Optical Transponder Unit

Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard compliance in Functions and Features.

14 Tributary Board and Line Board 16 PID Board Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xvi


About This Document

Update

Description

21.10 TN52XCH

Added information about the TN52XCH02.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04, and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual. Update

Description

Whole manual

l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference between the products is described in the manual. l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l The descriptions of the following boards are added: – TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL, TN54NS3, TN53TSXL, TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902, TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

30 Optical Attenuator30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators is added.

32 Filler Panels

Introduction to filler panels is added.


xvii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................1 1.1 Cabinet Introduction...........................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets.......................................................................................................................3 1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet...........................................................4 1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations..........................................................................................................................6

2 Fiber Management Cabinet.........................................................................................................9 3 DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................14 3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU......................................................................................................................................15 3.2 TN11PDU.........................................................................................................................................................16 3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8)............................................................................................................................................19

4 UPM................................................................................................................................................24 5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement.............................................................33 5.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.........................................................................................................................34 5.1.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................34 5.1.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................35 5.1.3 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................36 5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................38 5.1.5 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................44 5.1.6 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................46 5.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack.........................................................................................................................49 5.2.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................50 5.2.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................51 5.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................53 5.2.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................54 5.2.5 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................59 5.2.6 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................62 5.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack.........................................................................................................................65 5.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................65 5.3.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................67 5.3.3 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................68 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xviii


Contents

5.3.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................68 5.3.5 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................73 5.3.6 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................75 5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack.................................................................................................................78 5.4.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................78 5.4.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................80 5.4.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................81 5.4.4 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................85 5.4.5 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................86 5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces........................................................................88 5.5.1 ATE.........................................................................................................................................................91 5.5.1.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................92 5.5.1.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................92 5.5.1.3 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................92 5.5.1.4 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................98 5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications.........................................................................................................................98 5.5.2 TN15EFI..................................................................................................................................................99 5.5.2.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................99 5.5.2.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................99 5.5.2.3 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................99 5.5.2.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................105 5.5.2.5 EFI Specifications.........................................................................................................................106 5.5.3 TN16EFI................................................................................................................................................106 5.5.3.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................106 5.5.3.2 Application...................................................................................................................................106 5.5.3.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................106 5.5.3.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................113 5.5.3.5 DIP Switches................................................................................................................................114 5.5.3.6 EFI Specifications.........................................................................................................................114 5.5.4 EFI1.......................................................................................................................................................115 5.5.4.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................115 5.5.4.2 Application...................................................................................................................................115 5.5.4.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................115 5.5.4.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................118 5.5.4.5 DIP Switches................................................................................................................................118 5.5.4.6 EFI1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................119 5.5.5 EFI2.......................................................................................................................................................119 5.5.5.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................119 5.5.5.2 Application...................................................................................................................................119 5.5.5.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................120 5.5.5.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................125 5.5.5.5 EFI2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................125 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xix


Contents

5.5.6 STI.........................................................................................................................................................126 5.5.6.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................126 5.5.6.2 Application...................................................................................................................................126 5.5.6.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................126 5.5.6.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................130 5.5.6.5 STI Specifications.........................................................................................................................130 5.5.7 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................130

6 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category............................................................................................136 7 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement...........................................................147 7.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................148 7.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................149 7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities...............................................................................................................................150 7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation................................................................................................................................151 7.5 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................................156 7.6 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................................158 7.7 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................160 7.7.1 TN11EFI................................................................................................................................................161 7.7.1.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................161 7.7.1.2 Application...................................................................................................................................161 7.7.1.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................161 7.7.1.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................169 7.7.1.5 EFI Specifications.........................................................................................................................170 7.7.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................170

8 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................175 9 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement............................................................182 9.1 Chassis Structure............................................................................................................................................183 9.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................183 9.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation................................................................................................................................184 9.4 AC Power Consumption.................................................................................................................................188 9.5 AC Power Requirement..................................................................................................................................189 9.6 DC Power Consumption.................................................................................................................................191 9.7 DC Power Requirement..................................................................................................................................192 9.8 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................194 9.8.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................194 9.8.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces................................................................................................................196

10 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category..........................................................................................202 11 Frames........................................................................................................................................207 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module....................................................................................................................208 11.2 CRPC Frame.................................................................................................................................................211 11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame...................................................................................................................................212 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xx


Contents

12 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................214 12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................................215 12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions...............................................................................................................215 12.1.2 Symbols on Boards..............................................................................................................................217 12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards...........................................219 12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards..............................................219 12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs..............................................................................................220 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode................................................................................................221 12.3 Bar Code Overview......................................................................................................................................229

13 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................234 13.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................236 13.2 ECOM...........................................................................................................................................................242 13.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................242 13.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................242 13.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................244 13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................245 13.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................248 13.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................250 13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................250 13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................252 13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................253 13.2.10 ECOM Specifications........................................................................................................................254 13.3 L4G...............................................................................................................................................................258 13.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................259 13.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................259 13.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................260 13.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................262 13.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................264 13.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................266 13.3.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................266 13.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................266 13.3.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................268 13.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................269 13.3.11 L4G Specifications............................................................................................................................271 13.4 LDGD...........................................................................................................................................................275 13.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................275 13.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................276 13.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................276 13.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................279 13.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................281 13.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................283 13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD......................................................................................................283 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxi


Contents

13.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................284 13.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................285 13.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................286 13.4.11 LDGD Specifications........................................................................................................................288 13.5 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................294 13.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................295 13.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................295 13.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................296 13.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................298 13.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................301 13.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................303 13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................303 13.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................303 13.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................305 13.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................306 13.5.11 LDGS Specifications.........................................................................................................................308 13.6 LDM.............................................................................................................................................................315 13.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................315 13.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................315 13.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................316 13.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................320 13.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................323 13.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................324 13.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM........................................................................................................325 13.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................325 13.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................325 13.6.10 LDM Specifications...........................................................................................................................328 13.7 LDMD..........................................................................................................................................................337 13.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................337 13.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................337 13.7.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................338 13.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................341 13.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................344 13.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................345 13.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.....................................................................................................346 13.7.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................346 13.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................347 13.7.10 LDMD Specifications........................................................................................................................349 13.8 LDMS...........................................................................................................................................................357 13.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................357 13.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................357 13.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................358 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxii


Contents

13.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................362 13.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................364 13.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................366 13.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS......................................................................................................366 13.8.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................367 13.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................367 13.8.10 LDMS Specifications........................................................................................................................370 13.9 LDX..............................................................................................................................................................377 13.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................377 13.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................377 13.9.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................378 13.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................380 13.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................383 13.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................385 13.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.........................................................................................................385 13.9.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................385 13.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................386 13.9.10 LDX Specifications...........................................................................................................................389 13.10 LEM24........................................................................................................................................................395 13.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................395 13.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................395 13.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................396 13.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................400 13.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................403 13.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................405 13.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ..................................................................................................406 13.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................406 13.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................408 13.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................409 13.10.11 LEM24 Specifications.....................................................................................................................419 13.11 LEX4..........................................................................................................................................................426 13.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................426 13.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................426 13.11.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................427 13.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................430 13.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................434 13.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................436 13.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ....................................................................................................436 13.11.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................437 13.11.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................438 13.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................439 13.11.11 LEX4 Specifications........................................................................................................................448 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxiii


Contents

13.12 LOA............................................................................................................................................................453 13.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................453 13.12.2 Application Overview........................................................................................................................453 13.12.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................455 13.12.4 Characteristic Code for the LOA.......................................................................................................460 13.12.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.....................................................................................................460 13.12.6 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) ........................................................................................................................................................................461 13.12.6.1 Application...............................................................................................................................461 13.12.6.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................461 13.12.6.3 Configuring Cross-Connections...............................................................................................463 13.12.7 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)..............465 13.12.7.1 Application...............................................................................................................................465 13.12.7.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................466 13.12.7.3 Configuring Cross-Connections...............................................................................................467 13.12.8 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) ........................................................................................................................................................................468 13.12.8.1 Application...............................................................................................................................468 13.12.8.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................468 13.12.8.3 Configuring Cross-Connections...............................................................................................470 13.12.9 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).................472 13.12.9.1 Application...............................................................................................................................472 13.12.9.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................473 13.12.9.3 Configuring Cross-Connections...............................................................................................474 13.12.10 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).....................................475 13.12.10.1 Application.............................................................................................................................475 13.12.10.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................476 13.12.10.3 Configuring Cross-Connections.............................................................................................477 13.12.11 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................477 13.12.12 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................480 13.12.13 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................481 13.12.14 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................482 13.12.15 LOA Specifications.........................................................................................................................488 13.13 LOG............................................................................................................................................................504 13.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................504 13.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................506 13.13.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................506 13.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................509 13.13.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................513 13.13.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................515 13.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................516 13.13.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................516 13.13.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................517 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxiv


Contents

13.13.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................519 13.13.11 LOG Specifications.........................................................................................................................522 13.14 LOM...........................................................................................................................................................534 13.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................534 13.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................535 13.14.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................536 13.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................540 13.14.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................544 13.14.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................547 13.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM......................................................................................................548 13.14.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................548 13.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................550 13.14.10 LOM Specifications.........................................................................................................................555 13.15 LQG............................................................................................................................................................567 13.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................567 13.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................568 13.15.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................568 13.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................571 13.15.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................574 13.15.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................575 13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.......................................................................................................576 13.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................576 13.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................577 13.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................578 13.15.11 LQG Specifications.........................................................................................................................581 13.16 LQM...........................................................................................................................................................586 13.16.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................586 13.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................587 13.16.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................588 13.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................593 13.16.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................597 13.16.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................599 13.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM......................................................................................................599 13.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................599 13.16.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................602 13.16.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................603 13.16.11 LQM Specifications.........................................................................................................................606 13.17 LQMD........................................................................................................................................................615 13.17.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................615 13.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................616 13.17.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................617 13.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................621 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxv


Contents

13.17.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................625 13.17.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................627 13.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD...................................................................................................628 13.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................628 13.17.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................630 13.17.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................632 13.17.11 LQMD Specifications......................................................................................................................635 13.18 LQMS.........................................................................................................................................................645 13.18.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................645 13.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................646 13.18.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................648 13.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................653 13.18.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................658 13.18.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................660 13.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS....................................................................................................661 13.18.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................661 13.18.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................663 13.18.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................666 13.18.11 LQMS Specifications......................................................................................................................669 13.19 LSC.............................................................................................................................................................679 13.19.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................679 13.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................680 13.19.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................680 13.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................682 13.19.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................684 13.19.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................686 13.19.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................687 13.19.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................687 13.19.9 LSC Specifications............................................................................................................................691 13.20 LSQ.............................................................................................................................................................699 13.20.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................699 13.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................699 13.20.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................700 13.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................702 13.20.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................705 13.20.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................706 13.20.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................707 13.20.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................707 13.20.9 LSQ Specifications............................................................................................................................710 13.21 LSX.............................................................................................................................................................713 13.21.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................713 13.21.2 Application........................................................................................................................................717 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxvi


Contents

13.21.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................718 13.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................721 13.21.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................725 13.21.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................728 13.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.......................................................................................................729 13.21.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................729 13.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................729 13.21.10 LSX Specifications..........................................................................................................................734 13.22 LSXL..........................................................................................................................................................745 13.22.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................745 13.22.2 Application........................................................................................................................................747 13.22.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................747 13.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................750 13.22.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................754 13.22.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................757 13.22.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................758 13.22.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................759 13.22.9 LSXL Specifications..........................................................................................................................763 13.23 LSXLR........................................................................................................................................................768 13.23.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................768 13.23.2 Application........................................................................................................................................769 13.23.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................770 13.23.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................772 13.23.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................773 13.23.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................776 13.23.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................777 13.23.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................778 13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications.......................................................................................................................780 13.24 LSXR..........................................................................................................................................................783 13.24.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................783 13.24.2 Application........................................................................................................................................783 13.24.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................784 13.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................786 13.24.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................788 13.24.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................790 13.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................................791 13.24.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................791 13.24.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................791 13.24.10 LSXR Specifications.......................................................................................................................794 13.25 LTX............................................................................................................................................................797 13.25.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................797 13.25.2 Application........................................................................................................................................798 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxvii


Contents

13.25.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................799 13.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................803 13.25.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................806 13.25.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................808 13.25.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................809 13.25.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................810 13.25.9 LTX Specifications............................................................................................................................814 13.26 LWX2.........................................................................................................................................................819 13.26.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................819 13.26.2 Application........................................................................................................................................819 13.26.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................820 13.26.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................823 13.26.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................825 13.26.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................826 13.26.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................827 13.26.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................827 13.26.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................828 13.26.10 LWX2 Specifications......................................................................................................................829 13.27 LWXD........................................................................................................................................................837 13.27.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................837 13.27.2 Application........................................................................................................................................837 13.27.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................838 13.27.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................841 13.27.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................843 13.27.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................844 13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................844 13.27.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................845 13.27.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................845 13.27.10 LWXD Specifications......................................................................................................................847 13.28 LWXS.........................................................................................................................................................855 13.28.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................855 13.28.2 Application........................................................................................................................................856 13.28.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................857 13.28.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................860 13.28.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................862 13.28.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................863 13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................864 13.28.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................864 13.28.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................864 13.28.10 LWXS Specifications......................................................................................................................867 13.29 TMX...........................................................................................................................................................874 13.29.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................875 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxviii


Contents

13.29.2 Application........................................................................................................................................876 13.29.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................876 13.29.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................878 13.29.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................881 13.29.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................882 13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................883 13.29.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................883 13.29.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................884 13.29.10 TMX Specifications.........................................................................................................................886

14 Tributary Board and Line Board...........................................................................................899 14.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................901 14.2 ND2..............................................................................................................................................................908 14.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................908 14.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................911 14.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................915 14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................922 14.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................926 14.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................929 14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................930 14.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................930 14.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................936 14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................946 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications............................................................................................................................950 14.3 NO2..............................................................................................................................................................958 14.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................958 14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................959 14.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................963 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................969 14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................972 14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................974 14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NO2.........................................................................................................974 14.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................974 14.3.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................977 14.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................981 14.3.11 NO2 Specifications............................................................................................................................985 14.4 NQ2..............................................................................................................................................................989 14.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................989 14.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................991 14.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................996 14.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1003 14.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1007 14.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1009 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxix


Contents

14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.......................................................................................................1010 14.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1011 14.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1017 14.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1033 14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1037 14.5 NS2.............................................................................................................................................................1041 14.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1042 14.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1046 14.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1049 14.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1055 14.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1058 14.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1061 14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2........................................................................................................1062 14.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1062 14.5.9 Configuring Cross-Connections........................................................................................................1068 14.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1078 14.5.11 NS2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1082 14.6 NS3.............................................................................................................................................................1091 14.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1091 14.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1093 14.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1097 14.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1104 14.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1108 14.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1112 14.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1115 14.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1121 14.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1133 14.6.10 NS3 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1138 14.7 NS4.............................................................................................................................................................1144 14.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1144 14.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1145 14.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1151 14.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1157 14.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1160 14.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1162 14.7.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1163 14.7.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1165 14.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1172 14.7.10 NS4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1176 14.8 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................1179 14.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1179 14.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1179 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxx


Contents

14.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1180 14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1184 14.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1187 14.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1189 14.8.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1189 14.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1191 14.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1192 14.8.10 TBE Specifications..........................................................................................................................1193 14.9 TDG............................................................................................................................................................1198 14.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1199 14.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1199 14.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1200 14.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1201 14.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1203 14.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1205 14.9.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1205 14.9.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1206 14.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1208 14.9.10 TDG Specifications.........................................................................................................................1210 14.10 TDX..........................................................................................................................................................1213 14.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1213 14.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1214 14.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1216 14.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1220 14.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1223 14.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1226 14.10.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1227 14.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1230 14.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1234 14.10.10 TDX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1241 14.11 TEM28......................................................................................................................................................1244 14.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1244 14.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1244 14.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1245 14.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1249 14.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1251 14.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1253 14.11.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1253 14.11.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1255 14.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1259 14.11.10 TEM28 Specifications...................................................................................................................1268 14.12 THA..........................................................................................................................................................1271 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxi


Contents

14.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1271 14.12.2 Application Overview......................................................................................................................1271 14.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1272 14.12.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS...................................................................................................1277 14.12.5 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................1278 14.12.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1278 14.12.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1278 14.12.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1280 14.12.6 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................1284 14.12.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1284 14.12.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1284 14.12.6.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1286 14.12.7 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)....................................................1288 14.12.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1289 14.12.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1289 14.12.7.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1291 14.12.8 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)..................................................1294 14.12.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1294 14.12.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1295 14.12.8.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1297 14.12.9 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1299 14.12.10 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1301 14.12.11 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1303 14.12.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1303 14.12.13 THA Specifications.......................................................................................................................1308 14.13 TOA..........................................................................................................................................................1312 14.13.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1312 14.13.2 Application Overview......................................................................................................................1312 14.13.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1313 14.13.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS...................................................................................................1319 14.13.5 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................1320 14.13.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1320 14.13.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1320 14.13.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1322 14.13.6 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................1325 14.13.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1325 14.13.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1325 14.13.6.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1327 14.13.7 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1).....................................................1329 14.13.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1330 14.13.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1330 14.13.7.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1332 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxii


Contents

14.13.8 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)..................................................1334 14.13.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1335 14.13.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1335 14.13.8.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1338 14.13.9 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)...........................................1339 14.13.9.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1339 14.13.9.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1340 14.13.9.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1343 14.13.10 Working Principle and Signal Flow..............................................................................................1344 14.13.11 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1346 14.13.12 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1348 14.13.13 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1348 14.13.14 TOA Specifications.......................................................................................................................1354 14.14 TOG..........................................................................................................................................................1364 14.14.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1364 14.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1365 14.14.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1366 14.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1368 14.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1371 14.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1372 14.14.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1372 14.14.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1374 14.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1376 14.14.10 TOG Specifications.......................................................................................................................1379 14.15 TOM.........................................................................................................................................................1382 14.15.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1382 14.15.2 Application Overview......................................................................................................................1383 14.15.2.1 Concept: Tributary Mode and Tributary-Line Mode..............................................................1383 14.15.2.2 Concept: Cascading Mode and Non-cascading Mode............................................................1384 14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM......................................................................1384 14.15.2.4 Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM......................................................................1391 14.15.3 Function and Feature.......................................................................................................................1393 14.15.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS...................................................................................................1400 14.15.5 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading).........................................................1401 14.15.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1401 14.15.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1402 14.15.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1403 14.15.6 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading).............................................1405 14.15.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1405 14.15.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1406 14.15.6.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1407 14.15.7 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading).........................................................................1409 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxiii


Contents

14.15.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1409 14.15.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1409 14.15.7.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1410 14.15.8 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)............................................................1411 14.15.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1411 14.15.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1412 14.15.8.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1413 14.15.9 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Non-Cascading)................................................1414 14.15.9.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1414 14.15.9.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1415 14.15.9.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1417 14.15.10 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)....................................1420 14.15.10.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1420 14.15.10.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1422 14.15.10.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1423 14.15.11 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)....................................................1424 14.15.11.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1424 14.15.11.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1425 14.15.11.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1426 14.15.12 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1 (Non-Cascading).....................1427 14.15.12.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1427 14.15.12.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1428 14.15.12.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1429 14.15.13 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading) ......................................................................................................................................................................1430 14.15.13.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1430 14.15.13.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1431 14.15.13.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1432 14.15.14 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (non-cascading).......................................1432 14.15.14.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1433 14.15.14.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1434 14.15.14.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1436 14.15.15 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (non-cascading)..............................................1437 14.15.15.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1437 14.15.15.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1438 14.15.15.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1438 14.15.16 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0 (Non-Cascading).................................1439 14.15.16.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1439 14.15.16.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1440 14.15.16.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1441 14.15.17 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading).......................................................................1442 14.15.17.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1442 14.15.17.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1443 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxiv


Contents

14.15.17.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1444 14.15.18 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)..........................................................1444 14.15.18.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1444 14.15.18.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1445 14.15.18.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1447 14.15.19 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)...............................................................1447 14.15.19.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1447 14.15.19.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1448 14.15.19.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1449 14.15.20 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)..................................................1450 14.15.20.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1450 14.15.20.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1450 14.15.20.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1451 14.15.21 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical regeneration board).........................1452 14.15.21.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1452 14.15.21.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1453 14.15.21.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1453 14.15.22 Working Principle and Signal Flow..............................................................................................1454 14.15.23 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1459 14.15.24 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1461 14.15.25 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1461 14.15.26 TOM Specifications.......................................................................................................................1467 14.16 TOX..........................................................................................................................................................1480 14.16.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1480 14.16.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1480 14.16.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1481 14.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1484 14.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1486 14.16.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1488 14.16.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1488 14.16.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1490 14.16.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1490 14.16.10 TOX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1494 14.17 TQM.........................................................................................................................................................1498 14.17.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1498 14.17.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1499 14.17.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1499 14.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1504 14.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1507 14.17.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1508 14.17.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1509 14.17.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1511 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxv


Contents

14.17.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1513 14.17.10 TQM Specifications.......................................................................................................................1515 14.18 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................1522 14.18.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1522 14.18.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1523 14.18.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1523 14.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1525 14.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1528 14.18.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1529 14.18.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1529 14.18.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1531 14.18.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1532 14.18.10 TQS Specifications........................................................................................................................1534 14.19 TQX..........................................................................................................................................................1538 14.19.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1538 14.19.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1540 14.19.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1540 14.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1543 14.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1546 14.19.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1548 14.19.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1549 14.19.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1551 14.19.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1555 14.19.10 TQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1560 14.20 TSC...........................................................................................................................................................1563 14.20.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1563 14.20.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1564 14.20.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1564 14.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1566 14.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1568 14.20.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1570 14.20.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1570 14.20.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1572 14.20.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1572 14.20.10 TSC Specifications........................................................................................................................1575 14.21 TSXL........................................................................................................................................................1580 14.21.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1580 14.21.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1581 14.21.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1582 14.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1585 14.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1589 14.21.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1593 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxvi


Contents

14.21.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1594 14.21.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1596 14.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1597 14.21.10 TSXL Specifications......................................................................................................................1600 14.22 TTX..........................................................................................................................................................1604 14.22.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1604 14.22.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1605 14.22.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1605 14.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1608 14.22.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1611 14.22.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1612 14.22.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1612 14.22.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1614 14.22.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1615 14.22.10 TTX Specifications........................................................................................................................1618

15 Packet Service Unit................................................................................................................1623 15.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1624 15.2 EG16...........................................................................................................................................................1625 15.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1625 15.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1626 15.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1627 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1630 15.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1632 15.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1634 15.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1634 15.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1636 15.2.9 EG16 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1643 15.3 EX2.............................................................................................................................................................1646 15.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1646 15.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1647 15.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1647 15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1651 15.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1653 15.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1654 15.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1654 15.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1656 15.3.9 EX2 Specifications............................................................................................................................1662 15.4 PND2..........................................................................................................................................................1664 15.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1664 15.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1665 15.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1665 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1670 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxvii


Contents

15.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1672 15.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1674 15.4.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1674 15.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1676 15.4.9 PND2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1683

16 PID Board................................................................................................................................1688 16.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1689 16.2 BMD4.........................................................................................................................................................1690 16.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1690 16.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1691 16.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1691 16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1692 16.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1694 16.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1696 16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................1697 16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................1697 16.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1699 16.2.10 BMD4 Specifications......................................................................................................................1699 16.3 BMD8.........................................................................................................................................................1701 16.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1701 16.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1701 16.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1702 16.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1703 16.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1704 16.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1707 16.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.....................................................................................................1707 16.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8........................................................................................................1707 16.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1710 16.3.10 BMD8 Specifications......................................................................................................................1711 16.4 ELQX..........................................................................................................................................................1713 16.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1713 16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1714 16.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1714 16.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1716 16.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1719 16.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1720 16.4.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1720 16.4.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1722 16.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1725 16.4.10 ELQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1728 16.5 PTQX..........................................................................................................................................................1732 16.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1732 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxviii


Contents

16.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1734 16.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1735 16.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1737 16.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1740 16.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1742 16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX......................................................................................................1742 16.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1743 16.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1745 16.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1748 16.5.11 PTQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1751 16.6 ENQ2..........................................................................................................................................................1756 16.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1756 16.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1756 16.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1758 16.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1761 16.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1763 16.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1764 16.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1765 16.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1768 16.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1774 16.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1775 16.7 NPO2..........................................................................................................................................................1775 16.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1775 16.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1780 16.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1782 16.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1787 16.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1791 16.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1794 16.7.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2......................................................................................................1795 16.7.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1795 16.7.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1799 16.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1808 16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications........................................................................................................................1810 16.8 NPO2E........................................................................................................................................................1812 16.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1812 16.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1816 16.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1818 16.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1821 16.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1824 16.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1826 16.8.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E....................................................................................................1827 16.8.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1827 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xxxix


Contents

16.8.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1830 16.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1835 16.8.11 NPO2E Specifications.....................................................................................................................1836

17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board.............................................................1840 17.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1841 17.2 M40.............................................................................................................................................................1842 17.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1842 17.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1843 17.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1844 17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1844 17.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1846 17.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1851 17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40.......................................................................................................1852 17.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1853 17.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1853 17.2.10 M40 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1854 17.3 M40V..........................................................................................................................................................1855 17.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1855 17.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1856 17.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1856 17.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1857 17.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1859 17.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1864 17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.....................................................................................................1865 17.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1866 17.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1866 17.3.10 M40V Specifications.......................................................................................................................1867 17.4 D40.............................................................................................................................................................1868 17.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1868 17.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1870 17.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1870 17.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1870 17.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1872 17.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1877 17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40........................................................................................................1878 17.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1879 17.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1879 17.4.10 D40 Specifications...........................................................................................................................1880 17.5 D40V..........................................................................................................................................................1881 17.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1881 17.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1882 17.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1882 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xl


Contents

17.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1883 17.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1885 17.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1889 17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.....................................................................................................1889 17.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1890 17.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1890 17.5.10 D40V Specifications........................................................................................................................1891 17.6 DFIU...........................................................................................................................................................1892 17.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1893 17.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1893 17.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1893 17.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1894 17.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1895 17.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1897 17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU......................................................................................................1897 17.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1897 17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1898 17.6.10 DFIU Specifications........................................................................................................................1899 17.7 FIU..............................................................................................................................................................1900 17.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1900 17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1902 17.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1903 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1904 17.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1906 17.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1911 17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.........................................................................................................1913 17.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1913 17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1914 17.7.10 FIU Specifications...........................................................................................................................1915 17.8 ITL..............................................................................................................................................................1916 17.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1916 17.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1918 17.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1919 17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1919 17.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1921 17.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1924 17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL.........................................................................................................1925 17.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1925 17.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1926 17.8.10 ITL Specifications...........................................................................................................................1927 17.9 SFIU............................................................................................................................................................1929 17.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1929 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xli


Contents

17.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1929 17.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1930 17.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1930 17.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1932 17.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1934 17.9.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU......................................................................................................1935 17.9.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1935 17.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1936 17.9.10 SFIU Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1937

18 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board..........................................................1939 18.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1940 18.2 CMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1941 18.2.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 1941 18.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1942 18.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1942 18.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1943 18.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1944 18.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1945 18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1....................................................................................................1945 18.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1946 18.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1946 18.2.10 CMR1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1947 18.3 CMR2.........................................................................................................................................................1948 18.3.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 1948 18.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1949 18.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1949 18.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1950 18.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1951 18.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1954 18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2....................................................................................................1955 18.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1955 18.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1956 18.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1956 18.4 CMR4.........................................................................................................................................................1958 18.4.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 1958 18.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1959 18.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1959 18.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1959 18.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1961 18.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1964 18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4....................................................................................................1965 18.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1965 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlii


Contents

18.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1966 18.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1967 18.5 DMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1968 18.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1968 18.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1969 18.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1970 18.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1970 18.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1972 18.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1975 18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1....................................................................................................1976 18.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1976 18.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1976 18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications......................................................................................................................1977 18.6 MR2............................................................................................................................................................1978 18.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1978 18.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1979 18.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1980 18.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1980 18.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1982 18.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1985 18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.......................................................................................................1986 18.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1986 18.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1986 18.6.10 MR2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................1987 18.7 MR4............................................................................................................................................................1989 18.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1989 18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1989 18.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1990 18.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1990 18.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1992 18.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1995 18.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4.......................................................................................................1996 18.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1996 18.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1997 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................1997 18.8 MR8............................................................................................................................................................2002 18.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2002 18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2002 18.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2003 18.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2003 18.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2005 18.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2007 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xliii


Contents

18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.......................................................................................................2008 18.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2008 18.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2009 18.8.10 MR8 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2010 18.9 MR8V.........................................................................................................................................................2012 18.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2012 18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2013 18.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2013 18.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2014 18.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2015 18.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2017 18.9.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V....................................................................................................2018 18.9.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2019 18.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2019 18.9.10 MR8V Specifications......................................................................................................................2020 18.10 SBM2........................................................................................................................................................2023 18.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2023 18.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2024 18.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2024 18.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2025 18.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2026 18.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2028 18.10.7 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2028 18.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2029 18.10.9 SBM2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2030

19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board........................................2031 19.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2033 19.2 RDU9..........................................................................................................................................................2035 19.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2035 19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2036 19.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2037 19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2037 19.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2039 19.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2042 19.2.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2042 19.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2042 19.2.9 RDU9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2043 19.3 RMU9.........................................................................................................................................................2044 19.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2044 19.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2045 19.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2046 19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2046 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xliv


Contents

19.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2048 19.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2050 19.3.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2051 19.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2051 19.3.9 RMU9 Specifications........................................................................................................................2053 19.4 ROAM........................................................................................................................................................2054 19.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2054 19.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2055 19.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2055 19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2056 19.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2057 19.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2061 19.4.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2061 19.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2062 19.4.9 ROAM Specifications........................................................................................................................2063 19.5 TD20...........................................................................................................................................................2064 19.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2064 19.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2064 19.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2065 19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2066 19.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2068 19.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2070 19.5.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2071 19.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2071 19.5.9 TD20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2073 19.6 TM20..........................................................................................................................................................2074 19.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2074 19.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2075 19.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2075 19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2076 19.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2078 19.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2080 19.6.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2081 19.6.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2081 19.6.9 TM20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2082 19.7 WSD9.........................................................................................................................................................2083 19.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2083 19.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2084 19.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2085 19.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2086 19.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2088 19.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2090 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlv


Contents

19.7.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2092 19.7.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2092 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2094 19.8 WSM9.........................................................................................................................................................2095 19.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2095 19.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2096 19.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2097 19.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2098 19.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2100 19.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2102 19.8.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2104 19.8.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2104 19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications........................................................................................................................2106 19.9 WSMD2......................................................................................................................................................2107 19.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2107 19.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2108 19.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2109 19.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2109 19.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2111 19.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2114 19.9.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2114 19.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2115 19.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications.....................................................................................................................2116 19.10 WSMD4....................................................................................................................................................2117 19.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2117 19.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2119 19.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2119 19.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2120 19.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2122 19.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2124 19.10.7 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2125 19.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2126 19.10.9 WSMD4 Specifications...................................................................................................................2128 19.11 WSMD9....................................................................................................................................................2129 19.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2129 19.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2130 19.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2131 19.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2131 19.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2133 19.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2136 19.11.7 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2136 19.11.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2137 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlvi


Contents

19.11.9 WSMD9 Specifications...................................................................................................................2138

20 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................2140 20.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2141 20.2 CRPC..........................................................................................................................................................2143 20.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2143 20.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2144 20.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2145 20.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2145 20.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2148 20.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2151 20.2.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................2151 20.2.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC.....................................................................................................2153 20.2.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2153 20.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2154 20.2.11 CRPC Specifications.......................................................................................................................2155 20.3 DAS1..........................................................................................................................................................2157 20.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2157 20.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2157 20.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2158 20.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2160 20.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2163 20.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2166 20.3.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2166 20.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2167 20.3.9 DAS1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2171 20.4 HBA............................................................................................................................................................2173 20.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2173 20.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2174 20.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2174 20.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2175 20.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2177 20.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2179 20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................................2180 20.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2180 20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2181 20.4.10 HBA Specifications.........................................................................................................................2183 20.5 OAU1..........................................................................................................................................................2184 20.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2185 20.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2186 20.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2187 20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2188 20.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2191 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlvii


Contents

20.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2196 20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1....................................................................................................2197 20.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2198 20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2199 20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2202 20.6 OBU1..........................................................................................................................................................2211 20.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2211 20.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2212 20.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2213 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2214 20.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2216 20.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2219 20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................................2220 20.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2221 20.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2221 20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2225 20.7 OBU2..........................................................................................................................................................2227 20.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2227 20.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2229 20.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2229 20.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2230 20.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2232 20.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2235 20.7.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................................2236 20.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2237 20.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2238 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2241 20.8 RAU1..........................................................................................................................................................2243 20.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2243 20.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2243 20.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2244 20.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2246 20.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2248 20.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2250 20.8.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2251 20.8.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2252 20.8.9 RAU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2256 20.9 RAU2..........................................................................................................................................................2260 20.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2261 20.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2261 20.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2262 20.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2264 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlviii


Contents

20.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2266 20.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2269 20.9.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2269 20.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2270 20.9.9 RAU2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2275

21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board....................................2280 21.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2282 21.2 USXH.........................................................................................................................................................2283 21.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2283 21.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2284 21.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2284 21.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2285 21.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2286 21.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2288 21.2.7 USXH Specifications.........................................................................................................................2288 21.3 UXCT.........................................................................................................................................................2289 21.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2289 21.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2289 21.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2290 21.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2290 21.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2291 21.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2293 21.3.7 UXCT Specifications.........................................................................................................................2293 21.4 SXM............................................................................................................................................................2294 21.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2294 21.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2295 21.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2296 21.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2296 21.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2297 21.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2299 21.4.7 SXM Specifications...........................................................................................................................2299 21.5 SXH............................................................................................................................................................2300 21.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2300 21.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2301 21.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2302 21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2303 21.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2304 21.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2305 21.5.7 SXH Specifications............................................................................................................................2305 21.6 XCT............................................................................................................................................................2306 21.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2306 21.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2307 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


xlix


Contents

21.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2308 21.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2308 21.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2309 21.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2311 21.6.7 XCT Specifications............................................................................................................................2311 21.7 TN52UXCM...............................................................................................................................................2312 21.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2312 21.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2313 21.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2314 21.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2314 21.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2316 21.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2318 21.7.7 TN52UXCM Specifications..............................................................................................................2318 21.8 XCM...........................................................................................................................................................2319 21.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2319 21.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2319 21.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2320 21.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2320 21.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2322 21.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2324 21.8.7 XCM Board Specifications................................................................................................................2324 21.9 UXCH.........................................................................................................................................................2325 21.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2325 21.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2325 21.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2326 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2327 21.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2329 21.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2331 21.9.7 UXCH Specifications........................................................................................................................2331 21.10 TN52XCH................................................................................................................................................2332 21.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2332 21.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2332 21.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2333 21.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2333 21.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2334 21.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2336 21.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications................................................................................................................2336 21.11 TN16XCH................................................................................................................................................2337 21.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2337 21.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2337 21.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2338 21.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2340 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


l


Contents

21.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2341 21.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2343 21.11.7 Switch and Jumper...........................................................................................................................2343 21.11.8 TN16XCH Specifications................................................................................................................2344 21.12 TN16UXCM.............................................................................................................................................2345 21.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2345 21.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2345 21.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2346 21.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2348 21.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2349 21.12.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2351 21.12.7 Switch and Jumper...........................................................................................................................2351 21.12.8 TN16UXCM Specifications............................................................................................................2353 21.13 XCS..........................................................................................................................................................2354 21.13.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2354 21.13.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2355 21.13.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2355 21.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2356 21.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2357 21.13.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2359 21.13.7 XCS Specifications..........................................................................................................................2359 21.14 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................2359 21.14.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2359 21.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2361 21.14.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2362 21.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2364 21.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2366 21.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2372 21.14.7 Switch and Jumper...........................................................................................................................2373 21.14.8 SCC Specifications..........................................................................................................................2378 21.15 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................2379 21.15.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2379 21.15.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2382 21.15.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2382 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2384 21.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2386 21.15.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2392 21.15.7 Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2394 21.15.8 AUX Specifications.........................................................................................................................2399

22 Optical Supervisory Channel Board..................................................................................2401 22.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2402 22.2 HSC1..........................................................................................................................................................2403 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


li


Contents

22.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2403 22.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2403 22.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2404 22.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2404 22.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2407 22.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2409 22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1.....................................................................................................2409 22.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2410 22.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2410 22.2.10 HSC1 Specifications........................................................................................................................2411 22.3 SC1.............................................................................................................................................................2412 22.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2412 22.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2413 22.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2413 22.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2414 22.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2417 22.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2419 22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1........................................................................................................2420 22.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2420 22.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2420 22.3.10 SC1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2421 22.4 SC2.............................................................................................................................................................2422 22.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2422 22.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2423 22.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2424 22.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2425 22.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2427 22.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2429 22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2........................................................................................................2430 22.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2430 22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2431 22.4.10 SC2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2432 22.5 ST2..............................................................................................................................................................2432 22.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2432 22.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2433 22.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2434 22.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2435 22.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2437 22.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2439 22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2........................................................................................................2440 22.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2440 22.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2441 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lii


Contents

22.5.10 ST2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2442

23 Optical Protection Board......................................................................................................2444 23.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2445 23.2 DCP............................................................................................................................................................2446 23.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2446 23.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2447 23.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2448 23.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2449 23.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2451 23.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2454 23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP.......................................................................................................2455 23.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2456 23.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2456 23.2.10 DCP Specifications..........................................................................................................................2457 23.3 OLP.............................................................................................................................................................2459 23.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2459 23.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2460 23.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2462 23.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2463 23.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2464 23.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2467 23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP.......................................................................................................2467 23.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2468 23.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2468 23.3.10 OLP Specifications..........................................................................................................................2469 23.4 SCS.............................................................................................................................................................2471 23.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2471 23.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2472 23.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2472 23.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2473 23.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2474 23.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2476 23.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS........................................................................................................2476 23.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2477 23.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2477 23.4.10 SCS Specifications..........................................................................................................................2478

24 Spectrum Analyzer Board....................................................................................................2480 24.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2481 24.2 MCA4.........................................................................................................................................................2482 24.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2482 24.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2483 24.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2484 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


liii


Contents

24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2485 24.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2486 24.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2488 24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................................2488 24.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2489 24.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2489 24.2.10 MCA4 Specifications......................................................................................................................2490 24.3 MCA8.........................................................................................................................................................2491 24.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2491 24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2492 24.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2493 24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2494 24.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2496 24.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2497 24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................................2498 24.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2498 24.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2498 24.3.10 MCA8 Specifications......................................................................................................................2500 24.4 OPM8..........................................................................................................................................................2501 24.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2501 24.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2501 24.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2502 24.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2502 24.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2505 24.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2507 24.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8....................................................................................................2507 24.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2508 24.4.9 OPM8 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2509 24.5 WMU..........................................................................................................................................................2510 24.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2510 24.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2510 24.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2511 24.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2511 24.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2513 24.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2514 24.5.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2514 24.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2515 24.5.9 WMU Specifications.........................................................................................................................2515

25 Variable Optical Attenuator Board....................................................................................2517 25.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2518 25.2 VA1............................................................................................................................................................2519 25.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2519 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


liv


Contents

25.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2520 25.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2520 25.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2521 25.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2522 25.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2524 25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1.......................................................................................................2525 25.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2525 25.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2525 25.2.10 VA1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2527 25.3 VA4............................................................................................................................................................2528 25.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2528 25.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2528 25.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2529 25.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2529 25.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2531 25.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2533 25.3.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4.......................................................................................................2534 25.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2534 25.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2535 25.3.10 VA4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2536

26 Dispersion Equalizing Board..............................................................................................2538 26.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2539 26.2 DCU............................................................................................................................................................2540 26.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2540 26.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2540 26.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2541 26.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2542 26.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2543 26.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2544 26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................2544 26.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2545 26.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2545 26.2.10 DCU Specifications.........................................................................................................................2546 26.3 TDC............................................................................................................................................................2547 26.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2548 26.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2548 26.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2549 26.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2549 26.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2551 26.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2552 26.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC.......................................................................................................2553 26.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2553 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lv


Contents

26.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2553 26.3.10 TDC Specifications..........................................................................................................................2554

27 Clock Board.............................................................................................................................2556 27.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................2557 27.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2557 27.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2557 27.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2559 27.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2560 27.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2561 27.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2564 27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG.......................................................................................................2564 27.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2565 27.1.9 STG Specifications............................................................................................................................2565

28 OCS System Unit................................................................................................................... 2566 28.1 BPA............................................................................................................................................................2567 28.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2567 28.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2567 28.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2567 28.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2568 28.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2569 28.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2571 28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA.......................................................................................................2571 28.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2572 28.1.9 BPA Specifications............................................................................................................................2572 28.2 EAS2...........................................................................................................................................................2573 28.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2574 28.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2574 28.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2575 28.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2580 28.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2581 28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2583 28.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2583 28.2.8 Feature Code......................................................................................................................................2583 28.2.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2583 28.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2584 28.2.11 EAS2 Specifications........................................................................................................................2593 28.3 EGSH..........................................................................................................................................................2596 28.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2596 28.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2597 28.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2598 28.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2602 28.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2604 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lvi


Contents

28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers.......................................................................................................2606 28.3.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2606 28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.....................................................................................................2607 28.3.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2607 28.3.10 Board Protection..............................................................................................................................2608 28.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2610 28.3.12 EGSH Specifications.......................................................................................................................2620 28.4 SF64............................................................................................................................................................2621 28.4.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 2621 28.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2621 28.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2622 28.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2624 28.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2626 28.4.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2628 28.4.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2628 28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.......................................................................................................2628 28.4.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2629 28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2629 28.4.11 SF64 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2630 28.5 SF64A......................................................................................................................................................... 2633 28.5.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 2633 28.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2634 28.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2634 28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2637 28.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2639 28.5.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2640 28.5.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2640 28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A....................................................................................................2641 28.5.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2641 28.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2641 28.5.11 SF64A Specifications......................................................................................................................2642 28.6 SFD64......................................................................................................................................................... 2644 28.6.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 2644 28.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2645 28.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2645 28.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2647 28.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2649 28.6.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2651 28.6.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2651 28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64....................................................................................................2651 28.6.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2652 28.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2652 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lvii


Contents

28.6.11 SFD64 Specifications......................................................................................................................2653 28.7 SL64............................................................................................................................................................2656 28.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2656 28.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2657 28.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2657 28.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2659 28.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2661 28.7.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2663 28.7.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2663 28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64......................................................................................................2663 28.7.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2664 28.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2664 28.7.11 SL64 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2665 28.8 SLD64.........................................................................................................................................................2667 28.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2667 28.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2668 28.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2668 28.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2670 28.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2672 28.8.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2674 28.8.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2674 28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64...................................................................................................2674 28.8.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2675 28.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2675 28.8.11 SLD64 Specifications......................................................................................................................2676 28.9 SLH41.........................................................................................................................................................2677 28.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2677 28.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2678 28.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2678 28.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2681 28.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2683 28.9.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2685 28.9.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2685 28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41...................................................................................................2686 28.9.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2686 28.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2687 28.9.11 SLH41 Specifications......................................................................................................................2688 28.10 SLO16.......................................................................................................................................................2690 28.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2690 28.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2690 28.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2691 28.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2693 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lviii


Contents

28.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2695 28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2697 28.10.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2697 28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.................................................................................................2697 28.10.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2698 28.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2698 28.10.11 SLO16 Specifications....................................................................................................................2699 28.11 SLQ16.......................................................................................................................................................2700 28.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2700 28.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2701 28.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2701 28.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2704 28.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2706 28.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2707 28.11.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2707 28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16.................................................................................................2707 28.11.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2708 28.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2708 28.11.11 SLQ16 Specifications....................................................................................................................2709 28.12 SLQ64.......................................................................................................................................................2710 28.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2710 28.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2711 28.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2711 28.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2713 28.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2715 28.12.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2717 28.12.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2717 28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64.................................................................................................2717 28.12.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2717 28.12.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2718 28.12.11 SLQ64 Specifications....................................................................................................................2719

29 Cables.......................................................................................................................................2721 29.1 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................2722 29.1.1 Cabinet PGND Power Cables............................................................................................................2722 29.1.2 Subrack PGND Cables......................................................................................................................2723 29.1.3 PDU PGND Cables...........................................................................................................................2724 29.1.4 Cabinet Door Ground Cables............................................................................................................2724 29.2 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................2725 29.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND Power Cables.................................................................................................2725 29.2.2 Subrack Power Cables.......................................................................................................................2729 29.3 Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................2731 29.3.1 Classification.....................................................................................................................................2731 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lix


Contents

29.3.2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................2732 29.4 Alarm Cables..............................................................................................................................................2736 29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable.....................................................................................................................2736 29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable...........................................................................................................2737 29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable..............................................................................................................2739 29.5 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................2740 29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................................2740 29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................2742 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable......................................................................................................2746 29.6 Clock/Time Cable.......................................................................................................................................2748 29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections...........................................................................................2748 29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable.............................................................................................2749 29.6.1.2 Special Cables...........................................................................................................................2749 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.......................................................................................................2752 29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections........................................................................................................2754 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables ......................................................................................................2754 29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.......................................................................................2756 29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables.......................................................................................................2756 29.6.3.2 Time Signal Testing Cables......................................................................................................2757

30 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................2760 30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ...........................................................................................................................2761 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator....................................................................................................2761

31 Pluggable Optical Modules.................................................................................................2762 32 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................2764 32.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................2765 32.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................2765 32.3 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................2766 32.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................2767

A Indicators..................................................................................................................................2768 A.1 Cabinet Indicators........................................................................................................................................2769 A.2 Subrack Indicator.........................................................................................................................................2769 A.3 Chassis Indicators........................................................................................................................................2770 A.4 Board Indicators...........................................................................................................................................2770 A.5 Fan Indicator................................................................................................................................................2774 A.6 PIU Indicator...............................................................................................................................................2775

B Bar Code for Boards................................................................................................................2776 B.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................2778 B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.....................................................................................................................2781 B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs..............................................................................................2782 B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs............................................................2783 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lx


Contents

B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs...............................................................................................2784 B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit..............................................................................................................2785 B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM.............................................................................................................2785 B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.....................................................................................................2785 B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.....................................................................................................2786 B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.....................................................................................................2786 B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.....................................................................................................2787 B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................................2787 B.4.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4..........................................................................................................2788 B.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................................2789 B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.....................................................................................................2789 B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA...................................................................................................................2790 B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................2790 B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................2791 B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................2791 B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................2791 B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................2792 B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................2792 B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................2793 B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC........................................................................................................2793 B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................2794 B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................2794 B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................2794 B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................2795 B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................2795 B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................2796 B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................2796 B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................2797 B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................2797 B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................2798 B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................2798 B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................2798 B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................2799 B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................2799 B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................2799 B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................2800 B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................2800 B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................2800 B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................2801

C Quick Reference Table of the Units....................................................................................2802 C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards...................................2804 C.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the Client Side......................2804 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lxi


Contents

C.1.2 OTUs, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the WDM Side.............................2843 C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit....................................................................................................2862 C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards......................................................................................................2864 C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................2868 C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards.............................. 2869 C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards........................2876 C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................2880 C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................2883 C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of OCS Boards.......................................................2888 C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions................................................................................................ 2891 C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards......................................................................................................2893

D Parameter Reference..............................................................................................................2895 D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ..........................................................................................................2897 D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................2898 D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold.................................................................................................... 2900 D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................... 2902 D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2903 D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................2903 D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2904 D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2905 D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface).....................................................................................................................2906 D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2906 D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)............................................................................................2907 D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2908 D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................2908 D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................2909 D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2910 D.16 Line Rate....................................................................................................................................................2911 D.17 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................2913 D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)................................................................ 2914 D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).................................................................2915 D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2916 D.21 Maximum Frame Length ..........................................................................................................................2916 D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2917 D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode.............................................................................................2919 D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)......................................................................2920 D.25 PHY Loopback .........................................................................................................................................2921 D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2922 D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...............................2923 D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2924 D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2926 D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2927 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lxii


Contents

D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2928 D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2929 D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface).............................................................................2930 D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................2931

E Glossary....................................................................................................................................2933

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


lxiii


1 Cabinet

1

Cabinet

About This Chapter 1.1 Cabinet Introduction Huawei provides two types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B and N63B. 1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet. 1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet To ensure efficient heat dissipation, an appropriate quantity of subracks must be configured in correct positions inside an N66B/N63B cabinet. 1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations Typical configuration of the cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1


1 Cabinet

1.1 Cabinet Introduction Huawei provides two types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B and N63B. Parameter

N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet)


Front and rear doors: They can be disassembled. A key is provided for unlocking each of the doors.

Front door: The door can be disassembled. A key is provided for unlocking the door.

Side panels: They are secured with screws and can be disassembled.

Rear door and side panels: They are secured with screws. Only the side panels can be disassembled.

Appearancea

Height extension frame (optional)a Doors/ Panels

The door keys for all N66B cabinets and N64B cabinets are the same.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 120 kg (264.6 lb.)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 60 kg (132.3 lb.)

Height

Door keys

De pth

dth Wi

Weight

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 130 kg (286.6 lb.) Standard working voltage

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 66 kg (145.5 lb.)

-48 V DC or -60 V DC


2


1 Cabinet

Parameter



Working voltage range

-48 V DC power source: -40 V to -57.6 V -60 V DC power source: -48 V to -72 V

a: A 400 mm height extension frame can be placed at the top of the cabinet, which increases the height of the cabinet to 2600 mm.

1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet. The N63B cabinet is used as an example to describe the requirements for installing a cabinet in equipment room. The requirements for installing an N66B cabinet are the same as those for installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode. (Two back-to-back N63B cabinets can be regarded as one N66B cabinet.) Cabinets are usually installed in a row inside equipment room. They are arranged in a face-toface or a back-to-back mode. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 illustrate the positions of cabinets. To facilitate heat dissipation and maintenance of the cabinet, reserve sufficient space around the cabinet according to the following requirements: l

The space in front of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 1000 mm (39.4 in.).

l

The space beside both sides of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 800 mm (31.5 in.).

l

The space behind the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 50 mm. (Ignore this requirement when installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode.)

Figure 1-1 Top view of cabinets in face-to-face mode Unit: mm Fiber management frame

Cabinet

50 300

800

150

150

600

Wall or any other equivalent

Front

1000

600

800 300

50

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


3


1 Cabinet

Figure 1-2 Top view of cabinets in back-to-back mode Unit: mm

Front Fiber management frame

1000

Cabinet 300 300

800

150

600

150

Front

1000

600 300 300

800 Front

1000

Wall or any other equivalent

NOTE

l If it is designed to ventilate the equipment from bottom to top, there must be vents on the ESD floor in front of the cabinet so that the fan tray assemblies can draw air from the air conditioner into the equipment. l A fiber management cabinet is installed on each side of the cabinet if excessive fibers are connected to the cabinet. If no fiber management cabinet is installed, adhere to the preceding space requirements when installing a cabinet. For details about the fiber management cabinet, see 2 Fiber Management Cabinet.

1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/ N63B Cabinet To ensure efficient heat dissipation, an appropriate quantity of subracks must be configured in correct positions inside an N66B/N63B cabinet.

Requirements on the Subrack Quantity l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

N66B cabinet: Only one OptiX 8800 T64 electrical subrack can be deployed inside the cabinet. The other subracks, if required, must be optical subracks. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4


l

1 Cabinet

N63B cabinet: – When OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T16 needs to be installed inside the cabinet, only one OptiX OSN 8800 T32 electrical subrack or two OptiX OSN 8800 T16 electrical subracks can be configured. The other subracks, if required, must be optical subracks. – When no OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T16 electrical subracks need to be installed inside the cabinet, the preceding restriction does not apply. NOTE

l An electrical subrack is used to hold only cross-connect boards, OTU boards, tributary boards, line boards, or protection boards. l An optical subrack is used to hold OADM, multiplexer/demultiplexer, optical amplifier, OSC, optical spectrum analyzer, OLP (for optical line protection only), regeneration board, or OTU boards. l When an optical subrack is configured with regeneration or OTU boards and the average board power consumption of the subrack exceeds 40 W (the maximum power consumed at 55°C (77°F)), the optical subrack is considered as an electrical subrack in calculating the number of subracks.

Requirements on the Subrack Installation Position l

Configuration principles for initial network construction: – When electrical and optical subracks are to be configured inside a cabinet, install the electrical subracks first from top to bottom, and install the optical subracks below the bottom-most electrical subrack from top to bottom. – When only optical subracks are to be configured inside a cabinet, install the optical subracks from bottom to top.

l

Configuration principles for network expansion: – Install subracks from top to bottom or bottom to top in adjacent positions. No vacant subrack position should be observed between any two subracks. – Optical subracks cannot be installed above two adjacent electrical subracks. – When multiple subracks need to be added, it is recommended that electrical subracks be installed above optical subracks.

An N66B cabinet has the front and rear sides. Each side consists of four areas. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks are installed in areas 1 and 2 on the front and rear sides. Each of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, and OptiX OSN 6800 subrack occupies one area, and the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack occupies two areas. An N66B is usually preequipped with an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 electrical subrack. In other areas of the cabinet, only optical subracks can be installed, from top to bottom and front to rear. Figure 1-3 shows the subrack configurations inside an N66B cabinet. Figure 1-3 Subrack installation positions inside an N66B cabinet Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4

Optical subrack

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Electrical subrack


Idle area

5


1 Cabinet

An N63B cabinet is divided into four areas from top to bottom. Each of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, and OptiX OSN 6800 subrack occupies one area, and the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack occupies two areas (areas 1 and 2, or areas 3 and 4). Figure 1-4 shows the subrack configurations inside an N63B cabinet. Figure 1-4 Subrack installation positions inside an N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4

Optical subrack

Electrical subrack

Idle area

1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations Typical configuration of the cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. Table 1-1 lists the typical configurations of the N66B cabinet. Table 1-2 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet. NOTE

Electrical and optical subracks are installed in different positions inside a cabinet. For their installation positions, see 1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet. NOTE

In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


6


1 Cabinet

Table 1-1 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet Typ ical Con figu rati on

8800

1

Number of T64 Subracks

Number of 6800 Subracks

Num ber of DCM Frame s

PDU Mode

PDF Circuit Breaker

Maxim um Power Consu mption of Integra ted Equip mentb

Number of T32 Subracksa

Num ber of T16 Subra cks

Num ber of Platfo rm Subra cks

1

2

0

0

0

2

TN51 or DPD638-8

Sixteen 63 A circuit breakers

10800 W

2

1

0

0

0

4

4

3

1

0

0

4

0

4

TN51 or DPD638-8

Eight 63 A and eight 32 A circuit breakers

10800 W

4

1

0

4

0

0

2

TN16 or DPD638-8

Sixteen 63 A circuit breakers

10000 W

a

a: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum power consumption.

Table 1-2 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet Typ ical Con figu rati on

8800 Subracks Number of T32 Subracksa

Numb er of T16 Subrac ks

Numbe r of Platfor m Subrac ks

1

2

0

2

1

0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Num ber of DC M Fram es

Nu mbe r of CRP C Fra mes

PDU Model

PDF Circuit Breaker

0

0

0

0

TN51 or DPD63-8 -8

Eight 63 A 5400 W circuit breakers

2

0

2

0

TN51 or DPD63-8 -8

Four 63 A and four


Maximu m Power Consum ption of Integrate d Equipme ntb

5400 W

7


1 Cabinet

Typ ical Con figu rati on

8800 Subracks


Num ber of DC M Fram es

Nu mbe r of CRP C Fra mes

Number of T32 Subracksa

Numb er of T16 Subrac ks

Numbe r of Platfor m Subrac ks

3

1

0

4

1

5

PDU Model

PDF Circuit Breaker

Maximu m Power Consum ption of Integrate d Equipme ntb

0

2

2

0

2

0

0

1

0

TN16 or DPD63-8 -8


0

4

0

0

1

0

TN16 or DPD63-8 -8


6

0

3

0

1

2

0

0

3

1

0

2

0

Six 63 A and two 32 A circuit breakers

5000 W

7

TN16 or DPD63-8 -8

8

0

2

0

2

2

0

0

2

2

0

2

0

Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breakers

5000 W

9

TN16 or DPD63-8 -8

10

0

1

0

3

2

0

0

1

3

0

2

0

Two 63 A and six 32 A circuit breakers

5000 W

11

TN16 or DPD63-8 -8

12

0

0

0

4

1

0

0

0

4

0

1

0

Four 63 A circuit breakers

4800 W

13

TN11 or DPD63-8 -8

14

0

0

0

3

3

2

0

0

3

0

3

2

Four 63 A circuit breakers

4800 W

15

TN11 or DPD63-8 -8

32 A circuit breakers

a: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


8


2 Fiber Management Cabinet

2

Fiber Management Cabinet

Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management cabinet can enhance the fiber capacity of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.

Appearance There are two types of fiber management cabinets: left-side fiber management cabinet and rightside fiber management cabinet. Fiber management cabinets are used together with N63B and N66B cabinets, as shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


9



Figure 2-1 Fiber management cabinets used with the N63B cabinet

3 1 2

1. Left-side fiber management cabinet

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2. Right-side fiber management cabinet


3. Fiber spool unit

10



Figure 2-2 Fiber management cabinets used with the N66B cabinet

2 1

3

4

1,3. Left-side fiber management cabinet

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2,4. Right-side fiber management cabinet


11



Functions and features Table 2-1 lists the functions and features of a fiber management cabinet. Table 2-1 Functions and features Item

Description

Structure feature

l Fiber spool units in a fiber management cabinet can be adjusted based on device position in the cabinet. l A fiber management cabinet can protect fibers and meet the requirement for a minimum of 30 mm bending radius. l A fiber management cabinet makes fiber spooling more flexible.

Fiber capacity

Internal fiber capacity a

Without a fiber management cabinet b: 320 PCS With a fiber management cabinet c: 640 PCS

External fiber capacity a

Without a fiber management cabinet b: 720 PCS With a fiber management cabinet c: 1408 PCS

a: A fiber with a diameter of 2 mm is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers that can be configured at most. An internal fiber is a fiber used inside a subrack or between subracks, and an external fiber is a fiber connecting one equipment cabinet to other equipment. b: Fibers in Overhead Cabling Mode can be configured at most. c: An N63B cabinet configured with left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers can be configured at most. Two routing fiber cabinets can be installed on the left and right sides of one N66B cabinet. In this configuration, a maximum of 1280 internal and 2816 external fibers can configured.

Configuration Principle Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets are installed to the left and right of a cabinet respectively. Fiber management cabinets can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You can determine whether to configure a fiber management cabinet based on the required fiber capacity. Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters are used as an example): l

When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead cabling if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required.

l

When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead cabling if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.

In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management cabinets: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


12



l

For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber management cabinets can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers.

l

For underfloor cabling, fiber management cabinets must be used to manage external fibers because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are arranged in the cabinet. NOTE

l Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets must be configured at the same time. l During cabinet expansion, spool internal cascading fibers and external fibers in the fiber management cabinets.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of a fiber management cabinet are as follows: l

Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H) (5.9 in. (W) x 11.8 in. (D) x 86.6 in. (H))

l

Weight: 23 kg (50.7 lb)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


13


3 DC PDU

3

DC PDU

About This Chapter There are four types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51, TN11 and PDU (DPD63-8-8). The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. l

The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions, but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration.

l

The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

l

The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks.

l

The PDU (DPD63-8-8) is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks , a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 6800 subracks, or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. 3.2 TN11PDU The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. 3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8) The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


14


3 DC PDU

3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. NOTE

The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU. TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.

The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l

When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.

l

When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies. For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper Bar.

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU. Figure 3-1 Front panel of the TN16PDU Power supply input area

Power supply Power supply output area switch area

+ 1

1

+ 2

+ 3

Power supply Power supply switch area output area

+

+

1

4

A

1. Output cable terminal block

2

3 2. Input cable terminal block

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

B 3. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each other.

Figure 3-2 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


15


3 DC PDU

Figure 3-2 TN16PDU internal pin assignments

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A -

-

-

-

1

2

3

4

1 + ON

ON ON

ON

2 +

3 +

4 +

1 +

INPUT A

2 +

3 +

4 + ON

INPUT B

ON ON

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

-

-

-

1

2

3

4

ON

OUTPUT A +

-

OUTPUT B OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

1 -

2

3

4

1

-

-

-

-

INPUT A

2

3

4

-

-

-

+

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

INPUT B

Short-Circuit Copper Bar If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 3-3 shows the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar. Figure 3-3 Appearance

Copper Plate

3.2 TN11PDU The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.

DC PDU The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


16


3 DC PDU

l

If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.

l

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current into four 32 A currents. For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.

Figure 3-4 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU. Figure 3-4 Front panel of the TN11PDU 1

2

3

3

2

4

1. Output cable terminal block

1

4

2. Ground screw

3. Input cable terminal block

4. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 5.2 in. (H))

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.

Figure 3-5 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


17


3 DC PDU

Figure 3-5 TN11PDU internal pin assignments OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

+

-

+- +

-

OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

ON

-

-

+

-

-

-

-

+- +

ON

OFF

+

+ INPUT

-

-

+

+

-

-

OFF

INPUT

Junction Box If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 3-6 shows the junction box structure and Figure 3-7 shows the installation position of the junction box. Figure 3-6 Structure

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


18


3 DC PDU

Figure 3-7 Installation position

3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8) The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet. NOTE

The TN11PDU/TN16PDU/TN51PDU can be substituted by the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

DC PDU The DPD63-8-8 PDU consists of two sections: A and B, which provide backup for each other. Both A and B accept four -48V/-60V power inputs and produce four power outputs for subracks in the cabinet. According to the currents provided by the power source inside the equipment room, the DPD63-8-8 PDU can have different configurations. Table 3-1 lists the typical configurations of the PDU. Table 3-1 Typical configurations of the DPD63-8-8 PDU N o.

Input Current

Output Current

Circuit Breaker Requirement

Copper Fitting Configuration

1

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

None

2

4 x 125A

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

Two-in-one copper fittings in the left, right, and middle of the PDU

3

4 x 63A

8 x 32A

8 x 32A


4

2 x 125A

8 x 32A

8 x 32A

l Four-in-one copper fittings in the left, right, and middle of the PDU l Two-in-one copper fittings in the middle of the PDU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


19


3 DC PDU

N o.

Input Current

Output Current

Circuit Breaker Requirement

Copper Fitting Configuration

5

2 x 125A + 2 x 63A

4 x 63A + 4 x 32A

4 x 63A + 4 x 32A


When working at the ambient temperature of 65°C (149°F) of the air exhaust vent, the PDU output current decreases from 63 A to 53.7 A or from 32 A to 29.1 A.

For more information about copper fitting configuration, see Copper Fittings. Figure 3-8 shows the front panel of the PDU (DPD63-8-8). Figure 3-8 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU CAUTION This device has more than one power input. Disconnect all the power inputs to power off this device. !

此设备有多路电源输入。设备断电时必须断开所有电源输入。

CAUTION Disconnect power before servicing. Also all metal jewelry, such as watchs, rings, etc, should be removed from hands and wrists. !

维护前先断电。同时将金属饰物手表、戒指等取下。

PER INPUT

A1 A2 A3 A4 NEG(-)

-48V—-60V; 63A MAX

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 RTN(+) RTN(+) OUTPUT

B1 B2 B3 B4 NEG(-)

Figure 3-9 shows the terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


20


3 DC PDU

Figure 3-9 Terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU 1

2

4

5

3

1. NEG(-) power input interface

2. RTN(+) power input interface

4. NEG(-) power output interface

5. Power switch

3. RTN(+) power output interface

l

Panel dimensions (H x W x D): 110 mm (4.3 in.) x 442 mm (17.4 in.) x 89.2 mm (3.5 in.)

l

Power output interfaces: Four power output interfaces are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. These interfaces connect to subrack power cables and distribute power to the subracks inside a cabinet.

l

Power input interfaces: Four power input interfaces are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. The four interfaces in each section accept four -48 or -60 V DC power inputs, providing a total of eight -48 or -60 V DC power inputs in both sections.

l

Power switches: Four power switches are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. They are in a one-to-one mapping relationship with power output interfaces and control the power inputs to the subracks inside the cabinet.

Figure 3-10 shows the internal pin assignments of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 3-10 DPD63-8-8 PDU internal pin assignments

INPUT A

INPUT B INPUT A

-

-

-

ON

ON ON

-

INPUT B

+

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

+ 1

+

+

+

2

3

4

ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

-

-

-

OUTPUT A

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

-

-

ON

ON ON

ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

-

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B


-

-

-

OUTPUT B

21


3 DC PDU

Copper Fittings When sections A and B each require two power inputs (four power inputs in total), two-in-one copper fittings must be installed in both sections. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of two-inone copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 3-11 Appearance of the two-in-one copper fittings (four power inputs and eight power outputs) 3

1

2

2 1

3

Two-in-one copper fittings

Two-in-one copper fittings (left)

Two-in-one copper fittings (right)

When sections A and B require one power input each (two power inputs in total), four-in-one copper fittings must be installed on the left and right terminals and two-in-one copper fittings must be installed on the middle terminals of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 3-12 shows the appearance of four-in-one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


22


3 DC PDU

Figure 3-12 Appearance of the four-in-one copper fittings (two power inputs and eight power outputs) 3

1

3

2

1

2

Four-in-one copper fittings

Two-in-one copper fittings

3

Four-in-one copper fittings

NOTE

Eight holes are located on the terminal block in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Four two-in-one copper fittings designated for the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU are installed to cover the first to eighth holes, as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12. In total, four two-in-one copper fittings are required to combine the RTN(+) power inputs in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. As shown in Figure 3-12, one four-in-one copper fittings are vertically installed on the RTN(+) power input terminals in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


23


4 UPM

4

UPM

The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/ 220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires batteries.

Application Figure 4-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800. Figure 4-1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800 OptiX OSN equipment 110V/220V

UPM

Backplane

-48V PIU

Board A

-48V PIU

Board B -48V

Appearance The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM. The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF power system is 3U high. Figure 4-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


24


4 UPM

Figure 4-2 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Functions and Features UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/ 6800 equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries. The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five rectifier modules and one monitoring module. NOTE

The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately. If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.

Table 4-1 provides the functions and features of the UPM. Table 4-1 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Function and Feature

EPS75-4815AF

Hot-swappable function

The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved.

Storage battery protection function

The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.

Loading capacity

The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.


25


4 UPM


EPS75-4815AF

Lightning-proof function

The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector. The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.

Working Principle and Signal Flow The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input power into –48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch. When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop. In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected. When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.

Interfaces and Indicators Figure 4-3 shows the rear view of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM on site).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


26


4 UPM

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system

1. Control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A)

2. Control circuit breaker of the 3. Control circuit breaker of load 1 (10 battery branch (80 A) A)

4. Control circuit breaker of load 2 (30 5. Control circuit breaker of A) load 3 (40 A)

6. Control circuit breaker of load 4 (40 A)

7. AC phase line terminal

9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery branch

8. AC zero line terminal

10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of branch the battery branch

12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load branch

13. Connecting terminal of the PGND 14. DB44 signal interface cable

15. Communication interface (COM)

16. Communication test interface (TEST)

Interfaces The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 4-2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF. Table 4-2 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

Power input interface

Power interface

"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which access 110 V/220 V AC power.

Power output interface

Power interface

The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box through a battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power cables.


27


4 UPM

Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

Connectin g terminal of the PGND cable

Power interface

The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.

DB44 signal interface

DB44

The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors. As a result, the monitoring function is extended.

Communi cation interface (COM)

RJ45

Reserved

Communi cation test interface (TEST)

RJ45

It is used for internal test.

Switch button

Button

The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown in Figure 4-3. "1" indicates the control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate the load control switches, which enable and disable the load output.

Definition of DB44 signal pins Table 4-3 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


28


4 UPM

Table 4-3 Definition of DB44 signal pins Pin Diagram

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Definiti on

Function

Pin

Definit ion

Function

1

24 V

Auxiliary power output

23

SMOK E

Smoke sensor

2

12 V


24

WATE R

Water damage detection

3

12 V


25

DOOR

Door status switch (DSS) signal detection

4

GND

Signal ground

26

WIRE

Distribution frame connection

5

GND

Signal ground

27

JK1+

Positive terminal of dry contact 1

6

SIM1

Voltage detection of the first battery pack

28

JK1-

Negative terminal of dry contact 1

7

SIM2

Voltage detection of the second battery pack

29

JK2+

Positive terminal of dry contact 2

8

-

-

30

JK2-

Negative terminal of dry contact 2

9

-

-

31

CONT1 O+

Positive terminal for output control of optical coupler 1

10

GND

Signal ground

32

CONT1 O-

Negative terminal for output control of optical coupler 1

11

VHUM

Ambient humidity measurement

33

CONT2 O+

Positive terminal for output control of optical coupler 2

12

VBTEM 1

Battery temperature measurement 1

34

CONT2 O-

Negative terminal for output control of optical coupler 2

13

VBTEM 2

Battery temperature measurement 2

35

FANCT R1+

Positive terminal for fan rotation control

14

VTEM1

Ambient temperature measurement 1

36

FANCT R1-

Negative terminal for fan rotation control

15

VTEM2

Ambient temperature measurement 2

37

JKM1+

Positive terminal for a surge protector failure alarm


29


Pin Diagram

4 UPM

Pin

Definiti on

Function

Pin

Definit ion

Function

16

JTD1

Backup 1

38

JKM1-

Negative terminal for a surge protector failure alarm

17

JTD2

Backup 2

39

JKM2+

Positive terminal for an AC power-off alarm

18

JTD3

Backup 3

40

JKM2-

Negative terminal for an AC power-off alarm

19

JTD4

Backup 4

41

JKM3+

Positive terminal for a battery undervoltage alarm

20

JTD5

Backup 5

42

JKM3-

Negative terminal for a battery undervoltage alarm

21

JTD6

Backup 6

43

JKM4+

Positive terminal for power supply system failure

22

JTD7

Backup 7

44

JKM4-

Negative terminal for power supply system failure

Indicators The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators: l

Running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

l

Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) – one color (yellow)

l

Faulty state indicator (FAULT) – one color (red)

The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators: l

Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

l

Power supply system status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

Valid Slots The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.

Technical Specifications A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W. Table 4-4 lists the power parameters of the UPM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


30


4 UPM

Table 4-4 Power parameters of the UPM Parameter

Value

Voltage range of the AC input

90-290 V AC

AC input

One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz

Rated input current

≤ 28 A

Output nominal voltage

53.5±0.5 V

Rated output current

DC output branches

Load circuit breaker 1: 10 A Load circuit breaker 2: 30 A Load circuit breaker 3: 40 A Load circuit breaker 4: 40 A Battery circuit breaker: 80 A

Total output DC current

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

37.5±3 A to 75±3 A

Regulated voltage precision

≤ ±1%

Non-balance of load sharing

≤ ±5% (50%-100% load)

Rated efficiency of the integrated equipment

≥ 89%

Power factor

≥ 0.99 (nominal input or output)

Peak-to-peak noise voltage

≤ 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)

Electrical network adjustment rate

≤ ±0.1%

Lightning protection performance

When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning surge current whose waveform is 8/20μs and amplitude is 5 kA for five times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.

Cooling method

The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.


31


4 UPM

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows: l

Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0 in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))

l

Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


32


5


OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement

About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 8800 includes the following types of subracks: OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks. The OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks support electrical cross-connections, but the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack does not. This section describes the structure, slots, cross-connect capacities, FAN boards, power consumption, and power supply requirements for each type of subrack. 5.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. 5.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. 5.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack 5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


33



5.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T64" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks unless otherwise specified.

5.1.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. Figure 5-1 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack OSN 8800 T64

or OSN 8800 T64

3

6

1

2

5

3 4

1. Board area

2. Fiber cabling area

3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

NOTE

A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800 T64 Enhanced and OSN8800 T64 Standard respectively on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


34



l

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.

l

Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information. NOTE

For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.

l

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l

Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.

l

Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

Table 5-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 580 mm (D) × 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))

Weight (empty subracka)

65 kg (143 lb.)

a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed.

5.1.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Front

Back

IU91

PIU

PIU

EFI2

IU69

IU70

IU71

IU 19

IU 5

IU 24

IU 6

IU 25

IU 26

IU 7

IU74

IU75

IU 27

IU 28

EF I1 IU 76

IU 77

IU 29

IU 30

PIU

PIU

PIU

PIU

STI

IU78

IU79

IU80

IU81

IU82

IU 31

IU 32

IU 33

IU 34

IU 53

IU 54

IU 55

IU 56

IU 58

A U X

IU 83

IU 84

IU 59

IU 60

SCC

STG

IU85

IU86

IU 9

IU 10

IU 43

IU 44

IU 8

IU 11

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

IU 35

IU 36

IU 37

IU 38

IU90

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

IU 57

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 4

IU 23

IU 73

STG

Cross-connect board

IU 3

IU 22

IU 72

IU93

SCC

Cross-connect board

IU 2

IU 21

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 1

IU 20

A U X


IU 39

IU 40

IU 41

IU 42

ATE IU87

PIU

PIU

IU88

IU89

IU 61

IU 62

IU 63

IU 64

IU 65

IU 66

IU 67

IU 68

IU 45

IU 46

IU 47

IU 48

IU 49

IU 50

IU 51

IU 52

IU92

35


l l


: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections. In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU73 and IU84 are reserved for future use, and IU72 and IU83 are used to house AUX boards. In an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU72 and IU83 are used to house the active AUX boards, and IU73 and IU84 are used to house the standby AUX boards. NOTE

Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.

l

IU77 is reserved for future use.

l

IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board. – Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2UXCT or TNK4XCT. – General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4XCT or TNK2XCT.

l

IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board. – Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2USXH, TNK4SXH or TNK4SXM. – General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM or TNK2SXM.

l

The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack. Board

Slots for Active and Standby Boards

PIU

l General OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 & IU88, and IU81 & IU89 l Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU89, IU70 & IU88, IU78 & IU81, and IU79 & IU80

SCC

IU74 & IU85

STG

IU75 & IU86

SXM/SXH/ USXH

IU10 & IU44

XCT/UXCT

IU9 & IU43

TN52AUX

Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU72 & IU73, IU83 & IU84

5.1.3 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack vary according to the type of cross-connect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


36



Table 5-2 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Subrack Type

CrossConnect Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slota

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrack

ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12e

ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Enhance d

USXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

USXH +UXCTc

100 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

6.4 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

SXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

SXM

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

Enhance d

SXH +XCTc

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

SXM +XCTc

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

General

SXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

General

SXM

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

General

SXH +XCTd

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

General

SXM +XCTd

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

a: In OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack, the maximum cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect board. b: k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. Only the USXH+UXCT supports ODU4 granularities. c: Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the USXH and UXCT boards, the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities. d: General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities. e: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


37



5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, clean, and replace each air filter.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Functions and Features Table 5-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 5-3 Functions Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.

Commissioning control

l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.

Section-dependent heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.

Status checking

Checks and reports on the fan status.

Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-3 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 5-3 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


38



Figure 5-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet

Air inlet

Back

Air outlet Fan

Fan

Fan

Fan

Air filter

Air filter

Air inlet

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-4. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


39



Table 5-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result.

Adjustable Speed Mode

Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has six sections. See Figure 5-4.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


40



Figure 5-4 Section-dependent heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU91

Front FAN2

FAN1

IU69

IU19 IU20

IU70

IU21

IU71

IU22 IU23

IU24

IU72

IU74

IU73

IU25 IU26

IU9

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU75

IU79

IU76

IU77

IU27

IU28 IU29

IU30

IU31

IU32 IU33

IU34

IU11

IU12

IU13 IU14

IU15

IU16 IU17

IU18

IU78

IU10

IU8

IU50 FAN4

Partition 1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

FAN5

FAN6

Partition 2

Partition 3


IU90

41


5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement IU93

Back FAN8

FAN7

IU80

IU81

IU53 IU54

IU55

IU82

IU56 IU57

IU58

IU83

IU84

IU85

IU59 IU60

FAN9

IU86

IU87

IU61

IU62 IU63

IU45

IU46

IU88

IU89

IU64

IU65

IU66 IU67

IU68

IU47 IU48

IU49

IU50 IU51

IU52

IU43 IU44

IU35 IU36

IU37 IU38

IU39 IU40

IU41 IU42

IU50 FAN10

Partition 4

FAN11

Partition 5

FAN12

Partition 6

IU92

NOTE

l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies. l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 5-5 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


42



Figure 5-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

Speed adjusting signal SCC

Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit

Status signal

Status signal FAN

External power External power supply 1 supply 2

l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. – Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 5-6 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 5-6 Fan tray assembly

3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter

2. Operating status indicators

3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


43



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90, IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly. NOTE

For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item

Specification


64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.

5.1.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 5-6 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. NOTE

For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with extreme conditions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


44



Table 5-6 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Enhanced 8800 T64

General 8800 T64

Maximum subrack power consumptiona

9600 W

6500 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

6000 W

3700 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

2135 W

1748 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack.

Table 5-7 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Table 5-7 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F) (W)a

Remarks

OTU subrack 1

1804.6

2827.9

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1421.7

2340.9

4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack 1 (general subrack)

2172.7

2822.9

2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly


1839.1

2776.7

2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly


45



Unit Name



Remarks

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack (enhanced subrack)

5517.7

6932.4

2 x UXCT, 2 x USXH, 16 x NS4 (SDFEC), 8 x TSC, 4 x TTX, 5 x TOX, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

963.78

1860.3

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

1470.7

2406.9

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack (general subrack)

1748

2636

2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack (enhanced subrack)

2135

3076

2 x USXH, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

5.1.6 Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply.

Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 5-8 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


46



Table 5-8 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Requirement

Rated working current

200 A (Independent power supplies to four sections of each subrack, with 50 A for each section)

Nominal working voltage

-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800 T32, the PIU board can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board must be TN16PIU. l

Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. NOTE

The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.

l

Front Panel As shown in the following figures, two types of front panel are available for The TN51PIU board. The difference between the two types of front panel lies in the silkscreen. Figure 5-7 Front panel of the TN51PIU board

PIU RTN(+)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

PWR

NEG(-)


47



PIU RTN

PWR

-48V

Figure 5-8 Front panel of the TN16PIU board

PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)

There is only the power indicator (PWR), which is green. l

Valid Slots Table 5-9 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89


IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46


48



Table 5-10 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board

l

Product

Valid Slots






IU20 and IU23

Specifications – Performance Specifications Table 5-11 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item

Unit

Value

Number of DC input power supplies

-

1

Input DC power voltage range

V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V

Input DC power current

A

-60V DC: -48V to -72V ≤60

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: – TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) – TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.) – Power Consumption Board

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F) (W)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F) (W)

TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6

5.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


49



In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified.

5.2.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 5-9 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. Figure 5-9 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack

OSN 8800 T32

or OSN 8800 T32

3

6

1 5

2

3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


50



NOTE

A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800 T32 Enhanced and OSN8800 T32 Standard

l


l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate subrack status. NOTE


l


l


l



Specification

Dimensions



35 kg (77.1 lb.)


5.2.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack provide 50 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are shown in Figure 5-10.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


51



Figure 5-10 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU51

AUX EFI2

EFI1

PIU

PIU

IU37

IU38

IU39

IU40

STG AUX

STG

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

PIU

PIU

IU45

IU46

STI IU47

ATE IU48

SCC

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU25

IU6

IU26 IU27

IU7

IU28

IU9

IU10

SCC or service board

IU2

IU23 IU24

Cross-connect board

IU1

IU22

Cross-connect board

IU20 IU21

IU8

IU29

IU30 IU31

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU12

IU13

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

IU11

IU50

l l

: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections. Slot IU43 in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is reserved for future use. Slot IU41 and slot IU43 in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are used to house the active and standby AUX boards, respectively. NOTE

Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.

l

IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board. – Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: UXCH, UXCM, XCH or XCM. – General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: XCH or XCM.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



PIU

IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52



Board


SCC

IU28 & IU11

STG

IU42 & IU44

XCH/XCM/ UXCH/UXCM

IU9 & IU10

TN52AUX

Enhanced OptiX 8800 T32: IU41 & IU43

5.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack vary the type of crossconnect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-13. Table 5-13 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack Subr ack Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Cros sCon nect Boar d


Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrackc

ODU kb

VC-4

Packe tc

ODU kb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packe tc

Enha nced

UXC H

100 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

50 Gbit/s

3.2 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

1.6 Tbit/s

Enha nced

UXC M

100 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

50 Gbit/s

3.2 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

1.6 Tbit/s

Enha nced

XCH

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

N/A

Enha nced

XCM

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

N/A

Gene ral

XCH

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

N/A

Gene ral

XCM

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

N/A

VC-3/ VC-12 d


53


Subr ack Type


Cros sCon nect Boar d


Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrackc

ODU kb

ODU kb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12 d

Packe tc

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packe tc

a: In enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect board. b: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex. c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s packet services. In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 640 Gbit/s. d: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

5.2.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 5-14 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 5-14 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Partitioned heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54



Function

Description

Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-11 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Figure 5-11 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet Fan

Fan

Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-15. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


55




Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result.


Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 5-12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


56



Figure 5-12 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack FAN2

FAN1

IU37

IU20 IU21

IU38

IU39

IU22

IU23 IU24

IU40

IU25

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

IU26 IU27

IU9

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU45

IU46

IU28 IU29

IU30 IU31

IU11 IU12

IU13

IU47

IU51

IU48

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

IU10

IU8

IU50 FAN4

Partition 1

FAN5

Partition 2

FAN6

IU50

Partition 3

NOTE

l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies. l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 5-13 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


57






Status signal

Status signal FAN


l


l



3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter


3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


58



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.




Specification


64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W


5.2.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 5-17 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


59




Enhanced 8800 T32

General 8800 T32


4800 W

3500 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

3300 W

2000 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

1791 W

1282 W


Table 5-18 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Table 5-18 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit Name



Remarks

OTU subrack 1

1633.4

2254.6

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1229.3

1742.3

4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


1641.6

2166.5

2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


60


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Unit Name



Remarks


1958.3

2558.5

2 x XCH, 8 x 55NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 2 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack (enhanced subrack)

3338.7

4092.1

2 x UXCH, 10 x NS4(SDFEC), 2 x TSC, 8 x TTX, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

792.5

1287.1

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

1278.3

1808.3

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

290.3

706

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

974

1497.2

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

378.2

811

2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2 x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

373.1

306.6

2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


61


Unit Name




Remarks

OCS subrack 1281 (general subrack)

1755

2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16, 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack 1791 (enhanced subrack)

2321

2 x UXCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16, 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly



Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 5-19 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Table 5-19 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Item

Requirement


100 A (Independent power supplies to two sections of each subrack, with 50A for each section)


-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800 T32, the PIU board can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board must be TN16PIU. l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Function Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62



Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. NOTE


l


PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)

PIU RTN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

PWR

-48V


63




PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)


Valid Slots Table 5-20 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board Product

Valid Slots






l

Product

Valid Slots






IU20 and IU23

Specifications – Performance Specifications

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


64



Table 5-22 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item

Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V


A

-60V DC: -48V to -72V ≤60




TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6

5.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 5.3.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Each subrack has independent power supply.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


65



Figure 5-17 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack (subrack door excluded)

1

6

5 2 3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

l


l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information. NOTE


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


66




Specification

Dimensions



18 kg (39.6 lb.)


5.3.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide 25 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack are shown in Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU22 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

IU 7

l l

IU24 ATE

IU10

IU 8

IU 11

IU25

IU23 PIU

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

FAN

: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections. IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16UXCM/TN16XCH/TN16SCC or for the other service boards. NOTE

Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack. If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards or SCC boards, install a special filler panel in each slot first

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


67


l




AUX

IU21 & IU22

PIU

IU20 & IU23

TN16UXCM/ TN16XCH/ TN16SCC

IU9 & IU10

5.3.3 Cross-Connect Capacities Slots in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide the same cross-connect capacity. OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-24. Table 5-24 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack Cross Conn ect Boar d

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODU ka

VC-4

TN16 XCH

40 Gbit/s

TN16 UXC M

100 Gbit/s


VC-3/ VC-12b

Pack etc

ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packet

N/A

N/A

N/A

640 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

N/A

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

50 Gbit/s

1.6 T Gbit/s

640 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

800 Gbit/s

c

a: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. b: All service slots share a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s. c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 800 Gbit/s packet services. In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 320 Gbit/s.

5.3.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN16. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


68



Functions and Features Table 5-25 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 5-25 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function





Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-19 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


69



Figure 5-19 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-26. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 5-26 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.


70



Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 5-20. Figure 5-20 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

A

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

B

IU 7

IU23 PIU

IU22

IU24 ATE

IU10

IU 8

C

IU

IU

IU

IU

11

12

13

14

D

IU 15

IU 16

E

IU 17

IU 18

Fan tray assembly

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. NOTE

l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure longterm operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 5-21 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


71






Status signal

Status signal FAN


l


l


Appearance Figure 5-22 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 5-22 Fan tray assembly 3

2

SYSTEM

1 1. Air filter


3. Fans (ten in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


72



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.




Specification

Dimensions

493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 42.7 W l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W l Medium Speed: 106.8 W l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W l High Speed: 215 W


5.3.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 5-28 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T16 subrack. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


73




Specification


1800 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

700 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

821 W


Table 5-29 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800 T16. Table 5-29 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n at 25°C (77° F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55°C (131°F) (W)a

Remarks

OTU subrack 1

509.2

615.6

8 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

647.9

883.4

2 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical cross-connect subrack 1

501

808

5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


923.9

1209

2 x XCH, 4 x 55NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TTX, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


1059.9

1359.4

2 x 16UXCM, 4 x 54NS4(SDFEC), 2 x 54TSC, 2 x 54TTX, 2 x AUX, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

468.7

569.7

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


74



Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n at 25°C (77° F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55°C (131°F) (W)a

Remarks

OTM subrack 2

696.9

949.4

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 2 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

228.1

294.3

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

449.5

561.5

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

221

269.2

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

821

1109

2 x UXCM, 4 x 55NS3, 2×PIU, 5 x SLQ64, 4 x SLO16, 1 x SLH41, 1 x EGSH, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack



Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 5-30 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack. Table 5-30 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Requirement


37.5 A


-48V DC/-60V DC


75



Item

Requirement


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800 T32, the PIU board can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board must be TN16PIU. l

Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. NOTE


l


PIU RTN(+)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

PWR

NEG(-)


76



PIU RTN

PWR

-48V


PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






77




l

Product

Valid Slots






IU20 and IU23


Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V


A

-60V DC: -48V to -72V ≤60




TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6

5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack 5.4.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack has an independent power supply. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


78



Figure 5-25 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 5-25 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack 1

2

3

4

9

5 8

6 7

1. Indicator and interface area

2. SubRack_ID LED indicator

3. LAMP TEST Button

4. Board area



7. Air filter

8. Fiber spool

9. Mounting ear

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

l

Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.

l

Subrack ID LED: displays the master/slave relationships between subracks when multiple subracks are cascaded. It has the same function as the subrack ID LED on the front panel of the SCC board. "0" indicates that the subrack housing the SCC board is the master subrack, "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be obtained, and other values indicate slave subracks. For the meanings of other values displayed on the LED, see Figure 5-40.

l

LAMP TEST button: tests whether the indicators on the subrack are normal. After you press the button, all the indicators should be lit. It has the same function as the LAMP TEST button on the SCC board.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 22 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area.

l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. NOTE


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


79


l


The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface, and subrack alarm output and cascading interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.

Table 5-34 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack Dimensions

Specification

Dimensions


Weight (empty subrack)

13 kg (28.66 lb.)


5.4.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 Platform subrack provides 23 slots. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 5-26. Figure 5-26 Slots of the subrack IU23 EFI

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16


IU2


IU1

PWR CRIT MAJ MIN

IU17 IU18

IU19 PIU

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

Fiber cabling area IU22 Fan

Mutual backup

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

: houses service boards.


80



NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack functions as a master subrack, slot IU18 is used to house the active SCC board and slot IU17 is used to house the standby SCC board or a service board. When the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack functions as a slave subrack, it uses the TN15AUX board and the SCC board is not required. In this case, slots IU17 and IU18 can be used to house service boards.

5.4.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN15. Functions and Features Table 5-35 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.





Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-27 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


81



Figure 5-27 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 5-36. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 5-36 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.


82



Each OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 5-28. Figure 5-28 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack

I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A

B

I U 1 1

I U 1 2

IU22 C

I U 1 3

I U 1 4

D

I U 1 5

I U 1 9 I I I I U U U U 2 1 1 1 0 6 7 8 I U 2 1

E

Fan Tray Assembly

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. NOTE

l

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.

The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 5-29 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 5-29 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly


Status signal


Status signal FAN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


83



l


l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.


3

2

1

1. Air filter



NOTE


Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 5-37 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack fan tray assembly. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


84




Specification

Dimensions

493.7 mm (W) x 276 mm (D) x 56.5 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.87 in. (D) x 2.22 in. (H))

Weight

3 kg (6.6 lb)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 40 W l Medium Speed: 60 W l High Speed: 120 W


5.4.4 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications Table 5-38 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. NOTE


Table 5-38 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. Item

Value


1200W


Table 5-39 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


85



Table 5-39 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack Unit Namea

Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25°C (77°F)b

Maximu m Power Consump tion at 55° C (131°F)b

Remarks

Electr ical relay subra ck

Subrack 1

781

945

16 x TN53NQ2, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

871

1045

8 x TN55NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly

OTM subrack

105

200

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

97

191

2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly

ROA DM subra ck (4 x dime nsion s)c

115

215

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly

314

601

3 x OTM subrack

Subrack

OTM cabinet

a: In this table, "subrack" refers to a slave subrack, which has no SCC board. If the subrack must be used as a master subrack, it must use SCC boards. In this situation, the typical power consumption of the subrack increases to 23 W and the maximum power consumption increases to 25.1 W. b: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. c: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference configurations for one direction.


Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 5-40 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


86



Table 5-40 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack Item

Requirement


25 A (-48 V)


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, the PIU board can be TN15PIU l

Function – Accepts DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V and provides surge protection and power filtering functions. – Provides 3.6 V power supply in centralized manner, with the maximum power of 40 W.

l

Front Panel Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-31 Front panel of the TN15PIU board

PIU RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

Indicators: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack

IU19 and IU20


87


l


Specifications – Performance Specifications Table 5-42 Performance specifications of the TN15PIU board Item

Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V


A

≤30

– Mechanical Specifications – Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) – Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – Power Consumption Table 5-43 Power Consumption Board



TN15PIU

7

7.5

5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance. These OptiX OSN 8800 T64 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure 5-32.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


88



Figure 5-32 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack EFI1

EFI2

PIU

53A PWR

ATE

STI

PIU RTN

-48V

53A PWR

-48V

ALMO3

TOD1

ALMI2

CLK1

TOD2

ALMI1 ALMO1

CLK2

ALMO4

ALMO2

NM_ETH1

ETH3

SERIAL

ETH2

LAMP1 LAMP2

ETH1

NM_ETH2

RTN

These OptiX OSN 8800 T32 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure 5-33.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


89



Figure 5-33 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack EFI2

EFI1

PIU

ATE

STI 53A PWR

-48V

ALMO3

TOD1

ALMI2

CLK1

ALMI1 ALMO1

TOD2

ALMO4

ALMO2

ETH3

NM_ETH1

SERIAL

ETH2

CLK2

ETH1

LAMP1 LAMP2

NM_ETH2

RTN

These OptiX OSN 8800 T16 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 5-34. Figure 5-34 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack PIU EFI

NEG(-)

ALMI1

ALMI2

ALMO1 CLK1 TOD1

ALMO3 ALMO4

ALMO2

NM_ETH1

TOD2

LAMP2

ETH3

NM_ETH2

ETH2

CLK2

LAMP1

SERIAL

ETH1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ATE

PWR RTN(+)


90



These OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and AUX, as shown in Figure 5-35. Figure 5-35 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack SubRACK_ID ALM01 ALM02

ALMI1

LAMP1 ALMP2

LAMP TEST

SCC

PIU RUN

NEG(-)

STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

RTN(+)

SubRACK_ID

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

Fan RESET STAT PROG LAMP TEST

AUX

ALM CUT

SCC

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables. Interfaces in the Interface

5.5.1 ATE ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


91



5.5.1.1 Version Description The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. Table 5-44 lists the version description of the ATE board. Table 5-44 Version description of the ATE board Item

Description

Functional version

The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.

Difference

l Appearance: The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For details, see 5.5.1.3 Front Panel. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see "ATE Specification"5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications.

Replacement

The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.

5.5.1.2 Application The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The ATE provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals. Alarm outputs are sent to a centralized alarm management system through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.

5.5.1.3 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-36 shows the front panel of the TN51ATE board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


92



Figure 5-36 Front panel of the TN51ATE board ATE

ALMI2

ALMI1

ALMO3

ALMO1

ALMO4

ALMO2

Figure 5-37 shows the front panel of the TN16ATE board. Figure 5-37 Front panel of the TN16ATE board ATE ALMI2

ALMI1

ALMO3

TOD2

ALMO4

ALMO1 ALMO2 CLK1 TOD1

CLK2

Interfaces Table 5-45 lists the types and functions of each interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


93



Table 5-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board Interface

Type

Function

ALMO1– ALMO4

RJ45

l Housekeeping alarm outputs can be sent to a central alarm monitoring system for centralized surveillance through the ALMO1–ALMO4 interfaces. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l The ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces have the same pin usage and are a pair of housekeeping alarm output/cascading interfaces. Similarly, the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces also have the same pin usage and are another pair of housekeeping output/ cascading interfaces. For example, when ALMO1 and ALMO3 are used to output housekeeping alarm signals, ALMO2 and ALMO4 can be cascaded to ALMO2 and ALM04 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight alarm outputs. By default, the first three alarm outputs are defined as critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.

ALMI1– ALMI2

RJ45

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight housekeeping alarm inputs. The user can manually configure the severity of the eight alarms for remote monitoring of external device alarms.

CLK1/CLK2

RJ45

CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time.

TOD1/TOD2

RJ45

TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals.

Pin assignment of the RJ45 Connector Figure 5-38 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


94



Figure 5-38 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-46. Table 5-46 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

Critical housekeeping alarm output, positive

2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

Critical housekeeping alarm output, negative

3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

Major housekeeping alarm output, positive

4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP

Minor housekeeping alarm output, positive

5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN

Minor housekeeping alarm output, negative

6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

Major housekeeping alarm output, negative

7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P

Reserved for housekeeping alarm output 1, positive

8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

Reserved for housekeeping alarm output 1, negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 5-47.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


95



Table 5-47 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P

Housekeeping alarm output 2, positive

2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N

Housekeeping alarm output 2, negative

3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N


6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N


Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 5-48. Table 5-48 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Housekeeping alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Housekeeping alarm 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3


5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4


8

GND

Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 5-49. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


96



Table 5-49 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5


2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN6


4

SWITCHI_IN7


5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8


8

GND

Ground

Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 5-50. Table 5-50 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N

2MHz/2Mbit input negative

2

RJ0_E1_RX_P

2MHz/2Mbit input positive

3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N

2MHz/2Mbit output negative

5

RJ0_E1_TX_P

2MHz/2Mbit output positive

6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 5-51. Table 5-51 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground


97



Pin

Signal

Function

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

5.5.1.4 Valid Slots One slot houses one ATE board. Table 5-52 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board. Table 5-52 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board Product

Valid Slots


IU87


IU48

Table 5-53 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board. Table 5-53 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board Product

Valid Slots


IU24

5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Dimensions of front panel: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98



– TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) – TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) l

Weight: – TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.) – TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)

Power Consumption Board

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77° F) (W)


TN51ATE

0.3

0.3

TN16ATE

0.2

0.3

5.5.2 TN15EFI EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board

5.5.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the EFI board is TN15.

5.5.2.2 Application EFI provides the subrack ID LED, LAMP TEST button, alarm output and cascading interfaces, and alarm I/O interfaces.

5.5.2.3 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-39 shows the front panel of the EFI board. Figure 5-39 Front panel of the EFI board SubRACK_ID

ALM01 ALM02

SubRACK_ID

ALMI1 LAMP1 LAMP2

LAMP TEST

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


99



CAUTION The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: l

PWR: green indicator, which indicates whether the power cables are energized.

l

CRIT: a subrack-level red indicator, which indicates whether a critical alarm is present on the subrack.

l

MAJ: a subrack-level orange indicator, which indicates whether a major alarm is present on the subrack.

l

MIN: a subrack-level yellow indicator, which indicates whether a minor alarm is present on the subrack.

Interfaces and Buttons Table 5-54 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


100



Table 5-54 Description of interfaces in the interface area Silk-screen

Interface

Connector

Function

ALMO1 ALMO2

Alarm output and cascading interface

RJ45

l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack provides four alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other one are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALMI1

Alarm input interface

RJ45

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack provides four alarm inputs. The severity of the four alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms.

LAMP1 LAMP2

Subrack alarm output and cascading interface

RJ45

This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.


101



Silk-screen

Interface

Connector

Function

LAMP TEST

LAMP TEST button

-

The LAMP TEST button is used for testing the indicators on the subrack. After you press the LAMP TEST button, all indicators on the subrack should be lit. This button has the same function as the LAMP TEST button on the SCC board.

SubRACK_ID

Subrack ID LED

-

The LED displays the master/slave relationships between subracks. "0" indicates that the subrack housing the EFI board is the master subrack, "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be obtained, and other values indicate slave subracks. For the meanings of other values displayed on the LED, see Figure 5-40. This subrack ID LED has the same function as that on front panel of the SCC board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


102



Figure 5-40 LED

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Error

Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED

0

Decimal subrack ID

Pin assignment of the RJ45 Connector Figure 5-41 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector. Figure 5-41 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


103



Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-55. Table 5-55 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the major alarm signal positive

4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the minor alarm signal positive

5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the minor alarm signal negative

6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the major alarm signal negative

7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P

Alarm signal output 1 positive

8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

Alarm signal output 1 negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 5-56. Table 5-56 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4


104



Pin

Signal

Function

8

GND

Ground

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-57. Table 5-57 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP

Positive pole for critical alarm signals

2

CRIT_ALMN

Negative pole for critical alarm signals

3

MAJ_ALMP

Positive pole for major alarm signals

4

RUNP

Positive pole for power indicating signals

5

RUNN

Negative pole for power indicating signals

6

MAJ_ALMN

Negative pole for major alarm signals

7

MIN_ALMP

Positive pole for minor alarm signals

8

MIN_ALMN

Negative pole for minor alarm signals

5.5.2.4 Valid Slots One slot houses one EFI board. Table 5-58 shows the valid slots for the EFI board. Table 5-58 Valid slots for the EFI board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU23


105



5.5.2.5 EFI Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications l

Dimensions of front panel: 320 mm (W) x 70.3 mm (D) x 20 mm (H) (12.6 in. (W) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.8 in. (H))

l

Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)




EFI

2.5

2.8



5.5.3.2 Application The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface, subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.


Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-42 shows the front panel of the EFI board. Figure 5-42 Front panel of the EFI board EFI ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2

SERIAL

NM_ETH1

ETH3

NM_ETH2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


106




Interfaces Table 5-59 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board Interface

Type

Function

LAMP1– LAMP2

RJ45

Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.

ETH1–ETH3

RJ45

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. NM_ETH1– NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

SERIAL

DB9

The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

Pin assignment of the RJ45 Connector Figure 5-43 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


107




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector Figure 5-44 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 5-44 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-60. Table 5-60 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

2

ETH1_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication


108



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH1_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication

5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication

6

ETH1_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication

8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN


3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP



109



Pin

Signal

Function

5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP


2

ETH3_TXN


3

ETH3_RXP


4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH3_RXN



110



Pin

Signal

Function

7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN



Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN


Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-64.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


111



Table 5-64 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

2

NM_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

3

NM_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH2 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 5-65. Table 5-65 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with a network management system (NM)

2

NMJL_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with an NM

3

NMJL_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected


112



Pin

Signal

Function

6

NMJL_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 5-66. Table 5-66 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR

Data terminal equipment ready

5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

Ground

9

N.C

Not defined


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU19


113



5.5.3.5 DIP Switches There are DIP switches inside the EFI board. The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 5-45 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 5-45, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Figure 5-45 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8 SERIAL

SW1

NM_ETH2

SW2

T1

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

SW1

SW2

NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-45.



Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


114






EFI

2

2.5

5.5.4 EFI1 EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board

5.5.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.

5.5.4.2 Application The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.

5.5.4.3 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-46 shows the front panel of the EFI1 board. Figure 5-46 Front panel of the EFI1 board EFI1

NM_ETH2 SERIAL

Interfaces Table 5-68 lists the type and function of each interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


115



Table 5-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.

DB9

SERIAL

The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector Figure 5-48 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 5-48 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


116



Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH2 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 5-69. Table 5-69 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with a network management system (NM)

2

NMJL_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with an NM

3

NMJL_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 5-70. Table 5-70 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR



117



Pin

Signal

Function

5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

Ground

9

N.C

Not defined

5.5.4.4 Valid Slots One slot houses one EFI1 board. Table 5-71 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board. Table 5-71 Valid slots for the EFI1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU76


IU38

5.5.4.5 DIP Switches There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 5-49 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 5-49, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


118



Figure 5-49 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

NM_ETH2

CPLD SERIAL

(ID5)

ON

(ID1)

ON

(ID6)

ON

(ID2)

ON

(ID7)

ON

(ID3)

ON

(ID8)

ON

(ID4)

ON

SW1

SW2

NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-49.

5.5.4.6 EFI1 Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.


Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))

l

Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)




EFI1

5

7

5.5.5 EFI2 EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board

5.5.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.

5.5.5.2 Application The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and subrack communication interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


119



5.5.5.3 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-50 shows the front panel of the EFI2 board. Figure 5-50 Front panel of the EFI2 board EFI2

LAMP1

ETH1

LAMP2

ETH2

NM_ETH1

ETH3


Interfaces Table 5-72 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 5-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

LAMP1– LAMP2

RJ45

Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.


120



Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.

ETH1–ETH3

RJ45

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-73.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


121



Table 5-73 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP


2

ETH1_TXN


3

ETH1_RXP


4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH1_RXN


7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN



122



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP


2

ETH3_TXN


3

ETH3_RXP


4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP



123



Pin

Signal

Function

5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH3_RXN


7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-76. Table 5-76 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN



124



Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-77. Table 5-77 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

2

NM_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

3

NM_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

5.5.5.4 Valid Slots One slot houses one EFI2 board. Table 5-78 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board. Table 5-78 Valid slots for the EFI2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU71


IU37

5.5.5.5 EFI2 Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


125





l





EFI2

13

15

5.5.6 STI STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board

5.5.6.1 Version Description The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1. In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.

5.5.6.2 Application The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.

5.5.6.3 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-52 and Figure 5-53 show the front panel of the STI board. Figure 5-52 Front panel of the TN52STI board STI

CLK1

CLK2

TOD1

TOD2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


126



Figure 5-53 Front panel of the TNL1STI board STI

CLK1

CLK2

TOD1

TOD2

F1

PHONE

NOTE

In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.

Interfaces Table 5-79 provides descriptions of the interfaces on the STI board. Table 5-79 Interface description of the STI Interfa ce

Silkscreen

Connector

Function

CLK1/ CLK2

CLK1/ CLK2

RJ45

CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time.

TOD1/ TOD2

TOD1/ TOD2

RJ45

TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals.

PHONE

PHON E

RJ45

Orderwire phone interface

F1

F1

RJ45

F1 interface

Pin assignment of the RJ45 Connector Figure 5-54 describes the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


127




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 5-80. Table 5-80 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N


2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 5-81. Table 5-81 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground


128



Pin

Signal

Function

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

Pin Assignment of the PHONE Interface For the pin assignment of the PHONE interface, refer to Table 5-82. Table 5-82 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NC

Not connected

2

NC

Not connected

3

NC

Not connected

4

RING

Signal 1

5

TIP

Signal 2

6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the F1 Interface For the pin assignment of the F1 interface, refer to Table 5-83. Table 5-83 Pin assignment of the F1 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

TX_P

Transmitting (+)

2

TX_N

Transmitting (-)

3

RX_P

Receiving (+)

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

RX_N

Receiving (-)


129



Pin

Signal

Function

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

5.5.6.4 Valid Slots One slot houses one STI board. Table 5-84 shows the valid slots for the STI board. Table 5-84 Valid slots for the STI board Product

Valid Slots


IU82


IU47

5.5.6.5 STI Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.



l

Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)

l

Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)




TN52STI

1.5

1.5

TNL1STI

3

3

5.5.7 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board In an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. The TN15AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


130



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 5-55 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board. Figure 5-55 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX


STAT PROG

AUX

Interfaces Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 5-85. Table 5-85 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board Interface

Silk-screen

Connector

Function

NE management interface

NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 8800 platform through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 8800 platform. l Connects to the external CRPC or ROP board of a slave subrack using a network cable so that the slave subrack can communicate with the CRPC or ROP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


131



Interface

Silk-screen

Connector

Function

Inter-subrack communication interface

ETH1/ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-86. Table 5-86 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

NM communications, transmits the data positive

2

NM_ETNTXN

NM communications, transmits the data negative

3

NM_ETNRXP

NM communications, receives the data positive

4

NC

Not connected.


132



Pin

Signal

Function

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN

NM communications, receives the data negative

7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 5-87. Table 5-87 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP

Transmits the concatenated data positive for NM communications

2

NMJL_ETNTXN

Transmits the concatenated data negative for NM communications

3

NMJL_ETNRXP

Receives the concatenated data positive for NM communications

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN

Receives the concatenated data negative for NM communications

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-88.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


133



Table 5-88 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

2

ETH1_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

3

ETH1_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

6

ETH1_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN



134


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



135


6 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

6

OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 6-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 6-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 Board Catego ry

Board Name

Board Description

Gene ral 8800 T64 Subr ack

Enha nced 8800 T64 Subr ack

Gener al 8800 T32 Subra ck

Enhan ced 8800 T32 Subra ck

8800 Platfo rm Subra ck

8800 T16 Subra ck

Optical transpo nder unit

TN12LDM

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11LDM D

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11LDMS

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12LDX

2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11LEM2 4

22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN11LEX4

4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


136


Board Catego ry


Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN11LOA

8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11LOG

8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM

8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12LQM D

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12LQMS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12LSC

100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11LSQ

40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12LSX

10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN13LSX TN14LSX TN12LSXL TN15LSXL


TN12LSXL R

40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11LSXR


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


137


Board Catego ry

Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN11LTXe

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ s-2.7Gbit/s) dualwavelength conversion board

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12LWXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11TMX

4 channels STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN12TMX

Tributar y unit


TN52TDX TN53TDX

2 x 10G tributary service processing board

TN54TEM2 8

24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54THA

16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TOA

8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52TOG

8 x GE tributary service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52TOMg

8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN55TOX

8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

TN52TQX


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN53TQX TN55TQX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


138


Board Catego ry

Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN54TSC

100 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

TN53TSXL


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TSXL

Line unit


TN54TTX


N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

TN12ND2e

2 x 10G line service processing board

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52ND2e TN53ND2e TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2e

4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

TN54NQ2 TN55NO2f


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52NS2

10G Line Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN53NS2 TN52NS3 TN54NS3e

40G line service processing board

TN55NS3e

Packet Service Unit

PID unit

TN54NS4f


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54EG16

16-port gigabit ethernet packet switch board

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

TN54EX2

2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

TN54PND2

2 x 10G bit/s packet switch line board

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

TN54ENQ2


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54NPO2

12 x OTU2 PID board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


139


Board Catego ry

Board Name


Board Description

TN55NPO2

Crossconnect unit and system and commu nication unit






8800 T16 Subra ck

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN55NPO2 E

10G PID line service processing board, 20– channel extended

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN16XCH

High Cross-connection, System Control and Clock Processing Board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TNK2SXM

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK4SXM TN52UXCH

3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

N

N

N

Y

N

N

TN52XCH


N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TN52UXC M


N

N

N

Y

N

N

TN52XCM

Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TNK2UXC T


N

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK2XCT


Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK4XCT TN16UXC M

1.6T Universal Cross Connect,System Control and Clock Processing Board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN16SCC

system control and communication unit

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

N

TN52SCC

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

TNK2SCC

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN51SCCd

TN15AUX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

system auxiliary interface unit


140


Board Catego ry

Board Name






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN16AUX

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN51AUX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN52AUX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Board Description

TNK2USX H


N

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK2SXH


Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TNK4SXH Optical multipl exer and demulti plexer unit


TN11M40 TN12M40 TN11D40 TN12D40 TN11M40V TN12M40V

40-channel multiplexing unit 40-channel demultiplexing unit 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN11D40V

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12FIU

fiber interface unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13FIU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN14FIU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11ITL

interleaver board

TN12ITL

Fixed optical add and drop multipl exing unit

TN11SFIU

fiber interface unit for sync timing

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11CMR2

CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11CMR4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11DMR1

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/ drop multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


141


Board Catego ry

Reconfi gurable optical add and drop multipl exing unit


Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN11MR2

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11MR4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11MR8


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11MR8V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11SBM2

2-channel CWDM singlefiber bidirectional add/drop board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11RDU9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11RMU9

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

a

TN11ROA M

reconfigurable optical adding board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12TD20

20-ports Tunable Demultiplexing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11TM20

20-ports Wavelength Tunable Multiplexing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12WSD9

9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13WSD9 TN12WSM 9 TN13WSM 9

9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

TN11WSM D2

2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11WSM D4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


142


Board Catego ry

Board Name


Board Description

TN12WSM D4

Optical amplifi er unit




8800 T16 Subra ck

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11CRPC

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11DAS1

optical amplifier unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11OAU1


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12OAU1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13OAU1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12OBU1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11OBU2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12OBU2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11RAU1 TN11RAU2

Optical protecti on unit


TN11WSM D9

TN11OBU1

Optical supervi sory channel unit


optical booster unit

backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit

TN11HSC1

high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12SC1

unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12SC2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11ST2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11DCP

2-channel optical path protection unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12DCP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


143


Board Catego ry


Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

TN11OLP

optical line protection unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12OLP

Spectru m analyze r unit

TN11SCS

sync optical channel separator unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11MCA4

4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11MCA8


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11OPM8

8-channel optical power monitoring board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12OPM8 TN11WMU

wavelength monitoring unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variabl e optical attenuat or unit

TN12VA1

1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12VA4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Dispers ion equalizi ng unit

TN11DCU

dispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11TDC

single-wavelength tunabledispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Clock unit

TN52STG

centralized clock board

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

OCS system unit

SSN4BPA

optical booster and preamplifier board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN3EAS2

2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN1EGSH

16 x GE Ethernet switching and processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SF64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TNK2STG

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


144


Board Catego ry


Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subra ck

SSN1SF64A


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SFD64


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SL64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SLD6 4


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN3SLH4 1

16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SLO1 6


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SLQ1 6

4xSTM-16 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4SLQ6 4

4 x STM-64 line interface board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

ROPA subsyst em unitb

TN11GFU

gain flatness unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11RGU

ROPA gain unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11ROP

ROPA pumping unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Interfac e area unitc

TN16ATE

interface board of alarm & timing & expanding

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN16EFI

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN51EFI1

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN51EFI2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN51ATE TN15EFI

TNL1STI TN52STI TN51PIU TN15PIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

EMI filter interface board

synchronous timing interface board power interface unit


145


Board Catego ry

Board Name


Board Description

TN16PIU Fan






8800 T16 Subra ck

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN51FAN

Fan

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN16FAN

Fan

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN15FAN

Fan

N

N

N

N

Y

N

a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902. b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces. d: TN51SCC only supports General OptiX OSN 8800 T32. e: The board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode. f: In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack/general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the board can work only in relay mode. g: For the applications scenarios of the TN52TOM board installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, see 14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


146


7


OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement

About This Chapter 7.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. 7.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. 7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack vary in cross-connect capacities. 7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced. 7.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. 7.6 Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply. 7.7 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


147



7.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. Figure 7-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 7-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram 1

2

7

3 6

4 5

1. Indicator and interface area

2. Board area



5. Air filter

6. Fiber spool

7. Mounting ear

NOTE


l

Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area.

l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. NOTE

For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.

l

Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


148


l


Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.

Table 7-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Specification

Dimensions

497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.7 in. (H))


13 kg (28.6 lb.)


7.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 7-2 Slots of the subrack

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU9

IU10


XCS XCS

IU19 PIU SCC

IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan Paired slots

l l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mutual backup

: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections. IU15 and IU16 are also available for the STG.


149


l


Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots. The pair slots support distributed grooming.

7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack vary in cross-connect capacities.

Integrated Grooming When using the XCS board, an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack can cross-connect ODU1, ODU2,ODU2e, 10GE, and GE services between any two slots among slots IU1-IU8 and slots IU11-IU16. Figure 7-3 provides the cross-connect capacity for each slot. Figure 7-3 Cross-connect capacities of slots

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU9 IU10


XCS XCS

IU19 PIU SCC IU20 PIU

IU17 IU18

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan

Table 7-2 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 6800 subrack Cro ssCon nect Boa rd TN1 2XC S

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Slot

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

GE

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s



180 Gbit/s GE 360 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services 150


Cro ssCon nect Boa rd


Slot

TN1 1XC S

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot


ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

GE

Not supported

Not supported

with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 360 Gbit/s.

20 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

Not supported

Not supported

140 Gbit/s GE 280 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s.

Distributed Grooming An OptiX OSN 6800 subrack provides seven pairs of slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. GE/Any/ODU1/OTU1 services can be cross-connected between paired slots. No XCS board is required when paired slots are used to cross-connect electrical services.

7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 7-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 7-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.


151



Function

Description





Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 7-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Air filter


152



Figure 7-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet

Fan

Air inlet

Air filter

NOTE

If multiple subracks are used, an air duct deflector is required to help in heat dissipation.

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 7-4. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 7-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.


153



Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

I U 1 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 2 1 1

2

A

3

4

B

5

C

6

7

D

VOA

8

E

Fan Tray Assembly

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. NOTE

l

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.

The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 7-7 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


154






Status signal

Status signal FAN


l


l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.


3

2

1

1. Air filter



NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


155



Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 7-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly. NOTE


Table 7-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 6800) Item

Specification

Dimensions


Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 40 W l Medium Speed: 60 W l High Speed: 120 W


7.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 7-6 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


156



Table 7-6 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Value

Maximum subrack power consumption

1350 W

Table 7-7 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800. Table 7-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 6800

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n at 25°C (77° F)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55°C (131°F)a

Remarks

OTM subra ck

Subrack 1

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

168.7

281.6

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 3

691.6

850

10 x ND2, 2 x TQX, 2 x TOG, 2 x XCS, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

144.9

253.9

2 x OAU101s, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

FOADM subrack

292.3

418.3

2 x OAU101, 2 x VA4, 2 x OBU103, 2 x MR4, 4 x 10G OTU (LSX), 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

ROA DM subra ck (2 x dime nsion s)

Subrack 1

87.4

96.4

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x WSMD2, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly


157



Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n at 25°C (77° F)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55°C (131°F)a

Remarks

ROA DM subra ck (4 x dime nsion s)b

160

268.8

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

1422.2

1951.1

2 x OTU subrack and 1 x OTM subrack 2

Subrack

OTM cabinet (40x10 Gbit/s)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. c: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference configurations for one direction.

7.6 Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply.

Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 7-8 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Table 7-8 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Requirement


25 A (-48 V)


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 6800, the PIU board must be TN11PIU. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


158


l


Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. NOTE


l

Front Panel Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-9 Front panel of the TN11PIU board

PIU RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

Indicators: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l


l

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

IU19 and IU20


Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

Input DC power current Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

A


≤30 159



– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN11PIU

24

38

7.7 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance. These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the AUX, as shown in Figure 7-10. Figure 7-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack COM

ETH3

ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04

SERIAL

ALMI1

ALMI2

xcs

LAMP1 ALMP2

SCC

STAT ACT PROG SRV

PIU RUN

NEG(-)


RTN(+)

SubRACK_ID


Fan

RESET STAT PROG LAMP TEST

AUX

ALM CUT

xcs

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

SCC


160



NOTE




7.7.1.2 Application EFI provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.


Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the EFI board. Figure 7-11 Front panel of the EFI board COM

ETH3

ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04

SERIAL

ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 LAMP2


Interfaces and Buttons Table 7-11 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


161



Table 7-11 Description of interfaces in the interface area Silk-screen

Interface

Connector

Function

Commissioning interface

COM

RJ45

This interface is intended only for Huawei engineers to commission the equipment at the factory.


ETH3

RJ45

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


162



Silk-screen

Interface

Connector

Function


ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4

RJ45

l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.

OAM interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

SERIAL

DB9

The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol.


163



Silk-screen

Interface

Connector

Function


ALMI1 ALMI2

RJ45

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The severity of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms.


LAMP1 LAMP2

RJ45



8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector Figure 7-13 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


164



Figure 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Pin Assignment of the COM Interface For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 7-12. Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX_P_1

Transmits the data positive

2

ETNTX_N_1

Transmits the data negative

3

ETNRX_P_1

Receives the data positive

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

ETNRX_N_1

Receives data negative

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP



165



Pin

Signal

Function

2

ETH3_TXN


3

ETH3_RXP


4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH3_RXN


7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 7-14. Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the major alarm signal positive

4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the minor alarm signal positive

5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the minor alarm signal negative


166



Pin

Signal

Function

6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the major alarm signal negative

7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N


Pin Assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 7-15. Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P


2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N


3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N


6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined


167



Pin

Signal

Function

2

RXD

Receive end of data

3

TXD

Transmit end of data

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

GND

9

5VOADM

Power supply for OADM


Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 7-18. Table 7-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5

Alarm input 5

2

GND

Ground


168



Pin

Signal

Function

3

SWITCHI_IN6

Alarm input 6

4

SWITCHI_IN7

Alarm input 7

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8

Alarm input 8

8

GND

Ground


Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP

Critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_ALMN

Critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_ALMP

Major alarm signal positive

4

RUNP

Power indicating signal positive

5

RUNN

Power indicating signal negative

6

MAJ_ALMN

Major alarm signal positive

7

MIN_ALMP

Minor alarm signal positive

8

MIN_ALMN

Minor alarm signal negative


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU23


169





Dimensions of front panel: 320 mm (W) x 70.3 mm (D) x 20 mm (H) (12.6 in. (W) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.8 in. (H))

l





EFI

8

8.8

7.7.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface. Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board. Figure 7-14 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX


STAT PROG

AUX

Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 7-21.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


170



Table 7-21 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board Interface

Silk-screen

Connector

Function

NE management interface

NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.


ETH1/ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the ETH1/ETH2 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 7-22. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


171



Table 7-22 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

NM communications, transmits the data positive

2

NM_ETNTXN

NM communications, transmits the data negative

3

NM_ETNRXP

NM communications, receives the data positive

4

NC

Not connected.

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN

NM communications, receives the data negative

7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 7-23. Table 7-23 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP

Transmits the concatenated data positive for NM communications

2

NMJL_ETNTXN

Transmits the concatenated data negative for NM communications

3

NMJL_ETNRXP

Receives the concatenated data positive for NM communications

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN

Receives the concatenated data negative for NM communications

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


172



Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 7-24. Table 7-24 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP


2

ETH1_TXN


3

ETH1_RXP


4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH1_RXN


7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP



173


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Pin

Signal

Function

2

ETH2_TXN


3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



174


8



The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 8-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 8-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical transponder unit

TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LEM24

22×GE + 2×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LEX4

4×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board


175


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11LQG

4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

TN12LSC

100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

TN11LSQ


TN11LSX

10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

TN12LSX TN13LSX TN14LSX TN11LSXL


TN12LSXL TN15LSXL TN11LSXLR


TN12LSXLR TN11LSXR


TN11LTX

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX Tributary unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG



176


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11TDX


TN12TDX TN52TDX TN53TDX TN52TOG


TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11TQX


TN52TQX TN55TQX

Line unit

TN11TSXL


TN11ND2


TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2


TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2 TN11NS2


TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3


TN52NS3

NOTE The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.

TN54NS3 TN55NS3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


177



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

PID unit

TN11BMD4

PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

TN11BMD8

PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz

TN12ELQX

4×Electrical OTU2 with 4×10G Tributary Board

TN12PTQX

12× OTU2 PID board with 4×10G Tributary

TN11XCS

centralized cross connect board

Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit

TN12XCS TN11SCC


TN51SCC TN52SCC

Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

TN11AUX


TN11M40

40-channel multiplexing unit

TN12M40 TN11D40

40-channel demultiplexing unit

TN12D40 TN11M40V

40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12M40V TN11D40V

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

TN11FIU


TN12FIU TN13FIU TN14FIU TN11ITL

interleaver board

TN12ITL

Fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

TN11SFIU


TN11CMR2


TN11CMR4


TN11DMR1

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

TN11MR2


TN11MR4



178


Board Category

Reconfigurabl e optical add and drop multiplexing unit


Board Name

Board Description

TN11MR8


TN11MR8V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

TN11SBM2

2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board

TN11RDU9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

TN11RMU9

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

TN11ROAM

reconfigurable optical adding board

TN12TD20

20-ports Tunable Demultiplexing Board

TN11TM20

20-ports Wavelength Tunable Multiplexing Board

TN11WSD9

9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9

9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD2


TN11WSMD4


TN12WSMD4

Optical amplifier unit

TN11WSMD9

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

TN11CRPC

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

TN11DAS1


TN11HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2


TN12OBU2 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


179



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

TN11RAU1


TN11RAU2 Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11HSC1


TN11SC1


TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2

Optical protection unit

TN11ST2


TN11DCP


TN12DCP TN11OLP


TN12OLP

Spectrum analyzer unit

TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN12OPM8

Variable optical attenuator unit

TN11WMU

wavelength monitoring unit

TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU


TN11TDC

single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Clock unit

TN11STG

centralized clock board

ROPA subsystem unita

TN11GFU

gain flatness unit

TN11RGU

ROPA gain unit

TN11ROP

ROPA pumping unit


180



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Interface area unitb

TN11EFI

EMI filter interface board

TN11PIU

power interface unit

Fan

TN11FAN

Fan

a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 7.7 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


181


9

9 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement

OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement

About This Chapter 9.1 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). 9.2 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. 9.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced. 9.4 AC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power. 9.5 AC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supplywhen the equipment runs on AC power. 9.6 DC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power. 9.7 DC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC power. 9.8 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


182



9.1 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 19 and 23-inch open rack. Figure 9-1 shows appearance of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 9-1 describes the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Figure 9-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

5 1 4 2

3

1. Grounding connector

2. Fiber frame

3. Board area

4. Antistatic jack

5. Fan indicator

l

Ground connector: Access the ground cables.

l

Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.

l

Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.

l

Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.

Table 9-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Specification

Dimensions

436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134 mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in. (D) x 5.28 in. (H)

Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane)

6 kg (13.23 lb.)

9.2 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


183



Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3. Figure 9-2 Slots of the chassis (DC power)

IU1 FAN

Paired slots

IU11

IU6/PIU

IU2

IU7/PIU

IU3

IU8/SCC

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group

Mutual backup

Figure 9-3 Slots of the chassis (AC power)

IU1

IU11

IU6/APIU

IU2 FAN

Paired slots

IU3

IU7/APIU

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group

Mutual backup

NOTE

l

: service boards.

l Slots IU1 and IU11 can be used as two independent slots, each for housing an FOADM board with a height of 118.9 mm (4.7 in.). They can be also used as one slot for housing a service board with a height of 264.6 mm (10.4 in.). When the two slots are used as one slot, the slot ID is represented as IU11. l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. l A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplane.

9.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN21. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


184



Functions and Features Table 9-2 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 9-2 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates heat generated by the equipment so that the equipment can operate normally within the designated temperature range.


l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. NOTE Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Fan speed control is available.

Hot swapping


Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information.

Status checking

Checks the fan status.

Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is left intake right exhaust.Figure 9-4 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800. Figure 9-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system

Planform

Air inlet Fan

Air outlet

Front

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 9-3. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


185




Description

Auto Speed Mode

The fan speed depends on the temperature. l Lower than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 65°C (149°F): the fans run at high speed. l 45°C (113°F) to 65°C (149°F): the fans run at medium speed. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.


Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually.

NOTE

l

If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.

The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 9-5 shows the functional block of the fan tray assembly. Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal FAN

Speed adjusting signal


l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


186



– Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 9-6 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 9-6 Fan tray assembly 1

2

1. Fans (6 in total)

2. Operating status indicator

Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 9-4 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800 system. NOTE


Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 3800)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Specification

Dimensions


Weight

0.81 kg (1.79 lb)


187



Item

Specification

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 9 W l Medium Speed: 17 W l High Speed: 32.7 W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.

9.4 AC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power. Table 9-5 describes the AC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. NOTE


Table 9-5 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

350 W

Table 9-6 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800. Table 9-6 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name

OADM chassis (Using the APIU) Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Chassis 1

Typical Power Consump tion at 25° C (77°F)

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)

Remarks

162.2

207.5

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.


188



Unit Name



Remarks

Chassis 2

117.7

154.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the APIU)

119.7

156.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.

9.5 AC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supplywhen the equipment runs on AC power.

Requirements on AC Voltage and Current Table 9-7 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 9-7 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Requirement


1.7 A


220 V AC


90 V AC to 285 V AC

APIU The APIU board receives and provides AC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the APIU board must be TN21APIU. l

Function: Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions.

l

Front Panel: Appearance of the Front Panel

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


189



Figure 9-7 Front panel of the APIU board

APIU RUN

ON

OFF ~100-240V

S1 S11 APIU S2 S3 APIU S4 SCC S5 AUX

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l

Valid Slots: IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.

l

Specifications: – Performance Specifications Table 9-8 Performance specifications of the APIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value

Input power voltage range

V (AC)

90 to 285

Input frequency

Hz

50

Input power current

A (AC)

≤4

Output rated voltage

V (DC)

-48

Output rated current

A (DC)

6.3


190



Item

Unit

Value

Output power

W

300

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN21APIU

50

55

9.6 DC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power. Table 9-9 describes the DC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. NOTE


Table 9-9 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

350 W

Table 9-10 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


191



Table 9-10 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name



Remarks

Chassis 1

99.4

135.3

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

77.7

111.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the PIU)

79.7

113.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OADM chassis (Using the PIU)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.

9.7 DC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC power.

Requirements on DC Voltage and Current Table 9-11 provides the requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 9-11 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Requirement


8A


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the PIU board must be TN21PIU. l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Function: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192



Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. l

Front Panel: Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 9-8 Front panel of the PIU board

RUN

DO not hot plug this unit！ S1 S4

S2

AUX

SCC

SCC

PIU

PIU

S5

S11

S6

NEG(-) RTN(+)

PIU

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l

Valid Slots: IU6 and IU7

l

Specifications: – Performance Specifications Table 9-12 Performance specifications of the PIU Item

Unit

Value


-

1


V

-40 to -72


A

≤7

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 mm (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.0 lb.) – Power Consumption Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


193



Board



TN21PIU

10

12

9.8 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

9.8.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces. Figure 9-9 shows the front panel of the AUX board. The AUX board is housed in slot IU10. Figure 9-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board

STAT PROG

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 EXT

AUX

Table 9-13 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


194



Table 9-13 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board Interface

Silk-Screen

Connector

Function

NM interface

NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server so that the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

Extended auxiliary interfaces

EXT

DB9, RJ45

Accesses and outputs each kind of external signals.

EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2. Table 9-14 lists the functions of the interfaces. Table 9-14 Description of interfaces Interface

Interface Description

Function

ALMO


l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l Provides two alarm outputs and cascading.

SERIAL

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OAM interface

The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol.


195



Interface

Interface Description

Function

ALMI1 ALMI2


l External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. l Provides six alarm inputs. The severity of the six alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms.

LAMP1 LAMP2



ETH3


Reserved

9.8.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ45 and DB9 connectors and describes the pins of each connector.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector Figure 9-11 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


196



Figure 9-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Pin Assignment of the ETH Interface For the pin assignment of the ETH interface, refer to Table 9-15. Table 9-15 Pin assignment of the ETH interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX_P_1

Positive pole for transmitting the data

2

ETNTX_N_1

Negative pole for transmitting the data

3

ETNRX_P_1

Positive pole for receiving the data

4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined

6

ETNRX_N_1

Negative pole for receiving the data

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined

Pin Assignment of the ALMO Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMO interface, refer to Table 9-16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


197



Table 9-16 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Alarm output signal 1 positive

2

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Alarm output signal 1 negative

3

SWCRIT_OUT2+

Alarm output signal 2 positive

4

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 positive

5

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 negative

6

SWCRIT_OUT2-

Alarm output signal 2 negative

7

SWCRIT_OUT2+

Cascaded alarm output signal 2 positive

8

SWCRIT_OUT2-

Cascaded alarm output signal 2 negative

NOTE

The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

–

Reserved

7

–

Reserved


198



Pin

Signal

Function

8

GND

Ground

9

V5_OADM

Power supply for OADM


Signal

Function

1

SW_IN1P

Alarm input signal 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN2P


4

SW_IN3P


5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SW_IN4P


8

GND

Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 Interface For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 9-19. Table 9-19 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SW_IN5P


2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN6P


4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined

6

GND

Ground

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined


199




Signal

Function

1

RED+


2

RED-


3

YELLOW+


4

GREEN+


5

GND


6

YELLOW-


7

ORG+


8

ORG-


Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 Interfaces For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 9-21. Table 9-21 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX12P

Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM

2

ETNTX12N

Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM

3

ETNRX12P

Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM

4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined


200


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Pin

Signal

Function

6

ETNRX12N

Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined


201


10



The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 10-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 10-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical transponder unit

TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LEM24

22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM TN11LQG Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board


202


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSX

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

TN12LSX TN13LSX TN14LSX TN11LSXR


TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX Tributary unit

4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG


TN11TDX


TN52TOG


TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM

Line unit

TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11NS2


TN12NS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


203


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN52NS2 TN53NS2 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

TN21DFIU

bidirectional fiber interface board

TN13FIUa


TN14FIU TN21FIU

Optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SFIU


TN21CMR1


TN11CMR2


TN21CMR2 TN11CMR4


TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

TN21MR2 TN11MR4


TN21MR4

Optical amplifier unit

TN11SBM2

2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board

TN11DAS1


TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2


TN12OBU2 TN11RAU1 TN11RAU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



204



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit

TN21SCC


TN22SCC TN23SCC TN21AUX


TN22AUX Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11HSC1


TN11SC1


TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2

Optical protection unit

TN11ST2


TN11DCP


TN12DCP TN11OLP


TN12OLP

Spectrum analyzer unit

TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN12OPM8 Variable optical attenuator unit

TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU


Interface area unitb

TN21PIU

power interface unit

TN21APIU

AC Power Interface Unit

Fan

TN21FAN

Fan


205


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 9.8 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


206


11 Frames

11

Frames

About This Chapter 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal. 11.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The frame is installed in an open rack. 11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


207


11 Frames

11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse expands because of the accumulation of positive dispersion. This pulse expansion has a negative impact on system transmission performance. Therefore, dispersion compensation modules (DCMs), which are passive devices, are required to compensate for the positive dispersion. DCMs use the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensating fiber to offset the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to prevent pulse expansion. Depending on the technology that DCMs use, two types of DCMs are available: dispersion compensating fiber (DCF)-DCMs and fiber Bragg grating (FBG)-DCMs. These DCMs can compensate for the following transmission distances: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.). Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCM modules. The left- and right-side mounting ears attach the DCM frame to the columns of a cabinet. For the appearance of the DCM, see Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Appearance of the DCM frame

1

1. DCM frame

2

2. DCMs

Table 11-1, Table 11-2, Table 11-3 and Table 11-4 describes the performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation in different fibers. Each DCM supports a dispersion slope compensation rate (DSCR) within the range of 90% to 110% and an operating wavelength within the range of 1528 nm to 1568 nm.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


208


11 Frames

Table 11-1 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.652 fibers) DCM Module

Transmission Distance (mi./ km)

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)

Max. Allowable Powera (dBm)

DCM(S)

3.1/5

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

2.8

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(A)

12.4/20

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

4.7

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

6.4

0.6

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

8

0.7

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

9

0.8

0.1

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

9.8

0.8

0.1

20

FBG-DCM(80)

49.7/80

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(100)

62.1/100

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(120)

74.5/120

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(160)

99.4/160

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM(200)

124.2/200

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM(240)

149.1/240

8

1.6

0.4

23

a: The Max. Allowable Power refers to the maximum input optical power allowed into the optical module without causing damage.

Table 11-2 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.655 LEAF fibers)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(A)

12.4/20

4

0.4

0.3

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

5

0.5

0.3

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

5.9

0.7

0.3

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

6.9

0.8

0.3

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

7.8

0.9

0.3

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

8.8

1.0

0.3

20


209


11 Frames

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


FBG-DCM(120)

74.5/120

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(160)

99.4/160

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(200)

124.2/200

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(240)

149.1/240

3.7

1.0

0.2

23


Table 11-3 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.653 fibers) DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(S)

3.1/5

2

0.2

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(A)

12.4/20

5

0.5

0.1

20


Table 11-4 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (TW-RS fibers) DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(A)

12.4/20

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

2.8

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

3.8

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

4.2

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

4.7

0.5

0.1

20


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


210


11 Frames

Table 11-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame Parameter

Specifications


48 mm (1.9 in.) x 484 mm (19.1 in.) x 270.5 mm (10.6 in.)

Weight

1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)

11.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The frame is installed in an open rack. Figure 11-2 shows the appearance of the CRPC frame. Situated in the middle of the frame is a CRPC board. On the left of the frame is a fan tray assembly, and on the right is a power source with two power inputs in mutual backup. Figure 11-2 CRPC frame appearance

3

2 1

1: Fan tray assembly

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2: CRPC board

3: Power distribution box


211


11 Frames

Table 11-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Parameter

Value


86 mm (3.4 in.) x 535 mm (21.1 in.) x 257 mm (10.1 in.)

Weight

3 kg (6.6 lb)

Table 11-7 Voltage and current requirements for the CRPC frame Parameter

Specifications


10 A


-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V DC to -57.6V DC -60V DC: -48V DC to -72V DC

11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.

Appearance The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the chassis. Figure 11-3 shows a fiber spooling frame. Figure 11-3 Fiber spooling frame 1 2

3

4 5 6

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


212


11 Frames

1. Attenuator holder

2. Mechanical VOA pen

5. Mounting ear

6. Fiber spool

3. Captive screw

4. Fiber holder

Specifications of the Fiber Spooling Frame l

Dimensions: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

l

Maximum Capacity: A maximum of 40 fibers can be threaded into an fiber spooling frame from each side, and the maximum total fiber length is 50 m.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


213


12 Overview of Boards

12

Overview of Boards

About This Chapter 12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label. 12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.3 Bar Code Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


214



12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label.

12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.

CAUTION Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from damaging the board. Table 12-1 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types. Table 12-1 Board appearance and dimensions Board Appearance

Width

Board Name

Numbe r of Slots Per Board

Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11L4G

1

264.6 /10.4

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


215


Board Appearance

Width


Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11OAU1

2

264.6 /10.4

50. 8

220. 0/8. 7

TN11M40

3

264.6 /10.4

76. 2

220. 0/8. 7

TN11AUX

1

107.6 /4.2

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


216



Board Appearance

Width

Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11LSXL

4

264.6 /10.4

10 1.6 / 4.0

220. 0/8. 7

TN21MR4

1

118.9 /4.7

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

12.1.2 Symbols on Boards This section describes the symbols on boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


217



Table 12-2 Symbols on Boards Label

Type

Description

Laser safety class label

Indicates that the laser safety class of boards is HAZARD LEVEL 1M and there may be laser radiation. It warns users not to directly look into fiber connectors without taking any protection measures; instead an optical instrument that can attenuate optical power must be used.

Fiber type label

Applies to TN15LSXL/ TN11LTX/ TN12LSC/ TN55NS3/TN54NS4 boards. It specifies the fiber type for the boards.

CAUTION

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用G.657A2 光纤

NOTE To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers.

Fiber type label

SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

Applies to TN54THA boards. It specifies the fiber type for the boards. NOTE To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers.

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤 WARNING:FIBERS MUST ! BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Warning label


Applies to CRPC boards. It provides precautions for the boards.

218



Label

Type

Description

Heat hazard label

Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause body injury.

12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards This section introduces the concepts of convergence and non-convergence applications of tributary boards.

Convergence Application Convergence application means multiple client services are aggregated into one ODUk signal to improve the bandwidth utilization. Figure 12-1 uses the TOM board as an example to illustrate the convergence application. Figure 12-1 Convergence application Client-side

WDM-side

ESCON

ESCON

GE

GE

TOM board

ODU1 FC100

FC100

STM-1

STM-1

Line board

OTUk

ODU1 Aggregation

Non-convergence Application Non-convergence application means that each client service is directly mapped into an ODUk signal that matches the client service. In this application, flexible service grooming is achieved. Figure 12-2 uses the TQX board as an example to illustrate the non-convergence application. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


219



Figure 12-2 Non-convergence application WDM-side

Client-side

TQX board

FC800

FC800

ODU2

STM-64

STM-64

ODU2

10GE-WAN

10GE-WAN

ODU2

10GE-LAN

10GE-LAN

ODU2

Line board

Line board

OTUk

OTUk

Directly-Mapped 10Gbit/s Service

12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs This section introduces the concepts of convergent and non-convergent OTUs.

Convergent OTUs a convergent OTU board aggregates multiple client services into one ODUk signals, or aggregates multiplex multiple lower order ODUk signals into one higher order ODUk signals. Figure 12-3 uses the LQM board as an example to illustrate mapping client services into an ODU1 signals. Figure 12-4 uses the LOA board as an example to illustrate multiplexing lower order ODUk into higher order ODUk. Figure 12-3 Convergent OTU (mapping client services into an ODU1 signals)

WDM-side

Client-side LQM board ESCON

ESCON

GE

GE

OTU1 ODU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

FC100

FC100

STM-1

STM-1

OTU1

ODU1 Aggregation


220



Figure 12-4 Convergent OTU (multiplexing lower order ODUk into higher order ODUk) WDM-side

Client-side

LOA board

STM-16/OC-48

STM-16/OC-48

ODU1

FC200

FC200

ODU1 ODU2

OTU1

OTU1

ODU1

HD-SDI

HD-SDI

ODU1

OTU2

OTU2

Four channels of ODU1 multiplex to one channel of ODU2.

Non-convergent OTUs A non-convergent OTU board maps one client services directly into an ODUk signals with a rate matching the client service, and maps one ODUk signals directly into one OTUk signals. Figure 12-5 uses the LDX board as an example to illustrate non-convergent OTUs. Figure 12-5 Non-convergence application (mapping one client services directly into an ODUk signals)

Client-side

WDM-side

LDX board

STM-64

STM-64

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

10GE-LAN

10GE-LAN

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

Directly-Mapped ODU2

12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical ports. When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on the boards. Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier and has fewer end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


221



Boards Supporting Standard Mode Table 12-3 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS. Table 12-3 Names displayed on the NMS Name in Standard Mode (Standard Mode, adding logical board)

Name in Compatible Mode (Compatible Mode, adding logical board)

Name in Compatible Mode (NE Panel)

TN53TDX(STND)

53TDX

53TDX

TN54THA(STND)

TN54THA

54THA

TN54TOA(STND)

TN54TOA

54TOA

TN55TOX

-

55TOX

TN55TQX(STND)

TN55TQX

55TQX

TN54TSC

-

54TSC

TN54TSXL

-

54TSXL

TN54TTX

-

54TTX

TN52ND2(STND)

TN52ND2

52ND2

TN53ND2

TN53ND2(COMP)

53ND2

TN55NO2

-

55NO2

TN53NQ2

TN53NQ2(COMP)

53NQ2

TN52NS2(STND)

TN52NS2

52NS2

TN53NS2

TN53NS2(COMP)

53NS2

TN54NS3(STND)

54NS3

54NS3

TN55NS3

-

55NS3

TN54NS4

-

54NS4

TN54ENQ2(STND)

TN54ENQ2

54ENQ2

TN55NPO2(STND)

TN55NPO2

55NPO2

TN55NPO2E

-

55NPO2E

NOTE

TN55TOX/TN54TSC/TN54TSXL/TN54TTX/TN52ND2T04/TN55NO2/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/ TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN55NS3/TN54NS4/TN55NPO2E support only the standard mode.

The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and compatible modes of a line board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


222



Standard mode Figure 12-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Figure 12-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 2XODUflex

ODU2:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1

OCh:1

OCh :1

Other tributary/line/PID board

1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1

4 xODU1

OCh : 1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2 8 xODU0

ODU1:1 ODU2:1

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8) ODU0:1 8 xODU0

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU0: 8

Backplane

Cross-connect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path

Service processing module

ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2)

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU2)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


223



Table 12-4 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board Port Name

Meaning

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU0:(1-8)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU1:(1-4)

Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1

Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2)

Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT

WDM-side optical ports

Compatible mode Figure 12-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode. Figure 12-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode Other tributary/ line/PID board

Other tributary/ line/PID board

8 x ODU0


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1

161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

Backplane

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


224




Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0 mapping path


Table 12-5 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board Port Name

Description

Automatic Cross-Connection

ODU0LP1ODU0LP4

Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1

Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1

Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT

WDM-side optical ports.

-

Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 12-6 uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


225



Table 12-6 GUIs on the NMS GUI on the NMS

Navigation Path

Compatible Mode

Standard Mode

Path View

In the NE panel, select a board, double-click the board icon or right-click and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

See Figure 12-8.

See Figure 12-9.

WDM Interface

In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. tab.

See Figure 12-10.

See Figure 12-11.

Create CrossConnection Service

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

See Figure 12-12.

See Figure 12-13.

Figure 12-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


226



Figure 12-9 Path View (standard mode)

Figure 12-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


227



Figure 12-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Figure 12-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


228



Figure 12-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

12.3 Bar Code Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. NOTE

Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.

Figure 12-14 and Figure 12-15 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure 12-16 and Figure 12-17 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure 12-14 Description of the bar code (example 1) Delivery information

Board version (TN12)

Board model number

2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG Serial number

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Manufacture month Manufacture year Vendor

BOM

Environmental Board friendliness flag name (Y: Environmentally friendly)


Characteristic code

229



Figure 12-15 Description of the bar code (example 2) Delivery information


Board model number

2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT Serial number


BOM

Environmental friendliness flag

Board Tunable name

Characteristic code

(Y: Environmentally friendly)

Figure 12-16 Description of the bar code (example 3)

Delivery information


Board name

2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 Serial number

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


BOM

Environmental Board model number friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)


230



Figure 12-17 Description of the bar code (example 4) Third and fourth numbers of the BOM



Board name

030HFY 108A000199 Y TN12 LSX T01 Serial number


The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.

Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Board model number

The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table 12-7 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM. Table 12-7 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board Configuration

First Four Numbers in the board BOM

Description

First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module

Board not installed with optical modules

0303

The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board.

3406 or 0303 (client side)

0303

The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.

3406 or 0303 (client side and WDM side)


231



Board Configuration

Board installed with optical modules


Description


0307

The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.


0302



0231

Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.

N/A

Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l

For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed.

l

For the SSN3SLH41 board, – The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. – When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305.

Table 12-8 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


232



Table 12-8 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration


Description



0302

The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.

3406


0305

The board is installed optical modules.

N/A

Table 12-9 provides the description of the delivery information. Table 12-9 Description of the delivery information of a board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Vendor

Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.

Manufacture Year

Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured. For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.

Manufacture Month

Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B indicates November.

Serial Number

Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges from 000001 to 999999.


233



13

Optical Transponder Unit

About This Chapter 13.1 Overview An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs the reverse process. 13.2 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 13.3 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity 13.4 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 13.5 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 13.6 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 13.7 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 13.8 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 13.9 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 13.10 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board 13.11 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board 13.12 LOA Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


234



LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board. 13.13 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit 13.14 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 13.15 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 13.16 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board 13.17 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 13.18 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 13.19 LSC LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.20 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.21 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.22 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.23 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 13.24 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 13.25 LTX LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board 13.26 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 13.27 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 13.28 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 13.29 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


235



13.1 Overview An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs the reverse process.

Positions of OTU Boards in a WDM System Figure 13-1 shows the positions of OTU boards in a WDM system. Figure 13-1 Positions of OTU boards in a WDM system Client-side services

WDM-side services

OTU OA

OM

FIU

SC1

OTU

WDM-side ODF

Client-side equipment

OTU

OA

OD

OTU

Types of OTU Boards OTU boards are classified into the following types according to the WDM-side rates and functions: l

2.5G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-1.

l

10G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-2.

l


l


l

Ethernet over WDM (EoW) boards: These OTU boards support Layer 2 processing of Ethernet services. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-5.

l

Transparent transmission OTU boards: These OTU boards do not support OTN processing. They only convert client services into ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-6.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


236



Table 13-1 Main functions of 2.5G OTU boards Boar d

Type

Client-Side Service

Pluggable Optical Module

WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN11 LDG D

Conver gence

GE

2

Y

N

Y

Y

TN11 LDG S

Conver gence

GE

2

Y

N

Y

Y

TN12 LDM

Conver gence

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON, FC100, GE, FE, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

2

Y

Y

Y

Y

OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express,

1


2

Y

N

Y

N


1


2

Y

N

Y

N


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FDDI

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

GE, FC100, FICON,

2

FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48, OTU1, HD-SDI,

1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI

4

Y

N

Y

Y

GE, FC100, FICON,

2

FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48

1


4

Y

N

Y

Y

TN11 LDM D

TN11 LDM S

TN13 LQM

TN11 LQM D

TN12 LQM D

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


237


Boar d

TN11 LQM S

TN12 LQM S

Type

Conver gence

Conver gence


Client-Side Service

Type

Max. Num ber

GE, FC100, FICON,

2


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI

4

GE, FC100, FICON,

2


1


4

GE, FC100, FICON,

2


1


WDM Specificatio ns

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Table 13-2 Main functions of 10G OTU boards Boar d

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN1 1LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 3LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 4LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

N

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


238


Boar d

Type


Client-Side Service


WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN1 2LD X

Nonconverg ence

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e

2

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 1LO A

Converg ence

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI

8

Y

Y

Y

N

HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM–16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1

4

3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G

2

FC800, FICON8G, 10GE LAN

1

TN1 1LO G

Converg ence

GE

8

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2LO G

Converg ence

GE

8

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 1LO M

Converg ence

GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G

8

Y

N

Y

N

FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G

4

FC400, FICON4G

2

GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G

8

Y

Y

Y

N

FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G,

4

FC400, FICON4G, InfiniBand 5G, 3GSDI

2

TN1 2LO M

Converg ence

TN1 1LS XR

Relay

N/A

1

N

N

Y

N

TN1 1TM X

Converg ence

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

Y

N

Y

Y

TN1 2TM X

Converg ence

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


239



Table 13-3 Main functions of 40G OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specificati ons

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN11LSQ

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN11LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768

1

N

N

Y

N

TN12LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN15LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN11LSXLR

Relay

N/A

N/A

N

N

Y

N

TN12LSXLR a

a: Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e.

Table 13-4 Main functions of 100G OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

TN12 LSC

Nonconvergence

100GE

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN11 LTX

Convergenc e

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192

10

Y

N

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


240



Table 13-5 Main functions of EoW boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11 LEM2 4

Convergenc e, L2 service processing

FE, GE

22

10GE-LAN, 10GEWAN

2

TN11 LEX4

Convergenc e, L2 service processing

10GE-LAN, 10GEWAN

4

Table 13-6 Main functions of transparent transmission OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

TN11 LWX2

Transparent transmissio n

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDSDI

2

N

N

Y

Y

TN11 LWX D



1

N

N

Y

Y

TN11 LWXS



1

N

N

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


241


Board

TN12 LWXS

Type


Client-Side Service



WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDSDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO

1

N

N

Y

Y

13.2 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit

13.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Boar d

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack

8800 Platform Subrack

6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 ECO M

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.2.2 Application The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


242



the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane. For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A Service signal

F I Management signal U

OptiX OSN 900A

×8

×8

Management signal F I Service signal U

OptiX OSN 900A

OTU

ECOM

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 SCC

ETH

OTU

NOTE

Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.

Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system GE

GE MUX

1

FE

DMUX

1

ECOM

FE

ECOM

8

DMUX GE

MUX

8 GE

Client side

Client side

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


243



13.2.3 Functions and Features The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback on the client side. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-7. Table 13-7 Functions and features of the ECOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A. l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Client-side service type

FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specifications.

Cross-connect capabilities

OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Tunable wavelength function

Not Supported

PRBS function

Not Supported

Protection scheme

Not Supported

Alarms and performance events monitoring

l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function

Not Supported

Test frame

Not Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not Supported

Electrical-layer ASON

Not Supported

l Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance events for the board.


244




Description

eSFP

Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-4 and Figure 13-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board. Figure 13-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board Backplane(management signal transmission)

FE

WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

E/O

RX8

L2 switching module

TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8

Client-side optical module


O/E

OUT

IN

WDM-side optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse

Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

245



Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A) The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals) from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.

l

Receive direction The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Figure 13-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side O/E

E/O

RX8

L2 switching module

TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service) The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


246



In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the cross-connect module. The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE signals. The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal electrical signals to FE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

L2 switching module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247



– Forwards service signals. – Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l

Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board.

l

Power supply module – Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

13.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


248



Figure 13-6 Front panel of the ECOM board

ECOM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN

ECOM


Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

l

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green

l

Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)

l

Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

For details about these indicators, see A.4 Board Indicators.



249



Table 13-8 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated optical demultiplexer board or optical add/drop multiplexer board.

OUT

LC

Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated optical multiplexer board or optical add/drop multiplexer board.

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmit service signals to client equipment.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receive service signals from client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

13.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one ECOM board. Table 13-9 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board. Table 13-9 Valid slots for ECOM board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

IU2-IU5

13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the board.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-10lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-10 Mapping between the physical ports on the ECOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port

Port Number on the NMS

IN/OUT

1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250



Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE

The port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical ports. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 13-11 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board Client side

WDM side

PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 PORT10

VCTRUNK1

101( AP1/AP1)-1

L2 switching module

1(IN/OUT)-1

Cross-connect WDM-side optical module module

Table 13-11 Description of NM port of the ECOM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

PORT3-PORT10

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8.

VCTRUNK1

Internal virtual port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251



Port Name

Description

AP1

Internal convergence port.

IN/OUT

Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB Mode. NOTE

If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not be set on the U2000.

If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module.

l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client in Figure side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown 13-8.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown 13-8.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

in Figure

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing the cross-connect grooming of GE services.


252



Figure 13-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM Client side

Other board 101(AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

102(AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

103(AP3/AP3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

WDM side

Client side 1

ECOM

101(AP1/AP1)-1 2

The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of other boards

1 2

13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 13-12. Table 13-12 ECOM parameters Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface/ Channel

-

Displays the position of the optical interface.

Optical Interface Name

-

Sets and queries the optical interface name.

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused

An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Default: Used

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


253



Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface Loopback

Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

Specifies the loopback mode for the optical interface on a board.

Default: NonLoopback Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-

Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Band Type

-

Queries the band type.

Tunable Wavelength Range

-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDM-side optical interface on the board.

Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100

The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

Board Mode

HUB Mode, Service Mode

Default: C

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to configure the working mode of the board.

Default: HUB Mode

13.2.10 ECOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


254



Bo ard

Client-Side Fixed Optical Module

Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

TN 11E CO M

N/A

100 BASE-FX-10 km

N/A

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

100 BASE-FX-40 km


100 BASE-FX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point.

Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-13 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100 BASEFX-10 km

100 BASEFX-40 km

100 BASEFX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Target transmission distance

-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Maximum mean launched power

dBm

-3

0

5

Minimum mean launched power

dBm

-11.5

-4.5

-2

Minimum extinction ratio

dB

9

9

9


255



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100 BASEFX-10 km

100 BASEFX-40 km

100 BASEFX-80 km

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580

Operating wavelength range

nm

1270 to 1355

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580

Receiver sensitivity (EOL)

dBm

-19

-20

-22

Minimum receiver overload

dBm

-3

-3

-3

Table 13-14 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


256



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



Central wavelength deviation

nm

±6.5

±6.5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width

nm

1.0

1.0

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620

Receiver sensitivity

dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-15 CWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


257



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1

1


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l



Optical Module Type

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F)

TN11ECOM

–

19.6

21.6

13.3 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


258



13.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 L4G

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.3.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-9. Figure 13-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system

RX1

RX1

4xGE

M U X IN / D OUT M U X

1×ODU5G

TX6

M U OUT X / IN D M U X

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1×ODU5G

RX6

4×GE

GE

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

TX1

TX1

L4G

L4G

L2

GE TX6 RX6

L2 GE

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

NOTE

The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


259



13.3.3 Functions and Features The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-16. Table 13-16 Functions and features of the L4G board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s

Crossconnect capabilities

l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU5G. l Supports SM function for OTU5G.

Layer 2 switching

Supports the MAC address learning and aging.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specifications.


Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported

Supports one VB.

NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


260




Description

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client side.

Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

Electricallayer ASON

Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Protocols or standards compliance

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

MAC

Supported

PHY

Supported

Protocols or standards for transparent transmission (nonperformance monitoring)

IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, and IGRP

Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)

IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


261



13.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board. Figure 13-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE

WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

6×GE

RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6

4×GE

L2 switching module

E/O

Client-side optical 6×GE module

E/O GE CrossOTN encapsulation connect processing and mapping module module module

4×GE

OUT

O/E IN WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module. The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


262



The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

L2 switching module – Forwards service signals. – Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


263



signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/ FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


264



Figure 13-11 Front panel of the L4G board

L4G STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 OUT IN

L4G



l


l


l





265



Table 13-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX6

LC


RX1-RX6

LC



13.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one L4G board. Table 13-18 shows the valid slots for the L4G board. Table 13-18 Valid slots for the L4G board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.3.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-19 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


266



Table 13-19 Mapping between the physical ports on the L4G board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 13-20 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-12 Port diagram of the L4G board Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8

WDM side VCTRUNK1 101( AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

VCTRUNK2 102( AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

VCTRUNK3 103( AP3/AP3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

VCTRUNK4 104( AP4/AP4)-1 L2 swithing module


201(LP/LP)-1


1(IN/OUT)-1


Table 13-20 Description of NM port of the L4G board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

PORT3-PORT8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6 respectively.


267



Port Name

Description

VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4

Internal virtual ports.

AP1-AP4

Internal convergence ports.

LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

IN/OUT


13.3.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module. NOTE

One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.

l

There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created: – Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and

in Figure 13-13.

– Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other board, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through of the broadcast services.)

l

Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other boards, as shown by

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

6

in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side


268



of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.) l

The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.

Figure 13-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board Client side

Other board 101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1 4

3

6

5

201(LP/LP)-2

102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

101(AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

Client side 102(AP2/AP2)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-2 2

103(AP3/AP3)-1

1

104(AP4/AP4)-1

201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

L4G 1

The straight-through of the board

2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards

Other board

3 4 5 6

TN11L4G / TN11LDGD / TN11LDGS / TN11LOG / TN12LOG / TN11LQG / TN13LQM / TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG / TN11TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM

13.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 13-21. Table 13-21 L4G parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



269



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused Default: Used





Laser Status

Off, On


Default: NonLoopback

Default: l WDM side: On


l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown

Disabled, Enabled

Service Mode

OTN, SDH

Default: Enabled

LPT Enabled

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.

Default: OTN

Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.

Default: Disabled FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.


-


Band Type

-



270



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100

The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

SD Trigger Condition

None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DE G

Default: C

Default: None

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

13.3.11 L4G Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L 4G

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km

3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


271



NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-22 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0. 5 km

1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-


Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


272


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

Table 13-23 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-


G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN


APD 273



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-24 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD

NRZ

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power

dBm

2

2


dBm

-2

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00

Center frequency deviation

GHz

±10


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

Dispersion tolerance

ps/nm

3400

3400


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


274



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD APD

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-25

-25


dBm

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27



l



WDM-Side Optical Module

Typical Power Consumption at 25° C ( 77°F ) (W)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55° C ( 131°F ) (W)

TN11L4 G

3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

50.0

55.0


53.0

58.0

13.4 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

13.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


275




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LDG D

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.4.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-14. Figure 13-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system

RX1

LDGD

OUT1

MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

GE

RX1 1×ODU1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ DMUX OUT1

OUT2

TX2

LDGD

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

GE RX2

IN1

GE TX2 RX2

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

13.4.3 Functions and Features The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-25. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


276



Table 13-25 Functions and features of the LDGD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDGD converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16 Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported.

LPT function

Supported

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures.

l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.

l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors B2 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



277




Description

Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Port MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518–9600 bytes.

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


278



13.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board. Figure 13-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board Backplane (service cross-connection) GE Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O

GE OTN Cross- encapsulation connect and mapping Processing module module module

Client side Optical module


E/O

Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

O/E WDM side Optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


279



The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


280



three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


281



Figure 13-16 Front panel of the LDGD board

LDGD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LDGD



l


l


l





282



Table 13-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDGD board. Table 13-27 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board. Table 13-27 Valid slots for LDGD board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-28. Table 13-28 Characteristic code for the LDGD board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Description

Description

First four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.


283



Code

Description

Description

Last four digits


The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210. l

"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-29 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 13-30 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


284



Figure 13-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board

3 (RX1/T X1)-1 4 (RX2/T X2)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-2

Cross-connect mo dule

Servi ce p rocessing module

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2 /OUT2)-1

WDM-si de opti cal modu le

Table 13-30 Description of NM port of the LDGD board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.

LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-18.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-18.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4

in Figure 13-18.


285


13 Optical Transponder Unit NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.

l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l

5

in Figure 13-18.

The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Figure 13-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board Client side

Other board 3(RX1/TX1)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

3 5

201(LP/LP)-2

WDM side

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 2

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1

201(LP/LP)-2

LDGD The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board

1 2 3 4 5


13.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 13-31.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


286



Table 13-31 LDGD parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused




Default: Used

The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the loopback mode for the optical interface on a board.


Off, On Default: l WDM side: On



Disabled, Enabled

Service Mode

OTN, SDH

Default: Enabled

Default: OTN LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function.

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


-

Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.

Band Type

-



-


Default: Enabled



287



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196. 050 to 80/1560.61/192 .100

The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208 .170 to 18/1611.00/188 .780 Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

Ethernet Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation, 1000M FullDuplex

Default: C

Default: 9600

Default: AutoNegotiation SD Trigger Condition

None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

13.4.11 LDGD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


288



Bo ard





TN 11L DG D

N/A


12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type Line code format

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


289


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type Target transmission distance

-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


290




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


291




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD

6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN


12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

APD

1300 to 1575 -28

-18

-28


-28

-28

292


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type









dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Table 13-35 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


293



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption Bo ard




TN 11L DG D

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

34.0

37.4

38.0

41.8

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

13.5 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


294



13.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LDG S

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.5.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-19. Figure 13-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system

RX1

LDGS

LDGS

TX1

TX1 RX1

GE

1×ODU1

M IN U X / D M OUT U X

1×OTU1

TX2

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

GE RX2

M OUT U X / D M IN U X

GE TX2 RX2

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


295



13.5.3 Functions and Features The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-36. Table 13-36 Functions and features of the LDGS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDGS converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

FEC encoding


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported



296




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors B2 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Port MTU


Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z


297




Description



13.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


298



Figure 13-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board Backplane(service cross-connection) GE Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O Client-side optical module

GE CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receive direction Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299



The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


300



Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


301



Figure 13-21 Front panel of the LDGS board

LDGS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDGS



l


l


l





302



Table 13-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDGS board. Table 13-38 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board. Table 13-38 Valid slots for LDGS board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-39 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


303



Table 13-39 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 13-40 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board Client side

WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

4(RX2/TX2)-1



1(IN/OUT)-1


Table 13-40 Description of NM port of the LDGS board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

IN/OUT



304



13.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection his section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-23.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-23.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

4

in Figure 13-23.

NOTE


l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

5

in Figure 13-23.

The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/ OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000


305



Figure 13-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board

Client side


WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 4

3

4(RX2/TX2)-1

5

201(LP/LP)-2

WDM side

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 2 1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

LDGS 1

The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board

2 3 4 5


13.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 13-41. Table 13-41 LDGS parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and queries the optical interface name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.


306



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status






Laser Status

Off, On





Disabled, Enabled

Service Mode

OTN, SDH

Default: Enabled



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


-


Band Type

-



-


Default: Enabled



307



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.


l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100

Default: 9600

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780

The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.


AutoNegotiation, 1000M FullDuplex

The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: AutoNegotiation SD Trigger Condition



13.5.11 LDGS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


308



Bo ard



TN 11L DG S

N/A



12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZ1000 BASE-LX-10 PIN km 12800 ps/nm-C Band1000 BASE-LX-40 Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD km

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A

1000 BASE-ZX-80 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZkm PIN 1.25 Gbit/s 3200 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Fixed Wavelength-NRZCWDM)-40 km APD 2.67 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Tunable WavelengthCWDM)-80 km NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

NOTE



Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


309


Parameter


Unit


-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


310




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


311




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD

6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN


12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

APD


1300 to 1575

312


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type









dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27


Unit


Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600


313



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Eye pattern mask


-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l






TN 11L DG S

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

32.0

35.2

36.0

39.6

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


314



13.6 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

13.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN12 LDM

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Type The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-46 lists the types of the LDM board. Table 13-46 Type description of the LDM board Board

Type

Description

LDM

One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board.

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1.

Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board.

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.

13.6.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-24 and Figure 13-25. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


315



Figure 13-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving) LDM

RX1 TX1

M U IN1 X / D OUT1 M U X

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2

M U OUT1 X / IN1 D M U X

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s RX2

LDM

100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s TX2 RX2

Figure 13-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving) LDM

RX1

OUT1 MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

MUX/ DMUXOUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUXOUT2

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2

OUT2

LDM

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1


NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.6.3 Functions and Features The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-47. Table 13-47 Functions and features of the LDM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

LDM converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU1 Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.


316




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

OTN function


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification



Not supported

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides.

LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.

FEC encoding



NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.


317




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Port MTU


Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Ethernet service mapping mode

Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE on the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


318




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


319




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)


13.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


320



Figure 13-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O

E/O Service encapsulation and mapping module


OTN processing module


O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Control Memory

CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module

Fuse

Required voltage


SCC

Backplane ( controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


321



wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces. NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


322


l



13.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board. Figure 13-27 Front panel of the LDM board

LDM STAT ACT PROG SRV


LDM

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


323



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-48 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDM board. Table 13-49 shows the valid slots for the LDM board. Table 13-49 Valid slots for the LDM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68




IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


324



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-50 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-50 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


13.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 13-51.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


325



Table 13-51 LDM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused



Default: Used


Default: Non-Loopback Service Type

None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

100 to 2200

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 0


sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




326



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled



Disabled, Enabled

Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-


Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: Enabled

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

Default: C

Default: 9600


The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.


327



Field

Value

Description


None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG


Default: None

OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled

Default: Disabled

The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

13.6.10 LDM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


328



Bo ard



WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module

TN 12L DM

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A


S-16.1-15 km

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module NOTE

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Table 13-52 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


329


Parameter


Unit


Value I-16-2 km

-

S-16.1-15 km

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


330


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. NOTE

The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.

Table 13-53 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


331


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

9

9

9


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

1471 to 1611


1471 to 1611

332



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 13-55 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

-

NRZ


333



Parameter

Unit



-

120 km (74.6 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant (a 5% margin is required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


334




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-57 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


NRZ

335



Parameter

Unit



-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.5

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)


-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


336




Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77° F)


TN12LDM

22.6

24.8

13.7 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

13.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LD MD

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

13.7.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-28. Figure 13-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system LDMD

RX1

MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

LDMD

MUX/ DMUXOUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUXOUT2


TX1 RX1

1×OTU1

OUT2

IN1

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1×ODU1

100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s RX2 TX2

OUT1


337



NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.7.3 Functions and Features The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-58. Table 13-58 Functions and features of the LDMD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDMD converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1



Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

OTN function


WDM specification

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.


338




Description



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1.


Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. Alarms and performance events monitoring


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function


Test frame


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection.



Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection.

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


339




Description Client side



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


340





ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

13.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


341



Figure 13-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O




Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

O/E WDM-side optical module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module

Power supply module Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


342



After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


343



13.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board. Figure 13-30 Front panel of the LDMD board

LDMD STAT ACT PROG SRV


LDMD



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


344



l


l



Interfaces Table 13-59 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.7.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDMD board. Table 13-60 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board. Table 13-60 Valid slots for the LDMD board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


345



13.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-61. Table 13-61 Characteristic code for the LDMD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-62 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-62 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


346



13.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 13-63. Table 13-63 LDMD Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused



Default: Used





Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/ s)

100 to 2200

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 0



l Client side: Off Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


347



Field

Value

Description

Automatic Laser Shutdown

Disabled, Enabled


LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled


Disabled, Enabled


-

Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Band Type

-

Used to query the band type.


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: Enabled

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

Default: C

Default: 9600


The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.


348



Field

Value

Description




Default: None




PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status



13.7.10 LDMD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


349



Bo ard





TN 11L DM D

N/A

I-16-2 km


N/A

S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km


L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NOTE





Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


350


Parameter


Unit


Value I-16-2 km

-

S-16.1-15 km

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


351


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. NOTE

The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


352


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

9

9

9


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

1471 to 1611


1471 to 1611

353



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-

NRZ


354



Parameter

Unit



-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


355




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

0

0


dBm

-8

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD

APD

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28

-28

-28


dBm

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575


356





l





TN11LDMD

26.9

29.6

13.8 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

13.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Board

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11L DMS

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

13.8.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-31.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


357



Figure 13-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system RX1

LDMS

TX1

M U IN X / D OUT M U X

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2


1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


LDMS


NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.8.3 Functions and Features The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-69. Table 13-69 Functions and features of the LDMS board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

LDMS converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1


358




Description



OTN function

l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM, and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709.



359




Description



ALS function


Test frame


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme




Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

l Supports OWSP protection.

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


360




Description




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


361






13.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


362



Figure 13-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O



OUT


O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


363



After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


13.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


364



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board. Figure 13-33 Front panel of the LDMS board

LDMS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDMS



l


l


l


For details about these indicators, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


365



Interfaces Table 13-70 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-70 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.8.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDMS board. Table 13-71 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board. Table 13-71 Valid slots for the LDMS board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


366




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-72 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 13-72 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


13.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 13-73. Table 13-73 LDMS Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



367



Field

Value

Description








100 to 2200

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 0




Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


-


Band Type

-


Default: Enabled



368



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600


Enabled, Disabled

Default: C

Default: 9600

Default: Disabled

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



369



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled

The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

13.8.10 LDMS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L DM S

N/A

I-16-2 km


N/A

S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)


NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


370






Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30


371


Parameter


Unit


Value I-16-2 km

-

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


372


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


373




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


374




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


375



WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-78 WDM-side fixed optical module specificaitons Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

3

3


dBm

-5

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD

APD

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28

-28

-28


dBm

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575


376





l





TN11LDMS

26.9

29.6

13.9 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

13.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2LD X

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variants The TN12LDX board has only one variant: TN12LDX01.

13.9.2 Application The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-34. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


377



Figure 13-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system RX1

OUT1

M U OUT1 X / D M IN2 U X OUT2

2×ODU2/ODU2e

M IN1 U X / D OUT2 M U IN2 X

LDX

IN1

2×OTU2/OTU2e

2×OTU2/OTU2e

2×ODU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN/ TX1 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ RX2 OTU2/ OTU2e TX2

LDX

TX1 RX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ TX2 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e RX2

13.9.3 Functions and Features The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-79. Table 13-79 Functions and features of the LDX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDX converts signals as follows: l 2 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 2 x OTU2 l 2 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 2 x OTU2e


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification



Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

378




Description

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN.

FEC encoding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Regeneratio n board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)


379




Description

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3ae


ITU-T G.805

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

13.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


380



Figure 13-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board Client side RX1

TX1

O/E

E/O

WDM side

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Client-side OTN 1 processing module 0


E/O

OUT1

O/E

IN1

E/O

OUT2

O/E

IN2

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module


RX2

TX2

O/E Client-side OTN processing module






Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX to the client side of the LDX. The RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports independently process signals. The RX1/TX1 port corresponds to the OUT1/IN1 port, and the RX2/TX2 port corresponds to the OUT2/IN2 port. l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Transmit direction Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

381



The client-side optical module receives two channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1/RX2 optical interface and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 /OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1 and IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1 and TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


382



Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


383



Figure 13-36 Front panel of the LDX board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-80 describes the type and function of each interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


384



Table 13-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC

Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

TX1-TX2

LC

Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX2

LC

Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.


13.9.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDX board. Table 13-81 shows the valid slots for the LDX board. Table 13-81 Valid slots for the LDX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.9.8 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


385



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-82 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-82 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

3

RX1/TX1

5

RX2/TX2

6

NOTE


13.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 13-83. Table 13-83 LDX Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


386



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2e, STM-64

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.

Default: 10GE LAN Port Mapping


The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled

Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown

0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s

Default: Enabled

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.

Default: 0s Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On


Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.

Default: 0s LPT Enabled


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function.


387



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0

The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

NOTE Only support C band.

See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. NOTE Only support C band.

See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



388



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status



13.9.10 LDX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 12L DX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


389



NOTE



The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

Table 13-84 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km



10 Gbit/s SingleRate-0.3 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM

Target transmissio n distance

-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


390


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





30

30

30


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860

Receiver sensitivity (multirate)

dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5

Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN)

dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5

Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN)

dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1

Minimum receiver overload (STM-64)

dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


391




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9

Operating frequency range

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity, EOL (FEC on)

dBm

-16

Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)

dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


392



WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-86 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


393



Table 13-87 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


394





Typical Power Consumption at 25° C (77°F) (W)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55° C (131°F) (W)

LD X

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

44.5

51.2

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP

45.5

52.2

13.10 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

13.10.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LE M24

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

13.10.2 Application The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit. As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services and two channels of 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, and two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services into one channel of 10GE service. Further, the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two channels of 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services. Figure 13-37 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


395



Figure 13-37 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system LEM24

RX5

OUT3

TX5

L2 10GE

FE GE 10GE LAN TX28 10GE WAN

2X10GE

TX28

TX5 RX5

2×ODU2

2×OTU2

2×ODU2

2X10GE

FE GE 10GE LAN 10GE WANRX28


2×OTU2

M U X / D OUT4 M U IN4 X IN3

LEM24

IN3

RX28 L2 10GE

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: N/A

NOTE

The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are capable of processing 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are capable of processing GE and FE services.

13.10.3 Functions and Features The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 13-88 and Table 13-89 list the functions and features of the LEM24 board. NOTE

The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 13-88 OTN Functions and features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature Basic function

Description l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services and two channels of 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, and two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


396



Function and Feature Client-side service type

Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s NOTE l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signals and FE/GE optical signal. l When the LEM24 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX21/TX21 and RX22/TX22 ports.


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: N/A.

OTN function

l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports SM function for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

LPT

l Supports port-based LPT. l Supports service-based LPT.

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Regeneration board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN11LSXR

ALS function


IEEE 1588v2

Supported in the WDM side.

Physical clock

Supported in the Client side and WDM side.

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side


397




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

10GE optical interface

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. MAC

PHY

GE optical interface

MAC

PHY

GE electric interface

MAC

PHY

FE optical interface

MAC

PHY

FE electric interface

MAC

PHY

WDM side optical interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


398



Table 13-89 Data features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature

Description

Interface characteristi cs

Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical port: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE optical port: 100MFULL FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Multicast

Layer 2 switching

MTU

Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.

VLAN multicast

Supported

IGMP snooping V2

Supported

Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports one VB. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32k MAC addresses.

Ethernet service

EPL EVPL(VLAN) EVPL(QinQ) EPLAN(IEEE 802.1D) EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1Q) EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1ad) NOTE "EVPL (VLAN)" is displayed as "EPL" on the NMS.

Protection schemes

VLAN SNCP

Supported

DBPS

Supported

ERPS

Supported

LAG

l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.

Maintenance features

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

RMON

Supported


399




Description

QoS

Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.

Flow control

Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination.



IEEE 802.1q VLAN

Protocols or standards for service processing (performanc e monitoring)

IEEE 802.3x pause frame

All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.

IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

13.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-38 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


400



Figure 13-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board Backplane(service cross-connection)

10GE Client side

WDM side

RX5 RX6

10GE

O/E

RX28 TX5 TX6

L2 switching module

E/O

TX28

10GE


E/O

OUT3

O/E

IN3 IN4

OUT4



1588v2 module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.

Signal Flow The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the LEM24. l

Transmit direction The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


401


l


Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service cross-connection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28 optical interfaces. NOTE

The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board can process GE and FE services.

The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions. l

Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module.

l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board. NOTE

10GE WAN and 10GE LAN signals are processed differently. Each 10GE WAN signal contains an SDH header, which is stripped off before the signal enters the Layer 2 module.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

L2 switching module – Learns, forwards or deletes MAC addresses. – Maps and demaps Ethernet packets.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


402


l


OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


13.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-39 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


403



Figure 13-39 Front panel of the LEM24 board



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


404



Interfaces Table 13-90 describes the type and function of each interface. Table 13-90 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board Interface

Type

Function

RX5-RX28a

LC


TX5-TX28a

LC


IN3-IN4

LC


OUT3-OUT4

LC


a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.


13.10.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board. Table 13-91 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board. Table 13-91 Valid slots for the LEM24 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67


IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15


IU2-IU5


405



The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

13.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-92 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-92 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEM24 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6

6

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10

10

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14

TX15/RX15

15

TX16/RX16


406



Physical Port


TX17/RX17

17

TX18/RX18

18

TX19/RX19

19

TX20/RX20

20

TX21/RX21

21

TX22/RX22

22

TX23/RX23

23

TX24/RX24

24

TX25/RX25

25

TX26/RX26

26

TX27/RX27

27

TX28/RX28

28

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-40 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 13-93 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-40 Port diagram of the LEM24 board Client side PORT5 PORT6

VCTRUNK1

Service processing module 101(AP1/AP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1


102(AP2/AP2)-1

WDM side

VCTRUNK2

3(IN3/OUT3)-1 4(IN4/OUT4)-1

VCTRUNK3 103(AP3/AP3)-1

PORT28


L2 switching module



WDM side optical module

Backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


407



Table 13-93 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board Port Name

Definition

PORT5 - PORT28

Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28.

VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4


AP1 - AP4


ClientLP1 - ClientLP2

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1

ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2

Internal logical ports.

IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4

Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the clientside optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals. NOTE

l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.

l

One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the U2000.

l

Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 13-41. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.


408



Figure 13-41 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board Client side

WDM side

103(AP3/AP3)-1


Client side

WDM side 103(AP3/AP3)-1

LEM24

104(AP4/AP4)-1

Other board

TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

13.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the LEM24 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.

Parameters for WDM Interfaces Table 13-94 Parameters for WDM Interfaces Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface/Channel

-



-


Channel Use Status



Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



409



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled



410



Field

Value

Description

ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS.

Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDMside port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

LPT Enabled


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



411



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled

FEC

FEC Mode

Default: FEC

Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Actual Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100

The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




412



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled




Default: Disabled

Default: None

PRBS Test Status


The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Parameters for Ethernet interfaces Table 13-95 TAG Attributes(Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4. External ports are PORT5 to PORT28.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


413



Field

Value

Description

TAG

Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid

Indicates the type of packets that can be processed by a port.

Default: Tag Aware

Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the packets with VLAN IDs (Tag) and discards packets without VLAN IDs (Untag). If TAG is set to Tag Aware, VLAN priority and Default VLAN ID are invalid. Access: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and discards the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). Hybrid: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and transparently transmits the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). This parameter is valid only for UNI ports. NOTE This parameter is invalid for CAware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4095 Default: 1

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the value of TAG is Access or Hybrid.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the value of TAG is Access or Hybrid.

Entry Detection

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. 414



Table 13-96 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, NNI, C-Aware, SAware Default: UNI

A UNI port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port attributes include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. An S-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have S-VLAN tags. A C-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have C-VLAN tags. NNI is a reserved port type and is not supported at present.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


415



Table 13-97 Advanced attributes (Internal ports) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4.

Broadcast Packet Suppression


Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression. Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

10% to 100%, with a step of 10% Default: 30%

If broadcast packet suppression is enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth. Click D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to view the details.

Table 13-98 Advanced Attributes (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

External ports are PORT5 to PORT28.


Enabled, Disabled

Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression.

Default: Disabled

Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


416



Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%, with a step of 10%

If broadcast packet suppression is enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.

Default: 30%

Click D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to view the details. Loop Detection


Loop Port Shutdown


Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbps)

PORT5 to PORT6: l 0 to 10000 l Default: 10000

Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic.

PORT7 to PORT28: l 0 to 1000 l Default: 1000 Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port.

Table 13-99 Basic Attributes (External Port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



417



Field

Value

Description

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

When the parameter value is set to Enabled for a port, the port is enabled and services are provisioned. When the parameter value is set to Disabled for a port, the services on the port are not processed. Therefore, you must enable a port when you configure services on the port.

Default: Disabled

Working Mode

PORT5 to PORT6: l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex WAN l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN PORT7 to PORT28: l 1000M FULL_Duplex, Auto-Negotiation l Default: AutoNegotiation

Maximum Frame Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port. Click D.21 Maximum Frame Length to view the details.

Port Physical Parameters

-

Indicates the physical parameters of a port.

MAC LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback

TheMAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Default: Non-Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


418



Field

Value

Description

PHY LoopBack


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


Table 13-100 Flow Control (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port does not work in auto-negotiation mode.

Default: Disable

Click D.23 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disable

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode. Click D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.

13.10.11 LEM24 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


419



Bo ard





TN 11L EM 24

N/A

1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

N/A


1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-2.5

-3


420



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)


dBm

-9.5

-9.5


dB

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z –compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1620


dBm

-17

-20


dBm

0

-3

NOTE

The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.

Table 13-102 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+)

10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

Optical interface service rate

Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


421



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+)



dB

3

3.5

Output optical power in case of laser shutdown

dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z–compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


422



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


423



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-105 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (gray light) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


424



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11LEM24

81

83


425



13.11 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board

13.11.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LE X4

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

13.11.2 Application The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit. The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of 10GE services. Figure 13-42 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


426



Figure 13-42 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system LEX4

RX1

OUT1

TX1

IN1

TX1 RX1

2X10GE

IN2

TX4


2×ODU2

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

2×OTU2

2×OTU2

2×ODU2

2X10GE

10GE LAN 10GE WAN RX4

LEX4

IN1

RX4

L2 10GE

10GE LAN 10GE WAN TX4

L2 10GE

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board

13.11.3 Functions and Features The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 13-106 and Table 13-107 list the functions and features of the LEX4 board. NOTE

The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 13-106 OTN Functions and features of the LEX4 board Function and Feature Basic function

Description l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service.


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A.

OTN function

l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.

10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s

OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board.

l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2. WDM specification Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



427




Description

ESC function

Supported

LPT

l Supports port-based LPT. l Supports service-based LPT.

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.

Regeneration board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN11LSXR

ALS function


IEEE 1588v2

Supported in the WDM side.

Physical clock

Supported in the Client side and WDM side.

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback


l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. MAC

PHY


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


428



Table 13-107 Data features of the LEX4 board Function and Feature

Description


Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10GE LAN full duplex , 10GE WAN full duplex

MTU


Multicast

VLAN multicast

Supported

IGMP snooping V2

Supported

Layer 2 switching

Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports one VB. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32k MAC addresses.

Ethernet service


Protection schemes

VLAN SNCP

Supported

DBPS

Supported

ERPS

Supported

LAG

l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.


QoS

ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

RMON

Supported

Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


429




Description

Flow control




IEEE 802.1q VLAN


IEEE 802.3x pause frame

All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.

IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

13.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LEX4 board consists of client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and a power supply module. Figure 13-43 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 13-44 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


430



Figure 13-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX4

10GE

O/E

E/O

L2 switching module

10GE


E/O

OUT1 OUT2

O/E

IN1 IN2



1588v2 module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


431



Figure 13-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800) Backplane(service cross-connection)

10GE Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side

10GE

O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX4

L2 switching module

E/O

10GE


E/O

OUT1 OUT2

O/E

IN1 IN2



1588v2 module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board. In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receive direction


432



The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board. NOTE


Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l


l

OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


433



from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l


l


13.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-45 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


434



Figure 13-45 Front panel of the LEX4 board



l


l


l





435



Table 13-108 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX4

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC



13.11.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board. Table 13-109 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board. Table 13-109 Valid slots for the LEX4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

13.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


436




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-110 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-110 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEX4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

3

IN2/OUT2

4

TX1/RX1

5

TX2/RX2

6

TX3/RX3

7

TX4/RX4

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-46 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 13-111 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-46 Port diagram of the LEX4 board Client side

Service processing module 101(AP1/AP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1




PORT5 PORT6

VCTRUNK1

PORT7


PORT8


102(AP2/AP2)-1

WDM side

VCTRUNK2

L2 switching module



3(IN1/OUT1)-1 4(IN2/OUT2)-1

WDM side optical module

Backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


437



Table 13-111 Description of NM port of the LEX4 board Port Name

Description

PORT5 - PORT8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4.

VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4


AP1 - AP4


ClientLP1 - ClientLP2

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1

ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2

Internal logical ports.

IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2


13.11.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals. NOTE

l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.

l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.

l

Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 13-47. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.


438



Figure 13-47 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board Client side

WDM side

103(AP3/AP3)-1


Client side

WDM side 103(AP3/AP3)-1

LEX4 104(AP4/AP4)-1

Other board

TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

13.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the LEX4 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.


Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


439



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Enabled, Disabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

LPT Enabled


FEC Working State


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.


440



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC


Default: FEC


-


Band Type

-



-


Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100



C, CWDM Default: C



PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


441



Parameters for Ethernet interfaces Table 13-113 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-



TAG

Default: Tag Aware

Indicates the type of packets that can be processed by a port. Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the packets with VLAN IDs (Tag) and discards packets without VLAN IDs (Untag). If TAG is set to Tag Aware, VLAN priority and Default VLAN ID are invalid. Access: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and discards the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). Hybrid: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and transparently transmits the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). This parameter is valid only for UNI ports. NOTE This parameter is invalid for CAware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


442



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0


Entry Detection


The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.


Value

Description

Port

-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


443



Field

Value

Description

Port Attributes

UNI, NNI, C-Aware, SAware

A UNI port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port attributes include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

Default: UNI

An S-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have S-VLAN tags. A C-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have C-VLAN tags. NNI is a reserved port type and is not supported at present.

Table 13-115 Advanced Attributes (Internal Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4.



Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression. Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


444



Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%, with a step of 10%

If broadcast packet suppression is enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.

Default: 30%

Click D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to view the details.


Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold



Loop Detection


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port.

445



Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port.

Default: Enabled


PORT5 to PORT8: l 0 to 10000 l Default: 10000

Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic. Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port.

Table 13-117 Basic Attributes (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Working Mode

PORT5 to PORT8: l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex WAN l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN

Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


446



Field

Value

Description


1518 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port.

Default: 1522

Click D.21 Maximum Frame Length to view the details. Port Physical Parameters

-


MAC LoopBack


TheMAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


PHY LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback Default: Non-Loopback



Value

Description

Port

-





Default: Disable

Click D.23 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


447



Field

Value

Description

Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disable

Click D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.

13.11.11 LEX4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L EX 4

N/A


N/A



800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


448



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-119 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


449




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


450




Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Line code format

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP -

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-




NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


451



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7


452





l





TN11LEX4

64

67

13.12 LOA LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

13.12.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LOA board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LOA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

13.12.2 Application Overview The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/sor 1 x FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Table 13-123 provides the application scenarios for the LOA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


453



Table 13-123 Application scenarios for the LOA board Applica tion Scenari o

Maximum Input Capacity (Client Side)

Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capac ity (WD M Side)

Port Working Mode

Remarks

Scenario 1

8 x FE/FDDI/GE/ STM-1/STM-4/ OC-3/OC-12/FC100/ FICON/DVB-ASI/ ESCON/SDI

Anya>ODU0>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2 or Any->ODU0>ODU2>OTU2

1x OTU2

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]>ODU2>OTU2)

-

Scenario 2

4 x HD-SDI/HDSDIRBR/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/ FICON Express/ OTU1

OTU1/Anya>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2

ODU1 nonconvergence mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1>ODU2>OTU2)

-

Scenario 3

4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2 or OTU1>ODU1>ODU0>ODU2>OTU2

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0[>ODU1]>ODU2>OTU2)

-

Scenario 4

l 2 x 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR/FC400/ FICON4G

Anya>ODUflex>ODU2>OTU2

ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any>ODUflex>ODU2>OTU2)

l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI/FC400/ FICON4G services.

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU2>OTU2)

Only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/ FICON8G/FC1200/ FICON10G/10GE LANservices.

l 1 x FC800/ FICON8G

Scenario 5

1 x FC800/ FICON8G/FC1200/ FICON10G/10GE LAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Anya>ODU2>OTU2


l Only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/FICON8G services

454


Applica tion Scenari o



Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capac ity (WD M Side)

Port Working Mode

Remarks

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario. Two service mapping paths are supported in scenarios 1 and 3. The service mapping path is ODU0->ODU2 mapping path when the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter is set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port while it is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 when the parameter is set to Assign consecutive for the IN/OUT port. In application scenario 4, the board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board. When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive other types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G services and other types of services. In all the preceding scenarios, the LOA board supports hybrid transmission of any services except FC800/ FICON8G services. The LOA board provides a maximum of 10 Gbit/s total bandwidth.

13.12.3 Functions and Features The LOA board supports functions and features such as wavelength tunable, OTN functions, and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-124. Table 13-124 Functions and features of the LOA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LOA converts signals as follows: l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU2 l 4 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals)<-> 1 x OTU2 l 4 x OTU1 <-> 1 x OTU2 l 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G <-> 1 x OTU2 l 1 x FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G <-> 1 x OTU2 Supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G signals. The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


455




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON8G: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FICON10G: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s 3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s NOTE The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. The LOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves. The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000. The FICON8G service and the FC800 service are processed identically. For the FICON8G service, you can configure it as the FC800 service on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


456




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports PM functions for ODUflex. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports SM functions for OTU2.

WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE/FE/10GE LAN.

FEC encoding

l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with ITU-T G.709, only when the client side service type is OTU1.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type is STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OTU1.

l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


457




Description

Regeneratio n board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is GE or FE.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme



Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) and GE(TTT-GMP) modes. Supports encapsulation of 10GE LAN services in Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G).

Ethernet port working mode

l FE: 100M Full-Duplex

Loopback

Channel Loopback


l GE(TTT-GMP): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

Supported NOTE For FC800/FICON8G services, Inloop is not supported only in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).

Inloop

Not supported

Outloop

Supported NOTE It is supported only in FC800/FC1200/ FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G services in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

NOTE It is not supported in FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/ 10GE LAN/FICON8G services.


458




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


459




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performanc e monitoring)


13.12.4 Characteristic Code for the LOA The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.12.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS. Table 13-125 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-125 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5


460



Physical Port


TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


13.12.6 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 13.12.6.1 Application The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of service at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-48 shows the details. Figure 13-48 Application of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

OUT

8×ODU0

IN

RX1 TX1

IN

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

RX8

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

RX1

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

TX1

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

1xOTU2

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBRX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

NOTE

In the figure, the ODU1 procedure is optional in the service mapping path, When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2.

13.12.6.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


461



vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-49 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-50 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Figure 13-49 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8) ODU0:1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 4(RX2/TX2)-1

. . .


ODU0:2


. . .

. . . 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODU0:8


Figure 13-50 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

4(RX2/TX2)-1


IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2

ODU2:1

9(RX7/TX7)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-1

ODU1:4 ODU0:2



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

IN/OUT

ODU0:1


OCH:1

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.


462


13 Optical Transponder Unit Service processing module

NOTE

When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2, a client-side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2 of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-1 port of the TOM board to the clientside ports on the LOA board.

Table 13-126 Description of NM port of the LOA board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2

Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:(1–8)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:(1– 4)–ODU0:(1–2)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

13.12.6.3 Configuring Cross-Connections l

On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).

l

For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the board supports the Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-51. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-52.

l

Specify required services types for the board.

l

On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and in Figure 13-51, Figure 13-52. The electrical crossClientLP ports. For details, see connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. The RX1/TX1 port is crossconnected to the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port is cross-connected to the ClientLP2 port, and so on.

l

On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU0 in Figure 13-51, Figure 13-52. The electrical cross-connections ports. For details, see between the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random but channel 1 on each ClientLP port is used in the cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


463



NOTE

If all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(TTT-GMP) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly. users can apply the 8*GE->8*ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2) and the Service Type to GE(TTT-GMP) for the 8 ports. When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a clientside optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.

Figure 13-51 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)

Client side

WDM side 1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:2 2

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:3 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:4 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:5 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:6 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:7 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:8


The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


464



Figure 13-52 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side 1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1

5(RX3/TX3)-1

1

6(RX4/TX4)-1

1

7(RX5/TX5)-1

1

8(RX6/TX6)-1

1

9(RX7/TX7)-1

1

10(RX8/TX8)-1



IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:2 2

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:2



13.12.7 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) 13.12.7.1 Application The LOA board converges a maximum of four channels of service signals at a rate ranging from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-53 shows the details. Figure 13-53 Application of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

4×ODU1

8×ODU0


8×ODU0

8×ODU0

RX1 TX1

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1×ODU2

RX8

4×ODU1

TX8

M U X IN / OUT D M U X

1×ODU2

RX1


1×OTU2

TX1 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/ STM–16/OC-48/ 4 FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

1xOTU2

4 RX8

HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/ STM–16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

TX8

465



NOTE

In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.

13.12.7.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-54 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-54 Port diagram of the LOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2)) WDM Side

Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1~ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)


ODU1:1


ODU1:2

ODU2:1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1


ODU1:3


ODU1:4


OCH:1

IN/OUT



NOTE


Table 13-127 Description of the LOA board's ports on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1.


466



Port Name

Description

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1: (1–4)

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU1 in Figure 13-55. The cross-connections between the ClientLP ports. For details, see and ODU1 ports are random and at most four cross-connections between them can be used.

Figure 13-55 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


7(RX5/TX5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1


9(RX7/TX7)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1

1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2





The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


467



13.12.8 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 13.12.8.1 Application The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x OTU1 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-56 shows the details. Figure 13-56 Application of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 [->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

IN

RX1 TX1

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

RX8

8×ODU0

TX8

4×ODU1

4

OUT


1×ODU2

RX1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

TX1

OTU1

1xOTU2

4 OTU1 RX8 TX8

NOTE


13.12.8.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-57 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-58 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


468



Figure 13-57 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

WDM side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

ODU0:2


ODU0:3


ODU0:4

ODU2:1

208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-1

ODU0:7


ODU0:8

IN/OUT

OCH:1

Figure 13-58 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 ODU1:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 ODU0:2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1


ODU0:1 ODU1:2

OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODU0:2


ODU0:1


ODU0:2


ODU2:1

WDM side

ODU1:4



NOTE

In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


469




Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:(1–8)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2).

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:(1– 4)–ODU0:(1–2)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 [->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).

l

For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-59. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-60.

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU0 in Figure 13-59, Figure 13-60. The cross-connections between ports. For details, see the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random and at most 8 cross-connections between the ports can be used. NOTE

A maximum of four cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports can be used. The 3(RX1/TX1)-1 port are cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1 and 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-2 ports, the 4 (RX2/TX2)-1 port are cross-connected to the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-1 and 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-2 ports, and so on.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


470



Figure 13-59 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:2 1

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:3 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:4 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:5 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:6 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:7 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:8



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


471



Figure 13-60 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:1 1

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:2



13.12.9 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) 13.12.9.1 Application The LOA board converges a maximum of 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR, 2 x FC400/FICON4G, or 1 x FC800/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-61 shows the details.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


472



Figure 13-61 Application of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2

1xOTU2

LOA

LOA

2×ODUflex

1×ODU2

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

1 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/ FC400/ FICON4/FC800/ FICON8G

8×ODU0

2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

2×ODUflex

3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/ FC400/ FICON4/FC800/ FICON8G

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1

2

NOTE

In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBRI/ FC400/FICON4G services, and only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/FICON8G services.

13.12.9.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-62 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-62 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP2/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1

WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)

ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

10(RX8/TX8)-1



OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODUflex:2



NOTE

l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G services as shown in the figure (the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example). l Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800/FICON8G services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


473




Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Internal logical port. The paths is numbered 1.

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODUflex:(1– 2)

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2). NOTE

The board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board.

l


l

U2000 Create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODUflex ports. For details, see in Figure 13-63. The cross-connections between the ClientLP and ODUflex ports are random. NOTE

When configuring cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots. Table 13-130 provides the number of ODUflex timeslots required by a client service. The cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. For example, the 3(RX1/TX1)-1 port is cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1, the 4(RX2/TX2)-1 port is cross-connected to the 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP)-1 port, and son on. For the FC400/FICON4G service, only two cross-connections are allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For the FC800/FICON8G service, only one cross-connection is allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports.

Table 13-130 ODUflex timeslot

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Client service type

ODUflex Timeslot

3G-SDI

3

3G-SDIRBR

3

FC400/FICON4G

4

FC800/FICON8G

7


474



Figure 13-63 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


7(RX5/TX5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1


9(RX7/TX7)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1



1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1




13.12.10 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2) 13.12.10.1 Application The LOA board converges 1 x FC800/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G. 694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-64 shows the details.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


475



Figure 13-64 Application of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2) 1xOTU2

1xOTU2

LOA

FC800/ FC1200/FICON 8G/FICON10G/ 10GE LAN

1×ODU2

1×OTU2

8×ODU0

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

FC800/ FC1200/FICON 8G/FICON10G/ 10GE LAN

LOA M U X / D M U X

NOTE

In this scenario, only the RX1/TX1 can receive and transmit FC800/FC1200/FICON8G/FICON10G/10GE LAN services. When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive other types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G services and other types of services.

13.12.10.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-65 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-65 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2) WDM Side

Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1



ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT



NOTE

In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


476



Table 13-131 Description of the LOA board's ports on the NMS Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2).

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU1 ports. For details, see in Figure 13-66 NOTE

In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.

Figure 13-66 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1



1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1



13.12.11 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOA board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-67 shows the block diagram of the functions of the LOA board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


477



Figure 13-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


Service encapsulation and mapping module

E/O OTN processing module

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal flow The LOA board can receive Any optical signals on the client side (signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gibt/s or FC800//FC1200/FICON8G/FICON10G/10GE LAN signals). NOTE

The LOA board supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G signals and low-rate signals. The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. For details on the signal types, see 13.12.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


478



The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2 payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors performance of Any signals. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


479



– Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


13.12.12 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-68 shows the front panel of the LOA board. Figure 13-68 Front panel of the LOA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


480



NOTE

To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, IN and OUT interface can only use G.657A2 fibers.



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-132 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-132 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



13.12.13 Valid Slots One slot houses one LOA board. Table 13-133 shows the valid slots for the LOA board. Table 13-133 Valid slots for the LOA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid slots


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU42, IU45–IU68


IU1–IU8, IU12–IU27, IU29–IU36


481



Product

Valid slots


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU18


IU1–IU16




IU2–IU5

13.12.14 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LOA, refer to Table 13-134. Table 13-134 LOA parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status





Default: NonLoopback Channel Loopback


Query or set the Channel Loopback.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


482



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200, FICON10G, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, SDI, GE(TTT-GMP), GE (GFP-T), HDSDI, 10GE LAN, HDSDIRBR, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI, 3GSDIRBR


Default: None

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE (TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The LOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the clientside services received by the ports varies with the working modes. l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2): Supports HDSDI, HDSDIRBR, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports OTU1 service. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2): Supports 3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR, FC400, FC800 services. l ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2): Supports FC800, FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE LANservice. NOTE The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000. The FICON8G service and the FC800 service are processed identically. For the FICON8G service, you can configure it as the FC800 service on the U2000.

Laser Status



l Client side: Off

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


483



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled




Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.

Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


484



Field

Value

Description

Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On





Service Mode

Client Mode, OTN Mode Default: Client Mode

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.


-


Band Type

-



-



485



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0



C, CWDM Default: C



See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600


Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M FullDuplex



The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



486



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

ODUflex Tolerance (ppm)

0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the LOA board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the LOA board receives other services, set it to 100.

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode

Assign random, Assign consecutive Default: Assign random

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

When the ODU timeslot configuration mode is Assign consecutive, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2. When the mode is set to Assign random, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0–>ODU2.


487



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2), ODU1 nonconvergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).

This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.

Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)

13.12.15 LOA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


488



Bo ard





TN 11L OA

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A


S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 1600-M5E-SN-I-0.3 km (SFP+) 1600-SM-LC-L-10 km (SFP+) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 10G BASE-SR-0.3km(SFP +) 10G BASE-LR-10km(SFP +) 10G BASE-LR(SFP+) 10G BASE-ER(SFP+)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


489



NOTE



I-16-2 km module, S-16.1-15 km module, L-16.1-40 km module and L-16.2-80 km module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


490



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

1000 BASE-BX10-U module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D module, 1000 BASE-BX-U module, and 1000 BASE-BXD module can be used to access GE signals.

Table 13-136 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

Value 1000 BASEBX10-U

1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


491



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3ah-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


492



NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


493


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.

Table 13-138 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDI services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

≤3


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


nm

3.0


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-16


dBm

0


494



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km module can be used to access FC400, and FICON4G signals.

Table 13-139 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-1.1

-1


dBm

-9

-8.4

Eye pattern mask

-

Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2) parameter template


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600


dBm

-15

-18


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


495



Table 13-140 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC800/FICON8G services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1600-M5E-SNI-0.3 km (SFP+)

1600-SM-LC-L-10 km (SFP+)


Gbit/s

8.5

8.5

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

-0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1

-12.6


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


496




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


497



NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9


498



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type Maximum reflectance

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km dB

-27

NOTE

10G BASE-LR(SFP+) and 10G BASE-ER(SFP+) module can be used to access 10GE LAN, FC800, FICON8G, FC1200, and FICON10G signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASE-LR(SFP+)

10G BASE-ER(SFP+)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

3


dBm

-6

-2


dB

3.5

8.2


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605


dBm

-14.4

-14 (11.1G) -15.8 (10.3125G)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


499



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


10G BASE-ER(SFP+)


dBm

0.5

-1

reflectance

dB

-12

-27

NOTE

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) and 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module can be used to access FC800/ FICON8G/10GE LAN signals


Unit

Optical Module Type




Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN


PIN

500



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800



PIN 501



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


502



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


503



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)





TN11LOA


31.8

36

32.8

37

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

13.13 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

13.13.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


504




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LOG

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LOG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions l

Function: – The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. – The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. – The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 13.13.3 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 13.13.11 LOG Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOG

TN12LOG

The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the TN11LOG. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board employs AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LOG

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

None

-


505



13.13.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-69. Figure 13-69 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system LOG

LOG

8

1

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

GE

M U X / D M U X

GE

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1

GE

8

GE

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: from paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: from mesh group slot OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: N/A

13.13.3 Functions and Features The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-148. Table 13-148 Functions and features of the LOG board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

LOG converts signals: 8 x GE <->1 x OTU2


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s NOTE The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.


506




Description


OptiX OSN 8800 subrack: N/A. OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connect boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function


WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for:

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

LPT function

Supported

FEC encoding

TN11LOG:

l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12LOG: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


507




Description

Regeneration board

l TN11LOG: TN11LSXR l TN12LOG: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LOG


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.




GE(GFP-F): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z


508






13.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-70 and Figure 13-71 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


509



Figure 13-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Backplane(service cross-connection)

8

GE WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

E/O

E/O GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


510



Figure 13-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800) WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


E/O GE encapsulation and mapping module



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals on the TN12LOG. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


511



The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


512



Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.13.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-72 shows the front panel of the LOG board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


513



Figure 13-72 Font panel of the LOG board

LOG STAT ACT PROG SRV


LOG



l


l


l





514



Table 13-149 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board Interface

Type

Function

INa

LC


OUTa

LC


TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC


a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.


13.13.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LOG board. Table 13-150 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board. Table 13-150 Valid slots for TN11LOG board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-151 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board. Table 13-151 Valid slots for TN12LOG board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


515



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-152 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-152 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


516



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-73 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 13-153 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-73 Port diagram of the LOG board Client side

WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)

201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1



WDM-side opticalmodule

Table 13-153 Description of NM port of the LOG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

IN/OUT


13.13.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections between LOG boards and other boards on the NMS. If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and

in Figure 13-74.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

3

in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from the


517



client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LOG board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port. There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.

l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by

and

in Figure 13-74.

Figure 13-74 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board Client side

Other board 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

5 3

4 2 1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

LOG The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

1 2 3 4 5

Other board TN11L4G / TN11LDGD / TN11LDGS / TN11LOG / TN12LOG / TN11LQG / TN13LQM / TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG / TN11TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


518



13.13.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 13-154. Table 13-154 LOG Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused




Default: Used


Default: NonLoopback Service Type

GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Off, On

Laser Status




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




519



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



520



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC

Default: Enabled

Default: FEC



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0



C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600


Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex

Default: C

Default: 9600

Default: 1000M FullDuplex

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



521



Field

Value

Description




Default: None

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.

13.13.11 LOG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


522



Bo ard





TN 11L OG

N/A


800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

N/A


800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

TN 12L OG

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


523



NOTE

(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, consult with the product manager at the local representative office. NOTE



When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


524



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


525



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


526



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-158 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN


NRZ

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


527



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

528



Table 13-159 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

-

Line code format

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD

4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN

NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

APD


529



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


530



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


531



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


532



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


533



Power Consumption Boar d




TN1 1LO G


40

45

43

48

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

43.5

48.5

4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD

55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44


38.0

42.44

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

41.61

46.6


43.04

48.0

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

TN1 2LO G

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

13.14 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

13.14.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


534



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LO M

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2LO M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Function: – The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports AFEC-2. Boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other. For details, see 13.14.3 Functions and Features. – Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G. For details, see 13.14.3 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance: – The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.14.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.14.10 LOM Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOM

TN12LOM

The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the TN11LOM. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board employs AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LOM

None

-

13.14.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


535



2.5G, or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-75 and Figure 13-76. Figure 13-75 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system LOM

LOM M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

GE ISC 1G 1 ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON 8 FICON4G FICON Express

GE ISC 1G 1 ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON 8 FICON4G FICON Express

Figure 13-76 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system LOM

LOM M U X / D M U X

1

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

GE ISC 1G ISC 2G FC100 1 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express 8 InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G 3G-SDI

8

GE ISC 1G ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G 3G-SDI

NOTE

For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The total rate of eight channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

13.14.3 Functions and Features The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-163. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


536



Table 13-163 Functions and features of the LOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LOM converts signals as follows: l 8 x GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G <->1 x OTU2 l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G <->1 x OTU2 l 2 x 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G <->1 x OTU2 Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively. Supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km.


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s NOTE The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.

OTN function


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported



537




Description

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE.

FEC encoding

TN11LOM: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12LOM: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures.


l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l TN11LOM:

Regeneration board

TN11LSXR l TN12LOM: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is GE.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LOM


Not supported

Protection scheme



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



538




Description



Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol IBM Private Protocol NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


539






13.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-77 and Figure 13-78 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


540



Figure 13-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board

Client side

GE encapsulation and mapping module

O/E

RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8


FC encapsulation and mapping module FICON encapsulation and mapping module

WDM side


OUT

O/E IN

ISC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


541



Figure 13-78 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board GE encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


FICON encapsulation and mapping module ISC encapsulation and mapping module

WDM side OTN processing module

E/O

O/E

InfiniBand encapsulation and mapping module

OUT

IN


Any encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels or four channels or two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


542



After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels or four channels or two channels of the electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels or four channels or two channels of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels or four channels or two channels of the optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – ISC encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


543



Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC performance. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC performance. – FICON encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON performance. – InfiniBand encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of InfiniBand signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors InfiniBand performance. – Any encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.14.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-79 and Figure 13-80 show the front panel of the LOM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


544



Figure 13-79 Front panel of the TN11LOM board

LOM STAT ACT PROG SRV

LINK/ACT1 LINK/ACT2 LINK/ACT3 LINK/ACT4 LINK/ACT5 LINK/ACT6 LINK/ACT7 LINK/ACT8

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 RX5

OUT IN

TX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

LOM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


545



Figure 13-80 Front panel of the TN12LOM board LOM STAT ACT PROG SRV


LOM

Indicators Twelve indicators are present on the front panel: l


l


l


l


l

Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green



546



NOTE

Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).

Interfaces Table 13-164 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-164 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board Interface

Type

Function

INa

LC


OUTa

LC


TX1-TX8

LC

Transmit service signals to client equipment. Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receive service signals from client equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.


13.14.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board. Table 13-165 and Table 13-166 show the valid slots for the LOM board. Table 13-165 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67


547



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35


IU1-IU16


IU3-IU5

NOTE OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.

Table 13-166 Valid slots for TN12LOM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.




548



Table 13-167 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The LOM board maps a client service into an STM-64 signal and then multiplexes the STM-64 signal into an OTU2. The STM-64 signal contains eight timeslots, each having a bandwidth of 1.24 Gbit/s. Different client service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of client service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

1

FC100

1

FC200

2

FC400

4

FICON

1

FICON4G

4

FICON Express

2

ISC 1G

1

ISC 2G

2

3G-SDI

4

InfiniBand 2.5G

2

InfiniBand 5G

4


549



13.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 13-168. Table 13-168 LOM Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused




Default: Used



l TN11LOM: None, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G l TN12LOM: None, Any, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, 3G-SDI


Default: None

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


550



Field

Value

Description


270 to 5000

sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.

Default: 622

NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12LOM.

See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Off, On

Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


551



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.

Default: 0s Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled FC Internal Working Mode

Normal Mode, Special Mode Default: Normal Mode

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. In different internal working mode, the board can work with the FC storage equipment of different vendors. l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can work with the mainstream FC switch storage equipment (such as the Brocade switch). Such equipment inserts the 10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link failure. l Special mode: In this mode, the board can work with the switch storage equipment (such as the McData switch) that uses special processing standard. Such equipment inserts the NOS alarm after detecting a link failure.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


552



Field

Value

Description

OFC Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

Default: Disabled

NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC

Default: Enabled

Default: FEC

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


553



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600



Default: C

Default: 9600

Default: 1000M FullDuplex FC Distance Extension

Disabled, Enabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

PRBS Test Status


The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. See D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. NOTE Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.

See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning NOTE Only TN12LOM supports this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


554



13.14.10 LOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L OM

N/A



N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km FC400/FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode) FC400/FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)


1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


555



Bo ard





TN 12L OM

N/A


800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN


1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D FC400/FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode) FC400/FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

NOTE



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


556






Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


557



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload

dBm


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


558



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multi mode)

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355

830 to 860

1266 to 1360


dBm

-1.1

-1

-2.5

-3


559



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multi mode)


FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

-8.4

-9.5

-10


dBm

-9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600

770 to 860

1270 to 1580


dBm

-15

-18

-17

-18


dBm

0

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


560



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


561




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

562




Unit

Optical Module Type

-

Line code format






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

APD


563



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


564



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


565



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LOM: l


l


TN12LOM: l


l






TN1 1LO M

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

92.7

101.7

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


566


Boar d






92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0


61.8

69.2


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6


66.7

75.0

1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

TN1 2LO M

NOTE When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W.

13.15 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

13.15.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


567



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LQ G

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.15.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-81. Figure 13-81 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system LQG

LQG

1

1×ODU5G

4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1×ODU5G

GE

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1

M U X / D M U X

GE

4 GE

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

13.15.3 Functions and Features The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-177. Table 13-177 Functions and features of the LQG board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

LQG converts signals: 4 x GE <-> 1 x OTU5G/FEC5G




568




Description


l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G. l Supports SM functions for OTU5G.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Supported

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures.


l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported


569




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.





Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z


570






13.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-82 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


571



Figure 13-82 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board Backplane (service corss-connection)

GE

Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

E/O GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module

Client-side

optical module

O/E

OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals. The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


572



After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/ FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


573



– Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


13.15.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-83 shows the front panel of the LQG board. Figure 13-83 Front panel of the LQG board

LQG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN

LQG

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


574





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-178 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-178 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.15.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQG board.

Valid Slots Table 13-179 shows the valid slots for the LQG board. Table 13-179 Valid slots for the LQG board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


575



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU5

13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-180 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-180 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-84 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 13-181 describes the meaning of each port. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


576



Figure 13-84 Port diagram of the LQG board WDM side

Client side 201(LP/LP)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 Cross-connect module

201(LP/LP)-1


1(IN/OUT)-1


Table 13-181 Description of NM port of the LQG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


LP


IN/OUT


13.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-85.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-85.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

4

in Figure 13-85.

NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


577


l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l


5

in Figure 13-85.

The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Figure 13-85 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board Client side

Other board

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1

201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

LQG The straight-through of the board

1

The internal cross-connection of the board

2

The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


13.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 13-182. Table 13-182 LQG Parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



578



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status






GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE


Off, On

Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled

Service Mode

OTN, SDH

Default: Enabled



FEC Working State

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.


579



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600



Default: 9600




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.


580



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status



13.15.11 LQG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L QG

N/A



5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km




NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


581




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


582




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


583




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-2

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

3400

3400


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-25

-25


dBm

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


APD

584




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

50 km (31.1 mi.)

70 km (43.5 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

2

2


dB

5

5


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30


ps/nm

1000

1400


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1450 to 1620

1450 to 1620


dBm

-18

-28


dBm

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


585





l






TN11LQG


28.4

32


31.0

34.4


23.18

26


13.16 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board

13.16.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 3LQ M

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y


586



Type The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-187 lists the types of the LQM. Table 13-187 LQM type description Board

Type

Description

LQM

Single transmitting and single receiving board

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1.

Dual-fed selective receiving board

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.

13.16.2 Application The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-86 and Figure 13-87. Figure 13-86 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving) RX1

LQM

LQM

TX1

RX1

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

1×ODU1

TX4

M U X IN1 / D OUT1 M U X

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s RX4

M U OUT1 X / IN1 D M U X

TX1

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s TX4 RX4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: l GE: From/To cross-connect board l 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


587



Figure 13-87 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving) RX1

LQM

MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

TX4

LQM

TX1

MUX/ DMUX OUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

RX1

1×ODU1

OUT2

IN1

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


OUT1




NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.16.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-188. Table 13-188 Functions and features of the LQM Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQM converts signals: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) signals<-> 1 x OTU1. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


588




Description




OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported



589




Description

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.

LPT function


FEC encoding



NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)





Port MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518–9600 bytes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

590




Description

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


591




Description




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


592






13.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-88 and Figure 13-89 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


593



Figure 13-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O





O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


594



Figure 13-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Backplane(service cross-connection) 100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Crossconnect module


Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


595


l


Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


596



– Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.16.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-90 shows the front panel of the LQM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


597



Figure 13-90 Front panel of the LQM board

LQM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQM



l


l


l





598



Table 13-189 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.16.6 Valid Slots The LQM occupies one slot. Table 13-190 shows the valid slots for the LQM board. Table 13-190 Valid slots for the LQM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.



599



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-191 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-191 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-91 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 13-192 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-91 Port diagram of the LQM Client side

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1


201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module



1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1


Table 13-192 Description of NM port of the LQM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4



600



Port Name

Description

ClientLP


IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2


Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.

l

In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.

l

For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

HD-SDI

11

DVB-ASI

2

SDI

3


601



Service Type

Number of Timeslots

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.16.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-92.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-92. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-92. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-92. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


602



Figure 13-92 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1


WDM side

WDM side

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

LQM 1


2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 13-92.

13.16.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 13-193. Table 13-193 LQM Parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



603



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused




Default: Used



None, Any, FE, GE, GE(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None


100 to 2200

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 0





Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled Service Mode

Client Mode, OTN Mode

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Used to set the service mode of the board.

Default: Client Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


604



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


Default: Enabled


C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600



Default: C

Default: 9600


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



605



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




Default: None

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled

Default: Disabled

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

13.16.11 LQM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


606



Bo ard



WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module

TN 13L QM

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A


S-16.1-15 km


L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NOTE



The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


607


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

SLM

SLM

SLM

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Optical source type

-

MLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


608


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


609


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

9

9

9


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


610



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


611




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


612




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


NRZ

613



Parameter

Unit



-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.5

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


614






TN13LQM

32.6

35.9

13.17 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

13.17.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LQM D

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LQM D

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions l Board

Function: OTU1/HD-SDI/ SDI/FDDI services

WDM Specification

PRBS function Client side

WDM side

TN11LQMD

N

CWDM/DWDM

N

Y

TN12LQMD

Y

DWDM

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


615



For details, see 13.17.3 Functions and Features. l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.17.11 LQMD Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LQMD

TN12LQMD

The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the TN11LQMD. NOTE A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LQMD

None

-

13.17.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-93. Figure 13-93 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system LQMD

RX1

IN1

TX1

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

LQMD

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

TX1 RX1

OUT1

1×ODU1

OUT2 IN2

TX4

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1

OUT1




NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


616



13.17.3 Functions and Features The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-200. Table 13-200 Functions and features of the LQMD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQMD converts signals as follows: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


617




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

TN11LQMD: l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications. TN12LQMD: Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

LPT function


FEC encoding



618




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE TN11LQMD only supports Poisson mode.

ALS function


Test frame

TN11LQMD: not supported TN12LQMD: The board supports the test frame only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.




FE: 100M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


619




Description


Protocols or standards for transparent transmission (non-performance monitoring)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


620






13.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-95 and Figure 13-94 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


621



Figure 13-94 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

E/O




Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


622



Figure 13-95 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) Backplane(service cross-connection)

100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s

Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O



E/O OTN Crossprocessing connect module module

Splitter



OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


623



The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


624



– OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.17.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-96 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


625



Figure 13-96 Front panel of the LQMD board

LQMD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQMD



l


l


l





626



Table 13-201 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.17.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQMD board. Table 13-202 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board. Table 13-202 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-203 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board. Table 13-203 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


627



13.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-204. Table 13-204 Characteristic code for the LQMD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the forth optical signal


Last four digits

Frequency of the forth optical signal


For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210. "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-205 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-205 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6


628



NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-97 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 13-206 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-97 Port diagram of the LQMD board Client side

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1







1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1


NOTE

TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Table 13-206 Description of NM port of the LQMD board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2




l


l

For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


629



l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

HD-SDI

11

DVB-ASI

2

SDI

3

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.17.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created.


630



– Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-98.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-98. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMD board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-98. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown by

5

in Figure 13-98.

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


and

in Figure 13-98.

631



Figure 13-98 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


4

WDM side

WDM side


2


1


LQMD 1


2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


13.17.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 13-207. Table 13-207 LQMD parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



632



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused




Default: Used



None, Any, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.


Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


633



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.05 0 to 80/1560.61/192.1 00


Default: Enabled


C, CWDM

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600



Default: C

Default: 9600


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



634



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.



Default: None

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

13.17.11 LQMD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


635



Bo ard





TN 11L QM D

N/A

I-16-2 km


N/A

S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

TN 12L QM D

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


N/A



NOTE

For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


636



NOTE





Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


637


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


638




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


639



NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


640



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400


641



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-







NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


642


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type








10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2


dB

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

APD

1300 to 1575


643




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


644







TN11 LQM D


57.1

65.7

61.1

67.2

31.1

34.3

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

TN12 LQM D

-

13.18 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

13.18.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


645



Boar d

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LQM S

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LQM S

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y


Function:

Board

OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/ FDDI services on client-side

WDM Specification

Grooming of ODU1 signal

TN11LQMS

N

CWDM/DWDM

N

TN12LQMS

Y

DWDM

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.18.11 LQMS Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LQMS

TN12LQMS

The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the TN11LQMS. NOTE A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LQMS

None

-

13.18.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


646



Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals Figure 13-99 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode) RX1

LQMS

LQMS

OUT IN

TX4

RX1 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s TX4

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1



1×OTU1

M U X / D M U X

TX1

TX1

RX4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: l GE: From/To cross-connect board l 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals Figure 13-100 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode) Client services

1xODU1

1xODU1

LQMS 1

LQMS


1 1×ODU1


1×ODU1


1×OTU1

1×OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1×ODU1

8

1×ODU1

TOM

Client services

TOM 8

647



NOTE

Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.

13.18.3 Functions and Features The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-214. Table 13-214 Functions and features of the LQMS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQMS converts signals as follows: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1. l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


648




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN12LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l TN11LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

TN11LQMS: l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications. TN12LQMS: Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



649




Description

ESC function

Supported.

PRBS test function

TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

LPT function


FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE TN11LQMS only supports Poisson mode.

ALS function


Test frame

TN11LQMS: not supported TN12LQMS: the board supports the test frame function only when the clientside service type is FE or GE.

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode). l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode). NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


650




Description




FE: 100M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


651




Description




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


652




Description


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

13.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-101, Figure 13-102 and Figure 13-103 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


653



Figure 13-101 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4




E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


654



Figure 13-102 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board (LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) Backplane(service cross-connection) 100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Service CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module


E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow (Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals) The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


655



with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Figure 13-103 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) ODU1

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side E/O

Crossconnect module


OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


656



Signal Flow (Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals) In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Module Function l


l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


657



paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.18.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-104 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


658



Figure 13-104 Front panel of the LQMS board

LQMS STAT ACT PROG SRV


LQMS



l


l


l





659



Table 13-215 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.18.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQMS board. Table 13-216 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board. Table 13-216 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-217 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board. Table 13-217 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


660



13.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-218 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-218 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-105 and Figure 13-106 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table 13-219 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-105 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode) Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Service processing module


1(IN1/OUT1)-1


661



NOTE

TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.

Figure 13-106 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode) WDM side 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


1(IN1/OUT1)-1


Table 13-219 Description of NM port of the LQMS board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


ODU1LP

Internal logical port.

IN/OUT




l


l

For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE


662



Service Type

Number of Timeslots

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

HD-SDI

11

DVB-ASI

2

SDI

3

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.18.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1 Mode. NOTE

The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.

LQM Mode: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created.


663



– Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-107.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-107. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMS board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-107. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-107. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.18.8 Physical and Logical Ports.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


664



Figure 13-107 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board Client side


3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1

Client side

WDM side

Other board

5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1


WDM side


LQMS 1


2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by

and

in Figure 13-107.

NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800): l

Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 13-108.

l

The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


665



Figure 13-108 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


WDM side

WDM side

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

LQMS The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

13.18.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 13-220. Table 13-220 LQMS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and queryies the optical interface name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Channel Use Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



666



Field

Value

Description





None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.


Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


667



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100



C, CWDM Default: C

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600



Default: 9600


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



668



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.



Default: None

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Board Mode

LQM Mode, NS1 Mode

Default: Disabled

Default: LQM Mode

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario. NOTE This parameter is only available for TN12LQMS.

See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

13.18.11 LQMS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


669



Bo ard





TN 11L QM S

N/A

I-16-2 km


N/A

S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km


TN 12L QM S

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


N/A



NOTE

For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


670



NOTE





Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


671


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


672




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


673



NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9


674



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance

dB



-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


675



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-







NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


676


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type









nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575


Unit



-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


677



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


678







TN1 1LQ MS


56.3

64.5

60.4

66.4

29

32.3

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

TN1 2LQ MS

-

13.19 LSC LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.19.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSC board is TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN12 LSC

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


679



Variants Table 13-227 Available variants of the TN12LSC board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-PIN

HFEC

T11

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC. RZ)-PIN

SDFEC

13.19.2 Application The LSC board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive direction, the board receives one 100GE optical signal from the client equipment, maps the optical signal into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal into a standard WDM wavelength. For the position of the LSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-109. Figure 13-109 Position of the LSC board in the WDM system

LSC M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

100GE

LSC

100GE

13.19.3 Functions and Features The LSC board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-228.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


680



Table 13-228 Functions and features of the LSC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSC converts signal as follows: l 1x 100GE<->1x OTU4


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU4. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4. l Supports SM function for OTU4.

WDM specification



The board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Regeneration board

WDM-side signals from this board can be regenerated by another TN11LTX or TN54NS4

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


681




Description


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Client side

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop Protocols or standards compliance


IEEE 802.3ba



13.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSC board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-110 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSC.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


682



Figure 13-110 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSC board Client side RX TX

WDM side O/E

100GE OTN Service processing encapsulation module and mapping module

E/O Clientside optical module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage

DC power supply from the backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by the SCC)

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSC board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSC to the WDM side of the LSC, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signal from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical signal to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs encapsulation, OTN framing, and HFEC/SDFEC coding and outputs one channel of OTU4 signal to the WDM-side optical module. After receiving the OTU4 signal, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion, generates OTU4 signal at DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1, and then outputs the OTU4 signal through the OUT optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. The WDM-side optical module then converts the OTU4 optical signal into electrical signal.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


683



After the O/E conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the signal processing module, which performs OTU4 framing, HFEC/SDFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signal and then outputs one channel of the client-side electrical signal. The channel of the client-side electrical signal is sent to the client-side optical module, which converts the electrical signal into optical signal and then outputs the optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion for one channel of 100GE optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: converts one channel of electrical signal into one channel of 100GE optical signal. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signal to OTU4 optical signal. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signal, maps the signal into the payload of an OTU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signal, processes overheads in OTU4 signal, and performs the HFEC/ SDFEC encoding and decoding.

l


l


13.19.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSC board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


684



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-111 show the front panel of the TN12LSC board. Figure 13-111 Front panel of the TN12LSC board

LSC STAT ACT PROG SRV


OUT IN


TX RX

LSC

NOTE

To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers.



685



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-229 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-229 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSC board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.19.6 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN12LSC board. Table 13-230 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSC board. Table 13-230 Valid slots for the TN12LSC board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU5, IU11-IU15


IU1-IU15


686



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14

NOTE

The LSC board occupies four slots. The rear connector for connecting the LSC board to the backplane is located in the left slot of the four slots. Therefore, the slot number for the LSC board is displayed as the left slot of the four slots on the NMS. For example, if the LSC board is housed in the slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4, then the slot number for the LSC board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.

13.19.7 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-231 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-231 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSC board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.19.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSC, refer to Table 13-232. Table 13-232 LSC parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



687



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

Service Type

100GE



Default: 100GE








Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




688



Field

Value

Description


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS , BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF


Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the holdoff time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.

Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


689



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

FEC Mode

HFEC, SDFEC

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100

Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows:

Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value.

Receive Band Type

C Default: C


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Receive Band Typeparameter sets the receive band type of a board.


690



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C


Default: C

PRBS Test Status



Dispersion Compensation Value

-

Queries the dispersion compensation value of the board.

PMD Threshold (ps)

-

Queries the PMD threshold of the board.

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

This parameter is reserved for future use.

Default: Disabled

13.19.9 LSC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 12L SC

N/A

100GBASE-10×10G10 km(CFP)

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)PIN

N/A

100GBASE-LR4-10 km(CFP)

55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN

NOTE

A 100GBASE-10×10G-10km optical module cannot connect to an IEEE 100GBASE-SR10 module. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


691




Unit


Value 100G BASE-LR4-10 km (CFP)

-

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Signaling Speed per Lane

Gbit/s

25.78125

Signaling Speed Accuracy

ppm

-100 to 100

Minimum Lane Center Wavelength

nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09

Maximum Lane Center Wavelength

nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Total Average Launch Power (Min)

dBm

1.7

Total Average Launch Power (Max)

dBm

10.5

Transmit OMA per Lane (Min)

dBm

-1.3

Transmit OMA per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Average Launch Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-4.3

Average Launch Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Optical Extinction Ratio (Min)

dB

4

Side Mode Suppression Ratio (Min)

dB

30


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


692



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver type

-

PIN

Signaling Speed per Lane

Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Average Receiver Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-10.6

Average Receiver Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Minimum receiver overload (OMA) per Lane

dBm

4.5

Receiver Sensitivity (OMA) per Lane

dBm

-8.6

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be used as the reference for equipment commissioning.


Unit


Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km (CFP)

-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


693



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

4.2


dBm

13.5


dBm

-5.8


dBm

3.5


694



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-2.8

Transmit OMA per Lane (Typ)

dBm

-0.8


dBm

3.5


dB

2.5


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


695



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km (CFP) 1573 1581 1589 1597

Receiver Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-10.8

Receiver Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

3.5


dBm

3.5


dBm

-8.8

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-235 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


696



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dB

N/A


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


dB

35

Dispersion tolerance (backto-back)

ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-236 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC, RZ) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 55000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


dB

N/A


697



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

55000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


dB

35


ps/nm

55000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

WDM-Side Module



TN12LSC

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(HFEC, RZ)PIN

240

265

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC, RZ)PIN

255

285


698



13.20 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.20.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LSQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Variants Table 13-237 Available variants of the TN11LSQ board Variant


T01

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN

T02

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN

13.20.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-112. Figure 13-112 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system LSQ

IN

M U X / D M U X

IN OUT


TX

1×ODU3

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

1×OTU3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1×ODU3

RX STM-256/ OC-768/ TX OTU3

LSQ

STM-256/ RX OC-768/ OTU3

699



13.20.3 Functions and Features The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-238. Table 13-238 Functions and features of the LSQ board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSQ converts signals as follows: l 1x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3<->1x OTU3


STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s

OTN function

l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side.

OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. l Supports SM function for OTU3. WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU3.


NOTE The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


700




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.

Regeneration board

TN54NS3

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




701






13.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-113 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


702



Figure 13-113 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O


WDM side E/O OTN processing module

O/E

Client-side OTN processing module


OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


703



After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Power supply module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

704



– Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

13.20.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-114 shows the front panel of the LSQ board. Figure 13-114 Front panel of the LSQ board

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

705



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-239 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-239 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.20.6 Valid Slots Two slots houses one LSQ board. Table 13-240 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board. Table 13-240 Valid slots for the LSQ board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU17


706



The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-241 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-241 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSQ board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.20.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 13-242. Table 13-242 LSQ parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


707



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, OC-768, OTU-3, STM-256 Default: STM-256

Laser Status


The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


Disabled, Enabled

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Enabled

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC Default: AFEC

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.


708



Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.


709



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

Default: C


See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

13.20.9 LSQ Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


710



Bo ard





TN 11L SQ

40G Transponder

N/A

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN

N/A

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

NOTE


Client-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-243 Client-side fixed optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


Value 40G Transponder

-

NRZ


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


dB

35


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


711



WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-244 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN


ODB

DQPSK

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


nm

N/A

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

-800 to 800

-800 to 800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


712





l






TN11LS Q


75.0

82.0


82.0

89.0

13.21 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.21.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN14.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LSX

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LSX

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

TN13 LSX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN14 LSX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


713



Variants The difference between the LSX board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 13-245 Available variants of the TN11LSX board Variants


01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05


Table 13-246 Available variants of the TN12LSX board Variants


01M02


01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05




T01

Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

T02

Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

B

The variant is equipped with pluggable optical modules. For details 13.21.10 LSX Specifications.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


714





01M01


01M02 T02


T05


Differences Between Versions l Board

TN11LSX

Function:

FEC Encoding

FEC/AFEC

Client-side services OTU2e

FC1200

N

N

Ethernet Service Mapping Mode


l Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

N

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) TN12LSX

FEC/AFEC

N

Y


N

l Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) TN13LSX

FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y


Y

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


715


Board

TN14LSX


FEC Encoding

Client-side services

FEC/AFEC-2

OTU2e

FC1200

Y

Y

Ethernet Service Mapping Mode



N

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.21.10 LSX Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LSX

TN12LSX

The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN12LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of received optical power are different.

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN13LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


716


Original Board


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN14LSX

The TN14LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN14LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN14LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN12LSX

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN12LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN13LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN14LSX

The TN14LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN14LSX functions as the TN12LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN14LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN13LSX/ TN14LSX

None

-

13.21.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-115.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


717



Figure 13-115 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system LSX M U X IN / D OUT M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e


1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ RX STM-64/ OC-192/ TX OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

LSX 10GE LAN/ TX 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ RX OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

NOTE

The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.

13.21.3 Functions and Features The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-249. Table 13-249 Functions and features of the LSX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSX converts signals as follows: l 1 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 1 x OTU2 l 1 x FC1200/10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 1 x OTU2e


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


718




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding

TN11LSX/TN12LSX:


NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e.

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN13LSX/TN14LSX: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


719




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Regeneratio n board

l TN11LSX/TN12LSX: TN11LSXR l TN13LSX/TN14LSX: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or is Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.

Opticallayer ASON

Supported by the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX


Not supported

Protection scheme



l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) l TN13LSX/TN14LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port MTU

9600 bytes.

Loopback

WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


720




Description

Client side



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)



13.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


721



Figure 13-116 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX. Figure 13-117 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/ TN14LSX. Figure 13-116 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board Client side RX

O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module

TX


WDM side E/O


10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


722



Figure 13-117 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX board Client side RX

TX

WDM side


O/E


Client-side OTN processing module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module


FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/ OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


723



The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


724



– OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.21.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-118 and Figure 13-119 show the LSX front panel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


725



Figure 13-118 Front panel of the TN11LSX/TN12LSX/TN13LSXT01/TN13LSXT02/ TN14LSX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


726



Figure 13-119 Front panel of the TN13LSXB board



l


l


l





727



Table 13-250 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.21.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LSX board.

Valid Slots Table 13-251 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board. Table 13-251 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-252 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSX board. Table 13-252 Valid slots for the TN12LSX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


728



Table 13-253 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board. Table 13-253 Valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-254 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-254 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


729



For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 13-255. Table 13-255 LSX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX support the FC-1200 service. Only TN 13LSX/TN14LSX support the OTU-2E service.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


730



Field

Value

Description

Port Mapping

l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)


l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN13LSX/ TN14LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.


731



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF Default: FW_Defect

NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

LPT Enabled


FEC Working State


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.


732



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0



C, CWDM Default: C



See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



733



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.

13.21.10 LSX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


734



Bo ard

ClientSide Fixed Optical Module




TN 11L SX

N/A


800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km


TN 12L SX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km


N/A


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


735



Bo ard

ClientSide Fixed Optical Module




TN 13L SX

N/A




10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km


10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP TN 14L SX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km


N/A


NOTE




The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


736




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant

APD

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


737


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


738



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


739



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


740



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0


741



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

dB

Maximum reflectance






-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


742



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


743



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l

Weight: TN11LSX: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) TN14LSX: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)





TN1 1LS X


47.7

50.1

47.9

50.9


49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


744



Boar d




TN1 2LS X


30.5

36.6

30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


29.4

32.8


29.5

33.9


27

30.4


28

31.4


27

30


TN1 3LS X

TN1 4LS X

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

13.22 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.22.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12, and TN15.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


745




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LSXL

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12 LSXL

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

TN15 LSXL

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Variants The difference between the LSXL board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 13-262 Available variants of the TN12LSXL board Variant


T01


T03


Table 13-263 Available variants of the TN15LSXL board Variant


T01

60000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN


Function:

Board

Coherent System

FEC Encoding

OTU3 services on client-side

TN11LSXL

N

FEC/AFEC

N

TN12LSXL

N

FEC/AFEC

Y

TN15LSXL

Y

HFEC

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


746



For details, see 13.22.2 Application. l

Appearance: – The LSXL boards of TN11, TN12 , and TN15 versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.22.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.22.9 LSXL Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

13.22.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. The TN15LSXL board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems. For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-120. Figure 13-120 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system LSXL

IN

M U X / D M U X

IN OUT

TX

1×ODU3

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

1×OTU3

1×ODU3

RX STM-256/ OC-768/ TX OTU3

LSXL

RX

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

NOTE

l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768. l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.

13.22.3 Functions and Features The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-264.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


747



Table 13-264 Functions and features of the LSXL board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSXL converts signals as follows: l 1x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3<->1x OTU3


STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL support OTU3 services.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. l Supports SM functions for OTU3.

WDM specification



l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

l TN11LSXL: Not supported.

l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

l TN12LSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side. l TN15LSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides. NOTE The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN15LSXL: Supports HFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


748




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. TN11LSXL: TN11LSXLR

Regeneration board

TN12LSXL: TN12LSXLR TN15LSXL: TN55NS3

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL.


Not supported

Protection scheme

TN11LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. TN12LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. TN15LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection.

Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l Not supported by the TN11LSXL l Supported by the TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

Client side

Inloop

WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Outloop


749




Description


Protoc ols or standar ds for transpa rent transmi ssion (nonperfor mance monito ring)

ITU-T G.707

Protoc ols or standar ds for service process ing (perfor mance monito ring)

ITU-T G.805

ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


13.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-121 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL. Figure 13-122 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL and TN15LSXL.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


750



Figure 13-121 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board WDM side

Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O



E/O


OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



751



Figure 13-122 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O


WDM side E/O OTN processing module

O/E



OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC/HFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


752



After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC/HFEC encoding and decoding.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


753




13.22.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-123, Figure 13-124 and Figure 13-125 show the front panel of the LSXL board. Figure 13-123 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


754



Figure 13-124 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


755



Figure 13-125 Front panel of the TN15LSXL board

NOTE




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


756



Interfaces Table 13-265 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-265 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.22.6 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board. Table 13-266 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board. Table 13-266 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU1.

Table 13-267 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


757



Table 13-267 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board Product

Valid Slots






IU3-IU18


IU3-IU17

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the right one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU3.

Table 13-268 shows the valid slots for the TN15LSXL board. Table 13-268 Valid slots for the TN15LSXL board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17


IU2-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the middle one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU2.



758



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-269 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-269 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.22.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 13-270. Table 13-270 LSXL parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






None, OC-768, OTU-3, STM-256 Default: STM-256

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports the OTU-3 services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


759



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Disabled, Enabled


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF

Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.


0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.


760



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

Default: 0s FEC Working State


FEC Mode

TN11LSXL/ TN12LSXL: l FEC, AFEC l Default: AFEC


TN15LSXL: l HFEC l Default: HFEC Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


761



Field

Value

Description

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM

The Receive Band Type parameter sets the receive band type of a board.

Default: C



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

Planned Band Type


Default: /


C, CWDM


Default: C



l TN12LSXL: – Enabled, Disabled – Default: Disabled l TN15LSXL: – Disabled, GC1C +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

– Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


762



Field

Value

Description


B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides.

Default: None

NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.

See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Dispersion Compensation Value

-

PMD Threshold(ps)

-

Queries the dispersion compensation value of the board. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

Queries the PMD threshold of the board. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping Status



13.22.9 LSXL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


763



Bo ard





TN 11L SX L

40G Transponder

N/A


N/A

TN 12L SX L

40G Transponder

TN 15L SX L

40G Transponder

400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN N/A


N/A

500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN N/A

60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

N/A

NOTE




Unit



-

NRZ


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


764



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dB

8.2


dB

35


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN

400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN

DQPSK

ODB

DRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


dBm

0

0

0


dBm

-5

-5

-5


dB

N/A

8.2

8.2


GHz

±2.5

±2.5

±5


nm

N/A

0.6

1


765



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN




nm

0.3

N/A

N/A


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

±500

±500

±400


-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

-

ePDM-BPSK


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


766



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

60000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LSXL l


l


TN12LSXL l


l


TN15LSXL l


l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board




TN11LS XL


103.0

110.0


767



Board

TN12LS XL

TN15LS XL





98.0

101.0


74.0

81.0


84.0

94.0


140.0

155.0

13.23 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

13.23.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Board

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11L SXLR

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12L SXLR

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Variants Table 13-274 Available variants of the TN12LSXLR board Variant


T01


T03


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


768




Function:

Board

OTU3e services

TN11LSXLR

N

TN12LSXLR

Y


Appearance: – The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.23.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

13.23.2 Application The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-126. Figure 13-126 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system

LSXLR IN

1×OTU3/OTU3e 1×OTU3/OTU3e

DMUX

OUT

MUX

LSXLR

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OUT


MUX

IN

DMUX


769



13.23.3 Functions and Features The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-275. Table 13-275 Functions and features of the LSXLR board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals.

Regenerati ng rate

OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s NOTE Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU3/OTU3e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. l Supports SM function for OTU3.

WDM specificati on


Tunable wavelengt h function


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side.


l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


770




Description

Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g


ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported by the TN12LSXLR


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Protocols or standards complianc e


-


ITU-T G.805

l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


771



13.23.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-127 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board. Figure 13-127 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board

WDM side IN

Decoding module

O/E Optical receiving module

Overhead module

Encoding module

WDM side E/O

OUT

Optical transmitting module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


772



Module Function l

Optical receiving module – Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Optical transmitting module – Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. – Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. – Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals. – Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

l


l


13.23.5 Front Panel There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-128 and Figure 13-129 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


773



Figure 13-128 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


774



Figure 13-129 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board



l


l


l





775



Table 13-276 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



13.23.6 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board. Table 13-277 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board. Table 13-277 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14

The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1. When the TN11LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13. Table 13-278 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board. Table 13-278 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots




776



Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU18


IU2-IU17

The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2. When the TN12LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-279 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-279 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXLR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1


777



NOTE


13.23.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 13-280. Table 13-280 LSXLR parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status


Laser Status


The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

l Client side: Off Enable AutoSensing


Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


778



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC

Receive Wavelength

Default: Enabled

Default: FEC


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically.

Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


Band Type

-



-



779



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C



See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. PMD Threshold (ps)

-


Board Mode

Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: Electrical Relay Mode

13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11LS XLR

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN

N/A

400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZPIN TN12LS XLR

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

N/A

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


780



NOTE


For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment. NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-




DQPSK

ODB

DRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


dBm

0

0

0


dBm

-5

-5

-5


dB

N/A

8.2

8.2


GHz

±2.5

±2.5

±5


nm

N/A

0.6

1


nm

0.3

N/A

N/A


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

±500

±500

±400


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


781



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LSXLR l


l


TN12LSXLR l


l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board




TN11 LSXL R


87.0

90.0


82.0

85.0

TN12 LSXL R


75.0

79.0


67.0

70.0


782



13.24 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

13.24.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LSXR

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Variants Table 13-282 Available variants of the TN11LSXR board Variant


01M02


01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05


13.24.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-130. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


783



Figure 13-130 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system

LSXR 1×OTU2/OTU2e 1×OTU2/OTU2e

DMUX

IN

OUT

MUX

LSXR OUT


MUX

IN

DMUX

13.24.3 Functions and Features The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-283. Table 13-283 Functions and features of the LSXR board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function


Regenerati ng rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side.

OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

WDM specificati on Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



784




Description

Tunable wavelengt h function


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g


ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Protocols or standards complianc e



-


785




Description



13.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-131 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


786



Figure 13-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board

WDM side IN

Decoding module


Overhead module

WDM side

Encoding module

E/O

OUT



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

Optical receiving module – Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


787


l


Optical transmitting module – Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. – Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. – Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals. – Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

l


l


13.24.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-132 shows the front panel of the LSXR.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


788



Figure 13-132 Front panel of the LSXR



l


l


l





789



Table 13-284 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



13.24.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LSXR board. Table 13-285 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board. Table 13-285 Valid slots for LSXR board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

When the LSXR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


790



and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. l

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, or IU17 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

13.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-286 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-286 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


13.24.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 13-287. Table 13-287 LSXR parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



791



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status


Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

Enable AutoSensing


The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC

Default: Enabled

Default: FEC

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled

See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


792



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C






Line Rate

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.

Default: Standard Mode

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled

See D.16 Line Rate for more information. Board Mode

Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



793



13.24.10 LSXR Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11L SXR


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

NOTE




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


794



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN

NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


795



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD



dBm

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35


ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

APD

APD

PIN


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


796





l

Weight: 1.2 kg. (2.6 lb)





TN1 1LS XR


34.8

37.8

35.0

38.0


36.8

39.8


39.8

42.8


13.25 LTX LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

13.25.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LTX board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


797



Variants Table 13-290 Available variants of the TN11LTX board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T11

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN

SDFEC

13.25.2 Application The LTX board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive direction, the board can receive ten 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, or OC-192 signals from client equipment, maps the optical signals into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal into a standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. In the transmit direction, the process is reverse. The LTX board can also apply to electrical regeneration sites to perform electrical regeneration of OTU4 optical signals. The WDM-side service rate for the LTX board is 100 Gbit/s. Therefore, the board is intended for 100G transmission systems. For the position of the LTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-133 and Figure 13-134. Figure 13-133 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (OTU mode) LTX

RX1

OUT

TX1 10×ODU2/ODU2e

IN

1×OTU4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

1×OTU4

TX10

1×ODU4

RX10

10×ODU2/ODU2e

TX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192

LTX M U OUT X / IN D M U X

RX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ TX10 STM-64/OC-192

RX10

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


798



Figure 13-134 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (regeneration mode)

LTX IN

1×OTU4 1×OTU4

DMUX

OUT

MUX

LTX OUT

1×OTU4 1×OTU4

MUX

IN

DMUX

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different.

13.25.3 Functions and Features The LTX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-291 and Table 13-292. Table 13-291 Functions and features of the LTX board (OTU mode) Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LTX converts signal as follows: l 10x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<->1xOTU4


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


799




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU4. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4. l Supports SM function for OTU4.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding

Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side.



NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192.

l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN). l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Regeneration board

TN11LTX, TN54NS4

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported


800




Description

Protection scheme



Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

Loopback

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported



IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic



Table 13-292 Functions and features of the LTX board (regeneration mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function



801




Description

Regenerating rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU4. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4. l Supports SM functions for OTU4.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported




-


802






13.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LTX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (OTU mode) Figure 13-135 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


803



Figure 13-135 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (OTU mode) Client side RX1


O/E

RX10 TX1 TX10



WDM side E/O



O/E

OUT

IN


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage

DC power supply from the backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by the SCC)

In the signal flow of the LTX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LTX to the WDM side of the LTX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 10 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical signals to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs encapsulation, OTN framing, and HFEC/SDFEC coding and outputs one channel of OTU4 signals to the WDM-side optical module. After receiving the OTU4 signals, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion, generates OTU4 signals over a DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1, and then outputs the OTU4 signals through the OUT optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interfaces. The WDM-side optical module then converts the optical signals into electrical signals. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module, which performs OTU4 framing, HFEC/SDFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals and then outputs 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 electrical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


804



The 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals are sent to the clientside optical module, which converts the electrical signals into optical signals and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (regeneration mode) Figure 13-136 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX. Figure 13-136 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (regeneration mode)

WDM side IN



WDM side OUT

E/O Optical transmitting module

Control Memory

Communication CPU Control and communication module Power supply module

Required voltage

Fuse


SCC


The LTX board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


805



Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU4 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module: Encapsulates ten channels of SDH/SONET and 10GE WAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module: Encapsulates ten channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs the HFEC/SDFEC encoding and decoding.

l


l


13.25.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LTX board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


806



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-137 shows the front panel of the LTX board. Figure 13-137 Font panel of the LTX board


LTX STAT ACT PROG SRV


OUT IN

TX2 RX2

RX1 TX1

TX4 RX4

RX3 TX3

TX6 RX6

RX5 TX5

TX8 RX8

RX7 TX7

TX10 RX10

RX9 TX9

LTX

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


807





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-293 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-293 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LTX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX10

LC


RX1-RX10

LC



13.25.6 Valid Slots Four slots house one LTX board. Table 13-294 shows the valid slots for the LTX board. Table 13-294 Valid slots for the LTX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






808



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU6, IU12-IU16


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU15

NOTE

The rear connector of the LTX is mounted to the backplane along the second slot from the left in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LTX board displayed on the NM is the number of the second one of the four slots from left. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4 house the LTX board, the slot number of the LTX board displayed on the NM is IU2.

When the LTX boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16, IU20 and IU24, IU36 and IU40, IU46 and IU50, IU54 and IU58, IU62 and IU66.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU13 and IU17, IU21 and IU25, IU30 and IU34.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-295 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-295 Mapping between the physical ports on the LTX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3


809



Physical Port


TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

NOTE


13.25.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LTX, refer to Table 13-296. Table 13-296 LTX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64


Default: 10GE LAN Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


810



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


811



Field

Value

Description






FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.

FEC Mode

HFEC, SDFEC

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Receive Wavelength

C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Receive Band Type

C Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Receive Band Typeparameter sets the receive band type of a board.


812



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100

The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

Default: /


See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Planned Band Type

C Default: C

PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Dispersion Compensation Value

-

Queries the dispersion compensation value of the board.

PMD Threshold (ps)

-


NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


813



Field

Value

Description


l Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GC2 Enabled


Board Mode

l Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode



13.25.9 LTX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L TX

N/A


40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-PIN

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km


NOTE


Specifications of optical modules on the client side NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN signals. The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


814




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant

APD

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


815


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12

Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side Table 13-298 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


816



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-5


dB

N/A


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


dB

35


ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


817



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

N/A


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


dB

35


ps/nm

55000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l



WDM-Side Module



TN11LTX (OTU mode)

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(HFEC, RZ)PIN

248

273

235

247

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-

270

300

TN11LTX (regeneration mode) TN11LTX (OTU mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


818



Board

WDM-Side Module



TN11LTX (regeneration mode)

QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)PIN

250

275

13.26 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

13.26.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1L WX 2

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

13.26.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-138. Figure 13-138 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system LWX2

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

Transparent transmission

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



LWX2 MUX/ DMUX



819



13.26.3 Functions and Features The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-300. Table 13-300 Functions and features of the LWX2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWX2 converts signals as follows:



l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)

GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification



Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported


Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client and WDM sides.



820




Description

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


821




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


822



13.26.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-139 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board. Figure 13-139 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board Client side RX1

WDM side O/E

OUT1

E/O

RX2

OUT2

TX1

E/O

TX2



IN1


IN2

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.26.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


823



signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


824




13.26.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-140 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board. Figure 13-140 Front panel of the LWX2 board

LWX2 STAT ACT PROG SRV


LWX2

NOTE

The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


825





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-301 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-301 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.26.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWX2 board. Table 13-302 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board. Table 13-302 Valid slots for the LWX2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


826



13.26.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2 The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-303. Table 13-303 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220. l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.

l

"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-304 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-304 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWX2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

3

TX1/RX1

5

TX2/RX2

6


827



NOTE


13.26.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 13-305 Table 13-305 LWX2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: Any Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

16 to 2500

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 2500



l Client side: Off Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


828



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled


Default: l WDM side: Disabled l Client side: Enabled

Current Bearer Rate (M)

-

parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100



C, CWDM Default: C




13.26.10 LWX2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


829



Bo ard





TN 11L WX 2

N/A



N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

NOTE



The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module. NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


830



Table 13-306 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

MLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


PIN

APD

831


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


832



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


833



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN


6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


834


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa



6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD


-

PIN

APD

Operating nm wavelength range

1200 to 1650

1300 to 1575


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-26

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


835




Unit



-

NRZ


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the line code on the WDM side must be NRZ. l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the eye pattern on the WDM side complies with the template defined in ITU-T G.957.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

836


l





Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131° F) (W)

LWX2

38.5

42.4

13.27 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

13.27.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1L WX D

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.27.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-141. Figure 13-141 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system LWXD

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



LWXD MUX/ DMUX



837



13.27.3 Functions and Features The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-311. Table 13-311 Functions and features of the LWXD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWXD converts signals as follows: l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals) l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported



ALS function




838




Description

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


839




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


840



13.27.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-142 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board. Figure 13-142 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board WDM side

Client side RX

O/E

TX

E/O

Splitter

E/O Service processing module

IN1 IN2

O/E


OUT1 OUT2


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.27.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


841



After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


842



13.27.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-143 shows the front panel of the LWXD board. Figure 13-143 Front panel of the LWXD board

LWXD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LWXD



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


843



l


l



Interfaces Table 13-312 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-312 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.27.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWXD board. Table 13-313 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board. Table 13-313 Valid slots for the LWXD board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-314. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


844



Table 13-314 Characteristic code for the LWXD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-315 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-315 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.27.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 13-316

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


845



Table 13-316 LWXD parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and querses the optical interface name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Channel Use Status






None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: Any Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

16 to 2500

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 2500




Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled


l Client side: Enabled Current Bearer Rate (M)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



846



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C




13.27.10 LWXD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


847



Bo ard





TN 11L WX D

N/A



N/A



NOTE



The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


848




Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

MLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


PIN

APD

849


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


850



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


851



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


852




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa



12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

APD

1300 to 1575 -28

-18

-26


-28

-28

853


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa



12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


854



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE




l





LWXD

35.8

39.4

13.28 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

13.28.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


855




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LWX S

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LWX S

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Functions: – The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services, whereas the TN12LWXS board supports, see 13.28.3 Functions and Features.

Substitution Relationship The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

13.28.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-144. Figure 13-144 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system

LWXS

LWXS M U X / D M U X



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


16 Mbit/s – 2.7 Gbit/s

M U X / D M U X

16 Mbit/s – 2.7 Gbit/s

856



13.28.3 Functions and Features The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-322. Table 13-322 Functions and features of the LWXS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWXS converts signals as follows:



l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)

GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported





857




Description

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


858




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


859





-

13.28.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-145 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board. Figure 13-145 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board Client side

WDM side

RX

O/E

TX

E/O



E/O

OUT

O/E

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


860


l


Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


861





13.28.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-146 shows the front panel of the LWXS board. Figure 13-146 Front panel of the LWXS board

LWXS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 OUT IN

LWXS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


862





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-323 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-323 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.28.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWXS board. Table 13-324 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board. Table 13-324 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-325 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


863



Table 13-325 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-326 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-326 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.28.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 13-327 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


864



Table 13-327 LWXS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ETR, CLO

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO services.

Default: Any Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/ s)

16 to 2500

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: 2500




Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled


l Client side: Enabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


865



Field

Value

Description

Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s)

-


OFC Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

Default: Disabled

NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l Only the TN12LWXS supports this parameter. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


866



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM




Default: C

Default: None


13.28.10 LWXS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L WX S

N/A



N/A

TN 12L WX S



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


867



NOTE

For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description. NOTE



The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module. NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

MLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


868


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.2-80 km


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


869




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


870




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


871




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa




6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

PIN

APD


872


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa




6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable)


nm

1200 to 1650

1300 to 1575


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-26

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit



-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤±6.5


nm

1


873



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE




l





LWXS

33.9

37.3

13.29 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


874



13.29.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 TMX

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 TMX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Function: – TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 13.29.3 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable optical module on the WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports fixed optical module, tunable optical module, XFP module and gray optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of each version, see 13.29.10 TMX Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TMX

TN12TMX

The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the TN11TMX. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board employs AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12TMX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

None

-


875



13.29.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-147. Figure 13-147 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system TMX

TMX

1

1 STM-16 OC-48 OTU1

4×ODU1

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

4

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

STM-16 OC-48 OTU1

M U X / D M U X

4

13.29.3 Functions and Features The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-333. Table 13-333 Functions and features of the TMX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TMX converts signals as follows: l 4x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1<->1x OTU2



OTN function

l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for: l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

876




Description

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. TN11TMX: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12TMX: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.

Regeneration board

TN11TMX: TN11LSXR TN12TMX: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


877






Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


ITU-T G.707


ITU-T G.805

ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


13.29.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-148 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


878



Figure 13-148 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O





E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


879



and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


880



13.29.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-149 shows the front panel of the TMX board. Figure 13-149 Front panel of the TMX board

TMX STAT ACT PROG SRV


TMX



l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


881


l




Interfaces Table 13-334 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-334 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.29.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TMX board. Table 13-335 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board. Table 13-335 Valid slots for TN11TMX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-336 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


882



Table 13-336 Valid slots for TN12TMX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-337 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-337 Mapping between the physical ports on the TMX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


883



13.29.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 13-338. Table 13-338 TMX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






None, OTU-1, OC-48, STM-16 Default: OTU-1

Laser Status


The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.


884



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s FEC Working State


FEC Mode


NOTE Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.



-


Band Type

-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C



See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


885



Field

Value

Description



The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides.

Default: None

NOTE Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.

See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission


Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.

PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.

13.29.10 TMX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


886



Bo ard





TN 11T MX

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A

L-16.2-80 km






S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km

1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN TN 12T MX

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km



800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

NOTE

(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, consult with the product manager at the local representative office.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


887



NOTE



I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


888


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

30

30

30


dB

N/A

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


889



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


890



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



NRZ

NRZ


891



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

892




Unit

Optical Module Type

-

Line code format






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

APD


893



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


894



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


895



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


896



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN12TMX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


897







TN1 1TM X


40.3

44.3

42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7


31.4

36.1


32.4

37.1


41

45.5


39

43.7


TN1 2TM X

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


898



14

Tributary Board and Line Board

About This Chapter 14.1 Overview A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals crossconnected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths. 14.2 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board 14.3 NO2 NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 14.4 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 14.5 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board 14.6 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board 14.7 NS4 NS4: 100G line service processing board 14.8 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 14.9 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 14.10 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 14.11 TEM28 TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit 14.12 THA Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


899



THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 14.13 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 14.14 TOG TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board 14.15 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 14.16 TOX TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.17 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 14.18 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 14.19 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.20 TSC TSC: 100G tributary service processing board 14.21 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.22 TTX TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


900



14.1 Overview A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals crossconnected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths.

Positions of Tributary and Line Boards in a WDM System A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals crossconnected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths. Figure 14-1 shows the positions of tributary and line boards in a WDM system. Figure 14-1 Positions of tributary and line boards in a WDM system Client-side services

ODUk

WDM-side services

ODUk

Tributary board

Line Board

Tributary board

Line Board

SC1

WDM-side ODF

Line Board

FIU

Tributary board

OA

Line Board OM

OA

OD


Tributary board

Types of Tributary Boards The differences between different types of tributary boards lie in the type and number of clientside signals, and the type and number of electrical signals sent to the cross-connect board. Table 14-1 provides the main functions of the tributary boards. The THA, TOA, and TOM tributary boards can apply to multiple scenarios. For details on these scenarios, see 14.12 THA, 14.13 TOA, and 14.15 TOM. The TEM28 tributary board supports Layer 2 processing of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


901



Table 14-1 Main functions of tributary boards Board

TN11TDG

Client-Side Service

Backplane-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

GE

2

GE

2

ODU1

1


Y

TN11TDX


2

ODU1

8

Y

TN12TDX


2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

TN52TDX


2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

TN53TDX

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

FC800

2

ODUflex

2

Y

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1

See 14.12.2 Applicati on Overview .

ODU0

See 14.12.2 Application Overview.

Y

TN54THA

FE, GE, OTU1, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ODU1


902


Board

TN54TOA

TN52TOG


Client-Side Service


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI, OTU1

See 14.13.2 Applicati on Overview .

ODU0

See 14.13.2 Application Overview.

Y

ODU0

8

Y

ODU1

4

FE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI, HDSDIRBR, OTU1

ODU1

3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G

ODUflex

GE

8


TN11TOM

FC100, FICON, GE, STM-4, OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, FE, SDI, STM-1, OC-3, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

See 14.15.2.4 Applicati on Scenario Overview of TN11TO M.

ODU1

See 14.15.2.4 Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM.

Y

TN52TOM

FE, FDDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, GE, FC100, FICON, OTU1

See 14.15.2.3 Applicati on Scenario Overview of TN52TO M.

ODU0

See 14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM.

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


903


Board


Client-Side Service


Type

Type

Max. Number

FE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

Max. Number


ODU1

TN55TOX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e,

8

ODU2, ODU2e

8

Y

TN11TQM

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON

4

ODU1

1

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

4

ODU1

1

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2

FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48, OTU1, HD-SDI

1

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

ODU1

4

Y

TN12TQM

TN11TQS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


904


Board


Client-Side Service


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

TN11TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

4

ODU2

4

Y

TN52TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e,

4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

TN53TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

TN55TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

FC800

4

ODUflex

4

TN54TSC

100GE

1

ODU4

1

Y

TN11TSX L

STM-256, OC-768

1

ODU2

4

N

TN53TSX L

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

ODU3

1

N

TN54TSX L

40GE

1

ODU3

1

Y

TN54TTX


10

ODU2, ODU2e

10

Y

TN54TEM 28

FE, GE

24

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

4

16 x ODU0, 8 x ODU1, 2 x ODU2, 8 x ODUflex. The total bandwidth is 20G bit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Y

905



Line Boards The differences between different types of line boards lie in the rate and number of line-side signals and the type and number of electrical signals from the cross-connect board. Table 14-2 provides the main functions of line boards. Table 14-2 Main functions of line boards Board

TN11ND2

TN12ND2

TN52ND2

TN53ND2

TN55NO2

TN51NQ2

TN52NQ2 TN54NQ2

TN53NQ2


WDM-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

ODU1

8

ODU2, ODU2e

2

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU1

8

ODU2, ODU2e

2

ODU0

16

ODU1

8

ODU2, ODU2e

2

ODUflex

4

ODU0

16

ODU1

8

ODU2, ODU2e

2

ODUflex

4

ODU0

64

ODU1

32

ODU2, ODU2e

8

ODU1

16

ODU2, ODU2e

4

ODU0

32

ODU1

16

ODU2, ODU2e

4

ODU0

32

ODU1

16

ODU2, ODU2e

4

8xODUflex

4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pluggabl e Optical Module

WDM Specifications DWDM

CWDM

2

N

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

2

Y

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

2

N

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

2

Y

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

8

Y

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

4

Y

Y

N


906


Board



WDM-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

TN11NS2

ODU1

4

OTU2

TN12NS2

ODU1

4

ODU2, ODU2e

1

ODU0

8

ODU1

4

ODU2, ODU2e

1

ODUflex

2

ODU0

8

ODU1

4

ODU2, ODU2e

1

ODUflex

2

TN11NS3

ODU2, ODU2e

TN52NS3

TN52NS2

TN53NS2

TN54NS3 TN55NS3

TN54NS4

Pluggabl e Optical Module

WDM Specifications DWDM

CWDM

1

N

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

1

N

Y

N

OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

Y

N

4

OTU3, OTU3e

1

N

Y

N

ODU0

32

1

N

ODU1

16

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU2, ODU2e

4

ODU0

32

1

N

ODU1

16

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU2, ODU2e

4

ODU3

1

ODU0

80

OTU4

1

N

Y

N

ODUflex

80

ODU1

40

ODU2, ODU2e

10

ODU3

2

ODU4

1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


907



14.2 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board

14.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 ND2

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12 ND2

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

TN52 ND2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN53 ND2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

NOTE

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode.

Variants The difference between the ND2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 14-3 Available variants of the TN11ND2 board Variant


01M01

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

T01


T02


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


908



Table 14-4 Available variants of the TN12ND2 board Variant


T01


T02


B

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.



ODUflex

Direct Mapping of ODU0 to ODU2

IEEE 1588v2

Physic alLayer Clock

T01


N

N

Y

Y

T02


N

N

Y

Y

T04


Y

Y

N

N


Description

01

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.

Differences Between Versions Function: Board

TN11N D2

CrossConnet Granulari ty

FEC Encodin g

IEEE 1588v2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Clock

N

Relay Mode

N


WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Fixed Wave lengt h

Tuna bleWavel ength

Gray Light

N

N

N

909


Board



FEC Encodin g

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

TN12N D2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

TN52N D2T01 TN52N D2T02

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

TN52N D2T04

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODUflex

FEC/ AFEC-2

TN53N D2


FEC/ AFEC-2

Relay Mode

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Fixed Wave lengt h

Tuna bleWavel ength

Gray Light

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

For details, see 14.2.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l

The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ND2

TN12ND2/ TN52ND2

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 functions as the TN11ND2. NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. The TN52ND2 board can substitute for the TN11ND2 board only when they use 800ps/ nm-C-band-tunable wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN optical modules.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


910



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12ND2

TN52ND2/ TN53ND2

The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 can be created as TN12ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s. The TN52ND2 board can substitute for the TN12ND2 board only when they use 800ps/ nm-C-band-tunable wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN optical modules.

TN52ND2

TN53ND2

The TN53ND2 can be created as TN52ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN52ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.

TN53ND2

None

-

14.2.2 Application As a type of line board, the ND2 board converts 16 ODU0, eight ODU1, four ODUflex, or two ODU2 into two ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts two ODU2e signals into two ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals Figure 14-2 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 8xODU1

8xODU1

1

1

4

1

1

M U X / D M U X

1 TOM

4

4

8

1

1

1

ND2

OUT2

4


4×ODU1

IN2

1×ODU2

IN2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4

1×OTU2

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM

OUT2

OUT1

1

4×ODU1

IN1

1×ODU2

OUT1

ND2

1

IN1

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM 8

1

1

TOM 4

4

8

911



NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 14-3 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 2xODU2/ODU2e

2xODU2/ODU2e

IN1

OUT1

ND2

ND2

IN2 OUT2

TDX

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TDX

OUT1

NOTE

In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals. In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board, the ND2 board receives two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


912



Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals Figure 14-4 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 1×OTU2/OTU2e

IN1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

DMUX

OUT1

MUX

ND2 1×OTU2/OTU2e

OUT2

1×OTU2/OTU2e

MUX

IN2

DMUX

NOTE

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different. Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm (D)RZ tunable optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


913



Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-5 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

1

16xODU0

16xODU0

1

1

1

OUT1

8 ND2

8xODU0

4xODU1

IN2 OUT2

IN2

TOM 8

8

8

1

1

1

ND2

1×ODU2

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

8

8

1×ODU2

TOM

4xODU1

1

8xODU0

1

1

M U X / D M U X

8xODU0

IN1

4xODU1

IN1

1×ODU2

OUT1

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

8

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

TOM

1

1

TOM

8

8

8

8

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board: l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path.

Application scenario 5 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between four channels of ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-6 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 4xODUflex

4xODUflex

ND2

1×ODU2

2xODUflex


1×ODU2

M U OUT1 X / D IN2 M U OUT2 X

1×OTU2

IN2

IN1

2xODUflex

OUT2 1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4

2xODUflex

4

IN1

ND2 M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

TQX

1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

2xODUflex

1

OUT1

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

914



NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode. The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53ND2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board. For example, when a TN53ND2 board is connected to a TN52ND2T01 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board. Only the TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.

Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-7 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 2xOTU2/ 2xOTU2e

ODU0 TOM TOM

ODU0

OUT1 M IN1

ODU1

NS2 ODUflex

ND2

TDX/ ODU2/ ND2 ODU2e

OUT2 IN2

U X / D M U X

M IN1 U X OUT1 / D M U X

IN2 OUT2

ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ND2

TOM

TOM

ODUflex NS2 ODU2/ TDX/ ODU2e ND2

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e and ODUflex signals. Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes. For the TN11ND2 board, changing the service mode for one IN/OUT port will cause the board to reset, which in return leads to service interruption. Therefore, before changing the service mode for one IN/OUT port, delete all service cross-connections for the other IN/ OUT port. Only TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports ODU0. TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

14.2.3 Functions and Features The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


915



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-7 and Table 14-8. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex. The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.

Table 14-7 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode) Functio n and feature

Description

Basic function

The ND2 board converts signals as follows: l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: – 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02: – 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2: – 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/4 x ODUflex<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals , ODUflex signals and the ODU2/ ODU2e signals.

Crossconnect capabilit ies

Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE Only the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.

WDM specific ation


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


916



Functio n and feature

Description

Tunable wavelen gth function


ESC function

Supported

PRBS function



NOTE If the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board, or the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encodin g

TN11ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Alarm and perform ance event monitori ng


Regener ation board

l TN11ND2:

l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.

TN11LSXR l TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


917




Description

IEEE 1588v2

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the BC and OC modes; it does not support the TC or TC+OC mode.

Physical clock

The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex signals are crossconnected from the backplane.

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

Electric al-layer ASON

Supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Loopbac k

Board

WDM Side

ODU0 Channel Loopback


ODUflex Channel Loopback

TN11ND2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN12ND2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52ND2T01

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Supported only when ODU2/ ODU2e signals are received from the backplane.

Supported

Supported only when ODU1 signals are received from the backplane.

Supported

TN52ND2T02 TN52ND2T04 TN53ND2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


918



Description

Protocol s or standard s complia nce



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FCPH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


919




Description



Table 14-8 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regenerating rate

OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm (D)RZ tunable optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for: l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


920



Function and feature

Description

ESC function

Supports the ESC function, which enables the transmission of a supervisory signal inside a service signal.

PRBS test function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Alarm and performance event monitoring

l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


921






14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 14-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


922



Figure 14-8 Functional modules and signal flow (Line Mode) Backplane (service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side Crossconnect module

1588v2 module


O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Signal processing Signal processing module module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse


Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)

NOTE

Only the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.

In Figure 14-8. n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity. Table 14-9 Service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Service Cross-connection

TN11N D2/ TN12N D2

A maximum of 8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e

TN52N D2T01/ TN52N D2T02

A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e

TN52N D2T04/ TN53N D2

A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/4xODUflex/2xODU2/2xODU2e


923



The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals: The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side of the ND2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the signal processing module outputs two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


924



Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side

IN1

O/E

OUT2

E/O



E/O

OUT1

O/E

IN2


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is only supported by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


925



– WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. NOTE

The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/ TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

l


l


14.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-10 and Figure 14-11 show the front panel of the ND2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


926



Figure 14-10 Front panel of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2T01/TN12ND2T02/TN52ND2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


927



Figure 14-11 Front panel of the TN12ND2B/TN53ND2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


928



Interfaces Table 14-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC



14.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one ND2 board. Table 14-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2 board. Table 14-11 Valid slots for the TN11ND2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-12 shows the valid slots for the TN12ND2 board. Table 14-12 Valid slots for the TN12ND2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16

Table 14-13 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


929



Table 14-13 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-14 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-14 Mapping between the physical ports on the ND2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


930



The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-15 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on

Board Name Displayed on the NMS

TN53N D2

Standard mode

Figure 14-12

Table 14-16

53ND2

Compatible mode

Figure 14-13

Table 14-17

53ND2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 14-12

Table 14-16

52ND2(STND)

Compatible mode

Figure 14-13

Table 14-17

52ND2

TN12N D2

Compatible mode

Figure 14-14

Table 14-17

12ND2

TN11N D2

Compatible mode

Figure 14-14

Table 14-17

ND2

TN52N D2a

a: The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board can work only in compatible mode.

NOTE

For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


931



Figure 14-12 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board model (standard mode) Baclplane

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODUflex:2 4XODUflex

ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1 2 xODU2/ 2xODU 2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


ODU1:1

8xODU1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(N1/OUT1)

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

2(N2/OUT2)

ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 16 xODU0

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) ODU0:1

16 xODU0

ODU0: 8 ODU0:1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU0: 8


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path (ODU0– >ODU1– >ODU2)


ODU0 mapping path (ODU0– >ODU2)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


932



NOTE

When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0–>ODU2, ODU1–>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.

Figure 14-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board



Backplane 16 x ODU0

2 x ODU2/ODU2e

8 x ODU1







52 ODU1 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 72 ODU2 (ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

2 (IN2/OUT2)-1


Crossconnect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexin g module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path



933



Figure 14-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/PID board


Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e

8 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

ODU2

71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2


2 (IN2/OUT2)-1





ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


934



Table 14-16 Descriptions of the ports on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)

Table 14-17 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode) Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP8


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP ports.

ODU1LP1ODU1LP2


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP ports.

ODU2LP1ODU2LP2


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT ports.

1(IN1/ OUT1)


-

2(IN2/ OUT2)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


935



14.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. l

The side.

cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM

l

The

cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.

NOTE

When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The ND2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.

ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 14-15 and Figure 14-16 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


936



Figure 14-15 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Tributary board a

1


(compatible mode)


Tributary board b

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

(standard mode)

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1


WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2

compatible mode

168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

ND2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

standard mode



WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

Line board c (compatible mode)


Line board d 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

(standard mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

Line board e (standard mode)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8


The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


937



NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Tributary board a

TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c

TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Line board d

TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Line board e

TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


938



Figure 14-16 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

Tributary board a (compatible mode)

1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

Tributary board b (standard mode)


WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

ND2 (standard mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2


WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

Line board c (standard mode)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2


161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

Line board d (standard mode)

Line board e (compatible mode)


The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Tributary board a


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


939



Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c


Line board d


Line board e



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


940



Figure 14-17 TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level) Client side


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

1



WDM side

ND2 (compatible mode)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4

2


WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Line board b (compatible mode)




Tributary board a

TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS

Line board b

TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Line board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


941


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



942



Figure 14-18 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level) Client side


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

1




WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

ND2

2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

compatible mode

standard mode

Cross-connect module WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4





Tributary board a

TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


943



Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c

TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Line board d


ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 14-19 and Figure 14-20 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 14-19 TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level) Client side Tributary board a (compatible mode)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

1


WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

ND2 (compatible mode)



WDM side 2


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1





Tributary board a

TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


944



Line board b

TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Line board c


Figure 14-20 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level) Client side Tributary board a (compatible mode)



1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX1/RX1)-1


WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

ND2

compatible mode

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1

standard mode 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 Cross-connect module

WDM side

2







Tributary board a

TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX

Tributary board b

TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX

Line board c

TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


945



ODUflex Cross-Connections Figure 14-21 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections. Figure 14-21 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level) Client side




1


WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

ND2

WDM side 2

Line board c

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 board The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign randomRANDOM. Tributary board a TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX Line board c

TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS4



946



For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 14-18. Table 14-18 ND2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets the optical interface name.

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used






Sets the channel loopback.

Default: NonLoopback Service Mode

l TN11ND2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN12ND2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 only in the compatible mode.


l TN52ND2/ TN53ND2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



947



Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled

Sets the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled.

Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2//TN53ND2. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 support this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


Band Type

-



-



948



Field

Value

Description

Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0



C, CWDM Default: C

NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.

See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.


Enabled, Disabled

Enable Line Rate

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled

Default: Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Determines whether to automatically switch between the standard mode and speedup mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode.


Line Rate

Default: Standard Mode PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.16 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


949



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled



0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode.


Assign random, Assign consecutive

Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board.

Default: Assign random

Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU2, ODU1–>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.


Board Mode

Default: Line Mode

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.

14.2.11 ND2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


950



Board



TN11ND 2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN12ND 2

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

TN52ND 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN53ND 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

NOTE



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


951




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


952




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN


NRZ

DRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

953




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


954




Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Line code format

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP -

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-




NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


955



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7


956





l

Weight: TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. ) TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)





TN1 1ND 2


61.1

68.4

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

62.7

70.2

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

68.4

76.6


57.2

64


62

69


46

52


70.5

77.5


TN52ND2T01: 67.8

TN52ND2T01: 74.6

TN52ND2T04: 35

TN52ND2T04: 37

TN1 2ND 2

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN5 2ND 2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


957



Boar d




TN5 3ND 2


25

28

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

14.3 NO2 NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

14.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NO2 board is TN55.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN55 NO2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack , and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the NO2 board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the NO2 board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/ TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the NO2 board can work only in relay mode.

Variants The TN55NO2 board has only one variant: TN55NO201. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


958



14.3.2 Application As a type of line board, the NO2 board converts 64 ODU0, 32 ODU1, or eight ODU2 into eight ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts eight ODU2e signals into eight ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Application scenario 1 of the NO2: conversion between 64 channels of ODU0 and eight channels of OTU2 signals Figure 14-22 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 64xODU0

1

1

1

M U X / D M U X

TOA 8

NO2

8

8

8xODU0

OUT8

4xODU1

IN8

1×OTU2

IN8

8

8

8

1×ODU2

OUT8

1

1

8xODU0

M U X / D M U X

4xODU1

OUT1

1 1×OTU2

IN1

NO2

1×OTU2

4xODU1

1×ODU2

8

8xODU0

1

TOA 8

IN1

1×ODU2

8

1

OUT1

8

8

1

1×OTU2

4xODU1

8

1×ODU2

8xODU0

TOA 8

64xODU0

1

1

1 TOA

8

8

8

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2 board is added on the NMS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


959



Application scenario 2 of the NO2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU1 and eight channels of OTU2 signals Figure 14-23 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 32xODU1

1

1

1

1

IN8

8

8

4

1

1

4×ODU1

OUT8

8

8

NO2

1 TOA

8

1×ODU2

IN8

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

8

1×ODU2

TOA

OUT8 4×ODU1

1

M U X / D M U X

1

4×ODU1

OUT1

1×ODU2

IN1

1×OTU2

IN1

8 NO2

1

8

OUT1

8

4

1

1×OTU2

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOA 8

32xODU1

1 TOA

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


960



Application scenario 3 of the NO2: conversion between eight channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals and eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 14-24 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 8xODU2/ODU2e

8xODU2/ODU2e

4

4

IN1

OUT1

8 NO2

4

4

8

NO2

OUT8

IN8

IN8

OUT8

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

1

1

8

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TQX

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TQX

IN1 1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

OUT1

TQX 8

4

4

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


961



Application scenario 4 of the NO2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals Figure 14-25 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

M OUT2 U X


IN1


D M U X

OUT1 M U X

IN2

D M U X

NO2

M OUT8 U X


IN7


D M U X

OUT7 M U X

D

IN8 M U X

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2(REG) board is added on the NMS. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC communication is not available. l

"IN1–>OUT1" and "IN2–>OUT2"

l


l


l


The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


962



Application scenario 5 of the NO2: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-26 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 8xOTU2/ 8xOTU2e

ODU0

ODU0

TOM ODU0

ODU0

TOM

IN1 OUT1

OUT1 IN1

ODU1 ODU1

NS2 ODU1 NO2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M IN6 U X OUT6

TDX ODU2/ ODU2e

OUT6 IN6

ODU2/ ODU2e

OUT7 IN7

IN7 OUT7

ODU2/ ODU2e

OUT8 IN8

IN8 OUT8

ND2

ODU1

TOM

TOM

ODU1 ODU1 NS2 NO2 ODU2/ TDX ODU2e ODU2/ ODU2e ND2 ODU2/ ODU2e

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0 and ODU1 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.

14.3.3 Functions and Features The NO2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-24 and Table 14-25.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


963



Table 14-24 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Line Mode) Functi on and feature

Description

Basic function

NO2 converts signals as follows: l 64xODU0/32xODU1/8xODU2<->8xOTU2 l 8xODU2e<->8xOTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.

Crossconnect capabili ties

Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 signals or 32 channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NO2 board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions.

WDM specific ation


ESC function

Supported

PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encodin g


Alarms and perform ance events monitor ing Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.


964



Functi on and feature

Description

Regener ation board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, and TN55NO2

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Supported

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopba ck

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM Side Loopback



Supported

Supported

Supported


965




Description

Protocol s or standard s complia nce

Protocol s or standard s for transpar ent transmis sion (nonperform ance monitor ing)

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FCFS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


966




Description

Protocol s or standard s for service processi ng (perfor mance monitor ing)


Table 14-25 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


WDM specification


OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for: l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing


967




Description

ESC function


PRBS function

Not supported

FEC encoding


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

PTP clock (1588 V2)

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported




-


968






14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NO2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 14-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


969



Figure 14-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Line Mode) 64XODU0/32XODU1/ 8XODU2/8XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O

OUT7 OUT8



OUT1 OUT2

O/E WDM-side Optical module

IN1 IN2 IN7 IN8

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The signal processing module of the NO2 board can access the following optical signals: l

ODU0 electrical signals

l


l


l

ODU2e electrical signals

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NO2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NO2 to the WDM side of the NO2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module can receive 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. After processing, the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/ OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


970



standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT8 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives eight channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN8 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 14-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board. Figure 14-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side IN1

O/E

E/O

OUT1

OUT2

E/O

O/E

IN2

IN7

O/E

E/O

OUT7

OUT8

E/O

O/E

IN8


WDM-side Optical module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The NO2 board regenerates eight channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN8 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


971



The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


14.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NO2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-29 shows the front panel of the NO2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


972



Figure 14-29 Front panel of the NO2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN8/OUT8 interfaces in descending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


973



Interfaces Table 14-26 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NO2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC


OUT1-OUT8

LC



14.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one NO2 board. Table 14-27 shows the valid slots for the NO2 board. Table 14-27 Valid slots for the NO2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NO2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.



974



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-28 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-28 Mapping between the physical ports on the NO2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

IN5/OUT5

5

IN6/OUT6

6

IN7/OUT7

7

IN8/OUT8

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-30 shows the port diagrams of the TN55NO2 board. Table 14-29 lists the port descriptions NOTE

ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 55NO2 board is selected on the NMS. l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


975



Figure 14-30 Port diagram of the NO2 Backplane

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)


ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 32xODU1 ODU1:1

1(N1/OUT1)

ODU1:4

8(IN8/OUT8)

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2) ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU 0:2

64xODU0

ODU0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1

ODU1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

Table 14-29 Description of ports on the NO2 Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane.

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


976



Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1 ......


7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1 1(IN1/OUT1)

Indicates the WDM-side port.

2(IN2/OUT2) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7) 8(IN8/OUT8)


The side.


l

The


NOTE

When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NO2 board can work in the standard mode. For information about the standard modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.

ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 14-31 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


977



Figure 14-31 Cross-connection diagram of the NO2 (ODU0 level) Client side Tributary board a (compatible mode)


Tributary board b (compatible mode)

3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

Cross-connect module WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

NO2 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2


2



1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:79 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:80

Line board f (standard mode)

Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NO2

Tributary board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b TN54THA / TN54TOA Line board c

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



978



Line board d


Line board e


Line board f

TN54NS4


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


979






3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2

NO2 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:3 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:4

Cross-connect module WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2

2

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU1:39 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU1:40





Tributary board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b TN54THA / TN54TOA Line board c


Line board d


Line board e

TN54NS4

ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 14-33 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


980






3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1

NO2 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1

Cross-connect module WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1

2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:9 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:10





Tributary board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX Line board c


Line board d


Line board e

TN54NS4



981



For parameters of the NO2, refer to Table 14-30. Table 14-30 NO2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Sets the path loopback.


Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



982



Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled

Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled.

Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the board work in line mode. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.


-


Band Type

-



-



983



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

Planned Band Type


Default: /


C, CWDM


Default: C


See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

Line Rate

Default: Standard Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.16 Line Rate for more information.

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


984



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Board Mode


Default: Disabled

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.


14.3.11 NO2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN55NO 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


NRZ 985



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


986



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


987



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: 1.66 kg (3.66 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


988







TN55 NO2


83.6

87

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

14.4 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

14.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52 , TN53, and TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN51 NQ2

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN52 NQ2

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN53 NQ2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN54 NQ2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

The TN53NQ2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


989



Variants Each NQ2 board version except the TN54NQ2 board has only one variant identified by 01 (for example, TN51NQ201). The TN54NQ2 board variant is the board itself.


Function:

Board

Cross-Connet Granularity

FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

Relay Mode

TN51NQ2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC

N

N

N

TN52NQ2

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/AFEC-2

N

N

N

TN53NQ2


FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

TN54NQ2

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN51NQ2

TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2

The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 / TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded. NOTE When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply.

TN52NQ2

TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2

The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2. NOTE Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.

TN54NQ2

TN53NQ2

The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.

TN53NQ2

None

-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


990



14.4.2 Application As a type of line board, the NQ2 board converts 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, eight ODUflex, or four ODU2 into four ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts four ODU2e signals into four ITUT G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals Figure 14-34 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 16xODU1

16xODU1

1

1

1

4×ODU1

IN4

8

4

1

1

4×ODU1

4

1

4

4

NQ2

OUT4

1 TOM

4

1×OTU2

IN4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

TOM

OUT4 4×ODU1

1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

OUT1

1 1×ODU2

IN1

4 NQ2

1

8

IN1

4

4

1

1×OTU2

4

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM

OUT1

1 TOM

4

4

8

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


991



Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/ OTU2e signals Figure 14-35 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 4xODU2/ODU2e

IN1

OUT1

NQ2

OUT4

IN4

IN4

OUT4

1

1

1

4

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

4

1×ODU2/ODU2e

4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN1

4 NQ2

TQX

4

OUT1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

4xODU2/ODU2e

TQX

4

4

4

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


992



Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-36 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 32xODU0

1

1

1

M U X / D M U X

TOM 8

NQ2

8

4

8xODU0

OUT4

4xODU1

IN4

1×OTU2

IN4

8

8

4

1×ODU2

OUT4

1

1

8xODU0

M U X / D M U X

4xODU1

OUT1

1 1×OTU2

IN1

NQ2

1×OTU2

4xODU1

1×ODU2

8

8xODU0

1

TOM 8

IN1

1×ODU2

4

1

OUT1

8

4

1

1×OTU2

4xODU1

8

1×ODU2

8xODU0

TOM 8

32xODU0

1

1

1 TOM

8

8

8

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode. For the TN53NQ2 board: l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


993



Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-37 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

1

1

OUT1

IN1

IN1

OUT1

1

4

4

IN4

4 IN4 OUT4

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

1

1

1

NQ2

2xODUflex

4

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

TQX

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

1

NQ2

M U X / D M U OUT4 X

1

1×OTU2

1

2xODUflex

1

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

4

4

2xODUflex

TQX

8xODUflex

2xODUflex

4xOTU2

1×OTU2

4xOTU2

1×ODU2

8xODUflex

TQX 4

4

4

NOTE

In this application scenario, Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode. TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


994



Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals Figure 14-38 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5)

OUT2


M U X

IN1


D M U X

OUT1 M U X

IN2

D M U X

NQ2

OUT4


M U X

IN3


D M U X

OUT3 M U X

IN4

D M U X

NOTE

The TN53NQ2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC communication is not available. l


l


The input and output wavelengths can be different. The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53NQ2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board. For example, when a TN53NQ2 board is connected to a TN52NQ2 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


995



Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-39 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 4xOTU2/ 4xOTU2e

TOM

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0 TOM OUT1

TOM

ODU1 ODU1

NS2

IN1 OUT1

IN1

ODU1 NQ2 ODUflex

TDX ODUflex ODU2/ ODU2e ND2 ODU2/ ODU2e

M U X / D OUT2 M IN2 U X

M U X / D IN2 M U OUT2 X

OUT3 IN3

IN3 OUT3

OUT4

IN4 OUT4

IN4

ODU1

TOM

ODU1 ODU1

NS2

NQ2 ODUflex ODUflex TDX ODU2/ ODU2e ND2 ODU2/ ODU2e

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports ODU0. TN53NQ2supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

14.4.3 Functions and Features The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-34 and Table 14-35. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex. The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


996



Table 14-34 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode) Functi on and featur e

Description

Basic functio n

NQ2 converts signals as follows: l TN51NQ2: – 16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e l TN53NQ2: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.

Crossconnect capabil ities

Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. l TN51NQ2: 16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e l TN53NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/8xODUflex l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e

OTN functio n

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support TCM function and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0 signals. l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex signals.

WDM specific ation


ESC functio n

Supported

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


997



Functi on and featur e

Description

PRBS test functio n

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. NOTE If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NQ2 board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN53NQ2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the TN53NQ2 board, or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT functio n

Not supported

FEC encodi ng

TN51NQ2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Alarms and perfor mance events monito ring


Regene ration board

l TN51NQ2:


TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN11LSXR l TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS functio n

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.

Physica l clock

Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals cross-connected from the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


998




Description

Optical -layer ASON

Supported


Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE The ODU0 SPRing protection is not supported by the TN54NQ2. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Loopba ck

Board

WDM Side




TN51N Q2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52N Q2

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

TN53N Q2

Supported only when ODU2/ ODU2e signals are received from the backplane.

Supported


Supported

TN54N Q2

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


999



Description

Protoco ls or standar ds compli ance



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1000




Description



Table 14-35 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regenerating rate


WDM specification


OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. Tunable wavelength function


ESC function

Supported


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1001




Description

PRBS function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

PTP clock (1588 V2)

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


1002






14.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 14-40 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1003



Figure 14-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Line Mode) Backplane (service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side Crossconnect module

1588v2 module


E/O

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

O/E

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4



Control CPU

Memory

Communication



Required voltage


NOTE

Only the TN53NQ2 /TN54NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-40, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-36 shows the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane. Table 14-36 Service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board


TN51N Q2


TN52N Q2/ TN54N Q2



1004



Board


TN53N Q2

A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex/4xODU2e

The signal processing module of the NQ2 board can access the following optical signals: The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the signal processing module outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

The board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l


Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 14-41 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1005



Figure 14-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Relay Mode) WDM side IN1 IN3 OUT2 OUT4

WDM side O/E


E/O

O/E


OUT1 OUT3 IN2 IN4


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1006



– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module . – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


14.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-42 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1007



Figure 14-42 Front panel of the NQ2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1008



Interfaces Table 14-37 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC


OUT1-OUT4

LC



14.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one NQ2 board. NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 6800: l

If the TN12XCS board is used, the NQ2 board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s when it is installed in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s when it is installed in any of the other slots.

l

If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s regardless of which slot the board is installed.

For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot.

Table 14-38 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board. Table 14-38 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-39 shows the valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1009



Table 14-39 Valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU8, U11-IU16


Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1010



For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-42 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-42 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-43 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN54N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-44

Table 14-45

54NQ2

TN53N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-44

Table 14-45

53NQ2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 14-43

Table 14-44

53NQ2


1011



Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN52N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-44

Table 14-45

52NQ2

TN51N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-45

Table 14-45

51NQ2

NOTE

For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1012



Figure 14-43 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Backplane

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODUflex:2 8xODUflex

ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(N1/OUT1)

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODU0:1 ODU1:1

ODU0:2

ODU 2:1

ODU0:1

ODU 1:4

ODU 0:2

32xODU0

OCh :1

ODU0:1

ODU 1:1

ODU 0:2

ODU 2:1

ODU0:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) ODU0:1 ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU0: 8 32xODU0

ODU0:1 ODU0: 8

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path






1013


14 Tributary Board and Line Board ODU0 mapping path (ODU0– >ODU2)

NOTE


Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board



Backplane 32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2







Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4 x ODU2/ODU2e

16x ODU1

ODU2

71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1) -1

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4) -1

4 (IN4/OUT4)-1



ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path



1014



Figure 14-45 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2 Other tributary/ line/PID board



16 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

ODU2


ODU2


1 (IN1/OUT1)-1



4 (IN4/OUT4)-1



ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module




ODU1 mapping path

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1015



Table 14-44 Description of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODUflex signals that are received through the backplane.

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2) 3(IN3/OUT3) 4(IN4/OUT4)

Table 14-45 Description of NM port of the NQ2 board (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2.

Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port

ODU1LP1ODU1LP4




1016



Port Name

Description


ODU2LP1ODU2LP4

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port

IN1/OUT1IN4/OUT4


-


The side.


l

The


NOTE

When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NQ2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.

ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 14-46, Figure 14-47 and Figure 14-48 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1017



Figure 14-46 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level) Client side


1


Tributary board a

(compatible mode)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

Tributary board b

5(TX3/RX3)-1

(standard mode) 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1


WDM side

NQ2 board

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 2

Compatible mode





176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1




The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2

Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1018



Line board c


Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1019



Figure 14-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

Tributary board b

5(TX3/RX3)-1

(standard mode)

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2

Compatible mode

176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:2-ODU1:2-ODU0:1

NQ2 board

Standard mode


Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1

2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2





Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1020



NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign randomRANDOM. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutiveFIX. Tributary board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b TN54THA / TN54TOA Line board c


Line board d


Line board e


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1021



Figure 14-48 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2) Client side


1


Tributary board a

(compatible mode) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

Tributary board b

5(TX3/RX3)-1

(standard mode) 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1



standard mode

NQ2 board 2






1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1








Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1022



NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign randomRANDOM. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutiveFIX. Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c


Line board d


Line board e


ODU1 Cross-Connections Figure 14-49 and Figure 14-50show the created ODU1 cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1023



Figure 14-49 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level) Client side



1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 Cross-connect module



NQ2

Compatible mode 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


WDM side

2



54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4



Tributary board a

TN51NQ2: TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS TN52NQ2:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1024



TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS / TN54THA / TN54TOA TN54NQ2: TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b

TN51NQ2: N/A TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2: TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c

TN51NQ2: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN52NQ2: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN54NQ2: TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Line board d

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1025



Figure 14-50 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU1 level) Client side



1




Compatible mode 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4

NQ2 board


Standard mode 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4


WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4






Tributary board a


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1026



Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c


Line board d



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1027



Figure 14-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU2 level) Client side



1




WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1

NQ2 board Cross-connect module

Compatible mode


WDM side

2

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1



4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2

Tributary board a TN51NQ2: TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL TN52NQ2: TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX TN54NQ2: TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1028



Tributary board b TN51NQ2: TN53TDX / TN55TQX TN52NQ2: TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX TN54NQ2: TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX Line board c

TN51NQ2: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN52NQ2: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN54NQ2: TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Line board d

TN51NQ2: TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 TN52NQ2: TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 TN54NQ2: TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1029



Figure 14-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU2 level) Client side




1



compatible mode


NQ2 board

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1

standard mode

IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module

WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 2



74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1


IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2

Tributary board a


Tributary board b


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1030



Line board c


Line board d


ODUflex Cross-Connections Figure 14-53 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1031



Figure 14-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODUflex level)

Client side



1

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1

Tributary board b

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

(standard mode)


WDM side IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

NQ2 board

IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2


WDM side 2

Line board c

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2


The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign randomRANDOM. Tributary board a TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX Line board c

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1032



14.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 14-46. Table 14-46 NQ2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status









l TN51NQ2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2

Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN53NQ2 only in the compatible mode.


Default: Automatic l TN53NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1033



Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. NOTE Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports AFEC.

See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. 1, 2, 3

AFEC Grade

Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 support this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


Band Type

-



1034



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

Planned Band Type


Default: /


C, CWDM


Default: C


See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the standard mode and speedup mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE This parameter is supported by the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2, and supported by the TN53NQ2 only in standard mode.


Line Rate

Default: Standard Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission


Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.16 Line Rate for more information.

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1035



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NQ2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.


Assign random, Assign consecutive

Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board.

Default: Assign random

Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU2, ODU1–>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode. For the TN53NQ2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.

Board Mode

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Line Mode

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1036



14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN51NQ2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm


2

1037



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm


2

1038



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1039



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: – TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) – TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1040



– TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) – TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)





TN51 NQ2


88

95

88

97

46.5

50

53

58.3

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN52 NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

TN53 NQ2


TN54 NQ2


14.5 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1041



14.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 NS2

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 NS2

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN52 NS2

Y

Y

T02/T03: N

N

Y

Y

TN53 NS2

Y

N

Y

Y

01M01/01M0 2/T04/T05/ T06: Y Y

Y

Variants The difference between the NS2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 14-50 Available variants of the TN11NS2 board Variant


01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1042



Table 14-51 Available variants of the TN12NS2 board Variant


FEC Encoding

01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

FEC/AFEC

01M03 T02

1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

T03


T04

4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD

T05

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

B

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.5.11 NS2 Specifications.

FEC/AFEC-2



ODUflex

Direct Mapping of ODU0 to ODU2

FEC Encoding

01M01

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN (01M01 for even wavelengths and 01M02 for odd wavelengths)

Y

Y

AFEC

T02


N

N

AFEC-2

T03


N

N

AFEC-2

T04


Y

Y

AFEC-2

T05


Y

Y

AFEC

T06


Y

Y

AFEC

01M02

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1043




Description

01

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.5.11 NS2 Specifications.

Differences Between Versions Function: Boar d

CrossConnet Granularit y

FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module FixedWavelengt h

TunableWavelengt h

Gray Light

TN11 NS2

ODU1

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS20 1M02

ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS2A


FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS2B


FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

Y

N

N

TN12 NS20 1M03 TN12 NS2T 02 TN12 NS2T 03 TN12 NS2T 04 TN12 NS2T 05

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1044



Boar d


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module FixedWavelengt h

TunableWavelengt h

Gray Light

TN52 NS2T 02

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

TN52 NS2T 04

ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

TN52 NS2T 05


FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N


FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN52 NS2T 03

TN52 NS2T 06 TN52 NS20 1M01 TN52 NS20 1M02 TN53 NS2

NOTE l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired slots while the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 does not. l OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.5.11 NS2 Specifications.


1045



Substitution Relationship Table 14-54 Substitution rules of the NS2 board Original Board

Substit ute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11NS2

None

-

TN12NS2

TN52NS 2

The TN52NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS2 functions as the TN12NS2.

TN53NS 2

The TN53NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN12NS2. NOTE When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply.

TN52NS2

TN53NS 2


TN53NS2

None

-

14.5.2 Application As a type of line board, the NS2 board converts 8 ODU0, 4 ODU1, 2 ODUflex, or one ODU2 into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signal or converts one ODU2e signal into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex service and ODU1 service.

Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals Figure 14-54 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 4xODU1

4

IN OUT

NS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


4xODU1

4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

4

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

4xODU1

TOM

1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

1

4xODU1

1

1

1 TOM

4

4

4

NS2

1046



Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 14-55 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 2xODU2/ODU2e

2xODU2/ODU2e

IN

OUT

NS2

TDX

NS2

IN OUT

NS2

TDX

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT

NS2

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-56 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 8xODU0

8xODU0

NS2

4xODU1

8


1×ODU2

8


1×OTU2

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

TOM

1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

1

8xODU0

1

1

1 TOM

8

8

8

NS2

For the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/ TN53NS2 board:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1047



l

When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path.

l

When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU2 service mapping path.

l

When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path.

Application scenario 4 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between two channels of ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 14-57 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 1xOTU2

2xODUflex

2xODUflex

1xOTU2

NS2

1×ODU2

IN

2xODUflex

OUT

M U X / IN D OUT M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

2xODUflex

TDX

NS2 M U X / D M U X

TDX

NOTE

The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode. The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53NS2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board. For example, when a TN53NS2 board is connected to a TN52NS2T02 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board.

Application scenario 5: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-58 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 1xOTU2

TOM

ODU0

ODU0

TEM ODUflex NS2 28 ND2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ODU1

OUT IN

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

IN OUT

NS2

TOM

ODUflex TEM 28 ODU1


ND2

1048



NOTE

The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

14.5.3 Functions and Features The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-55. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex. Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.

Table 14-55 Functions and features of the NS2 board Funct ion and featur e

Description

Basic functi on

NS2 converts signals as follows: l TN11NS2: – 4xODU1<->1xOTU2 l TN12NS2: – 4xODU1/1xODU2<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN53NS2: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, and ODUflex signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1049



Funct ion and featur e

Description

Crossconne ct capabi lities

OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.

OTN functi on

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITUT G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer:supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1050




Description

WDM specifi cation


Tunab le wavel ength functi on


ESC functi on

Supported

PRBS test functi on



NOTE If the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/ TN53NS2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/ TN53NS2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the board, or the board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT functi on

Not supported

FEC encodi ng

TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/TN12NS2T03/ TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12NS2A/TN12NS2B/TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03/TN52NS2T04/TN53NS2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1051




Description

Alarm s and perfor mance events monit oring


Regen eratio n board

l TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02:


TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN11LSXR l TN52NS2/TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03/TN52NS2T04/TN53NS2: TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS functi on

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v 2

The TN53NS2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.

Physic al clock

Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane

Optica l-layer ASON

Supported

Electri callayer ASON

Supported by the TN52NS2.

Protec tion schem e

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1052




Description

Loopb ack

Board

WDM Side




TN11N S2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN12N S2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52N S2T02

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Supported only when the signals is ODU2/ ODU2e from the backplane.

Supported


Supported

TN52N S2T03 TN52N S2T04 TN52N S2T05 TN52N S2T06 TN52N S201M 01 TN52N S201M 02 TN53N S2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1053




Description

Protoc ols or standa rds compl iance


IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1054




Description



14.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-59 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1055



Figure 14-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board Backplane (service corss-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side E/O 1588v2 module


OUT

OTN processing

O/E

module

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

Only the TN53NS2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-59, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-56 shows the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane. Table 14-56 Service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board


TN11N S2

A maximum of 4xODU1

TN12N S2



1056



Board


TN52N S2T02/ TN52N S2T03


TN52N S2T04/ TN52N S2T05/ TN52N S2T06/ TN52N S201M0 1/ TN52N S201M0 2/ TN53N S2

A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex/1xODU2e

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the signal processing module sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service crossconnection.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1057



– Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


14.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-60 and Figure 14-61 show the front panel of the NS2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1058



Figure 14-60 Front panel of the TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/ TN12NS2T03/TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05/TN12NS2A/TN52NS2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1059



Figure 14-61 Front panel of the TN12NS2B/TN53NS2



l


l


l





1060



Table 14-57 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



14.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one NS2 board. Table 14-58 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board. Table 14-58 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 14-59 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board. Table 14-59 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board Product

Valid slots





OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracka

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

a: Only the TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06 supports the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Table 14-60 shows the valid slots for the TN53NS2 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1061



Table 14-60 Valid slots for the TN53NS2 board Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-61 lists the mapping between the logical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-61 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1062



Table 14-62 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN53N S2

Standard mode

Figure 14-62

Table 14-63

53NS2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-63

Table 14-64

53NS2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 14-62

Table 14-63

52NS2(STND)

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-63

Table 14-64

52NS2

TN12N S2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-64

Table 14-64

12NS2

TN11N S2

Compati ble mode

Figure 14-65

Table 14-64

NS2

TN52N S2

a: TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03 board can work only in compatible mode.

NOTE

When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 signals from the backplane. The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1063



Figure 14-62 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 (standard mode) IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 2XODUflex

ODU2:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1

OCh:1

OCh :1


1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e


ODU2:1

OCh : 1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2 8 xODU0

ODU1:1 ODU2:1

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

OCh :1

ODU 1:4


ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU0: 8

Backplane


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path





ODU0 mapping path (ODU0– >ODU2)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1064



NOTE


Figure 14-63 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board


8 x ODU0


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1


Backplane

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

Crossconnect module

ODU1 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path



1065



Figure 14-64 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 board Other tributary/ line/PID board


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1

Backplane



1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

Crossconnect module

ODU2 mapping path





ODU1 mapping path

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1066



Figure 14-65 Port diagram of the TN11NS2 board Other tributary/ line/PID board

Backplane

4 x ODU1

1(IN/OUT)-1 1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-4

Crossconnect module

ODU1 mapping path




Table 14-63 Description of NM port of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (standard mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Definition

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)




IN/OUT-OCh:1

Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)


IN/OUT



1067



Table 14-64 Description of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP4


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUTa


-

IN/OUT


-

a: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.

14.5.9 Configuring Cross-Connections This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. l

The side.


l

The


NOTE

In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1068



Figure 14-66 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2) Client side



1





compatible mode 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

NS2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

standard mode IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2



164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2



IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8


Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards

NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1069



Line board c


Line board d


Line board e

TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1070



Figure 14-67 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1




WDM side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2

NS2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Standard mode


WDM side

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2

2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8


IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2





Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Tributary board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1071



Tributary board b TN54THA / TN54TOA Line board c

TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2

Line board d


Line board e


ODU1 Cross-Connections Figure 14-68, Figure 14-69 and Figure 14-70 show the created ODU1 cross-connections. Figure 14-68 TN12NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level) Client side Tributary board a


(compatible mode)

1



NS2






51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3


IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4


Tributary board a


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1072



Line board b


Line board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1073



Figure 14-69 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1




NS2


compatible mode


standard mode




51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4




Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1074



Line board c


Line board d


Figure 14-70 TN11NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1


1

WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-1 1(IN/OUT)-2

NS2

1(IN/OUT)-3 1(IN/OUT)-4

WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2


Line board b


(compatible mode)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2

Line board c


(standard mode)


The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards

Tributary board a


Line board b


Line board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1075



ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 14-71 and Figure 14-72 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 14-71 TN12NS2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level) Client side



1


WDM side

NS2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


WDM side Line board b

2

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 (compatible mode) IN/OUT-OCH:1



Tributary board a

TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL

Line board b

TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Line board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1076



Figure 14-72 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level) Client side




3(TX1/RX1)-1

1

4(TX1/RX1)-1


WDM side

NS2

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 compatible mode

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1

standard mode


WDM side

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1

Line board c (compatible mode) Line board d (standard mode)


Tributary board a


Tributary board b


Line board c


Line board d


ODUflex Cross-Connections Figure 14-73 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1077



Figure 14-73 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level) Client side




1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX1/RX1)-1


WDM side


NS2



WDM side

2

Lin board c

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards NOTE

The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is . Tributary board a

TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Tributary board b

TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX

Line board c


14.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 14-65. Table 14-65 NS2 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



1078



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status






Non-Loopback, Inloop, OutloopS



l TN11NS2: N/A

Specifies the service mode for a board.

l TN12NS2: ODU1, ODU2

NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 only in the compatible mode.

Default: ODU1 l TN52NS2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2


Default: Automatic l TN53NS2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic Off, On

Laser Status

Default: On

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.


1079



Field

Value

Description

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.

Default: 3

NOTE Only the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 support this parameter.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

Planned Band Type


Default: /


C, CWDM


Default: C




Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1080



Field

Value

Description




Default: None

NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN11NS2 board.

Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the standard mode and speedup mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode.


Line Rate


PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


Used to configure the line rate of OTN. NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2.

See D.16 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1081



Field

Value

Description


0 to 100

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex.

Default: 100

NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode.


Assign random, Assign consecutive Default: Assign random

The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter sets and queries the timeslot configuration mode of a board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU2, ODU1–>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode. For the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.

14.5.11 NS2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1082



Board



TN11NS 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN TN12NS 2



1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN52NS 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN TN53NS 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1083



NOTE




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

1084




Unit

Optical Module Type

-

Line code format






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

DRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

APD


1085



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


1086



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


1087



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


1088



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb) TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.) TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)





TN11NS 2


38.0

41.8

39.0

42.9

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1089


Board

TN12NS 2






41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.40


39.40

44.10


39.70

44.46


42.50

47.60


30.32

34


25.35

28.39


TN52NS2T02: TN52NS2T02: 46.5 51.1 TN52NS2T06: 28 TN52NS2T06: 31


TN52NS2T03: TN52NS2T03: 49.1 51.7 TN52NS2T04: 26 TN52NS2T04: 28


TN52NS 2

TN52NS2T05: 28 TN52NS2T05: 31

TN53NS 2


28

31


20

24

21

25

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1090



14.6 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board

14.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, TN54, TN55.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 NS3

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN52 NS3

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

TN54 NS3

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN55 NS3

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

NOTE

The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode .

Variants The difference between the NS3 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 14-71 Available variants of the TN11NS3 board Variant


T01


T03


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1091





T01


T03


T04




T01


T03


05

40G Transponder



T01



Function:

Board


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical clock

Relay Mode

Coherent System

WDMside Gray Optical Module

TN11NS3

ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

TN52NS3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

TN54NS3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e and ODU3

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1092



Board


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical clock

Relay Mode

Coherent System

WDMside Gray Optical Module

TN55NS3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e and ODU3

HFEC

N

N

Y

Y

N


Appearance: – The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front panel. The TN54NS3 board and the TN55NS3 board use a different front panel from the preceding boards. For details, see 14.6.5 Front Panel and 14.6.10 NS3 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.6.10 NS3 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-75 Substitution rules of the NS3 board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11NS3

TN52NS3


TN52NS3

None

-

TN54NS3

None

-

TN55NS3

None

-

14.6.2 Application As a type of line board, the NS3 board converts 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU3 signal or converts four ODU2e into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU3e signal. The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, and the ODU2/ODU2e service. The TN55NS3 board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1093



Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals Figure 14-74 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 4xODU2/ODU2e

4×ODU2/ODU2e

4

IN

M U IN X / OUT D M U X

1×ODU3/ODU3e

4

4

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3/OTU3e

TQX

1×OTU3/OTU3e

1

1×ODU3/ODU3e

1

4×ODU2/ODU2e

1

4xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

1 TQX 4

4

4

NS3

NS3

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.

Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 14-75 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)

1

16xODU1

16xODU1

1

1

1

1

4

4

4

4

1

4

4

TOM 8

NS3

4xODU2

16xODU1

1×OTU3

1

1×ODU3

1

4xODU2

16xODU1

4

M U IN X / OUT D M U X

1×OTU3

TOM M OUT U X IN / D M U X

1×ODU3

TOM 8

1 8 4

1

1

4

4

1 TOM

NS3

8

NOTE

l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Line Mode. l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU2->ODU3. l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1094



Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 14-76 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)

1

32xODU0

32xODU0

1

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

TOM 8

TOM

4 1

1

8

8

TOM 8

8

32xODU0

16xODU1

4xODU2

1×ODU3

8

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

8

1×OTU3

1

1×ODU3

1

4xODU2

1

16xODU1

32xODU0

4

M U X / D M U X

1

1 TOM

NS3

NS3

8

NOTE

l The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800. l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Line Mode. l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->ODU3. l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU3.

Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion between one channel of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 14-77 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 1xODU3


NS3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1×ODU3


1×OTU3

1×OTU3

1×ODU3

T S X L

1xODU3

T S X L

NS3

1095



NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Line Mode . With the TSXL board, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal Figure 14-78 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 1×OTU3/OTU3e

IN

1×OTU3/OTU3e

DMUX

OUT

MUX

NS3 1×OTU3/OTU3e

OUT

1×OTU3/OTU3e

MUX

IN

DMUX

NS3

NOTE

The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1096



Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-79 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 1xOTU3/ 1xOTU3e

TOM TOM

ND2

TDX

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1 ODU2/ NS3 ODU2e ODU2/ ODU2e

OUT IN

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

ODU1 IN OUT

ODU2/ ODU2e

NS3 ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2/ ODU2e

TOM TOM

ND2

ODU2/ TDX ODU2e

NOTE

The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU2e signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 40 Gbit/s.

14.6.3 Functions and Features The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. The NS3 board can work in either line mode or relay mode. Table 14-76 describes the functions and features of the board working in line board, and Table 14-77 describes the functions and features of the board working in relay board. NOTE

l Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODU3. l The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3. l When using the NRZ module, the TN54NS3 board maps 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 service. When using ODB or DQPSK optical module, the TN54NS3 maps 32 ODU0, or 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 signals, and also maps four ODU2e into one OTU3e signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1097



Table 14-76 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function

NS3 converts signals as follows: l TN11NS3: – 4xODU2<->1xOTU3 – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e l TN52NS3: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->1xOTU3 – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e l TN54NS3/TN55NS3: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/1xODU3<->1xOTU3 – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals. When the mixed signals contain an ODU2e signal, they must be mapped into an OTU3e signal.


Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. TN11NS3: 4xODU2/4xODU2e TN52NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e TN54NS3/TN55NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/ 1xODU3

OTN function

l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported



1098




Description

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN11NS3/TN52NS3: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN54NS3: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. TN55NS3: l Supports HFEC. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports CD and PMD performance monitoring. NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode. Only the TN55NS3 board supports CD and PMD performance monitoring.

Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board can be regenerated by a TN12LSXLR board. l The WDM-side signals of the TN54NS3 board can be regenerated using another TN54NS3 board. l The WDM-side signals of the TN55NS3 board can be regenerated using another TN55NS3 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

The TN54NS3 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.

Physical clock

The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


1099




Description


Supported by the TN52NS3, TN54NS3, and TN55NS3.

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

WD M side




TN1 1NS 3

Supp orted

Not supported

Not supported

Supported

TN5 2NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

Supported

Supported

TN5 4NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

Supported

Supported

TN5 5NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

Supported

Supported


1100




Description


Prot ocol s or stan dard s for tran spar ent tran smis sion (non perf orm ance mon itori ng)

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ba ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M Signals NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1101




Description Prot ocol s or stan dard s for serv ice proc essi ng (per for man ce mon itori ng)


Table 14-77 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


OTN function

l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM, TCM, PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specification




ESC function




1102




Description

PRBS test function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN54NS3: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. TN55NS3: l Supports HFEC. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported



-


1103






14.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 14-80 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1104



Figure 14-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Line Mode) Backplane (service corss-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side Cross-connect

1588v2

module

module


E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



NOTE

Only the TN54NS3 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-80, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-78 shows the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane. Table 14-78 Service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board


TN11N S3

A maximum of 4xODU2/4xODU2e

TN52N S3



1105



Board


TN54N S3/ TN55N S3

A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/1xODU3

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS3 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC. Then, the signal processing module outputs one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals. The OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTU3/OTU3e framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

The board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l


Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 14-81 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1106



Figure 14-81 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side O/E


IN


E/O

OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is supported only by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3.

The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1107



– Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-82, Figure 14-83, and Figure 14-84 show the front panel of the NS3 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1108



Figure 14-82 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1109



Figure 14-83 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1110



Figure 14-84 Front panel of the TN55NS3 board

NOTE




l


l


l




1111



Interfaces Table 14-79 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-79 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



14.6.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11NS3 board, TN52NS3 board or TN55NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3 board. Table 14-80 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS3 board. Table 14-80 Valid slots for the TN11NS3 board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

Table 14-81 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS3 board. Table 14-81 Valid slots for the TN52NS3 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots




1112



Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

When the TN54NS3 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1113



and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.


Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack subrack

IU2-IU16


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

When the TN55NS3 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, IU66 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14.

l

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU14 and IU16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1114



NOTE

The online signal bus on the TN55NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN55NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN55NS3 board, the slot number of the TN55NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-84 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-84 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS3 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NMS

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS3 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-85 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on


TN55N S3

Standard mode

Figure 14-85

Table 14-86

55NS3

TN54N S3

Standard mode

Figure 14-85

Table 14-86

54NS3(STND)

Compatible mode

Figure 14-86

Table 14-87

54NS3


1115



Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on


TN52N S3

Compatible mode

Figure 14-87

Table 14-87

52NS3

TN11N S3

Compatible mode

Figure 14-88

Table 14-87

NS3

NOTE

For TN54NS3/TN55NS3: l

ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode.

l

When used with a TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.

For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1116



Figure 14-85 Port diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3 board (standard mode) Backplane

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1 ODU3:1

1XODU3

OCh:1

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1~4) ODU2:1 ODU 3 : 1

4 xODU2/ 4xODU2e

OCh :1

ODU2:4


IN1/OUT1

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16) ODU1:1

ODU 3 :1

OCh :1

16xODU1 ODU1:16

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)-ODU0:(1~2) ODU0:1 ODU0:2

ODU 1:1 ODU 3 :1

32xODU0 ODU0:1

OCh :1

ODU1:16

ODU 0:2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path

ODU0 mapping path


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1117



Figure 14-86 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board (compatible mode) Other Other tributary/line/ tributary/line/ PID board PID board

Other tributary/line/ PID board


Backplane 4xODU2/ ODU2e

ODU3

16 x ODU1

32 x ODU0 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2

71(ODU2LP1/O ODU1 DU2LP1)-1001

164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-2





ODU3

81(ODU3LP1/ ODU3LP1)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1





ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU3 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path


ODU1 mapping path

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1118



NOTE

The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time because they share the same ODU2 timeslot: l

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port

l


l


l

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port

Figure 14-87 Port diagram of the TN52NS3 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/ PID board


Other tributary/line/ PID board Backplane

32 x ODU0

16 x ODU1


4 x ODU2/ODU2e

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 ODU2

164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1 173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-2

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 ODU2


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-1

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-4

54 ODU1(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path




1119



Figure 14-88 Port diagram of the TN11NS3 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/PID board

Backplane 4 x ODU2/ODU2e 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1



ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module



Table 14-86 Description of NM port on the NS3 board (standard mode) Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16)ODU0:(1 to 2)


IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16)




IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1


IN1/OUT1


Table 14-87 Description of NM port of the NS3 board (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-2.


ODU1LP1ODU1LP4




1120



Port Name

Description


ODU2LP1



NOTE This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.


TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and the ODU3LP port

ODU3LP1

Internal logical port. The optical path is numbered 1.

Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT


-


The side.


l

The


NOTE

When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1121



ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 14-89 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU0 level) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1




NS3 (compatible mode)

2 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2


WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line board c 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

(compatible mode)


Line board d



(standard mode)

The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3

Tributary board a




Line board d

TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1122



Figure 14-90 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board (ODU0 level) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1



IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

NS3 (standard mode) 2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:16-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:16-ODU0:2


WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2






Tributary board a




Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1123



ODU1 Cross-Connections Figure 14-91 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU1 level) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1




NS3 (compatible mode) 2








Tributary board a TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1124





Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1125



Figure 14-92 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU1 level) Client side


Tributary board a

(compatible mode)

1




NS3 (compatible mode)

2









Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c


Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1126



Figure 14-93 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)

1



Cross-connect module WDM side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:3

NS3 (standard mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:14 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:15 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:16



2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4



Cross-connect module The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3

Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1127



Line board c


Line board d


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1128



ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 14-94 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU2 level) Client side

Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1




NS3 (compatible mode) Cross-connect module

WDM side 2



1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1




Tributary board a

TN11NS3: TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL TN52NS3: TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX TN54NS3: TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX

Tributary board b

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

TN55TQX/TN53TDX


1129



Line board c TN11NS3: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN52NS3: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN54NS3: TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 Line board d TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1130




Tributary board a

(compatible mode)


1



Cross-connect module WDM side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:4

NS3 (standard mode)


WDM side

2

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1




Tributary board a

TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX

Tributary board b

TN55TQX / TN53TDX

Line board c TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 Line board d TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1131



ODU3 Cross-Connections Figure 14-96 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU3 level) Client side


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1


RX1/TX1

WDM side NS3


(compatible mode)



IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1


2

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3

Tributary board a TN53TSXL Tributary board b TN54TSXL Line board c

TN54NS3

Line board d

TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4

NOTE

When cross-connections are configured between the TN54NS3 and TN54TSXL boards, Line Rate of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1132







RX1/TX1

WDM side NS3

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1

(standard mode)



IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1


2

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3

Tributary board a TN53TSXL Tributary board b TN54TSXL Line board c

TN54NS3

Line board d

TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4

14.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 14-88. Table 14-88 NS3 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



1133



Field

Value

Description


-

Set and query the optical interface name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Channel Use Status





Default: Non-Loopback Channel Loopback


Query or set the path Loopback.

Default: Non-Loopback Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

Service Mode

l TN11NS3: not supported l TN52NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

l TN54NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, Mix Default: Automatic

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1134



Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State


FEC Mode

TN11NS3, TN52NS3, TN54NS3: l FEC, AFEC l Default: AFEC


TN55NS3: l HFEC l Default: HFEC AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1135



Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. CBAND is the only band now supported.

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM

Sets Receive Band Type of a board.

Default: C



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1136



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C


See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the standard mode and speedup mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3 in the standard mode.


Line Rate

Default: l ODU2LP channel: Standard Mode l ODU3LP channel: Speedup Mode

Used to configure the line rate of OTN. l For ODU2LP channel, – This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. – This parameter needs to be set to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are cross-connected. l For ODU3LP channel, – This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. – This parameter could be set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode when ODU2/ODU3 signals are cross-connected.


l TN52NS3/ TN54NS3: – Enabled, Disabled – Default: Disabled l TN55NS3: – Disabled, GC1C +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 support this parameter.

– Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1137



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm)

-

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Queries the dispersion compensation value of the board. NOTE Only TN55NS3 supports this parameter.

Default: Disabled

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN52NS3/54NS3/TN55NS3 support this parameter.

PMD Threshold(ps)

-


Board Mode




NOTE Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 support this parameter.

See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

14.6.10 NS3 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11NS 3


N/A


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1138



Board



TN52NS 3


N/A

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN TN54NS 3


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 40G Transponder TN55NS 3


N/A

NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point. When using the NRZ module, the TN54NS3 board maps 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 service. When using ODB or DQPSK optical module, the TN54NS3 maps 32 ODU0, or 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 signals, and also maps four ODU2e into one OTU3e signals.


Unit


-



ODB

DQPSK


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


1139



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


nm

N/A

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

-500 to 500

-500 to 500


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit


-



ODB

DQPSK


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

0

0


1140



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


nm

N/A

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

-800 to 800

-800 to 800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

-

ePDM-BPSK


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

THz


192.1 to 196.05

1141



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


dB

35


ps/nm

60000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 14-92 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (gray light) Parameter

Unit



-

NRZ


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


dB

35


ps/nm

40


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1142



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11NS3: l


l


TN52NS3: l


l


TN54NS3: l


l


TN55NS3: l


l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board




TN11NS3


92

101.2


67

75


1143



Board




TN52NS3


118

130


110

118


118

130


73

80


60

65

40G Transponder

62

69

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMBPSK-PIN

135

150

TN54NS3

TN55NS3

14.7 NS4 NS4: 100G line service processing board

14.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS4 board is TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN54 NS4

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1144



NOTE

In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the NS4 board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the NS4 board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the NS4 board can work only in relay mode.

Variants Table 14-93 Available variants of the TN54NS4 board Varia nt


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T11

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN

SDFEC

14.7.2 Application As a type of line board, the NS4 board converts 80 ODU0, 40 ODU1, ten ODU2, ten ODU2e, two ODU3, one ODU4, or 80 ODUflex into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex service. The NS4 board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1145



Application scenario 1 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-98 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 80xODU0

80xODU0

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

10

1

1

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

80xODU0


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

80xODU0

10

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4 board is added on the NMS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1146



Application scenario 2 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODUflex signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-99 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 80xODUflex

80xODUflex

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

10

1

1

1 TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

80xODUflex


1×ODU4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

OUT

1×ODU4

80xODUflex

10

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1147



Application scenario 3 of the NS4 board: conversion between 40 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-100 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 40xODU1

40xODU1

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

5

1

1

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

40xODU1


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

40xODU1

5

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1148



Application scenario 4 of the NS4 board: conversion between ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-101 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 10xODU2/ODU2e

10xODU2/ODU2e

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

1

TQX 4

4

4

10xODU2/ODU2e


1×ODU4

4


1×OTU4

4

4

1×OTU4

TQX

1×ODU4

1

10xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

TDX

4

TDX

NOTE


Application scenario 5 of the NS4 board: conversion between two channels of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-102 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 2xODU3

2xODU3

NS4

NS4 TSXL

2xODU3


TSXL

1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1×ODU4

2xODU3

TSXL


TSXL

1149



NOTE


Application scenario 6 of the NS4 board: conversion between one channel of ODU4 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 14-103 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 1xODU4

1xODU4

NS4

NS4 1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

TSC


TSC

NOTE


Application scenario 7 of the NS4 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU4 signal Figure 14-104 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 7)

NS4 1×OTU4

IN

1×OTU4

DMUX

OUT

MUX

NS4 1×OTU4

OUT

1×OTU4

MUX

IN

DMUX

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4(REG) board is added on the NMS. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1150



Application scenario 8: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 14-105 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 8)

1xOTU4

TOM

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

TEM ODUflex 28 ODU2/ ND2

ODU2e

NS4

OUT IN

ODU2/ ODU2e

TDX

TSXL

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

ODUflex TEM 28

IN OUT

TOM

NS4

ODU2/

ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2/

ND2

ODU2e

ODU2e

ODU2/ TDX ODU2e

ODU3

ODU3

TSXL

NOTE

The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 100 Gbit/s.

14.7.3 Functions and Features The NS4 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-94 and Table 14-95. Table 14-94 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Line Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function

NS4 converts signals as follows: 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1151




Description


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU4 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU4 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU1 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive monitoring function.

WDM specification




ESC function


PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Regeneration board

TN54NS4, TN11LTX

ALS function

Not supported



1152




Description

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM side Loopback

ODU0 Channel Loopbac k


ODU2 Channel Loopba ck


ODUfle x Channel Loopba ck

Supported

Supporte d

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed


1153




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ba ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M Signals NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1154




Description ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)


Table 14-95 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU4. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4. l Supports SM function for OTU4.

WDM specification

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1155


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Description



ESC function


PRBS function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Supports HFEC and SDFEC.



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported






-


1156






14.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS4 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 14-106 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1157



Figure 14-106 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Line Mode) 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side


OTNOTN processing processing module module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS4 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS4 to the WDM side of the NS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex or 40 channels of ODU1 or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e or two channels of ODU3 or one channel of ODU4 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals. The OTU4 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1158



After O/E conversion, the OTU4 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU4 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex or 40 channels of ODU1 or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e or two channels of ODU3 or one channel of ODU4 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 14-107 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board. Figure 14-107 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side O/E

IN



OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The NS4 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU4 optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1159



Module Function l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4/OTU4e signals, processes overheads in OTU4/OTU4e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-108 shows the front panel of the NS4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1160



Figure 14-108 Front panel of the NS4 board

NOTE




l


l


l




1161



Interfaces Table 14-96 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-96 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



14.7.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one NS4 board. Table 14-97 shows the valid slots for the NS4 board. Table 14-97 Valid slots for the NS4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18

NOTE

The online signal bus on the NS4 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NS4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the NS4 board, the slot number of the NS4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

When the NS4 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1162



IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, or IU16 and IU18.


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-98 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-98 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NMS

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1-ODU4:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-109 shows the logical Ports of the NS4 board. Table 14-99 describes the meaning of each port. NOTE

ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 54NS4 board is selected on the NMS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1163



Figure 14-109 Port diagram of the NS4 board Backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2) ODU3:1 2xODU3

ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1-10) ODU2:1 ODU4:1

10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10


1(IN/OUT)

ODU1:1 ODU4:1 40xODU1

OCh:1

ODU1:40

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80) ODU0:1 ODU4:1 80xODU0

OCh:1

ODU0:80

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80) ODUflex:1 ODU4:1

80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 14-99 Descriptions of the ports on the NS4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1

WDM-side optical ports Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1164



Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1










IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1 to 80)



The side.


l

The


NOTE

When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1165



ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 14-110 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODU0 level) Client side Tributary board a (compatible mode)



3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1



NS4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:79 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:80




1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:79 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:80 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2

Line board f (compatible mode)

Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS4 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS4

Tributary board a

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1166



Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c

TN54NS4

Line board d


Line board e


Line board f


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1167






3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:2



WDM side


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:39 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:40 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

2

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3






Tributary board a


Tributary board b

TN54THA / TN54TOA

Line board c

TN54NS4

Line board d


Line board e


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1168






3(RX1/TX1)-1


1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:2



WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:2 Line board c (standard mode)

2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:9 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:10 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1





Tributary board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX Line board c

TN54NS4

Line board d


Line board e


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1169



ODU3 Cross-Connections Figure 14-113 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODU3 level) Client side

Tributary board a (compatible mode) Tributary board b


1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

(standard mode)

Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:2

NS4


2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:1 Line board c 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:2 (standard mode)

Line board d 81(ODU3LP1/ODU3LP1)-1

(compatible mode)


Tributary board a

TN53TSXL

Tributary board b

TN54TSXL

Line board c

TN54NS4

Line board d

TN54NS3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1170



ODU4 Cross-Connections Figure 14-114 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODU4 level) Client side

1 3(RX1/TX1)-1

Tributary board


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1

NS4 Cross-connect module

WDM side

2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1

Line board



Tributary board

TN54TSC

Line board

TN54NS4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1171



ODUflex Cross-Connections Figure 14-115 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODUflex level) Client side


Tributary board a


(compatible mode)



1


Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:2

NS4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:79 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:80


2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:2

Line board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:79 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:80


Tributary board a

TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA

Tributary board b

TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX

Line board a


14.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS4, refer to Table 14-100. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1172



Table 14-100 NS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used






Query or set the path Loopback.


Off, On Default: On

FEC Working State


FEC Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

HFEC, SDFEC

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface.


1173



Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value.

Receive Band Type

C

Sets Receive Band Type of a board.

Default: C Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Planned Band Type

C

Default: /

Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1174



Field

Value

Description


l Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads.

l Default: Disabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for a byte, the system will not process the byte in OTN overheads. For example, when the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte in OTN overheads. If the processing is required, set this parameter to Disabled.


Line Rate




l This parameter needs to be set to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are cross-connected. l This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS4 board receives 3GSDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

PMD Threshold(ps)

-


PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Board Mode


Default: Disabled

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1175



14.7.10 NS4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54NS 4

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)PIN

N/A

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN

NOTE


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 14-101 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


dB

N/A


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


dB

35


1176



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


dB

N/A


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


dB

35


ps/nm

55000


1177



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l



WDM-Side Module



TN54NS4 (line application)


168

182


180

200


155

167


167

185

TN54NS4 (regeneration application)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1178



14.8 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

14.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TB E

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TBE board has only one variant: TN11TBE01.

14.8.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.

Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-116.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1179



Figure 14-116 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system TBE

TBE 1

1 Local Client Side: GE

Local Client Side: GE

8

8 10GE

10GE

4

L4G

GE 4

4 L4G

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

L4G 4 4

GE

L4G 4

L2

L2

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-117. Figure 14-117 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system

TBE

TBE 1

4

L4G

GE 4

4 L4G

8

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

L4G 4 4

GE

L4G 4

L2

8 L2

14.8.3 Functions and Features The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-103.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1180



Table 14-103 Functions and features of the TBE board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service. l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services. The reverse process is similar. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s NOTE The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.

OptiX OSN 6800:


l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed in slot IU1/IU4/IU11/IU14. l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to another service board when the TBE board and the other service board are installed in non-paired slots. l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to another service board when the TBE board and the other service board are installed in paired slots. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


QinQ

supported

QoS (Quality of Service)

Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).

l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.


1181




Description

ETH OAM

Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol.

LAG (Link Aggregation Group)

l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port. l Supports manual and static link aggregation. l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization

VLAN broadcast

Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.

CVLAN group port

Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.

Layer 2 switching

Supports the MAC address learning and aging. Supports one VB.

Flow control


EPL (Ethernet Private Line)

Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.

EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line)

Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching.

Port working mode

10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electric interface: auto-negotiation FE optical interface: 100MFULL FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Protection schemes

Supports VLAN SNCP. Supports DBPS protection. Supports LAG protection. Supports DLAG protection. Supports ERPS protection.

Test frame

Not supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1182




Description


Not supported

Loopback


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1183





IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-118 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1184



Figure 14-118 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE

16

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E 8

RX8 TX1 TX2

16

E/O

TX8

Client-side GE optical module

RX

O/E

TX

E/O

8

L2 switching module

Cross-connect module 16

Client-side 10GE optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services l

Positive process: – The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1185



– The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the TX optical interface. l

Negative process: – The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels of GE electrical signals. – A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. – A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.

Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services l

Positive process: – The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals. – The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the backplane.

l

Negative process: – The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards through the backplane. – GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals. – The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE/10GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

L2 switching module – Forwards service signals. – Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1186


l


Cross-connect module – Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane. – The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. – OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

l


l


14.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-119 shows the front panel of the TBE board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1187



Figure 14-119 Front panel of the TBE board

TBE STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 TX RX

TBE



l


l


l





1188



Table 14-104 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

TX

LC

Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX

LC

Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.

NOTE

It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.


14.8.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TBE board. Table 14-105 shows the valid slots for the TBE board. Table 14-105 Valid slots for the TBE board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5




1189



Table 14-106 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX/RX

3

TX1/RX1

4

TX2/RX2

5

TX3/RX3

6

TX4/RX4

7

TX5/RX5

8

TX6/RX6

9

TX7/RX7

10

TX8/RX8

11

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-120 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 14-107 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-120 Port diagram of the TBE board Backplane

PORT3 PORT4

VCTRUNK1

8 x GE 8 x GE

101(AP1/AP1)-1

108(AP8/AP8)-1 VCTRUNK8 VCTRUNK9 109(AP9/AP9)-1

PORT11


Client side

L2 switching model

Cross-connect model


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1190



NOTE

l When the TBE board is installed in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16 in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, it supports backplane cross-connections of up to 8 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services. l When the TBE and another service board are installed in paired slots in an OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, it supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the other three boards. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.

Table 14-107 Description of NM port of the TBE board Port Name

Description

PORT3

The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/ TX.

PORT4-PORT11

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.

VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16


AP1-AP16


14.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module.

l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-121. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board by are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.)

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-121. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board by are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1191



Figure 14-121 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board Client side

Client side

WDM side


201(LP/LP)-1

102(AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

103(AP3/AP3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 116(AP16/AP16)-1

1

TBE

2

The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards

1

The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

2


14.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 14-108. Table 14-108 TBE parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Set and query the optical interface name.

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: Off


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


1192



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

14.8.10 TBE Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TB E

N/A

100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-109 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services) Parameter

Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km

100 BASE-FX-80 km

NRZ

NRZ


1193



Parameter

Unit


-

Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km

100 BASE-FX-80 km

10 km (6.2 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

-3

5


dBm

-11.5

-2


dB

9

9

Center frequency

nm

1310

1550

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

IEEE802.3zcompliant


-

PIN

PIN

Receiver sensitivity (EOL)

dBm

-19

-22


dBm

-3

-3


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355


1194


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



NRZ

NRZ


1195



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


-



40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1196




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant

APD

PIN


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


1197


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12



l





TN11TBE

40.7

44.8

14.9 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1198



14.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TD G

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TDG board has only one variant: TN11TDG01.

14.9.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-122. Figure 14-122 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system 1xODU1

1xODU1

TDG

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 2

GE/ODU1

1xODU1

1xODU1

GE

TDG

GE

GE/ODU1

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To slot of the mesh group

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1199



14.9.3 Functions and Features The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-113. Table 14-113 Functions and features of the TDG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the crossconnect board or with the board in the paired slot.




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported

Test frame

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.

Loopback

WDM side Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1200




Description



IEEE 802.3z



14.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-123 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1201



Figure 14-123 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board Backplane (service corss-connection)

2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1

Client side RX1

O/E

RX2

TX1 TX2

E/O

GE Encapsulation and mapping module



Crossconnect module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, – If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. – If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1202



The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. – Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l


l


14.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-124 shows the front panel of the TDG board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1203



Figure 14-124 Front panel of the TDG board

TDG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

TDG



l


l


l





1204



Table 14-114 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



14.9.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDG board. Table 14-115 shows the valid slots for the TDG board. Table 14-115 Valid slots for the TDG board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.


IU2-IU5


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-116 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-116 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1205



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-125 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 14-117 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-125 Port diagram of the TDG board Other line/ OTU board

Other line/ PID board Backplane

Client Side 2 x GE

201 (LP/LP)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

201 (LP/LP)-2

4 (RX2/TX2)-1

ODU1

201 (LP/LP)-1

Crossconnect module



Table 14-117 Description of NM port of the TDG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.

14.9.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1206


l


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 14-126.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 14-126.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

4

in Figure 14-126.

NOTE


Figure 14-126 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board Client side


201(LP/LP)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

Client side

WDM side

4 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 3

4(RX2/TX2)-1

2 1

201(LP/LP)-2

TDG The straight-through of the TDGboard

1

The internal cross-connection of the TDG board

2

The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TDG board

3 4


l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1207



of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-127. Figure 14-127 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3

Other board a (compatible mode)


Other board b (standard mode)


201(LP/LP)-1

TDG

201(LP/LP)-2

Client side The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

14.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 14-118. Table 14-118 TDG parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1208



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Off, On Default: Off


Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600


Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: AutoNegotiation



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.


1209



14.9.10 TDG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TD G

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

NOTE


Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side Table 14-119 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


1210


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


1211



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11TDG

30

33


1212



14.10 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board

14.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TD X

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2TD X

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN5 2TD X

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

TN5 3TD X

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Variants Each of the TN11TDX, TN12TDX, TN52TDX, and TN53TDX boards has only one variant identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TDX01.

Differences Between Versions Function:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boar d

CrossConnet Granularity

IEEE 1588v2

TN11 TDX

ODU1

N

Physical Clock

Client-side Services OTU2/ OTU2e

FC800/ FC1200

N

N

N


1213



Boar d

CrossConnet Granularity

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock


FC800/ FC1200

TN12 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

N

N

TN52 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

N

TN53 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e/ ODUflex

Y

Y

Y

Y

Specification: l

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.10.10 TDX Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-121 Substitution rules of the TDX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TDX

None

-

TN12TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN12TDX.

TN52TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN52TDX.

TN53TDX

None

-

14.10.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections. For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-128 and Figure 14-129. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1214



Figure 14-128 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system 8xODU1

RX1

8xODU1

TDX

TDX

TX1

N D 2

TX2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1

8×ODU1

10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 RX2 OC-192

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

TX1 RX110GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 TX2 OC-192

RX2

Figure 14-129 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board in the WDM system 2xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

TDX

TDX

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

2xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex


10GE LAN RX1 10GE WAN STM-64 TX1 OC-192 OTU2 RX2 OTU2e FC800 TX2 FC1200


TX1 10GE LAN RX1 10GE WAN TX2 RX2

STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200

Table 14-122 Client-side service mapping path supported by the board Board

Client-Side Service

Backplane-Side Service

TN11TD X

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192

ODU1

TN12TD X


ODU2/ODU2e

TN52TD X

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e

ODU2/ODU2e

TN53TD Xa

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200

ODU2/ODU2e

FC800

ODUflex

a: For FC800 services, the TN53TDX board supports two mapping paths: FC800->ODU2 and FC800->ODUflex. The mapping paths for the TN53TDX boards at the service adding and dropping sites must be the same.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1215



14.10.3 Functions and Features The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, see Table 14-123. Table 14-123 Functions and features of the TDX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TDX converts signals as follows: l TN11TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>8xODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals l TN12TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>2xODU2/ODU2e l TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e<->2xODU2/ODU2e l TN53TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e/FC800/FC1200<->2xODU2/ODU2e, 2xFC800<>2xODUflex


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services. The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, For TN11TDX/TN12TDX/TN52TDX board, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1216




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the crossconnect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot using the backplane. l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM functions for ODU2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ESC function

Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.



1217




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN). NOTE TN11TDX only supports Poisson mode. TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX only supports Bursty mode.

ALS function


Test frame

Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Latency measurement

The TN53TDX board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TN53TDX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Physical clock

TN53TDX: l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. TN52TDX: When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX.


1218




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/ TN53TDX). NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) l TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) support 1588

Loopback



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported



1219






14.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-130 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1220



Figure 14-130 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board Backplane(service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

Client side RX1 RX2

TX1 TX2


O/E

10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module

E/O


OTN processing


module

1588v2 module

FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

NOTE

Only the TN53TDX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module. Only the TN53TDX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-130, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-124 shows the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane. Table 14-124 Service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board


TN11T DX

A maximum of 8xODU1

TN12T DX/ TN52T DX

A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e

TN53T DX

A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex


1221



In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/ SONET performance. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1222


14 Tributary Board and Line Board NOTE

FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.

– OTN processing module Frames signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. l

1588v2 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board.

l


l


14.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-131 and Figure 14-132 show the front panel of the TDX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1223



Figure 14-131 Front panel of the TN11TDX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1224



Figure 14-132 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board



l


l


l





1225



Table 14-125 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



14.10.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDX board. Table 14-126 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board. Table 14-126 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 14-127 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board. Table 14-127 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-128 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board. Table 14-128 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


1226




Display of Physical Ports Table 14-129 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-129 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/ 151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TDX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-130 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


TN11T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-133

Table 14-131

TDX

TN12T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-134

Table 14-131

12TDX

TN52T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-134

Table 14-131

52TDX

TN53T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-135

Table 14-131

53TDX


1227


Board


Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Standar d mode

Figure 14-136

Table 14-131

53TDX(STND)

Figure 14-133 Port diagram of the TN11TDX(compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 8 x ODU1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4

Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX(compatible mode) Other line/PID board


3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1228



Figure 14-135 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (compatible mode) Other line/ PID board

Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1



Figure 14-136 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 2x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1




Table 14-131 Description of NMS port of the TDX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


imp1-imp2

Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

ClientLP1-ClientLP2



1229



14.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

TN11TDX: Configuration of cross-connection – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, configure the bandwidth binding of the imp port. NOTE

The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s. For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the TN11TDX board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2 must be bound to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.

– During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-137. l

TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Configuration of cross-connection – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-138.

l

TN53TDX: Configuration of cross-connection – Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. – Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any>ODU2->OTU2) – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP or RX/TX port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-138 and Figure 14-139. – Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. – Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex) – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP or RX/TX port and the ODUflex port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-140 and Figure 14-141. NOTE

The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1230



Figure 14-137 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX (compatible mode ODU1 level) WDM side


Other board a (standard mode)





Other board b (compatible mode)

Client side 151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4

TDX Cross-connect module

The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a


Other board b


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1231



Figure 14-138 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX (compatible mode ODU2 level) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1



Other board a (standard mode) Other board b (compatible mode)

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

TDX 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1


The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a


Other board b

TN12TDX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN52TDX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN53TDX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1232



Figure 14-139 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode ODU2 level) WDM side


Other board 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1



Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

TDX 4(RX2/TX2)-1


The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a


Other board b


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1233



Figure 14-140 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (compatible mode ODUflex level) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

Other board


Cross-connect mode Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

TDX 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

Cross-connect mode The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board


Figure 14-141 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode ODUflex level) WDM side


Other board


Cross-connect module Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

TDX 4(RX2/TX2)-1

Cross-connect module The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board




1234



For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 14-132. Table 14-132 TDX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






l TN11TDX: 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN


l TN12TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TDX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, CBR_10G, FC800, FC1200 Default: None

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1235



Field

Value

Description


9953.28 to 10312.50


Default: /

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to CBR_10G.

See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Port Mapping

l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter l TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) l TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)

The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. NOTE The TN53TDX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) NOTE For the TN12TDX: only the ClientLP1 port supports MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1236



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDMside receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Default: 0s

NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.


1237



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s

NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

Enabled, Disabled


LPT Enabled



Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. PAUSE Frame Flow Control


Determines whether to enable the switch of the flow control. NOTE Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. NOTE For the TN52TDX and TN53TDXboard, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1238



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC

FEC Mode

Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition


PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


1239



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64 or OC-192: – PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

Applies to fault detection and location when the service type is STM-64 or OC-192. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter. When the service type is 10GELAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1240



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port)


Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/ Any->ODU2->OTU2)

NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

14.10.10 TDX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TDX/ TN12TDX/ TN52TDX/ TN53TDX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km

NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point. NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.

Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-133 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Line code format Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-





NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


1241


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


1242


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12



l

Weight: – TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.) – TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) – TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) – TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11TDX

78.0

80.0

TN12TDX

37.4

40.7

TN52TDX

57.3

63.0

TN53TDX

25.0

27.5


1243



14.11 TEM28 TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit

14.11.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TEM28 board is TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 4TE M28

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54TEM28 board has only one variant: TN54TEM28. The TN54TEM28 board variant is the board itself.

14.11.2 Application The TEM28 board is a tributary board. It implements conversion between 24 channels of GE optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE electrical signals, with four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals and ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s. For the position of the TEM28 board in the WDM system, seeFigure 14-142. Figure 14-142 Position of the TN54TEM28 board in the WDM system 2xOTU2 RX1

TX5

GE/FE RX28 TX28

L2

TEM28

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N D 2


16×ODU0/8×ODUflex/ 8×ODU1/2×ODU2

RX4 TX4 RX5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

TEM28

16×ODU0/8×ODUflex /8×ODU1/2×ODU2

10 GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TX1

2xOTU2 RX1 TX1 RX4

10 GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TX4

L2

RX5 TX5

GE/FE RX28 TX28

1244



NOTE

The RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The other ports on the board are GE optical ports or GE/FE electrical ports, that are capable of processing GE and FE services.

14.11.3 Functions and Features The TEM28 board supports electrical cross-connections, L2 layer switching and the QinQ function. Table 14-134 and Table 14-135 list the functions and features of the TEM28 board. Table 14-134 OTN Functions and features of the TEM28 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Coverts 24 channels of GE optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE electrical signals, and four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals to ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s. l The reverse process is similar.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s NOTE The TEM28 board transmits FE or GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, or 10GE optical signals on the client side. When the TEM28 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX27/TX27 and RX28/ TX28 ports.


Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODUflex signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 signals, or 2 channels of ODU2 signals between the TEM28 board and a crossconnect board by using the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709 and ITU-T G.7041. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM function for ODU1. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports PM function for ODUflex.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1245




Description

LPT function

Supported NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN andSink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty. FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the LPT function.

FEC encoding

Not supported.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.

ALS function


PRBS

Not supported

Physical clock

Supported NOTE FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the physical clock function. The board does not support the physical clock when it is provisioned with 10G WAN services.

Test frame

Supported

Electrical-layer ASONbug

Supported

Protection scheme


Loopback


l Supports ODUk SNCP. MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY

GE electrical port

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MAC

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported


1246




Description PHY

FE electrical port

MAC

PHY


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3


ITU-T G.703

IEEE 802.3z

ITU-T G.652 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.873.1 G.709 ITU-T ITU-T G.655(1996) ITU-T G.671 ITU-T G.7041 IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.692

Table 14-135 Data features of the TEM28 board Function and Feature

Description


Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10G FULL LAN, 10G FULL WAN (SONET) GE optical port: 1000M FUL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE electrical port: auto-negotiation

Multicast

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MTU


VLAN multicast

Supported


1247




Description IGMP snooping V2

Layer 2 switching

Supported

l Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. l Supports one VB. l Supports MAC address learning and aging. l Supports STP/RSTP. l Supports 128k MAC addresses.

Ethernet service


Protection schemes

ERPS

Supported

LAG

l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.

DLAG

Supported

MC-LAG

Supported


ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.3ah.

RMON

Supported

QoS

l Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). l Supports IEEE802.1p. l Supports DSCP.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Flow control




IEEE 802.1q VLAN All Layer 2 protocols such as xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.


1248





ITU-T Recommendation G.8032/Y.1344 IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM RFC 4541 IGMP Snooping IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1s IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3ab IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 ITU-T G.8262

14.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TEM28 board consists of the client-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-143 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1249



Figure 14-143 Functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board

Client side RX1 RX2

Backplane(service cross-connection)

16×ODU0/8×ODU1/ 2×ODU2/8×ODUflex

O/E

RX28 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX28



L2 switching module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane DC power supply

SCC (controlled by SCC)

NOTE

When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to L2 switching for processing.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TEM28 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the TEM28 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The RX1 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of 16 channels of electrical signals to the OTN processing module. The OTN processing module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, and then outputs a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or two channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The OTN processing module receives a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or two channels of ODU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1250



signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends the electrical signal to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module deconverges the electrical signals and sends 28 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 28 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 28 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX28 optical interfaces. NOTE

The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports, GE electrical ports and FE electrical ports, that can process GE and FE services. NOTE


Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 28 channels of FE/GE/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from 28 channels of the internal electrical signals to FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

OTN processing module Frames ODUk signals, processes overheads in ODUk signals.

l


l


14.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TEM28 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1251



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-144 shows the front panel of the TEM28 board. Figure 14-144 Front panel of the TEM28 board TEM28 STAT ACT PROG SRV

5~28: GE 1~4: 10GE TX RX TX RX TX RX RX TX TX RX

5

21

6

22

7

23

8

24

9

25

10

26

11

27

12

28 3 4

13 20 1 2

TEM28



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-136 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1252



Table 14-136 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TEM28 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX28a

LC


TX1-TX28a

LC


a: The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical interfaces. The other optical interfaces on the board are GE optical interfaces, GE electrical interfaces and FE electrical interfaces.


14.11.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TEM28 board. Table 14-137 shows the valid slots for the TEM28 board. Table 14-137 Valid slots for the TN54TEM28 board Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the TEM28 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TEM28 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TEM28 board displayed on the NM is IU1.




1253



Table 14-138 Mapping between the physical ports on the TEM28 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1 to TX28/RX28

3 to 30

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-145 shows the application model of the TEM28 board. Table 14-139 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-145 Port diagram of the TEM28 board Other line/ PID board

Other line/ PID board

Backplane 8xODU0

3(RX1/TX1)-1

101(AP1/AP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)-1

PORT6 TRUNK8 108(AP8/AP8)-1

7(RX5/TX5)-1

PORT7

30(RX28/TX28)-1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

PORT3 TRUNK1

TRUNK9 109(AP9/AP9)-1

TRUNK16 116(AP16/AP16)-1 PORT30

8xODU0/8xODU1/ 2xODU2/8xODUflex





L2 swiching module




1254



Table 14-139 Descriptions of the ports on the TEM28 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX28/TX28

Client-side ports. The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 ports are used as 10GE optical ports to process 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The remaining ports are used as GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, or FE electrical ports to process GE or FE services.

PORT3-PORT30


VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK16

Internal virtual ports. The total bandwidth for these ports is 20 Gbit/s. The maximum bandwidth for the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 ports is 10 Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. The maximum bandwidth for the VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports is 20 Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 10 Gbit/s bandwidth.

AP1-AP16


ClientLP1-ClientLP16

Internal logical ports. Each of the ports provides only one optical channel (identified as optical channel 1). The ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports can map the signals cross-connected from the L2 switching module into a maximum of eight ODU0 signals, and the ClientLP9-ClientLP16 can map the signals into a maximum of eight ODU0 signals, eight ODU1 signals, two ODU2 signals, or eight ODUflex signals.

14.11.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TEM28 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

When creating Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, implementing cross-connections and convergence of signals received from the client-side ports using the Layer 2 switching module. NOTE

l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 : The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK1-TRUNK8 ports is 10 Gbit/ s, with each port allocated a maximum of 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. l VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK16: The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK9-TRUNK16 ports is 20 Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 10 Gbit/s bandwidth. l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16: The total bandwidth for these ports is 20 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1255



l

There are mappings between the RX/TX and PORT ports, between the VCTRUNK and AP ports, and between the AP and ClientLP ports. You do not need to set the mappings on the U2000.

l

Create cross-connections from the local board to the line or PID board. – During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU0 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0 port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-146.

Figure 14-146 ODU0 Cross-Connections WDM side


Other board a (standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2





Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

TEM28




The client side of the TEM28 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a


Other board b


– During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1 port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-147.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1256



Figure 14-147 ODU1 Cross-Connections WDM side



1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3




Client side 209(ClientLP9/ClientLP9)-1 210(ClientLP10/ClientLP10)-1 TEM28





Other board a


Other board b


– During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2 port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-148.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1257



Figure 14-148 ODU2 Cross-Connections WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1



Client side 209(ClientLP9/ClientLP9)-1 210(ClientLP10/ClientLP10)-1

WDM side



TEM28



Other board a


Other board b


– During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-149. NOTE

When creating ODUflex cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots based on the service rate. The number of ODUflex timeslots ranges from 1 to 8 and the rate of each timeslot is 1.25 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1258



Figure 14-149 ODUflex Cross-Connections WDM side

Other board

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2


Client side 209(ClientLP9/ClientLP9)-1 210(ClientLP10/ClientLP10)-1 TEM28


Cross-connect module 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1


Other board


NOTE

Ports 201(ClienLP1/ClienLP1)-1 to 208(ClienLP8/ClienLP8)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0 crossconnections with the maximum bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s. Ports 209(ClienLP9/ClienLP9)-1 to 216 (ClienLP16/ClienLP16)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0, eight ODU1, two ODU2, or eight ODUflex cross-connections with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s. The TEM28 board supports simultaneous transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.

14.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.

Parameters for WDM Interfaces Table 14-140 Parameters for WDM Interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1259



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: Off


Disabled, Enabled


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS , BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF

Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1260



Field

Value

Description






The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).

Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 14-141 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16. External ports are PORT3 to PORT30.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1261



Field

Value

Description

TAG


Indicates the type of packets that can be processed by a port.

Default: Tag Aware

Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the packets with VLAN IDs (Tag) and discards packets without VLAN IDs (Untag). If TAG is set to Tag Aware, VLAN priority and Default VLAN ID are invalid. Access: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and discards the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). Hybrid: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and transparently transmits the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). This parameter is valid only for UNI ports. NOTE This parameter is invalid for CAware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID



VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0


Entry Detection

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. 1262




Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16. External ports are PORT3 to PORT30.

Port Attributes

UNI, NNI, C-Aware, SAware

A UNI port supports Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

Default: UNI

An S-Aware port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have SVLAN tags. A C-Aware port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have CVLAN tags. NNI is a reserved port type and is not supported at present.

Table 14-143 Basic Attributes (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1263



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

PORT3 to PORT6:

Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended.

l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex LAN (SONET) l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN PORT7 to PORT30: l 1000M FULL_Duplex l Default: AutoNegotiation Maximum Frame Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port. Unit: Byte. Click D.21 Maximum Frame Length to view the details.


-


MAC LoopBack


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


PHY LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback Default: Non-Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1264




Value

Description

Port

-





Default: Disable

Click D.23 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disable

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode. Click D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.


Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Click D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1265



Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown



PORT3 to PORT6: l 0–10000 l Default: 10000

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic.

PORT7 to PORT30: l 0–1000 l Default: 1000 Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Flow Monitor


Flow Monitor Interval (min)

1 to 30 Default: 15

Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port. Indicates whether to monitor zero traffic. Click D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) to view the details. Indicates the interval for monitoring zero traffic.

Table 14-146 Encapsulation/Mapping (Internal Port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16.


1266



Field

Value

Description

Encapsulation/Mapping

GFP-F, GFP-T

Indicates the mapping protocol for encapsulation of VCTRUNK port data.

Default: GFP-F

NOTE GFP-F: indicates that the upperlayer PDUs of Ethernet MAC frames and the GFP PDUs are mapped in one-to-one manner. GFP-T: indicates that 8B/10B payloads are mapped to GFP in transparent mapping mode to achieve low-delay transmission. When services are encapsulated into ODU0, GFP-T and GFP-F are supported. When services are encapsulated into ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex, only GFP-F is supported. The mapping protocols for GE services on the transmit end and receive end must be the same.

Scrambling Mode[X43+1]

Scramble

Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1] ExtensionHeader Option

No Default: No

Check Field Length

FCS32, No Default: FCS32

FCS Calculated Bit Sequence

Big endian Default: Big endian

Indicates whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol. Displays the extension header option. Indicates the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Indicates the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.

Table 14-147 Advanced attributes (Internal Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16.

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1267



Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled

Flow Monitor


Flow Monitor Interval (min)

1 to 30

Indicates whether to monitor zero traffic. Click D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) to view the details. Indicates the interval for monitoring zero traffic.

Default: 15

14.11.10 TEM28 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54TE M28

N/A

1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km (I-850-LC) 1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


1268



Parameter

Unit


-


1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-2.5

-3


dBm

-9.5

-9.5


dB

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1620


dBm

-17

-20


dBm

0

-3

NOTE

The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


1269



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN54TEM28

110

120


1270



14.12 THA THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

14.12.1 Version Description The available functional version of the THA board is TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN54 THA

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54THA board has only one variant: TN54THA01.

14.12.2 Application Overview As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40 Gbit/s. Table 14-150 provides the application scenarios for the THA board. Table 14-150 Application scenarios for the THA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Scenario


Mapping Path

Maximum Output Capacity (Backplane Side)

Port Working Mode

Scenario 1

16 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/FC100/ FICON/DVB-ASI/ESCON

Anya>ODU0

16 x ODU0

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU0)

Scenario 2

16 x STM–16/OC-48/FC200/ FICON Express/OTU1

Anya>ODU1

16 x ODU1



1271



Scenario


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode

Scenario 3

16 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/ FC100/FICON/STM-16/ FC200/FICON Express

n x Anya>ODU1

(2 to 16) x ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1)

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0

32x ODU0

ODU1_ODU 0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)

NOTE Each of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 and RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 port groups supports mutual conversion between a maximum of 8 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/ s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. Each port in each group either converges multiple clientside services into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals

Scenario 4

16 x OTU1

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.12.3 Functions and Features The THA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-151.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1272



Table 14-151 Functions and features of the THA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

THA converts signals as follows: l 16 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU0. l 16 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU1. l 16 x (125Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<->2 to 16 x ODU1. l 16 x OTU1<->32 x ODU0.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE The THA board supports access of DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves.


Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.

OTN function

l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.

ESC function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


1273




Description

PRBS test function


LPT function

This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE services on its client side.

FEC encoding

Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with ITU-T G.709, only when the service type is OTU1.



NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1


ALS function


Test frame

Supported NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).

Latency measuremen t

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is GE (GFP-T). NOTE The TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported.


1274




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0).


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).


Auto-Negotiation

Port MTU


Loopback

Channel Loopback

1000M Full-Duplex

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop Outloop

Supported NOTE The Channel Loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1275




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1276






14.12.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS.

Display of Physical Ports Table 14-152 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-152 Mapping between the physical ports on the THA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8


1277



Physical Port


TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

TX11/RX11

13

TX12/RX12

14

TX13/RX13

15

TX14/RX14

16

TX15/RX15

17

TX16/RX16

18

NOTE


14.12.5 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0) 14.12.5.1 Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-150. Figure 14-150 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 16xODU0 2xOTU2

8×ODU0

N D 2 16

16

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N D 2 16

16

TX1 RX1

8×ODU0

16×Any

16×ODU0

RX16

1

M U X / D M U X

16×Any

1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON TX16

THA

THA

16×ODU0

TX1

2xOTU2 16xODU0

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON TX16 RX16

14.12.5.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1278



The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-153 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-151

Table 14-154

THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-152

Table 14-155

THA (STND)

Figure 14-151 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1



NOTE

When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1279



Table 14-154 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1 to RX16/TX16


ClientLP1 to ClientLP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.

Figure 14-152 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS.



Table 14-155 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


14.12.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection l

On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0).

l

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1280



If all the 16 client–side ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can configure the 16*GE for 16*ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE(TTTGMP) for the 16 ports.

l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-153.

– On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see l

2

in Figure 14-153.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1


in Figure 14-154.

1281



Figure 14-153 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side




Other board 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

1


2


THA 16(TX14/RX14)-1

17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1




The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1282



Figure 14-154 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side


Other board a (standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

5(TX3/RX3)-1

THA

17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1 Cross-connect module The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

NOTE

When the THA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the THA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the THA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the THA board. When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1283



14.12.6 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1) 14.12.6.1 Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 14-155. Figure 14-155 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 2) 16xODU1 4xOTU2 TX1

THA

8×ODU0

16

16

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 16

TX1 RX1

16

16×Any

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU1 8×ODU0

16×Any

RX16

1

16×ODU1

TX16

THA 1

RX1 STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

4xOTU2 16xODU1

TX16

STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

RX16

14.12.6.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-156 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-156

Table 14-157

THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-157

Table 14-158

THA (STND)


1284



Figure 14-156 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1

16(RX14/TX14)-1 17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1







Table 14-157 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


ClientLP1–ClientLP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.


1285



Figure 14-157 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)

Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1





Table 14-158 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16




l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1286



If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the 16 * STM-16/OC-48–>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the 16 ports.

l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-158.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-159.

Figure 14-158 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side






Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1


4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


1

THA 16(TX14/RX14)-1


17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1




The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1287



Figure 14-159 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side







1

5(TX3/RX3)-1

THA

17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1 Cross-connect module

The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

14.12.7 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1) Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1288



14.12.7.1 Application Each of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 and RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 port groups supports mutual conversion between a maximum of 8 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 14-160. Figure 14-160 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 3) (2~16)xODU1 4xOTU2

N Q 2

8×Any

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

(1~8)×ODU1 (1~8)×ODU1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/ FC200/DVBASI/ESCON/STM1/STM-4/STM-16/OC3/OC-12/FICON/FICON TX16 Express RX16

THA

THA

(1~8)×ODU1 (1~8)×ODU1 8×Any 8×Any

TX1

4xOTU2 (2~16)xODU1 TX1 RX1

FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/ FC200/DVBASI/ESCON/STM1/STM-4/STM-16/OCTX16 3/OC-12/FICON/FICON Express RX16

NOTE

The client signals received by the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client signals received by the RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 ports.

14.12.7.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-159 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-161

Table 14-160

54THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-162

Table 14-161

54THA (STND)


1289



Figure 14-161 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane （2-16）xODU1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1




Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS

Table 14-160 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16





1290



Figure 14-162 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane （2~16）xODU1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-2



202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2)-1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-7



216(ConvGroup16/ ConvGroup16)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1





Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS

Table 14-161 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


ConvGroup1–ConvGroup8



On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1).

l


l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-163.

– Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2

in Figure 14-163.


1291


l


When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-164.

– Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see

2

in Figure 14-164.

NOTE

When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP. The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1292



Figure 14-163 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Other board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4






4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1


2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1



17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1


THA 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1



Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1293



Figure 14-164 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4





Client side 201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

1

5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1

202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-8 216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-1

2 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1

THA 216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-1

18(TX16/RX16)-1

216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-8 Cross-connect module Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


14.12.8 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) 14.12.8.1 Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-165. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1294



Figure 14-165 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 4) 32xODU0 4xOTU2 THA

RX1

1

1

8×ODU0

32

1

1

RX1

N Q 2 32

16×OTU1

32

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU1

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

32×ODU0 8×ODU0

32×ODU0

TX16

16×ODU1

16×OTU1

RX16

TX1

THA

TX1

OTU1

4xOTU2 32xODU0

32

OTU1 TX16 RX16

14.12.8.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-162 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-166

Table 14-163

54THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-167

Table 14-164

54THA(STND)

Figure 14-166 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 32xODU0





3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1295





Multiplexing module



Table 14-163 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description



ClientLP1 to ClientLP16


ODU0LP1 to ODU0LP16


Figure 14-167 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 32xODU0


3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1296



Multiplexing module

Table 14-164 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description


These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).

l


l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-168.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/ TX-2 port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1

in Figure 14-169.

1297



Figure 14-168 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side


Other board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2



164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 Cross-connect module



4(TX2/RX2)-1



17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1


THA


1


Multiplexing module


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1298



Figure 14-169 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side


Other board a

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-2 4(TX2/RX2)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-2

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1

THA

1

Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


14.12.9 Working Principle and Signal Flow The THA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-170 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1299



Figure 14-170 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board Backplane (service cross-connection)

RX1 RX2

O/E


RX8 TX1 TX2

16X ODU0/8X ODU1

16X ODU0/8X ODU1

Client side

E/O


Crossconnect module

TX8

Signal processing module RX9 RX10

O/E

1588v2 module


RX16 TX9 TX10

E/O

TX16



Crossconnect module


Control Memory

Communication

CPU



Required voltage

SCC


NOTE

For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 14.12.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1300



decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module – The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


14.12.10 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the THA board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1301



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-171 shows the front panel of the THA board. Figure 14-171 Front panel of the THA board SM SFP WORK WITH G.657B FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

THA STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX

SM SFP WORK WITH G.657B FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657B 光纤

RX 1

TX 15

2 TX

16 RX

NOTE

To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657B fibers.



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-165 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1302



Table 14-165 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX16

LC

Receives optical signals.

TX1-TX16

LC

Transmits optical signals.


14.12.11 Valid Slots One slot houses one THA board. Table 14-166 shows the valid slots for the THA board. NOTE

Two THA boards cannot be housed in adjacent slots. To easy maintenance of fibers, do not house the THA board in the most left or right slot.

Table 14-166 Valid slots for the THA board Product

Valid slots


IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67




IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17

14.12.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the THA, refer to. Table 14-167 THA parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



1303



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)


1304



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE(TTTGMP), GE(GFP-T), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: None

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

The THA board's ports may work in any of four working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes. NOTE l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-GMP), OC-3, OC-12, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and GE(GFP-T) services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.


l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 to 2200 l Channels 2 to 8 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 to 1250

sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.

See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1305



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: Off


Enabled, Disabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1306



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled



FEC Working State


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600





Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1307



Field

Value

Description




Default: None

PRBS Test Status


Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), NONE Mode (Not for port)

The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.

Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)

14.12.13 THA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54TH A

N/A

S-16.1-15 km 1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D 1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1308



NOTE



S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value S-16.1 -15 km

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

15 km (9.3 mi.)


nm

1260 to 1360


dBm

0


dBm

-5


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1270 to 1580


dBm

-18


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1309



NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3


1310



Parameter

Unit


dB


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

-12

-12

-12

-12

NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

1270 to 1355


dBm

-3


dBm

-9.5


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-20


dBm

-3


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1311


l






TN54THA

35

40

14.13 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

14.13.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TOA board is TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 4TO A

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54TOA board has only one variant: TN54TOA01.

14.13.2 Application Overview As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20 Gbit/s. Table 14-171 provides the application scenarios for the TOA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1312



Table 14-171 Application scenarios for the TOA board Applicat ion Scenario


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode

Scenario 1

8 x FE/FDDI/GE/ STM-1/STM-4/ OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/ DVB-ASI/ ESCON/SDI

Anya<->ODU0

8 x ODU0


Scenario 2

8 x HD-SDI/ STM–16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

Anya<->ODU1

8 x ODU1


Scenario 3

8 x FE/FDDI/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/SDI/ ESCON/STM-4/ OC-12/GE/ FC100/FICON/ STM-16/FC200/ FICON Express/ HD-SDI/HDSDIRBR

Anya<->ODU1

(1 to 8) x ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1)

Scenario 4

8 x OTU1

OTU1<>ODU1<>ODU0

16 x ODU0

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)

Scenario 5

5 x 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR

3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR<>ODUflex

5 x ODUflex

4 x FC400/ FICON4G

FC400/ FICON4G<>ODUflex

4 x ODUflex

ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any>ODUflex)

a:"Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.13.3 Functions and Features The TOA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-172. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1313



Table 14-172 Functions and features of the TOA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOA converts signals as follows: l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU0. l 8 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU1. l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 to 8 x ODU1. l 8 x OTU1 <-> 16 x ODU0. l 5 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR <-> 5 x ODUflex. l 4 x FC400/FICON4G <-> 4 x ODUflex.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1314




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s 3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE The TOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. The TOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves. NOTE The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using buses on the backplane and the cross-connect board.


1315




Description

OTN function

l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU1. l Supports TCM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports PM function for ODUflex. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE services on its client side.

FEC encoding


Alarms and performanc e events monitoring


NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.


ALS function


Test frame

Supported NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).

Latency measureme nt

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1316




Description

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is GE (GFP-T). Supports the BC and OC modes when the client-side service type is OTU1. NOTE When receiving GE (GFP-T) services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. When receiving OTU1 services, the board only supports frequency synchronization using the receiving and transmitting timestamps in Sync messages of the IEEE 1588v2 protocol. It does not support frequency synchronization using the physical clock.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. In ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), when the client-side service type is OTU1, synchronous Ethernet processing is supported but synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission is not supported.


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).


GE(TTT-GMP):

Port MTU


Loopback

Channel Loopback

Auto-Negotiation 1000M Full-Duplex

Inloop

Supported


1317




Description

Client side

Outloop

NOTE The Channel Loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0).

Inloop

Supported



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1318




Description



14.13.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS. Table 14-173 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-173 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10


1319



NOTE


14.13.5 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0) 14.13.5.1 Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-172. Figure 14-172 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 TX1

TOA 1

8×ODU0

8

8

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N S 2 8

8

TX1 RX1

8×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0 8×ODU0

8×Any

8×ODU0

RX8

TOA 1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

1xOTU2 8xODU0

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBTX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI RX8

14.13.5.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-174 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-173

Table 14-175

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-174

Table 14-176

54TOA (STND)


1320



Figure 14-173 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 8xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1





Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS. Table 14-175 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8





1321



Figure 14-174 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 8xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1





Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




l

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. NOTE

If all the eight client–side ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can configure the 8 * GE->8 * ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE (TTT-GMP) for the eight ports.

l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-175.

– On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2


in Figure 14-175. 1322


l


When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the RX/TX port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-176.

Figure 14-175 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side









1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


2

7(TX5/RX5)-1

TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1




The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1323





Other board a (standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2





1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

TOA

7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1 Cross-connect module The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

NOTE

When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board. When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the TOA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1324



14.13.6 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1) 14.13.6.1 Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 14-177. Figure 14-177 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2) 8xODU1 2xOTU2 TX1

TOA

8×ODU0

8

8

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N D 2 8

8

TX1 RX1

8×Any

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1 8×ODU0

8×Any RX8

1

8×ODU1

TX8

TOA 1

RX1 HD-SDI/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

2xOTU2 8xODU1

TX8

HD-SDI/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

RX8

14.13.6.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-177 Port diagram and port description

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-178

Table 14-178

TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-179

Table 14-179

TOA(STND)


1325



Figure 14-178 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode)

Other line/PID board

Backplane 8xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1






Table 14-178 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8





1326



Figure 14-179 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 8xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1


Cross-connect module Service processing module


Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




l

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. NOTE

If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the 8 * STM-16/OC-48->8 * ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the eight ports.

l

On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

in Figure 14-180.

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1327



– On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see l

1

in Figure 14-180.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-181.

Figure 14-180 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side








4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


8(TX6/RX6)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1



1

TOA


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1328









1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

TOA

7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1


The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2 Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

14.13.7 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1329



14.13.7.1 Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 14-182. Figure 14-182 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3) (1~8)xODU1 2xOTU2

TX1

TOA

TOA

RX1 8×ODU0

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

TX1 FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC3/STM-16/ DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ STM-4/OC12/GE/FC100/ FICON/FC200/ TX8 FICON Express/ RX8 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

RX1

8×Any

RX8

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

(1~8)×ODU1 8×ODU0

8×Any

TX8

(1~8)×ODU1

FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC3/STM-16/ DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ STM-4/OC12/GE/FC100/ FICON/FC200/ FICON Express/ HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

2xOTU2 (1~8)xODU1


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-183

Table 14-181

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-184

Table 14-182

54TOA (STND)


1330



Figure 14-183 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane （1-8）xODU1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8






Multiplexing module


Table 14-181 Description of NM port of the TOA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8





1331



Figure 14-184 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane （1~8）xODU1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1





202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2)-1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-7



7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1



10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8)-8



Multiplexing module


Table 14-182 Description of NM port of the TOA board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


ConvGroup1–ConvGroup8



On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-185.

– Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2

in Figure 14-185.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1332



– On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-185.

– Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see

2

in Figure 14-185.

NOTE

When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.

Figure 14-185 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4







4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1

1


2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1



TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1





Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1333



Figure 14-186 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side






Client side 201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1

1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-8 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1

202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-8 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1 2


TOA 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-8 Multiplexing module Cross-connect module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


14.13.8 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1334



14.13.8.1 Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-187. Figure 14-187 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4) 16xODU0 2xOTU2 TOA

RX1

TOA 1

TX1

1

8×ODU0

16

1 N D 2 16

RX1

1

TX1

16

8×OTU1

16

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU0 8×ODU0

16×ODU0

TX8

8×ODU1

RX8

8×OTU1

OTU1

2xOTU2 16xODU0

OTU1 RX8 TX8


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-188

Table 14-184

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-189

Table 14-185

54TOA (STND)


1335



Figure 14-188 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU0





3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1





Multiplexing module



Table 14-184 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




ODU0LP1–ODU0LP8



1336



Figure 14-189 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode)

Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU0

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1



Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS. Table 14-185 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.


1337




On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-190.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/TX-2 port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-191.

Figure 14-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side


Other board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2






4(TX2/RX2)-1


9(TX9/RX9)-1


10(TX10/RX10)-1


TOA



1

167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-1 167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Multiplexing module


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / a TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1338



Other board TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / b TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Figure 14-191 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side


Other board a (standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2




Cross-connect module Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1


1

TOA 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1


Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


14.13.9 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex) 14.13.9.1 Application Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1339



The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR optical signals and five ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-192. Figure 14-192 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR<->ODUflex) 5xODUflex 4xOTU2 TOA

TX1

RX8

1 N Q 2

5

5

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 5

5

TX1

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

TX8

1

5xODUflex

5

TOA

5xODUflex

3G-SDI 3G-SDIRBR

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

RX1

4xOTU2 5xODUflex

RX1 3G-SDI 3G-SDIRBR

5

TX8 RX8

NOTE

Each 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR service uses three timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 3.75 Gbit/s.

The TOA board performs conversion between four FC400/FICON4G optical signals and four ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-193. Figure 14-193 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (FC400<->ODUflex) 4xODUflex 4xOTU2

TX1

1 N Q 2

4

4

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 4

4

4xFC400/FICON4G

RX8

1

M U X / D M U X

4xODUflex

TX8

TOA

4xODUflex

4xFC400/ 4 FICON4G

TOA 4xFC400/FICON4G

RX1

4xOTU2 4xODUflex

TX1 RX1 4

4xFC400/ FICON4G

TX8 RX8

NOTE

Only the TN53NQ2 board supports ODUflex. Each FC400/FICON4G service uses four timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 5 Gbit/s.

14.13.9.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1340



Table 14-186 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-194

Table 14-187

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-195

Table 14-188

54TOA (STND)

Figure 14-194 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) (compatible mode) Other line board

Backplane 5xODUflex 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1







Table 14-187 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8



1341



Port Name

Description



Figure 14-195 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) (standard mode)

Other line board Backplane 5xODUflex 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1




Table 14-188 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8



1342




On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see

l

2

in Figure 14-196.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-197.

NOTE

When configuring a cross-connection, ODUflex Timeslot is 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR, and ODUflex Timeslot is 4 if the client service type is FC400/FICON4G.

Figure 14-196 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (compatible mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

Other board


Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

1


2


6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


8(TX6/RX6)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOA

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1343



Figure 14-197 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (standard mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Other board

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 Cross-connect module


1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1

TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1


The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board


14.13.10 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-198 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1344



Figure 14-198 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board Backplane (service crossconnection)

16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E


RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8



Crossconnect module

1588 v2 module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Backplane SCC

NOTE

When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for processing.

In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1345



and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or ODUflex signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board

l


l


14.13.11 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1346



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-199 shows the front panel of the TOA board. Figure 14-199 Front panel of the TOA board



l


l


l




1347



Interfaces Table 14-189 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-189 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the service signal.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the service signal.


14.13.12 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOA board. Table 14-190 shows the valid slots for the TOA board. Table 14-190 Valid slots for the TOA board Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.13.13 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOA, refer toTable 14-191. Table 14-191 TOA parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1348



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used






Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)


1349



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE (TTT-GMP), GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, HDSDIRBR, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR


Default: None

NOTE The TOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes.

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-GMP), OC-3, OC-12, SDI, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, and GE(GFP-T) services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex): Supports FC400, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR services. NOTE The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1350



Field

Value

Description


l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 to 2200


l Channels 2 to 8 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 to 1250

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.


Default: / Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1351



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.







Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1352



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled




FEC Working State


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600





Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.



PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1353



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port)


Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)

14.13.14 TOA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1354



Board



TN54TO A

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

NOTE



I-16-2 km module, S-16.1-15 km module, L-16.1-40 km module and L-16.2-80 km module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1355




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


1356



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


1357



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals. NOTE



Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


1358


Parameter


Unit


-


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1359



NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9


1360



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance

dB



-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400


1361



Parameter

Unit



-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

≤3


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


1362



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km


nm

3.0


-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km module can be used to access FC400, and FICON4G signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-1.1

-1


dBm

-9

-8.4

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN


PIN 1363



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600


dBm

-15

-18


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12



l





TN54TOA

23

25

14.14 TOG TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board

14.14.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1364



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 2TO G

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN52TOG board has only one variant: TN52TOG01.

14.14.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-200 and Figure 14-201. Figure 14-200 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800) 8xODU0 RX1

TOG 1

8

TX8

8

M U X / D M U X

TX1

M U X / D M U X

1

1

RX1

N S 2

8xODU0

N S 2

8xODU0

RX8

TOG 1

TX1 GE

8xODU0

8

8

GE RX1 TX1

Figure 14-201 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 4xODU1

4xODU1

TOG

TOG

RX1 1

TX1

8


1

1

N S 2 8

8

TX1 RX1

8xODU0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

8

M U X / D M U X

4xODU1

TX8

N S 2

4xODU1

RX8

8xODU0

GE

1

M U X / D M U X

GE TX8 RX8

1365



14.14.3 Functions and Features The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-199. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0.

Table 14-199 Functions and features of the TOG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOG converts signals as follows: l 8 x GE<->8 x ODU0 l 8 x GE<->4 x ODU1


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s NOTE The TOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. The TOG board supports GE services that can be mapped using the TTT-GMP or GFP-T procedure.


OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709. l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE The TOG board supports remote monitoring (RMON) only at the receive end .

ALS function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1366




Description

PRBS test function

Not supported.

LPT function

Supported

Test frame

Not supported.

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes only when the client-side service type is GE (GFP-T). NOTE The TOG board supports only two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP.


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) or GE(TTT-GMP).


1000M Full-Duplex

Loopback

WDM side


Client side


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z


1367






14.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-202 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1368



Figure 14-202 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board n X ODUk

Backplane (service cross-connection)

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E 8

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


8

GE Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

Crossconnect module

1588v2

module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


( Backplane controlled by SCC ) SCC

NOTE

When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for processing. In Figure 14-202, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-200 shows the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane. Table 14-200 Service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane Board


TN52T OG

A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1369



After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for grooming. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module, an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module,. – GE service encapsulation and mapping module It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODUk payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function of GE performance monitoring. – OTN processing module Frames ODUk signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. NOTE

Two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals are supported by the TOG.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1370



– Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


14.14.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-203 shows the TOG front panel. Figure 14-203 Front panel of the TOG board

TOG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

TOG

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1371





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-201 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-201 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



14.14.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOG board. Table 14-202 shows the valid slots for the TOG board. Table 14-202 Valid slots for TOG board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5



1372



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-203 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-203 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-204 and Figure 14-205 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table 14-204 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-204 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800) Other line/ PID board Backplane 8xODU0


3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1 Client Side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1373



Figure 14-205 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800) Other line/ PID board

Backplane 4xODU1

201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/Cl ientLP2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1


207(ClientLP7/C lientLP7)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1


208(ClientLP8/C lientLP8)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1 Client Side

Crossconnect module


Service processi ng module

Multiplexing module

Table 14-204 Description of NM port of the TOG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1-ClientLP8


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


14.14.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1374



l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU0 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-206.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-207.

Figure 14-206 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level) WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2



TOG 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a


Other board b


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1375



Figure 14-207 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level) WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3



Client side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

TOG 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1

The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

14.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 14-205. Table 14-205 TOG parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used



1376



Field

Value

Description





GE(GFP-T), GE(TTTGMP) Default: GE(GFP-T)

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTT-GMP), the encapsulation format is TTT-GMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1377



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect










Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1378



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.


1000M Full-Duplex



Default: 9600


Default: None

The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only TN52TOG supports this parameter.

14.14.10 TOG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN52TO G

N/A


NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1379




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


1380



NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1381





l

Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)




TN52TOG

41.8

46.0

14.15 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

14.15.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TO M

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN5 2TO M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TOM/TN52TOM board has only one variant: TN11TOM01/TN52TOM01.

Differences Between Versions Function: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1382



Board


Application Scenario

TN11TOM

ODU1

TN52TOM

ODU0/ODU1

The TN52TOM and TN11TOM support different application scenario. For details, see 14.15.2 Application Overview.

Specification: l

The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 14.15.26 TOM Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

14.15.2 Application Overview 14.15.2.1 Concept: Tributary Mode and Tributary-Line Mode A TOM board can be used as a tributary board or a tributary-line board. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. Figure 14-208 shows the signal flow of the tributary TOM board and Figure 14-209 shows the signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board. Figure 14-208 Signal flow of the tributary TOM board Client-side crossconnection

AnyLP crossconnection Output (ODU0/ODU1 electrical signals)

Input (Client services) Encapsulation and mapping

Figure 14-209 Signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board Client-side crossconnection

AnyLP crossconnection

WDM-side crossconnection Output (OTU1 optical signals)

Input (Client services) Encapsulation and mapping

NOTE

AnyLP cross-connections are supported only in application scenarios 8, 9, and 12 of TN52TOM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1383



14.15.2.2 Concept: Cascading Mode and Non-cascading Mode TOM boards can work either in cascading or non-cascading mode. In cascading mode, the total client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s. In non-cascading mode, the total client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s. When working in cascading mode, each TOM board can map a maximum of eight client services into one ODU0/ODU1 signal. When working in non-cascading mode, it can map a maximum of four client services into one ODU0/ODU1 signal. l

The cascading mode is recommended if more than four client services have to be mapped into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.

l

The non-cascading mode is recommended if four or less client services have to be mapped into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.

14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM The TN52TOM board can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports TN52TOM scenario 2, TN52TOM scenario 4, TN52TOM scenario 6, and TN52TOM scenario 10.

Table 14-208 TN52TOM board in cascading mode App licat ion Sce nari o

Tribu tary or Tribu taryLine Board


Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capa city

Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks

TN5 2TO M scen ario 1

Tribut ary board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON

Anyc>ODU0

2x ODU0

ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])

Supported only by the OptiX OSN 8800.

NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Anyc>ODU0>ODU1

1x ODU1

ODU0 tributary mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and 3800.

1384



App licat ion Sce nari o



Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tribut aryline board

l 7 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON

Anyc>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

ODU0 tributaryline mode (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)


The board uses only one transmitter and one receiver on the WDM side.

l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

l 6 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1385






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tribut ary board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON

Anyc>ODU1

1x ODU1

ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (Any>ODU1)

-

Anyc>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1)

ODU1 tributaryline mode (Any>ODU1>OTU1)


l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.


Tribut aryline board

l 7 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1386






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

l 6 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON

Remarks

The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side.

l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ OTU1

Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions. b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00. c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

Table 14-209 TN52TOM board in non-cascading mode App licat ion Sce nari o

Tribut ary or Tribut aryLine Board


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON/ GE/FC100/FICON

Anyc>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])


Anyc>ODU0>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU0 tributary mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])

NOTE The board can receive the services in the preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1387






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry-line board

l 6 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON/ GE/FC100/FICON

Anyc>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1





l 4 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON/ GE/FC100/FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in the preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1388






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 8 x FC100/FICON/ GE/STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3

OTU1/Anyc>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

-

l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ OTU1/STM-16/ OC-48 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


Tributa ry board

l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_ ODU1 reencapsulati on mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1)




l 2 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_ ODU1 reencapsulati on tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)

ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)

The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1389






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks



l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

Anyc>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1


The board performs electrical regeneratio n for OTU1 signals.

l 6 x FC100/FICON/ GE/STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3


l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ STM-16/OC-48 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ STM-16/OC-48/ FC100/FICON/GE/ STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3

The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.



Tributa ry board


l 4 x OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU1_OD U0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)


ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)


1390






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0 reencapsulati on mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0)


a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions. b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00. c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.15.2.4 Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM The TN11TOM can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. Table 14-210 TN11TOM board in cascading mode Appl icatio n Scen ario

Tributa ry or Tributa ry-Line Board


Mapping Path

Maxim um Outpu t Capaci ty

Port Working Mode (Must Be Set on the NMS)

Remarks

TN11 TOM Scena rio 1

Tributar y board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ ESCON

OTU1/Anya>ODU1

1x ODU1

N/A

-

l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ HD-SDI/OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1391



Appl icatio n Scen ario



Mapping Path

Maxim um Outpu t Capaci ty


Remarks

TN11 TOM scena rio 2

Tributar y-line board

l 7 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ ESCON

OTU1/Anya>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

N/A


l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ HD-SDI/OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

l 6 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ HD-SDI/OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Only the RX7/ TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. Only the RX7/ TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1392



Table 14-211 TN11TOM board in non-cascading mode Appl icatio n Scen ario



Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outpu t Capaci ty


Remarks


Tributar y board

l 8 x FC100/FICON/GE/ STM-4/OC-12/DVBASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/ SDI/STM-1/OC-3

OTU1/Anya>ODU1

4x ODU1

N/A

-

Anya->ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

N/A


OTU1>ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

N/A

The board performs electrical regeneration for OTU1 signals.

l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/OTU1/ STM-16/OC-48 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ STM-16/OC-48/FC100/ FICON/GE/STM-4/ OC-12/DVB-ASI/ ESCON/FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3


NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


l 4 x OTU1



14.15.3 Function and Feature The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-212.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1393



NOTE

ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Table 14-212 Functions and features of the TOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and ODU0 or ODU1 signals when functioning as a tributary board. l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and OTU1 signals when functioning as a tributary-line board. l Supports convergence of multiple services into one ODU0 or ODU1 signal. The TOM board supports multiple application scenarios. For details, see 14.15.2 Application Overview.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE When the TOM board transmits GE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports. The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1394




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0 signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the crossconnection of four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. – Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and any two boards in the non-paired slots of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1395




Description between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5. – Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. – Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709.

OTN function

l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on the WDM side. l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the ODU1 layer. l Supports the PM functions at the ODU1 layers. l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer. WDM specification

Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.

ESC function

Supported.

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports Poisson mode.

ALS function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1396




Description

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

LPT function


Test frame


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported by the TN52TOM.

Protection scheme

OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. OptiX OSN 8800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. For the TN52TOM board, ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




l Auto-Negotiation

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

l 1000M Full-Duplex

Inloop


Supported

1397




Description Outloop

Supported NOTE When being used as tributary & line board, the TOM board only supports the loopback between ClientLP1-ClientLP4.

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1398




Description


Protocols or standards for transparent transmissio n (nonperformanc e monitoring )

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1399




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performan ce monitoring )

ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

14.15.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS. Table 14-213 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 14-213 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10


1400



NOTE


14.15.5 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading) 14.15.5.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/ s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal. Figure 14-210 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-211 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800. Figure 14-210 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0) (OptiX OSN 8800) 2xODU0 1xOTU2

1xOTU2 2xODU0 TOM

TOM

RX1

1

TX1

TX8

2

1 N S 2 2

TX1

1

RX1

8×Any

2

M U X / D M U X

2×ODU0

N S 2

2×ODU0

8×Any

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI RX8

M U X / D M U X

1

TX8

2

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

RX8

Figure 14-211 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1 N S 2

ODU1

8×Any

M U X / D M U X

2×ODU0

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

8×Any

N S 2

TX8 Any

RX1

TOM

TX1 FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI RX8

1xOTU2 1xODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, RX8 ESCON, FDDI TX8

ODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1401



NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

14.15.5.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-212 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 1: in cascading mode) OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1 52TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)




10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0 52TOM

52NS2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)





162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)




10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.

Table 14-214 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8



1402



Port Name

Description

ClientLP1/ClientLP2


ODU0LP1


14.15.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following crossconnections: l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown

l

in Figure 14-213.

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown

in Figure 14-213.

NOTE

When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.

Figure 14-213 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1) OptiX OSN 8800

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1403



WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Other board



Client side


1



Other board (Compatible mode)

Compatible mode


WDM side

2

TOM



Other board (Standard TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / mode) TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1404



1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Other board


Client side


1




WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side

161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 2 3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2


TOM Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS



Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / (Standard mode) TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

14.15.6 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) 14.15.6.1 Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-214. Figure 14-214 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1) The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1405


14 Tributary Board and Line Board 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

TX1

TOM

TOM

RX1

TX1

TX8

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU0

RX8

MUX/ RX8 DMUX

1×OTU1

TX8

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

7×Any


FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX7ESCON, FDDI RX7

TX7 Any

Any

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

TOM

TX7

TX1

RX7

RX8

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

TX1

TX7

1×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

TX8 RX8

TX6

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

6×Any


RX1

TOM

RX7


TX8

Any

TX6 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

14.15.6.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-215 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1406


14 Tributary Board and Line Board 52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)



9(RX7/TX7) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)

10(RX8/TX8)


7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)


202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2



The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3)




6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)



8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)




NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Table 14-215 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1/ClientLP2


ODU1LP1


ODU0LP1


a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

14.15.6.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1407



During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-216.

l

Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and 9(RX7/TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-216.

NOTE

If only seven FE services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line 7*FE->ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributary-line (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is to FE for channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port.

Figure 14-216 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 2) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side


1



161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1

WDM side

10(TX8/RX8)-1 3

3

2


TOM


Cross-connect module Cross-connect module


The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1





WDM side 10(TX8/RX8)-1 2

3

3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2


TOM Cross-connect module


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1408



14.15.7 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading) 14.15.7.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-217. Figure 14-217 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3: Any->ODU1) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

TOM

TX1

M U X / D M U X

RX1 N S 2

ODU1

8×Any

Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

8×Any

FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC12, OC-48, FC100, GE, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, RX8 SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX8

1xOTU2 1xODU1

TX8 RX8

ODU1

FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC12, OC-48, FC100, GE, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE


14.15.7.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1409



Figure 14-218 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1) in cascading mode) 52TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1)


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1


14.15.7.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following crossconnections: l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM in Figure 14-219. board, as shown

l

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

in Figure 14-219.


1410



Figure 14-219 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Other board



Client side


1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8


WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side 2

TOM


The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS




14.15.8 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) 14.15.8.1 Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals at any rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-220. Figure 14-220 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1) The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1411



1xOTU1 RX1 TX1 FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, RX7 DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX7

TX1

TOM

TOM

RX1

TX8

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

RX8 MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any

TX8 RX8

TX7 RX7

Any

FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

Any


1xOTU1 RX1

TOM

RX1

TOM TX7

RX7

TX8 MUX/ RX8 DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

TX7

RX8

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ RX7 DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, RX6 DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX6

TX8

Any

TX1 FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON RX6 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX6

Any


On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario 2.

14.15.8.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-221 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1412



3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)

9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)


8(RX6/TX6)


The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)

7(RX5/TX5) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)


NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1


ODU1LP1


a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

14.15.8.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1413



l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-222.

NOTE

If only seven STM-1 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line 7*STM-1/OC3->ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is set to STM-1 for channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port.


WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1




9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM



The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS


WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3


2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



14.15.9 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (NonCascading) 14.15.9.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/ s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1414



Figure 14-223 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-224 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800. Figure 14-223 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0) (OptiX OSN 8800) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

TX1

1

1

RX1

1

N S 2 8

8×Any

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

N S 2 8

TX8

M U X / D M U X

1

8×ODU0

8×Any


TX1

TOM

TOM

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX8 ESCON, FDDI

8

RX8

NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

Figure 14-224 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 4xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

1

1

RX1

1

N S 2 4

8×Any

4

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

N S 2

TX8 Any

TX1

TOM 1

8×Any


1xOTU2 4xODU1

4

ODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX8 ESCON, FDDI RX8

ODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

14.15.9.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1415



Figure 14-225 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]) in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)



4(RX2/TX2)




5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)






7(RX5/TX5)



1(IN/OUT ) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)








OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

52NS2




















5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)





1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6)








9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies.

Table 14-218 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8



1416



Port Name

Description

l ClientLP1


l ClientLP2 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP6 l ClientLP3


l ClientLP4 l ClientLP7 l ClientLP8 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


14.15.9.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM in Figure 14-226. board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown

l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown

l

in Figure 14-226.

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

in Figure 14-226.


1417



NOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this restriction. If only eight GE (GFP-T) services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary 8*GE->8*ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Non-cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is set to GE(GFP-T) for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.

l

Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX3/TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX5/TX5 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX7/TX7 port and channel 1on the ClientLP7 port.

l

Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX2/TX2 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP2 port, the RX4/TX4 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP4 port, the RX6/TX6 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP6 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP8 port.

Figure 14-226 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5) OptiX OSN 8800 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Other board


Compatible mode



Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2


2

TOM



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1418






OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Other board Cross-connect module

Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM

1



WDM side

WDM side

3


2







Other board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1419



1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Other board


Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM

1




WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side

3


2










14.15.10 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(NonCascading) 14.15.10.1 Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-227 or Figure 14-228. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1420



Figure 14-227 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A) 2xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX1

TX7

RX7

RX7

TX7

6×Any

RX8

RX8

4×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

RX1

2×OTU1

TX8

MUX/ DMUX

TX1

TOM

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

RX6

2×ODU1

4×ODU0

6×Any


2xOTU1

TX8

TX6


RX6

TX6

Any

Any

The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Figure 14-228 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B) 2xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX1

TX5

RX5

RX5

TX5

TX7

4×Any

RX7

RX7

4×ODU0

TX6

MUX/ DMUX

TX1

RX6

TX7 MUX/ TX8 DMUX RX8

TX4

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ TX6 DMUX RX6

RX1

TOM

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0

4×Any


2xOTU1


RX8 TX4

TX8

Any

Any

Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1421



14.15.10.2 Logical Ports Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-229 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)










51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 9(RX7/TX7) 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1



The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2)






5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)




8(RX6/TX6)






9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8)


NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.

Table 14-219 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a



1422



Port Name

Description

l ClientLP1


l ClientLP2 l ClientLP3


l ClientLP4 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP2


a: Eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDMside interfaces.

14.15.10.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, in Figure 14-230.

as shown NOTE

In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and selective receiving.



1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2


3


3

51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1 2


WDM side



TOM








1



3


3



9(TX7/RX7)-1 2


WDM side


10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1423



14.15.11 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (NonCascading) 14.15.11.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-231 or Figure 14-232. The conversion between eight signals and four ODU1 signals. Figure 14-231 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A) 4xODU1 RX1

4xODU1

TOM

TX1

TOM

TX1

RX1

1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

4

NS2

8×Any

NS2

4×ODU1

RX8

4×ODU1

8×Any


1xOTU2

1xOTU2

TX8

4 RX8

TX8 Any

ODU1

ODU1


Any

The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1424



Figure 14-232 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B) 4xODU1 RX1

RX1

TOM 1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

4

TX8

NS2

4

4×OTU1

NS2

TX1

4×ODU1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

RX8

4xODU1

TOM

TX1 OTU1 4

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

ODU1

ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.

14.15.11.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-233 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1) in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: A 52NS2

A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)










1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)


: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel

OptiX OSN 3800:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1425



3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

52NS2










1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.

Table 14-220 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1




l ClientLP7

14.15.11.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). l


l

create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and the ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services, defined as

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

in Figure 14-234.


1426



NOTE

When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected. For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be used. Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals. If only four STM-16 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary 4*STM-16/OC48->4*ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Non-Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to STM-16 for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.


Other board



Client side

1




WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side

2

TOM






14.15.12 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1 (Non-Cascading) 14.15.12.1 Application Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1427



Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-235. Figure 14-235 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1) 4xODU1 1xOTU2

8×Any

4

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

ODU1

ODU1

4×OTU1

4

32×Any

Any

N S 2

4×ODU1

4

TX1

1

64×Any

4 TX8

1

8×ODU0

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

M U X / D M U X

1

4×ODU1

64×Any 8×Any

8×ODU0 8×Any

32×Any

RX8

4×OTU1

4

1

4×ODU1

OTU1

RX1

TOM

TOM

TX1

8×Any

RX1

1xOTU2 4xODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

14.15.12.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-236 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode) 52TOM

52NS2

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1

233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)


















237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1






238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 4(RX2/TX2) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1

5(RX3/TX3)

234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3)-1



240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 1(IN/OUT)

241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5)-1



8(RX6/TX6)






9(RX7/TX7)






Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1428



NOTE

Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1

l ClientLP3 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP7 AnyLP1-AnyLP12


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


14.15.12.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1). l


l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as shown 3

l

in Figure 14-237.

create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown

4

in Figure 14-237.

NOTE

You can also set the service package to Tributary 4*OTU1->ODU1 (re-encapsulated into ODU0) on the U2000. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l


l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1429



Figure 14-237 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 8)

Other board


Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 1

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3 /ClientLP3)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



Compatible mode

2

3

2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8










WDM side

WDM side 4



8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

Standard mode




6(TX4/RX4)-1












14.15.13 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading) 14.15.13.1 Application Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any reencapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-238.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1430



Figure 14-238 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 9) 2xOTU1

TOM

RX1 TX1

2×OTU1

16×Any

RX5 TX5 MUX/ RX6 DMUX TX6

TX1

2×ODU1

TX5 RX5 MUX/ TX6 DMUX RX6

RX1

TOM

32×Any 4×ODU0

RX3 TX3 MUX/ DMUX RX4 TX4

2×OTU1

TX2

TX3 RX3 MUX/ TX4 DMUX RX4

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0 32×Any

16×Any

2×OTU1

RX2

2×ODU1

OTU1

2xOTU1

OTU1 RX2 TX2

NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

14.15.13.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-239 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in noncascading mode) 52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1









7(RX5/TX5)






4(RX2/TX2)

239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 6(RX4/TX4)


9(RX7/TX7)







10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any two of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP3 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1431



Port Name

Description

AnyLP1-AnyLP8


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP2


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2



14.15.13.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-240. 3

l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-240.

l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown

4

in Figure 14-240.

NOTE

In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the clientside or the WDM-side interfaces.

Figure 14-240 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 9) Client side

WDM side


1



233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 2

3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8



237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8





2


8(TX6/RX6)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM








14.15.14 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (noncascading) Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1432



14.15.14.1 Application Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals, or implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-241. Figure 14-241 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 10) A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.

4xOTU1

4xOTU1 TOM

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

D RX1 M U X RX4

TX1 M U X TX4

TOM

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

M TX1 U X TX4

RX1 D M U RX4 X

B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1433



2xOTU1

TOM

TOM RX7

TX7 MUX/ DMUX

TX7 RX8 TX8

Any

6×Any

MUX/ TX8 DMUX RX8

2×OTU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

6×Any

RX7

2×ODU1

FE, GE, FC100, RX1 FICON, STM-4, OC-12, DVB- TX1 ASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, STM-1, OC-3 , FC200, RX6 FICON Express, HDSDI, STM-16, TX6 OC-48

TX1 FE, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-4, RX1 OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, STM-1, OC-3 , FC200, TX6 FICON Express, HDRX6 SDI, STM-16, OC-48

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group


RX1

TOM

TX1

RX5 TX5

RX6

RX7

RX7 MUX/ DMUX

TX1

RX6 TX6

TX7 MUX/ TX8 DMUX RX8

TX4

MUX/ DMUX

TX7

2×OTU1

4×Any

MUX/ DMUX

RX1

TOM

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

RX4

TX5 RX5 TX6

2×ODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-4, OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, STM-1, OC-3 , FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, STM-16, OC-48

4×Any

2xOTU1

RX8

TX4

TX8

Any

RX4

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-4, OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, STM-1, OC-3 , FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, STM-16, OC-48

Any


The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.

14.15.14.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-242 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1434


14 Tributary Board and Line Board TOM

3(RX1/TX1)



7(RX5/TX5)

4(RX2/TX2)



8(RX6/TX6)

5(RX3/TX3)



9(RX7/TX7)

6(RX4/TX4)



10(RX8/TX8)


Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side. TOM 3(RX1/TX1)



9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8)

4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)


Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side. TOM 3(RX1/TX1)



8(RX6/TX6)

4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)




NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1435




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1





14.15.14.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown

3

in Figure 14-243.

NOTE

If only four OTU1 services are received from client equipment, you can also specify the service package as 4*OTU1 REG to automatically complete the following settings: l


l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8 ports.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX5/TX5 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port, the RX6/TX6 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP2 port, the RX7/TX7 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP3 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP4 port.

Figure 14-243 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Client side

WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 TOM

1



2



3




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1436



Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side. Client side

WDM side



2


9(TX7/RX7)-1


3


10(TX8/RX8)-1 TOM





Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side. Client side

WDM side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


1

2








TOM


14.15.15 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (noncascading) 14.15.15.1 Application Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-244. Figure 14-244 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 11) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

1

TX1

1 8×Any

N S 2 8

8

4×OTU1

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

N S 2 8

TX8

1

8×ODU0 8×Any

RX8

1

4×OTU1

4

RX1

TOM

TOM

TX1 OTU1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1437




Figure 14-245 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode) 52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)












4(RX2/TX2)






6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT) 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)







9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)





NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1




14.15.15.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1438



l


l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown

in Figure 14-246.

Figure 14-246 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 11) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

WDM side Standard mode


Other board




TOM

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 1



Compatible mode


3



2






14.15.16 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0 (Non-Cascading) 14.15.16.1 Application Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-247. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1439



Figure 14-247 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 12) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

1

4×OTU1

8

32×Any

N S 2

4×ODU1

TX8

8

1

64×Any

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

64×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

1

8×ODU0 8×Any

32×Any

4×OTU1

RX8

1

4×ODU1

4

RX1

TOM

TX1

OTU1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

8

4 OTU1 RX8 TX8

NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 11. When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services. Any service is FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.

14.15.16.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-248 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode) 52TOM

52NS2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1






















4(RX2/TX2) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1

5(RX3/TX3)

234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3)-1



6(RX4/TX4)



240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 1(IN/OUT)

241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)



242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1

9(RX7/TX7)







NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1440




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP3 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP7 AnyLP1-AnyLP12


14.15.16.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0). l


l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-249.

l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4

3

in Figure 14-249.


1441



Figure 14-249 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 12) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

WDM side Standard mode


Other board


Client side


3(TX1/RX1)-1


3

5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1



7(TX5/RX5)-1




4


9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



8(TX6/RX6)-1

WDM side


233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 2

1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

Compatible mode












14.15.17 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading) 14.15.17.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-250.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1442



Figure 14-250 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX8 Any

M U X / D M U X

N S 2

ODU1

ODU1

8×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

RX8

RX1

TOM

TX1

8×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

1xOTU2 1xODU1

Any

TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, RX8 STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, TX8 FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE


14.15.17.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-251 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode) 11TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1443




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1


14.15.17.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading mode. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 and service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 14-252 Figure 14-252 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Other board



Client side


1



WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side 2

TOM





Other board (Standard TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / mode) TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2

14.15.18 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) 14.15.18.1 Application Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1444



Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-253. Figure 14-253 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1 RX1

1xOTU1

TOM

MUX/ DMUX

TX8

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

RX8

TX8 RX8

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX7 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 TX7

RX1

TOM

TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX7 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 TX7

Any

Any

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1 RX1

TOM

RX1

TOM TX7

TX1

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ RX8 DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

6×Any

RX8

TX8

TX1

TX7

1×OTU1

MUX/ RX7 DMUX

RX7

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX6 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 TX6

1xOTU1

TX8

FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX6 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 TX6

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

14.15.18.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-254 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1445



3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


9(RX7/TX7) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


10(RX8/TX8)

8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 : Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Converts between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.

Table 14-227 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1


ODU1LP1



1446



Port Name

Description

a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

14.15.18.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-255. Figure 14-255 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 2) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1




9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM





WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1





2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



14.15.19 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading) 14.15.19.1 Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-256.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1447



Figure 14-256 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3) 4xODU1 RX1

4xODU1

TOM

1 MUX/ DMUX

8×Any

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

NS2 4

Any

TX1

TOM

1 8×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, RX8 ESCON, FDDI, SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 TX8

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

ODU1

Any

NS2 4

ODU1

RX1 FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON TX8 Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, RX8 HD-SDI, OTU1

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

14.15.19.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-257 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

52NS2










1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1448




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1




l ClientLP4

14.15.19.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown and

in Figure 14-258.


Other board



Client side


1



WDM side

Compatible mode

WDM side

2

TOM





Other board (Standard TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / mode) TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1449



14.15.20 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(NonCascading) 14.15.20.1 Application Implements conversion between four optical signals at a rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-259. Figure 14-259 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4)

RX1

4xOTU1

TX5

RX5

RX5

TX5

MUX/ DMUX

RX8

4×Any

RX8

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

TX8

RX1

TOM

4×OTU1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, FICON Express, RX4 SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48 TX4

TOM

4xOTU1

TX8

TX1 FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, RX4 FICON Express, SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48 TX4

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system plan.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1450



Figure 14-260 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)



Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1




l ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4



14.15.20.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-261.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1451




WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1

1

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1



7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

3

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1



TOM


14.15.21 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical regeneration board) 14.15.21.1 Application Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-262. Figure 14-262 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5)

4xOTU1

RX1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

RX4

TX1

TOM

4×OTU1

DMUX

4xOTU1

4xOTU1

RX1

4×OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4×ODU1

TX4

4×OTU1

MUX

TX4 4xOTU1

TOM

TX1

MUX

DMUX RX4


1452



NOTE

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.

14.15.21.2 Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-263 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)


NOTE

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a




ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4



14.15.21.3 Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-264. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1453




WDM side


1



7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

3

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1



TOM


14.15.22 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary Board) Figure 14-265 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1454



Figure 14-265 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributary board) 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s Any services/ n x ODUk

Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side RX 1 RX 2

O/E 8

RX 8 TX 1 TX 2

E/O

TX 8


8



Crossconnect module


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse


SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC )

NOTE


In Figure 14-265, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOM board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity. Table 14-231 shows the service cross-connections from the TOM board to the backplane. Table 14-231 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM Boar d

Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode



TN5 2TO M

cascading

ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1])

TN52TOM scenario 1

A maximum of 2 x ODU0/1 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/ s) Any services

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1455


Boar d

Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode



ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 3

A maximum of 1 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 2.5Gbit/s) Any services

ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1])

TN52TOM scenario 5

A maximum of 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/ s) Any services

ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 7


ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 8


ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0)

TN52TOM scenario 11

A maximum of 8 x ODU0

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0)

TN52TOM scenario 12

A maximum of 8 x ODU0

cascading

N/A

TN11TOM Scenario 1


noncascading

N/A

TN11TOM scenario 3


noncascading

TN1 1TO M


NOTE

The TN52TOM board supports cross-connections of Any services only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800. The TN52TOM board supports ODU0 cross-connections only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals or Any signals to the backplane.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1456


l


Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. – For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. – For ODUk signals, the module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out client-side electrical signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of client-side electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary-Line Board) Figure 14-266 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board. Figure 14-266 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributaryline board) Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side Service encapsulation and mapping module

O/E

RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6


Service regeneration module

E/O OTN Crossprocessing connect module module



TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



NOTE

In cascading mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports on the board can be used as WDM-side ports. Figure 14-266 shows an example in which the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports are used as the WDM-side ports to implement dual-fed and selective receiving. When a service is to be transmitted and received singly, one of the RX/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports can be used as a WDM-side and the other port can be used as a client-side port. In non-cascading mode, any four of the RX/TX ports can be used as WDM-side ports.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1457


l


Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment through the RX interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs the client signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the client-side electrical signals, and then outputs the client-side optical signals through the TX optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration module. – Cross-connect module Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1458



– Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Service processing module Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions. – Service regeneration module Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals. Monitors the performance of WDM-side services. l


l


14.15.23 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-267 shows the front panel of the TOM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1459



Figure 14-267 Front panel of the TOM board



l


l


l





1460



Table 14-232 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the service signal.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the service signal.


14.15.24 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOM board. Table 14-233 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board. Table 14-234 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board. Table 14-233 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 14-234 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

14.15.25 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 14-235. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1461



Table 14-235 TOM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used






Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, 0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None


100 to 2200 Default: /

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.


sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports this parameter.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1462



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF Default: FW_Defect

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.


1463



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s Automatic Laser Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled



FEC Working State


NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1464



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600





The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.



PRBS Test Status


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1465



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Board Mode

Cascading Mode, Noncascading Mode


Default: Noncascading Mode

NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports this parameter.

Default: Disabled

See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Board Working mode

Cascading, NonCascading Default: NonCascading

The Board Working Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.

Port Working Mode

In Non-Cascading mode, nine working modes are supported.a In Cascading mode, five working modes are supported.b

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail. For the configuration methods of different application scenarios of the TOM board, see the Configuration Guide.


1466


Field


Value

Description

a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port) b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port)

14.15.26 TOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1467



Bo ard





TN 11T OM

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A


S-16.1-15 km


L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km

I-16-2 km


S-16.1-15 km

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

L-16.1-40 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km TN 52T OM

N/A

I-16-2 km

N/A

S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 1000 BASE-BX10-U 1000 BASE-BX10-D 1000 BASE-BX-U 1000 BASE-BX-D

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1468



NOTE



I-16-2 km module, S-16.1-15 km module, L-16.1-40 km module and L-16.2-80 km module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


1469



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Unit


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


1470



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-D

1000 BASEBX-U

1000 BASEBX-D

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


1471



NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


1472


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload

dBm


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30


1473



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask

-






-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


1474



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

20 km (12.4 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

≤1.5


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


1475



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km


nm

3

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Operating wavelength range

nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-22


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant



APD 1476



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.5

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


1477



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 14-244 WDM-side pluggable optical specifications (SDH services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


1478



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

30

30

30


dB

N/A

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27



l

Weight: TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11TOM

55

60

TN52TOM

81

89.1


1479



14.16 TOX TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.16.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TOX board is TN55.


General 8800 T64 Subrack

Enhanc ed 8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 55T OX

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the TN55TOX board is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH and TNK2UXCT cross-connect boards must be used. When it is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-connect board must be configured. When it is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM cross-connect board must be configured.

Variants The TN55TOX board has only one variant: TN55TOX01.

14.16.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TOX board converts between eight 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and eight ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-268.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1480



Figure 14-268 Position of the TOX board in the WDM system 8xODU2/ODU2e

8xODU2/ODU2e

RX1 TOX 1

1 N O 2

8

8

M U 1 X N / O D 2 M U 8 X

1

1

8

8

8xODU2/ODU2e

8xODU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN TX1 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 RX8 OTU2e TX8

TOX M 1 U X / D M 8 U X

TX1 RX110GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 TX8 OTU2 OTU2e RX8

14.16.3 Functions and Features The TOX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-245. Table 14-245 Functions and features of the TOX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOX converts signals as follows: l 8 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->8 x ODU2. l 8 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e<->8 x ODU2e.


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s


Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU2/ODU2e signals between the TOX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane. l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TOX receives OTN services.

ESC function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported by the TOX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.


1481




Description

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

ALS function


PRBS function


LPT function


Test frame

Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services.


The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the clientside service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). NOTE Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical port can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.

Physical clock

l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


1482




Description



Port MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518–9600 bytes. NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3ae


ITU-T G.805


ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1483



14.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-269 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOX. Figure 14-269 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOX Backplane(service cross-connection) 8xODU2/ODU2e

Client side SDH/SONET

RX1

encapsulation and

O/E

mapping module

RX8

10GE LAN

TX1


Crossconnect module

1588v2 module

encapsulation and

E/O

mapping module

TX8



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



The client side of the TOX board can access the following optical signals: l

10GE LAN optical signals

l

10GE WAN optical signals

l

STM-64 optical signals

l

OC-192 optical signals

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1484



l

OTU2 optical signals

l

OTU2e optical signals

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE WAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1485


l



l


l


14.16.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-270 shows the front panel of the TOX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1486



Figure 14-270 Front panel of the TOX board



l


l


l





1487



Table 14-246 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



14.16.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOX board. Table 14-247 shows the valid slots for the TOX board. Table 14-247 Valid slots for the TOX board Product

Valid Slots

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack





IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-248 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-248 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4


1488



Physical Port


TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-271 shows the port diagrams of the TOX board. Table 14-249 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-271 Port diagram of the TOX Other line/PID board Backplane 8 x ODU2/ODU2e





Table 14-249 Description of NMS port of the TOX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8



1489



14.16.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TOX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l


l

Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-272.

Figure 14-272 Cross-connection diagram of the TOX board WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Line/PID board a (standard mode) Line/PID board b (compatible mode)

Cross connect mode Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1

Cross connect mode

TOX

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

The client side of the TOX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Line/PID board a


Line/PID board b


14.16.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOX, refer to Table 14-250.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1490



Table 14-250 TOX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64


Default: None Port Mapping

Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. NOTE The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information. Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off

Service Mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


1491



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1492



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.

Default: 9600

NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission



FEC Working State



See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC

FEC Mode

Default: FEC


See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition


LPT Enabled


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.


1493



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64 or OC-192:

Default: Disabled

– PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Applies to fault detection and location when the service type is STM-64 or OC-192. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter. When the service type is 10GE-LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching.

14.16.10 TOX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1494



Board



TN55TO X

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

NOTE

A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution. NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+) module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, OTU2, and OTU2e signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+)

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1


dBm

-6


dB

3.5


dBm

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355


1495



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+)


dBm

-14.4


dBm

0.5

reflectance

dB

-12

NOTE

10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/ EW-40 km (SFP+), and 10 Gbit/s BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASESR-0.3 km (SFP+)

10G BASELR-10 km (SFP+)

10G BASEER/EW-40 km (SFP+)

10G BASEZR-80 km (SFP+)


Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.8 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


1496



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type






dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27



l

Weight: 1.42 kg (3.13 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN55TOX

75.3

80.6


1497



14.17 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

14.17.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TQ M

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2TQ M

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TQM/TN12TQM board has only one variant: TN11TQM01/TN12TQM01.


Function: – Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/FDDI services, PRBS function, Test frame and Tributary SNCP protection. For details, see 14.17.3 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.17.10 TQM Specifications.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1498




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TQM

TN12TQM

The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the TN11TQM.

TN12TQM

None

-

14.17.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-273. Figure 14-273 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system 1xODU1

1xODU1

TQM

TQM

1

4

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1 N S 2



1×ODU1

1×ODU1


M U X / D M U X

4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

OptiX OSN 6800: from paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: from mesh group slot

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

14.17.3 Functions and Features The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-253. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1499



Table 14-253 Functions and features of the TQM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TQM converts signals as follows: 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x ODU1.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services. The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.


OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1500




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Bursty mode.

ALS function


PRBS test function

TN11TQM: not supported. TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

LPT function


Test frame

TN11TQM: not supported TN12TQM: The board supports test frame function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM). NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1501




Description


FE: 100M Full-Duplex GE: l Auto-Negotiation l 1000M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1502




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and protocols.

SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1503




Description



14.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-274 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1504



Figure 14-274 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Service OTN encapsulation and Processing Cross-connect module mapping module module



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



NOTE


The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals. NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1505



and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, – If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. – If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1506




14.17.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-275 shows the front panel of the TQM board. Figure 14-275 Front panel of the TQM board

TQM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

TQM



1507



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-254 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-254 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX1-RX4

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.


14.17.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQM board. Table 14-255 shows the valid slots for the TQM board. Table 14-255 Valid slots for the TQM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU5


1508




Display of Physical Ports Table 14-256 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-256 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-276 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 14-257 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1509



Figure 14-276 Port diagram of the TQM board Other OTU board

Other line board

Backplane ODU1

4 x GE/Any/OTU1

201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4


201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

Client Side Crossconnect module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from other boards


NOTE

TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Table 14-257 Description of NM port of the TQM board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


Configuration Principle l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1510



l

For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

HD-SDI

11

DVB-ASI

2

SDI

3

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

14.17.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1511



– Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 14-277.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-277. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-277. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

Figure 14-277 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1

WDM side


TQM The straight-through of the board

1

The internal cross-connection of the board

2

The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board

3 4


l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1512



(or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-278. Figure 14-278 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCh:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3

TQM


The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a


Other board b


l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

14.17.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 14-258. Table 14-258 TQM parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1513



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, Any, DVBASI,SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OTU-1 Default: None

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.


Laser Status

Default: Off


Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.


1514



Field

Value

Description

Service Mode



Default: Client Mode Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600





The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only available for TN12TQM.



PRBS Test Status


The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only available for the TN12TQM.

14.17.10 TQM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1515



Board



TN11TQ M

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

TN12TQ M

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NOTE




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1516




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN

PIN


1517


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355


1518


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1519




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1520



NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1521





Weight l

TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.)

l

TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)




TN11TQM

50.3

57.6

TN12TQM

25

27.5

14.18 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

14.18.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 TQS

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TQS board has only one variant: TN11TQS01.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1522



14.18.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-279. Figure 14-279 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system 4xODU1

4xODU1 TQS

TQS 1

1

4

4

4

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1 N S 2

4

1

1

4

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1

1

STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1

4

14.18.3 Functions and Features The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-263. Table 14-263 Functions and features of the TQS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TQS converts signals as follows:




OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.

4 x (STM-16/OC-48/OTU1)<->4 x ODU1


OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

l Supports PM functions for ODU1. ESC function

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


1523




Description

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported



1524






14.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-280 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1525



Figure 14-280 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU1

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

O/E

E/O

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN procssing module

Client-side Optical module

OTN Processing module



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



SCC

The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals: l


l


l


In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals,

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1526



encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1527




14.18.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-281 shows the front panel of the TQS board. Figure 14-281 Front panel of the TQS board

TQS STAT ACT PROG SRV


TQS



1528



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-264 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-264 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



14.18.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQS board. Table 14-265 shows the valid slots for the TQS board. Table 14-265 Valid slots for the TQS board Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU5




1529



Table 14-266 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-282 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 14-267 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-282 Port diagram of the TQS board

Other line/ PID board Backplane 4 x ODU1

201 (LP1/LP1)-1 202 (LP2/LP2)-1 203 (LP3/LP3)-1 204 (LP4/LP4)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1 4 (RX2/TX2)-1 5 (RX3/TX3)-1 6 (RX4/TX4)-1

Client Side Crossconnect module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1530


14 Tributary Board and Line Board Service processing module

Table 14-267 Description of NM port of the TQS board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


LP1-LP4

Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

14.18.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/ TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 14-283.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1531



Figure 14-283 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Other board b IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 (standard IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 mode) IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Client side 201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2

TQS

201(LP1/LP1)-3 201(LP1/LP1)-4

The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

14.18.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 14-268. Table 14-268 TQS parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1532



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-16 Default: OTU-1

Laser Status



Enabled, Disabled

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Enabled



The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1533



14.18.10 TQS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TQ S

N/A

I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.1-40 km L-16.2-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NOTE



This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360


1534


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 km

S-16.1-15 km

L-16.1-40 km

L-16.2-80 km


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1535




Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


1536



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


nm

N/A


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1537






TN11TQS

43

47.3

14.19 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.19.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11, TN52, TN53, and TN55.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TQ X

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN5 2TQ X

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

TN5 3TQ X

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN5 5TQ X

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Variants Each of the TN11TQX, TN52TQX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards has only one variant identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TQX01.

Differences Between Versions Function: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1538



Board


IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock


FC800/ FC1200

TN11TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

N

N

TN52TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

N

TN53TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

Y

TN55TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e/ ODUflex

Y

Y

Y

Y


The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.19.10 TQX Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-272 Substitution rules of the TQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TQX

TN55TQX

The TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN11TQX.

TN52TQX

TN55TQX


TN53TQX

TN55TQX


TN55TQX

None

-


1539



14.19.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-284. Figure 14-284 Position of the TQX board in the WDM system 4xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex


TQX TX1 1

1 N Q 2

4

4

M 1 U X / D M 4 U X

M U 1 X N / Q D 2 M U 4 X

1

1

4

4



RX1 TQX 10GE LAN 10GE WANTX1 STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e RX4 FC800 FC1200 TX4

10GE LAN RX110GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 TX4 OTU2e FC800 RX4 FC1200

Table 14-273 Client-side service mapping path supported by the board Board

Client-Side Service

Backplane-Side Service

TN11TQ X


ODU2/ODU2e

TN52TQ X

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e

ODU2/ODU2e

TN53TQ X


ODU2/ODU2e

TN55TQ Xa


ODU2/ODU2e

FC800

ODUflex

a: For FC800 services, the TN55TQX board supports two mapping paths: FC800->ODU2 and FC800->ODUflex. The mapping paths for the TN53TDX boards at the service adding and dropping sites must be the same.

14.19.3 Functions and Features The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-274. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1540



Table 14-274 Functions and features of the TQX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TQX converts signals as follows: l 4xFC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e<->4xODU2/ODU2e. l 4xFC800<->4xODUflex


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, For the TN11TQX/ TN52TQX, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.


Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.

NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board.

l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX , TN53TQXand TN55TQX receives OTN services. ESC function

Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1541




Description

ALS function


PRBS test function


LPT function


Test frame

Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).


The TN53TQX/TN55TQX (standard mode) board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.


NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TN55TQX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Physical clock

l When the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.


Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l TN11TQX/TN12TQX/TN53TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN55TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)


1542




Description

Port MTU


Loopback



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3ae


ITU-T G.805



14.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-285 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1543



Figure 14-285 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX Backplane(service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

Client side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4


O/E



Crossconnect module

1588v2 module

FC encapsulation and mapping module



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



NOTE

Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module. Only the TN55TQX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-285, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-275 shows the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane. Table 14-275 Service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane Board


TN11TQX/ TN52TQX/ TN53TQX

A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e

TN55TQX

A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1544


l


Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. NOTE

FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1545



– OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. l


l


l


14.19.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-286 shows the front panel of the TQX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1546



Figure 14-286 Front panel of the TQX board



l


l


l





1547



Table 14-276 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



14.19.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQX board. For the OptiX OSN 6800: l

If the TN12XCS board is used, the TQX board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s when it is installed in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the TQX board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s when it is installed in any of the other slots.

l

If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the TQX board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s regardless of which slot the board is installed.

For the OptiX OSN 8800: The TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot. Table 14-277 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board. Table 14-277 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-278 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board. Table 14-278 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


1548



Table 14-279 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board. Table 14-279 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-280 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-280 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. The TQX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1549



Table 14-281 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN11T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-287

Table 14-282

TQX

TN52T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-287

Table 14-282

52TQX

TN53T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-287

Table 14-282

53TQX

TN55T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-287

Table 14-282

55TQX

Standar d mode

Figure 14-288

Table 14-282

55TQX(STND)

Figure 14-287 Port diagram of the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex



NOTE

Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex. Cross-connect module



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1550



Figure 14-288 Port diagram of the TN55TQX (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex





Table 14-282 Description of NMS port of the TQX board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP1-ClientLP4


14.19.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX: Configuration of cross-connection Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-289.

l

TN55TQX: Configuration of cross-connection – Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. – Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any>ODU2->OTU2) – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1551



– Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP or RX/TX port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-289 and Figure 14-290. – Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. – Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex). – Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. – Create the cross-connections of ODUflex level between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-291 and Figure 14-292. NOTE

The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.

Figure 14-289 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (compatible mode ODU2 level) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Cross connect mode


Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

TQX


Cross connect mode

The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1552



Other board b

TN11TQX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN52TQX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX TN53TQX: TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 TN55TQX: TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

Figure 14-290 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (standard mode ODU2 level) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1

Other board




Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

TQX

6(RX4/TX4)-1 Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS NOTE

Only the TN55TQX board supports standard mode. Other board a


Other board b


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1553



Figure 14-291 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (compatible mode ODUflex level) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Other board Cross connect mode Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

TQX


Cross connect mode

The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board


Figure 14-292 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (standard mode ODUflex level) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Other board Cross-connect module Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

TQX Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS NOTE

Only the TN55TQX board supports standard mode. Other board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1554



14.19.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 14-283. Table 14-283 TQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






l TN11TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64


Default: None l TN52TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TQX/ TN55TQX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, CBR_10G, FC800, FC1200 Default: None

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1555



Field

Value

Description

Port Mapping

TN11TQX/TN12TQX/ TN53TQX:

The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.

l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) TN55TQX:

NOTE The TN55TQX board supports the TC, TC +OC, BC, and OC modes when the clientside service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) NOTE For the TN11TQX: only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports support MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off

Service Mode


The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the service mode for a board. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.

See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

9953.28 to 10312.50 Default: /

sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. NOTE NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to CBR_10G.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1556



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled




Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the WDM-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.


1557



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.

The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. NOTE For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission


Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.

FEC Working State



See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC


See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1558



Field

Value

Description




Default: None

Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TQX/TN55TQX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1559



Field

Value

Description

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64 or OC-192:

Applies to fault detection and location when the service type is STM-64 or OC-192. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter.

– PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

When the service type is 10GE-LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX.

Port Working Mode

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port)

This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX

Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2>OTU2)

14.19.10 TQX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1560



Board



TN11TQX/ TN52TQX/ TN53TQX/ TN55TQX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km

NOTE


The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


1561


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1


1562


Parameter


Unit


dB





-27

-27

-27

-12



l

Weight: TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)




TN11TQX

65.0

71.2

TN52TQX

91.5

100

TN53TQX

45

50

TN55TQX

45

50

14.20 TSC TSC: 100G tributary service processing board

14.20.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TSC board is TN54.



1563



Board

General 8800 T64 Subrac k

Enhan ced 8800 T64 Subrac k

Gener al 8800 T32 Subrac k

Enha nced 8800 T32 Subra ck

8800 T16 Subra ck


6800 Subra ck

3800 Chass is

TN54TS C

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TSC board must work with TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM board. l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN16UXCM board.

Variants The TN54TSC board has only one variant: TN54TSC. The TN54TSC board variant is the board itself.

14.20.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TSC board converts between one channel of 100GE optical signals and one channel of ODU4 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-293. Figure 14-293 Position of the TSC board in the WDM system 1xODU4 1xOTU4

1xOTU4 1xODU4

8×ODU0

100GE TX

1×ODU4

RX

TSC

N S 4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 4

1×ODU4

TSC

TX RX 100GE

14.20.3 Functions and Features The TSC board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-285. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1564



Table 14-285 Functions and features of the TSC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TSC converts signals as follows: 1 x 100GE<->1 x ODU4


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s


Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU4 signals between the TSC and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l ODU4 layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

ESC function

Not supported

PRBS function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

Not supported


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.


Supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Client side


Channel Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Not supported


1565




Description



IEEE 802.3ba


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

14.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TSC consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-294 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TSC.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1566



Figure 14-294 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSC Backplane(service cross-connection) 1 x ODU4 Client side RX TX

O/E

E/O

100GE Service encapsulation and mapping module





Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSC board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSC to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of 100GE service signals through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU4 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives one channel of ODU4 electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU4 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 100GE signals to the client-side optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1567



The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of 100GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a 100GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signals, maps the signals into the payload of an ODU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance. – OTN processing module Frames ODU4 signals and processes overheads in ODU4 signals.

l


l


14.20.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-295 shows the front panel of the TSC board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1568



Figure 14-295 Front panel of the TSC board

TSC STAT ACT PROG SRV


G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用 G.657A2 光纤

TX RX

TSC

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1569





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-286 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-286 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSC board Interface

Type

Function

RX

LC/PC


TX

LC/PC



14.20.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TSC board. Table 14-287 shows the valid slots for the TSC board. Table 14-287 Valid slots for TSC board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1570



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-288 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-288 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSC board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX/RX

3

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-296 shows the port diagrams of the TSC board. Table 14-289 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-296 Port diagram of the TSC

Other line board

Backplane 1 x ODU4

3(RX/TX)-1




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1571



Table 14-289 Description of NMS port of the TSC board Port Name

Description

RX/TX


14.20.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TSC board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l


l

Create the cross-connections of ODU4 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU4 logical port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-297.

Figure 14-297 Cross-connection diagram of the TSC board

WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1

Line board

Cross connect mode Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

TSC

Cross connect mode The client side of the TSC board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards Line board

NS4

14.20.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TSC, refer to Table 14-290. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1572



Table 14-290 TSC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used






Service Type

100GE Default: 100GE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


1573



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s NULL Mapping Status

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Enabled, Disabled

This parameter is reserved for future use.

Default: Disabled


1574



14.20.10 TSC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54TS C

N/A

100GBASE-LR4-10 km (CFP) 100GBASE-10×10G-10 km (CFP)

NOTE



Unit



-

NRZ


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Total Average Launch Power (Min) Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm


1.7

1575



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

10.5


dBm

-1.3


dBm

4.5


dBm

-4.3


dBm

4.5


dB

4


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


dBm

-10.6


dBm

4.5


dBm

4.5


1576



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-8.6

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26



Unit



-

NRZ


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1577



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km (CFP) 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597


dBm

4.2


dBm

13.5


dBm

-5.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

-2.8

Transmit OMA per Lane (Typ)

dBm

-0.8


dBm

3.5


dB

2.5


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1578



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km (CFP) 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Receiver Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-10.8

Receiver Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

3.5


dBm

3.5


dBm

-8.8

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1579





l





TN54TSC

65.0

80.0

14.21 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.21.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11, TN53, and TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TS XL

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN5 3TS XL

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN5 4TS XL

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL board has only one variant: TN11TSXL01, TN53TSXL01, and TN54TSXL01. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1580




Function: Board



TN11TSXL

ODU2

STM-256/OC-768

TN53TSXL

ODU3

STM-256/OC-768/OTU3

TN54TSXL

ODU3

40GE

For details, see 14.21.2 Application and 14.21.3 Functions and Features. l

Appearance: The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL use different front panels with different dimensions. For details, see 14.21.5 Front Panel and 14.21.10 TSXL Specifications.

l

Specification: The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.21.10 TSXL Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

14.21.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN54TSXL board converts between one channel of 40GE optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-298, Figure 14-299 and Figure 14-300. Figure 14-298 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system 4xODU2

4xODU2

TSXL 1

RX

4

M U 1 X N / Q D 2 M U 4 X


1

1

TX 4xODU2

N Q 2 4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

4xODU2

STM-256 OC-768 TX

TSXL M 1 U X / D M 4 U X

4

STM-256

RX OC-768

4

1581



Figure 14-299 Position of the TN53TSXL board in the WDM system 1xODU3

1xODU3

TSXL

TSXL

RX

TX N S 3

1xODU3

N S 3

1xODU3

STM-256 OC-768 TX OTU3

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

STM-256 OC-768 RX OTU3

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

Figure 14-300 Position of the TN54TSXL board in the WDM system 1xODU3

1xODU3

TSXL

TSXL

RX

M U X / D M U X

TX N S 3

1xODU3

TX

1xODU3

40GE

N S 3

M U X / D M U X

RX

40GE

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

14.21.3 Functions and Features The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-293.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1582



Table 14-293 Functions and features of the TSXL board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TSXL converts signals as follows: l TN11TSXL: – 1 x (STM-256/OC-768)<-> 4 x ODU2 – Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in a 10 Gbit/s WDM network. l TN53TSXL: – 1 x (STM-256/OC-768/OTU3) <-> 1 x ODU3 l TN54TSXL: – 1 x 40GE<->1 x ODU3


l TN11TSXL: – STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s l TN53TSXL: – STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s – OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s l TN54TSXL: – 40GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 41.25 Gbit/s


Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM, TCM functions for ODU3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side only when the service on the client side is OTU3.

PRBS test function

TN11TSXL/TN54TSXL: Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.


1583




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only TN54TSXL provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports Poisson Mode. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports laser temperature monitoring. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports B1 bytes monitoring.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported by the TN54TSXL


Supported by the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL.

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE TN54TSXL only supports client-side 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported



1584






14.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-301 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL. Figure 14-302 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL. Figure 14-303 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54TSXL.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1585



Figure 14-301 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection)

4XODU2 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O






Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


1586



Figure 14-302 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU3 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O


SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module




Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


1587



Figure 14-303 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU3 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O

40GE encapsulation and mapping module





Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1588



Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3/40GE optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3/40GE optical signal. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, Client-side OTN processing module, , 40GE encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – 40GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 40GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 40GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TSXL and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


14.21.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-304 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 14-305 shows the front panel of the TN53TSXL board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1589



Figure 14-306 shows the front panel of the TN54TSXL board. Figure 14-304 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board

TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX RX

TSXL

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1590



Figure 14-305 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board

TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX RX

TSXL

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1591



Figure 14-306 Front panel of the TN54TSXL board G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用G.657A2 光纤 TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用 G.657A2 光纤

TX RX TSXL




l


l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1592



Table 14-294 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board Interface

Type

Function

RX

LC


TX

LC



14.21.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL. Table 14-295 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board. Table 14-295 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.

Table 14-296 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board. Table 14-296 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


1593




Display of Physical Ports Table 14-297 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-297 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


RX/TX

3

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-307 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 14-308 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board. Figure 14-309 shows the application model of the TN54TSXL board. Table 14-298 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-307 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board

Other line/ PID board Backplane 4 x ODU2

151 (imp/imp)-1 151 (imp/imp)-2 151 (imp/imp)-3 151 (imp/imp)-4

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1594



Figure 14-308 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board Other line board

Backplane ODU3

201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side Cross-connect module



Figure 14-309 Port diagram of the TN54TSXL board Other line board Backplane ODU3

3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side Cross-connect module



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1595



Table 14-298 Description of NM port of the TSXL board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1

Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces.

imp (inverse multiplexing port)

The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

ClientLP1


14.21.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

TN11TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 14-310.

Figure 14-310 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:2

Other board a (compatible mode) Other board b (standard mode)

Client side 151(imp/imp)-1 151(imp/imp)-2 151(imp/imp)-3

TSXL

151(imp/imp)-4

The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX Other board b TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2

l

TN53TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 14-311.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1596



Figure 14-311 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TSXL board WDM side 81(ODU3LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

Other board

Other board b (compatible mode) Other board c (standard mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1


TSXL

The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board b

TN54NS3

Other board c

TN55NS3

l

TN54TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the RX1/TX1 port and the ODU3LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown inFigure 14-312.

Figure 14-312 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54TSXL board Other board b 81(ODU3LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 (compatible mode) IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1

WDM side

Other board c (standard mode)

Client side

RX1/TX1

TSXL

The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board b

TN54NS3

Other board c

TN55NS3

14.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 14-299.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1597



Table 14-299 TSXL parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, OC-768, STM-256, OTU-3 Default: STM-256

The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3 services. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off


Enabled, Disabled



Default: Enabled

Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports this parameter.


1598



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect




FEC Working State


Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports this parameter.

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.

See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1599



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Default: FEC

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.

See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

SD Trigger Condition None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

14.21.10 TSXL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1600



Board



TN11TS XL/ TN53TS XL

40G Transponder

N/A

TN54TS XL

N/A

40GBASE-LR4-10km (CFP)

NOTE



Unit



-

NRZ


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


dB

35


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1601



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-301 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


Value 40G BASE-LR4-10km (CFP)

-

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Signaling speed per Lane

Gbit/s

10.3125

Signaling speed accuracy

ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1264.5 1284.5 1304.5 1324.5


nm

1277.5 1297.5 1317.5 1337.5


dBm

8.3


dBm

-1


dBm

-4


dBm

3.5


dBm

-7


dBm

2.3


dB

3.5


dB

30


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1602



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 40G BASE-LR4-10km (CFP)

Receiver type

-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1264.5 1284.5 1304.5 1324.5


nm

1277.5 1297.5 1317.5 1337.5


dBm

-13.7


dBm

2.3


dBm

3.5


dBm

-11.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26


Mechanical Specifications TN11TSXL: l


l


TN53TSXL:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1603



l


l


TN54TSXL: l


l





TN11TSXL

90.2

96

TN53TSXL

75

83

TN54TSXL

58

64

14.22 TTX TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board

14.22.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TTX board is TN54.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

General 8800 T64 Subrac k

Enhan ced 8800 T64 Subrac k

Gener al 8800 T32 Subrac k

Enha nced 8800 T32 Subra ck

8800 T16 Subra ck


6800 Subra ck

3800 Chass is

TN54TT X

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N


1604



NOTE

l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TTX board must work with TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM board. l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN16UXCM board.

Variants The TN54TTX board has only one variant: TN54TTX. The TN54TTX board variant is the board itself.

14.22.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TTX board converts between ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-313. Figure 14-313 Position of the TTX board in the WDM system 10xODU2/ODU2e

10xODU2/ODU2e

RX1

RX10 TX10

TTX

N S 4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 4

10xDU2/ODU2e

TX1

10xDU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e

TTX

TX1 RX1

TX10 RX10

10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e

14.22.3 Functions and Features The TTX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-302. Table 14-302 Functions and features of the TTX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TTX converts signals as follows: 10x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e<>10xODU2/ODU2e

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1605




Description




Supports the cross-connection of ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the TTX board and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. Supported when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

ESC function

NOTE A maximum of eight ports support the ESC function.

PRBS function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

LPT function


FEC

Not supported.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Not supported


1606




Description

Physical clock

When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary ODUk SNCP protection NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

Loopback

Client side


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Channel Loopback

Not supported




1607






14.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TTX consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-314 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TTX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1608



Figure 14-314 Functional modules and signal flow of the TTX Backplane(service cross-connection) 10 x ODU2/ODU2e


Client side RX1

O/E

RX10 TX1 TX10







Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TTX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TTX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives ten channels of the optical signals through the RX1RX10 interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1609



such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs ten channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX10 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TTX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1610



14.22.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TTX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-315 shows the front panel of the TTX board. Figure 14-315 Front panel of the TTX board



l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1611


l




Interfaces Table 14-303 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-303 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TTX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX10

LC


RX1-RX10

LC



14.22.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TTX board. Table 14-304 shows the valid slots for the TTX board. Table 14-304 Valid slots for TTX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-305 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1612



Table 14-305 Mapping between the physical ports on the TTX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-316 shows the port diagrams of the TTX board. Table 14-306 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1613



Figure 14-316 Port diagram of the TTX

Other line/PID board


3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1 11(RX9/TX9)-1 12(RX10/TX10)-1 Cross-connect module



Table 14-306 Description of NMS port of the TTX board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX10/TX10


14.22.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TTX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l


l

Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-317.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1614



Figure 14-317 Cross-connection diagram of the TTX board WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

Line/PID board a (standard mode) Line/PID board b (compatible mode)

Cross connect mode Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1 11(RX9/TX9)-1 12(RX10/TX10)-1

Cross connect mode

TTX

The client side of the TTX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

Line/PID board a


Line/PID board b


14.22.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TTX, refer to Table 14-307. Table 14-307 TTX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1615



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64


Default: None Port Mapping

Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

Laser Status


Service Mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


1616



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1617



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

Insert Code Type

PN11, MS_AIS

Default: Disabled

Default: PN11

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Applies to fault detection and location when the service type is STM-64 or OC-192. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter.

14.22.10 TTX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1618



Board



TN54TT X

N/A

10G BASE-LR(SFP+) 10G BASE-ER(SFP+) 10G BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

NOTE


10 Gbit/s Multi-rate optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, OTU2, and OTU2e signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


10G BASE-ER(SFP+)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

3


dBm

-6

-2


dB

3.5

8.2


1619



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASE-LR(SFP+)

10G BASE-ER(SFP+) ≤-30


dBm

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605


dBm

-14.4

-14 (11.1G) -15.8 (10.3125G)


dBm

0.5

-1

reflectance

dB

-12

-27

NOTE

10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/ EW-40 km (SFP+), and 10Gbit/s BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type






Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.8 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1620


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27


1621





l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN54TTX

63.0

68.0


1622


15 Packet Service Unit

15

Packet Service Unit

About This Chapter 15.1 Overview Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLSTP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS function. 15.2 EG16 EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board 15.3 EX2 EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board 15.4 PND2 PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1623



15.1 Overview Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLSTP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS function.

Positions of Packet Service Boards in a WDM System The EG16 board receives and processes GE/FE services, and the EX2 board receives and processes 10GE LAN services at Layer 2. The processed services are transmitted as packets to centralized cross-connect boards for grooming. Then the PND2 board processes and converts these packets into OTU2 optical signals, therefore achieving transmission of packet services over a WDM network. Figure 15-1 shows the positions of packet service boards in a WDM system. Figure 15-1 Positions of packet service boards in a WDM system Client-side services

Packets

OTU2

EG16 OA

OM

FIU

SC1

EG16 OD

PND2

WDM-side ODF

EX2

OA


PND2

EX2

Main Functions Table 15-1 lists the main functions of packet service boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1624



Table 15-1 Main functions of packet service boards Board

EG16

Client-Side Service/ WDM-Side Signal


Type

Max. Numbe r of Service s

Type

Maximum Bandwidt h

l Client-side service: GE/ FE

16

Packets

20 Gbit/s

2

Packets

20 Gbit/s

2

Packets

20 Gbit/s

l WDM-side signal: N/A EX2

l Client-side service: 10GE LAN l WDM-side signal: N/A

PND2

l Client-side service: N/A

Layer 2 Function

l Supports E-Line and E-LAN services based on MPLS, QinQ, and physical ports. l Supports ETH-OAM and MPLS-TP OAM. l Supports MPLS-TP Tunnel APS, MPLS-TP PW APS, LAG, MCLAG, and MSTP. l Supports QoS.

l WDM-side signal: OTU2

15.2 EG16 EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board

15.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the EG16 board is TN54.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1625



Bo ard

8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 EG 16

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used.

Variants The TN54EG16 board has only one variant: TN54EG16. The TN54EG16 board variant is the board itself.

15.2.2 Application As a packet service board, the EG16 board receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for centralized cross-connections. When the EG16 board is used, the PND2 board must be used on the WDM side to implement the transmission of packet services on a WDM network. For the position of the EG16 board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-2. Figure 15-2 Position of the EG16 board in the WDM system Packets

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

RX1

TX1

TX1

RX1 16xGE/FE

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 RX1

IN2

TX1

OUT2

2x 10 GE LAN RX2

EX2

OUT1 M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 OUT2

TX1

IN2

RX1

TX2

EX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

NOTE

When used to receive optical services, the board can receive a maximum of 16 GE or FE services. When used to receive electrical services, the board can receive a maximum of 2 GE or FE services. The EG16 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate subrack.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1626



15.2.3 Functions and Features The EG16 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). Table 15-2 describes the service functions of the EG16 board, Table 15-3 provides the service specifications of the EG16 board, Table 15-4 describes the features supported by the EG16 board. Table 15-2 Service function of the EG16 board Function

Description

Basic function

Receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE services, processes the GE/FE packet services.

Working mode

l GE optical port: 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto–Negotiation l FE optical port: 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation

Flow control at ports

Supported Comply with IEEE802.3x.

Ethernet data frame format

IEEE 802.3, Ethernet II, IEEE 802.1q, IEEE 802.1p

Service type

E-Line (VPWS), E-LAN (VPLS)

Service bearing medium

Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW

PW-based service models

CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW

QinQ linkbased service models

Port<->QinQ

Port-based service models

Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ

CVLAN<->Port SVLAN<->Port

UNI-UNI service models

Port<->Port CVLAN<->CVLAN, VLAN translation supported SVLAN<->SVLAN, VLAN translation supported

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1627



Function E-LAN

Description Bridge type

IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q

Bridge learning mode

SVL

VSI tag type

C-Aware, S-Aware, T-Aware

Table 15-3 Service specifications of the EG16 board Service Parameter

Specifications

Supported service

16 x GE/FE GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

Backplane bandwidth

20Gbit/s

MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518–9600 bytes. Supports Jumbo frames containing a maximum of 9600 bytes.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

VLAN

4094

QinQ

4094

E-Line

8192

E-LAN

1024

MAC address

256 x 1024 (The total number of the blacklists and static MAC addresses cannot exceed 2048.)

Number of MAC addresses supported by each VSI

64 x 1024

Split horizon

One split horizon for each E-LAN

PW

SSPW

16384 (max.)

MSPW

8192 (max.)


1628



Service Parameter

Specifications

Static tunne l

Unid irecti onal tunne l

16 x 1024 (equipment level), 8 x 1024 (board level)

Bidir ectio nal tunne l


Table 15-4 Features supported by the EG16 board Feature

Description

Protectio n scheme

MPLS-TP Tunnel APS

Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 protection modes defined in ITU-T Y. 1720.

MPLS-TP PW APS

Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 protection modes defined in ITU-T G. 8131, ITU-T Y.1731.

LAG

Supported. Comply with IEEE 802.1ax.

MC-LAG


MSTP

Supported. Comply with IEEE 802.1s.

Diffserv

Supported, compliant with RFC 2474 and RFC 2475.

Traffic classification

Complex traffic classification. The ACL rules are customized based on packet information.

Traffic policing

Committed access rate (CAR), two rate three color marker (trTCM) compliant with RFC 4115.

Congestion management

Class of service (CoS), supporting SP/WRR scheduling algorithms.

Congestion avoidance

WRED, tail dropping.

Traffic shaping

Port-based traffic shaping, queue-based traffic shaping.

QoS

IGMP Snoopin g

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Not supported


1629



Feature

Description

Mainten ance

Ethernet OAM

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731/G. 8013

Ethernet port OAM

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3ah

MPLS-TP OAM

Supported, compliant with ITU-T Y.1731/G.8013

RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

GE/FE optical interface

PHY Inloop MAC Inloop

GE/FE electric interface

PHY Outloop MAC Inloop

Synchro nization

Inband DCN

Physical clock

Supports synchronous Ethernet.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

NOTE Electrical ports do not support synchronous Ethernet.

Supported

NOTE

In addition to the preceding features, the board supports performance monitoring and service processing compliant with related standards and protocols defined by IEEE, ITU-T, IETF, and MEF.

15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EG16 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processing module, transmission management module, switch buffer module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1630



Figure 15-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board

RX1


Packets

Client side

O/E

RX16 TX1

E/O

TX16


Packet processing module

Transmission management module

switch buffer module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



NOTE

When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the packet processing module for processing.

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the EG16 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EG16 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Transmit direction 1.

The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 ports, and performs O/E conversion.

2.

After receiving the electrical signals, the packet processing module decodes the signals, performs serial/parallel conversion, searches for routes and matches addresses for data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, and sends the data services to the transmission management module.

3.

The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data servies, slices the data servies into packets for the switching network, and sends the packets to the switch buffer module.

4.

After buffering the packets, the switch buffer module sends the packets to the crossconnect board through the backplane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1631


l


Receive direction 1.

The switch buffer module processes the packets from the cross-connect board and then sends the packets to the transmission management module.

2.

The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data servies, buffers the data servies, and finally sends the data servies to the packet processing module.

3.

The packet processing module implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates GE/ FE electrical signals.

4.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE/FE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1TX16 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of GE/FE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of GE/FE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Packet processing module Searches routes, performs address matching, switches labels for data services, and implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services.

l

Transmission management module Segments data services into packets and provides large traffic buffer functions.

l

Switching buffer module Buffers packets, manages and schedules data queues. This module and the cross-connect board in the same subrack form a switching network to switch packets.

l


l


15.2.5 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-4 shows the front panel of the EG16. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1632



Figure 15-4 Front panel of the EG16 EG16 STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX9

TX1

RX9

RX1

TX10

TX2

RX10 TX11

RX2 TX3

RX11 TX12

RX3 TX4

RX12 TX13

RX4 TX5

RX13 TX14

RX5 TX6

RX14 TX15

RX6 TX7

RX15 TX16

RX7 TX8

RX16

RX8

EG16



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 15-5 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 15-5 Types and functions of the EG16 interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX16

LC



1633



Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX16

LC



15.2.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one EG16 board. Table 15-6 shows the valid slots for the EG16 board. Table 15-6 Valid slots for the EG16 board Product

Valid slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the EG16 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the EG16 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the EG16 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-7 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-7 Mapping between the physical ports on the EG16 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16

1–16


1634



NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-5 shows the application model of the EG16 board. Table 15-8 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-5 Port diagram of the EG16 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

1(RX1/TX1) 2(RX2/TX2)

16(RX16/TX16)

PORT1 PORT2

PORT16

L2 swiching module

Table 15-8 Descriptions of the ports on the EG16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX16/TX16

Client-side ports.

PORT1-PORT16



1635



15.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried using the NMS.

Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 15-9 Basic Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-

Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

When the port is enabled, it indicates that the user uses the port and the port has services. When the port is disabled, it indicates that the port does not process services.

Default: Enabled

When no service is configured, it is recommended to disable the involved ports. Layer 2, Layer 3

Port Mode

Default: Layer 2

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port. l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when the Ethernet port carries port-based or QinQlink-based Ethernet services. l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when the port carries tunnel services.

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q, QinQ, Null Default: 802.1Q

Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l This parameter is set to Null when the port needs to transparently transmit packets. l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when the port needs to identify 802.1Q standard packets. l This parameter is set to QinQ when the port needs to identify QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1636



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l GE optical port: 1000M FullDuplex, Auto– Negotiation

Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board.

l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto–Negotiation l FE optical port: 100M FullDuplex, Auto– Negotiation

Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE Ensure that the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same, Otherwise, the services are not available.

Default: Auto– Negotiation Max Frame Length (bytes)

1518 to 9600

Logical Port Attribute

Optical Port, Electrical Port

Default: 1522

Default: Optical Port

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted. Displays the attributes of a logical port, which is set based on the attributes of the corresponding physical port.

Physical Port Attribute

No interface, Singlemode optical port, Multi-mode optical port, Electrical port

Displays the physical port attribute.

ARP Aging Time (min.)

1 to 1440

Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.

Default: 720

After the ARP aging time expires, the equipment automatically updates dynamic ARP entries to prevent incorrect address resolution. NOTE This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Running Status

-

This parameter is unavailable for the EG16 board.

Optical Module Status

In-Position, Not-inPosition

Displays the optical module status.

Laser Interface Status

On, Off

Specifies the on/off status of the laser.


1637



Field

Value

Description

Laser Transmission Distance

-

Displays the laser transmission distance.

Traffic Policing Status

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables traffic monitoring on the port.

Default: Disabled

When you need to monitor the traffic on a port, enable the traffic monitoring function to monitor the traffic on a port in the period specified by Traffic Policing Period. Traffic Policing Period (min.)

1 to 30

Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

Default: 15

Table 15-10 Flow Control of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode


Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port does not work in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disabled

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive the PAUSE frame. l Send Only: The port can only send the PAUSE frame. l Receive Only: The port can only receive the PAUSE frame. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1638



Field

Value

Description

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control


Default: Disabled

l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control: The port sends the PAUSE frame only, and cannot receive the PAUSE frame. l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port sends and receives the PAUSE frame. l Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control: Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control, which is determined in the autonegotiation process. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.

Table 15-11 Layer 2 Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag


Indicates the data packet processing mode. For details, see Table 15-12. This parameter is unavailable when you set Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to QinQ or Null.

Default VLAN ID

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1 to 4094

Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.

Default: 1

NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.


1639



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

Specifies the class of service (CoS) when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

Default: 0

0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded.

Table 15-12 Processing modes of data packets Tag

Processing Mode

Remarks

Data Packets with VLAN IDs

Data Packets Without VLAN IDs

Tag Aware

Transparently transmitting the data packets

Dropping the data packets

Parameters Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are not used.

Access


Adding the VLAN IDs that are set

-

Hybrid



-

Table 15-13 Layer 3 Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the port can identify and process MPLS labels. NOTE The parameter value Disabled is invalid. Therefore, this parameter can be set only to Enabled.

Specify IP Address

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Manually, Unspecified

When a port carries tunnel services, or when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this parameter to Manually. For other scenarios, set this parameter to Unspecified.


1640



Field

Value

Description

IP Address

-

Specifies the port IP address. This parameter is valid only when Specify IP Address is set to Manually. NOTE When setting the IP address for a port, ensure that the IP address is in a different network segment from the IP address of other service ports and the NE IP address, preventing service interruption from occurring or the NE from being unreachable by the NMS. For example, the IP address and subnet mask of an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0, respectively. This means that the NE IP address is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address and subnet mask of a service-present port on the NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively. This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1 network segment. In this situation, you cannot assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1 network segments to other ports on the NE. In other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to 129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

-

IP Mask

Specifies the port subnet mask. This parameter is valid only when Specify IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 15-14 Advanced Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-

Displays physical parameters of the port.

MAC Loopback


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.

Default: NonLoopback PHY Loopback


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MAC Address

-

Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate (kbit/s)

-

Displays the rate for transmitting data packets.


1641



Field

Value

Description

Receiving Rate (kbit/ s)

-

Displays the rate for receiving data packets.

Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables the loopback check function. When enabled, the function checks whether the loopback check packet transmitted from a port is received by the port itself, therefore determining whether there is a loop on the network. This parameter is usually used for fault location.

Default: Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled, the board automatically checks for loops on the link and reports an alarm if there is any. Enabled, Disabled

Specifies whether to block a port.

Default: Disabled

When Loopback Check and Loopback Port Block are both set to Enabled, the board automatically checks for loops on the link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is automatically blocked to clear the loop.

Egress PIR Bandwidth (kbit/s)

64 to 1000000

Specifies the egress PIR bandwidth.


Enabled, Disabled


Loopback Port Block

Default: Disabled

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (%)


If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

This parameter is unavailable for the EG16 board.


1642



Field

Value

Description

Optical Module Type

Unknown, TwoFiber Bidirectional

Displays whether an optical module is inserted and the module type of an inserted optical module. l Unknown: No optical module is inserted to the port. l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber bidirectional optical module is inserted to the port.

Synchronous Clock Enabled


Determines whether to enable clock synchronization. Set this parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When this parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.

15.2.9 EG16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54EG 16

N/A


NOTE

A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1643




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASELX-10 km

1000 BASELX-40 km

1000 BASEZX-80 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-20

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


1644



NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1645





l

Weight: 2 kg (4.4 lb.)




TN54EG16

93

101

15.3 EX2 EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

15.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the EX2 board is TN54.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Bo ard

8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 EX 2

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used.

Variants The TN54EX2 board has only one variant: TN54EX2. The TN54EX2 board variant is the board itself. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1646



15.3.2 Application As a packet service board, the EX2 board receives and transmits a maximum of two 10GE LAN services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for centralized cross-connections. When the EX2 board is used, the PND2 board must be used on the WDM side to implement the transmission of packet services on a WDM network. For the position of the EX2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 15-6. Figure 15-6 Position of the EX2 board in a WDM system Packets

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

RX1

TX1

TX1

RX1 16xGE/FE

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 IN2

RX1 TX1 2x 10 GE LAN RX2

OUT2

EX2


M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 TX1

OUT2

RX1

IN2

EX2

TX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

NOTE

The EX2 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate subrack.

15.3.3 Functions and Features The EX2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). Table 15-17 describes the service functions of the EX2 board, Table 15-18 provides the service specifications of the EX2 board, Table 15-19 describes the features supported by the EX2 board. Table 15-17 Service function of the EX2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Function

Description

Basic function

Receives and transmits two 10GE LAN services, processes the 10GE LAN packet services.

Working mode

Supports the full-duplex mode for ports.

Port flow control

Supports non-auto-negotiation for service rates. Comply with IEEE802.3x.



Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW


1647



Function E-Line

Description PW-based service models

Port<->PW CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW


Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Bridge type


Bridge learning mode

SVL

VSI tag type


Table 15-18 Service specifications of the EX2 board Service Parameter

Specifications

Supported service

2 x 10GE LAN 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s

Backplane bandwidth

20Gbit/s

MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518–9600 bytes. Supports Jumbo frames containing a maximum of 9600 bytes.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

VLAN

4094

QinQ

4096


1648



Service Parameter

Specifications

E-Line

8192

E-LAN

1024

MAC address



64 x 1024

Split horizon


PW

SSPW

16384 (max.)

MSPW

8192 (max.)

Unid irecti onal tunne l


Bidir ectio nal tunne l


Static tunne l

Table 15-19 Features supported by the EX2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Feature

Description

Protectio n scheme

MPLS-TP Tunnel APS


MPLS-TP PW APS


LAG


MC-LAG


MSTP



1649



Feature

Description

QoS

Diffserv


Traffic classification


Traffic policing


Congestion management


Congestion avoidance


Traffic shaping


IGMP Snoopin g

Not supported

Mainten ance

Ethernet OAM


Ethernet port OAM


MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

client-side optical ports

MAC Outloop MAC Inloop PHY Outloop PHY Inloop

Synchro nization

Inband DCN

Physical clock

Supports synchronous Ethernet.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Supported

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1650



15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board. Figure 15-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board

RX1

O/E

RX2 TX1 TX2


Packets

Client side


E/O


switch buffer module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the EX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EX2 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The client-side optical module receives two channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion.

2.

After receiving the electrical signals, the packet processing module decodes the signals, performs serial/parallel conversion, searches for routes and matches addresses for data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, and sends the data services to the transmission management module. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1651


l


3.

The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data services, segments the data services into packets for the switching network, and sends the packets to the switch buffer module.

4.

After buffering the packets, the switch buffer module sends the packets to the crossconnect board through the backplane.


The switch buffer module processes the packets from the cross-connect board and then sends the packets to the transmission management module.

2.

The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data services, buffers the data services, and finally sends the data services to the packet processing module.

3.

The packet processing module implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE LAN electrical signals.

4.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1TX2 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Packet processing module Searches routes, performs address matching, switches labels for data services, and implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services.

l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1652



15.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the EX2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-8 shows the front panel of the EX2 board. Figure 15-8 Front panel of the EX2 board EX2 STAT ACT PROG SRV L/A1 L/A2

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

EX2

Indicators Six indicators are present on the front panel: l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1653



l

Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A1) - dual-colored (green, yellow)

l

Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A2) – dual-colored (green, yellow)


Interfaces Table 15-20 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EX2 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC



15.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one EX2 board. Table 15-21 shows the valid slots for the EX2 board. Table 15-21 Valid slots for EX2 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-22 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1654



Table 15-22 Mapping between the physical ports on the EX2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-9 shows the application model of the EX2 board. Table 15-23 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-9 Port diagram of the EX2 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

1(RX1/TX1)

2(RX2/TX2)

PORT1

PORT2

L2 swiching module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1655



Table 15-23 Descriptions of the ports on the EX2 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1 to RX2/TX2

Client-side ports.

PORT1 to PORT2



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 15-24 Basic Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Name

-


Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

When the port is enabled, it indicates that the user uses the port and the port has services. When the port is disabled, it indicates that the port does not process services.

Default: Enabled

When no service is configured, it is recommended to disable the involved ports. Layer 2, Layer 3

Port Mode

Default: Layer 2

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port. l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment, carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively or QinQ Link. l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Encapsulation Type


Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1656



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

10G Full-Duplex LAN

Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board.

Default: 10G FullDuplex LAN

NOTE l When setting this parameter, ensure that the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.

Max Frame Length (bytes)

1518 to 9600


Optical Port, Electrical Port

Default: 1522

Default: Optical Port

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted. Specifies the logical port attribute. NOTE The EX2 board does not support electrical ports. Therefore, this parameter can be set only to Optical Port.


No interface, Singlemode optical port, Multi-mode optical port, Electrical port

Displays the physical port attribute.

ARP Aging Time (min.)

1 to 1440


Default: 720

NOTE This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Running Status

-

This parameter is unavailable for the EX2 board.


In-Position, Not-inPosition

Displays the optical module status.


On, Off

Specifies the on/off status of the laser.


-

Displays the laser transmission distance.



Enables or disables traffic monitoring on the port.

Traffic Policing Period (min.)

1 to 30

Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

Default: 15


1657



Table 15-25 Flow Control of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port does not work in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disabled

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive PAUSE frames. l Send Only: The port can only send PAUSE frames. l Receive Only: The port can only receive PAUSE frames. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.


-


Table 15-26 Layer2 Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag



Default VLAN ID


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1658



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest.

Default: 0


Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-

Table 15-28 Layer 3 Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Vaule

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the port can identify and process MPLS labels. NOTE The parameter value Disabled is invalid. Therefore, this parameter can be set only to Enabled.

Specify IP Address

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1659



Field

Vaule

Description

IP Address

-


-

IP Mask


Table 15-29 Advanced Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-

Displays physical parameters of the port.

MAC Loopback


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.

Default: NonLoopback PHY Loopback


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MAC Address

-



-



1660



Field

Value

Description


-


Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



Default: Disabled



64 to 10000000

Displays the egress PIR bandwidth.


Enabled, Disabled


Loopback Port Block

Default: Disabled




Network Cable Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



1661



Field

Value

Description

Optical Module Type

known, Two-Fiber Bidirectional

Displays whether an optical module is inserted and the module type of an inserted optical module. l Unknown: No optical module is inserted to the port. l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber bidirectional optical module is inserted to the port.



Determines whether to enable clock synchronization. Set this parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When this parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.

15.3.9 EX2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54EX 2

N/A

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km (SFP+)

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1662




Unit

Optical Module Type





Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7


dB

3

3.5

3


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)


1663



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASESR-0.3 km (SFP+)




dBm

-1

0.5

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26



l





TN54EX2

84

91

15.4 PND2 PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board

15.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the PND2 board is TN54.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1664



Bo ard

8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54P ND 2

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect board and TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used.

Variants The TN54PND2 board has only one variant: TN54PND2. The TN54PND2 board variant is the board itself.

15.4.2 Application The PND2 board is a packet service board. It converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/ s from the cross-connect board into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts the two 10GE LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with WDM system requirements. For the position of the PND2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 15-10. Figure 15-10 Position of the PND2 board in a WDM system Packets

16xGE/FE

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

TX1

RX1

RX1

TX1

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 IN2

RX1 TX1 2x 10 GE LAN RX2

OUT2

EX2


M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 OUT2

TX1

IN2

RX1

TX2

EX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

NOTE

The PND2 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate subrack.

15.4.3 Functions and Features The PND2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS), OTN interfaces. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1665



Table 15-31 describes the OTN functions and features of the PND2 board, Table 15-32 and Table 15-33 describe the ethernet service functions and specifications. Table 15-31 OTN functions and features of the PND2 board Functio n

Description

Basic function

Converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s from the cross-connect board into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts the two 10GE LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with WDM system requirements.

OTN function

l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.

WDM specificat ion


Tunable waveleng th function


ESC

Supported

PRBS function


FEC encoding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Alarm and performa nce event monitori ng


Loopbac k

Supported on the WDM side

Physical clock

Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported



1666


Functio n


Description

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

Electrical -layer ASON

Not supported

Table 15-32 Ethernet service functions of the PND2 board Function Protection scheme

QoS

Description MPLS-TP Tunnel APS


MPLS-TP PW APS


LAG


MC-LAG


MSTP


Diffserv


Traffic classificati on


Traffic policing


Congestio n manageme nt


Congestio n avoidance


Traffic shaping


IGMP Snooping

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Not supported


1667



Function Maintenan ce

Description Ethernet OAM


Ethernet port OAM


MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Synchronous Ethernet

Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Inband DCN

Not supported



Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW

PW-based service models

CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW


Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Bridge type



1668



Function

Description Bridge learning mode

SVL

VSI tag type


Table 15-33 provides the service specifications of the PND2 board. Table 15-33 Service specifications of the PND2 board Service Parameter

Specifications

MTU

Supports transmission of packets containing 1518-9600 bytes. Supports Jumbo frames containing a maximum of 9600 bytes.

VLAN

4094

QinQ

4096

E-Line

8192

E-LAN

1024

MAC address



64 x 1024

Split horizon


PW

SSPW

16384 (max.)

MSPW

8192 (max.)

Unid irect ional tunn el


Static tunne l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1669



Service Parameter

Specifications

Bidi recti onal tunn el


NOTE


15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The PND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, packet processing module, transmission management module, switch buffer module, OTN module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board. Figure 15-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board Packets Backplane(service cross-connection)

WDM-side

O/E switch buffer module



IN1 IN2

OTN module

E/O

OUT1 OUT2


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Power supply module

Required voltage

Fuse


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1670



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the PND2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the PND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

l


The switch buffer module processes the data services from the cross-connect board and then sends the data services to the transmission management module.

2.

The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data services, buffers the data services, and finally sends the data services to the packet processing module.

3.

The packet processing module implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE LAN electrical signals.

4.

After processing the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the OTN processing module outputs two OTU2 electrical signals.

5.

After performing the E/O conversion, the client-side optical module outputs two OTU2 optical signals through the OUT1 and OUT2 ports.


The WDM-side optical module receives the two OTU2 optical signals from the IN1 and IN2 ports, performs O/E conversion, and outputs two OTU2 electrical signals.

2.

After processing the two OTU2 electrical signals, the OTN processing module outputs two 10GE LAN electrical signals.

3.

After receiving the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the packet processing module performs decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and address matching for the data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, and then sends the matched data services to the transmission management module.

4.

The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data services, slices the data services into packets for the switching network, and sends the packets to the switch buffer module.

5.

After buffering the packets, the switch buffer module sends the packets to the crossconnect board through the backplane.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals.

l

OTN processing module The OTN processing module frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC-2 encoding and decoding.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Packet processing module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1671



Searches routes, performs address matching, switches labels for data services, and implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services. l


l


l


l


15.4.5 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-12 shows the front panel of the PND2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1672



Figure 15-12 Front panel of the PND2 PND2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

PND2



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 15-34 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 15-34 Types and functions of the PND2 interfaces

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

IN1T-IN2

LC



1673



Interface

Type

Function

OUT1-OUT2

LC



15.4.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one PND2 board. Table 15-35 shows the valid slots for the PND2 board. Table 15-35 Valid slots for the PND2 board Product

Valid slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the PND2 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the PND2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the PND2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-36 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-36 Mapping between the physical ports on the PND2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN1/OUT1


1674



Physical Port


IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-13 shows the application model of the PND2 board. Table 15-37 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-13 Port diagram of the PND2 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

Ethernet PORT1 services

OTU2

1(IN1/OUT1)

Ethernet PORT2 services

OTU2

2(IN2/OUT2)

NOTE

Port PORT1 is always bound to port IN1 or OUT1, and port PORT2 is always bound to port IN2 or OUT2. L2 swiching module Service processing module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1675



Table 15-37 Descriptions of the ports on the PND2 board Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1 to IN2/OUT2


PORT1 to PORT2

Internal logical ports of the L2 swiching module.



Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Enabled, Disabled Default: l WDM side: Enabled


l Client side: Disabled FEC Working State


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1676



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC


-


Actual Band Type

-



-

Used to query the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.


l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780 Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C


Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 15-39 Basic Attributes of PND2 Board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-


Enable Port

-

This parameter is unavailable for the PND2 board.


1677



Field

Value

Description

Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port.

Default: Layer 2

l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment, carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively or QinQ Link. l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels. Encapsulation Type


Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Working Mode

-


Max Frame Length (bytes)

1518 to 9600

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.


-



-


ARP Aging Time (min)

1 to 1440


Default: 720

NOTE This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Running Status

-



-



-



-


Default: 1522


1678



Field

Value

Description


-


Traffic Policing Period (min)

-


Table 15-40 Flow Control of PND2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-



-


Table 15-41 Layer2 Attributes of PND2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag



Default VLAN ID


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest.


1679




Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-

Table 15-43 Layer 3 Attributes of PND2 Board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Vaule

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the port can identify and process MPLS labels.

Specify IP Address




1680



Field

Vaule

Description

IP Address

-


-

IP Mask


Table 15-44 Advanced Attributes of PND2 Board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


MAC Loopback

-


PHY Loopback

-


MAC Address

-



-



-



1681



Field

Value

Description

Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



Default: Disabled



64 to 10000000

Displays the egress PIR bandwidth.


Enabled, Disabled


Loopback Port Block

Default: Disabled




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Network Cable Mode

-


Optical Module Type

-



1682



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled

Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required.

Default: Disabled

When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.

15.4.9 PND2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54PN D2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 15-45 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm


2

1683



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm


2

1684



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1685



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1686



Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN54PND2

100

108


1687


16 PID Board

16

PID Board

About This Chapter 16.1 Overview PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/ demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and flexible access of various services. 16.2 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz 16.3 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 16.4 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board 16.5 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary 16.6 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 16.7 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board 16.8 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20–channel extended

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1688


16 PID Board

16.1 Overview PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/ demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and flexible access of various services.

Positions of PID Boards in a WDM System Figure 16-1 shows the positions of PID boards in a WDM system. Figure 16-1 Positions of PID boards in a WDM system Max.: 20 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals ODUk Client-side services

OTUk optical signals in other directions

Tributary board ODUk

ODUk

ODUk

TN55 ODUk NPO2 OTUk + TN54 PQ2

Tributary board

Line /PID board

TN54 ODUk ENQ2

TN55 NPO2E + TN54 PQ2

WDM-side ODF

Client-side services

ODUk

200G PID group

TN54 PQ2 : subboard

l

NPO2E: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board, and OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2 board, and finally outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

l

NPO2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board, and outputs 12 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Or outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals to the NPO2E board which outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

l

ENQ2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, converts the signals into four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and finally outputs the signals to the NPO2 or NPO2E board for processing.

l

PQ2 subboard: processes ODUk signals on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board after being installed on the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1689


16 PID Board

Main Functions of PID Boards Table 16-1 lists the main functions of PID boards. Table 16-1 Main functions of PID boards Board

Signal Input

Signal Output

TN55NPO2Ea

64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from other line boards or PID boards

20 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals

4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2 board TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2a


12 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals

4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board TN54ENQ2


4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical boards to the NPO2E or NPO2 board

a: The access capability listed in the table is for the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board equipped with the TN54PQ2 subboard. The TN54PQ2 subboard helps the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board to provide an extra capability of conversion between 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2 and 4 x OTU2, and conversion between 4 x ODU2e and 4 x OTU2e. Without the TN54PQ2 subboard, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board can process only 32 x ODU0, 16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. NOTE The TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board supports a maximum of 80 km DCM-free transmission while the TN54NPO2 board must be equipped with the DCM.

16.2 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

16.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.



1690


16 PID Board

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1B MD 4

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

16.2.2 Application The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-2 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system. Figure 16-2 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system 4

4

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

PTQX

OA

4

BMD4

OA

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

OA

BMD4

4

PTQX 4

4

OA

PTQX

4

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

16.2.3 Functions and Features The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 16-2 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1691


16 PID Board

Table 16-2 Functions and features of the BMD4 Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical signals. Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.

In-service detection and monitoring of the spectrum

Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1692


16 PID Board

Figure 16-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4

Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04

IN

Interleaver

R01 R02 R03 R04

Splitter Coupler

OUT MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1693


16 PID Board

wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l

Control and communication module – Controls board operations. – Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. – Communicates with the SCC board.

l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

16.2.5 Front Panel There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD4.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-4 shows the front panel of the BMD4.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1694


16 PID Board

Figure 16-4 Front panel of the BMD4

BMD4 STAT

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


MON OUT IN T01 R01 T02 R02 T03 R03 T04 R04

BMD4

Indicators One indicator is present on the front panel: l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green

For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1695


16 PID Board

Interfaces Table 16-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 16-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4 Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

T01/R01

LC

Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to 196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.

T02/R02

LC


T03/R03

LC

Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to 193.60 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.

T04/R04

LC


Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

16.2.6 Valid Slots The BMD4 occupies one slot. Table 16-4 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1696


16 PID Board

Table 16-4 Valid slots for the BMD4 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU18

16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4 The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 16-5 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4. Table 16-5 Characteristic code of the BMD4 Code

Indication

Description

The first character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band. The value L represents the L band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.

16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4 Each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths. Table 16-6 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1697


16 PID Board

Table 16-6 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths Interface

Number of Wavelengths

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T01/R01

12

193.8

1546.917

194.0

1545.322

194.2

1543.730

194.4

1542.142

194.6

1540.557

194.8

1538.976

195.0

1537.397

195.2

1535.822

195.4

1534.250

195.6

1532.681

195.8

1531.116

196.0

1529.553

193.7

1547.715

193.9

1546.119

194.1

1544.526

194.3

1542.936

194.5

1541.349

194.7

1539.766

194.9

1538.186

195.1

1536.609

195.3

1535.036

195.5

1533.465

195.7

1531.898

195.9

1530.334

192.2

1559.794

192.4

1558.173

192.6

1556.555

192.8

1554.940

193.0

1553.329

193.2

1551.721

193.4

1550.116

193.6

1548.515

T02/R02

T03/R03

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

12

8


1698


16 PID Board

Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T04/R04

8

192.1

1560.606

192.3

1558.983

192.5

1557.363

192.7

1555.747

192.9

1554.134

193.1

1552.524

193.3

1550.918

193.5

1549.315

16.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 16-7. Table 16-7 BMD4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Configure Band

C Default: C

Used to configure type of the working band of a board.

Actual Band

-

Queries the actual working band of the board.

Actual Working Band Parity

-

Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board.

Configure Working Band Parity

All, Odd, Even

Used to select the desired parity of the working band.

Default: All

16.2.10 BMD4 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1699


16 PID Board

Optical Specifications Table 16-8 Optical specifications of the BMD4 Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 - 1561

T0x/R0x channel spacinga

GHz

200

IN/OUT channel spacing

GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

≤5

dB

≤6

dB

≥ 25

IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT IN->T01/T03@T02/T04

Isolationb

IN->T02/T04@T01/T03 IN->T01@T03

≥ 13

IN->T03@T01 IN->T02@T04 IN->T04@T02 R01->OUT@R03 R03->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R04 R04->OUT@R02 Optical return loss

dB

≥ 40

Directivity

dB

≥ 45

PMD

dB

≤ 0.5

Polarization dependent loss

dB

≤ 0.5

Input optical power range

dB

≤ 23

a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports. b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1700


16 PID Board



l





TN11BMD4

0.2

0.3

16.3 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz

16.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1B MD 8

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

16.3.2 Application The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-5 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1701


16 PID Board

Figure 16-5 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system 4

4

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

PTQX

OA

8

BMD8

OA

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

OA

BMD8

4

PTQX 4

8

OA

PTQX

4

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

16.3.3 Functions and Features The BMD8 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 16-9 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8. Table 16-9 Functions and features of the BMD8 Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and demultiplexes optical signals. Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of oddwavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1702


16 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description

Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum

Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

16.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BMD8 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8. Figure 16-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8

Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08

Interleaver

R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08

IN

Splitter OUT MON

Interleaver

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


1703


16 PID Board

Signal Flow The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the eight channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01 to T08 optical interfaces. The eight channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01 to R08 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the eight channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. that is, four channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l


l


16.3.5 Front Panel There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD8.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-7 shows the front panel of the BMD8.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1704


16 PID Board

Figure 16-7 Front panel of the BMD8

BMD8 STAT



OUT IN

MON

T05

T01

R05

R01

T06

T02

R06

R02

T07

T03

R07

R03

T08

T04

R08

R04

BMD8





1705


16 PID Board

Interfaces Table 16-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 16-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8 Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

T01/R01

LC


T02/R02

LC


T03/R03

LC


T04/R04

LC


T05/R05

LC


T06/R06

LC


T07/R07

LC


T08/R08

LC


Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1706


16 PID Board

16.3.6 Valid Slots The BMD8 occupies two slots. Table 16-11 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board. Table 16-11 Valid slots for the BMD8 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

16.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8 The characteristic code of the BMD8 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 16-12 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8. Table 16-12 Characteristic code of the BMD8 Code

Indication

Description

The first character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.

16.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8 Each optical interface on the BMD8 accesses certain fixed wavelengths. Table 16-13 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1707


16 PID Board

Table 16-13 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T01/R01

12

193.85

1546.52

194.05

1544.92

194.25

1543.33

194.45

1541.75

194.65

1540.16

194.85

1538.58

195.05

1537.00

195.25

1535.43

195.45

1533.86

195.65

1532.29

195.85

1530.72

196.05

1529.16

193.8

1546.917

194.0

1545.322

194.2

1543.730

194.4

1542.142

194.6

1540.557

194.8

1538.976

195.0

1537.397

195.2

1535.822

195.4

1534.250

195.6

1532.681

195.8

1531.116

196.0

1529.553

T02/R02

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

12


1708


Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T03/R03

12

193.75

1547.32

193.95

1545.72

194.15

1544.13

194.35

1542.54

194.55

1540.95

194.75

1539.37

194.95

1537.79

195.15

1536.22

195.35

1534.64

195.55

1533.07

195.75

1531.51

195.95

1529.94

193.7

1547.715

193.9

1546.119

194.1

1544.526

194.3

1542.936

194.5

1541.349

194.7

1539.766

194.9

1538.186

195.1

1536.609

195.3

1535.036

195.5

1533.465

195.7

1531.898

195.9

1530.334

192.25

1559.39

192.45

1557.77

192.65

1556.15

192.85

1554.54

193.05

1552.93

193.25

1551.32

193.45

1549.72

193.65

1548.11

T04/R04

T05/R05

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

16 PID Board

12

8


1709


16 PID Board

Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T06/R06

8

192.2

1559.794

192.4

1558.173

192.6

1556.555

192.8

1554.940

193.0

1553.329

193.2

1551.721

193.4

1550.116

193.6

1548.515

192.15

1560.20

192.35

1558.58

192.55

1556.96

192.75

1555.34

192.95

1553.73

193.15

1552.12

193.35

1550.52

193.55

1548.91

192.1

1560.606

192.3

1558.983

192.5

1557.363

192.7

1555.747

192.9

1554.134

193.1

1552.524

193.3

1550.918

193.5

1549.315

8

T07/R07

8

T08/R08

16.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 16-14. Table 16-14 BMD8 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



1710


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


-

Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

C

Configure Band


Default: C Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even

Used to select the desired parity of the working band.

Default: All

16.3.10 BMD8 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 16-15 Optical specifications of the BMD8 Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 - 1561

T0x/R0x channel spacinga

GHz

200

IN/OUT channel spacing

GHz

50

Insertion loss

dB

≤8

IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 IN-T05 IN-T06 IN-T07 IN-T08

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1711


16 PID Board

Item R01-OUT

Unit

Value

dB

≤9.5

dB

≥25

R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT R05-OUT R06-OUT R07-OUT R08-OUT IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/ T03/T07/T04/T08

Isolationb

IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T04/T08 IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T03/T07 IN->T01@T05

≥13

IN->T05@T01 IN->T02@T06 IN->T06@T02 IN->T03@T07 IN->T07@T03 IN->T04@T08 IN->T08@T04 R01->OUT@R05 R05->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R06 R06->OUT@R02 R03->OUT@R07 R07->OUT@R03 R04->OUT@R08 R08->OUT@R04

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Optical return loss

dB

≥40

Directivity

dB

≥45

PMD

dB

≤0.5


dB

≤0.5


dB

≤23


1712


16 PID Board

Item

Unit

Value

a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports. b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.



l





TN11BMD8

0.2

0.3

16.4 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board

16.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2EL QX

N

N

N

N

Y

N


1713


16 PID Board

16.4.2 Application The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar. Figure 16-8 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system. Figure 16-8 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system 4

4

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

OA PTQX

OA

BMD4

BMD4

OA

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

ELQX

OA

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e 4

16.4.3 Functions and Features The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Table 16-16 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX. Table 16-16 Functions and features of the ELQX Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

ELQX converts signals as follows: l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.



OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G. 709, and GDPS. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM, PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 .

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1714


16 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported.

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC encoding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.


l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)


l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex

l Supports the ODUk SNCP.

l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex


1715


16 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description



IEEE 802.3ae


ITU-T G.805



16.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1716


16 PID Board

Signal Flow Figure 16-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3

4×ODU2/4×ODU2e /16×ODU1


O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4


4×OTU2/4×OTU2e





Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals: l


l


l


l


l


l


In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane. The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1717


16 PID Board

encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board through the backplane. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1 signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. – Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. NOTE

The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.

– SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l

Control and communication module – Controls board operations.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1718


16 PID Board

– Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the SCC board. l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

16.4.5 Front Panel There are four indicators on the front panel of the ELQX.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-10 shows the front panel of the ELQX. Figure 16-10 Front panel of the ELQX

ELQX STAT ACT PROG SRV


ELQX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1719


16 PID Board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 16-17 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-17 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces Interface

Type

Function

TX1 - TX4

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1 - RX4

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment.


16.4.6 Valid Slots The ELQX occupies one slot. Table 16-18 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board. Table 16-18 Valid slots for the ELQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14



1720


16 PID Board

Display of Physical Ports Table 16-19 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-19 Mapping between the physical ports on the ELQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-11, Figure 16-12 and Figure 16-13 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board. Table 16-20 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services) Client side 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)




72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1





Service Processing Module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1721


16 PID Board

Figure 16-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections) Backplane



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1


Crossconnect module




Figure 16-13 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections) Backplane

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1



Table 16-20 Description of NM ports of the ELQX Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces

ClientLP1-ClientLP4


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4.

ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4


16.4.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1722


16 PID Board

If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as shown by (1) in Figure 16-14.

l

If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 16-15.

l

If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 16-14.

l

The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-16.

Figure 16-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level) Client side

Cross-connection module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

2


Other board





1





Cross-connection module

ELQX board

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1 2

1723


16 PID Board

Figure 16-15 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level) Cross-connect module

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

1 Other board

Client side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 Cross-connect module

ELQX board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1

1724


16 PID Board

Figure 16-16 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX Cross-connect module




72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1


1


ELQX board

WDM side 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1






136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 2

139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 PTQX baord









74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module

ELQX board

Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

1 2

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

16.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 16-21.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1725


16 PID Board

Table 16-21 ELQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Queries or sets the path Loopback.


10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU-2, OTU2– 2E, STM-64, OC-192



Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)






Enabled, Disabled Default: l Client side: Enabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1726


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled



Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-


Actual Band Type

-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100



C, CWDM Default: C



The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1727


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Line Rate


The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.16 Line Rate for more information.

Default: Standard Mode SD Trigger Condition


PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

16.4.10 ELQX Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN12EL QX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1728


16 PID Board

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30


1729


Parameter

16 PID Board

Unit



-




G.691-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1730


16 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN12ELQX

86.2

99.1


1731


16 PID Board

16.5 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary

16.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2PT QX

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Type One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 16-24. Table 16-25 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 16-24 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Serial No.

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left)

Wavelength No. of the PTQX

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right)

PTQX Type

1

33, 37, 41, 45

1, 5, 9, 13

17, 21, 25, 29

TN12PTQX01

2

34, 38, 42, 46

2, 6, 10, 14

18, 22, 26, 30

TN12PTQX02

3

35, 39, 43, 47

3, 7, 11, 15

19, 23, 27, 31

TN12PTQX03

4

36, 40, 44, 48

4, 8, 12, 16

20, 24, 28, 32

TN12PTQX04

5

-

49, 53, 57, 61

65, 69, 73, 77

TN12PTQX05

6

-

50, 54, 58, 62

66, 70, 74, 78

TN12PTQX06

7

-

51, 55, 59, 63

67, 71, 75, 79

TN12PTQX07

8

-

52, 56, 60, 64

68, 72, 76, 80

TN12PTQX08


1732


Serial No.

16 PID Board

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left)

Wavelength No. of the PTQX

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right)

PTQX Type

NOTE For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.

Table 16-25 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73


1733


16 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61

16.5.2 Application The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16 ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar. For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 16-17. Figure 16-17 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system 4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

4

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

OA PTQX

OA

BMD4

BMD4

OA

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

ELQX

OA


10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e 4

1734


16 PID Board

16.5.3 Functions and Features The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Table 16-26 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX. Table 16-26 Functions and features of the PTQX Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

PTQX converts signals as follows: l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->4 x OTU2 l 4 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e<->4 x OTU2e l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2 l 4 x ODU2e<->OTU2e l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.



OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G. 709, and GDPS. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports SM functions for OTU2 .

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test

Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

LPT function


FEC encoding


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1735


16 PID Board


Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ALS function


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.


l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)


l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex




l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


1736


16 PID Board




16.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 16-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1737


16 PID Board

Figure 16-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3

4xODU2/4xODU2e /16xODU1


O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4



8×OTU2/8×OTU2e


4 OTN processing module

4

OUT

PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals: l


l


l


l


l


l


In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backbone. The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/ ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1738


16 PID Board

are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC/AFEC encoding. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module. The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals. Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs four channels of electrical signals. The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. – Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12 channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1739


16 PID Board

Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. l


l


16.5.5 Front Panel There are four indicators and laser level label on the front panel of the PTQX.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-19 shows the front panel of the PTQX.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1740


16 PID Board

Figure 16-19 Front panel of the PTQX

PTQX STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION

CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3

OUT IN

TX4 RX4

PTQX



1741


16 PID Board

l


l


l



Interfaces Table 16-27 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-27 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the line signal.

OUT

LC

Transmits the line signal.

TX1-TX4

LC

Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX4

LC

Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.


16.5.6 Valid Slots The PTQX occupies two slots. Table 16-28 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board. Table 16-28 Valid slots for the PTQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU3, IU7, IU13

NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is IU3.

16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1742


16 PID Board

The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-29. Table 16-29 Characteristic code for the PTQX Code

Description

Description

The first three digits

The frequency of optical signal

The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last three digits


The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385. l

"605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 16-30 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-30 Mapping between the physical ports on the PTQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1743


16 PID Board

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-20, Figure 16-21, and Figure 16-22 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table 16-31 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-20 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services) Client side 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)












136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1



WDM side


1(IN/OUT)

139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 Service processing module


Figure 16-21 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections) Backplane

WDM side




134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


1(IN/OUT)

137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 Cross-connect module

140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 Cross-connect module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1744


16 PID Board

Figure 16-22 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections) Backplane









WDM side

137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 Cross-connect module


1(IN/OUT)



Table 16-31 Description of ports on the PTQX Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP1-ClientLP4


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4


OCHLP1-OCHLP12


IN/OUT

This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

16.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown by (1) in Figure 16-23. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1745


16 PID Board

l

If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 16-24.

l

If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 16-23.

l

The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-25.

Figure 16-23 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

2


Other board except ELQX


Client side

WDM side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1




1





PTQX board

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1 2

1746


16 PID Board

Figure 16-24 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level) Cross-connect module

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

Other board except ELQX

1


54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 54(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 Cross-connect module

PTQX board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1

1747


16 PID Board

Figure 16-25 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1








ELQX board


WDM side

1

144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1





137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 2


PTQX board










ELQX board

Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

1

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

2

16.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 16-32.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1748


16 PID Board

Table 16-32 PTQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status









10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64



Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)






Enabled, Disabled Default: l Client side: Enabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1749


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled



Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

FEC Working State


FEC Mode



Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-


Actual Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100



C, CWDM Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




1750


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



Line Rate

Default: Standard Mode SD Trigger Condition


PRBS Test Status


NULL Mapping Status


The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.16 Line Rate for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

16.5.11 PTQX Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1751


16 PID Board

Bo ard





TN 12P TQ X

N/A


200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


1752


Parameter

16 PID Board

Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


nm

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


1753


Parameter

16 PID Board

Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


1754


16 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 16-35 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


Value 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

-

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05

Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength)

dBm

+1

Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength)

dBm

-7


dB

6.5


GHz

±5


nm

0.8


dB

30


ps/nm

200


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL

dBm

-10.5


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1755


16 PID Board



l

Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)




TN12PTQX

93.6

107.6

16.6 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

16.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 4EN Q2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

16.6.2 Application The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1756


16 PID Board

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the ENQ2 Board Figure 16-26 200G system built with the ENQ2 board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board

32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

TN54 ENQ2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e


Tributary board

OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E

TN55 NPO2E

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2

Client-side service


OBU 1P1

Tributary board


TN55 NPO2

8xOTU2/ OTU2e

8xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN55 NPO2


Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the ENQ2 Board Figure 16-27 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN55NPO2)

Clientside service

Tributary board



OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2

Clientside service

Tributary board


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

TN54 ENQ2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

Tributary board

Clientside service

TN55 NPO2 OBU 1P1

4xOTU2/ OTU2e


TN54 ENQ2


Tributary board

Clientside service

1757


16 PID Board

Figure 16-28 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2) 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e Tributary board


Clientside service

OA

OA

TN54 NPO2

Clientside service

TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

TN54 NPO2 OA


Clientside service

OA

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2

32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e Tributary board

Clientside service

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

16.6.3 Functions and Features The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-36 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2. Table 16-36 Functions and features of the ENQ2 Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

ENQ2 converts signals as follows: 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/ ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1758


16 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description


Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

WDM specification


ESC function

supported

PRBS test


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding




Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Inloop Outloop

Channel Loopback

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Inloop Outloop


Supported NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.

Supported NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.

1759


Function or Feature

16 PID Board




IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1760


Function or Feature

16 PID Board



16.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1761


16 PID Board

Signal Flow Figure 16-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2 32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e


4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e




Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side of the NPO2/NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals. The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1762


16 PID Board

Module Function l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. NOTE

The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2/ NPO2E board.

– Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2/NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l

Control and communication module – Controls board operations. – Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the SCC board.

l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

16.6.5 Front Panel There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-30 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1763


16 PID Board

Figure 16-30 Front panel of the ENQ2

ENQ2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

ENQ2



l


l


l



16.6.6 Valid Slots The ENQ2 occupies one slot. Table 16-37 shows the valid slots for the ENQ2 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1764


16 PID Board

Table 16-37 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15, IU19, IU23, IU27, IU31, IU35, IU39, IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65


IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33


IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

l

Figure 16-31 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-38 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

l

Figure 16-32 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table 16-39 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. NOTE

A TN54ENQ2 board can work in only one mode at a time.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1765


16 PID Board

Figure 16-31 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode) Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Backplane 32 x ODU0

4 x ODU2/ODU2e

16 x ODU1


51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1







74 (ODU2LP4/ ODU2 ODU2LP4)-1

NOTE

There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path



1766


16 PID Board

Table 16-38 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode) Port Name

Description

ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4


ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4


Figure 16-32 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Backplane

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12) ODU2:1

4xODU2/ 4XODU2e

ODU2:1

Other tributary board/line board/PID board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4

NPO2/ NPO2E

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 32xODU0

ODU2:1 ODU1:4

ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1


ODU0:2

NOTE

Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. Cross-connect module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

ODU1 mapping path


1767


16 PID Board Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

Table 16-39 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)-ODU0:(1–2)


1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)


1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane.

1(IN/OUT)



The side.


l

The


The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1768


16 PID Board

Figure 16-33 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level) Client side


Other board a

1



WDM side


ENQ2 board




164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2





The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2

Other board a


Other board b


Other board c




1769


16 PID Board

Figure 16-34 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU1 level) Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3ClientLP3)-1

Other board a

1



WDM side


ENQ2 board

2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


WDM side






Other board a


Other board b


Other board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1770


16 PID Board

ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 16-35 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-35 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU2 level) Client side


Other board a

1




ENQ2 board


2









Other board a


Other board b


Other board c


Cross-Connections Between the NPO2/NPO2E and ENQ2 Figure 16-36 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1771


16 PID Board

Figure 16-37 shows the cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2. Figure 16-38 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2. Figure 16-36 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

ENQ2 board

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1

compatible mode



WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1

TN55NPO2 board

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1

The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1772


16 PID Board

Figure 16-37 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 WDM side


ENQ2 board （compatible mode）


Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1

TN54NPO2 board （compatible mode）



Figure 16-38 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2 WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

ENQ2 board

1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1773


16 PID Board

16.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Table 16-40 ENQ2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Loopback



Default: Non-Loopback Service Mode

Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

FEC Working State


FEC Mode



Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled

Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Used to configure the line rate of OTN.



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1774


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

16.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l





TN54ENQ2

40

44

16.7 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board

16.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1775


16 PID Board

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 4NP O2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN5 5NP O2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N


Function: The TN54NPO2 board must work with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2S board supports 40 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2L board supports 80 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module.

l

Appearance: For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 16.7.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: For the specification of each version, see 16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN54NPO2

TN55NPO2

The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the TN54NPO2. NOTE When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2 , configure a TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.

TN55NPO2

None

-

Type Table 16-41 lists the wavelength numbers and the types of NPO2. Table 16-41 Wavelength assignment table of NPO2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Type of NPO2

Wavelength No. of NPO2

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01

1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29


1776


16 PID Board

Type of NPO2

Wavelength No. of NPO2

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A

2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03

3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B

4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

TN54NPO205

49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77

TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06

50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

TN54NPO207

51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79

TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08

52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-42, Table 16-43, Table 16-44. Table 16-45 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 16-42 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No.

Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E

Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2

Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2

1

TN55NPO2ES02/ TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

2

TN55NPO2ES04/ TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

Table 16-43 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Wavelength Combination No.

Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2

Wavelength No. of TN54ENQ2

1

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29

33, 37, 41, 45


1777


16 PID Board

Wavelength Combination No.

Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2

Wavelength No. of TN54ENQ2

2

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

3

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

35, 39, 43, 47

4

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

Table 16-44 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system) Wavelength Combination No.

Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2

1

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29

2

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

3

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

4

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

5

TN54NPO205: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77

6

TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

7

TN54NPO207: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79

8

TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

NOTE

The ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the NPO2 board. Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 16.7.5 Front Panel. Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards according to the network planning principles.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1778


16 PID Board


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15


1779


16 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61

16.7.2 Application The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. The NPO2 board receives four OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the NPO2 board multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e signals into one optical signal for output. The reverse process is similar.

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 16-39 200G system built with the NPO2 board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

Tributary board



TO

TN54 ENQ2


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN55 NPO2

IN

TO2

OUT RO2

RI

TN55 NPO2E

TN55 NPO2E RI

8xOTU2/ OTU2e

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TO

8xOTU2/ OTU2e TO2 IN RO2 OUT


TN54 ENQ2

TN55 NPO2

Client-side service



Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

1780


16 PID Board

Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 16-40 120G system built with the TN55NPO2 board

Clientside service

Tributary board


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e OUT

IN

OBU 1P1

TN55 NPO2

Clientside service

Tributary board


TN55 NPO2 IN

TN54 ENQ2

Clientside service

Tributary board

OUT

OBU 1P1

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Tributary board

Clientside service

Figure 16-41 120G system built with the TN54NPO2 board

Clientside service


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board OUT

OA TN54 NPO2

Clientside service

IN

OA


TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

OA

OA

IN

OUT

Clientside service

TN54 NPO2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Clientside service

Application Scenario 3: 80G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 16-42 80G system built with the TN55NPO2 board

Clientside service

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


OUT

TN55 NPO2

IN

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1


IN

OUT

TN55 NPO2


Tributary board

Clientside service

1781


16 PID Board

Figure 16-43 80G system built with the TN54NPO2 board

Client-side service

Tributary board


OUT

TN54 NPO2

IN

IN

OA

OA

OA

OA

OUT

TN54 NPO2


Tributary board

Client-side service

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

16.7.3 Functions and Features The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-46 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1782


16 PID Board

Table 16-46 Functions and features of the NPO2 Functi on and Featur e

Description

Basic functio n

l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2 l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITUT G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.

Crossconnec t capabil ities

Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the crossconnect board.

OTN functio n

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITUT G.709. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM specifi cation


ESC functio n

Supported

PRBS test functio n


LPT functio n

Not supported


1783


16 PID Board

Functi on and Featur e

Description

FEC encodi ng


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Alarms and perfor mance events monito ring


IEEE 1588v 2

The TN55NPO2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

Physic al clock

The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Optical -layer ASON

Not supported

Electri callayer ASON

Only the TN55NPO2 board supports this function.

Protect ion schem e


Loopb ack

Board

WDM Side




TN54N P02

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported


NOTE For the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2 boards (in compatible mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal can be transmitted through any of the eight optical ports on the board. For the TN55NPO2 board (in standard mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.


1784



16 PID Board

Description

TN55N PO2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.

Supported


Supported

Supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.

1785


16 PID Board


Description

Protoc ols or standar ds compli ance

Protocol s or standard s for transpar ent transmis sion (nonperform ance monitori ng)

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FCFS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1786



16 PID Board

Description

Protocol s or standard s for service processi ng (perform ance monitori ng)


16.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module. Figure 16-44 and Figure 16-45 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1787


16 PID Board

Figure 16-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NPO2 64XODU0/32XODU1/ 8XODU2/8XODU2e


4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e

8 Cross-connect module

1588


8

OUT

PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1788


16 PID Board

Figure 16-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55NPO2 64XODU0/32XODU1 /8XODU2/8XODU2e

Cross-connect module 1588


4XOTU2/4XOTU2e

PQ2 service processing sub-board

8 OTN processing module

8

OUT PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1789


16 PID Board

The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Module Function l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. – PQ2 service processing board Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2 board. NOTE

After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.

l

1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1790


16 PID Board

16.7.5 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-46 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2. Figure 16-47 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1791


16 PID Board

Figure 16-46 Front panel of the TN54NPO2

NPO2 STAT ACT PROG SRV


OUT

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

IN

NPO2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1792


16 PID Board

Figure 16-47 Front panel of the TN55NPO2

NPO2

NPO2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT



CAUTION



OUT

IN

OUT

IN

PQ2 STAT

NPO2

NPO2

PQ2 installed

PQ2 not installed

NOTE

The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 16.7.1 Version Description.

Indicators There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1793


16 PID Board

l


l


l


l


There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel. l


For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 16-47 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-47 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



16.7.6 Valid Slots The NPO2 occupies two slots. Table 16-48 shows the valid slots for the NPO2 board. Table 16-48 Valid slots for the NPO2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots








1794


16 PID Board

NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is IU3.

16.7.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2 The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-49. Table 16-49 Characteristic code for the NPO2 Code

Description

Description







For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 16-50 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-50 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NMS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1


1795


16 PID Board

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

l

Figure 16-48 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-51 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

l

Figure 16-49 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table 16-52 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

Figure 16-48 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode) Other tributary board/line board/PID board


Other tributary board/line board/PID board Backplane

64 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

8 x ODU2/ODU2e

32 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1





133(OCHLP1 /OCHLP1)-1

IN/OUT


78 (ODU2LP8/ ODU2 ODU2LP8)-1 58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-4

140(OCHLP8 /OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9 /OCHLP9)-1 144(OCHLP12 /OCHLP12)-1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


1796


16 PID Board Service processing module


ODU0 mapping path


NOTE

There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.

Table 16-51 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Port Name

Description

ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8


ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8


OCHLP1-OCHLP12


IN/OUT

This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.


1797


16 PID Board

Figure 16-49 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)

12xODU2/ 12XODU2e


OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12


ODU1:4 48xODU1 ODU1:1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

ODU0:1

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1

ODU0:2 ODU0:1

ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

ODU1:4

ODU0:2

96xODU0


ODU1:1

ODU1:4

ODU0:2

NOTE

The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path




1798


16 PID Board

ODU0 mapping path Table 16-52 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description



1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)



Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane.

1(IN/OUT)



The side.


l

The


The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1799


16 PID Board

Figure 16-50 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU0 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

1

Other board a





1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

TN55NPO2 board


standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1

2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

Other board b (compatible mode) 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2



Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2

Other board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1800


16 PID Board

Figure 16-51 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN54NPO2 (ODU0 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

1

Other board b




TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)





Other board c (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2



ODU1 Cross-Connections Figure 16-52 and Figure 16-53 show the created ODU1 cross-connections. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1801


16 PID Board

Figure 16-52 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

1


Other board a




TN55NPO2 board

compatible mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

2

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4






The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2

Other board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1802


16 PID Board

Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Figure 16-53 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN54NPO2 (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

1


Other board a



TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)

2







The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1803


16 PID Board

ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 16-54 and Figure 16-55 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-54 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

1

Other board a





TN55NPO2 board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1

2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1







Other board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1804


16 PID Board

Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Figure 16-55 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN54NPO2 (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

1

Other board a




TN54NPO2 board

2

(compatible mode)





Other board b (compatible mode) Other board c (standard mode)


Other board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1805


16 PID Board

Cross-Connections Between the NPO2 and ENQ2 Figure 16-56 and Figure 16-57 show the created cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2. Figure 16-56 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2 WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

ENQ2 board

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1

compatible mode



WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1

TN55NPO2 board

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1806


16 PID Board

Figure 16-57 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2 WDM side


ENQ2 board （compatible mode）


Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1

TN54NPO2 board （compatible mode）



Example of Service Cross-Connections Figure 16-58 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. Figure 16-58 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board ODU0

TOM TOM

ODU0 ODU1 ODU1

NS2

IN/OUT

NPO2

ODU1 ODU2/

TDX/ ODU2e ND2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1807


16 PID Board

16.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 16-53. Table 16-53 NPO2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Queries or sets path Loopback.


Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the service mode for a board. See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.


1808


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0



C, CWDM Default: C

NOTE Only C band is supported.

See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. NOTE Only C band is supported.


Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.16 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.


1809


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54NP O2

200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

N/A

TN55NP O2

800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km)

N/A


NOTE


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 16-54 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km)


NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

THz

192.10 to 196.05


1810


16 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dBm

+2

+2

+2


dBm

-4

-6.5

-6.5


dB

6

6

6.5


GHz

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.8

0.8

0.8


dB

30

30

30


ps/nm

800

1500

200


-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650


dBm

TN55NPO2S01 to TN55NPO2S04: -13.5

-12

-12

3

0

TN55NPO2S06, TN55NPO2S08: -15 TN55NPO2S0A, TN55NPO2S0B: -15


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dBm

3


1811


16 PID Board

Parameter

Unit


dB




-27

-27

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN54NPO2: l


l


TN55NPO2: l


l


TN54PQ2: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm (2.69 in.)

l





TN54NPO2

134

147

TN55NPO2

143

157.3

TN54PQ2

1.1

1.2

16.8 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20–channel extended

16.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NPO2E board is TN55.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1812


16 PID Board


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 5NP O2E

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Type The TN55NPO2E board has four types: TN55NPO2ES02, TN55NPO2ES04, TN55NPO2EL02, and TN55NPO2EL04, which process different wavelengths. l

The TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, and 30.

l

The TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32.

A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-55, Table 16-56 and Table 16-57. Table 16-58 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies. Table 16-55 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G system)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Wavelengt h Combinati on No.



Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2

1

TN55NPO2ES02/ TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

2

TN55NPO2ES04/ TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80


1813


16 PID Board

Table 16-56 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system) Waveleng th Combinat ion No.



1

TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

2

TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

Table 16-57 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(80G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No.


1

TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

2

TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

NOTE

The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2E, see 16.8.5 Front Panel. The TN54ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the TN55NPO2E board. The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards according to the network planning principles.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92


1814


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

16 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58


1815


16 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61

16.8.2 Application As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. In addition, the NPO2E board receives four OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the NPO2E board multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e signals into one optical signal for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter, which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/ OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the TN55NPO2E Board Figure 16-59 200G system built with the TN55NPO2E board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

Tributary board



TO

TN54 ENQ2


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


TN55 NPO2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN55 NPO2E

OBU 1P1

RI

TN55 NPO2E RI

OBU 1P1

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TO

8xOTU2/ OTU2e IN TO2

8xOTU2/ OTU2e TO2 IN

OUT RO2

RO2 OUT


TN54 ENQ2

TN55 NPO2

Client-side service



Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

1816


16 PID Board


Clientside service

Tributary board


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e TO

OBU 1P1

RI

TN55 NPO2E

Clientside service

Tributary board


Clientside service

TN55 NPO2E RI

TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

OBU 1P1

TO 4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Clientside service

Tributary board


Client-side service

Tributary board


TO

TN55 NPO2E

RI

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1

RI

TO

TN55 NPO2E


Tributary board

Client-side service

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/ TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 4 x10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1817


16 PID Board

16.8.3 Functions and Features The NPO2E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-59 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2E. Table 16-59 Functions and features of the NPO2E Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2 l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output.


Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU1. l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports the TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1818


16 PID Board


Description



IEEE 1588v2

The NPO2E board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. NOTE The IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.

Physical clock

The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Channel Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-

1819


16 PID Board


Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1820


16 PID Board




16.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPO2E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module, red/blue band filter, and power supply module. Figure 16-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1821


16 PID Board

Figure 16-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E Backplane (service cross-connection) 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e

64XODU0/32XODU1/8X ODU2/8XODU2e

8 Crossconnection module 1588 PQ2 service processing sub-board

OUT

PID Module

8

IN


T01 R01

Red/blue band filter


TO RI T02 R02

Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage




SCC

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1822


16 PID Board

the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the signals through the TO port to the WDM side. l

Receive direction The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another NPO2 board. The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane. NOTE

The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.

Module Function l

Red/blue band filter – In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another NPO2 board. – In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20 wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another NPO2 board.

l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1823


16 PID Board

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. – PQ2 service processing board Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2E board. NOTE

After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.

l


l


16.8.5 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2E.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-63 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2E.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1824


16 PID Board

Figure 16-63 Front panel of the TN55NPO2E

NPO2E

NPO2E

STAT ACT PROG SRV


STAT ACT PROG SRV


T02 R02

T02 R02


TO

TO

RI

RI

T01 R01

T01 R01

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

PQ2 STAT

NPO2E

PQ2 installed

NPO2E

PQ2 not installed

NOTE

The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 16.8.1 Version Description.

Indicators There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1825


16 PID Board

l


l


l


l


There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel. l



Interfaces Table 16-60 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-60 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical signals.

OUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side or the red/blue band filter.

R01

LC

Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).

T01

LC

Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).

R02

LC

Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port on the NPO2 board.

T02

LC

Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are multiplexed).

RI

LC

Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side.

TO

LC

Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.


16.8.6 Valid Slots The NPO2E occupies two slots. Table 16-61 shows the valid slots for the NPO2E board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1826


16 PID Board

Table 16-61 Valid slots for the NPO2E board Product

Valid Slots







NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is IU3.

16.8.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E The characteristic code for the NPO2E consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-62. Table 16-62 Characteristic code for the NPO2E Code

Description

Description







For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380. l




1827


16 PID Board

Display of Physical Ports Table 16-63 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-63 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPO2E board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

RI/TO

2

RO1/TO1

3

RO2/TO2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 16-64 shows the port diagram. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. NOTE

l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1828


16 PID Board

Figure 16-64 Diagram of ports on the NPO2E

12xODU2/ 12XODU2e


OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12


ODU1:4 48xODU1 ODU1:1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

ODU0:1

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1

ODU0:2 ODU0:1

ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

ODU1:4

ODU0:2

96xODU0


ODU1:1

ODU1:4

ODU0:2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

NOTE

The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The NPO2E board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1829


16 PID Board

Table 16-64 Description of ports on the NPO2E Port Name

Description



1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)



Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2E signals that are received through the backplane.

1(IN/OUT)



The side.


l

The


NOTE

The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1830


16 PID Board

Figure 16-65 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU0 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

1

Other board a


Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2


NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1

2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2




Other board c (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E

Other board a


Other board b


Other board c




1831


16 PID Board

Figure 16-66 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

1

Other board a



1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

2








The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E

Other board a


Other board b


Other board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1832


16 PID Board

ODU2 Cross-Connections Figure 16-67 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-67 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

Other board a

1



WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12






Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E

Other board a


Other board b


Other board c


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1833


16 PID Board

Cross-Connections Between the NPO2E and ENQ2 Figure 16-68 shows the created cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2. Figure 16-68 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2 WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

ENQ2 board

1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Example of Service Cross-Connections Figure 16-69 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Figure 16-69 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board ODU0

TOM TOM

ODU0 ODU1

TN55

NS2

ODU1 NPO2E ODU1

IN/OUT

ODU2/

TDX/ ODU2e ND2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1834


16 PID Board

16.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPO2E, refer to Table 16-65. Table 16-65 NPO2E parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status


Channel Loopback


The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets path Loopback.


Off, On Default: On

FEC Working State


FEC Mode


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.


-


Band Type

-



1835


16 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: / OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled



NULL Mapping Status


NOTE Only C band is supported.

See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.16 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

16.8.11 NPO2E Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1836


16 PID Board

Board



TN55NP O2E


N/A


NOTE


Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side Table 16-66 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (80 km)

NRZ

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

+2

+2


dBm

-4

-6.5


dB

6

6


GHz

±5

±5


nm

0.8

0.8


dB

30

30


ps/nm

800

1500


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

PIN


PIN

1837


16 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (80 km)


nm

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650


dBm

-15

-12


dBm

3

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

Table 16-67 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board Item

Unit

Value

Working wavelength in the C band

nm

1528 to 1561

Working wavelength in the blue band (T01/R01)

THz

196.0 to 193.8

Working wavelength in the red band (T02/R02)

THz

193.6 to 191.4

Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, RI->T02)

dB

≤1

Multiplexing loss (R01–>T0, R02->T0)

dB

≤1

Isolation between red and blue bands

dB

≥ 13

Mechanical Specifications TN55NPO2E: l


l


TN54PQ2: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm (2.69 in.)

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1838


16 PID Board

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN55NPO2E

143

157.3

TN54PQ2

1.1

1.2


1839


17

17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board

Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board

About This Chapter 17.1 Overview Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different wavelengths. 17.2 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing board 17.3 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA 17.4 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board 17.5 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA 17.6 DFIU DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board 17.7 FIU FIU: fiber interface unit 17.8 ITL ITL: interleaver board 17.9 SFIU SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1840



17.1 Overview Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different wavelengths.

Positions of Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards in a WDM System Optical multiplexer boards multiplex multiple optical signals into one ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signal. Optical demultiplexer boards demultiplex one multiplexed optical signal into individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. Figure 17-1 shows the positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system. Figure 17-1 Positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system Client-side services

WDM-side services

OTU OTU

OM (C-ODD)

OTU

OTU OTU

OA

OTU ITL

OSC

FIU/ SFIU

OTU OTU

OD (C-ODD)

WDM-side ODF


OM (C-EVEN)

OA

OTU OTU OTU

OD (C-EVEN)

OTU

Main Functions Table 17-1 lists the main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1841



Table 17-1 Main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards Board

Function

M40

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal.

M40V

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.

D40

Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength signals.

D40V

Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength signals and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.

ITL

Multiplexes and demultiplexes C-band optical signals with 100 GHz channel spacing and Cband optical signals with 50 GHz channel spacing.

FIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.

DFIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in two optical directions, and performs the reverse process.

SFIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process. This board applies to IEEE 1588v2 scenarios.

17.2 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing board

17.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the M40 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M4 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


1842



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2M4 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11M4 0/ TN12M4 0

01

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.

02

Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Differences Between Versions Appearance: l

The TN11M40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40 board. The TN11M40 board occupies three slots. The TN12M40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.2.5 Front Panel.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40

TN12M40

The TN12M40 board can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40 board functions as the TN11M40 board. The TN12M40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12M40

None

-

17.2.2 Application As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-2. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1843



Figure 17-2 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

17.2.3 Functions and Features The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-2. Table 17-2 Functions and features of the M40 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides an in-service monitoring port (MON). This port connects to an optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal without affecting traffic.


Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance events for the board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1844



Figure 17-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board

M01 M02

Multiplexer

Optical module Splitter OUT

M40

MON Temperature Temperature control detection

PIN

Detection and temperature control module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1845



– Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


17.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-4 and Figure 17-5 show the front panel of the M40 board. Figure 17-4 Front panel of the TN11M40 board

M40 STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02 M 03 M 04 M 05 M 06 M 07 M 08 M09 M10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M 11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M29 M30 M31 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M39 M40

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M32

M27 M28

M25 M26

M38

M11 M12

M23 M24

M09 M10

M21 M22

M07 M08

M20

M05 M06

M19

M04

M17 M18

M03

M15 M16

M01 M02

M13 M14

MON OUT

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

M40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1846


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1847



Figure 17-5 Front panel of the TN12M40 board

M40 STAT ACT PROG SRV

M13

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12

MON 194.80 193.40 OUT 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10 M26

M27 M28

M13

M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06

M07 M08

M09 M10 M11 M12

MON

194.80

193.40

OUT OUT

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34

M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M26

M40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1848



NOTE

A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.

OUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL.

MON

LC

Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-4 and Table 17-5 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board. Table 17-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92


1849



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 17-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002 board (C_ODD)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52


1850



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


17.2.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11M40 board and two slots house one TN12M40 board. Table 17-6 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40 board and Table 17-7 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40 board. Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN11M40 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66




IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15


1851



The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-7 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-8. Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the M40 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

Second character

Odd/even wavelengths

Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.


1852



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

17.2.8 Optical Interfaces This topic describes the interface information on the U2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-9. Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

M01-M40

2-41

MON

42

17.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For M40 parameters, refer to Table 17-10. Table 17-10 M40 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C

An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported. Sets the working band type of a board.

Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



1853



Field

Value

Description


All, Odd, Even

Selects the desired parity of the working band.

Default: All

17.2.10 M40 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-11 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board. Table 17-11 Optical specifications of the M40 board Item

Unit

Value

Adjacent channel spacing

GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 6.5

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561

Adjacent channel isolation

dB

> 22

Non-adjacent channel isolation

dB

> 25

Polarization dependence loss

dB

≤ 0.5

Temperature characteristics

nm/°C

≤ 0.002

Maximum channel insertion loss difference

dB

≤3


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN12M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) – TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1854






TN11M40

10.0

13.0

TN12M40

10.0

13.0

17.3 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA

17.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the M40V board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M4 0V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 2M4 0V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11M4 0V/ TN12M4 0V

01

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.

02

Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Differences Between Versions Appearance: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1855


l


The TN11M40V board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40V board. The TN11M40V board occupies three slots. The TN12M40V board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.3.5 Front Panel.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40V

TN12M40 V

The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40V board functions as the TN11M40V board. The TN12M40V board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40V board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12M40V

None

-

17.3.2 Application As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-6. Figure 17-6 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40V

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40V 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

17.3.3 Functions and Features The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1856



Table 17-12 Functions and features of the M40V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.





Optical power adjustment

Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

17.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1857



Figure 17-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board

M01 M02

Optical module Multiplexer

VOA

Splitter

VOA

OUT

VOA

M40

MON VOA Temperature control control

Temperature detection

PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing. – Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Control and communication module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1858



– Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


17.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-8 and Figure 17-9 show the front panel of the M40V board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1859



Figure 17-8 Front panel of the TN11M40V board

M40V STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02 M 03 M 04 M 05 M 06 M 07 M 08 M09 M10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M 11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M29 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M28

M27 M30

M11 M12

M25 M26

M09 M10

M23 M24

M07 M08

M21 M22

M05 M06

M19 M20

M03 M04

M17 M18

M02

M15 M16

M01

M13 M14

MON OUT

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M40V

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1860



Figure 17-9 Front panel of the TN12M40V board

M40V STAT ACT PROG SRV

M13

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12

MON 194.80 193.40 OUT 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32

M13

M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M26

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06

M07 M08

M09 M10 M11 M12

MON

194.80

193.40

OUT OUT

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34

M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M26

M40V

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1861



NOTE




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-13 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.

OUT

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL.

MON

LC

Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-14 and Table 17-15 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board. Table 17-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (even)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92


1862



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 17-15 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52


1863



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


17.3.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11M40V board and two slots house one TN12M40V board. Table 17-16 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40V board and Table 17-17 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40V board. Table 17-16 Valid slots for the TN11M40V board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15


1864



The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-17 Valid slots for the TN12M40V board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.

17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-18. Table 17-18 Characteristic code for the M40V board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character




1865



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-19. Table 17-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

M01-M40

2-41

MON

42

17.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For M40V parameters, refer to Table 17-20. Table 17-20 M40V parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1866



Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range.

Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.

Attenuation difference (dB)

-3 to 3, with a step of 0.1 Default: none

Sets the relative optical power attenuation of a board channel. When using this parameter with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical power attenuation of a board channel more accurately.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface.

Configure Band

C

Sets the working band type of a board.


-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

17.3.10 M40V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-21 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board. Table 17-21 Optical specifications of the M40V board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100


1867



Item

Unit

Value

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8a

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 22


dB

> 25

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Loss accuracy

dB

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)


dB

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 3a

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN12M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.) – TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)




TN11M40V

20.0

25.0

TN12M40V

16.0

26.0

17.4 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board

17.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the D40 board are TN11 and TN12. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1868




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1D4 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 2D4 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11D40/ TN12D40

01

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.

02

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Differences Between Versions Appearance: l

The TN11D40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12D40 board. The TN11D40 board occupies three slots. The TN12D40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.4.5 Front Panel.

Substitution Relationship

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11D40

TN12D40

The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12D40 board functions as the TN11D40 board. The TN12D40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11D40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12D40

None

-


1869



17.4.2 Application The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 17-10. Figure 17-10 Position of the D40 in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

17.4.3 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-22. Table 17-22 Functions and features of the D40 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.





Optical-layer ASON

Supported

17.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1870



Figure 17-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40. Figure 17-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40 Optical module Demultiplexer

Splitter

D01 D02

IN

D40 MON


PIN

Temperature control


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1871


l



l


17.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-12 and Figure 17-13 show the front panel of the D40 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1872



Figure 17-12 TN11D40 front panel

D40 STAT ACT PROG SRV

D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04 D 05 D 06 D 07 D 08 D09 D10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D 11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39

D26

D40

D12

D25

D11

D24

D10

D23

D09

D22

D08

D21

D07

D20

D06

D19

D05

D18

D04

D17

D03

D16

D02

D15

D01

D14

IN

D13

MON

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1873



Figure 17-13 Front panel of the TN12D40 board

D40 STAT ACT PROG SRV

D13

D13

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12

MON 194.80 193.40 IN 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10

D27 D28

MON

194.80

193.40

IN

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

D29 D30 D31 D32

D27 D28

D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38

D01 D02

D39 D40

D29 D30

D26

D03 D04 D05 D06

D07 D08

D09 D10 D11 D12

D31 D32 D33 D34

D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

D26

D40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1874



NOTE




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-23 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-23 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed.

D01-D40

LC

Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN" interface of the OTUs.

MON

LC

Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-24 and Table 17-25 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board. Table 17-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.00

1529.55

D21

194.00

1545.32

D02

195.90

1530.33

D22

193.90

1546.12

D03

195.80

1531.12

D23

193.80

1546.92


1875



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D04

195.70

1531.90

D24

193.70

1547.72

D05

195.60

1532.68

D25

193.60

1548.51

D06

195.50

1533.47

D26

193.50

1549.32

D07

195.40

1534.25

D27

193.40

1550.12

D08

195.30

1535.04

D28

193.30

1550.92

D09

195.20

1535.82

D29

193.20

1551.72

D10

195.10

1536.61

D30

193.10

1552.52

D11

195.00

1537.40

D31

193.00

1553.33

D12

194.90

1538.19

D32

192.90

1554.13

D13

194.80

1538.98

D33

192.80

1554.94

D14

194.70

1539.77

D34

192.70

1555.75

D15

194.60

1540.56

D35

192.60

1556.55

D16

194.50

1541.35

D36

192.50

1557.36

D17

194.40

1542.14

D37

192.40

1558.17

D18

194.30

1542.94

D38

192.30

1558.98

D19

194.20

1543.73

D39

192.20

1559.79

D20

194.10

1544.53

D40

192.10

1560.61

Table 17-25 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002 board (C_ODD)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.05

1529.16

D21

194.05

1544.92

D02

195.95

1529.94

D22

193.95

1545.72

D03

195.85

1530.72

D23

193.85

1546.52

D04

195.75

1531.51

D24

193.75

1547.32

D05

195.65

1532.29

D25

193.65

1548.11

D06

195.55

1533.07

D26

193.55

1548.91

D07

195.45

1533.86

D27

193.45

1549.72

D08

195.35

1534.64

D28

193.35

1550.52


1876



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D09

195.25

1535.43

D29

193.25

1551.32

D10

195.15

1536.22

D30

193.15

1552.12

D11

195.05

1537.00

D31

193.05

1552.93

D12

194.95

1537.79

D32

192.95

1553.73

D13

194.85

1538.58

D33

192.85

1554.54

D14

194.75

1539.37

D34

192.75

1555.34

D15

194.65

1540.16

D35

192.65

1556.15

D16

194.55

1540.95

D36

192.55

1556.96

D17

194.45

1541.75

D37

192.45

1557.77

D18

194.35

1542.54

D38

192.35

1558.58

D19

194.25

1543.33

D39

192.25

1559.39

D20

194.15

1544.13

D40

192.15

1560.20


17.4.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11D40 board and two slots house one TN12D40 board. Table 17-26 shows the valid slots for the TN11D40 board and Table 17-27 shows the valid slots for the TN12D40 board. Table 17-26 Valid slots for the TN11D40 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15


1877



The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40 displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-27 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-28. Table 17-28 Characteristic code for the D40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Band


The second character




1878



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-29. Table 17-29 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

D01-D40

2-41

MON

42

17.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For D40 parameters, refer to Table 17-30. Table 17-30 D40 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-


Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-

An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.


1879



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band

C Default: C


Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Disable, Enable

Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm)

-60.0 to 50.0

OAMS Power Abnormity Threshold (dB)

-0.5 to 1.0

Default: All Enables or disables the OAMS function.

Default: Disable

Default: /

Default:3

Specifies the reference value for OAMS power monitoring. Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold.

17.4.10 D40 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-31 lists the optical specifications of the D40. Table 17-31 Optical specifications of the D40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 6.5

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 25


dB

> 25


dB

≤ 0.5

Temperature characteristics

nm/°C

< 0.002


1880



Item

Unit

Value


dB

≤3

-1 dB bandwidth

nm

≥ 0.2

-20 dB bandwidth

nm

< 1.4


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.) – TN12D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) – TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)




TN11D40

10.0

13.0

TN12D40

10.0

13.0

17.5 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA

17.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1881



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1D4 0V

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11D40V

01

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.

02

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

17.5.2 Application As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and adjusts the output optical power of each channel. For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-14. Figure 17-14 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40V

40

40

1

1 D40V

OA

OA

M40 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

17.5.3 Functions and Features The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-32.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1882



Table 17-32 Functions and features of the D40V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.






Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after demultiplexing.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

17.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1883



Figure 17-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board

Splitter

Optical module Demultiplexer

VOA VOA

IN

VOA

D01 D02 D40

MON Temperature detection

PIN

Temperature VOA control control


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. – Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1884





17.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-16 shows front panel of the D40V board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1885



Figure 17-16 Front panel of the D40V board

D40V STAT ACT PROG SRV

D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04 D 05 D 06 D 07 D 08 D09 D10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D 11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39

D26

D40

D12

D25

D11

D24

D10

D23

D09

D22

D08

D21

D07

D20

D06

D19

D05

D18

D04

D17

D03

D16

D02

D15

D01

D14

IN

D13

MON

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D40V

NOTE




l


l


l




1886



Interfaces Table 17-33 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL.

D01-D40

LC

Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs.

MON

LC

Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-34 and Table 17-35 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board. Table 17-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.00

1529.55

D21

194.00

1545.32

D02

195.90

1530.33

D22

193.90

1546.12

D03

195.80

1531.12

D23

193.80

1546.92

D04

195.70

1531.90

D24

193.70

1547.72

D05

195.60

1532.68

D25

193.60

1548.51

D06

195.50

1533.47

D26

193.50

1549.32

D07

195.40

1534.25

D27

193.40

1550.12

D08

195.30

1535.04

D28

193.30

1550.92

D09

195.20

1535.82

D29

193.20

1551.72

D10

195.10

1536.61

D30

193.10

1552.52

D11

195.00

1537.40

D31

193.00

1553.33

D12

194.90

1538.19

D32

192.90

1554.13


1887



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D13

194.80

1538.98

D33

192.80

1554.94

D14

194.70

1539.77

D34

192.70

1555.75

D15

194.60

1540.56

D35

192.60

1556.55

D16

194.50

1541.35

D36

192.50

1557.36

D17

194.40

1542.14

D37

192.40

1558.17

D18

194.30

1542.94

D38

192.30

1558.98

D19

194.20

1543.73

D39

192.20

1559.79

D20

194.10

1544.53

D40

192.10

1560.61

Table 17-35 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.05

1529.16

D21

194.05

1544.92

D02

195.95

1529.94

D22

193.95

1545.72

D03

195.85

1530.72

D23

193.85

1546.52

D04

195.75

1531.51

D24

193.75

1547.32

D05

195.65

1532.29

D25

193.65

1548.11

D06

195.55

1533.07

D26

193.55

1548.91

D07

195.45

1533.86

D27

193.45

1549.72

D08

195.35

1534.64

D28

193.35

1550.52

D09

195.25

1535.43

D29

193.25

1551.32

D10

195.15

1536.22

D30

193.15

1552.12

D11

195.05

1537.00

D31

193.05

1552.93

D12

194.95

1537.79

D32

192.95

1553.73

D13

194.85

1538.58

D33

192.85

1554.54

D14

194.75

1539.37

D34

192.75

1555.34

D15

194.65

1540.16

D35

192.65

1556.15

D16

194.55

1540.95

D36

192.55

1556.96

D17

194.45

1541.75

D37

192.45

1557.77


1888



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D18

194.35

1542.54

D38

192.35

1558.58

D19

194.25

1543.33

D39

192.25

1559.39

D20

194.15

1544.13

D40

192.15

1560.20


17.5.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one D40V board. Table 17-36 shows the valid slots for the D40V board. Table 17-36 Valid slots for the D40V board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-37.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1889



Table 17-37 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-38. Table 17-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

D01-D40

2-41

MON

42

17.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For D40V parameters, refer to Table 17-39.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1890



Table 17-39 D40V parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.





You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.


See D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

17.5.10 D40V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1891



Optical Specifications Table 17-40 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board. Table 17-40 Optical specifications of the D40V board Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8a

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 25


dB

> 30

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Loss accuracy

dB

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)


dB

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 3a

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l





TN11D40V

38.5

42.3

17.6 DFIU DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1892



17.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN2 1DF IU

N

N

N

N

N

Y

17.6.2 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, The DFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-17. Figure 17-17 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system

OA DFIU

SC2

DFIU

OA

NOTE

The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually refer to one physical board.

17.6.3 Functions and Features The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-41.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1893



Table 17-41 Functions and features of the DFIU board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

17.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board. Figure 17-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board Optical module ERC ERM

Multiplexer

EOUT

ETC ETM

Demultiplexer

EIN

WRC WRM

Multiplexer

WOUT

WTC WTM

Demultiplexer

WN

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Signal Flow l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1894



interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the WOUT optical interface. l

The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC and WTM optical interfaces

l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the EOUT optical interface.

l

The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC and ETM optical interfaces

Module Function l

Optical module Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel signals.

l


l


17.6.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-19 shows the front panel of the DFIU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1895



Figure 17-19 Front panel of the DFIU board ETM ERM ETC ERC EIN EOUT WTMWRM WTC WRC WIN WOUT

DFIU

Interfaces Table 17-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

WIN

LC

Receives the west line signal.

WOUT

LC

Transmits the west line signal.

WTC

LC

Transmits the west main path signal.

WRC

LC

Receives the west main path signal.

WTM

LC

Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal.

WRM

LC

Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal.

EIN

LC

Receives the east line signal.

EOUT

LC

Transmits the east line signal.

ETC

LC

Transmits the east main path signal.

ERC

LC

Receives the east main path signal.

ETM

LC

Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal.

ERM

LC

Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.


1896




17.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DFIU board. Table 17-43 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board. Table 17-43 Valid slots for DFIU board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, IU11

17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-44. Table 17-44 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-45.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1897



Table 17-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

WIN/WOUT

1

WRM/WTM

2

WRC/WTC

3

EIN/EOUT

4

ERM/ETM

5

ERC/ETC

6

NOTE


17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-46. Table 17-46 DFIU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C



-


Channel Number Mode

C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode

Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the DFIU board.

Default: C80 Mode Actual Working Band Parity

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



1898



Field

Value

Description


All, Odd, Even


PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0 to 1

Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))

-15 to 30

Default: All

Default: 0.05

Default: 0

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.

17.6.10 DFIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-47 Optical specifications of the DFIU board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-

Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel

nm

1500-1520

-

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

EIN-ETM

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

≤1

Isolation

dB

> 40

Isolation

dB

> 12

ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT EIN-ETM WIN-WTM EIN-ETC WIN-WTC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1899



Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


dB

< 0.2



l





TN21DFIU

0.2

0.3

17.7 FIU FIU: fiber interface unit

17.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, TN14, and TN21.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1FI U

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN1 2FI U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 3FI U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Ya


1900



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 4FI U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN2 1FI U

N

N

N

N

N

Y

a: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.


Function: – The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with the HBA board. The TN14FIU board works with the RAU1 board. The other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 17.7.2 Application. – The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards support reporting of input optical power, but the TN13FIU, TN14FIU, and TN21FIU boards do not. The TN14FIU supports the OUT optical interface power detection. The other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11FIU, TN14FIU, TN12FIU, and TN13FIU01 versions use the same front panel. The TN13FIU02 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions. The TN21 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions and is applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 17.7.5 Front Panel and 17.7.10 FIU Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11FIU

TN12FIU/ TN13FIU

l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version. l After the substitution, the TN12FIU/TN13FIU board is functionally different from the TN11FIU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1901



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12FIU

TN13FIU

l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l After the substitution, the TN13FIU board is functionally different from the TN12FIU board.

TN13FIU

None

-

TN14FIU

None

-

TN21FIU

None

-

17.7.2 Application As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-20, Figure 17-21, and Figure 17-22. Figure 17-20 Position of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/TN21FIU/TN14FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power) OTU OTU

MUX

OA

SC1 OTU OTU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

DMUX

OA FIU

FIU

OA


DMUX

OTU OTU

SC1

OA

MUX

OTU OTU

1902



Figure 17-21 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power) OTU MUX

OTU

HBA

OA

OTU

DMUX

OTU

OTU

DMUX

FIU

FIU

SC1

SC1

OA

HBA

OTU

MUX

OTU

OTU

Figure 17-22 Position of the TN14FIU board (used together with RAU1/RAU2) in the WDM system OTU OTU

M U X

OBU1

RC

LINE

OUT

RAU1/ RAU2

F I IN TM U

SYS

TC

SYS

IN

IN

OTU

D M U X

OUT

OTU

TM

TC

OTU

OTU

IN

RM

SC1

D M U X

OUT

RAU1/ LINE RAU2

OUT

F RM SC1 I U RC

OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

17.7.3 Functions and Features The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-48. Table 17-48 Functions and features of the FIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel.



Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU..


1903



17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU board, and TN14FIU board. Figure 17-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board, and the TN21FIU board. Figure 17-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU board, and TN14FIU board Optical module RC RM

Splitter

Multiplexer

OUT MON

TC TM

Demultiplexer

IN

PIN Optical power detection module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



1904



Figure 17-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board Optical module RC RM

Splitter

Multiplexer

OUT MON

TC TM

Demultiplexer

IN

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and TM optical interfaces

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals to the MON interface for detection.

l

Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. NOTE

Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection. Only the TN14FIU support the OUT optical interface power detection.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1905


l



l


17.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-25 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board. Figure 17-26 and Figure 17-27 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board. Figure 17-28 shows the front panel of the TN21FIU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1906



Figure 17-25 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board

FIU STAT ACT PROG SRV



MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM

FIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1907



Figure 17-26 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board

FIU STAT



MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM

FIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1908



Figure 17-27 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board

FIU STAT



MON TM RM IN TC RC OUT

FIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1909



Figure 17-28 Front panel of the TN21FIU board

TM RM TC RC IN OUT MON

FIU

Indicators The TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board has four indicators on the front panel. l


l


l


l


The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel. l


The TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel. For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 17-49 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-49 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LCa


TC

LC

Transmits the main path signal.


1910



Interface

Type

Function

RC

LCa

Receives the main path signal.

TM

LC

Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal.

RM

LC

Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal.

MON

LC

Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum when it is connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN14FIU/TN21FIU: the MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). l TN13FIU02: the MON port is a 0.1/99.9 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB).

a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). NOTE

TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

17.7.6 Valid Slots One slots house one FIU board. Table 17-50 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board. Table 17-50 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17

Table 17-51 shows the valid slots for the TN12FIU board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1911



Table 17-51 Valid slots for the TN12FIU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17

Table 17-52 shows the valid slots for the TN13FIU board. Table 17-52 Valid slots for the TN13FIU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2–IU5, IU11

Table 17-53 shows the valid slots for the TN14FIU board. Table 17-53 Valid slots for the TN14FIU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 17-54 shows the valid slots for the TN21FIU board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1912



Table 17-54 Valid slots for the TN21FIU board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, IU11

17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-55. Table 17-55 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-56. Table 17-56 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

RM/TM

2

RC/TC

3

MON

4


1913



NOTE


17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For FIU parameters, refer to Table 17-57. Table 17-57 FIU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-

An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and TN12FIU .

Configure Band

C



-


Channel Number Mode


Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the FIU board.

Default: C80 Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-



All



0 to 1

Default: All

Default: 0.05

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.


1914



Field

Value

Description

Fiber Type

G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber

Specifies the type of a fiber.

Default: / Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))

0 to 429496729.4

Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

0.0 to 6553.5

Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

0.0 to 6553.5

Default: 0

Default: 0

Default: 0

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.

Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.

17.7.10 FIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-58 Optical specifications of the FIU board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


nm

TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/ TN21FIU: 1500-1520

-

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

IN-TM

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

≤1

TN14FIU: 1480-1520

RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1915



Interface

Item

Unit

Value

IN-TM

Isolation

dB

> 40

IN-TC

Isolation

dB

> 12

-


dB

< 0.2

Mechanical Specifications TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU: l


l


TN21FIU: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 118.9 mm (4.7 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220.0 mm (8.7 in.)

l





TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN14FIU

4.2

4.6

TN13FIU/TN21FIU

0.2

0.3

17.8 ITL ITL: interleaver board

17.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1916



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1IT L

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 2IT L

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11ITL

01

The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing. The board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 10 Gbit/s.

04

The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two interleavers. The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing and multiplexing. The board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s.

01

The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing. The board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 10 Gbit/s.

TN12ITL


Function: – The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two interleavers which are used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals. This board is mainly used in a system in which the rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s. The optical module on the ITL board of other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The interleaver is used to demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is used to multiplex optical signals. For details, see 17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN12ITL board supports the VOA mode, but the ITL board of other versions does not. For details, see 17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.

l

Appearance: – The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 17.8.5 Front Panel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1917


l


Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 17.8.10 ITL Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ITL

TN12ITL

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or later version. NOTE When used in a 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s systems, the TN12ITL board cannot replace the TN11ITL board.

TN12ITL

TN11ITL

The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. NOTE In VOA mode, the TN11ITL board cannot replace the TN12ITL board.

17.8.2 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s. For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-29. Figure 17-29 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

C_ODD

C_ODD

M40 40 1

OA

C_EVEN

WMU

40

ITL

1 D40 40 1

D40 40 1

OA C_EVEN

M40

1

D40 40 1

ITL

C_ODD

WMU OA

C_ODD

M40

OA

C_EVEN D40

40

C_EVEN

40 1 M40 40


OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU

1918



NOTE

The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other cases, the WMU board is optional.

17.8.3 Functions and Features The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical spectrum. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-59. Table 17-59 Functions and features of the ITL board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals and C_EVEN signals.

Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum


Optical-layer ASON

Supported by TN11ITL.

17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-30 and Figure 17-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board. Figure 17-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board Optical module TO TE

Interleaver

RO RE

IN

Splitter

Coupler

OUT MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


1919



Figure 17-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board

Signal Flow TN11ITL01: l

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively.

l

The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

TN11ITL04: l

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively.

l

The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

TN12ITL: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1920



interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. l

The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.

l


l


17.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-32 and Figure 17-33 show the front panel of the ITL board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1921



Figure 17-32 Front panel of the TN11ITL board

ITL STAT



MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE

ITL

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1922



Figure 17-33 Front panel of the TN12ITL board

ITL STAT ACT PROG SRV



MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE

ITL

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board. l


There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1923



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-60 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TE

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

RE

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TO

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).

RO

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB.


17.8.6 Valid Slots One slots house one ITL board. Table 17-61 shows the valid slots for the ITL board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1924



Table 17-61 Valid slots for the ITL board Product

Valid Slots




TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17

17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-62. Table 17-62 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-63. Table 17-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

RE/TE


1925




Interface on the NM

RO/TO

3

MON

4

NOTE


17.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ITL parameters, refer to Table 17-64. Table 17-64 ITL parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Board Mode

ITL Mode, VOA Mode


Default: ITL Mode

Sets the working mode of a board. l ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface into two channels of signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. l VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface all passed through the TE interface. NOTE VOA Mode can be configured only when the services are less than 40 channels. NOTE Only for TN12ITL.

Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



1926



Field

Value

Description


All, Odd, Even


Default: All

17.8.10 ITL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-65 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01 Item

Unit

Value

Input channel spacinga

GHz

100

Output channel spacinga

GHz

50

dB

< 4.5

dB

< 2.5


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 25

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

≤ 26

Insertion loss

RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO

IN-TE IN-TO

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 17-66 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100


GHz

50


1927



Item

Unit

Value

dB

<3

dB

<3


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 25

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

≤ 26

Insertion loss


IN-TE IN-TO

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 17-67 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100


GHz

50

dB

< 4.5

dB

< 3.5


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 22

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

≤ 23

Insertion loss


IN-TE IN-TO

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1928





l



Typical power consumption at 25°C (77° F) (W)

Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F) (W)

TN11ITL

0.2

0.3

TN12ITL

10.0

11.5

17.9 SFIU SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

17.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1SFI U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

17.9.2 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel (OSC). For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-34. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1929



Figure 17-34 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system

SYS1

OA

LINE1

SYS1

SYS1

LINE1

LINE1

SYS1

OA

TM1 OSC2

SCC

LINE1

ST2 RM1 OSC1

OA

S F I U

SYS2

S F I U LINE2

LINE2

OSC2 RM2

OA TM1

OSC2

RM1

OSC1

ST2 OSC1 TM2

SCC SYS2

NE1

OA

S F I U

SYS2

S F I U LINE2

LINE2

OSC2

RM2

OSC1

TM2

ST2

SYS2

NE2

SCC

OA NE3

NOTE

Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board. A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards. The OSC2 optical port supports the 1511 nm wavelength, and the OSC1 optical port supports the 1491 nm wavelength. The SFIU board cannot be used together with the DAS1 board.

17.9.3 Functions and Features The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-68. Table 17-68 Functions and features of the SFIU Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. With this function, neither commissioning nor delay compensation is required for IEEE 1588V2 clocks.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

17.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SFIU board consists of an optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1930



Figure 17-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board

SYS1

LINE1

OSC1

Optical module

OSC2

LINE2

SYS2

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)


SCC

Signal Flow The LINE1 optical interface receives or transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path. It cannot receive and transmit these signals at the same time. The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical interfaces receive or transmit the main channel signal. They cannot be receivers and transmitters at the same time. The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces receive or transmit the OSC signal. They cannot be receivers and transmitters at the same time. In other words, if the OSC1 optical interface receives the OSC signal, the OSC2 optical interface must transmit the OSC signal. The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU board when the OSC1 optical interface receives the OSC signal and the OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signal: l

The SFIU board receives the OSC signal from the associated ST2 board through the OSC1 optical interface and directs the signal out the LINE1 optical interface.

l

The SFIU board receives the line signal through the LINE1 optical interface and demultiplexes the line signal into a main channel signal and an OSC signal. Then the board sends the OSC signal to the associated ST2 board through the OSC2 optical interface and the main channel signal to the associated OA board through the SYS1 optical interface.

l

The board receives the main channel signal from the associated OA board through the SYS2 optical interface and directs the signal out the LINE2 optical interface.

The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU board when the OSC2 optical interface receives the OSC signal and the OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signal: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The SFIU board receives the OSC signal from the associated ST2 board through the LINE1 optical interface and directs the signal out the OSC1 optical interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1931



l

The SFIU board receives the main channel signal through the SYS1 optical interface and the OSC signal through the OSC2 optical interface and multiplexes the two signals into a multiplexed signal. Then the board sends the multiplexed signal out the LINE1 optical interface.

l

The SFIU board receives the main channel signal from the associated OA board through the LINE2 optical interface and directs the signal out the SYS2 optical interface.

The OSC2 optical interface supports the 1511 nm wavelength, and the OSC1 optical interface supports the 1491 nm wavelength.

Module Functions l

Optical module Multiplexes the OSC signal and main channel signal into a multiplexed signal, and vice versa.

l


l


17.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-36 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1932



Figure 17-36 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board

SFIU STAT



LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2

SFIU

Indicators One indicator is present on the front panel: l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1933



For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 17-69 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-69 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board Interface

Type

Function

LINE1

LC

The LINE1 optical interface is located on the line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in addition to transmitting main optical path signals.

LINE2

LC

The LINE2 optical interface is located on the line side. It transmits the signals of the main optical path.

SYS1

LC

The SYS1 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path.

SYS2

LC

The SYS2 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path.

OSC1

LC

The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.

OSC2

LC

The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

17.9.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SFIU board. Table 17-70 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board. Table 17-70 Valid slots for the SFIU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


1934



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

17.9.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-71. Table 17-71 Characteristic code for the SFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-72. Table 17-72 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

LINE1/LINE2

1

OSC1/OSC2

2

SYS1/SYS2

3

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1935



17.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-73. Table 17-73 SFIU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Configure Band

C




-


Channel Number Mode


Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the board.

Default: C80 Mode Actual Working Band Parity

-



All, Odd, Even



0 to 1

Fiber Type

G651 Fiber, G652 Fiber, G655 Fiber

Default: All

Default: 0.05

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Sets the fiber type of the board.

Default: /

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1936



Field

Value

Description


-15 to 30

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.

Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

-

Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the transmitting direction.

Receiving DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

-

Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the receiving direction.

Default: 0

17.9.10 SFIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 17-74 Optical specifications of the SFIU board Interface

Item

Uni t

Value

-

Operating wavelength range (C band)

nm

1528-1561

-


nm

1480 to 1520

LINE1SYS1

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.0

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

LINE1OSC1 @λc

Isolation

dB

≥ 65

LINE1OSC2 @λc

Isolation

dB

≥ 40

OSC1SYS1

Directivity

dB

≥ 45

LINE2SYS2 LINE1OSC1 LINE1OSC2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1937


Interface


Item

Uni t

Value

Directivity

dB

≥ 55

-

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

-


C band

dB

< 0.1

OSC channel

dB

< 0.15

SYS1OSC1 OSC1OSC2 OSC2OSC1



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77° F)(W)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F)(W)

TN11SFIU

0.2

0.3


1938


18 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

18

Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

About This Chapter 18.1 Overview Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals into one multiplexed signal. 18.2 CMR1 CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.3 CMR2 CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.4 CMR4 CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.5 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 18.6 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.7 MR4 MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.8 MR8 MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.9 MR8V MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA 18.10 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1939



18.1 Overview Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals into one multiplexed signal.

Positions of FOADM Boards in a WDM System Figure 18-1 shows the positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system. Figure 18-1 Positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system

SC2

West line-side ODF

F I U

OA

OA FOADM

FOADM

OA

OA

O T U

O T U

West client-side West signal

O T U

F I U

East line-side ODF

O T U

East client-side

East signal

Pass-through signal

Main Functions The function differences between different FOADM boards lie in the WDM specifications and number of add/drop signals. Table 18-1 lists the functions of FOADM boards. The DMR1 and SBM2 boards support applications different from other FOADM boards. For details, see 18.5 DMR1 and 18.10 SBM2. Table 18-1 Main functions of FOADM boards Board

WDM Specifications

Function

CMR1

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one wavelength to/ from a multiplexed signal.

CMR2

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1940



Board

WDM Specifications

Function

CMR4

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

DMR1

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of 1310 nm wavelength in east direction and one in west direction.

MR2

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

MR4

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

MR8

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/ from a multiplexed signal.

MR8V

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/ from a multiplexed signal. Adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of cascade ports for pass-through wavelengths.

SBM2

CWDM

Adds/Drops two wavelengths to/from one multiplexed signal and multiplexes the other two wavelengths into another multiplexed signal. The optical signals that are added or dropped, and the optical signals that are multiplexed must be carried over different wavelengths. The SBM2 unit is applied to single-fiber bidirectional system.

18.2 CMR1 CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

18.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1941



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN2 1C MR 1

N

N

N

N

N

Y

18.2.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-2. Figure 18-2 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system

Client side

Client side

OTU D

OTU A

D

A

IN

OUT MO

MI

CMR1

CMR1 MI

MO

OUT

IN

18.2.3 Functions and Features The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-2. Table 18-2 Functions and features of the CMR1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specification.

Cascade interface

Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion.


1942




Description

Wavelength query

Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

18.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board. Figure 18-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board MO

D

IN

MI

A

Drop optical module

Add optical module

OUT

OADM optical module Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1943



Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


18.2.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-4 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board. Figure 18-4 Front panel of the CMR1 board

IN D MO MI A OUT

CMR1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1944



Interfaces Table 18-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board Interface

Type

Function

A

LC

Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

D

LC

Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signals.

OUT

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals.

MI

LC

Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.

MO

LC

Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.


18.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses on CMR1 board. Table 18-4 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board. Table 18-4 Valid slots for CMR1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11

18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1 The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table 18-5 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1945



Table 18-5 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-6. Table 18-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A/D

1

MI/MO

2

IN/OUT

3

NOTE


18.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 18-7. Table 18-7 CMR1 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



1946



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

-


Actual Band Type

-


Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default:/

Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Configure Band Type

CWDM

Sets the band type.

Default: CWDM

18.2.10 CMR1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 18-8 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board. Table 18-8 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Correspondi ng interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1260-1360

IN-D

Drop channel insertion loss

dB

≤1

Isolation

dB

> 40

A-OUT

Add channel insertion loss

dB

≤1

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 0.8

Isolation

dB

≥ 25

-

Reflectance

dB

-40


1947



Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.



l





TN21CMR1

0.2

0.3


18.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1C MR 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN2 1C MR 2

N

N

N

N

N

Y


1948




Appearance: – The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.3.5 Front Panel and 18.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

18.3.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-5. Figure 18-5 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system

Client side OTU D1

Client side

OTU A1 D2

IN

OTU

A2

D1

MO

MI

OTU A1 D2

A2 OUT

CMR2

CMR2 MI

MO

OUT

IN

18.3.3 Functions and Features The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-9. Table 18-9 Functions and features of the CMR2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1949




Description

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

18.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board. Figure 18-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board D1

IN

D2

MO

MI

Drop optical module

A1

A2

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1950



to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


18.3.5 Front Panel There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-7 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. Figure 18-8 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1951



Figure 18-7 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board

CMR2 STAT

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2

CMR2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1952




IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT CMR2

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board. l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1953



Table 18-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A2

LC


D1-D2

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



18.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one CMR2 board. Table 18-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board. Table 18-12 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR2 board. Table 18-11 Slots for the TN11CMR2 Product

Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5

Table 18-12 Slots for the TN21CMR2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11


1954



18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-13. Table 18-13 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

First wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Last four digits

Second wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l

"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.

l

"1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-14. Table 18-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

MI/MO

3

IN/OUT

4

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1955



18.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-15. Table 18-15 CMR2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Sets the band type.

Default: CWDM


Optical Specifications Table 18-16 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board. Table 18-16 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271-1611

-


nm

20


1956




Item

Unit

Value

IN-D1 IN-D2

0.5 dB spectral width

nm

≥ ±6.5


dB

≤ 1.5


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT


nm

≥ ±6.5


dB

≤ 1.5

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.0

Isolation

dB

≥ 13

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

NOTE

The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows. l


l


The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows. l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1957






TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2

0.2

0.3


18.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the CMR4 board are TN11 and TN21.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1C MR 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN2 1C MR 4

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have different dimensions. See 18.4.5 Front Panel and 18.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 18.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1958



18.4.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-9. Figure 18-9 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system

Client side 4

OTU

OTU

A1 D4

D1

Client side

IN

OTU

A4

D1

MO

MI

4

OTU

A1 D4

A4 OUT

CMR4

CMR4 MI

MO

OUT

IN

18.4.3 Functions and Features The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-17. Table 18-17 Functions and features of the CMR4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

18.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1959



Figure 18-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board. Figure 18-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board D1

IN

D4

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A4

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1960





18.4.5 Front Panel There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-11 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. Figure 18-12 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1961




CMR4 STAT



OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4

CMR4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1962




IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT CMR4

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1963



Table 18-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR4 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A4

LC


D1-D4

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



18.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one CMR4 board. Table 18-19 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR4 board. Table 18-20 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR4 board. Table 18-19 Slots for the TN11CMR4 Product

Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5

Table 18-20 Slots for the TN21CMR4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11


1964



18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-21. Table 18-21 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First and second digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Third and fourth digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Fifth and sixth digits

Third wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Seventh and eighth digits

Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l


l


l

"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.

l

"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-22. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1965



Table 18-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

MI/MO

5

IN/OUT

6

NOTE


18.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR4 parameters, refer to Table 18-23. Table 18-23 CMR4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Sets the band type.

Default: CWDM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1966




Optical Specifications Table 18-24 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board. Table 18-24 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)

-


nm

20

IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4


nm

≥ ±6.5


dB

≤2


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT


nm

≥ ±6.5


dB

≤2

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Isolation

dB

≥ 13

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

NOTE

The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are four wavelength groups.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1967



Table 18-25 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board Group

Wavelength (nm) A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

1

1291

1311

1331

1351

2

1391

1411

1431

1451

3

1471

1491

1591

1611

4

1511

1531

1551

1571

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows: l


l


The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows: l


l





TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4

0.2

0.3

18.5 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

18.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.



1968



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1D MR 1

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN2 1D MR 1

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11DMR1 and TN21DMR1 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.5.5 Front Panel and 18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

18.5.2 Application The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-13. Figure 18-13 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system 1310nm

OTU

OTU

WD WIN

D M R 1

WOUT

WMO

EA

O A D M

O A D M

EMI

D M R EMO 1

WMI WA

1310nm

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1310nm

EOUT

EIN ED 1310nm


1969



NOTE

The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are actually one physical board. In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards. The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.

18.5.3 Functions and Features The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to query wavelengths. Table 18-26 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board. Table 18-26 Functions and features of the DMR1 board Functions and Features

Description

Basic functions

Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions.

WDM specification


Port concatenation


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

18.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1970



Figure 18-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board WD ED

WMO EMO EMI WMI

EA WA

WIN EIN

Drop optical module

Add optical module

EOUT WOUT

OADM optical module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1971





18.5.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-15 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. Figure 18-16 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1972



Figure 18-15 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board

DMR1 STAT

CAUTION CAUTION


HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS

WOUT WIN EOUT EIN WMO WMI EMO EMI WD WA ED EA DMR1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1973



Figure 18-16 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board

WIN WD WMO WMI WA WOUT EIN ED EMO EMI EA EOUT

DMR1

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board. l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1974



Table 18-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board Interface

Type

Function

EA/WA

LC

Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits.

ED/WD

LC

Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment.

EIN/WIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths.

EOUT/WOUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths.

EMI/WMI

LC

Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards.

EMO/WMO

LC

Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.


18.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DMR1 board. Table 18-28 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board. Table 18-29 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board. Table 18-28 Slots for the TN11DMR1 Product

Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5

Table 18-29 Slots for the TN21DMR1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11


1975



18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table 18-30 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table 18-30 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode

Meaning

Description

First to fourth digits

Optical signal frequency

Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.


Interface Display Table 18-31 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board. Table 18-31 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board Interface on Front Panel

Number on the NM

WA/WD

1

EA/ED

2

WMI/WMO

3

WIN/WOUT

4

EMI/EMO

5

EIN/EOUT

6

NOTE


18.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 18-32. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1976



Table 18-32 DMR1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



-

Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Configure Band Type

C+L

Used to configure the band type.

Default: C+L

18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 18-33 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

EA/ED/WA/ WD


nm

1260-1360

EIN-ED WIN-WD


dB

≤1

Isolation

dB

≥40


dB

≤1

Isolation

dB

≥40

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 0.8

EA-EOUT WA-WOUT

EIN-EMO Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1977




Item

Unit

Value

WIN-WMO

Isolation

dB

≥ 25

EMI-EOUT WMI-WOUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 0.8

Isolation

dB

≥ 15

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions from the multiplexed signals.

Mechanical Specifications Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board: l


l


Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board: l


l





TN11DMR1/TN21DMR1

0.2

0.3

18.6 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

18.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1978




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M R2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN2 1M R2

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11MR2 and TN21MR2 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.6.5 Front Panel and 18.6.10 MR2 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.6.10 MR2 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

18.6.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-17. Figure 18-17 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

Client side

OTU A1 D2

IN

OTU

A2

D1

MO

MI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

A1 D2

A2 OUT

OA

MR2

MR2 OA

OTU

MI

OA

MO

OUT


IN

1979



18.6.3 Functions and Features The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-34. Table 18-34 Functions and features of the MR2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN11MR2.

18.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1980



Figure 18-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board D1

IN

D2

MO

MI

Drop optical module

A1

A2

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1981





18.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-19 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1982



Figure 18-19 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board

MR2 STAT



OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2

MR2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1983



Figure 18-20 shows the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. Figure 18-20 Front panel of the TN21MR2 board

IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT MR2

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1984



Table 18-35 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A2

LC


D1-D2

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MO

LC


MI

LC



18.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one MR2 board. Table 18-36 and Table 18-37 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board. Table 18-36 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board Product

Slot






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5

Table 18-37 Valid slots for the TN21MR2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slot


IU1, IU8, and IU11


1985



18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2 The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-38. Table 18-38 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal.

Last four digits

Frequency of the second optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l

"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.

l

"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-39. Table 18-39 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

MI/MO

3

IN/OUT

4

NOTE




1986



For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-40. Table 18-40 MR2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /


Configure Band Type

C

Sets the band type.

Default: C

18.6.10 MR2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 18-41 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board. Table 18-41 Optical specifications of the MR2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1 IN-D2

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤ 1.5


1987




Item

Unit

Value


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤ 1.5

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.0

Isolation

dB

> 13

-


dB

< 0.2

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows: l


l


The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11MR2/TN21MR2

0.2

0.3


1988




18.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MR4 board are TN11 and TN21.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M R4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN2 1M R4

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11MR4 and TN21MR4 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.7.5 Front Panel and 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

18.7.2 Application As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-21.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1989



Figure 18-21 Position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

4

OTU

A1 D4

IN

Client side

A4

D1

MO

MI

OTU

A1 D4

A4 OUT

OA

MR4

MR4 OA

4

OTU

MI

MO

OUT

IN

OA


Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/ from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1990




IN

D4

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A4

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1991





18.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-23 shows the front panel of the TN11MR4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1992



Figure 18-23 Front panel of the TN11MR4 board

MR4 STAT



OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4

MR4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1993



Figure 18-24 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively. Figure 18-24 Front panel of the TN21MR4 board

IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT MR4

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR4 board. l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1994



Table 18-43 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR4 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A4

LC


D1-D4

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



18.7.6 Valid Slots One slot house one MR4 board. Table 18-44 and Table 18-45 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board. Table 18-44 Valid slots for the TN11MR4 board Product

Slot






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-U17


IU2-IU5

Table 18-45 Valid slots for the TN21MR4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slot


IU1, IU8, and IU11


1995



18.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-46. Table 18-46 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of first optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of forth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l


l

"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

For the mapping between the characteristic codes of the MR4 boards and signal frequencies, see Table 18-50 in 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-47. Table 18-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3


1996




Interface on the NM

A4/D4

4

MI/MO

5

IN/OUT

6

NOTE


18.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR4 parameters, refer to Table 18-48. Table 18-48 MR4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /


Configure Band Type

C

Sets the band type.

Default: C


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1997



Optical Specifications Table 18-49 lists the optical specifications of the MR4 board. Table 18-49 Optical specifications of the MR4 board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤ 2.2


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤ 2.2

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Isolation

dB

> 13

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1998



Table 18-50 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

G r o u p

C h ar a ct er is ti c C o d e

A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

Wa vel en gth No .

Wav elen gth (nm)

Fre que ncy (T Hz)

W a v el e n gt h N o.

Wa vele ngt h (nm )

Fre qu enc y (T Hz )

W av el en gt h N o.

Wa vele ngt h (nm )

Fre que ncy (TH z)


Wave lengt h (nm)

Freq uenc y (THz )

1

9 2 1 0 9 2 4 0

80

1560 .61

192. 10

7 8

155 9.79

192 .20

76

155 8.98

192. 30

74

1558. 17

192.4 0

2

9 2 5 0 9 2 8 0

72

1557 .36

192. 50

7 0

155 6.55

192 .60

68

155 5.75

192. 70

66

1554. 94

192.8 0

3

9 2 9 0 9 3 2 0

64

1554 .13

192. 90

6 2

155 3.33

193 .00

60

155 2.52

193. 10

58

1551. 72

193.2 0

4

9 3 3 0 9 3 6 0

56

1550 .92

193. 30

5 4

155 0.12

193 .40

52

154 9.32

193. 50

50

1548. 51

193.6 0


A4/D4

1999


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


G r o u p


A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

Wa vel en gth No .

Wav elen gth (nm)

Fre que ncy (T Hz)


Wa vele ngt h (nm )



Wa vele ngt h (nm )

Fre que ncy (TH z)


Wave lengt h (nm)

Freq uenc y (THz )

5

9 3 7 0 9 4 0 0

48

1547 .72

193. 70

4 6

154 6.92

193 .80

44

154 6.12

193. 90

42

1545. 32

194.0 0

6

9 4 1 0 9 4 4 0

40

1544 .53

194. 10

3 8

154 3.73

194 .20

36

154 2.94

194. 30

34

1542. 14

194.4 0

7

9 4 5 0 9 4 8 0

32

1541 .35

194. 50

3 0

154 0.56

194 .60

28

153 9.77

194. 70

26

1538. 98

194.8 0

8

9 4 9 0 9 5 2 0

24

1538 .19

194. 90

2 2

153 7.40

195 .00

20

153 6.61

195. 10

18

1535. 82

195.2 0


A4/D4

2000



G r o u p


A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

Wa vel en gth No .

Wav elen gth (nm)

Fre que ncy (T Hz)


Wa vele ngt h (nm )



Wa vele ngt h (nm )

Fre que ncy (TH z)


Wave lengt h (nm)

Freq uenc y (THz )

9

9 5 3 0 9 5 6 0

16

1535 .04

195. 30

1 4

153 4.25

195 .40

12

153 3.47

195. 50

10

1532. 68

195.6 0

1 0

9 5 7 0 9 6 0 0

8

1531 .90

195. 70

6

153 1.12

195 .80

4

153 0.33

195. 90

2

1529. 55

196.0 0

Mechanical Specifications Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows: l


l


Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows: l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2001






TN11MR4/TN21MR4

0.2

0.3


18.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M R8

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

18.8.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex eight channels of signals. For the position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-25.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2002



Figure 18-25 Position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

8

Client side

OTU

A1 D8

IN

OTU

A8

D1

MO

MI

OTU

A1 D8

A8 OUT

OA

MR8

MR8 OA

8

MI

MO

OUT

IN

OA


Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2003




IN

D8

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A8

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2004





18.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-27 shows the front panel of the MR8 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2005



Figure 18-27 Front panel of the MR8 board

MR8 STAT

CAUTION CAUTION


HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS

D4

IN

A4

OUT

D5

MO

A5

MI

D6

D1

A6

A1

D7

D2

A7

A2

D8

D3

A8

A3

MR8





2006



Interfaces Table 18-52 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A8

LC


D1-D8

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



18.8.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one MR8 board. Table 18-53 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board. Table 18-53 Valid slots for the MR8 board Product

Slot






IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2007



18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-54. Table 18-54 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of the eighth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.



l

"9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.

l

The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-55. Table 18-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2


2008




Interface on the NM

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

A5/D5

5

A6/D6

6

A7/D7

7

A8/D8

8

MI/MO

9

IN/OUT

10

NOTE


18.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR8 parameters, refer to Table 18-56. Table 18-56 MR8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /


2009



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band Type

C

Sets the band type.

Default: C


Optical Specifications Table 18-57 lists the optical specifications of the MR8 board. Table 18-57 Optical specifications of the MR8 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤4


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT

-1dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤4

IN-MRO MRI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 3.5

Isolation

dB

> 13

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40


2010



Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths. Table 18-58 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8 Group

1

2

3

4

5

Characteristic Code

92109280

92909360

93709440

94509520

95309600

A1/D1

Waveleng th No.

80

64

48

32

16

Waveleng th (nm)

1560.61

1554.13

1547.72

1541.35

1535.04

Frequenc y (THz)

192.10

192.90

193.70

194.50

195.30

Waveleng th No.

78

62

46

30

14

Waveleng th (nm)

1559.79

1553.33

1546.92

1540.56

1534.25

Frequenc y (THz)

192.20

193.00

193.80

194.60

195.40

Waveleng th No.

76

60

44

28

12

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.98

1552.52

1546.12

1539.77

1533.47

Frequenc y (THz)

192.30

193.10

193.90

194.70

195.50

Waveleng th No.

74

58

42

26

10

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.17

1551.72

1545.32

1538.98

1532.68

Frequenc y (THz)

192.40

193.20

194.00

194.80

195.60

Waveleng th No.

72

56

40

24

8

Waveleng th (nm)

1557.36

1550.92

1544.53

1538.19

1531.90

Frequenc y (THz)

192.50

193.30

194.10

194.90

195.70

Waveleng th No.

70

54

38

22

6

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

A5/D5

A6/D6

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2011



Group

1

2

3

4

5

Characteristic Code

92109280

92909360

93709440

94509520

95309600

Waveleng th (nm)

1556.55

1550.12

1543.73

1537.40

1531.12

Frequenc y (THz)

192.60

193.40

194.20

195.00

195.80

Waveleng th No.

68

52

36

20

4

Waveleng th (nm)

1555.75

1549.32

1542.94

1536.61

1530.33

Frequenc y (THz)

192.70

193.50

194.30

195.10

195.90

Waveleng th No.

66

50

34

18

2

Waveleng th (nm)

1554.94

1548.51

1542.14

1535.82

1529.55

Frequenc y (THz)

192.80

193.60

194.40

195.20

196.00

A7/D7

A8/D8



l





TN11MR8

0.2

0.3

18.9 MR8V MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

18.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2012




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M R8V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

18.9.2 Application The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel. For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-28. Figure 18-28 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system Client side

OTU D1

OA

8

Client side

OTU

A1 D8

IN

A8

D1

MO

MI

OTU

A1 D8

A8 OUT

OA

MR8V

MR8V OA

8

OTU

MI

OA

MO

OUT

IN

18.9.3 Functions and Features The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-59.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2013



Table 18-59 Functions and features of the MR8V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Supported

18.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board. Figure 18-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board D1

D8

MO

MI

A1

A2

A8

VOA

VOA

VOA

IN VO VI

V O A

Drop optical module

Add optical module

OUT

OADM optical module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


2014



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals. The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface. NOTE

l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can be changed manually.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals. – Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of pass-through wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


18.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-30 shows the front panel of the MR8V board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2015



Figure 18-30 Front panel of the MR8V board

MR8V STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION



D4

OUT

A4

IN

D5

MO

A5

MI

D6

D1

A6

A1

D7

D2

A7

A2

D8

D3

A8

A3

VO VI

MR8V



l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2016


l




Interfaces Table 18-60 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A8

LC


D1-D8

LC


IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side when the IN interface is not connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board. Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber.

OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC


VI

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.

VO

LC

Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.


18.9.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one MR8V board. Table 18-61 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2017



Table 18-61 Valid slots for the MR8V board Product

Slot






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is IU1.

18.9.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-62. Table 18-62 Characteristic code for the MR8V board Code

Meaning

First four digits


Last four digits



"V"

Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel

Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

Description

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l


l


l

"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2018



Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


l



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-63. Table 18-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

A5/D5

5

A6/D6

6

A7/D7

7

A8/D8

8

MI/MO

9

IN/OUT

10

VI

11

VO

12

NOTE


18.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 18-64. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2019



Table 18-64 MR8V parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /


Configure Band Type

C

Sets the band type.

Default: C Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default:Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.


-



-


18.9.10 MR8V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2020



Optical Specifications Table 18-65 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board. Table 18-65 Optical specifications of the MR8V board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8

–1 dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤4


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT VI-VO

–1 dB spectral width

nm

≥ 0.2


dB

≤6

Attenuation range

dB

0-20

Adjustment accuracy

dB

1 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)

IN-MRO MRI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 3.5

Isolation

dB

> 13

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

1.5 (attenuation ≤ 15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2021



Table 18-66 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V Group A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

A5/D5

A6/D6

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

2

3

4

5

Waveleng th No.

80

64

48

32

16

Waveleng th (nm)

1560.61

1554.13

1547.72

1541.35

1535.04

Frequenc y (THz)

192.10

192.90

193.70

194.50

195.30

Waveleng th No.

78

62

46

30

14

Waveleng th (nm)

1559.79

1553.33

1546.92

1540.56

1534.25

Frequenc y (THz)

192.20

193.00

193.80

194.60

195.40

Waveleng th No.

76

60

44

28

12

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.98

1552.52

1546.12

1539.77

1533.47

Frequenc y (THz)

192.30

193.10

193.90

194.70

195.50

Waveleng th No.

74

58

42

26

10

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.17

1551.72

1545.32

1538.98

1532.68

Frequenc y (THz)

192.40

193.20

194.00

194.80

195.60

Waveleng th No.

72

56

40

24

8

Waveleng th (nm)

1557.36

1550.92

1544.53

1538.19

1531.90

Frequenc y (THz)

192.50

193.30

194.10

194.90

195.70

Waveleng th No.

70

54

38

22

6

Waveleng th (nm)

1556.55

1550.12

1543.73

1537.40

1531.12

Frequenc y (THz)

192.60

193.40

194.20

195.00

195.80


2022



Group A7/D7

A8/D8

1

2

3

4

5

Waveleng th No.

68

52

36

20

4

Waveleng th (nm)

1555.75

1549.32

1542.94

1536.61

1530.33

Frequenc y (THz)

192.70

193.50

194.30

195.10

195.90

Waveleng th No.

66

50

34

18

2

Waveleng th (nm)

1554.94

1548.51

1542.14

1535.82

1529.55

Frequenc y (THz)

192.80

193.60

194.40

195.20

196.00



l





TN11MR8V

7.7

8.6

18.10 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

18.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2023



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1SB M2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

18.10.2 Application The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-31. Figure 18-31 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system

Client side OTU D1

Client side

OTU A1 D2

LINE

A2

OTU D1

OTU A1 D2

EXT EXT

SBM2

A2 LINE

SBM2

18.10.3 Functions and Features The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-67. Table 18-67 Functions and features of the SBM2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical signals must be of different wavelengths.

WDM specification

Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.

Cascading interface

Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards.


2024




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

18.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board. Figure 18-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board D1

LINE

D2

A1

Drop optical module

A2

Add optical module

EXT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2025



The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


18.10.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-33 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2026



Figure 18-33 Front panel of the SBM2 board

SBM2 STAT



EXT LINE D1 A1 D2 A2

SBM2





2027



Interfaces Table 18-68 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1/A2

LC


D1/D2

LC


LINE

LC

Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.

EXT

LC

Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.


18.10.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SBM2 board. Table 18-69 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board. Table 18-69 Valid slots for the SBM2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2028



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-70. Table 18-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1

1

D1

2

A2

3

D2

4

LINE

5

EXT

6

18.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 18-71. Table 18-71 SBM2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and displays the optical interface name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

-


Actual Band Type

-


Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Sets the band type.

Default: CWDM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2029



18.10.9 SBM2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 18-72 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board. Table 18-72 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271 to 1611

LINE-D1 LINE-D2


dB

≤3

Isolation

dB

≥ 30

A1-LINE A2-LINE


dB

≤3

Isolation

dB

≥ 30

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

Pass-through loss

dB

≤ 1.5

CWDM



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11SBM2

0.2

0.3


2030


19

19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

About This Chapter 19.1 Overview Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multiwavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems. 19.2 RDU9 RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band) 19.3 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board 19.4 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board 19.5 TD20 TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board 19.6 TM20 TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board 19.7 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board 19.8 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 19.9 WSMD2 WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 19.10 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 19.11 WSMD9

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2031



WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2032



19.1 Overview Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multiwavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems.

Positions of ROADM Boards in a WDM System Figure 19-1 shows the position of RAODM boards in a WDM system by using the WSMD4 board as an example.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2033



Figure 19-1 Positions of ROADM boards in a WDM system Client services

Client services

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Line units

Line units

Line units

Line units

OD C-ODD

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

OM C-EVEN

Client services

OD C-ODD

West

F I U

OA OA

OA OA

OA

OA

OA

WSMD4 (north)

WSMD4 (south)

WSMD4 (west)

WSMD4 (east)

OA

OA

OA

OD C-EVEN

OA OA

F I U

South

F I U

East

OA OA

OA

ITL

ITL OM C-EVEN

OM C-EVEN

ITL

OA

North

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

ITL

F I U

Client services

OM C-ODD

OD C-ODD

OM C-EVEN

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

OD C-ODD

Line units

Line units

Line units

Line units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Client services

Client services

Client services West signal

North signal

East signal

Client services South signal

Pass-through signal

Main Functions Table 19-1 lists the main functions of ROADM boards. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2034



Table 19-1 Main functions of ROADM boards Board

Function


RDU9

Broadcasts service signals to nine directions.

80

RMU9

Adds eight optical signals. Each add port on the board can connect to a tunable wavelength OTU board to flexibly receive eight optical signals.

80

ROAM

Flexibly adds/drops, passes, and blocks 40 services to achieve dynamic grooming of wavelengths on a WDM ring.

40

TD20

Broadcasts 20 coherent service signals in one multiplexed signal to 20 directions.

80

TM20

Adds 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and multiplexes the signals into one multi-wavelength signal.

80

WSD9

Demultiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.

l TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9: 40 l TN13WSD9: 80

WSM9

Multiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.

l TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9: 40 l TN13WSM9: 80

WSMD2

Broadcasts the main channel signal to two directions and adds any wavelengths.

40

WSMD4

Broadcasts the main channel signal to four directions and adds any wavelengths.

l TN11WSMD4: 40

Broadcasts the main channel signal to nine directions and adds any wavelengths.

80

WSMD9

l TN12WSMD4: 80

19.2 RDU9 RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)

19.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2035



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1RD U9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

19.2.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-2. Figure 19-2 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system Client-side O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

8

DM8

DM1

OA

OA

RDU9

IN

OUT

EXPO

EXPI

WSM9

AM8

8

AM1

O T U

O T U

MUX AM1

EXPI

EXPO

8

AM8

WSM9

RDU9

OUT

IN

DMUX O T U

Client-side

O T U

OA

OA

DM1

DM8

8

MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

DMUX

DMUX DCM

Client-side

DCM DMUX

O O T T U U

O T U

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2036



19.2.3 Functions and Features The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-2. Table 19-2 Functions and features of the RDU9 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine directions at the same time.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification.





Optical-layer ASON

Supported

19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2037



Figure 19-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board DM1

DM2

DM3

DM4

DM5

DM6

DM7

DM8

Optical demultiplexer module ROA

MONI

TOA

MONO

IN

EXPO

Optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface. The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface. If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface directly. The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the MONI interface for performance detection.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2038



Module Function l

Optical module – Broadcasts signals in nine directions. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.

l


l


19.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-4 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2039



Figure 19-4 Front panel of the RDU9 board

RDU9 STAT ACT PROG SRV



MONO MONI EXPO IN TOA ROA DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8

RDU9



2040



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board Interface

Type

Function

DM1-DM8

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit.

IN

LC


EXPO

LC


MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input through the ROA interface. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the EXPO interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

TOA

LC

Used as the cascade output interface.

ROA

LC

Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTE

When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.



2041



19.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one RDU9 board. Table 19-4 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board. Table 19-4 Valid slots for the RDU9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-5. Table 19-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

DM1-DM8

3-10

TOA/ROA

11

MONI

12

MONO

13

19.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-6. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2042



Table 19-6 RDU9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and displays the optical interface name.

Configure Band

C



-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

19.2.9 RDU9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-7 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Insertion loss

IN-Drop (DM1-DM8)

dB

≤ 12.5

ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8)

dB

≤ 11.5

IN-EXPO

dB

≤ 12.5

IN-TOA

dB

≤1

dB

≤ 1.2

Consistency of the insertion loss of each channel

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2043



Item

Unit

Value

Reflectance

dB

< -40


dB

≤ 0.5



l





TN11RDU9

6.0

6.6

19.3 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board

19.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1R MU 9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 19-8 lists the types of the RMU9 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2044



Table 19-8 Type description of the RMU9 board Board

Type

Description

TN11RMU 9

01

Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band.

02

Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and supports the port blocking function.

19.3.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units. For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-5. Figure 19-5 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system Client-side O O T T U U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

O T U

MUX

DCM DM1 IN

WSD9

OA

OA

DM8

8

AM1

MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

OUT

WSD9 EXPI

8

AM8

8 RMU9

RMU9 OUT AM8

EXPO

IN

DM8

8

OA

OA

DM1

DCM

DMUX

O T U

Client-side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

AM1

EXPO EXPI

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side


2045



NOTE


19.3.3 Functions and Features The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-9. Table 19-9 Functions and features of the RMU9 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-wavelength signals to the main path. When working with an OTU board supporting tunable wavelengths, the RMU9 board can receive any wavelength through any of the AM1-AM8 optical ports.

WDM specification






Port blocking

Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical interfaces. NOTE Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2046



Figure 19-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board AM1

AM2

AM3

AM4

AM5

AM6

AM7

AM8

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

Optical multiplexer module TOA

MONO

ROA

OUT

EXPI

MONI

Optical module PIN optical power detection module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. NOTE

l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted. l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.

After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface. The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA optical interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2047



After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface. A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection. A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board. – Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.

l

Optical power detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface.

l


l


19.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-7 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2048



Figure 19-7 Front panel of the RMU9 board

RMU9 STAT ACT PROG SRV

MONO MONI OUT EXPI TOA ROA AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

RMU9



l


l


l





2049



Table 19-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC

Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or line board, or receives a multi-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an optical multiplexer board.

OUT

LC


EXPI

LC


MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the main optical path. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the TOA interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB).

TOA

LC

Used as the cascade output interface.

ROA

LC

Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTE

When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.


19.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one RMU9 board. Table 19-11 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2050



Table 19-11 Valid slots for the RMU9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-12. Table 19-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

EXPI

1

OUT

2

AM1-AM8

3-10

TOA/ROA

11

MONI

12

MONO

13

19.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-13. Table 19-13 RMU9 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



2051



Field

Value

Description


-








See D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-


Block Port

Disabled, Enabled

Before wavelengths are added to the AM interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to Enabled. After configurations of wavelengths and services on the OTU are complete, set this parameter to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Before the OTU where wavelengths are added is replaced, set this parameter to Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and wavelengths and services are configured, set this parameter to Disabled.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2052



Field

Value

Description


-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

19.3.9 RMU9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-14 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board. Table 19-14 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Insertion loss

EXPI-OUT

dB

≤ 8.5

AMxa-TOA

dB

≤ 12.5b

ROA-OUT

dB

≤ 1.5

Reflectance

dB

< -40

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Attenuation precision

dB

< 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)

VOA attenuation under channel blocking functionc

dB

> 42


dB

≤ 0.5

NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2053






TN11RMU901

7.7

8.6

TN11RMU902

8.2

9

19.4 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board

19.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1RO AM

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Type Table 19-15 lists the types of the ROAM board. Table 19-15 Type description of the ROAM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Type

Description

TN11ROAM

01

Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

02

Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.


2054



19.4.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-8. Figure 19-8 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system IN

EXPO EXPI

OUT

OA ROAM

ROAM OA

OUT

EXPI

DM

M01

O O T T U U

M40

EXPO

O O T T U U

M40

40

O T U

OA

IN

M01

40

DMUX

OA

O T U

Client-side

DM

DMUX O O O T T T U U U

O T U

Client-side

NOTE


19.4.3 Functions and Features The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-16. Table 19-16 Functions and features of the ROAM board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network.

WDM specification


Power equilibrium

Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.


2055




Description



Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM. Figure 19-9 Functions and features of the ROAM board

OUT

M01

M02

M40

VOA

VOA

VOA EXPI

Optical multiplexer module Splitter

IN

EXPO DM

PLC optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2056



unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface. The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

PLC optical module – Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board. – The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals.

l


l


19.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-10 shows the front panel of the ROAM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2057



Figure 19-10 Front panel of the ROAM board ROAM STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION

CAUTION

HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

EXPI

DM

M21

M31

M12

M22

M32

M13

M23

M14

M24

M33 M34

M15

M25

M35

M16

M26

M36

M17 M18

M27 M28

M37 M38

M19 M20

M29 M30

M39 M40

IN M11

EXPO

OUT


M01 196.00 M11195.00 M21 194.00 M31 193.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M22 193.90 M32 192.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M23 193.80 M33 192.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M24 193.70 M34 192.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M25 193.60 M35 192.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M26 193.50 M36 192.50 M07 195.40 M17194.40 M27 193.40 M37 192.40 M08 195.30 M18194.30 M28 193.30 M38 192.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M29 193.20 M39 192.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M30 193.10 M40 192.10

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

ROAM



l


l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2058



Table 19-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or line board.

DM

LC

Drops channels to the local station.

OUT

LC


IN

LC


EXPO

LC

Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal.

EXPI

LC

Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-18 and Table 19-19 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board. Table 19-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75


2059



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 19-19 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39


2060



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


19.4.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one ROAM board. Table 19-20 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board. Table 19-20 Valid slots for the ROAM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU15

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-21. Table 19-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN


2061




Interface on the NM

EXPO

2

EXPI

3

OUT

4

DM

5

A01-A40

6-45

NOTE The A01–A40 interfaces correspond to the M01– M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.

19.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 19-22. Table 19-22 ROAM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: Even


2062



Field

Value

Wavelength Target -32 to 8 Output Power (dBm) Default: /

Description Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the single wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed.

19.4.9 ROAM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-23 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board. Table 19-23 Optical specifications of the ROAM board Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

Mxa-OUT

dB

≤ 9b

IN-DM

dB

≤7

EXPI-OUT

dB

≤ 14b

IN-EXPO

dB

≤3


nm

1529 - 1561


dB

> 22


dB

> 25

Attenuation range

dB

0 to 20

Attenuation precision

dB

< 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)

Module switch time

ms

≤ 50

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 30

-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength

nm

> 0.3

-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength

nm

> 0.2

NOTE a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2063





l





TN11ROAM

66

72.6

19.5 TD20 TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board

19.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TD20 board is TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2TD 20

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

19.5.2 Application The TD20 board is a demultiplexer board and applies to ROADM sites. It is used to broadcast a multi-wavelength signal that contains 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths. The TD20 board must work with coherent OTU or line boards. It is intended for colorless applications because coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection. For the position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-11.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2064



Figure 19-11 Position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system W

NE1

NE3

OA

OA

NE2

N

OUT

NE4

OA IN

OUT

DM1

AM1

WSMD4 AM1

W S

N

OA S

OA

NE1

OA

IN WSMD4 DM1

IN W S DM1 M D AM1 OUT 4

AM1

DM1

W OUT S OA M D 4

E

OA

IN

E DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4

NE5

WSMD4

IN

NE7

OA

OA

IN

OUT

WSM9

NE6

WSD9

AM1

AM4

DM1

OUT

OUT

IN

TM20 AM1

AM20

O T U

AM1

O T U

O T U

Directionless

OUT

TM20

TD20

AM20

DM1 DM20

O T U

O T U

Colorless

DM4 IN

TD20 DM1

O O T T U U

DM20

O T U

: Current path : Other path (S direction) : Other path (N direction) : Other path (E direction) OTU

: Coherent OTU

19.5.3 Functions and Features The TD20 board performs the colorless drop function. It drops a maximum of 20 optical signals that are carried over different wavelengths, compensates for broadcast loss, and supports online monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance. Table 19-24 lists the functions and features of the TD20 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2065



Table 19-24 Functions and features of the TD20 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes a multi-wavelength signal into 20 coherent optical signals that are carried over different wavelengths and broadcasts the signals. The board is intended for colorless applications.

WDM specification


Compensation for broadcast loss

Uses a built-in EDFA module to compensate for broadcast loss. l The EDFA module works in gain-locking mode. – Adding or dropping one or more channels of signals does not affect the gain of signals on other channels. – The optical signal power jitter on some channels does not affect the signal gain of other channels. l The EDFA module has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the system can be upgraded or expanded without interrupting services by using this function to suppress channel optical power jitter.




l Monitors and reports optical power of the built-in EDFA module.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TD20 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TD20.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2066



Figure 19-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the TD20

IN

DM01 DM02

EDFA optical module Optical Splitter demultiplexer VOA VO AIN AOUT DMIN module

MON

DM20

Optical module Detection for PIN pump current and temperature

Driving current

Driving and detection module

Control Memory

Communication

CPU



Required voltage

SCC


Signal flow 1.

The board receives the coherent multi-wavelength signal to be dropped through its IN port and sends the signal to the VOA for power adjustment.

2.

After the power adjustment by the VOA, the signal is sent to the EDFA module for power amplification.

3.

The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring.

4.

The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the amplified multi-wavelength optical signal into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and transmits the light beams through the DM1-DM20 ports.

Module function l

Optical module – The VOA adjusts the signal power to ensure that the signal power meets the system requirement. – The EDFA module amplifies the optical power to compensate for the broadcast loss. – The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring. – The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the coherent multi-wavelength signal into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and broadcasts the light beams to 20 directions.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Driving and detection module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2067



– Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. – Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l


l


19.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TD20 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-13 shows the front panel of the TD20 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2068



Figure 19-13 Front panel of the TD20 board

TD20 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN DM17 DM18 DM19 DM20

DM01 DM02 DM03 DM04 DM05 DM06 DM07 DM08 DM09 DM10 DM11 DM12 DM13 DM14 DM15 DM16

MON

TD20



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2069



l


l



Interfaces Table 19-25 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TD20 board Interface

Type

Function

DM01–DM20

LC

Equally splits the multi-wavelength signal into 20 light beams, each with 20 single-wavelength signals, and broadcasts the light beams to the IN ports on coherent OTU or line boards.

IN

LC

Receives a coherent multi-wavelength signal and sends the signal to the DMx port on a WSD9 board.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical spectrum analysis board or an optical spectrum analyzer for online spectrum monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 of the total composite signal at the EDFA OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).


19.5.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TD20 board. Table 19-26 shows the valid slots for the TD20 board. Table 19-26 Valid slots for the TD20 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


2070



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TD20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TD20 board, the slot number of the TD20 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-27. Table 19-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TD20 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

AIN

2

AOUT

3

VO

4

DMIN

5

DM01 to DM20

6 to 25

MON

26

19.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For TD20 Parameters, refer to Table 19-28. Table 19-28 TD20 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



2071



Field

Value

Description









-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the difference between the current attenuation and the required attenuation.

Actual Band

-



-



All



-


Gain (dB)

-

The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: All


2072



Field

Value

Description

Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. See D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: The specific value is related to the module.

19.5.9 TD20 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-29 Optical specifications of the TD20 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Total input power range of IN port

dBm

-17.5 to 17

Input power range per channel of IN port

dBm

-17.5 to 4

Inherent insertion loss of internal VOA

dB

≤1.5

Dynamic attenuation range of internal VOA

dB

20

Adjustment accuracy of internal VOA

dB

1

Nominal input power range of internal OA

dBm

-19 to -3

Input power range per channel of internal OA

dBm

-19 to -16

Nominal gain of internal OA

dB

23

Noise figure (NF) of internal OA

dB

≤6.0

Maximum total output optical power of internal OA

dBm

20

Total output power range of DMxa ports

dBm

-13 to 9

Single output power range of DMxa ports

dBm

-13 to -4

Maximum channel insertion loss difference (IN-DMxa)

dB

3

Maximum reflectance tolerance at input

dB

<-40


2073



Item

Unit

Value

Maximum reflectance tolerance at output

dB

<-40


dB

≤0.5

a: DMx represents the DM01-DM20 interface.



l





TN12TD20

13.0

15.0

19.6 TM20 TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board

19.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TM20 board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1T M20

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


2074



19.6.2 Application The TM20 board is a multiplexer board and is intended for colorless applications. It applies to ROADM sites and is used to add 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths and multiplex these signals into one multi-wavelength signal. For the position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-14. Figure 19-14 Position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system W

NE1

NE3

OA

OA

NE2

N

OUT

NE4

OA IN

OUT

DM1

AM1

WSMD4 AM1

W S

N

OA S

OA

NE1

OA

IN WSMD4 DM1

IN W S DM1 M D AM1 OUT 4

AM1

DM1

W OUT S OA M D 4

E

OA

IN

E DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4

NE5

WSMD4

IN

NE7

OA

OA

IN

OUT

WSM9

NE6

WSD9

AM1

AM4

DM1

OUT

OUT

IN

TM20 AM1

TM20

AM20

O T U

AM1

O T U

O T U

Directionless

OUT

DM4

TD20

TD20

AM20 DM1

O T U

DM20

O T U

Colorless

IN DM1

O O T T U U

DM20

O T U

: Current path : Other path (S direction) : Other path (N direction) : Other path (E direction) OTU

: Coherent OTU

NOTE

Optical cross-connections must be created for the TM20 board on the U2000 and wavelengths must be specified during the cross-connection creation.

19.6.3 Functions and Features The TM20 board performs the colorless add function. It adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical signals and supports online monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2075



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-30. Table 19-30 Functions and features of the TM20 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and multiplexes the signals into one multiwavelength signal. The board is intended for colorless applications. l Supports manual configuration of add wavelengths.

WDM specification





Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TM20 board consists of the multiplexer, splitter, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2076



Figure 19-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board

Multiplexer

AM01 AM02

Splitter OUT

AM20

MON

Optical module Temperature control


PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow 1.

Each of the AM01–AM20 optical ports receives one single-wavelength coherent optical signal and sends the signal to the interconnected multiplexer.

2.

The multiplexer multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength optical signals into one multiwavelength optical signal, and then transmits the signal through its OUT optical port.

3.

The power splitter splits the multi-wavelength signal power into two and sends the less signal power to the MON port for performance monitoring. NOTE

The AM01–AM20 optical ports support tunable wavelengths but they must use different wavelengths.

Module Function l

Multiplexer Multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength coherent optical signals into one multi-wavelength optical signal.

l

Splitter Uses the power splitter to split the optical power on the main optical path into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2077


l



l


l


19.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the TM20 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-16 shows the front panel of the TM20 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2078



Figure 19-16 Front panel of the TM20 board

TM20 STAT ACT PROG SRV


MON OUT AM17 AM18 AM19 AM20

AM01 AM02 AM03 AM04 AM05 AM06 AM07 AM08 AM09 AM10 AM11 AM12 AM13 AM14 AM15 AM16


TM20

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2079





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-31lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TM20 board Interface

Type

Function

AM01 to AM20

LC

Receives one single-wavelength coherent light signal from an OTU or line board.

OUT

LC

Transmits a multi-wavelength signal to the AMx optical port on a WSM9 board.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical spectrum analysis board or an optical spectrum analyzer for online spectrum monitoring. The MON port power is 3/97 of the OUT port power. That is, the MON port power is 15 dB lower than the OUT port power. The calculation is: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.


19.6.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one TM20 board. Table 19-32 shows the valid slots for the TM20 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2080



Table 19-32 Valid slots for the TM20 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TM20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left most one of three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TM20 board, the slot number of the TM20 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-33. Table 19-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TM20 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

AM01 to AM20

2 to 21

MON

22

19.6.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For TM20 parameters, refer to Table 19-34.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2081



Table 19-34 TM20 parameters Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Configure Working Band Parity

All


Default: All

19.6.9 TM20 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-35 Optical specifications of the TM20 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80


GHz

50


nm

1529 to 1561

Insertion loss-AMxa-OUT

dB

≤8


dB

1.5

-1 dB spectral width

nm

>0.16

Port isolation

dB

≥20

Extinction ratio

dB

≥30

Reconfiguration time

Second

≤3

Maximum reflectance

dB

–40


dB

≤1

a: AMx represents the AM01 to AM20 interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2082





l

Weight: 3.51 kg (7.74 lb.)




TN11TM20

30.0

45.0

19.7 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

19.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W SD9

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN1 2W SD9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 3W SD9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Appearance: – The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSD9 board of other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSD9 and

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2083



TN11WSD9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.7.5 Front Panel and 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications. l

Specification: – The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications. – The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WSD 9

TN12WSD 9

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version.

TN12WSD 9

None

-

TN13WSD 9

None

-

19.7.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration. l

If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station.

l

If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local station.

For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-17.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2084



Figure 19-17 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system Client-side

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

DCM

MUX

8 DM1

OA

OUT

OA

AM1

DM8

WSD9

IN

EXPO

AM8

AM1

8

O T U

O O T T U U

OUT

IN

WSD9

DM8

OA

OA

DM1

8

8 MUX

AM8

WSM9

EXPI

EXPI EXPO

WSM9

O T U

DCM

DMUX

O O T T U U

O T U

O O T T U U

Client-side

NOTE


19.7.3 Functions and Features The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-36. Table 19-36 Functions and features of the WSD9 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2085




Description

WDM specification







Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

19.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2086



Figure 19-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board DM1 DM2

DM8

Splitter 1 IN

Splitter 2 EXPO

WSS module

MONI

MONO

Optical module Temperature detection

PIN

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

DC power from the backplane

SCC


Signal Flow The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – The WSS module inside the optical module extracts any single wavelengths or wavelength combinations from the multiplexed wavelength, and directs them out the predefined ports of the DM1-DM8 ports. The optical module then sends the remaining wavelengths to the EXPO port. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments. – Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the IN and EXPO port power to the MONI and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2087


l


Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l


l


19.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-19 shows the front panel of the WSD9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2088



Figure 19-19 Front panel of the WSD9 board

WSD9

WSD9

STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION

CAUTION




MONO MONI

MONO MONI

EXPO

EXPO

IN

IN

DM1 DM2

DM1 DM2

DM3 DM4

DM3 DM4

DM5 DM6

DM5 DM6

DM7 DM8

DM7 DM8

WSD9

WSD9

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9

TN13WSD9



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2089




Interfaces Table 19-37 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board Interface

Type

Function

DM1-DM8

LC

Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.

EXPO

LC


IN

LC


MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).


19.7.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9 board. Table 19-38, Table 19-39 and Table 19-40 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2090



Table 19-38 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

Table 19-39 Valid slots for the TN12WSD9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

Table 19-40 Valid slots for the TN13WSD9 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16,


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15


2091



NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-41. Table 19-41 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

DM1-DM8

3-10

MONI

11

MONO

12

19.7.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 19-42. Table 19-42 WSD9 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



2092



Field

Value

Description


Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB), Blocking, /

The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical cross-connections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical cross-connections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. l To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.


-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9: Even l TN13WSD9: All

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2093



19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-43 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board Item

Unit

Value

Type

-

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9

TN13WSD9

Optical channels

-

40

80


GHz

100

50

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8b

≤ 8b


dB

1.5

1.5


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25


dB

> 25

> 25


dB

> 30

> 30

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 35

≥ 35


s

≤3

≤3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40

Directivity

dB

35

35


dB

≤1

≤1

Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths

dB

0-15

0-15

Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths

dB

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)

IN-DMxa IN-EXPO

NOTE a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2094



Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: l

TN11WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l


l


Weight: l

TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)

l

TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)

l

TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)




TN11WSD9

17.0

18.7

TN12WSD9

25.4

28.5

TN13WSD9

25.4

28.5

19.8 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

19.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W SM9

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN1 2W SM9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


2095



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 3W SM9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Appearance: – The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSM9 board of other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.8.5 Front Panel and 19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications. – The laser safety class of TN13WSM9 board is different from that of the WSM9 board of other versions. The laser safety class of TN13WSM9 board is HAZARD LEVEL 1. The laser safety class of TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards is HAZARD LEVEL 1M. For details, see 19.8.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications. – The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For details, see19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WSM 9

TN12WSM 9

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version.

TN12WSM 9

None

-

TN13WSM 9

None

-

19.8.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-20.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2096



Figure 19-20 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system Client-side

O O T T U U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

DCM

8

DM1

OA

OA

OUT

MUX

DM 8

WSD9

IN

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM1

8 MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

8

AM1

AM 8

WSM9

OUT

IN

WSD9

WSM9

AM8

O T U

DM8

8

OA

OA

DM1

DCM

DMUX

O T U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side

NOTE


19.8.3 Functions and Features The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-44. Table 19-44 Functions and features of the WSM9 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation.

WDM specification



2097




Description






Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.

19.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2098



Figure 19-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board AM1 AM2

AM8

Splitter 2

Splitter 1 EXPI

OUT

WSS module

MONI

MONO

Optical module Temperature detection

PIN

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

DC power from the backplane


Signal Flow The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l

If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.

l

If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2099



– Receives any wavelengths (either single wavelengths or wavelength combinations) through the EXPI port and any of AM1-AM8 ports. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments. – Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the EXPI and OUT port power to the MONI and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring. l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

l


l


19.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-22 shows the front panel of the WSM9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2100



Figure 19-22 Front panel of the WSM9 board

WSM9

WSM9

STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION


HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MONO MONI

MONO MONI

OUT EXPI

OUT EXPI

AM1

AM2

AM2

AM1

AM3 AM4

AM3 AM4

AM5

AM6

AM6

AM5

AM7 AM8

AM7 AM8

WSM9

WSM9

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9

TN13WSM9



l


l


l




2101



Interfaces Table 19-45 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC

Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.

OUT

LC


EXPI

LC


MONI

LC

Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

Laser Safety Level TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW). TN13WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

19.8.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9 board. Table 19-46, Table 19-47 and Table 19-48 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2102



Table 19-46 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

Table 19-47 Valid slots for the TN12WSM9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

Table 19-48 Valid slots for the TN13WSM9 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15


2103



NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-49. Table 19-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

EXPI

1

OUT

2

AM1-AM8

3-10

MONI

11

MONO

12

19.8.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 19-50. Table 19-50 WSM9 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



2104



Field

Value

Description


-




The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. l To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.


-



-


Configure Band

C

Sets the working band of a board.

Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



2105



Field

Value

Description


All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9: Even l TN13WSM9: All

19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-51 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value

Type

-

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9

TN13WSM9

Optical channels

-

40

80


GHz

100

50

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8b

≤ 8b


dB

1.5

1.5


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561


nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25


dB

> 25

> 25


dB

> 30

> 30

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 35

≥ 35


s

≤3

≤3

Directivity

dB

35

35

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40


dB

≤1

≤1

AMxa-OUT EXPI-OUT


2106



Item

Unit

Value

Type

-

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9

TN13WSM9

Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths

dB

0-15

0-15

Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths

dB

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)

NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


TN11WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l


l


Weight: l

TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.)

l

TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)

l

TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)




TN11WSM9

17.0

18.7

TN12WSM9

25.4

28.5

TN13WSM9

25.4

28.5

19.9 WSMD2 WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

19.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2107




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W SM D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

19.9.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-23. Figure 19-23 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system O T U

O T U

Clientside

O T U

DMUX

O T U

MUX

DCM AM

DM IN

OA

OUT

OA

WSMD2

WSMD2 OA

OUT

EXPO EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

IN

AM

OA

DM

DCM MUX

O T U

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

DMUX O T U

Clientside

O T U


O T U

2108



19.9.3 Functions and Features The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-52. Table 19-52 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to the AM port.

WDM specification







Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

19.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2109



Figure 19-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2 DM

AM

EXPO

EXPI

Splitter

Splitter

IN

OUT

WSS optical module Optical module

Coupler

MONI

MONO


PIN

PIN

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal flow The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions. Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.

Module function l

Optical module – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the following optical interface: EXPI and AM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2110



– The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l


19.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-25 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2111



Figure 19-25 Front panel of the WSMD2 board

WSMD2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION



MONO MONI OUT IN EXPO EXPI DM AM

WSMD2



2112



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-53 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


DM

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit.

AM

LC

Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.

EXPO

LC

Functions as a cascade output optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPO optical interfaces.

EXPI

LC

Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI optical interfaces.

MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the transmitted main path signal online. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).


2113




19.9.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD2 board. Table 19-54 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board. Table 19-54 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-55. Table 19-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

DM

2

AM

3

OUT


2114




Interface on the NM

EXPO

5

EXPI

6

MONO

7

MONI

8

19.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 19-56. Table 19-56 WSMD2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-





Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2115



Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: Even

19.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-57 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-57 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

40


GHz

100


nm

1529-1561


nm

> 0.32

dB

≤ 8a

Insertion loss

AM-OUT EXPI-OUT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2116



Item

Unit IN-DM

Value ≤ 4.5a

IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference

dB

1.5

Port isolation

dB

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 35


s

≤3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

≤1

Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength

dB

0-15

Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength

dB

≤ 1 (0 dB to 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)

a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l





TN11WSMD2

17.0

18.7

19.10 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

19.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2117




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W SM D4

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

TN1 2W SM D4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 19-58 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board. Table 19-58 Version description of the WSMD4 board Board

Type

Description

TN11WSMD4

01

Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

02

Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

01

Processes the even wavelengths and odd wavelengths in C band.

TN12WSMD4


Function: – The TN11WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The TN12WSMD4 processes 80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see Table 19-58.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 19.10.9 WSMD4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not interchangeable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2118



19.10.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD4 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-26. Figure 19-26 Position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system

West client side

IN

West ODF

F I U

TC

IN

OUT RC

South ODF

TC

OUT

F I U

DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4

AM1 AM2 AM3 AM 4

AM1

DM1

AM2 AM3

DM2

WSMD4

OUT

IN

East client side

AM4 AM3

DM3 DM2 DM1

RC

South client side

East ODF IN

RC

OUT

OUT

WSMD 4

AM4 AM3 AM2 AM1

OUT

TC

AM2 AM1

WSMD4

F I U

IN

DM3 DM4

DM4

OUT

RC

WSMD 4

AM4

IN

OUT

DM4 DM3 DM2 DM1

IN

TC

F I U

North ODF IN

North client side

19.10.3 Functions and Features The WSMD4 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-59. Table 19-59 Functions and features of the WSMD4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2119




Description

WDM specification








Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.

19.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2120



Figure 19-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board D D D D M M M M 1 2 3 4

Splitter IN

A A A A M M M M 1 2 3 4

Splitter

Optical demultiplexer module

OUT

RDU optical WSS optical module module Optical module

MONI

MONO


PIN

PIN

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal flow The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to other directions. The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2121



Module function l

Optical module – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4. – The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The RDU optical module locally drops optical signals and broadcasts wavelength signals to its four ports. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection.

l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2122





CAUTION CAUTION



MONO MONI OUT IN DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4

WSMD4



2123



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-60 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD4 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM4

LC


DM1-DM4

LC


OUT

LC


IN

LC


MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).


19.10.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD4 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2124



Table 19-61 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board. Table 19-61 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

Table 19-62 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board. Table 19-62 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD4 board, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is IU1.




2125



Table 19-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

DM1

2

AM1

3

OUT

4

DM2-DM4

5 to 7

AM2-AM4

8 to 10

MONO

11

MONI

12

19.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 19-64. Table 19-64 WSMD4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2126



Field

Value

Description





-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface.


-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



-



2127



Field

Value

Description


All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSMD4: Even l TN12WSMD4: All


Optical Specifications Table 19-65 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board Item

Unit

TN11WSMD4

TN12WSMD4

Optical channels

-

40

80


GHz

100

50


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8b

≤ 8b

≤8

≤8

AMxa-OUT IN-DMxa

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value


dB

1.5

1.5

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 35

≥ 35


s

≤3

≤3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40

Directivity

dB

35

35


dB

≤1

≤1


dB

0-15

0-15


dB

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)

≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)


2128



Item

Unit

Dimension

-

Value TN11WSMD4

TN12WSMD4

4

4

a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l

Weight: – TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.) – TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)




TN11WSMD4

17

18.7

TN12WSMD4

12

15

19.11 WSMD9 WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

19.11.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WSMD9 board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2129



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W SM D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

19.11.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD9 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-29. Figure 19-29 Position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system Client side

Client side O T U

MUX

DMUX

DCM

O T U

O T U

O T U

DM1 IN

LIN

SIN

EXPI

WSMD9 SIN

WSMD9 EXPO

MUX

O T U

O T U

Client side

DAS1 IN SOUT

AM1

DCM

LOUT

OUT

EXPI

OUT

LOUT

AM1 EXPO

SOUT

DAS1

DCM

LIN

DM1

DMUX

O T U

DCM

O T U

Client side

NOTE

Optical interfaces AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2130



19.11.3 Functions and Features The WSMD9 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-66. Table 19-66 Functions and features of the WSMD9 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as nine channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification. The wavelength of the TN11WSMD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing.







Optical-layer ASON

Supported

19.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD9 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-30 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2131



Figure 19-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board DDDDDDDD MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXPO EXPI

A A A A A A A A MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Optical demultiplexer module

Splitter IN MONI

Splitter OUT

Splitter

WSS optical module

RDU optical module

MONO

Optical module PIN

PIN


Optical power deteciton module

Control Memory


Fuse


Required voltage


Signal flow The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection. The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l

If multiple wavelengths are to be added together, the wavelengths are first sent to the multiplexer board for multiplexing. Then the multiplexed wavelength is sent to the WSMD9 board through one of the AM1-AM8 ports.

l

If single wavelengths are to be added separately, the wavelengths are directly sent to the WSMD9 board from associated OTUs through the AM1-AM8 ports.

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module function l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2132



– The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI. – The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l

Optical power detection module – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2133





CAUTION CAUTION



DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4 DM5 AM5 DM6 AM6

MONO MONI

DM7

OUT

AM7

IN

DM8 AM8

EXPO EXPI

WSMD9



2134



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC


DM1-DM8

LC


OUT

LC


IN

LC


MONI

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

MONO

LC

Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

EXPO

LC


EXPI

LC




2135



19.11.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD9 board. Table 19-68 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board. Table 19-68 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD9 board, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-69. Table 19-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

EXPI

3

OUT

4

DM1-DM8

5-12

AM1-AM8

13-20


2136



19.11.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 19-70. Table 19-70 WSMD9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






-



-


Configure Band

C



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



2137



Field

Value

Description


-



All, Odd, Even



-

Default: All



Optical Specifications Table 19-71 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80


GHz

50

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 8b

AMxa/EXPI-OUT IN-DMxa/EXPO

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

≤ 12


dB

1.5


nm

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.16

Port isolation

dB

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

≥ 35


s

≤3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

≤1


2138



Item

Unit

Value


dB

0 to 15


dB

< 1 (0 to 10 dB)

Dimension

-

< 1.5 (> 10 dB) 9

a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11WSMD9

25

30


2139


20 Optical Amplifier Board

20

Optical Amplifier Board

About This Chapter 20.1 Overview The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the transmission distance. 20.2 CRPC CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band 20.3 DAS1 DAS1: optical amplifier unit 20.4 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board 20.5 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit 20.6 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit 20.7 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit 20.8 RAU1 RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit 20.9 RAU2 RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2140



20.1 Overview The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the transmission distance.

Positions of Optical Amplifier Boards in a WDM System Optical amplifier boards are used to compensate for power loss caused by long haul transmission in fiber communication systems. They are classified into erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) boards and Raman boards. Figure 20-1 shows the positions of optical amplifier boards at an OTM site in a WDM system. Figure 20-1 Positions of EDFA and Raman boards in a WDM system

OTU

EDFA

OM

OTU

FIU

SC1

Raman

OD

EDFA

OTU

OTU

The RAU board integrates the functions of both EDFA and Raman boards. Figure 20-2 shows the positions of RAU boards in a WDM system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2141



Figure 20-2 Positions of RAU boards in a WDM system

OTU

EDFA

OM

OTU

FIU

SC1

EDFA

OD

Raman

OTU

OTU RAU

In Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2: l

EDFA: HBA/OAU1/OBU1/OBU2

l

Raman: CRPC01, RAU1, or RAU2. The WDM system in Figure 20-1 is a backward Raman system where the CRPC01 board is used.

l

RAU: RAU1/RAU2 NOTE

Different from the DAS1 board shown in Figure 20-1, the DAS1 board is mainly used at ROADM sites in a WDM system. For the typical application scenario of the DAS1 board, see 20.3.2 Application.

Main Functions Table 20-1 lists the main functions of optical amplifier boards. For the detailed specifications of each board, see the relevant specification pages. Table 20-1 Main functions of optical amplifier Boards Board

Function

Gain

CRPC

Case-shape Raman pump amplifier board for C band. It generates multi-channel pump light of high power and must be used with EDFA boards.

For the gain range, see 20.2.11 CRPC Specifications.

DAS1

Double optical amplifier board with supervisory channel. It amplifies optical signals using an EDFA optical module, multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical supervisory channel (OSC) signal and the main optical path signal, and processes one OSC signal.

Gain range: 20 dB to 31 dB. For details, see 20.3.9 DAS1 Specifications.

The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2142



Board

Function

Gain

HBA

High-power booster amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board provides a high gain and is generally configured at the transmit end of a long-span system.

Typical gain: 29 dB. For details, see 20.4.10 HBA Specifications.

OAU1

Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

Gain range: 16 dB to 25.5 dB. For details, see 20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications.

The OAU1 board provides two amplifiers for power amplification and a DCM module can be installed in between for dispersion compensation. OBU1


Gain range: 17±1.5 dB to 23±1.5 dB. For details, see 20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications.

OBU2


Gain range: 23±1.5 dB. For details, see 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.

RAU1

Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of high power.

For the gain range, see 20.8.9 RAU1 Specifications.

RAU2

Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of high power.

For the gain range, see 20.9.9 RAU2 Specifications.

The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

20.2 CRPC CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band

20.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2143



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1CR PC

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 20-2 lists the types of the CRPC board. Table 20-2 Type description of the CRPC board Board

Type

Description

CRPC

01

Adopts the backward pumping technology.

03

Adopts the forward pumping technology.

20.2.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.

CAUTION Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the CRPC. For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-3 and Figure 20-4. Figure 20-3 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump) Client side

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OTU OTU OTU OTU

M U X

D M U X

OBU1

OAU1

F I U F I U

CRPC 01

CRPC 01

F I U F I U


OAU1

OBU1

D M U X

M U X

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

2144



Figure 20-4 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump) Client side

OTU

M U X

OTU

D M U X

OTU Client side

OTU

OBU1

OAU1

F I U F I U

F I U

CRPC 03

CRPC 03

F I U

OAU1

OBU1

D M U X

M U X

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

20.2.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-3. Table 20-3 Functions and features of the CRPC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.




Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control current, pump current, and back facet current. Supports return loss detection.

Working mode

Supports the gain locking modes.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

20.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction of the signal light. Figure 20-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction of the signal light. Figure 20-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2145



Figure 20-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)

LINE

Splitter

Signal

Signal

Pump light

Pump source

Raman pump optical module

Detection for pump light power and current

Pumping current and temperature control

PIN

SYS MON

Detection for temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from PDU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC

2146



Figure 20-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)

LINE

Splitter

Signal

Signal

Pump light

Pump source

Raman pump optical module

Detection for pump light power and current

Pumping current and temperature control

PIN

SYS MON

Detection for temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC DC power supply from PDU

Signal Flow l

Backward pump The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.

l

Forward pump The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal.

For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2147



For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 or NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of the AUX board for the communication with the SCC. NOTE

Only when OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack as a slave subrack, the Ethernet interface of the CRPC board can be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of the AUX board.

Module Function l

Raman pump optical module – The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module. – Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l

Power supply module – Converts the DC power supplied by the PDU into the power required by each module on the board.

20.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-7 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2148



Figure 20-7 Front panel of the CRPC board

CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

MON

SYS

LINE

CAUTION

HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CRPC

ALM

RUN

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤

!

!

WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

RS232-1

RS232-2

LAN

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤 WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

Indicators Two indicators are present on the front panel: l

Running status indicator (RUN) - green

l

Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red

See Table 20-4 and Table 20-5 for details. Table 20-4 Red alarm indicator

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Flash State

Description

Off

There is no alarm.

Three times every other second

There is a critical alarm.

Twice every other second

There is a major alarm.

Once every other second

There is a minor alarm.

On

Hardware is faulty, or the self-check fails.


2149



Table 20-5 Green running indicator Flash State

Description

Flashes five times per second

The board is not in service.

Flashes once every other second

The board is in service (normal).

2 seconds on and 2 seconds off

The communication with the SCC unit stops, and the board is in off-line working state.

Interfaces Table 20-6 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-6 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board Interface

Type

Function

LINE

LSH/APC

l For backward pump: receives optical signals from the line, which have been amplified in distributed manner. l For forward pump: transmits optical signals to the line.

SYS

LC

l For backward pump: connects to an FIU board and transmits amplified optical signals to the FIU board. l For forward pump: receives optical signals from an FIU board.

MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

LAN

RJ45

For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with the SCC.

RS232-1/ RS232-2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-

RS232 communication interface


2150



Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board rangesfrom10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

20.2.6 Valid Slots The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not inside the subrack. The LAN interface on the CRPC board can be connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the master or a slave subrack to implement communication with the system control board in the master subrack. The CRPC board is installed outside a cabinet, but a logical slot is designed for a CRPC board for the management purpose. Table 20-7 lists the supported logical slots for the CRPC board. On the NMS, the logical slot of the CRPC board can be managed only by the master subrack. Each NE supports a maximum of four CRPC boards. Table 20-7 Valid slots for the CRPC board Product

Supported Logical Slots


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


Non-extended slot numbering mode: IU28IU31 Extended slot numbering mode: IU120IU123

20.2.7 Dip Switch and Jumper There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4. Figure 20-8 shows the number of each jumper.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2151



Figure 20-8 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CRPC

9

1

1

9

2

10

J3

2

J4

10

CPU

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers. For OptiX OSN 6800: l

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.

l


l


l


l

Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)

l

Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode)

l

Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.

l


l


l

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU29. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU30. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31. The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.

For OptiX OSN 8800: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2152



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.

20.2.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-8. Table 20-8 Characteristic code for the CRPC board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Two digits

Gain

Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-9. Table 20-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

LINE


2153




Interface on the NM

SYS

2

MON

3

20.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 20-10. Table 20-10 CRPC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Board Work Type

C, C + L, L Default: C

Sets the working mode of a board. According to the board working mode, you can specify the type of the band from which the optical signals are accessed.

Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C



All, Odd, Even

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: All

Default: Off

Selects the desired parity of the working band. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2154



Field

Value

Description

Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of an optical amplifier board. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum value or larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally. See D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. See D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. See D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

The Upper Threshold of RL to starting the pump (dB)

-

Displays the upper threshold of the return loss to starting the pump.

The Lower Threshold of RL to starting the pump (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the return loss to starting the pump.

The Upper Threshold of RL alarm (dB)

-

Displays the upper threshold of the return loss alarm.

The Lower Threshold of RL alarm (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the return loss alarm.

RL Flag

Enable, Disable

Determines whether to enable the return loss check.

Default: Enable

20.2.11 CRPC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2155



Optical Specifications Table 20-11 Optical specifications of the CRPC board Item

Un it

Value CRPC01

CRPC03

Pump wavelength range

nm

1400-1500

1400-1500


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

Maximum pump power

dB m

29

29.5

Channel gain on G.652 fiber

dB

> 10

> 10

Channel gain on G.653 fiber

dB

N/A

> 16

Channel gain on LEAF fiber

dB

> 12

N/A

Channel gain on TWRS fiber

dB

> 13

N/A

Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber

dB

≤0

N/A

Effective noise figure on G.653 fiber

dB

N/A

N/A

Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber

dB

≤ -1

N/A

Effective noise figure on TWRS fiber

dB

≤ -1.5

N/A


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

Output connector type

-

LSH/APC, LC/PC

LSH/APC, LC/PC


Dimensions of board (H x W x D): 345.0 mm (13.8 in.) x 76.0 mm (3.0 in.) x 218.5 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.) – CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11CRPC01

110.0

121.0


2156



Board



TN11CRPC03

70.0

77.0

20.3 DAS1 DAS1: optical amplifier unit

20.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1DA S1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

20.3.2 Application The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end. For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-9.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2157



Figure 20-9 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system Client side

Client side O T U

O T U

O T U

MUX

DMUX

DCM

O T U

DM1 IN

LIN

AM1 EXPO

SIN

DAS1

WSMD9 SIN

WSMD9 EXPO

SOUT

AM1

DCM

MUX

O T U

O T U

Client side

DAS1 IN

EXPI

OUT

LOUT

OUT

EXPI

SOUT

LOUT

DCM

LIN

DM1

DMUX

O T U

DCM

O T U

Client side

NOTE

Optical interfaces AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions. It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station. The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station. The DAS1 board cannot be used together with the SFIU board.

20.3.3 Functions and Features The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2158



Table 20-12 Functions and features of the DAS1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals. l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical signals.

Gain adjustment

The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power.


Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without interrupting the services.

Gain lock function

The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels.

Working mode

Supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the board is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the board. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode applies to scenarios in which there is only dummy light to lock the output power of the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Transient control function

The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion.


l Detects and reports the optical power.

OSC signal regeneration

The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.



2159




Description

Operating wavelength for OSC signals

1511nm

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

eSFP

The RX/TX optical port supports pluggable optical modules.

20.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2160



Figure 20-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board RTDC RRDC MONR

LIN

Demultiplexer

RVI

VOA

RPAIN

EDFA module

Splitter

SOUT

TM

RX TX

O/E

FE signal processing module

E/O

Supervisory signal processing module Service processing module

OSC optical module

WSC

RM

LOUT

EDFA module

Splitter

Multiplexer

TBA OUT

MONT TRDC TTDC

TPA IN

PIN

VOA

SIN

PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage



SCC

Backplane (controlledby SCC)

Signal Flow Signal flow in the main optical channel l

In the transmit direction: – The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the signals to the demultiplexer module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2161



– The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main optical channel signals to the VOA. – The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. – The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT optical interface. l

In the receive direction: – The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the signals to the VOA. – The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. – The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the multiplexer module. – The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through the LOUT optical interface.

Signal flow in the OSC l

The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface.

l

The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the service processing module.

l

The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals.

l

The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module.

l

The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.

Signal flow in the FE l

In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port. The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.

l

In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2162



Module Function l

Multiplexer Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals.

l

Demultiplexer Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals.

l

VOA Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.

l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Service processing module – FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. – Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.

l

OSC optical module Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals.

l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. – Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


20.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-11 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2163



Figure 20-11 Front panel of the DAS1 board

DAS1 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CAUTION

HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

WSC

TX RX TM RM MONT MONR LOUT LIN SOUT SIN TTDC TRDC RTDC RRDC

DAS1



l


l


l




2164



Interfaces Table 20-13 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board Interface

Type

Function

WSC

RJ45

Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals. NOTE The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of 1518 bytes.

TX

LC

Transmits the supervisory signal.

RX

LC

Receives the supervisory signal.

TM

LC


RM

LC


MONT

LC

MONR

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

LOUT

LC

Transmits the amplified signal (including the supervisory signal).

LIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (including the supervisory signal).

SOUT

LC

Transmits the amplified signal(not including the supervisory signal).

SIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not including the supervisory signal).

TTDC/TRDC

LC

RTDC/RRDC

LC

Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation.

Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1 board.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2165



20.3.6 Valid Slots One slot house one DAS1 board. Table 20-14 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board. Table 20-14 Valid slots for the DAS1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-15. Table 20-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

LIN/LOUT

1

RM/TM

3

RX/TX

4

RVIa

5

RPAINa

6

RRDC

8

SOUT

9

RTDC

10

MONR

11

SIN


2166




Interface on the NM

TPAINa

13

TRDC

15

TBAOUTa

16

TTDC

17

MONT

18

a: Virtual port

20.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 20-16. Table 20-16 DAS1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-








-



-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range.


2167



Field

Value

Description


-



All, Odd, Even Default: All





Default: NonLoopback Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-


Laser Status

Off, On

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

Default: On

See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)


The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters.


See D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2168



Field

Value

Description

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

-

The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.

Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

-

The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.

Channel Number Mode


Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the FIU board.

Default: C80 Mode DEG Threshold

0 to 10167 Default: 190

DEG Monitoring Time(s)

2 to 10

Degrade Threshold Before FEC

1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,

Default: 7

Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter. Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.

Default: 1E-4

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2169



Field

Value

Description

Rated Optical Power (dBm)

-30 to 30

The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit.

Default: The default value is determined when the system is provisioned with 80 wavelengths and varies according to boards.

The value can be set or queried. NOTE SIN/LIN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, SOUT/LOUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. PMD Coefficient(ps/ SQRT(km))

0 to 1

Fiber Type

G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber

Default: 0.05

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the type of a fiber.

Default: G652 Fiber

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-15 to 30

Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm)

0.0 to 6553.5

Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm)

0.0 to 6553.5 Default: 0

Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.


Disable, Enable

Enables or disables the OAMS function.

Default: 0

Default: 0

This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.

Default: Disable


2170



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 50.0

Specifies the reference value for OAMS power monitoring.


0.5 to 10.0

Working Mode

l Gain locking, Power locking

Specifies the working mode of an optical amplifier.

l Default: Gain locking

For more information on the working mode, see 20.3.3 Functions and Features.

-7 to 23

This parameter specifies the output optical power when Working Mode is set to Power Value.

Power Value

Default: /

Default:3

Default: 0 Incident Optical Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0

Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold.

In a coherent system, when the incident optical power of the transmission fiber is less than the nominal output power of the transmitting OA board, set Incident Optical Power for the transmitting OA board to ensure desired ALC adjustment effects.

20.3.9 DAS1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-17 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board Item Specifica tions of OA

Uni t

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31

Nominal input power range

dB m

-32 to 0

-32 to -6

-32 to -11

Input power range per channel

dB m

-32 to -16

-32 to -22

-32 to -27

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

40 channels


2171



Item

Specifica tions of

Uni t

Value

80 channels

dB m

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power

40 channels

dB m

-16

-22

-27

80 channels

dB m

-19

-25

-30


40 channels

dB m

4

4

4

80 channels

dB m

1

1

1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

≤ 8.5

≤ 5.5

≤ 5.5

Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Multi-channel gain slope

dB/ dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Pump leakage at input

dB m

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27

Maximum total output optical power

dB m

20

20

20


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

Input VOA inherent insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Input VOA dynamic attenuation range

dB

20

Input VOA adjustment accuracy

dB

1


nm

1480 to 1520

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2172



Item demultipl exer and multiplex er

Specifica tions of OSC optical module

Uni t

Value

dB

> 40

dB

≤ 1.5

Insert loss of C-band

dB

≤1


dB

< 0.2


nm

1504.5 to 1517.5

Signal rate

Mbi t/s

155.52

Launched optical power

dB m

0.5 to 5


dB m

≤ -41

Receiver overload

dB m

-10

Optical return loss Insert loss of optical supervisory channel

LIN-TM RMLOUT

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.



l





TN11DAS1

22

28.6

20.4 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board

20.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2173




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1HB A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

20.4.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board provides a high gain and therefore is generally used in long-hop applications. It is configured at the transmit end. For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-12. Figure 20-12 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

OTU MUX

OTU OTU

HBA FIU

DMUX

OAU1

DMUX

HBA

MUX

FIU

OAU1

OTU

OTU OTU OTU

Client side Client side

NOTE

Only the TN13FIU02 board can work with the HBA board.

20.4.3 Functions and Features The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-18.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2174



Table 20-18 Functions and features of the HBA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system that covers a long fiber span transmission. l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.



Gain lock function



The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and expansion.



Optical-layer ASON

Supported


20.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2175



Figure 20-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board

Splitter IN

OUT

EDFA optical module Driving current

PIN

MON

Detection for pump current and temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Required voltage


Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l


l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. – Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2176



– Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l


l


20.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-14 shows the front panel of the HBA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2177



Figure 20-14 Front panel of the HBA board

HBA STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION



MON IN OUT

HBA



2178



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-19 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.

OUT

LSH/APC

Transmits the amplified signal.

MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).

Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

20.4.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one HBA board. Table 20-20 shows the valid slots for the HBA board. Table 20-20 Valid slots for the HBA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU16


2179



NOTE

l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot. l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is IU2.

20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-21. Table 20-21 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character

-

The second character is always G.

Third to the fourth digits

Gain

The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value.

Fifth character

-

The fifth character is always I.

Sixth and seventh digits

Maximum nominal input optical power

Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.




2180



Table 20-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HBA parameters, refer to Table 20-23. Table 20-23 HBA parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C



Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On

See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2181



Field

Value

Description

Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)



Default: 29

See D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All


2182



Field

Value


-30 to 30

Description

The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perDefault: The default channel rated optical power. It is a reference value is determined value for automatic adjustment of the optical when the system is power. When the optical amplifier unit and provisioned with 80 ROADM unit are used in a network, this wavelengths and varies according to parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. boards. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

The value can be set or queried. See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Disable, Enable


-60.0 to 50.0


0.5 to 10.0

Incident Optical Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


Default: Disable

Default: /

Default: 3

Specifies the reference value for OAMS power monitoring. Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold. In a coherent system, when the incident optical power of the transmission fiber is less than the nominal output power of the transmitting OA board, set Incident Optical Power for the transmitting OA board to ensure desired ALC adjustment effects.

20.4.10 HBA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2183



Optical Specifications Table 20-24 Optical specifications of the HBA board Item

Unit

Value

Type

-

TN11HBA

Channel allocation

nm

1529 - 1561


dBm

-25 to -3

Typical input power of a single wavelength

dBm

80-channel system: -22 40-channel system: -19 10-channel system: -13

Noise figure (NF)

dB

<8

Input reflectance

dB

< -45

Output reflectance

dB

< -45

Maximum total output power

dBm

26

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

29±1

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.5


dB

< 0.5



l





TN11HBA

47

75

20.5 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2184



20.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1O AU 1

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2O AU 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN1 3O AU 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 20-25 lists the types of the OAU1 board. Table 20-25 Type description of the OAU1 board Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN11OAU1

01

Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.

20 dB to 31 dB

02


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

00


16 dB to 25.5 dB

01


20 dB to 31 dB

02


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

TN12OAU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2185



Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN13OAU1

01


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

06


16 dB to 23 dB


Function: – The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 board supports. For details, see 20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11, TN12 and TN13 versions have different front panels. For details, see 20.5.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OAU1

TN12OAU 1, TN13OAU 1

The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.

TN12OAU1

TN13OAU 1

The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 functions as the TN12OAU1.

TN13OAU1

None

-

20.5.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end. For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-15.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2186



Figure 20-15 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

MUX

OBU1

DMUX

OAU1

OAU1

DMUX

OTU OTU OTU

OBU1

MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU


20.5.3 Functions and Features The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-26. Table 20-26 Functions and features of the OAU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Gain adjustment

The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU106 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 23 dB based on the input optical power. NOTE 20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Gain lock function



2187




Description

Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

Supported


20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure 20-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2188



Figure 20-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 TDC

PAOUT IN

RDC

MON

BAIN

OUT


PIN

Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2189



Figure 20-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 TDC

PAOUT IN

RDC

MON

BAIN

OUT


VOA

VO

Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature

PIN

VI


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.

Module Function l

VOA – Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

EDFA optical module


2190



– Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l


l


l


20.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-18, Figure 20-19 and Figure 20-20 show the front panel of the OAU1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2191



Figure 20-18 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board

OAU1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



MON OUT IN TDC RDC

OAU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2192







MON OUT IN TDC RDC VO VI

OAU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2193







MON OUT IN TDC RDC VO VI

OAU1



2194



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-27 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).

VIa

LC

Outputs a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is attached before the interface for adjusting the optical power of the multi-wavelength signal.

VOa

LC

Receives a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is attached before the interface for adjusting the optical power of the multi-wavelength signal.

a: Only the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 boards support the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106: The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). OAU105: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2195



20.5.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11OAU1 board or TN12OAU1 board, and one slot houses one TN13OAU1 board. Table 20-28 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board. Table 20-28 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 20-29 shows the valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board. Table 20-29 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU18


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 20-30 shows the valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board. Table 20-30 Valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






2196



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.

20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-31. Table 20-31 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second to fifth digits

Gain range

Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.

Sixth character

-

Is always I.



Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.


2197



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-32 and Table 20-33. Table 20-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

BAINa

3

OUT

4

RDC/TDC

5

MON

6

a: Virtual port

Table 20-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

BAINa

3

OUT

4

RDC/TDC

5

MON

6

VI

7

VO

8

a: Virtual port

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2198



20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 20-34. Table 20-34 OAU1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.



Specifies the difference between the current attenuation and the required attenuation. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2199



Field

Value

Description


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Nominal Gain (dB)





-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2200



Field

Value

Description


-



-



All, Odd, Even


Upper Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)

-

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.

Lower Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.


-30 to 30


Default: All


NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

The value can be set or queried. See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0


Default: /



2201



Field

Value

Description


0.5 to 10.0


Default:3


Working Mode

Power Value





-7 to 23


Default: 0 Incident Optical Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-35 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

16

22

25.5


dBm

-20 to 2

-26 to -4

-32 to -7.5


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -14

-32 to -20

-32 to -23.5

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -17

-32 to -23

-32 to -26.5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2202



Item

Unit

Value


40 channels

dBm

-14

-20

-23.5

80 channels

dBm

-17

-23

-26.5

Nominal singlewavelength output optical power

40 channels

dBm

2

2

2

80 channels

dBm

-1

-1

-1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

≤8

≤ 5.5

≤ 5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

16 to 25.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0


dB/dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

18

18

18


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

VI-VO

Inherent insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Dynamic attenuation range

dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy


Table 20-36 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1529-1561


1529-1561

2203



Item

Unit

Value

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31


dBm

-32 to 0

-32 to -6

-32 to -11


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -16

-32 to -22

-32 to -27

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30


40 channels

dBm

-16

-22

-27

80 channels

dBm

-19

-25

-30


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

dB

≤ 8.5 (TN11OAU101, TN12OAU101)

≤ 5.5

≤ 5.5

< 10

< 10

Noise figure (NF)a

≤ 7.5 (TN13OAU101) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0


dB/dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOb

Adjustment accuracyb

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2204



Item

Unit

Value

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.

Table 20-37 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31


dBm

-32 to -3

-32 to -9

-32 to -14


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -22

-32 to -28

-32


40 channels

dBm

-19

-25

-30

80 channels

dBm

-22

-28

-32


40 channels

dBm

1

1

1

80 channels

dBm

-2

-2

-2

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

≤ 7.5

≤5.5

≤5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

≤2

≤2

≤2


dB/dB

≤2

≤2

≤2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

17

17

17


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2205



Item VI-VOb

Unit

Value


dB

≤ 1.5


dB

20

dB

1


a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.


Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

24

29

36


dBm

-32 to -4

-32 to -9

-32 to -16


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -20

-32 to -25

-32

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -23

-32 to -28

-32


40 channels

dBm

-20

-25

-32

80 channels

dBm

-23

-28

-32


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

dB

≤ 7.5 (TN11OAU103, TN12OAU103)

≤ 5.5

≤ 5.5

< 10

< 10

Noise figure (NF)a

≤ 6.5 (TN13OAU103) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

24 to 36

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2206



Item

Unit

Value

Gain flatness

dB

≤2

≤2

≤2


dB/dB

≤2

≤2

≤2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOb




Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

23

30

34


dBm

-32 to 0

-32 to -7

-32 to -11


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -16

-32 to -23

-32 to -27

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -26

-32 to -30

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2207



Item

Unit

Value

40 channels

dBm

-16

-23

-27

80 channels

dBm

-19

-26

-30

40 channels

dBm

7

7

7

80 channels

dBm

4

4

4

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

< 8.5

<6

<6


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

23 to 34

Gain flatness

dB

≤2

≤2

≤2


dB/dB

≤2

≤2

≤2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

23

23

23


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5


dB

20

dB

1



VI-VOb



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2208



Table 20-40 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU106 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

16

19

23


dBm

-24 to 4

-24 to 1

-24 to -3


40 channels

dBm

-24 to -12

-24 to -15

-24 to -19

80 channels

dBm

-24 to -15

-24 to -18

-24 to -22


40 channels

dBm

-12

-15

-19

80 channels

dBm

-15

-18

-22


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

≤7

≤6

≤5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

16 to 23

Gain flatness

dB

≤2

≤2

≤2


dB/dB

≤2

≤2

≤2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

VI-VO

dB

≤ 1.5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2209



Item Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy

Unit

Value

dB

20

dB

1



Dimensions of front panel: – TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN13OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.) – TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11OAU101

18.0

24.0

TN11OAU102

14.0

18.0

TN11OAU103

18.0

24.0

TN11OAU105

22.0

29.0

TN12OAU100

11.0

14.0

TN12OAU101

12.0

15.0

TN12OAU102

10.0

13.0

TN12OAU103

12.0

15.0

TN12OAU105

15.0

21.0

TN13OAU101

12.0

15.0

TN13OAU103

12.0

15.0

TN13OAU105

15.0

21.0

TN13OAU106

12.0

15.0


2210



20.6 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit

20.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1OB U1

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2OB U1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 20-41 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board. Table 20-41 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN11OBU1

01


20±1.5 dB

03


23±1.5 dB

04


17±1.5 dB

Table 20-42 lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-42 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN12OBU1

01


20±1.5 dB


2211



Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

03


23±1.5 dB

04


17±1.5 dB

P1

The TN12OBU1P1 board is an OA board intended for PID

-

NOTE

The TN12BOU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board.


Function:

l

– The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OBU1 board supports. For details, see 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. Appearance:

l

– The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 20.6.5 Front Panel. Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU1

TN12OBU 1

The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1.

TN12OBU1

None

-

20.6.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-21. Figure 20-21 Position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system Client side

Client side

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OTU

MUX

OBU1

OBU1

DMUX

OTU OTU

DMUX

OBU1

OBU1

OTU


MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

2212



For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-22. Figure 20-22 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system

Client side

Tributary board

NPO2 + ENQ2

OBU1P1 OBU1P1

NPO2 + ENQ2

Tributary board

Client side

NOTE

The TN12OBU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board. In a PID-featured NE with separated optical and electrical subracks, the TN12OBU1P1 board is configured on the OptiX OSN 6800, and the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 8800.

20.6.3 Functions and Features The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-43. Table 20-43 Functions and features of the OBU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.

Typical gain

l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB. NOTE 20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Gain lock function



2213




Description

Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

Supported


20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure 20-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2214



Figure 20-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board

Splitter IN

OUT EDFA optical module Driving current

MON


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse

Backplane (Controlled by SCC)


SCC

Figure 20-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board Splitter IN

OUT

EDFA optical module Detection for Driving PIN pump current current and temperature Driving and detection module

VO

VOA

VI

MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Required voltage

( Backplane Controlled by SCC ) SCC


2215



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too. NOTE

On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1 board's VI port and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


20.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2216



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-25 and Figure 20-26 show the front panel of the OBU1 board. Figure 20-25 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board

OBU1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



MON OUT IN

OBU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2217



Figure 20-26 Front panel of the TN12OBU1 board


CAUTION



MON OUT IN VO VI

OBU1



2218



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-44 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-44 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

VIa

LC


VOa

LC


a: Only the TN12OBU1 board supports the interfaces.


20.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one OBU1 board. Table 20-45 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board. Table 20-45 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


2219



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 20-46 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-46 Valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

The TN12OBU1P1 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-47. Table 20-47 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always G.

Second and third digits

Gain

The second and the third digits indicate the gain value.

Fourth character

-

The fourth character is always I.



The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2220




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-48 and Table 20-49. Table 20-48 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

Table 20-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

VI

4

VO

5

20.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 20-50. Table 20-50 OBU1 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



2221



Field

Value

Description



This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range.


You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.



Specifies the difference between the current attenuation and the required attenuation. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



2222



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Nominal Gain (dB)



Default: l OBU101: 20dB l OBU103: 23dB l OBU104: 17dB


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All


2223



Field

Value

Description


-30 to 30



NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.

Default:3

Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.

Working Mode

Power Value





-7 to 23

This parameter specifies the output optical power of the EDFA module when Working Mode is set to Gain locking.

Default: 0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2224



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 60.0


20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-51 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board Item

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Unit

Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1

TN11OBU10 3/ TN12OBU10 3



nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561


dBm

-32 to -4

-32 to -3

-32 to -1


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -20

-32 to -19

-32 to -17

-32 to -23

-32 to -22

-32 to -20


40 channels

-20

-19

-17

-23

-22

-20


40 channels

0

4

0

-3

1

-3

80 channels dBm

80 channels dBm

80 channels

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 5.5

≤ 6.0

≤ 5.5

Nominal gain

dB

20

23

17


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10


2225



Item

Unit

Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1



Channel gain

dB

20±1.5

23±1.5

17±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

16

20

16


dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5

Dynamic attenuatio n range

dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOa

Adjustment accuracya

a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.

Table 20-52 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Total input power range at the VI optical port

dBm

-30 to 7

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40


dBm

< -30


2226



Item

Unit

Value


dB

-27


dB

-27


dBm

9


dB/dB

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5



l

Weight: – TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) – TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)




TN11OBU101

11.0

13.0

TN11OBU103

13.0

15.0

TN11OBU104

12.0

14.0

TN12OBU101

10.0

11.0

TN12OBU103

11.0

12.0

TN12OBU104

10.0

12.0

TN12OBU1P1

10.0

11.0

20.7 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit

20.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OBU2 board are TN11 and TN12. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2227




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1OB U2

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2OB U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.


Function: – The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OBU2 board supports. For details, see 20.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 20.7.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU2

TN12OBU 2

The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the TN11OBU2.

TN12OBU2

None

-


2228



20.7.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end. For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-27. Figure 20-27 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

MUX

OTU OTU

DMUX

OBU2

OBU2

OBU2

OBU2

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU OTU OTU


20.7.3 Functions and Features The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-53. Table 20-53 Functions and features of the OBU2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB. NOTE 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Gain lock function



2229




Description

Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

Supported


20.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-28 and Figure 20-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2230




OUT


MON


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC


OUT

EDFA optical module Detection for Driving PIN pump current current and temperature Driving and detection module

VO

VOA

VI

MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Required voltage

( Backplane Controlled by SCC ) SCC


2231



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


20.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-30 and Figure 20-31 show the front panel of the OBU2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2232







MON OUT IN

OBU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2233







MON OUT IN VO VI

OBU2



2234



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-54 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

VOa

LC


VIa

LC


a: Only the TN12OBU2 board supports the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

20.7.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one OBU2 board. Table 20-55 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board. Table 20-55 Valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots




2235



Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 20-56 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board. Table 20-56 Valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU18


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.

20.7.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2 The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2236



The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-57. Table 20-57 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain


Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-58 and Table 20-59. Table 20-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

Table 20-59 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU2 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

VI


2237




Interface on the NM

VO

5

20.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 20-60. Table 20-60 OBU2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.



-3 to 3, with a step of 0.1


Default: none

NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.

-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2238



Field

Value

Description


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Nominal Gain (dB)



Default: Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

See D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

-

The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type.


-

The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type.


2239



Field

Value

Description


-



All, Odd, Even



-30 to 30

Default: All


The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



-0.5 to 10.0

Default: /


Default:3

Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold. NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.

Working Mode

Power Value





-7 to 23


Default: 0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2240



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 60.0


20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-61 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board Item

Unit

Value OBU205


nm

1529-1561


dBm

-24 to 0


dBm

-24 to -16

40 Channels 80 Channels

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


40 Channels


40 Channels

-24 to -19 dBm

80 Channels

-16 -19

dBm

80 Channels

7 4

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 7.0

Nominal gain

dB

23


ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

23±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0


2241



Item

Unit

Value OBU205

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40


dBm

< -30


dB

-27


dB

-27


dBm

23


dB/dB

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5

Dynamic attenuatio n range

dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOa

Adjustment accuracya

a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.



l

Weight: – TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.) – TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11OBU205

17

24

TN12OBU205

14

19


2242



20.8 RAU1 RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit

20.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the RAU1 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1RA U1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 20-62 lists the types of the RAU1 board. Table 20-62 Type description of the RAU1 board Unit

Type

Description

RAU1

06

Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification technology.

20.8.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU1 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA unit, Different from an EDFA, the RAU1 board is used to improve system performance. It amplifies optical signals at the receive end.

CAUTION Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU1 board before removing or inserting the fiber to the RAU1. Figure 20-32 shows two applications of the RAU1 board in a WDM system. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2243



Figure 20-32 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system OTU

Client Side

M U X

OTU

OBU1

RC

LINE

OUT

F RM I U SC1

TM

IN SYS

IN TC

TC IN

SYS

IN

OTU

Client Side

OTU

D M U X

OUT

D M U X

OUT

RAU1

LINE

OTU

Client Side

TM

F RM SC1 I U RC

OUT

RAU1

OTU

OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

Client Side

When the RAU1 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as an OLA site, as shown in Figure 20-33. The RAU1 board can be configured in only one direction. In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used. Figure 20-33 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA site) OUT

LINE

RC

OUT

RAU1 IN SYS

TC

RM

RM2

TM1

TM

SC2 IN OUT

F TM I U RC

RM1 OUT

TM2 RM

OAU

IN

TC

F I U IN

NOTE

When RAU1 works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS port and IN port on RAU1 must be TN14FIU.

20.8.3 Functions and Features The RAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-63.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2244



Table 20-63 Functions and features of the RAU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.

Gain adjustment

The RAU1 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical power: l G.652 fibers: 19dB to 33dB l LEAF fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.653 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWRS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TW-C fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWPLUS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l SMFLS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.656 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654A fibers: 19dB to 33dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654B fibers: 19dB to 29dB NOTE Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman amplifier and EDFA using the NMS. The RAU1 board supports only the G.652, G.653, LEAF, TWRS, and TW-C fibers supported. If other types of fiber must be used, the RAU1 board must be upgraded. To perform the upgrade, contact Huawei engineers.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2245




Description

Working mode

The Raman amplifier module supports the gain locking, maximum gain, and power locking modes. l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or singleshort-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/ TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the Raman unit. l The maximum gain mode applies to single-UL-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G. 656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode, the Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier module. l In the pump power mode, users can set the pump power for the Raman amplifier module. This mode applies to systems that use any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier module must be adjusted manually. The EDFA module supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault location purposes.




l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power. l The Raman amplifier module supports return loss detection.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

20.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RAU1 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-34shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2246



Figure 20-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1

LINE

Signal

Signal

MONO

PAOUT

Pump light Splitter Pump source Raman optical module Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control

TDC RDC

IN

MONS SYS

BAIN

OUT

Splitter EDFA optical module

Detection Driving for PIN temperature current



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

SCC



Signal Flow The pump source of the RAU1 board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit or test instrument through the MONS interface for online optical performance monitoring. One service optical signal received through the SYS interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Raman optical module


2247



– The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising. l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONO interface for detection.

l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser. – Drives the pump laser. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


20.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-35shows the front panel of the RAU1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2248



Figure 20-35 Front panel of the TN11RAU1 board

RAU1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



MONO MONS OUT IN TDC RDC SYS LINE LAS

RAU1

Indicators Five indicators are present on the front panel: l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2249



l


l


l


l

Laser emission status indicator (LAS) – green


Interfaces Table 20-64lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11RAU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MONO

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MONO port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).

LINE

LSH/APC

Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump light.

SYS

LC

Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.

MONS

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MONS port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psys(dBm) - Pmons (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

Laser Hazard Level RAU1: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

20.8.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11RAU1. Table 20-65shows the valid slots for the TN11RAU1. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2250



Table 20-65 Valid slots for the board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU18


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Optical Interface The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-66. Table 20-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11RAU1 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUT


2251




Interface on the NM

RDC

3

OUT

4

TDC

5

MONO

6

LINE

9

SYS

10

MONS

11

20.8.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the RAU1, refer to Table 20-67. Table 20-67 RAU1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-

Displays the position of the optical port.


-

Sets and displays the optical port name.

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-



2252



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: l OUT port: On l LINE port: Off


Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)




NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the Nominal Gain (dB) parameter is unavailable.


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2253



Field

Value

Description


-

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


-



All



-30 to 30

Default: All


The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. NOTE For the LINE port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power. For the OUT port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

The value can be set or queried. See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


/

This parameter is available only when the Working Mode is set to Pump power for the LINE port.

Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

Displays the minimum fixed pump optical power that is queried

Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

Displays the maximum fixed pump optical power that is queried


2254



Field

Value

Description


-



-



-



-


Fiber Type

G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber, G656 Fiber, G654A Fiber, TERA_LIGHT_Fibe r

Specifies the type of a fiber. The gain range of the board varies according to the fiber type.

Default: G652 Fiber

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Disable, Enable


-60.0 to 50.0


-0.5 to 10.0

NOTE When the Raman amplifier module works in gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber type must be configured for the module. To configure the fiber type, start the desired NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface in the navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/ Cable Management window.


Default: Disable

Default: /

Default:3



2255



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l OUT port:

Specifies the working mode for an optical amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the working mode of the EDFA module; for the LINE port, it specifies the working mode of the Raman amplifier module.

– Gain locking, Power locking – Default: Gain locking l LINE port: – Gain locking, Maximum power, Pump power


– Default: Gain locking -7 to 23

Power Value

Default: 0

This parameter specifies the output optical power of the EDFA module when Working Mode is set to Power locking for the OUT port

20.8.9 RAU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-68 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU1 board Item RAU1 board specific ations

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Gain range

dB

G.652 fibers

19 to 33

LEAF fibers

19 to 35

G.653 fibers

19 to 35

TWRS fibers

19 to 35

TW-C fibers

19 to 35

TWPLUS fibers

19 to 35

SMFLS fibers

19 to 35

G.656 fibers

19 to 35

G.654A fibers

19 to 33

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2256


Item


Unit

Equivalent noise figurea

dB

Value TERA_LIGHT fibers

19 to 35

G.654B fibers

19 to 29

G.652 fibers

< 5.5 (19 dB gain) < 3.0 (22 dB gain) < 1.5 (26 dB gain) < 1.0 (30 dB gain)

LEAF fibers


G.653 fibers


TWRS fibers


TW-C fibers


TWPLUS fibers


SMFLS fibers


G.656 fibers


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2257


Item


Unit

Value G.654A fibers


TERA_LIGHT fibers


G.654B fibers


Gain flatness (LINE port to OUT port)

dB

G.652 fibers

< 3.0

LEAF fibers

< 3.0

G.653 fibers

< 3.0

TWRS fibers

< 3.0

TW-C fibers

< 3.0

TWPLUS fibers

< 3.0

SMFLS fibers

< 3.0

G.656 fibers

< 3.0

G.654A fibers

< 3.0

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 3.0

G.654B fibers

< 3.0

LINE port input optical power

dBm

-40 to 1

Max. OUT port optical power

dBm

20

Pump wavelength for the LINE port

nm

1400 to 1500

Pump optical power of the LINE port

mW

≥700

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2258


Item

Raman module specific ations

EDFA specific ations


Unit

Value

PDG

dB

≤ 0.7

PMD

ps

≤ 0.7


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

≤1

Valid gainb

dB

G.652 fibers

5 to 10

LEAF fibers

5 to 12

G.653 fibers

5 to 12

TWRS fibers

5 to 12

TW-C fibers

5 to 12

TWPLUS fibers

5 to 12

SMFLS fibers

5 to 12

G.656 fibers

5 to 12

G.654A fibers

5 to 10

TERA_LIGHT fibers

5 to 12

G.654B fibers

5 to 6

SYS port reflectance

dB

< -40

LINE port reflectance

dBm

< -40

PDG

dB

≤ 0.5

PMD

ps

≤ 0.5

Pump wavelength

nm

1400 to 1500

Max. pump optical power

mW

≥700


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

-30 to 6

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2259


Item


Unit

Value

Output optical power

dBm

-7 to 20


dBm

40 channels: 4

Channel gain

dB

14 to 23

Gain flatness

dB

< 2.0

Multichannel gain slope

dB/dB

< 2.0

PDG

dB

≤ 0.5

PMD

ps

≤ 0.5

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

80 channels: 1

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and depends on the fiber type and status.



l

Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 Ib.)




TN11RAU1

55

70

20.9 RAU2 RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2260



20.9.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the RAU2 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1RA U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 20-69 lists the types of the RAU2 board. Table 20-69 Type description of the RAU2 board Unit

Type

Description

RAU2

01

Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification technology.

20.9.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU2 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA unit, and a VOA. Different from an EDFA, the RAU2 board improves system performance, and amplifies optical signals at the receive end.

CAUTION Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU2 board before removing or inserting the fiber to the RAU2. Figure 20-36 shows two applications of the RAU2 board in a WDM system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2261



Figure 20-36 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OTM site) OTU

M U X

OTU

OBU1

LINE

OUT

RC

IN RM SC1

TM

F I U

SYS

IN

D M U X

OTU

IN OUT

OTU

TM IN

SYS VO

OTU

VI VO TC

TC

OTU

D M U X

OUT

RAU2

F I U

VI LINE

RM

OUT

RAU2

SC1

RC OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

When the RAU2 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as an OLA site, as shown in Figure 20-37. The RAU2 board can be configured in only one direction. In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used. Figure 20-37 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA site)

LINE

RC

OUT

RAU2

OUT

IN VI SYS

RM

VO

OUT

TM

SC2

TC IN

RM2

TM1

F TM I U RC

RM1 OUT

TM2 RM

OAU

IN

TC

F I U IN

NOTE

When the RAU2 board works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS and IN ports on the RAU2 board must be TN14FIU.

20.9.3 Functions and Features The RAU2 board is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-70.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2262



Table 20-70 Functions and features of the RAU2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.

Gain adjustment

The RAU2 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical power: l G.652 fibers: 30dB to 41dB l LEAF fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.653 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWRS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TW-C fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWPLUS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l SMFLS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.656 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654A fibers: 30dB to 41dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654B fibers: 27dB to 37dB NOTE Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman amplifier and EDFA using the NMS.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2263




Description

Working mode

The Raman amplifier optical module supports the gain locking, maximum gain, and power locking modes. l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or singleshort-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/ TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the Raman unit. l The maximum gain mode applies to ultra-long-single-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode, the Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier module. l In the pump power mode. This mode applies to systems that use any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier module must be adjusted manually. The EDFA optical module supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault location purposes.




l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power. l The Raman amplifier optical module supports return loss detection.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

20.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RAU2 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, VOA, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-38shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2264



Figure 20-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2 VI VO

MONS SYS

LINE

Signal

Signal

MONO

PAOUT VOA

Pump light Splitter Pump source Raman optical module Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control

TDC RDC

IN

BAIN

OUT

Splitter EDFA optical module Detection Driving for PIN temperature current



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

SCC



Signal Flow The pump source of the RAU2 board transmits pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical port. In addition, the RAU2 board receives a line optical signal through the LINE optical port after the optical signal is amplified by distributed amplifiers on the line. Then the splitter inside the Raman amplifier of the board splits the signal into two: One is the service signal and is output through the SYS optical port on the board and the other is sent to a multi-channel spectrum analyzer or test instrument through the MONS optical port for real-time performance monitoring. The board sends the service signal to the EDFA module through the IN optical port. The EDFA module performs power amplification and gain locking for the signal. Then the EDFA module outputs the signal to the DCM module through the TDC optical port for dispersion compensation and receives the signal again through the RDC optical port. The splitter inside the EDFA module then splits the signal in two: One is the service signal and is finally output through the OUT optical port. The other is sent to a multi-channel spectrum analyzer or test instrument through the MONO optical port for real-time performance monitoring. Before the multi-channel signal is sent to the IN optical port, it can be first sent to a VOA through the VI optical port on the VOA for power adjustment. After the power adjustment, the signal is output through the VO optical port on the VOA and then sent to the IN optical port.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2265



Module Function l

Raman optical module – The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONO interface for detection.

l


l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser. – Drives the pump laser. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


20.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-39shows the front panel of the TN11RAU2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2266



Figure 20-39 Front panel of the TN11RAU2 board

RAU2 STAT ACT PROG SRV



MONO MONS OUT IN TDC RDC VO VI SYS LINE LAS

RAU2

Indicators Five indicators are present on the front panel: l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2267



l


l


l


l

Laser emission status indicator (LAS) – green


Interfaces Table 20-71lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11RAU2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MONO

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MONO port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).

LINE

LSH/APC

Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump light.

SYS

LC

Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.

MONS

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MONS port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psys(dBm) - Pmons (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

VO

LC

Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal.

VI

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal.

Laser Hazard Level RAU2: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2268



20.9.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11RAU2. Table 20-72shows the valid slots for the TN11RAU2. Table 20-72 Valid slots for the board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU18


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Optical Interface The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-73. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2269



Table 20-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11RAU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUT

2

RDC

3

OUT

4

TDC

5

MONO

6

VI

7

VO

8

LINE

9

SYS

10

MONS

11

20.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the RAU2, refer to Table 20-74. Table 20-74 RAU2 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-

Displays the position of the optical port.


-

Sets and displays the optical port name. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.


2270



Field

Value

Description









-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C



All


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: All

Default: l OUT port: On l LINE port: Off Issue 03 (2013-05-16)





2271



Field

Value

Description

Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)




NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the Nominal Gain (dB) parameter is unavailable.


-



-



-

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2272



Field

Value

Description


-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.

Gain Slope Direction

Up, Down Default: /

Gain Slope step


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the direction where gain slope is generated on a board. Specifies the step length for setting gain slope of a board.


/

This parameter is available only when the Working Mode is set to Pump power for the LINE port.

Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

Displays the minimum fixed pump optical power that is queried

Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

Displays the maximum fixed pump optical power that is queried


-



-



-



-



2273



Field

Value

Description


-30 to 30



NOTE For the LINE port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power. For the OUT port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

The value can be set or queried. See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber, G656 Fiber, , G654A Fiber, TERA_LIGHT_Fibe r

Fiber Type

Default: G652 Fiber

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Disable, Enable


-60.0 to 50.0


-0.5 to 10.0

Specifies the type of a fiber. The gain range of the board varies according to the fiber type. NOTE When the Raman amplifier module works in gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber type must be configured for the module. To configure the fiber type, start the desired NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface in the navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/ Cable Management window.


Default: Disable

Default: /

Default:3



2274



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l OUT port:

Specifies the working mode for an optical amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the working mode of the EDFA module; for the LINE port, it specifies the working mode of the Raman amplifier module.

– Gain locking, Power locking – Default: Gain locking l LINE port: – Gain locking, Maximum power, Pump power


– Default: Gain locking -7 to 23

Power Value

Default: 0


-15 to 30


-60.0 to 60.0

Default: 0

This parameter specifies the output optical power of the EDFA module when Working Mode is set to Power locking for the OUT port This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter based on the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. In a coherent system, when the incident optical power of the transmission fiber is less than the nominal output power of the transmitting OA board, set Incident Optical Power for the transmitting OA board to ensure desired ALC adjustment effects.

20.9.9 RAU2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-75 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU2 board Item RAU2 board specific ations

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Gain range

dB

G.652 fibers

30 to 41

LEAF fibers

32 to 43

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2275


Item


Unit

Equivalent noise figurea

Gain flatness (LINE port to OUT port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

dB

dB

Value G.653 fibers

32 to 43

TWRS fibers

32 to 43

TW-C fibers

32 to 43

TWPLUS fibers

32 to 43

SMFLS fibers

32 to 43

G.656 fibers

32 to 43

G.654A fibers

30 to 41

TERA_LIGHT fibers

32 to 43

G.654B fibers

27 to 37

G.652 fibers

< 1.5 (30 dB gain)

LEAF fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.653 fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TWRS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TW-C fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TWPLUS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

SMFLS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.656 fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.654A fibers

< 1.5 (30 dB gain)

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.654B fibers

< 4.0 (27 dB gain)

G.652 fibers

< 3.0

LEAF fibers

< 3.0

G.653 fibers

< 3.0

TWRS fibers

< 3.0

TW-C fibers

< 3.0

TWPLUS fibers

< 3.0

SMFLS fibers

< 3.0

G.656 fibers

< 3.0

G.654A fibers

< 3.0

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 3.0


2276


Item


Unit

Value G.654B fibers

Raman module specific ations

< 3.0

LINE port input optical power

dBm

-42 to -2

Max. OUT port optical power

dBm

20

Pump wavelength for the LINE port

nm

1400 to 1500

Pump optical power of the LINE port

nW

≥700

PDG

dB

≤ 0.7

PMD

ps

≤ 0.7


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

≤2

Valid gainb

dB

G.652 fibers

5 to 10

LEAF fibers

5 to 12

G.653 fibers

5 to 12

TWRS fibers

5 to 12

TW-C fibers

5 to 12

TWPLUS fibers

5 to 12

SMFLS fibers

5 to 12

G.656 fibers

5 to 12

G.654A fibers

5 to 10

TERA_LIGHT fibers

5 to 12

G.654B fibers

5 to 6

SYS port reflectance

dB

< -40

LINE port reflectance

dBm

< -40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2277


Item

EDFA specific ations


Unit

Value

PDG

dB

≤ 0.5

PMD

ps

≤ 0.5

Pump wavelength

nm

1400 to 1500

Max. pump optical power

mW

≥700


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

-32 to 0


dBm

-1 to 20


dBm

40 channels: 4

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

< 2.0

Multichannel gain slope

dB/dB

< 1.0 ± 0.5

VI-VO Inherent insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

VI-VO Dynamic attenuation range

dB

15

VI-VO Adjustment accuracy

dB

1

PDG

dB

≤ 0.5

PMD

ps

≤ 0.5

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

80 channels: 1


2278


Item


Unit

Value

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and depends on the fiber type and status.



l

Weight: 2.58 kg (5.69 Ib.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11RAU2

55

70


2279


21

21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board

Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board

About This Chapter 21.1 Overview A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards. 21.2 USXH USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board 21.3 UXCT UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board 21.4 SXM SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.5 SXH SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.6 XCT XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.7 TN52UXCM TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board 21.8 XCM XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross) 21.9 UXCH UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board 21.10 TN52XCH TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board 21.11 TN16XCH TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board 21.12 TN16UXCM TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2280



21.13 XCS XCS: centralized cross connect board 21.14 SCC SCC: system control and communication board 21.15 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2281



21.1 Overview A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards.

Positions of Cross-Connect Boards in a WDM System Figure 21-1 shows the positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system. Figure 21-1 Positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system

Cross-connect board Client side

Tributary board

Line board ODUk

Client side

Client side

Packet service board

Packet service board Packet service board

Line board

Packet

OCS board

Packet service board

OCS board VC-n

OCS board

WDM side

WDM side

Line side

Client service add/dropped from the WDM/line-side Pass-through WDM service Pass-through client service

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2282



Mapping Between Cross-Connect Boards and Subrack Types Subrack Type

Cross-Connect Board

Cross-Connect Capacity

OptiX OSN 8800 T64a

TNK2USXH, TNK2UXCT, TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM, TNK2SXM, TNK4XCT, and TNK2XCT

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 CrossConnect Capacities

OptiX OSN 8800 T32a

TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, TN52XCH, and TN52XCM


OptiX OSN 8800 T16

TN16XCHb, and TN16UXCMb


OptiX OSN 6800

TN12XCS and TN11XCS

OptiX OSN 6800 Cross-Connect Capacities

a: An enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack supports the TNK2USXH and TNK2UXCT boards, and an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack supports the TN52UXCH and TN52UXCM boards. b: The TN16UXCM/TN16XCH has integrated with the functions of a cross-connect board, system control board, and clock board.

21.2 USXH USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board

21.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the USXH board is TNK2. The USXH board is only used on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.


Enhanced 8800 T64 Subrack


8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TNK 2US XH

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2283



21.2.2 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the USXH board cross-connects services. The USXH board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the USXH board in the system, see Figure 21-2 and Figure 21-3.

Independent use of the USXH board Figure 21-2 Position of the USXH board in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLD64

SLD64 USXH

USXH SLD64

SLD64

8

STM-16

SLO16

8

Joint use of the USXH board and the UXCT board Figure 21-3 Position of the USXH board in the WDM system G.694.1

G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4

UXCT USXH

NS2 Client side

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

UXCT USXH

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

21.2.3 Functions and Features The USXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-1. Table 21-1 Functions and features of the USXH board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


2284




Description

Cross-connect function

Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the USXH board is jointly used with the UXCT board. Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 6.4 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup.

Switching mode

Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching.


Supported

21.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The USXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2285



Figure 21-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board Backplane(service cross-connection)

ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


21.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the USXH board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2286



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-5 shows the front panel of the USXH board. Figure 21-5 Front panel of the USXH board

USXH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

USXH

CAUTION : Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2287





l


l


l



Interfaces The USXH board does not provide external interfaces.

21.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one USXH board. Table 21-2 shows the valid slots for the USXH board. Table 21-2 Valid slots for the USXH board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

21.2.7 USXH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)

l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25°C, 77°F) (W)




TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT

169

186

630–7.4 x (64– n)

693–8.1 x (64– n)


2288



Board





NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH and UXCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.3 UXCT UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board

21.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the UXCT board is TNK2. The UXCT board is only used on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.




8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TNK 2UX CT

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

21.3.2 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the UXCT board works with the USXH board to cross-connect ODUk signals. The UXCT board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the UXCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-6. Figure 21-6 Position of the UXCT board in the WDM system G.694.1


TOM

UXCT USXH

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

WDM side

DMUX

MUX 4

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side


UXCT USXH

Client side

2289



NOTE

For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

21.3.3 Functions and Features The UXCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-3. Table 21-3 Functions and features of the UXCT board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the UXCT board is jointly used with the USXH board.

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

21.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The UXCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2290



Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex Backplane(service cross-connection)


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


21.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCT board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2291



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-8 shows the front panel of the UXCT board. Figure 21-8 Front panel of the UXCT board

UXCT

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2292



CAUTION : Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries.



l


l


l



Interfaces The UXCT board does not provide external interfaces.

21.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCT board. Table 21-4 shows the valid slots for the UXCT board. Table 21-4 Valid slots for the UXCT board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU43

21.3.7 UXCT Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2293








TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT

169

186

630–7.4 x (64– n)

693–8.1 x (64– n)

NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH and UXCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.4 SXM SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

21.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SXM board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXM board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.




8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 SX M

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

TN K4 SX M

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.4.7 SXM Specifications. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2294



Substitution Relationship Table 21-5 Substitution rules of the SXM board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2SXM

TNK4SXM

The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM.

TNK4SXM

None

None

21.4.2 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM board cross-connects services. The SXM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 21-9 and Figure 21-10.

Independent use of the SXM board Figure 21-9 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system

SLO1 6

STM-16

1

SLQ6 4

SLQ6 4

1 SXM

SLO1 6

SXM SLQ6 4

SLQ6 4

8

STM-16

8

Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board Figure 21-10 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system G.694. 1

G.694. 1 NS2 100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

TOM

XCT

SXM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4 WDM side


SXM

XCT

TOM

100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

NS2 Client side

2295



CAUTION For a subrack with SXH/SXM boards but without XCT boards, the XCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the XCT boards, install the physical XCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

21.4.3 Functions and Features The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-6. Table 21-6 Functions and features of the SXM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order VC-12 and VC-3 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the SXM board is jointly used with the XCT board.

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

21.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2296



Figure 21-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


21.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2297



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-12 shows the front panel of the SXM board. Figure 21-12 Front panel of the SXM board

SXM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

SXM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2298






l


l


l



Interfaces The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.

21.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SXM board. Table 21-7 shows the valid slots for the SXM board. Table 21-7 Valid slots for the SXM board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

NOTE

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack only supports the TNK4SXM.

21.4.7 SXM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2SXM: l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2299


l



TNK4SXM: l


l

Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59 lb.)






TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT

190

209

530–3.6 x (64– n)

583–3.6 x (64– n)

TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT

97

107

188–1.2 x (64– n)

207–1.32 x (64– n)

TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT

173

190

378–2.5 x (64– n)

416–2.5 x (64– n)

TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT

114

125

324–2.5 x (64– n)

356–2.5 x (64– n)

NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.5 SXH SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

21.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SXH board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXH board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.The available functional version of the SXH board is TNK4. The SXH board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2300



Bo ard



8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 SX H

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

TN K4 SX H

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.5.7 SXH Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2SXH

TNK4SXH

The TNK4SXH can be created as TNK2SXH on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH.

TNK4SXH

None

None

21.5.2 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH board cross-connects services. The SXH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 21-13 and Figure 21-14.

Independent use of the SXH board Figure 21-13 Position of the SXH board in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

8

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

SLQ64

1

SLQ64

SXH

SXH SLQ64

SLQ64


STM-16

SLO16

8

2301



Joint use of the SXH board and the XCT board Figure 21-14 Position of the SXH board in the WDM system G.694.1

G.694.1 4

NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM

XCT

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4

SXH

NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

Client side

SXH

XCT

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side


21.5.3 Functions and Features The SXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-8. Table 21-8 Functions and features of the SXH board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection.

Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the SXH board is jointly used with the XCT board.

l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2302



21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board. Figure 21-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board Backplane(service cross-connection)

VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2303


l



21.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the SXH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-16 shows the front panel of the SXH board. Figure 21-16 Front panel of the SXH board

SXH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

SXH

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2304






l


l


l



Interfaces The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.

21.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SXH board. Table 21-9 shows the valid slots for the SXH board. Table 21-9 Valid slots for the SXH board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

NOTE

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 only supports the TNK4SXH.

21.5.7 SXH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2SXH: l


l

Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)

TNK4SXH: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2305



l


l

Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)






TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT

130

143

470–3.6 x (64– n)

517–3.6 x (64– n)

TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT

95

105

169–1.2 x (64– n)

186–1.32 x (64– n)

TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT

113

124

318–2.5 x (64n)

350–2.5 x (64n)

TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT

112

123

321–2.5 x (64n)

353–2.5 x (64n)

NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.6 XCT XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

21.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the XCT board are TNK2 and TNK4. The XCT board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.




8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TNK 2XC T

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2306



Boar d



8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TNK 4XC T

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.6.7 XCT Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2XCT

TNK4XCT

The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.

TNK4XCT

None

None

21.6.2 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT board is used with the SXH/SXM board to implement cross-connect grooming. The XCT board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-17. Figure 21-17 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system G.694.1


TOM

XCT

SXH / SXM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side


SXH XCT / SXM

Client side

2307




21.6.3 Functions and Features The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-10. Table 21-10 Functions and features of the XCT board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the XCT board is jointly used with the SXM/SXH board.

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

21.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2308



Figure 21-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


21.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-19 shows the front panel of the XCT board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2309



Figure 21-19 Front panel of the XCT board

XCT

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2310






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.

21.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCT board. Table 21-11 shows the valid slots for the XCT board. Table 21-11 Valid slots for the XCT board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU43

NOTE

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack only supports the TNK4XCT.

21.6.7 XCT Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2XCT: l

Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))

l


TNK4XCT: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2311



l

Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))

l







TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT

190

209

530–3.6 x (64– n)

583–3.6 x (64– n)

TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT

130

143

470–3.6 x (64– n)

517–3.6 x (64– n)

TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT

97

107

188–1.2 x (64– n)

207–1.32 x (64– n)

TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT

95

105

169–1.2 x (64– n)

186–1.32 x (64– n)

TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT

173

190

378–2.5 x (64– n)

416–2.5 x (64– n)

TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT

114

125

324–2.5 x (64– n)

356–2.5 x (64– n)

TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT

113

124

318–2.5 x (64n)

350–2.5 x (64n)

TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT

112

123

321–2.5 x (64n)

353–2.5 x (64n)

NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM/SXH and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.7 TN52UXCM TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

21.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TN52UXCM board is available, that is TN52.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2312




8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack

8800 Platfor m Subrack

6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52 UX C M

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

21.7.2 Application The TN52UXCM board is a cross-connect board. It implements cross-connections of ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12services and packet switching of Ethernet services. The TN52UXCM board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks For the position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-20. For the position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system, see Figure 21-21 and Figure 21-22. Figure 21-20 Position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLQ64

UXCM

UXCM SLQ64

8

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

Figure 21-21 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect) G.694.1


TOM

UXCM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

WDM side

DMUX

MUX 4

UXCM

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2 WDM side


Client side

2313



Figure 21-22 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (Packet switch) G.694.1

G.694.1 MUX GE

EG16

UXCM

DMUX PND2

PND2 DMUX

Client side

UXCM

EG16

GE

MUX

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

21.7.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature of the UXCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-12. Table 21-12 Functions and features of the TN52UXCM Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.

Cross-connect functions

l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Cross-connects a maximum of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme


Switching mode

Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.


Supported

21.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN52UXCM board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2314



Figure 21-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e /ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC4/VC-3/VC-12

Packets

ODUk/VC cross-connect module

Packet switch module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals or VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection.

l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2315




21.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the TN52UXCM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-24 shows the TN52UXCM front panel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2316



Figure 21-24 TN52UXCM front panel

UXCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2317






l


l


l



Interfaces The TN52UXCM does not provide external interfaces.

21.7.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCM board. Table 21-13 shows the valid slots for the TN52UXCM board. Table 21-13 Valid slots for the UXCM board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.7.7 TN52UXCM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2318








TN52UXCM

119

131

372 - 7.4 x (32 n) -24 x m

409 - 8.1 x (32 n) -26.4 x m

NOTE l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

21.8 XCM XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)

21.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 2XC M

N

Y

N

N

N

N

21.8.2 Application The XCM board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. The XCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-25. For the position of the XCM in the WDM system, see Figure 21-26. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2319



Figure 21-25 Position of the XCM in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLQ64

SLQ64 XCM

XCM SLQ64

SLQ64

8

STM-16

SLO16

8

Figure 21-26 Position of the XCM in the WDM system G.694.1


XCM

TOM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

XCM

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

21.8.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-14. Table 21-14 Functions and features of the XCM Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.

Cross-connect functions

l Implements cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)/VC-4 signals. l Implements cross-connection of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals.

Protection scheme

Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup.

Switching mode



Supported

21.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2320



Figure 21-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM. Figure 21-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ ODU3/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12

Backplane (for service cross-connection)


Control Storage

CPU

communication

Control and communication module Voltages for boards Power module Fuse

DC power provided by the backplane

SCC

Backplane (for SCC control)

Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) signals or VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2321



21.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the XCM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-28 shows the XCM front panel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2322



Figure 21-28 XCM front panel

XCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2323






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCM does not provide external interfaces.

21.8.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCM board. Table 21-15 shows the valid slots for the XCM board. Table 21-15 Valid slots for the XCM board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.8.7 XCM Board Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)

l

Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2324








TN52XCM01

125

138

339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m

368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m

TN52XCM02

67

73.7

124 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -80 x m

136.4 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -80 x m

NOTE l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

21.9 UXCH UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

21.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the UXCH board is TN52. The UXCH board is only used on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack.


8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 2UX CH

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

21.9.2 Application The UXCH board is a cross-connect board and applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks. It can cross-connect ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals and VC-4 signals and performs packet switching of Ethernet services. For the position of the UXCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-29 and Figure 21-30. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2325



For the position of the UXCH in the OCS system, see Figure 21-31. Figure 21-29 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connection) G.694.1


MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4

UXCH

TOM

4

NS2 Client side

DMUX

4

MUX 4

UXCH

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM

NS2 WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Figure 21-30 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (Packet switch) G.694.1

G.694.1 MUX GE

UXCH

EG16

DMUX PND2

PND2 DMUX

Client side

UXCH

EG16

GE

MUX WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Figure 21-31 Position of the UXCH in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

UXCH

UXCH SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

21.9.3 Functions and Features The UXCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-16. Table 21-16 Functions and features of the UXCH board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Implements grooming of services.


2326




Description


l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l Provides 1+1 hot backup. l Provides 1+1 warm backup.

Switching mode



Supported

21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The UXCH board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2327



Figure 21-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4

Packets

ODUk/VC cross-connect module


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service and VC-4 service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.

l


l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2328




21.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-33 shows the front panel of the UXCH board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2329



Figure 21-33 Front panel of the UXCH board

UXCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCH

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2330






l


l


l



Interfaces The UXCH board does not provide external interfaces.

21.9.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCH board. Table 21-17 shows the valid slots for the UXCH board. Table 21-17 Valid slots for the UXCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.9.7 UXCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2331








TN52UXCH

87

96

340 - 7.4 x (32 n)

374 - 8.1 x (32 n)

NOTE "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.10 TN52XCH TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board

21.10.1 Version Description The available functional version of the XCH board is TN52.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN5 2XC H

N

Y

N

N

N

N

NOTE

The TN52XCH board are available in two variants: TN52XCH01 and TN52XCH02. The two board variants are interchangeable.

21.10.2 Application The XCH board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4 cross-connections. The XCH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-34. For the position of the XCH board in the OCS system, see Figure 21-35 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2332



Figure 21-34 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system G.694.1

G.694.1 4

NS2 100Mbit/s-

DMUX 4

2.5Gbit/s

NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

XCH

100Mbit/s-

TOM

2.5Gbit/s NS2 Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NS2 4

4

XCH

TOM

MUX

Figure 21-35 Position of the XCH board in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

XCH

XCH SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

21.10.3 Functions and Features The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-18. Table 21-18 Functions and features of the XCH board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function



Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)/VC-4 signals.

Protection scheme

Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.

Switching mode



Supported

21.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2333



Figure 21-36 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board. Figure 21-36 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex/ODU3/VC-4



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4 service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


21.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2334



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-37 shows the front panel of the XCH board. Figure 21-37 Front panel of the XCH board

XCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCH

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2335






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.

21.10.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCH board. Table 21-19 shows the valid slots for the XCH board. Table 21-19 Valid slots for the XCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l

Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2336








TN52XCH01

65

72

243 - 3.6 x (32 n)

267.3 - 3.6 x (32 - n)

TN52XCH02

43

47.3

101 - 1.12 x (32 - n)

111 - 1.12 x (32 - n)


21.11 TN16XCH TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board

21.11.1 Version Description TThe available functional version of the XCH board is TN16.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 6XC H

N

N

Y

N

N

N

21.11.2 Application The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000. The TN16XCH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks. For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-38.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2337



Figure 21-38 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system External clock

External clock

TN16ATE

TN16ATE G.694.1

G.694.1 4 4

TQX

4

TN16 XCH

4

l

DMUX 4 NQ2

NQ2 4

Client side

MUX

DMUX

4

TN16 4 XCH

TQX

4

MUX 4

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks: – Electrical subracks: The TN16XCH/TN16UXCM boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (master): The TN16SCC boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (slave): No main control boards are required.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks: – Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured. – Slave subracks: No main control boards are required.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks: – Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.

21.11.3 Functions and Features The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system control function and clock function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-20. Table 21-20 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description


Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) signals.


2338




Description

System control function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.

NOTE The TN16XCH board does not support the system control function when the subrack housing the board is a slave subrack.

l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH. l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16XCH board processes subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage the entire NE.

Clock function

l Basic function: – Locks the reference clock source. – Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. – Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.

Protection scheme

Supports 1+1 protection. Provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.

Switching mode



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2339



21.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board. Figure 21-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board Service cross-connection from backplane (ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ODU3)

Time signals/ Clock signals

Clock processing module


CPU and control module

Monitoring module

Power supply module

Overhead processing module

Communication module

Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane

DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l

Clock procession module Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes: free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization.

l

CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2340


l


Overhead processing module – Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. – Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.

l

Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.

l

Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. – Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. – Transmits urgent data through the RS485.

l


21.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-40 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2341



Figure 21-40 Front panel of the TN16XCH board

XCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

XCH



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2342



Buttons Table 21-21 Functions of the buttons on the TN16XCH board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16XCH board.

Interfaces The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.

21.11.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN16XCH board. Table 21-22 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board. Table 21-22 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.11.7 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16XCH board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. The BIOS switches helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 21-23 shows the function of the BIOS switches. Figure 21-41 shows the position of switches on the TN16XCH board. Table 21-23 Function of the BIOS Switch

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A

Clear the system parameter area.

1010

B

Restores the system parameter area, database, and NE software from the CF card.

1001

C

Clear the database in the flash memory.

1011


2343



BIOS State

Description

Binary value

D

Clear all the data in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. The data includes the system data, system parameter areas, and extended BIOS files. The upper layer part of BIOS is not started.

1111

Figure 21-41 Position of the switches on the TN16XCH board BIOS Switch

Battery Jumper

Binary Value 1010 0 1 0 1 ON

Battery Jumper ON DIP

BIOS DIP Switch

2

2

SW1

3

1 234

1 J1

DIP SW1

State A 1 2 3 4

2 J1

1


DIP SW1

State B 1 2 3 4

CF Card

Battery is used 3

Battery is not used 3

2 J1

1


DIP SW1

State C 1 2 3 4


DIP

State D

SW1 1 2 3 4

21.11.8 TN16XCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2344








TN16XCH

40

48

73–1.4 x (16–n)

88.8–1.4 x (16– n)


21.12 TN16UXCM TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board

21.12.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TN16UXCM board is TN16.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 6UX CM

N

N

Y

N

N

N

21.12.2 Application As a cross-connect board, the TN16UXCM board achieves cross-connections of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, and flex) signals and VC–4/VC–12/VC–3 signals, and packet switching of Ethernet services. It helps the NMS to manage boards, ensures that devices can communicate with each other, and achieves physical-layer clock synchronization and Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock synchronization on the entire NE. The TN16UXCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks. For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-42 and Figure 21-43. For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system, see Figure 21-44. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2345



Figure 21-42 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect) External colck TN16ATE

External colck TN16ATE G.694.1

G.694.1 4

NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TN16 UXCM

TOM

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2

NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

TN16 UXCM

4

4

Client side

Figure 21-43 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (Package switch) External colck TN16ATE

External colck TN16ATE G.694.1

G.694.1 GE

MUX

EG16 TN16 UXCM

DMUX

Client side

WDM side

GE

TN16 UXCM

PND2

PND2

EX2

10GE LAN

EG16

DMUX

10GE LAN

EX2

MUX

Client side

WDM side

Figure 21-44 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

TN16 UXCM

l

TN16 UXCM SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8


21.12.3 Functions and Features The TN16UXCM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system control function and clock function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-24. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2346



Table 21-24 Functions and features of the TN16UXCM board Function and Feature

Description


l Supports non-blocking full cross-connections of 1.6 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex). l Supports cross-connections of 20 Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 services. l Supports cross-connections of 640 Gbit/s VC-4 services. l Supports cross-connections of 800 Gbit/s packet services.

System control function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.

NOTE The TN16UXCM board does not support the system control function when the subrack housing the board is a slave subrack.

l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16UXCM. l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16UXCM board processes subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage the entire NE.

Clock function


Protection scheme

l Supports 1+1 protection. l Provides 1+1 hot backup. l Provides 1+1 warm backup.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2347




Description

Switching mode



Supported

21.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow TN16UXCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-45 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board. Figure 21-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board Time signals/ Clock signals


Service cross-connection from backplane ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ ODU4/ODUflex/VC-12/VC-3/VC-4

ODUk/VC Cross-connect module

Packets



Monitoring module

Power supply module



Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane to realize the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals or VC-4/

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2348



VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to implement service cross-connections. l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from each packet board through the backplane to realize packet switching of Ethernet services, and then sends the signals to each packet board.

l

Clock procession module Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes: free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization.

l


l

Overhead processing module – Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. – Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.

l


l

Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. – Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. – Transmits urgent data through the RS485.

l


21.12.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-46 shows the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2349



Figure 21-46 Front panel of the TN16UXCM board

UXCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

UXCM



2350



l


l


l


l



Buttons Table 21-25 Functions of the buttons on the TN16UXCM board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16UXCM board.

Interfaces The TN16UXCM board does not provide external interfaces.

21.12.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN16UXCM board. Table 21-26 shows the valid slots for the TN16UXCM board. Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN16UXCM board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU9, IU10

21.12.7 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16UXCM board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches. The battery on the TN16UXCM helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16UXCM. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-47 shows the battery jumper. The BIOS switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 21-27 shows the function of the BIOS switch. Figure 21-48 shows the position of switches on the TN16UXCM board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2351



Figure 21-47 battery jumper

Not used

Used

3

2

1

Table 21-27 Function of the BIOS switch

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A


1010

B


1001

C


1011

D


1111


2352



Figure 21-48 Position of the switches on the TN16UXCM board BIOS DIP Switch

Battery Jumper


J39

DIP

State A

SW1

Battery is 2 used

1 3

1 2 3 4

Binary Value1001 1 0 0 1

SW1 ON

BIOS DIP Switch

DIP

1 2 3 4

Battery Jumper

ON

U

SW1

State B

J39 1

2CP

DIP

1 2 3 4

3

J39

Battery is 2 not used

1 3

Binary Value1011 1 1 0 1 ON

DIP SW1

State C

CF Card

1 2 3 4

Binary Value1111 1 1 1 1 ON

DIP SW1

State D 1 2 3 4

21.12.8 TN16UXCM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))

l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board





TN16UXCM

84–1.7 x (16– n)–2 x m

92–1.8 x (16– n)–2.2 x m

178–7.2 x (16– n)

195–7.9 x (16– n)


2353



Board





NOTE "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack, and it is within 0-16 range. l "m" represents the subrack lower-order cross-connection flag. It is either 0 or 1. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 1.

21.13 XCS XCS: centralized cross connect board

21.13.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 XCS

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12 XCS

N

N

N

N

Y

N


Function: The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details, see 21.13.3 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.13.7 XCS Specifications.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2354



Substitution Relationship Table 21-28 Substitution rules of the XCS board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11XCS

TN12XCS

Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.

TN12XCS

None

–

21.13.2 Application The XCS board is a cross-connect board. The TN11XCS board supports 280 Gbit/s crossconnections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 140 Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The TN12XCS board supports 360 Gbit/s cross-connections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 180 Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The XCS board applies to OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-49. Figure 21-49 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system OTU

M40

XCS OTU OTU

OA

OA

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40

OTU OTU XCS

40

40

OTU XCS

D40

40

XCS OTU

1

1

OTU

21.13.3 Functions and Features The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-29. Table 21-29 Functions and features of the XCS board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function



2355




Description


TN11XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 280 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 140 Gbit/s for GE services. TN12XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.

Active/standby backup

Provides the 1+1 hot backup.

Protection scheme

Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.

Switching mode



Supported by the TN12XCS02.

21.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-50 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2356



Figure 21-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board Backplane(service cross-connection)

ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/GE/10GE


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection.

l


l


21.13.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2357



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-51 shows the front panel of the XCS board. Figure 21-51 Front panel of the XCS board

XCS STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCS



l


l


l




2358



Interfaces The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.

21.13.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCS board. Table 21-30 shows the valid slots for the XCS board. Table 21-30 Valid slots for the XCS board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

21.13.7 XCS Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Weight l

TN11XCS: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)

l

TN12XCS: 1.2 kg (2.65 lb.)




TN11XCS

20.0

22.0

TN12XCS

25.0

27.5

21.14 SCC SCC: system control and communication board

21.14.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN23, TN51, TN52, and TNK2. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2359



Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Product

Board

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack

TNK2SCC

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack

TN52SCC

General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack

TN51SCC and TN52SCC


TN16SCC

OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack

TN52SCC

OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack

TN11SCC, TN51SCC and TN52SCC

OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis

TN21SCC, TN22SCC and TN23SCC. NOTE Only the TN23SCC board supports V100R007 and later versions together with their features. In other words, the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not. For example, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports the LEM24 board feature in V100R007 and later versions.


Function: – Only the TN23SCC board supports OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007 and later versions together with their features. In other words, the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not. – The TN21SCC, TN22SCC, and TN23SCC boards do not support SCC data backup, IP over DCC, subrack cascading, and power supply backup. The other versions support these functions. For details, see 21.14.3 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance: – The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the TN21SCC, TN22SCC, and TN23SCC versions use the same front panel; The TNK2 and TN16 version use a front panel different from that of other versions. The TN21SCC, TN22SCC, and TN23SCC versions are applicable to case-shaped equipment. There are shelf ID LEDs on panels of TN11SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC boards of the TN21 and TN22 versions only. For details, see 21.14.5 Front Panel and 21.14.8 SCC Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 21.14.8 SCC Specifications.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2360




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SCC

TN51SCC

When the TN51SCC board is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, it can replace the TN11SCC board. But after the replacement, the board software must be upgraded. When it is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, it cannot replace the TN11SCC board. When it is installed in a slave subrack, it can directly replace the TN11SCC board.

TN52SCC

Software upgrade is required after the replacement.

NOTE It is recommen ded that the TN11SCC board be replaced with the TN52SCC board.

TN16SCC

None

-

TN51SCC

TN52SCC


TN52SCC

None

-

TNK2SCC

None

-

TN21SCC

TN22SCC/ TN23SCC


TN22SCC

TN23SCC


TN23SCC

None

-

NOTE If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two SCC boards must be the same.

21.14.2 Application The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication. l


l

Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks: – Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2361



– Slave subracks: No main control boards are required. l

Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks: – Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.

21.14.3 Functions and Features The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and clock. Table 21-31 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/ TNK2SCC board. Table 21-32 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN16SCC. Table 21-33 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Table 21-31 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after replacing the SCC.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.

Active/Standby backup

Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.

Clock function

Provides clock source for the system communications.

Subrack cascading

Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.


2362




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Supported

Table 21-32 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC.

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECCwhen used with the TN16AUX.

Active/Standby backup

Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.

Clock function


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2363




Description

Subrack cascading

Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

Table 21-33 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a chassis.

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.

Active/standby backup

Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes active automatically. NOTE Active/standby backup configuration is not supported in AC-powered systems.

Clock function

Provides clock source for the system communications.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

NOTE

Only the TN23SCC board supports V100R007 and later versions together with their features. In other words, the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not. For example, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports the LEM24 board feature in V100R007 and later versions.

21.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module. Figure 21-52 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2364



Figure 21-52 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board

Clock module


Required voltage Power supply module

Monitoring module



Fuse

Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Module Function l


l

Overhead processing module – Sends the overhead signals to the service board.

l


l

Clock module Provides the clock source for the system. TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC: – Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station. – Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board. TN16SCC: – Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. – Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Communication module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2365



Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. – Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. – Transmits urgent data through the RS485. l

Power supply module TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W. TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power. TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

21.14.5 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-53 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board. Figure 21-54 shows the front panel of the TN16SCC board. Figure 21-55 shows the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Figure 21-56 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board. For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see Figure 21-57.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2366



Figure 21-53 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board

SCC STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SCC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2367



Figure 21-54 Front panel of the TN16SCC board SCC

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

SCC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2368



Figure 21-55 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board


RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT PWR CRI MAJ MIN

SCC

Figure 21-56 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board

SCC

STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRC ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2369



Indicators There are eight indicators on the front panel. l


l


l


l


l

System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow NOTE

The TN16SCC/TNK2SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB. The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.

There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/ TN23SCC board. l

Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green

l

Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow

l

Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange

l

Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red


Buttons There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 21-34 lists the function of each button. Table 21-34 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the SCC board.

ALM CUT

Used to clear an audible alarm.

LAMP TEST

Used to test all of the indicators.

NOTE

The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.

LED There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 21-35 shows its function. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2370



Table 21-35 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board LED indicator

Function

SubRack_ID

The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used. l "0" indicates the master subrack. l "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. l The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-57. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.

Figure 21-57 LED

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Error


0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Decimal subrack ID


2371



Interfaces The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.

21.14.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SCC board. Table 21-36 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board. Table 21-37 shows the valid slots for the TN16SCC board. Table 21-38 shows the valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Table 21-39 shows the valid slots for the TN51SCC board. Table 21-40 shows the valid slots for the TN52SCC board. Table 21-41 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board. Table 21-36 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU17, IU18

Table 21-37 Valid slots for the TN16SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

Table 21-38 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board Product

Slot


IU8, IU9

Table 21-39 Valid slots for the TN51SCC board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots


IU11, IU28


IU17, IU18


2372



Table 21-40 Valid slots for the TN52SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU11, IU28


IU17, IU18


IU17, IU18

NOTE

The Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 only supports TN52SCC.

Table 21-41 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU74, IU85

21.14.7 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the SCC board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches or jumpers. The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. The BIOS jumper or switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 21-42 shows the function of the BIOS jumper or switch. Table 21-42 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A


1010

B


1001

C


1011

D


1111

Figure 21-58 shows the position of jumpers on the TN11SCC board. Figure 21-59 shows the position of swiches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2373



Figure 21-60 shows the position of jumpers on the TN21SCC board. Figure 21-61 shows the position of jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Figure 21-62 shows the jumpers on the TN51SCC board. Figure 21-63 shows jumpers on the TN52SCC board. Figure 21-64 shows jumpers on the TNK2SCC board. Figure 21-58 Position of the jumpers on the TN11SCC board BIOS Jumper

Battery Jumper

2

J6 4

J17 2 4

State A 1

Battery is used

J11

Binary Value 1010 1 0 1 0

1

Binary Value 1001 1 0 0 1 J6 4

1

CPU

J17 2 4

Battery is not used

1

J11

2

Binary Value 1011 1 0 1 1 2

J6 4

2

J17 4

State C 1

J6 J17 24 24 1

J11

1

CF Card

Binary Value 1111 1 1 1 1 2

J6 4

J17 2 4

State D

1

1

1

BIOS Jumper Battery Jumper

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2374



Figure 21-59 Position of the switches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board BIOS Switch

Battery Jumper


ON DIP

3

1 234

Battery is used 3

1 2 3 4

2 J1

1


2

2

SW1

SW1

State A

Battery Jumper BIOS DIP Switch

DIP

ON

1 J1

DIP SW1

State B 1 2 3 4

Battery is not used 3

2 J1

1


CF Card

ON

DIP SW1

State C 1 2 3 4


DIP

State D

SW1 1 2 3 4

Figure 21-60 Position of the jumpers on the TN21SCC board BIOS Jumper

1

1 2 4

4 1

1

4

1

0 1

Battery is used

J1

Binary Value 1001

J1 J14 4

0 1

1

1

0 1

4

0

1

State B

1

1 2

J13 2

2 4

CPU

J14

0

2

State A

J1

J14

J13

J13

Battery Jumper

Binary Value 1010

1

BIOS Battery Jumper Jumper

Battery is not used

Binary Value 1011 J14 4 1 2

1

1 1

2

State C

4

J13

Binary Value 1111 J14

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1


1

4

1

1 2

1

2

1 State D 1

4

J13

2375



Figure 21-61 Position of the jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board BIOS Jumper Battery Jumper

J11

2 4

1 J13

J1

2 4

1

CPU

Battery Jumper

Binary Value

J11

4

1

1

Battery is used

Battery is not used

Binary Value 1111

J11

J11

4

1

2

1

4

1

4

1

1

1

State D 1

2

1

0

2

4

1

1

2

1

1

State C 1

0

J13

Binary Value 1011

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

0

2

J13

J13

4

4

1

1

State B 1

2

1

0

2

4

1

1

2

1

0

State A 1

1001 J11

J1

Binary Value 1010

J1

BIOS Jumper

J13


2376




9

State D

1

9

1

1001

9

2 J42 10

9 1

0101

1 1 1 1 1111

3 1

Sate C

Battery Jumper

Binary value

2 J42 10

J1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 1

1

J12 2

Binary value State B

1101

Binary value

2 J42 10

State A

1 0 1 0

2 J42 10

9

Binary value

1

2 J42 10

BIOS Jumper

Battery Jumper

Battery is used

CF Card

Battery is not used

2

2

J1

J1

3

3

1

1


BIOS Jumper

1001

1 3

10

9

9

10

2

2

State B J11

2

J11

1011

2

2

1

10

9

State C

Binary 11 11 value 1

Binary 1 0 11 value J11

1

State A 1

J1

Binary 10 01 value

2

1

1010

Binary 10 10 value

1111

Battery Jumper

State D

10

9

10

9

J11

J11

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


1

Battery is not used

J1

3

2

2 3

CFCCard 卡 F

Battery is used

1

Battery Jumper

J1

2377



Figure 21-64 Position of the jumpers on the TNK2SCC board Battery Jumper

BIOS Jumper

J9

J41

10

2

9

1

1

3

2

CF Card

The underlying PCB Battery Jumper

BIOS Jumper

J9

State A

10

1

9

2

J9

J41

Battery is not used


10

State C

9

Battery is used

2

J9

1

10

1

2

State B

J9

3


2

J41 1

2


3


10

State D 1

9

1

9

21.14.8 SCC Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)

l

TN16SCC: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)

l


l

TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2378



l


l


l

TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4 in. (H)

Weight: l

TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l

TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)

l

TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)

l

TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)

l

TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l

TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)

l

TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)




TN11SCC

27.0

30.0

TN16SCC

32.0

35.0

TN21SCC

14.0

16.0

TN22SCC

10.0

13.0

TN23SCC

10.0

13.0

TN51SCC

18.0

20.0

TN52SCC

23.0

25.1

TNK2SCC

26.7

29.3

21.15 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface unit

21.15.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN15, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN51, and TN52.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2379



Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Product

Board


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN16AUX

OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack

TN15AUX

OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack

TN11AUX

OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis

TN21AUX/TN22AUX

NOTE

The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection only when it is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

Type The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-43 lists the types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-43 Type description of the TN11AUX Board

Type

Description

TN11AUX

TN11AUX01

The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. One type provides three jumpers and the other type provides eight jumpers to setting the subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 7.

TN11AUX02

Provides eight jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 31.


Function: – The TN11AUX/TN15AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. One type provides three jumpers and the other type provides eight jumpers for setting the subrack ID. There are eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board, which are used

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2380



to set the subrack ID. The TN15AUX board provides eight DIP switches for setting the subrack ID. For detail, see 21.15.7 Jumper. – The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the inter-subrack management function. For details, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. For detail, see 21.15.7 Jumper. – The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For detail, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection. For details, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features. l

Appearance: – The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are different. For details, see 21.15.5 Front Panel. – Compared with other AUX boards, the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board uses a different front panel. The front panel for the TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards uses a different size from other AUX boards and applies to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.15.5 Front Panel and 21.15.8 AUX Specifications.

l

Specification: – The power consumption of the boards of different versions is different. For details, see 21.15.8 AUX Specifications.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11AUX

None

-

TN15AUX

None

-

TN16AUX

None

-

TN21AUX

TN22AUX

If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version.

TN22AUX

None

-


2381



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN51AUX

TN52AUX

When a TN51AUX board in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is replaced with a TN52AUX board, the logical board for the TN52AUX board can be created as TN51AUX on the NMS. This substitution does not require a board software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN52AUX board provides only the functions of the TN51AUX board. When a TN51AUX board in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is replaced with a TN52AUX board, the logical board for the TN52AUX board must be created as TN52AUX on the NMS. This substitution does not require a board software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN52AUX board functions are available.

None

TN52AUX

-

21.15.2 Application AUX board is a system control and communication unit.

21.15.3 Functions and Features This section describes the functions and features of AUX boards. For detailed functions and features of the TN11AUX board, refer to Table 21-44. Table 21-44 Functions and features of the TN11AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.

Interface

Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces

Setting of subrack ID

Supported.

For detailed functions and features of the TN15AUX board, refer to Table 21-45.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2382



Table 21-45 Functions and features of the TN15AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Implements inter-board and inter-subrack communication, and intrasubrack management. The TN15AUX board collects overheads of other boards and sends the overheads to the SCC board. Then the SCC board processes the overheads and sends the processed overheads to the TN15AUX board. Subsequently, the TN15AUX board sends the processed overheads back to the other boards.

Interface

Provides Ethernet and management interfaces. Provides common and emergency interfaces for inter-subrack communication.

For detailed functions and features of the TN16AUX board, refer to Table 21-46. Table 21-46 Functions and features of the TN16AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management. Supports 1+1 protection. The TN16AUX collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM. After processing overhead information, the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/ TN16UXCM sends the processed information to the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the other boards. NOTE In an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, two TN16AUX boards must be configured if the IEEE 1588v2 function is required.

Does not provide external interfaces.

Interface

For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 21-47. Table 21-47 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various auxiliary and management interfaces.


2383




Description

Interface

Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators.

Power supply backup

Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply backup.

Alarm function

Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.


Description

Basic function

Implements communications between boards or subracks.

Interface



Description

Basic function

Implements communications between boards or subracks, and supports 1+1 protection.

Interface


21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-65 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/ TN22AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board. Figure 21-66 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN15AUX/TN16AUX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2384



Figure 21-65 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX/ TN51AUX/TN52AUX board


Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse


Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Figure 21-66 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN15AUX/TN16AUX board CPU and control module

Monitoring module

Power supply module



Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane


Module Function l

CPU and control module The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the communication module and detects the power supply at the same time. TN11AUX/TN15AUX/: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2385



TN51AUX/TN52AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. l

Communication module NOTE

The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI board. The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards.

– Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Implements the data communication between boards. – Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and the NM terminal. – TN11AUX/TN15AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network interfaces. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. l

Power supply module TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN15AUX/TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN 3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system.

l

Overhead Processing module – Collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM. – Receives the processed overhead information from TN16XCH/TN16SCC/ TN16UXCM and sends the information to the other boards.

l


21.15.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-67 shows the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX board. Figure 21-68 shows the front panel of the TN16AUX board. Figure 21-69 shows the front panel of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Figure 21-70 shows the front panel of the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2386



Figure 21-67 Front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX board


STAT PROG

AUX

Figure 21-68 Front panel of the TN16AUX board AUX STAT ACT PROG SRV ALMC

RESET

SubRACK-ID

LAMP TEST ALM CUT

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2387



Figure 21-69 Front panel of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board

STAT PROG

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 EXT

AUX

Figure 21-70 Front panel of the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board AUX

STAT ACT PROG SRV

Indicators There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2388



There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board. There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX , and TN52AUX board. l


l

Service active status indicator (ACT) - dual-colored (green, orange)

l


l


l

Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow NOTE

Only the ACT indicator of TN51AUX board supports the orange color.


Interfaces Table 21-50 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN11AUX board. The TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces. Table 21-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45

l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the equipment to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the equipment. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs.

NM_ETH2

RJ45


ETH1

RJ45

Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

ETH2

RJ45

Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

Table 21-51 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN15AUX board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2389



Table 21-51 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN15AUX board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45

NM_ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 8800 platform through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 8800 platform. l Connects to the external CRPC or ROP board of a slave subrack using a network cable so that the slave subrack can communicate with the CRPC or ROP board.

ETH1

RJ45

ETH2

RJ45

l Connects the ETH1/ETH2 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

Table 21-52 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 21-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45


NM_ETH2

RJ45


EXT

DB64

Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface, commissioning network interface and management serial interface.

Buttons Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 21-53. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2390



Table 21-53 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16AUX board.

ALM CUT

Used to clear an audible alarm.

LAMP TEST

Used to test all of the indicators.

LED LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table 21-54. Table 21-54 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

LED indicator

Function

SubRack-ID

The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-71.


2391



Figure 21-71 LED

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Error


0

Decimal subrack ID

21.15.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one AUX board. Table 21-55 shows the valid slots for the TN11AUX board. Table 21-55 Valid slots for the TN11AUX board Product

Slot


IU21

Table 21-56 shows the valid slots for the TN15AUX board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2392



Table 21-56 Valid slots for the TN15AUX board Product

Slot


IU21

Table 21-57 shows the valid slots for the TN16AUX board. Table 21-57 Valid slots for the TN16AUX board Product

Slot


IU21, IU22

Table 21-58 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 21-58 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Product

Slot


IU10

Table 21-59 shows the valid slots for the TN51AUX board. Table 21-59 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board Product

Slot

General OSN 8800 T32 subrack

IU41


IU41

General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

IU72, IU83


IU72, IU83

Table 21-60 shows the valid slots for the TN52AUX board. Table 21-60 Valid slots for the TN52AUX board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Slot


IU41


2393



Product

Slot


IU41, IU43


IU72, IU83


IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84

21.15.7 Jumper The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board. There are eight DIP switches inside the TN15AUX board.The jumpers and DIP switches are used to set the subrack ID. There is no jumper inside the TN16AUX/ TN51AUX/TN52AUX board.

Jumper of TN11AUX The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-72 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 21-72, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18, jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be capped. The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-73 shows the position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 21-73, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2394



Figure 21-72 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing Representing Representing

0

0

1

1

2

3

Junper cap

Jumpers

1

2

3 CPU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2395



Figure 21-73 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing 0

Representing 0

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing 1

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

CAUTION The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 21-73 . Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2396



board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-74 shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 21-74 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board Representing 0

Representing 0

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing 1

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2397



CAUTION The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 21-74. Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

DIP Switches of the TN15AUX Board The TN15AUX board has two DIP switches. The value set by each switch can be 0 or 1 (in binary code). ID1–ID4 correspond to pins 1–4 on SW2 and ID5–ID8 correspond to pins 1–4 on SW1. Only ID1–ID5 are valid. (ID6–ID8 are reserved.) From higher bits to lower bits are ID5– ID1, which can be set to 32 combinations and the default value is 00000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-75 shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN15AUX board. l

When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 21-75, values ID5–ID1 correspond to 00001 (in binary code), which indicates that the subrack ID is 1 in decimal.

Figure 21-75 Positions of the DIP switches on the TN15AUX board ON (ID1)

ON (ID5)

ON (ID2)

ON (ID6)

ON (ID3) ON (ID4)

ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

SW1

SW1 SW2

SW2

Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 21-76 shows the jumpers. The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 21-77.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2398



Figure 21-76 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX

CPU

Jumper

Figure 21-77 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX

J4J11J10J21J20J19J23J22

Jumper

Jumper cap

8 (J4)

21.15.8 AUX Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: – TN11AUX/TN15AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H))

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2399



– TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) – TN51AUX/TN52AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) – TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) – TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) l

Weight: – TN11AUX/TN15AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) – TN51AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.) – TN52AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.) – TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) – TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11AUX

12.0

17.0

TN15AUX

11.0

14.0

TN16AUX

16.5

19.2

TN21AUX

11.7

13.0

TN22AUX

15.0

17.0

TN51AUX

17.5

19.0

TN52AUX

15.0

20.0


2400


22


Optical Supervisory Channel Board

About This Chapter 22.1 Overview OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths. 22.2 HSC1 HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board 22.3 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board 22.4 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit 22.5 ST2 ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2401



22.1 Overview OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths.

Positions of OSC Boards in a WDM System Figure 22-1 shows the positions of OSC boards in a WDM system. Figure 22-1 Positions of OSC boards in a WDM system OA

SCC

OSC board

OA

S F I U / F I U

NE 1

S F I U / F I U

OA OSC board

SCC OA

S F I U / F I U

S F I U / F I U

OA OSC board

SCC

OA

NE 2

NE 3

NOTE

Among all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.

In the preceding figure, the SCC board on NE1 sends the local NMS monitored data to the OSC board. Then the OSC board converts the NMS monitored data into an OSC signal and sends the signal to the SFIU/FIU board. Lastly, the SFIU/FIU board multiplexes the signal with the main channel signal onto the line for transmission. On NE2, the FIU/SFIU board extracts the OSC signal from the line and sends it to the OSC board. Then the OSC board restores the monitoring information from the OSC signal and sends the information to the SCC board for processing.

Main Functions Board

Dimen sion

Span Distance

Center Wavelength

Signal Bandwidth

HSC1

1

53 dB

1510 nm

4.096 Mbit/s

SC1

1

48 dB

1510 nm

4.096 Mbit/s 16.896 Mbit/s

SC2

2

48 dB

1510nm

4.096 Mbit/s 16.896 Mbit/s

ST2a

2

40 dB

1491 nm

155.52 Mbit/s

1511 nm a: The ST2 board also supports clock signals and FE electrical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2402



22.2 HSC1 HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

22.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1HS C1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

22.2.2 Application As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-2. Figure 22-2 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system OAU

OAU

SCC

HSC1

OAU

NE1

F I U

F I U

HSC1

HSC1

SCC

OAU F I U

OAU

NE2

F I U

HSC1

SCC

OAU

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-2, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2403



The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

22.2.3 Functions and Features The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-1. Table 22-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission.

Technical features

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regenerati on function

The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelengt h

The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

22.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2404



Figure 22-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board

CMI decoding module

O/E

RM


CMI encoding module

E/O

TM


Optical receiving module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

Signal Flow The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals Figure 22-4 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 22-4 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

2

3

...

14

15

16


...

31

2405



For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-2. Table 22-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number

Name

Function

1

E1 byte

Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.

2

F1 byte

Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.

3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performance events. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

14

ALC byte

Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte.

17

F2 byte

Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance.

18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23

Optical layer overhea d bytes

Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.

Other

Reserve d

-

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Overhead processing module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2406



Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. l


l


22.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-5 shows the front panel of the HSC1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2407



Figure 22-5 Front panel of the HSC1 board

HSC1 STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

TM RM

HSC1



l


l


l





2408



Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board Interface

Type

Function

TM

LC


RM

LC


EOW

RJ45

Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.


22.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one HSC1 board. Table 22-4 shows the valid slots for the HSC1 board. Table 22-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5 and IU11

22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1 The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-5. Table 22-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always W.


2409



Code

Meaning

Description

Second to tenth characters

Optical signal wavelength range

The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board.

Eleventh character

-

The eleventh character is always P.

Twelfth character

Numbers of optical interface

The number of the optical interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-6. Table 22-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM/TM

1

NOTE


22.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 22-7. Table 22-7 HSC1 parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



2410



Field

Value

Description


-



240/1510.00/198.540

This parameter is queriable only.

Band Type

SMC






NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.

Off, On


Laser Status


Default: On

22.2.10 HSC1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Optical Specifications Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board. Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Unit

Value

Signal rate

Mbit/s

4.096


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

5 to 10


dBm

≤ -48

Receiver overload

dBm

-3


2411





l





TN11HSC1

8.0

8.8

22.3 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

22.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1SC 1

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2SC 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions None

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2412




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SC1

TN12SC1

The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the TN11SC1.

TN12SC1

None

-

22.3.2 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-6. Figure 22-6 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system OA

SCC

SC1

OA F I U

OA

NE1

F I U

SC2 SCC

OA F I U

F I U

OA

NE2

SC1

SCC

OA

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-6, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured as described above, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

22.3.3 Functions and Features The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-9. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2413



Table 22-9 Functions and features of the SC1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal. The SC1 supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.

Technical features

The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.


The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added.


The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.

Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

22.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2414



Figure 22-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board

CMI decoding module

O/E

RM


CMI encoding module

E/O

TM



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC


Frame Structure of the OSC Signals Figure 22-8 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 22-8 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

1

2

3

...

14

15

16


...

31

2415




Name

Function

1

E1 byte


2

F1 byte


3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

14

ALC byte


17

F2 byte


18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23



Other

Reserve d

-

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Overhead processing module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2416



Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. l


l


22.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-9 shows the front panel of the SC1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2417



Figure 22-9 Front panel of the SC1 board

SC1 STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

TM RM

SC1



l


l


l





2418



Table 22-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board Interface

Type

Function

TM

LC


RM

LC


EOW

RJ45



22.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SC1 board. Table 22-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board. Table 22-12 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 22-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC1 board. Table 22-13 Valid slots for the TN12SC1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


2419



22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1 The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-14. Table 22-14 Characteristic code for the SC1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-


Second to the tenth characters



Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


The number of the optical interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-15. Table 22-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM/TM

1

NOTE




2420



For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 22-16. Table 22-16 SC1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



240/1510.00/198.540


Band Type

SMC







Off, On Default: On



Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

NOTE Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0


AMS Power Abnormity Threshold (dB)

0.5 to 10.0

Laser Status


Default: /


Default:3

Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold. NOTE Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.

22.3.10 SC1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2421



Optical Specifications Table 22-17 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board. Table 22-17 Optical specifications of the SC1 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal ratea

Mbit/s

16.896


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

-4 to 0


dBm

≤ -46

Receiver overload

dBm

-3

4.096

≤ -48

a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.



l





TN11SC1/TN12SC1

11.0

14.9

22.4 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

22.4.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2422




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1SC 2

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2SC 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions None


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SC2

TN12SC2

The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the TN11SC2.

TN12SC2

None

-

22.4.2 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-10. Figure 22-10 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system OA

SCC

SC1

OA

NE1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OA F I U

F I U

SC2 SCC

OA F I U

OA

NE2


F I U

SC1

SCC

OA

NE3

2423



In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-10, you can manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

22.4.3 Functions and Features The SC2 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-18. Table 22-18 Functions and features of the SC2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.

Technical features

The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.


The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added.


The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.

Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2424



22.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board. Figure 22-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board

RM1

RM2

O/E CMI decoding module

O/E


CMI encoding module


E/O

TM1

E/O

TM2


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage




Frame Structure of the OSC Signals Figure 22-12 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2425



Figure 22-12 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

1

2

3

...

14

15

16

...

31


Name

Function

1

E1 byte


2

F1 byte


3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

14

ALC byte


17

F2 byte


18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23



Other

Reserve d

-

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2426


l


Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

l

Overhead processing module Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module.

l


l


22.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-13 shows the front panel of the SC2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2427



Figure 22-13 Front panel of the SC2 board

SC2 STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2

SC2



l


l


l





2428



Table 22-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board Interface

Type

Function

TM1/TM2

LC

Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.

RM1/RM2

LC

Receives the first/second supervisory signal.

EOW

RJ45

Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to realize orderwire communication between NEs.


22.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SC2 board. Table 22-21 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC2 board. Table 22-21 Valid slots for the TN11SC2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 22-22 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC2 board. Table 22-22 Valid slots for the TN12SC2 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


2429



22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2 The characteristic code for the SC2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-23. Table 22-23 Characteristic code for the SC2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


The numbers of optical interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P2. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-24. Table 22-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM1/TM1

1

RM2/TM2

2

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2430



22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 22-25. Table 22-25 SC2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



240/1510.00/198.540


Band Type

SMC







Off, On Default: On



Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Laser Status


Default: /


Default:3

Specifies the OAMS power abnormity threshold. The OAMS function is started if the variation between the detected power value and the specified Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold. NOTE Only the TN12SC2 support this parameter.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2431



22.4.10 SC2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-26 lists the optical specifications of the SC2. Table 22-26 Optical specifications of the SC2 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal ratea

Mbit/s

16.896


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

-4 to 0


dBm

≤ -46

Receiver overload

dBm

-3

4.096

≤ -48

a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.



l





TN11SC2/TN12SC2

13.5

14.5

22.5 ST2 ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

22.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2432




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1ST 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

22.5.2 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.In addition, the ST2 board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals. For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-14. Figure 22-14 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system

OA

SCC

ST2

OA

NE1

l

S F I U / F I U

S F I U / F I U

OA ST2 scc

OA

S F I U / F I U

NE2

S F I U / F I U

OA

ST2

SCC

OA

NE3

Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east directions. In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network. The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2433



converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing. l

Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization. Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE. The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this NE. Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE. Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals. Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where the clock board is located. NOTE

When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals.

l

Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals. NE1: – In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. – In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. NE3: – In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. – In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.

22.5.3 Functions and Features The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition, the ST2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-27.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2434



Table 22-27 Functions and features of the ST2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals. Supports IEEE 1588 V2 function. Supports physical clock function. Supports a maximum of 40.5 dB transmission. NOTE When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals.

Technical features

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regeneration function

The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelength

When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is 1491 nm. When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1511 nm.

Loopback

Supports outloops.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

eSFP

The board supports pluggable optical modules that use 1511 nm and 1491 nm wavelengths.

22.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588 module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2435



Figure 22-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board WSC1

WSC2

RM1 RM2

O/E

FE signal processing module

O/E

Supervisory signal processing module


1588 module

E/O

TM1

E/O

TM2



Control Memory

Communication

CPU

Control and communication module Power supply module

Required Voltage

Fuse



Signal Flow l

The optical supervisory signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical signal by the O/E module. After the conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical supervisory signal.

The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. l

In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM1 port. The ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM2 port.

l

In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and an FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2436



signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC1 port. In addition, the ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC2 port.

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

l

Service processing module – FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. – Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding. – 1588 module Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


22.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-16 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2437



Figure 22-16 Front panel of the ST2 board ST2 STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW

WSC1

WSC2

TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2

ST2



l


l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2438



Table 22-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board Interface

Type

Function

TM1/TM2

LC

Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.

RM1/RM2

LC

Receives the first/second supervisory signal.

WSC1/WSC2a

RJ45

Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE electrical signals. NOTE The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of 1518 bytes.

EOW

RJ45


a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN11ST2 board.


22.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one ST2 board. Table 22-29 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board. Table 22-29 Valid slots for the ST2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

NOTE

If the ST2 board uses the clock function, it must be installed in a subrack housing clock boards.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2439



22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2 The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-30. Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the ST2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-




The optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm processed by the board.

Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


The numbers of optical interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1484.5/1517.5P2. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-31. Table 22-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM1/TM1

1

RM2/TM2

2

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2440



22.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 22-32. Table 22-32 ST2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






NOTE Only support Non-Loopback and Outloop.


When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.

Off, On Default: On



-


Band Type

-


DEG Threshold

0 to 10167

Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter.

Laser Status

Default: 190

DEG Monitoring Time(s)

2 to 10

Degrade Threshold Before FEC

1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,

Default: 7

Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.

Default: 1E-4 Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Disable, Enable


Default: Disable


2441



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Default: /


Default:3

22.5.10 ST2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-33 lists the optical specifications of the ST2. Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the ST2 board Item

Unit

Value 150 km OSC Module

80 km OSC Module

Signal rate

Mbit/s

155.52

155.52

Target distance

-

150 km (62 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1504.5 to 1517.5

1504.5 to 1517.5

1484.5 to 1497.5

1484.5 to 1497.5


dBm

0.5 to 5

-4 to 1


dBm

≤ -41

≤ -34

Receiver overload

dBm

-10

-10



l

Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2442



Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11ST2

17.5

19.5


2443



23

Optical Protection Board

About This Chapter 23.1 Overview Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective receiving function. 23.2 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit 23.3 OLP OLP: optical line protection unit 23.4 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2444



23.1 Overview Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective receiving function.

Positions of Optical Protection Boards in a WDM System Different optical protection boards support different types of protection. Figure 23-1 shows the position of DCP boards in a WDM system when it offers client 1+1 protection. For the positions of the DCP, OLP, and SCS boards in other protection scenarios, see 23.2 DCP, 23.3 OLP, and 23.4 SCS. Figure 23-1 Position of DCP boards in a WDM system (client 1+1 protection) MUX

MUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

OTU (W)

DMUX

DCP

DCP

OTU (P)

MUX

MUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

Working signal

OTU (P)



OTU (W)

DMUX

Protection signal

Main Functions Table 23-1 lists the main functions of optical protection boards. Table 23-1 Main functions of optical protection boards Board

Function

Supported Protection Type

DCP

l Protects two optical signals.

l Intra-board 1+1 protection

l For each protected signal, selects the better signal from the working and protection channels using its optical switch.

l Client 1+1 protection

l Protects one signal.

l Optical line protection

l Selects the better signal from the working and protection channels using its optical switch.

l Intra-board 1+1 protection

OLP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l Optical wavelength shared protection



2445



Board

Function

Supported Protection Type

SCS

l Protects two signals.


l For each protected signal, selects the better signal from the working and protection channels based on instructions sent by the SCC board. The board receives and couples the signals from both the working and protection channels when it does not work with an SCC board.

23.2 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit

23.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1DC P

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

TN1 2DC P

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Board

Type

Description

TN11DCP

01

Supports the single-mode optical module.

02

Supports the multi-mode optical module.

01

Supports the single-mode optical module.

TN12DCP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2446




Function: – The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. – The TN12DCP supports single-mode optical module.

l

Specification: – The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.2.10 DCP Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11DCP

TN12DCP

In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.

TN12DCP

None

-

23.2.2 Application Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1 protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-2, Figure 23-3 and Figure 23-4. Figure 23-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection) TO11

RI1 1

TO21 MUX

OTU

TI1 RO1

RI11

DMUX RI21 FIU

FIU

RI21 DMUX

TI2

RI12

TO22 MUX RI12

TI1 OTU

MUX TO21

DCP TO12 OTU RO2

RO1

TO11

DMUX RI22 FIU

FIU

RI22 DMUX

TO12

DCP RO2 TI2

OTU

MUX TO22

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2447



Figure 23-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection) OTU1

λ1/λ2 2 x DCP

λ2/λ1

OTU1

OTU2

OADM λ2/λ1 (East) λ1/λ2 (East)

λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ2 λ1 (West)

FIU

FIU OADM λ1/λ2 (West) λ2/λ1 2 x DCP λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

λ2 λ1 OADM (East)

FIU

FIU

A

D

B

C

FIU

FIU

λ1 λ2

λ2 λ1 OADM (East) λ1 λ2

OTU2

λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

2 x DCP OADM λ2/λ1 (West) λ1/λ2 FIU

FIU

λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ1 λ2

λ2/λ1 OADM λ1/λ2 (East)

2 x DCP

λ2/λ1 OTU2

OTU2

OTU1

: Working signal

λ1/λ2 OTU1

: Optical signal

: Protection signal

Figure 23-4 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) Client-side

TO11 RI11

TI1 TO21

RO1

RI21

DCP TI2 RO2

TO12 RI12

MUX OTU (W)

OTU TO22 (P) RI22

DMUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

MUX DMUX

MUX FIU

MUX

Client-side RO1 TI1

OTU RI21 (W)

TO21 RI12 TO12

OTU (P) RI22

FIU

DMUX

RI11 TO11

DCP RO2 TI2

TO22

NOTE

When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP board can be used for client-side protection.

23.2.3 Functions and Features The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1 protection. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2448



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-2. Table 23-2 Functions and features of the DCP board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals to implement 1+1 protection. l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all stations.

Protection scheme

Dual-fed and selective receiving. (At the transmit end, the protected signal is dually fed to the working and protection paths. At the receive end, the working or protection signal is selected if it has the higher power level.)

Optical-layer ASON

The DCP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1 +1 protection.

23.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2449



Figure 23-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11

TI1 TI2

Optical switch

RO1

RI12

Optical switch

RI21

RO2

RI22

Optical power detecting module Optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals. The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2450



communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts. – Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.

l


l


23.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-6 shows the front panel of the DCP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2451



Figure 23-6 Front panel of the DCP board

DCP STAT ACT PROG SRV

TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2

DCP



l


l


l





2452



Table 23-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board Interface

Type

Function

TI1

LC

Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection) Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection)

TI2

LC

Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

RO1

LC

Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection)

RO2

LC

Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

TO11

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)

TO12

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2453



Interface

Type

Function

TO21

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

TO22

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

RI11/RI12

LC

Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)

RI21/RI22

LC

Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)


23.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DCP board. Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2454



Table 23-4 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

Table 23-5 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board. Table 23-5 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IIU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-6. Table 23-6 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always P.


Maximum protection switching time

Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2455




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-7. Table 23-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TO11/RI11

1

TO12/RI12

2

TO21/RI21

3

TO22/RI22

4

TI1/RO1

5

TI2/RO2

6

NOTE


23.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 23-8. Table 23-8 DCP parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2456



Field

Value

Description


-35 to -10


Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

-10 to 10

Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)

3 to 8

Default: -35

Default: 0

Default: 5

The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

23.2.10 DCP Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2457



Optical Specifications Table 23-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board Interface

Item

Unit

Value TN11DC P01

TN11DC P02

TN12DC P01

TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22

Insertion loss at the transmit end

Singlemode

dB

≤4

-

≤4

Multimode

dB

-

≤4.5

-

RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2

Insertion loss at the receive end

Singlemode

dB

≤1.5

-

≤1.5

Multimode

dB

-

≤2

-

Singlemode

dBm

-35 to 7

-

-35 to 7

Multimode

dBm

-

-35 to 0

-

Singlemode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

-

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

Multimode

nm

-

830 to 870

-

Switching threshold of optical power difference

dB

5

5

5

Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference

dB

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

Range of the input optical power


NOTE l The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports TN11DCP02 and TN12DCP01. l The OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11DCP01, TN11DCP02, and TN12DCP01.



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2458






TN11DCP/TN12DCP

6.8

7.5

23.3 OLP OLP: optical line protection unit

23.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1OL P

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

TN1 2OL P

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 23-10 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board. Table 23-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Type

Description

TN11OLP

01

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection.

02

Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection.


2459



Table 23-11 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board. Table 23-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board Board

Type

Description

TN12OLP

01

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection.

03

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection.

04

Supports single-mode optical module; supports optical line protection.


Function: – The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. It supports only normal power application. – The TN12OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports not only normal power application but also high power application.

l

Specification: – The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.3.10 OLP Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OLP

TN12OLP

In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.

TN12OLP

None

-

23.3.2 Application Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-7, Figure 23-8, Figure 23-9, Figure 23-10 and Figure 23-11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2460



Figure 23-7 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 1) OTU

TI

MUX

OTU

FIU OTU OTU

RI1

RI1

TO1

RO

DMUX

TO2

RI2

RI2

TO2

OTU OTU

OLP

OLP RO

DMUX

TO1

FIU TI

OTU

MUX

OTU

NOTE


Figure 23-8 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 2) OTU OTU

TO1

TI

MUX

OA

RI1

OA FIU

FIU

OA

OTU

DMUX

RO

RO TO1

RI2

OA

RI2

OTU

DMUX

OTU OTU

OA

OLP TO2

RI1

OLP

OA FIU

FIU

OA

OA

TO2

TI

MUX

OTU OTU

NOTE


Figure 23-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection) TO1

RI1

OTU

TI RO OLP

TO2

MUX

DMUX

FIU

FIU

DMUX

MUX

MUX

DMUX

FIU

RI2

FIU

DMUX

MUX

RI1 TO1

RI2

OLP

RO TI OTU

TO2

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2461



Figure 23-10 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) Client-side

Cient-side TO1 RI1

DMUX

MUX

OTU (W)

FIU

FIU MUX

DMUX

TI

RO OLP

OTU RI1 (W) TO1 OLP

MUX

TO2 OTU RI2 (P)

DMUX

FIU

FIU MUX

DMUX

RO TI

OTU RI2 (P) TO2

NOTE

When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP board can be used for client-side protection.

Figure 23-11 Position of the TN12OLP04 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application) OTU OTU

MUX

OTU

DMUX

RI1 RO

OLP

SFIU OTU

T01

TI

RO

T02

RI2

RI1

T01

RI2

T02

DMUX

OTU OTU

SFIU

OLP TI

MUX

OTU OTU

NOTE


23.3.3 Functions and Features The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-12. Table 23-12 Functions and features of the OLP board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of signals when the line fiber fails. Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2462




Description

Protection scheme

Dual-fed and selective receiving. (At the transmit end, the protected signal is dually fed to the working and protection paths. At the receive end, the working or protection signal is selected if it has the higher power level.)

Optical-layer ASON

The OLP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1+1 protection.

23.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board. Figure 23-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board TO1 TO2

TI

Optical switch

RI1

RO

RI2 Optical power detecting module

Optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Transmit direction Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2463



The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part. – Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.

l


l


23.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-13 shows the front panel of the OLP board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2464



Figure 23-13 Front panel of the OLP board

OLP STAT ACT PROG SRV



TO1 RI1 TO2 RI2 RO TI

OLP



2465



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 23-13 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board Interface

Type

Function

TI

LC

Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical line protection) Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RO

LC

Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line protection) Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

TO1/TO2

LC

Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RI1/RI2

LC

Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection) Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2466



23.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one OLP board. Table 23-14 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board. Table 23-14 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

Table 23-15 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board. Table 23-15 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IIU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-16. Table 23-16 Characteristic code for the OLP board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



2467



Code

Meaning

Description




For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-17. Table 23-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TO1/RI1

1

TO2/RI2

2

TI/RO

3

NOTE


23.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 23-18. Table 23-18 OLP parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2468



Field

Value

Description


-35 to -10

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information

Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

-10 to 10

Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)

0, 3 to 8

Default: -35 for more information.

Default: 0

Default: 5

The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

23.3.10 OLP Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2469



Optical Specifications Table 23-19 Optical specifications of the OLP board Interf ace

Item

Unit

TITO1 TITO2

Inserti on loss at the trans mit end

single mode

RI1RO RI2RO

Inserti on loss at the receiv e end

Value TN11OL P

TN12OLP0 1a

TN12OLP0 3a

TN12OLP0 4a

dB

≤4

≤4

≤4

≤4

multi mode

dB

≤4.5

-

-

-

single mode

dB

≤1.5

≤1.5

≤1.5

≤1.5

multi mode

dB

≤2

-

-

-

Range of the input optical power

single mode

dBm

-35 to 7

-35 to 7

-30 to 23

-32 to 23

multi mode

dBm

-35 to 0

-

-

-


single mode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1528 to 1567

multi mode

nm

830 to 870

-

-

-

Switching threshold of optical power difference

dB

5

5

5

5

Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference

dB

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

NOTE l OptiX OSN 8800 supports TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03 and TN12OLP04. l OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11OLP01, TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03 and TN12OLP04. l a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2470





Weight l

TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)

l

TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)




TN11OLP

6.0

6.6

TN12OLP

4.0

4.5

23.4 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator unit

23.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1SC S

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Type

Description

SCS

01

Supports single-mode optical module.

02

Supports multi-mode optical module.


2471



23.4.2 Application As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode). For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-14 and Figure 23-15. Figure 23-14 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) Client-side

TO11 RI11

MUX

OTU TO21 (W)

TI1 RO1

RI21

SCS TI2 RO2

DMUX

FIU

TO12 RI12

OTU TO22 (P)

FIU

DMUX

MUX

MUX

DMUX

FIU

OTU (W) RI21

RO1 TI1

TO21 RI12 TO12

SCS

OTU (P) RI22

FIU

DMUX

RI22

Client-side

RI11 TO11

MUX

RO2 TI2

TO22

Figure 23-15 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)

TBE1

R1

S C S

TBE2 TBE1

TBE1

L 4 G

O A D M

F I U

F I U

TBE2

O A D M

L 4 G

TBE2 TBE1

S C S

R1

TBE2

23.4.3 Functions and Features The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended mode). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-20. Table 23-20 Functions and features of the SCS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and implements client-side 1+1 protection. l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and implements board-level protection (extended mode).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2472




Description

Protection scheme

The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

23.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board. Figure 23-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board Optical module TI1

Splitter

TO11 TO12

TI2

Splitter

TO21 TO22

RO1

Coupler

RI11 RI12

RO2

Coupler

RI21 RI22

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2473


l


Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers. – Splitter Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Coupler Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality.

l


l


23.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-17 shows the front panel of the SCS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2474



Figure 23-17 Front panel of the SCS board

SCS STAT

TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2

SCS



For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2475



Table 23-21 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board Interface

Type

Function

TI1/TI2

LC

Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

RO1/RO2

LC

Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals.

TO11/TO12

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU.

TO21/TO22

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU.

RI11/RI12

LC

Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.

RI21/RI22

LC

Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.


23.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SCS board. Table 23-22 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board. Table 23-22 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

23.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-23. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2476



Table 23-23 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-24. Table 23-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TI1/RO1

1

TO11/RI11

2

TO12/RI12

3

TI2/RO2

4

TO21/RI21

5

TO22/RI22

6

NOTE


23.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 23-25.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2477



Table 23-25 SCS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.

23.4.10 SCS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-26 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board. Table 23-26 Optical specifications of the SCS board Interface

Item

TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22

Splitting insertion loss

RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2

Coupling insertion loss


Unit

Value

Single-mode

dB

≤4

Multi-mode

dB

≤4.5

Single-mode

dB

≤4

Multi-mode

dB

≤4.5

Single-mode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

Multi-mode

nm

830 to 870



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2478



Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11SCS

0.2

0.3


2479


24 Spectrum Analyzer Board

24

Spectrum Analyzer Board

About This Chapter 24.1 Overview Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting the signal performance. 24.2 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.3 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.4 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board 24.5 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2480



24.1 Overview Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting the signal performance.

Positions of Spectrum Analyzer Boards in a WDM System Figure 24-1 illustrates the position of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system by using the OPM8 board as an example. Figure 24-1 Positions of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system

OTU

OM

OAU

OD

OAU

OTU

OD

OAU

OM

OAU

OTU

OPM8

IN1 MON OUT

OTU

OPM8

OPM8

OTU

OTU

OTU OTU

Spectral information can be queried using the U2000

IN

OAU

Main Functions Board

Number of Ports

Monitoring Capabilitya Number of Wavelength s

Optical Power

Center Wavelength

OSNRb

MCA4

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

MCA8

8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Remarks


It is recommended that these boards be configured at 2481


Board


Number of Ports

Monitoring Capabilitya

Remarks

Number of Wavelength s

Optical Power

Center Wavelength

OSNRb

OPM8

8

Y

Y

N

Yc

the receive end.

WMU

2

Y

Y

Y

N

This board must be configured at the transmit end.

a: "Y" indicates that the board supports the function. "N" indicates that the board does not support the function. b: Observe the following information when OSNR monitoring is required: MCA4/MCA8: l The Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is optional. l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, there are the following restrictions: OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used. TN12OPM8: l The Optical Doctor Management System Function Software must be used. l OSNR monitoring is supported for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals. c: Only the TN12OPM8 can monitor OSNR.

24.2 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

24.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2482



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M CA4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 24-1 lists the types of the MCA4 board. Table 24-1 Type description of the MCA4 board Board

Type

Description

TN11MCA 4

01

Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.

02

Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been configured. NOTE l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, and 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system. there are the following restrictions: l OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. l OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used.

24.2.2 Application As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board provides four ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths. For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-2. Figure 24-2 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU MCA4

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU

MCA4

OAU

MUX

OTU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OTU


OTU OTU

2483



NOTE

The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.

24.2.3 Functions and Features The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-2. Table 24-2 Functions and features of the MCA4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides four ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.

Detection function

Supports monitoring of the following information and reports to the SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000. l Optical power of each wavelength l Central wavelength l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path l OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower rate signals l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been configured. NOTE l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, and 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system. there are the following restrictions: l OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. l OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used. NOTE If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA4 board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA4 board.

APE function

Supported Detects the optical power of each wavelength.

Optical-layer ASON

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2484



24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board. Figure 24-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04

Spectrum analysis module

1× 4

optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal

Driving and control module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and控制与通信模块 communication module Power supply module Fuse


Required voltage


Signal Flow The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x4 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l

Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

l Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Driving and control module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2485



– Drives and controls spectrum. – Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l


l


24.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-4 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2486



Figure 24-4 Front panel of the MCA4 board

MCA4 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

MCA4



l


l


l





2487



Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC

Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.

24.2.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one MCA4 board. Table 24-4 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board. Table 24-4 Valid slots for the MCA4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16


IU2-IU5

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2488



The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-5. Table 24-5 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-6. Table 24-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1-IN4

1-4

24.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 24-7. Table 24-7 MCA4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2489



Field

Value

Description

Optical Monitoring

Enabled, Disabled

Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the spectrum analyzer board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.

Default: Enabled

Configure Band

C

Sets the working band types of a board.


-



-



All, Odd, Even


Port

-

Displays port name and wavelength frequency.

Band

-

Displays the current band.

Wavelength Monitor Status

No Monitor, Monitor Default: No Monitor

Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor.

Board

-

Displays the board name.

Optical Switch No.

-

The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer board.

Monitor Interval (min.)

5 to 49995

parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status.

WDM type

Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps

Default: All

Default: 10

This parameter is reserved for future use. Users do not need to set it.

Default: Default

24.2.10 MCA4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2490



Optical Specifications Table 24-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board. Table 24-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100

Detect range for single channel optical power

dBm

-30 to -10

Detect accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of 10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)

OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of 10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR detection range: 13-23)

Detect accuracy for central wavelength

nm

±0.1


pcs

4

a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the board works with the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software and the OD (Optical Doctor) function has been configured on the NMS.



l





MCA4

8.0

8.5

24.3 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

24.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MCA8 board is TN11. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2491




8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1M CA8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 24-9 lists the types of the MCA8 board. Table 24-9 Type description of the MCA8 board Board

Type

Description

TN11MCA 8

01

Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.

02

Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals. Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been configured. NOTE l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, and 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system. there are the following restrictions: l OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. l OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used.

24.3.2 Application As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths. For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-5.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2492



Figure 24-5 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU MCA8

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

MCA8

OAU

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU

NOTE

The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.

24.3.3 Functions and Features The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-10. Table 24-10 Functions and features of the MCA8

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.


2493




Description

Detection function

Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000. l Optical power of each wavelength l Central wavelength l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path l OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower rate signals l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been configured. NOTE l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, and 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system. there are the following restrictions: l OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. l OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used. NOTE If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA8 board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA8 board.

APE function

Supported Detects the optical power of each wavelength.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2494



Figure 24-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08

Spectrum analysis module 1× 8

optical switch Driving signal

Control signal

Data signal


Control CPU Communication Control and控制与通信模块 communication module

Memory


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.

Module Function l

1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l

Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

l

Driving and control module – Drives and controls spectrum. – Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2495





24.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-7 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board. Figure 24-7 Front panel of the MCA8 board

MCA8 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

MCA8

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2496





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 24-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC

Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.

24.3.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one MCA8 board. Table 24-12 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board. Table 24-12 Valid slots for the MCA8 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16


IU2-IU5


2497



NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-13. Table 24-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-14. Table 24-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1-IN8

1-8



2498



For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 24-15. Table 24-15 MCA8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Optical Monitoring


Configure Band

C

Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the spectrum analyzer board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface. Sets the working band type of a board.

Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Port

-


Band

-





Board

-


Optical Switch No.

-



5 to 49995


Default: All

Default: 10


2499



Field

Value

Description

WDM type

Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps

This parameter is reserved for future use. Users do not need to set it.

Default: Default

24.3.10 MCA8 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board. Table 24-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100


dBm

-30 to -10

Detect accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of 10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)

OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of 10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR detection range: 13-23)


nm

±0.1


pcs

8

a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the board works with the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function Software and the OD (Optical Doctor) function has been configured on the NMS.



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2500






MCA8

12.0

13.0

24.4 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board

24.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OPM8 board are TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1OP M8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN1 2OP M8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions Function: l

Only the TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/ s signals.

Substitution Relationship The OPM8 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

24.4.2 Application The OPM8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power monitor of up to 80 wavelengths. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2501



For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-8. Figure 24-8 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU OPM8

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

OPM8

OAU

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU

NOTE

The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.

24.4.3 Functions and Features The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-17. Table 24-17 Functions and features of the OPM8 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power monitor of up to 80 wavelengths.

Monitoring function

Detects optical power of each wavelength and reports the standard wavelength and optical power to the SCC board. NOTE TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals.

The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the U2000. Implements the APE function when the board is used with other required boards.

APE function

Monitors the optical power of each channel. Optical-layer ASON

Supported

24.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2502



Figure 24-9 and Figure 24-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8 and TN12OPM8 boards. Figure 24-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08

Optical power monitor module

1× 8 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal


Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Required voltage



2503



Figure 24-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OPM8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08


1× 8 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to, and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted, the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for optical.

l

Optical power monitor module Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the driving and control module.

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2504



Monitors channel optical power, wavelength information and OSNR, then reports the data to the driving and control module. l

Driving and control module – Drives and scans spectrum. – Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l


l


24.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-11 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2505



Figure 24-11 Front panel of the OPM8 board

OPM8 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

OPM8



l


l


l





2506



Table 24-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC

Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces of other boards at the same time.

24.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one OPM8 board. Table 24-19 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board. Table 24-19 Valid slots for the OPM8 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

24.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8 The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-20. Table 24-20 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2507



24.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 24-21. Table 24-21 OPM8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Optical Monitoring

Configure Band


Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.

C


Default: C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Port

-


Band

-





Board

-


Optical Switch No.

-


Default: All


2508



Field

Value

Description


5 to 49995


Default: 10

24.4.9 OPM8 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-22 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board. Table 24-22 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561


dBm

-30 to -10

Detected accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100


pcs

8

Detect accuracy for OSNRa

dB

±1.5 NOTE This item is valid only for TN12OPM8.

a: The OSNR detection function is available only the OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been configured.



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11OPM8/TN12OPM8

12

15


2509



24.5 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit

24.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1W MU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

24.5.2 Application The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system. For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-12. Figure 24-12 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system OSC MUX

DMUX

OA

OA

WMU

MUX

DMUX

FIU

FIU ITL WMU

ITL DMUX

MUX

OA

OA

DMUX

MUX

O O O O T T T T U U U U

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2510



NOTE

One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 24-12 shows the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.

24.5.3 Functions and Features The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-23. Table 24-23 Functions and features of the WMU board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized monitoring of the fixed-wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.

Optical switch

The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired transmission direction to monitor.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

24.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2511



Figure 24-13 Functional block diagram of the WMU board

IN1 IN2

Optical wavelength detection module

1X2 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical wavelength detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the wavelength information is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x2 optical switch Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for optical wavelength detection.

l

Optical wavelength detection module Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the wavelength information to the SCC board.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2512



24.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-14 shows the front panel of the WMU board. Figure 24-14 Front panel of the WMU board

WMU STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2

WMU



l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2513


l




Interfaces Table 24-24 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board Interface

Type

Function

IN1/IN2

LC

Each connect to the MON optical interface on an optical amplifier in the transmit direction or an FIU board for centralized wavelength monitoring.

24.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses on WMU board. Table 24-25 shows the valid slots for the WMU board. Table 24-25 Valid slots for the WMU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-26. Table 24-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

IN1


2514




Interface on the NM

IN2

2

24.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WMU parameters, refer to Table 24-27. Table 24-27 WMU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and displays the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.

24.5.9 WMU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-28 Optical specifications of the WMU board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561


GHz

50/100

Per-channel input optical power range

dBm

-36 to -16


GHz

<2.5

Detect accuracy for single channel optical power

dB

<2

Detect range for Central wavelength offset

GHz

-10 to 10


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2515


l



Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Optical Module Type



TN11WMU

-

12

15


2516


25

25 Variable Optical Attenuator Board

Variable Optical Attenuator Board

About This Chapter 25.1 Overview Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power. 25.2 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 25.3 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2517



25.1 Overview Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power.

Application of EVOAs EVOA boards adjust the optical power of optical signals as required by system control boards in the following scenarios: l

EVOA boards are configured before the input ports of OA boards to adjust the input optical power of OA boards to the OA nominal power or the target power specified in network design. See Figure 25-1. Figure 25-1 EVOA configured at the input port of an OA board

OA

EVOA

FIU

OA

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

EVOA boards are configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of OADM boards to adjust the optical power of added signals and pass-through signals so that the optical spectrum is flat at an OADM site. See Figure 25-2.


2518



Figure 25-2 EVOAs configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of an OADM board

OTU EVOA

OTU

OTU

OTU

EVOA

EVOA

EVOA

EVOA

OA

OA MRx

EVOA

MRx OA

OA

Main Functions of EVOA Boards The VA1 and VA4 boards provide the following functions: l

The VA1 board adjusts the optical power for one channel of optical signals and the VA4 board adjusts the optical power for four channels of optical signals.

l

Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.

l

Supports the variable attenuation range of 1.5 dB to 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

l

Supports optical-layer ASON.

25.2 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

25.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1VA 1

N

N

N

N

Y

Y


2519



Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 2VA 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 25.2.10 VA1 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11VA1

TN12VA1

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version.

TN12VA1

None

-

25.2.2 Application As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment for one signal. For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-3. Figure 25-3 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU

VA1 VA1 VA1

OTU

VA1 VA1

OA

VA1

OA

OA

VA1

VA1 MR2

MR2 VA1 OA

VA1

25.2.3 Functions and Features The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2520



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-1. Table 25-1 Functions and features of the VA1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the power supply recovers.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB. NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

25.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1. Figure 25-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1

Variable optical attenuator

IN

OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SCC


2521



Signal Flow According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

l

Driving and control module – Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board. – Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module.

l


l


25.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-5 shows the front panel of the VA1 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2522



Figure 25-5 Front panel of the VA1 board

VA1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



OUT IN

VA1



2523



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 25-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT

LC

Transmits the adjusted optical signals.


25.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one VA1. Table 25-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board. Table 25-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 25-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA1 board. Table 25-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


2524



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 25-5. Table 25-5 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code

Meaning

Description

Digits 1 through 3

Attenuation value

Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 25-6. Table 25-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


25.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 25-7. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2525



Table 25-7 VA1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






-



-


Configure Band

C



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All


2526



25.2.10 VA1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications Table 25-8 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board. Table 25-8 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board Item IN-OUT

Unit

Value


dB

≤1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy


Unit

Value


dB

≤1.5


dB

20

dB

1 (attenuation≤10dB) 1.5 (attenuation≤15dB)

Adjustment accuracy

1.8 (attenuation>15dB)



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Optical Module Type



VA1

-

6.5

7.2


2527



25.3 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

25.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the VA4 board areare TN11 and TN12.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1VA 4

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN1 2VA 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 25.3.10 VA4 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11VA4

TN12VA4

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version.

TN12VA4

None

-

25.3.2 Application As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical signals. For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-6. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2528



Figure 25-6 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system

VA4

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

VA4

VA4 VA4

OA MR2

OA

VA4

OA

MR2

VA4

OA

VA4

25.3.3 Functions and Features The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-10. Table 25-10 Functions and features of the VA4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical signals respectively according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB. NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

25.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2529



Figure 25-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4 IN1


OUT1

IN2


OUT2

IN3


OUT3

IN4


OUT4


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

l

Driving and control module – Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board. – Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2530





25.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-8 shows the front panel of the VA4 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2531



Figure 25-8 Front panel of the VA4 board

VA4 STAT ACT PROG SRV



OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

VA4



2532



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 25-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC

Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT1-OUT4

LC

Transmits the adjusted optical signals.


25.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one VA4 board. Table 25-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA4 board. Table 25-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 25-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA4 board. Table 25-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


2533



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

25.3.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 25-14. Table 25-14 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First to third digits

Attenuation value


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 25-15. Table 25-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

NOTE


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2534



25.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 25-16. Table 25-16 VA4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






-



-


Configure Band

C



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2535



Field

Value

Description


-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

25.3.10 VA4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Unit

Value


dB

≤1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Unit

Value

dB

≤1.5


2536



Item Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy

Unit

Value

dB

20

dB

1 (attenuation≤10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation≤15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)



l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Optical Module Type



VA4

-

8.5

9.4


2537


26 Dispersion Equalizing Board

26

Dispersion Equalizing Board

About This Chapter 26.1 Overview Dispersion equalization boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end. 26.2 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit 26.3 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2538



26.1 Overview Dispersion equalization boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end.

Main Functions Table 26-1 lists the main functions of dispersion equalization boards. Table 26-1 Main functions of dispersion equalization boards Device Type

Description

Function

Application

M o d ul e

Uses a dispersion compensation fiber (DCF) and provides fixed dispersion.

Provides span-based dispersion compensation, enabling long-haul optical transmission.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line.

D C M

DCM (DCF)

l Supports G.652, G.653, and G.655 fiber applications. DCM (FBG)

Uses fiber Bragg grating (FBG) and provides fixed compensation.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line. l Supports G.652 and G.655 fiber applications.

B o ar d

DCU

Uses a DCF and provides fixed dispersion.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line. l Supports G.652 and G.655 fiber applications.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2539



Device Type TDC

Description

Function

Application

Provides tunable dispersion to precisely compensate for dispersion inside a channel.

Precisely compensates for residual dispersion inside an OTU channel that cannot be compensated by DCM modules.

l Works with an OTU board at the receive end of a transmission line. The TDC board must precede the OTU board. l Applies to scenarios that allow for relatively small dispersion, such as, 40 Gbit/s communication systems.

NOTE

For details on the DCM, see 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module.

26.2 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit

26.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1DC U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

26.2.2 Application As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical transmission system. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2540



For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-1. Figure 26-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system DCU OTU

MUX

OBU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

MUX

OBU

OTU

OTU OTU OTU OTU

DCU OTU

MUX

DCU

OBU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

OBU

DCU

OTU

MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU

26.2.3 Functions and Features The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-2. Table 26-2 Functions and features of the DCU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic function

Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.

Dispersion compensation method

Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end.

Long haul transmission with optical regeneration

Implements long haul transmission when used together with an optical amplifier board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


2541



26.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board. Figure 26-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board

IN

OUT

Dispersion compensation EDFA optical module module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

The dispersion compensation module After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2542





26.2.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board. Figure 26-3 Front panel of the DCU board

DCU

OUT IN

DCU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2543



Interfaces Table 26-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 26-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion.

OUT

LC

Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.


26.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DCU board. Table 26-4 shows the valid slots for the DCU board. Table 26-4 Valid slots for the DCU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-5.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2544



Table 26-5 Characteristic code for the DCU board Code

Meaning

Description

Character before hyphen (-)

Fiber type

Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with

Character after hyphen (-)

Dispersion compensation distance

The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km. NOTE

If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-6. Table 26-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

26.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 26-7. Table 26-7 DCU parameters

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description


-



2545



Field

Value

Description


-


26.2.10 DCU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 26-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1) Item

Unit

Value DC U0 1

DC U0 2

DC U0 3

DC U0 4

DC U0 5

DC U06

D CU 07

DCU0 8

Typical dispersion compensation distance

km

20

40

60

80

100

120

5

10

Maximum insertion loss

dB

3.3

4.7

6.4

8

9

9.8

2.3

2.8

Dispersion compensation slope

-

90%-110%

Polarization mode dispersion

ps

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.8

0.3

0.3

Polarization-dependent loss

dB

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

Maximum input power a

dBm

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20


nm

1528-1568

Dispersion compensating fiber type

-

G.652 fiber

a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2546



Table 26-9 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2) Item

Unit

Value DCU 11

DCU 12

DCU 13

DCU 14

DCU1 5

DCU1 6

Typical dispersion compensation distance

km

20

40

60

80

100

120

Maximum insertion loss

dB

4

5

5.9

6.9

7.8

8.8

Dispersion compensation slope

-

90%-110%

Polarization mode dispersion

ps

0.4

0.5

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Polarization-dependent loss

dB

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

Maximum input power a

dBm

20

20

20

20

20

20


nm

1528-1568

Dispersion compensating fiber type

-

G.655 fiber

a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.



l



Optical Module Type



TN11DCU

–

0.2

0.3

26.3 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2547



26.3.1 Version Description The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1TD C

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 26-10 lists the types of the TDC board. Table 26-10 Type description of the TDC board Board

Type

Description

TN11TDC

01

Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules.

02

Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.

26.3.2 Application The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel. If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM system, see Figure 26-4. Figure 26-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system

O T U

O L P

TDC

M40

OA

OA

D40

M40

OA

OA

D40

D40

OA

OA

M40

D40

OA

OA

M40

TDC

O L P

O T U

Working channel Protection channel

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2548



26.3.3 Functions and Features The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-11. Table 26-11 Functions and features of the TDC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals. Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion is adjustable.

Information report

Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by TN11TDC01.

26.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 26-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2549



Figure 26-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board Optical module Tunable dispersion compensation module

IN

OUT

Data signal

Driving signal


Control CPU

Memory

Communication



Required voltage

SCC


Back plane (Controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the OUT.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module. The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module.

l

Driving and detection module Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and communication module.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2550





26.3.5 Front Panel There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board. Figure 26-6 Front panel of the TDC board

TDC STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT IN

TDC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2551





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 26-12 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 26-12 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces Interface

Connector Type

Description

IN

LC

Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single signal that is to be equalized.

OUT

LC

Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single signal.


26.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDC board. Table 26-13 shows the valid slots for the TDC board. Table 26-13 Valid slots for the TDC board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU17


2552



26.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-14. Table 26-14 Characteristic code for the TDC board Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.

26.3.8 Optical Interfaces This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC configuration in an NM system.

Display of Optical Interfaces Table 26-15 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on the panel of the board. Table 26-15 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE

An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.

26.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 26-16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2553



Table 26-16 TDC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and displays the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100

Sets Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows:

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically.

Default: /

l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only C band is supported.

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. NOTE Only C band is supported.

See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

26.3.10 TDC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2554



Optical Specifications Table 26-17 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board. Table 26-17 Optical specifications of the TDC board Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80

Dispersion tuning range

ps/nm

±400

Dispersion tuning speed

sec

<15

Input power range

dBm

-13 to 0

Dispersion accuracy

ps/nm

±10


dBm

The output optical power should be close to the input power, with an error range of ±1.5 dB.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TN11TDC

13

15


2555


27 Clock Board

27

Clock Board

About This Chapter 27.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2556


27 Clock Board

27.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board

27.1.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1ST G

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN5 2ST G

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN K2S TG

Y

N

N

N

N

N


Appearance: – The TN11, TN52 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 27.1.5 Front Panel and 27.1.9 STG Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 27.1.9 STG Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The STG boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

27.1.2 Application The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2557


27 Clock Board

For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 27-1. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 27-2. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 27-3. Figure 27-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64 external clock

external clock

STI

STG

STG

Clock signals & Frame signals NS2

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

Clock signals & Frame signals

G.694.1

G.694.1 1

STI

MUX

1

NS2

DMUX

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM 4

DMUX

NS2

Client side

MUX

4

NS2 WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.

Figure 27-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32 external clock

external clock

STI

STG

STG


100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2


G.694.1

G.694.1 1

STI

MUX

DMUX

NS2

1

TOM

TOM 4

Client side

NS2

DMUX

MUX

WDM side

NS2 WDM side

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

4 Client side

NOTE

The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2558


27 Clock Board

Figure 27-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800 external clock

external clock

STG

STG

Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s


G.694.1

G.694.1 NS 2

MU X

DMU X

NS2

1

TO M

TO M 4

Client side

NS 2

DMU X

MU X

WDM side

NS2 WDM side

100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

4 Client side

NOTE

When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the external clock is input on the STG board.

27.1.3 Functions and Features The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and frame signals to the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-1. Table 27-1 Functions and features of the STG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Locks the reference clock source. l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G. 813 and G.823 and frame signals. l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Active/standby switching function

In the OptiX OSN 8800, the STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme. The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the current active STG according to the status of the two STGs.

Clock source selection function

Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system.

Time synchronization function

Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.


2559


27 Clock Board

27.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module. Figure 27-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board. Figure 27-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board Time signals/ Clock signals

Clock signals/Frame signals


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse



Module Function l

Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. – Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. – Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2560


l

27 Clock Board


27.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 27-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board. Figure 27-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG board. Figure 27-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG board. Figure 27-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

Figure 27-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2561


27 Clock Board

Figure 27-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board

STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TOD

CLK

IN

OUT

STG



l


l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2562


27 Clock Board

Interfaces Table 27-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board. Table 27-2 Interface description of the STG board Interface

Connector

Function

IN

SMB

Clock signal input interface

OUT

SMB

Clock signal output interface

CLK

RJ45

Clock signal input and output interface

TOD

RJ45

Time signal input and output interface

NOTE The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.

Pin Assignment of the CLK Interface Table 27-3 Pin assignment of the CLK interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N


2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD Interface Table 27-4 Pin assignment of the TOD interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground


2563


27 Clock Board

Pin

Signal

Function

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

27.1.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one STG board. Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board. Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TN11STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU15, IU16

Table 27-6 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board. Table 27-6 Valid slots for the TN52STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU42, IU44

Table 27-7 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board. Table 27-7 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU75, IU86

27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG None Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2564


27 Clock Board

27.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For STG Parameters, refer to Table 27-8. Table 27-8 STG parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


27.1.9 STG Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: – TNK2STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 50.3mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN52STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 28.8 mm (1.1 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN11STG(H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board



TNK2STG

14.0

16.0

TN52STG

13.0

14.1

TN11STG

8.7

9.57


2565


28 OCS System Unit

28

OCS System Unit

About This Chapter 28.1 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board 28.2 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 28.3 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 28.4 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.5 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.6 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.7 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.8 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.9 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board 28.10 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.11 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.12 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2566


28 OCS System Unit

28.1 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board

28.1.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4B PA

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.1.2 Application The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 28-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system. Figure 28-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system Tx

Tx

BA

Rx

PA

Rx

28.1.3 Functions and Features During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-1. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2567


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-1 Functions and features of the BPA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13–15 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km or above.

Pre-amplification function

Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals by 22–33 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver increases to –37 dBm.

EDFA

l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned on.

Performance events and alarms monitoring

Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

Software upgrade

Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

28.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and communication part. Figure 28-2 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board. Figure 28-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board Optical input

Optical output

Optical input

Optical output

Optical part

EDFA optical module

Pump current check

Drive module

Module temperature control

Input/output power check

Pump Drive current module check

Module temperature control

Input/output power check

Driving and detecting part

A/D or D/A conversion

SCC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Control module


Data processing and communication part

2568


28 OCS System Unit

Optical Part The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical power.

Driving and Detecting Part The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts and handles possible faults. The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current, driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the input and output optical power.

Data Processing and Communication Part The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.

28.1.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-3 shows the front panel of the BPA board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2569


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-3 Front panel of the BPA board

BPA

LASER

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL

LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY

INSTRUMENTS

WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS



BOUT BIN POUT PIN

BPA

Indicators The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)

l

Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)

l

Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)

l

Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)


Interfaces There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 28-2 lists the type and function of each optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2570


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board Interface

Type

Function

BIN

LC

Receives one channel of optical signals for amplification.

BOUT

LC

Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals.

PIN

LC

Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification.

POUT

LC

Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical signals.

28.1.6 Valid Slots The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the board does not function. Table 28-3 shows the valid slots for the BPA board. Table 28-3 Valid slots for the BPA board Product

Valid Slots


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU42, and IU45–IU68





28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces. Table 28-4 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2571


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-4 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power Board

Characteristic Code

Description

N4BPA01

01

The receiver sensitivity of the PA module is –37 dBm. The output optical power of the BA module is 14 dBm.


Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS Table 28-5 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS. Table 28-5 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS Optical interface

Displayed serial number on the NMS

BOUT

1

BIN

2

POUT

3

PIN

4

28.1.9 BPA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-6 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board. Table 28-6 Optical specifications of the BPA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s

Application code

V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2

Line code pattern

NRZ


2572


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value

Input wavelength (nm)

BA: 1530 to 1565 PA: 1550.12

Input optical power (dBm)

BA: -6 to +3 PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate of 10 Gbit/s) PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)

Output optical power (dBm)

13 to 15 (BA) -16 to 14 (PA)

Sensitivity (dBm)

PA: -37

Noise figure (dB)

BA: < 6.5 PA: < 6

Minimum signal gain (dB)

+22

NOTE

When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high input optical power to the optical module.

Laser Safety Class The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows: l

Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H)

l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 11 W Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 12 W

28.2 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2573


28 OCS System Unit

28.2.1 Version Description The EAS2 is available in the following functional version: N3.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N3E AS2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.2.2 Application The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services. Figure 28-4 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2574


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-4 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NMS

NE1

User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100

NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

PORT 2 VLAN 100

PORT 2 User B2

VLAN 100 Service flow

PORT 1 VLAN 100

User B1

Line board Data board Cross-connect and timing board

User A1

28.2.3 Functions and Features The EAS2 supports the access of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions. Table 28-7 provides the functions and features of the EAS2. Table 28-7 Functions and features of the EAS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Funct ion and Featu re

Description

Basic functi ons

Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.

Interfa ce types

The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.


2575


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Functi ons when being used with an interfa ce board

Provides interfaces on the front panel.

Interfa ce charac teristic s

Working modes

10GE full-duplex

Flow control at ports

Auto-negotiation mode

Not supported

Non-autonegotiation mode

Supported

Query/ Supported Setting of port status Query of interface types

Supported

RMON measure ment

Supported

Setting of Not supported optical power threshold s

Servic e catego ries

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Hot optical module swapping

Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.

EPL service

Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.


2576



28 OCS System Unit

Description

EVPL service

l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN. l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN. l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

EPLAN service

l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 1. l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address

Servic e specifi cation s

EVPLA N service

l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.

Formats of Ethernet data frames

IEEE 802.3

Supported

Ethernet II

Supported

IEEE 802.1q TAG

Supported

Maximu m frame length

l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.

MTU

Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound bandwidt h

128xVC-4

Mapping granularit ies

Supports VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous concatenation services.

Encapsul ation formats

HDLC

Not supported

LAPS

Not supported

GFP-F

Supported

MPLS technolo gy

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

Supports tunnel-based MPLS.


2577



28 OCS System Unit

Description

VLAN technolo gy

Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximu m uplink bandwidt h

20 Gbit/s

VCTRU NK specificat ions

Number of VCTRUNKs: 34 Configuration principles are as follows: l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4 paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4 paths. l VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 17 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1–64 only. VCTRUNK 18–VCTRUNK 34 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 65–128 only. l Only VCTRUNKs 1-17 support the binding of VC-3 paths and the maximum bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s.

Protec tion schem es

DLAG

Supported

LCAS

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

LPT

Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/ RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP

Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.

LAG

Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation. Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.

ERPS

Supports ERPS, which complies with ITU-T G.8032. NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode

Clock synchr onizati on

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Synchron ous Ethernet

Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported


2578


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Maint enanc e featur es

ETHOAM

QoS

l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE 802.1ag. l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end, and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

Test frame

Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.

Response to ping

Not supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopbac k capabilit y

PHY layer at Ethernet ports

Inloops

MAC layer at Ethernet ports

Inloops

VC-4 level

Not supported

VC-3 level

Not supported

VC-12 level

Not supported

Ethernet performa nce monitori ng (RMON)

l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Alarms and performa nce events

Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

l Supports the query of the rate of a port. l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port exceeds the threshold.

l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP. l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s. l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port. l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2579


28 OCS System Unit


Description

IGMP snoopi ng

l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol. l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters. l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.

Flow contro l functi on

Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

SDH ASON

Supported

28.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module. Figure 28-5 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process 1x10 GE signals. Figure 28-5 Functional block diagram of the EAS2 Backplane

10GE

Interface processing module

Laser shutdown


Interface converting module

Encapsulation module Digital encapsulation module Mapping module

Cross-connect unit

Cross-connect unit

LOS

Logic and control module

Communication Clock reference and frame delimitation

+3.3 V Clock module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Virtual concatenation processing module

Power module


Power module

Fuse

SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

2580


28 OCS System Unit

In the Transmit Direction The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from the cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface converting operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. After the interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes the serial signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.

In the Receive Direction The SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and then transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module transmits the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps the Ethernet GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.

Logic and Control Module The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration functions of the board.

Clock Module The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals when the board is working.

Power Module It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.

28.2.5 Front Panel The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Diagram of the Front Panel Figure 28-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2581


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-6 Front panel of the EAS2

EAS2 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

EAS2

Indicators The front panel of the board has the following indicators: l


l


l


l


l

Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)

l

Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

Interfaces The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 28-8 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EAS2. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2582


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-8 Interfaces of the EAS2 Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

IN1–IN2

LC

Receives 10 GE signals.

OUT1–OUT2

LC

Transmits 10 GE signals.

28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The EAS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.2.7 Valid Slots The EAS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EAS2 fails to work properly. The EAS2 occupies one slot in the subrack. Table 28-9 shows the valid slots for the EAS2 board. Table 28-9 Valid slots for the EAS2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1 to IU8, and IU11 to IU18

28.2.8 Feature Code The EAS2 does not have the feature code.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-10.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2583


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EAS2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


28.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EAS2 board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EAS2 board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-11 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 28-11 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EAS2 board Port

Tab

External Port

Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes

Internal Port

TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows. l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-12.


2584


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-12 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board.

Name

For example, PORT-1

Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Working Mode


Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port.

1518 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port.

Default: 1522 Port Physical Parameters

-

Displays the actual working state of a port.

MAC Loopback


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.17 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.


2585


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

PHY Loopback


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.25 PHY Loopback to obtain the details.


l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-13. Table 28-13 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disable

See D.23 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details. l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-14. Table 28-14 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.


2586


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

TAG


Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI.

Default: Tag Aware

Default VLAN ID


VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-15. Table 28-15 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Name

For example, VCTRUNK-3

Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Default VLAN ID


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. 2587


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.

Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-16. Table 28-16 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, NNI

Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.

Default: UNI

l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-17. Table 28-17 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled

The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Default: Disabled


2588


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Thresholdparameter allocates the specified bandwidth to the broadcast packets. The bandwidth is allocated on the basis of the traffic proportion at the port. If the bandwidth allocated to the broadcast packets reaches the specified threshold, the port discards the broadcast data packets that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)

0 to 10000

The Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s) parameter specifies the data flow threshold at external physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time Window (Min)

0 to 30

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 10000

Default: 0

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


l

Sets traffic threshold time window for the external port. Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-18. Table 28-18 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2589


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled

l

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-19. Table 28-19 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the VCTRUNK ports.

Mapping Protocol

GFP

Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.

Default: GFP Scramble

Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]

Set Inverse Value for CRC

-

Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS.

Check Field Length



Big endian, Little endian

Extension Header Option

Yes, No

Default: Big endian

Default: No

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol. Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-20.


2590


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-20 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn

Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Enabling LCAS

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers.

Default: Disabled

LCAS Mode

Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Default: Huawei Mode

Hold off Time(ms)

0 to 10000 Default: 2000

WTR Time(s)


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching. The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status.

2591


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

TSD

Enabled, Disabled

The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

Default: Disabled

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Min. Members - Transmit Direction

2 to 256

Min. Members - Receive Direction

2 to 256

Default: 256

Default: 256

When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction. Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-21.


2592


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-21 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

VCTRUNCK Port

-

Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Level

-

Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path.

Service Direction

-

Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service.

Bound Path

-

Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number.

Bound Path Count

-

Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports.

Used Channel

-

Displays the channels in use.

Activation Status

-

Displays whether the path is active.

28.2.11 EAS2 Specifications The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces Table 28-22 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2. Table 28-22 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Parameter

Value

Transmission rate

10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s

Processing capability

2x10GE signals

Type of optical interface

10GBASE-LR/LW

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Operating wavelength range (nm)

1290 to 1330

Transmission distance (km)

10

Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

0.5


2593


28 OCS System Unit

Parameter

Value

Minimum mean launched power (dBm)

-8.2

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

-12.6

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

3.5

Connector type

LC

Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Ethernet Performance Specifications Figure 28-7 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2. Figure 28-7 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading and latency specifications Tested equipment 1

Tested equipment 2

Port 1

Port 2 Data network performance analyzer

Table 28-23 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 28-24 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 28-25 lists the latency specifications of the EAS2.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2594


28 OCS System Unit

NOTE

l

The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment are used.

l

The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.

l

The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer.

l

The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.

l

In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and reverse tests values, respectively.

Table 28-23 Throughput specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte)

Passed Rate (%)

Tx Frames (pks/ sec)

Rx Frames (pks/ sec)

Total (%)

64

100.00000

14880952

14880952

100.00000

128

98.00000

8278145

8278145

100.00000

256

98.00000

4432624

4432624

100.00000

512

98.00000

2302025

2286453

99.32000

1024

97.00000

1161710

1156436

99.55000

1280

97.00000

932835

927296

99.41000

1518

97.00000

788146

783050

99.35000

Table 28-24 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Frame Size (byte)

Rate Tested (%)

Tx Frames (pks/ sec)

Rx Frames (pks/ sec)

Total (%)

64

100.00000

14880952

14880952

0.00

128

100.00000

8445945

8445945

0.00

256

99.00000

4480286

4470526

0.21

512

98.00000

2302025

2286453

0.67

1024

97.00000

1161710

1156469

0.45

1280

97.00000

932835

927323

0.59

1518

97.00000

788146

783073

0.64


2595


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-25 Latency specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte)

Rate Tested (%)

Tx Frames (pks/sec)

Rx Frames (pks/sec)

Min Latency (us)

Ave Latency (us)

Max Latency (us)

64

96.00000

14204544

14204544

24.4

25.681

27.9

128

96.00000

8116883

8116883

24.6

25.944

28.1

256

96.00000

4340277

4340277

25

26.322

28.5

512

96.00000

2256317

2256317

25.9

27.176

29.3

1024

96.00000

1148897

1148897

27.7

28.949

31.2

1280

96.00000

923190

923190

28.6

29.802

32

1518

96.00000

780274

780274

29.4

30.562

32.8

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows: l

Dimensions : 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 254.1 mm (H)

l

Weight : 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)


28.3 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board

28.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2596


28 OCS System Unit

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Subrack

N1E GS H

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.3.2 Application The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access, bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching. Figure 28-8 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data; isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN; configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide solution. Figure 28-8 Networking and application of the EGSH board

U2000

NE1

User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100

NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

PORT 2 VLAN 100

PORT 2 User B2 Service flow

VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100

User B1

OCS line board OCS data board Cross-connect and timing board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

User A1


2597


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.3 Functions and Features The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function. Table 28-26 provides the functions and features of the EGSH. Table 28-26 Functions and features of the EGSH Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed.

Interface types

l Supports the 1000 BASE-LX and 1000 BASE-SX optical interface. l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000 BASE-T electrical interface at the same time. l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Functions when being used with an interface board

Transmits/Receives 16 channels of Ethernet signals through the interfaces on the front panel.

Interface characteristic s

Working modes

Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex (Port 2 and 4 support 1000M full-duplex only).

Traffic control at ports

Autonegotiation mode

Supported.

Nonautonegotiation mode

Supported.

Query/ Setting of port status

Supported.

Query of interface types

Supported.

RMON measurement

Supported.

Setting of optical power thresholds

Supported.


2598



Service categories

28 OCS System Unit

Description Hotswapping SFP optical module

Supported.

EPL service

Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.

EVPL service

Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.

EPLAN service

l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP) convergence. l Supports the L2 forwarding function. l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address. l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40. l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP. l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred to as EPLAN services.

Service specifications

EVPLAN service

l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

Formats of Ethernet data frames

IEEE 802.3

Supported.

Ethernet II

Supported.

IEEE 802.1 q/p

Supported.

Frame length range

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridge.

l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Bound bandwidth

64 x VC-4, or 192 x VC-3

Mapping granularities

Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X≤8), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤24) granularities.


2599



28 OCS System Unit

Description Encapsulatio n formats

Protection schemes

HDLC

Not supported.

LAPS

Not supported.

GFP-F

Supported.

MPLS technology

Supported.

VLAN technology

Supports a maximum of 4094 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximum uplink bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.

VCTRUNK specifications

l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24.

DLAG

Supported.

LCAS

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

LPT

Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and point-tomultipoint (P2MP) LPT.

STP/RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP

Supported.

LAG

Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24 VC-3s.

Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode. ERPS

Supported. NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode

Clock synchronizati on

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Synchronous Ethernet

Only ports 2 and 4 supports the Synchronous Ethernet.

IEEE 1588v2

Only ports 2 and 4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2.


2600


28 OCS System Unit


Description


ETH-OAM

l Supports the multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), network loop detection (LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance check. l The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Test frame

Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.

Response to ping

Not supported.

Port mirroring

Supported.

Loopback capability

PHY layer at Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

MAC layer at Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

VC-4 level

Not supported.

VC-3 level

Not supported.

VC-12 level

Not supported.

Ethernet performance monitoring (RMON)

Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Alarms and performance events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

QoS

Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow.

IGMP snooping

Supported.

Traffic control

Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Traffic monitoring

Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

SDH ASON

Supported.


2601


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module. The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 28-9 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 28-9 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board Backplane GE

O/E conversion

1588 clock processing module

E/O conversion

GE

L2 service processing module

Active/ standby interface converting module

SDH encapsulation and mapping module

Interface module Laser shutdown

Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit

LOS Communication

Logic and control module

Reference clock and frame header +3.3V Clock module

Power module

Power Fuse module

SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

66 25 125 155 MHz MHz MHz MHz

NOTE

Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.

In the Receive Direction The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals. Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/ VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services. At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the crossconnect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.

In the Transmit Direction The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2602


28 OCS System Unit

equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals, encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.

Interface Module In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the electrical signals to the L2 service processing module. In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service processing module into optical signals.

1588 Clock Processing Module The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588 clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives, processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.

L2 Service Processing Module This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration.

SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules in the SDH format.

Active/Standby Interface Converting Module The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.

Logic Control Module The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal sent from the active and standby clock boards.

Clock Module The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.

Power Supply Module The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2603


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-10 shows the front panel of the EGSH board. Figure 28-10 Front panel of the EGSH board SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

EGSH

SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2604


28 OCS System Unit


Interfaces There are 16 interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel. Figure 28-11 Silk-screen

Table 28-27 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX16

LC

Receives GE signals.

TX1–TX16

LC

Transmits GE signals.

NOTE

When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-12 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2605


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-12 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper

58.25 50.75

G.657A2 fiber jumper

42.5

28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.

28.3.7 Valid Slots The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally.. Table 28-28 shows the valid slots for the EGSH board. Table 28-28 Valid slots for the EGSH board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1 to IU8, and IU11 to IU18


2606


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-29 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board. Table 28-29 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board Board

Characteristic Code

Optical Interface Type

N1EGSH10

10

1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)

N1EGSH11

11

1000 BASE-LX (10 km)

N1EGSH12

12

1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)a

N1EGSH13

13

1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-LX (10 km)b

a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-SX optical interfaces. b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-LX optical interfaces. The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the 1000 BASE-LX optical interface.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-30. Table 28-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

TX3/RX3

3

TX4/RX4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6


2607


28 OCS System Unit


Interface on the NM

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10

10

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14

TX15/RX15

15

TX16/RX16

16

NOTE


28.3.10 Board Protection The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology. Figure 28-13 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2608


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-13 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group FAN

EFI2

EF I1

PIU

PIU

A S U T X G

A U X

IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27

S T G

PIU

PIU

STI

ATE

IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36

S C C X C H / X C M

Fiber routing

X C H / X C M

Fiber routing

IU9 IU10 IU1 IU2

IU3 IU4 IU5

E G S H (A)

IU6

IU7 IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19

S C C

E G S H (B)

E G S H (A)

E G S H (B)

FAN (A): Active

(B): Standby

In Table 28-31, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards. Table 28-31 Slot assignment for the EGSH board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Protection Group 1

Protection Group 2

EGSH (protection board)

Slot 5

Slot 17

EGSH (working board)

Slot 3

Slot 14


2609


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-32 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 28-32 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EGSH board Port

Tab

External Port

Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes

Internal Port

TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows. l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-33. Table 28-33 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

For example, PORT-1

Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.


2610


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Working Mode


Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port.

1518 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port.

Default: 1522 Port Physical Parameters

-

Displays the actual working state of a port.

MAC Loopback


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.17 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.


2611


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

PHY Loopback


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.25 PHY Loopback to obtain the details.


l

Physical Type

-

Displays the physical type of port.

Logic Type

SDH-OPPORT, SDHEPORT

Displays the logic type of port.

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-34. Table 28-34 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disable

See D.23 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control


Default: Disabled

l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-35.


2612


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-35 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Default VLAN ID


VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-36. Table 28-36 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

For example, VCTRUNK-3

Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2613


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4095

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets.

Default: 1

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-37. Table 28-37 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, NNI

Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.

Default: UNI

l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-38. Table 28-38 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled

The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Default: Disabled


2614


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Thresholdparameter allocates the specified bandwidth to the broadcast packets. The bandwidth is allocated on the basis of the traffic proportion at the port. If the bandwidth allocated to the broadcast packets reaches the specified threshold, the port discards the broadcast data packets that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)

0 to 1000

The Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s) parameter specifies the data flow threshold at external physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time Window (Min)

0 to 30

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 1000

Default: 0

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


Zero-Flow Monitor


Zero-Flow Monitor Interval (min)

l

1 to 30 Default: 15

Sets traffic threshold time window for the external port. Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Sets whether to monitor the zero flow. Sets the time interval for the zero-flow monitoring.

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-39. Table 28-39 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



2615


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


Zero-Flow Monitor


Zero-Flow Monitor Interval (min)

l

1 to 30 Default: 15

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Sets whether to monitor the zero flow. Sets the time interval for the zero-flow monitoring.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-40. Table 28-40 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the VCTRUNK ports.

Mapping Protocol

GFP

Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.

Default: GFP Scramble

Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]

Set Inverse Value for CRC

-

Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS.

Check Field Length


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol.

2616


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


Big endian, Little endian

Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.

Extension Header Option

Yes, No

Default: Big endian

Default: No

l

Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-41. Table 28-41 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn

Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Enabling LCAS

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers.

Default: Disabled

LCAS Mode

Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Default: Huawei Mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.

2617


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Hold off Time(ms)

0 to 10000

The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching.

Default: 2000

WTR Time(s)


TSD


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

2618


l

28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Min. Members - Transmit Direction

2 to 256

When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction.

Min. Members - Receive Direction

2 to 256

Default: 256

Default: 256

Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-42. Table 28-42 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

VCTRUNCK Port

-

Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Level

-

Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path.

Service Direction

-

Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service.

Bound Path

-

Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number.

Bound Path Count

-

Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports.

Used Channel

-

Displays the channels in use.

Activation Status

-

Displays whether the path is active.


2619


28 OCS System Unit

28.3.12 EGSH Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-43 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 28-43 Optical specifications of the EGSH board Item

Value

Type of optical interface

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Multi-mode LC


1270 to 1355

770 to 860

Launched optical power range (dBm)

–9 to –3

–9.5 to –3.5


–20

–18

Minimum overload (dBm)

–3

0


9

9

Electrical Specifications Table 28-44 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 28-44 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board Type of Interface

Code Pattern

1000BASE-T, RJ45

4D-PAM5

NOTE

Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2620


28 OCS System Unit

Laser Safety Class The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows: l

Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)

l



28.4 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

28.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S F64

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.4.2 Application The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-14 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2621


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-14 Networking and application of the SF64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect board

28.4.3 Functions and Features The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-45. Table 28-45 Functions and features of the SF64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic functions

l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.

Specification s of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification s of the optical module

l Supports XFP pluggable optical modules.

Service processing

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.

Clock synchronizati on

SDH Clock Synchronization

l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.

l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.

l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Supported.


2622



28 OCS System Unit

Description IEEE 1588v2

Overhead processing

Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature.

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Reports various alarms and performance events.

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP rings.


l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the specified time expires. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ITU-T G.774.7


2623



28 OCS System Unit


ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829

SDH ASON

Supported

28.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-15 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2624


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-15 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

DEMU X

SPI 10.71 Gbit/s

E/O

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E converting module

MUX

4x2.67G bit/s

4x2.5G bit/s

4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s

622 MHz PLL

Reference clock

K1 and K2 insertion/extraction

K1 and K2 High-speed bus

RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC

SDH overhead processing module

MUX/ DEMUX 669 MHz PLL

IIC LOS Laser shutdown

Logic and control module +3.3 V Power module

Power module

Frame header Communication Fuse

Clock unit

SCC unit Cross-connect unit A Cross-connect unit B SCC unit

Clock unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

PLL: phase-locked loop

SPI: SDH physical interface

RST: regenerator section termination

MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation

HPT: higher order path termination -

SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy

-

O/E Converting Module l

In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals.

l

In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.

l

Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module l

In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time.

l

In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.

SDH Overhead Processing Module This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l

RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2625


28 OCS System Unit

– In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l

MST sub-module – In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. – In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte.

l

MSA sub-module – In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. – In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.

l

HPT sub-module – In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. – In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

Logic and Control Module l

Manages and configures the other modules of the board.

l

Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.

l

Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units.

l

Controls the laser.

l

Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.

l

Controls the indicators on the board.


28.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-16 shows the front panel of the SF64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2626


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-16 Front panel of the SF64 board

SF64 STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SF64



l


l


l



Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 28-46 lists the type and function of the optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2627


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-46 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


28.4.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.4.7 Valid Slots The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot work normally. Table 28-47 shows the valid slots for the SF64 board. Table 28-47 Valid slots for the SF64 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1–IU8, and IU11–IU18

28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-48 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-48 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Characteristic Code

Type of Optical Interface

N4SF6401M01

01M01

Fixed-wavelength optical interface

N4SF6401

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


2628


28 OCS System Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-49. Table 28-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board. Table 28-50 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board. Table 28-50 Parameters of the SF64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays all ports available on the line board.

VC3 Path

-

Displays all available VC3 paths.


For example, SDH-1

Specifies the name of an optical interface.

Overhead Transfer Mode

DCC Mode, GCC Mode

Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface.

MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled

The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface.

Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On.

2629


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

Laser Transmission Distance (m)

/

The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.

Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback


Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Default: Non-Loopback VC4 Path

-


VC4 Loopback


Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Default: Non-Loopback VC12 Channel

-

Displays all available VC12 channels.

28.4.11 SF64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-51 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board. Table 28-51 Optical specifications of the SF64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e


2630


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12

Launched optical power range (dBm)c

–1 to +2


-19


0


10.5

OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2

OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2


a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -28 dBm to -31 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.

Table 28-52 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board. Table 28-52 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Type of optical module

1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

Line code format

NRZ - 80 channels tunable


2631


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

3


-1


9

Central wavelength (THz)

192.10 to 196.05

Central wavelength deviation (GHz)

±5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm)

0.3

Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

35

Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

1600


APD


1260 to 1600

Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm)

-24


-7

Maximum reflectance (dB)

-27

Table 28-53 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2632


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-53 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Dispersion limit (km)

40

Mean launched optical power (dBm)

-1 to 2


-19


0

Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm)

800


10


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 26 W Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 27.3 W

28.5 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

28.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2633


28 OCS System Unit

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N1S F64 A

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.5.2 Application The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-17 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-17 Networking and application of the SF64A board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.5.3 Functions and Features The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-54.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2634


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-54 Functions and features of the SF64A board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.

Specificatio ns of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.

Specificatio ns of the optical module

l Supports fixed optical modules.

Service processing


Clock synchroniza tion


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.


l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.

Alarms and performanc e events

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.


2635


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenanc e features

l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the specified time expires. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.



ITU-T G.774.7



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2636


28 OCS System Unit


Description

SDH ASON

Supported

28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-18 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board. Figure 28-18 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board 622MHz 622MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

E/O

S P I

10.71 Gbit/s

DEMUX

16x669 Mbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

MUX

16x669 FEC 16x622 Mbit/s Mbit/s


MUX/ DEMUX module


622MHz PLL

Reference clock

K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction

16x622 Mbit/s

Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus

RST MST MSA HPT

Highspeed bus DCC

SDH overhead processing module 669MHzPLL

Frame header Logic and control module +3.3V

Power module

Communication Fuse

Power module

Clock unit


Clock unit SCC unit -48V/-60V -48V/-60V





HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit


-

The function modules are described as follows:



l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2637


28 OCS System Unit

MUX/DEMUX Module l


l



RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.

l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2638


l

28 OCS System Unit



28.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64A board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-19 shows the front panel of the SF64A board. Figure 28-19 Front panel of the SF64A board

SF64A STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SF64A

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2639


28 OCS System Unit



l


l


l



Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 28-55 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 28-55 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


28.5.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.5.7 Valid Slots The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 28-56 shows the valid slots for the SF64A board. Table 28-56 Valid slots for the SF64A board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots








2640


28 OCS System Unit

28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-57 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board. Table 28-57 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board Board

Characteristic Code


N1SF64A01

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-58. Table 28-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


28.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board. Table 28-59 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board. Table 28-59 Parameters of the SF64A board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



2641


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


For example, SDH-1



DCC Mode, GCC Mode


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.5.11 SF64A Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-60 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2642


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-60 Optical specifications of the SF64A board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e

OBU101 (-29 dBm to -26 dBm) + OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2

OBU103 (-28 dBm to -25 dBm) + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2

OBU101 (-34.6 dBm to -32 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12


–1 to +2


-19


0


10.5

OBU101 (-37.9 dBm to -34.9 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2


Table 28-61 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2643


28 OCS System Unit


Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s


40


–3 to 2


–19


0


800


13.5


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 34 W Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 35.7 W

28.6 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

28.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2644


28 OCS System Unit

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S FD6 4

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.6.2 Application The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-20 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-20 Networking and application of the SFD64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.6.3 Functions and Features The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-62.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2645


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-62 Functions and features of the SFD64 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.

Specificati ons of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specificati ons of the optical module


Service processing


Clock synchroniz ation


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2


Overhead processing


l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.

l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.


l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2646


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Maintenan ce features




ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Supported

28.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-21 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2647


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-21 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

DEMU X

SPI 10.71 Gbit/s

E/O

10.71 Gbit/s


MUX

4x2.67G bit/s

4x2.5G bit/s

4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s

622 MHz PLL

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/ DEMUX 669 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2648


28 OCS System Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



28.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SFD64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-22 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2649


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-22 Front panel of the SFD64 board

SFD64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

SFD64



l


l


l



Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 28-63 lists the type and function of the optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2650


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-63 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX2

LC


TX1–TX2

LC


28.6.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.6.7 Valid Slots The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board cannot work normally. Table 28-64 shows the valid slots for the SFD64 board. Table 28-64 Valid slots for the SFD64 board Product

Valid Slots







28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-65 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-65 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SFD6401M01

01M01


N4SFD6401

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


2651


28 OCS System Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-66. Table 28-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

NOTE


28.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board. Table 28-67 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board. Table 28-67 Parameters of the SFD64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



DCC Mode, GCC Mode


Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2652


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.6.11 SFD64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-68 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board. Table 28-68 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e


2653


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12


–1 to +2


-19


0


10.5


OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2



Table 28-69 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board. Table 28-69 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Type of optical module

1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

Line code format

NRZ - 80 channels tunable


2654


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

3


-1


9

Central wavelength (THz)

192.10 to 196.05

Central wavelength deviation (GHz)

±5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm)

0.3

Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

35

Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

1600


APD


1260 to 1600

Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm)

-24


-7

Maximum reflectance (dB)

-27

Table 28-70 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2655


28 OCS System Unit


Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s


40


-1 to 2


-19


0


800


10


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 36.4 W Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 38.2 W

28.7 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board

28.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2656


28 OCS System Unit

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S L64

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.7.2 Application The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-23 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-23 Networking and application of the SL64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.7.3 Functions and Features The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-71. Table 28-71 Functions and features of the SL64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.


2657


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Specifications of the optical interface

l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with ITU-T G.959. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports XFP pluggable optical modules.

Specifications of the optical module


Service processing


Clock synchronizatio n


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2


Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2658


28 OCS System Unit


Description





ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Supported

28.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-24 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2659


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-24 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board Backplane 622 MHz PLL

622 MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

9.953 Gbit/s

DEMU X

16x622 Mbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s

MUX

16x622 Mbit/s

SPI 9.953 Gbit/s

E/O O/E converting module

MUX/ DEMUX

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC




Power module


Clock unit









-




l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l



RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2660


28 OCS System Unit

except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



28.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label on the front panel of the SL64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-25 shows the front panel of the SL64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2661


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-25 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board

SL64 STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT


OUT

IN

SL64



l


l


l



Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 28-72 lists the type and function of the optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2662


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-72 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


28.7.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.7.7 Valid Slots The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 28-73 shows the valid slots for the SL64 board. Table 28-73 Valid slots for the SL64 board Product

Valid Slots







28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-74 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-74 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SL6401M01

01M01


N4SL6401

01

I-64.1

N4SL6402

02

S-64.2b


2663


28 OCS System Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SL6403

03

P1L1-2D2

N4SL6404

04

V-64.2b

N4SL6405

05

Le-64.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-75. Table 28-75 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


28.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board. Table 28-76 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board. Table 28-76 Parameters of the SL64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



2664


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.7.11 SL64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-77 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2665


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-77 Optical specifications of the SL64 board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b

P1L1-2D2

Le-64.2

V-64.2b (OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2)a

Transmissio n distance (km)

0 to 2

2 to 40

40 to 80

35 to 60

80 to 120

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

1550.12


-6 to -1

-1 to +2

0 to +4

+2 to +4

-1 to 2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) 16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-11

-14

-24

-21

-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) -26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-1

-1

-7

-8

-1


6

8.2

9

8.2

10.5

a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.

Table 28-78 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2666


28 OCS System Unit


Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s


40


-1 to 2


-17


-1


800


10.5


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows: l


l



28.8 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board

28.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2667


28 OCS System Unit

Boa rd

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S LD6 4

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.8.2 Application The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-26 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-26 Networking and application of the SLD64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.8.3 Functions and Features The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-79.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2668


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-79 Functions and features of the SLD64 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions



Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G. 691.



Service processing


Clock synchroniza tion


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2


Overhead processing


l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2669


28 OCS System Unit


Description





ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Supported

28.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-27 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2670


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-27 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board Backplane 622 MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

SPI 9.953 E/O Gbit/s

DEMUX 16x622 Mbit/s

. . . .

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

O/E

SPI

9.953 Gbit/s

16x622 Mbit/s

MUX

E/O

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/DE MUX


622 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2671


28 OCS System Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



28.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLD64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-28 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2672


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-28 Front panel of the SLD64 board

SLD64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

SLD64



l


l


l



Interfaces There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 28-80 lists the type and function of each optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2673


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX2

LC


TX1–TX2

LC


28.8.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.8.7 Valid Slots The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board cannot work normally. Table 28-81 shows the valid slots for the SLD64 board. Table 28-81 Valid slots for the SLD64 board Product

Valid Slots







28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-82 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-82 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLD6401

01

I-64.1

N4SLD6402

02

S-64.2b


2674


28 OCS System Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-83. Table 28-83 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

NOTE


28.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board. Table 28-84 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board. Table 28-84 Parameters of the SLD64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2675


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.8.11 SLD64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-85 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board. Table 28-85 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b


0 to 2

2 to 40

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


2676


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


-6 to -1

-1 to +2


-11

-14


-1

-1


6

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows: l


l



28.9 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board

28.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2677


28 OCS System Unit


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N3S LH4 1

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.9.2 Application The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-29 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-29 Networking and application of the SLH41 board

NE1 NE2

SNCP ring

NE4

NE3

Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect and timing board

28.9.3 Functions and Features The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-86. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2678


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-86 Functions and features of the SLH41 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals.

Specifications of the optical interface

l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used. – When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. – When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. – The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces. l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used. l Supports SFP pluggable optical/electrical module.

Specifications of the optical module

l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.

Service processing

l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services. Clock synchronizatio n


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2

Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1–D12. Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D4–D12. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2679


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP.


l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the specified time expires. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.



ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2680


28 OCS System Unit

28.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals. Figure 28-30 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board. Figure 28-30 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board 155MHz PLL

STM-1/ STM-4

O/E E/O

S P I

CDR

O/E E/O

. . . .

. . . .

STM-1/ STM-4

S P I

CDR

Reference Backplane clock Clock unit


K1 and K2

RST MST MSA HPT

Highspeed bus

Highspeed bus

DCC SDH overhead processing module

O/E converting module IIC LOS Laser shutdown

Logic and control module +3.3V Power module

Power module










CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:



l


l


CDR Module This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2681


28 OCS System Unit



l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l


Power Module It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2682


28 OCS System Unit

28.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLH41 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-31 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board. Figure 28-31 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)


SLH41


STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX



l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2683


28 OCS System Unit

l


l



Interfaces There are 16 optical/electrical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel. Figure 28-32 Silk-screen

Table 28-87 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-87 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX16

LC/SAA-75J4Y

Receives optical/electrical signals.

TX1–TX16

LC/SAA-75J4Y

Transmits optical/electrical signals.

NOTE

The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-33 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2684


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-33 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper

58.25 50.75

G.657A2 fiber jumper

42.5

28.9.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.9.7 Valid Slots The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 28-88 shows the valid slots for the SLH41 board. Table 28-88 Valid slots for the SLH41 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Product

Valid Slots








2685


28 OCS System Unit

28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-89 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board. Table 28-89 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board Board

Characteristic Code


N3SLH4102

02

8×S-1.1, 8×S-4.1

N3SLH4103

03

16×S-1.1

N3SLH4105

05

16×S-4.1

The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the interface.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-90. Table 28-90 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Interface on the NM

TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

TX3/RX3

3

TX4/RX4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6

6

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10


2686


28 OCS System Unit


Interface on the NM

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14

TX15/RX15

15

TX16/RX16

16

NOTE


28.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board. Table 28-91 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board. Table 28-91 Parameters of the SLH41 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On Laser Transmission Distance (m)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

/



2687


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description





-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.9.11 SLH41 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-92 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used. Table 28-92 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

155520 kbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

S-1.1


0 to 15

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1261 to 1360


–15 to –8


–28

Overload optical power (dBm)

–8


8.2


2688


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-93 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used. Table 28-93 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

622080 kbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

S-4.1


0 to 15


1274 to 1356

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


–15 to –8


–28


–8


8.2

Electrical Specifications Table 28-94 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used. Table 28-94 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used Item

Value

Type of interface

139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s

Code pattern

CMI

Bit rate of the output signal

Compliant with G.703

Permitted frequency deviation on the input interface Permitted attenuation on the input interface


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2689


28 OCS System Unit

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows: l


l



28.10 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board

28.10.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S LO1 6

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.10.2 Application The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-34 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2690


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-34 Networking and application of the SLO16 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.10.3 Functions and Features The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-95. Table 28-95 Functions and features of the SLO16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Description

Basic functions



Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.


l Supports SFP pluggable optical module.

Service processing

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

Clock synchroniz ation


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2

Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature.



2691


28 OCS System Unit


Description

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1–D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports eight channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection NOTE One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


ITU-T G.774.7


2692



28 OCS System Unit

Description



SDH ASON

Supported

28.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-35 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2693


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-35 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board 155MHz O/E 2.488 Gbit/s

E/O

S P I

DEMUX

2.488 Gbit/s

MUX

16x155 Mbit/s


2.488 Gbit/s

O/E E/O

S P I

16x155 Mbit/s

RST MST MSA HPT


Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus

. . . .

2.488 Gbit/s

155MHzPLL

Reference clock

Highspeed bus DCC

MUX/ DEMUX module

SDH overhead processing module Frame header



Power module

Communication Fuse

Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2694


28 OCS System Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



28.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLO16 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-36 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2695


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-36 Front panel of the SLO16 board

SLO16

CLASS 1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

SLO16



l


l


l



Interfaces There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 28-96 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2696


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-96 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX8

LC


TX1–TX8

LC


28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.10.7 Valid Slots The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 28-97 shows the valid slots for the SLO16 board. Table 28-97 Valid slots for the SLO16 board Product

Valid Slots







28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-98 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board. Table 28-98 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLO1601

01

I-16

N4SLO1602

02

S-16.1

N4SLO1603

03

L-16.1


2697


28 OCS System Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLO1604

04

L-16.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-99. Table 28-99 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

RX5/TX5

5

RX6/TX6

6

RX7/TX7

7

RX8/TX8

8

NOTE


28.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board. Table 28-100 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board. Table 28-100 Parameters of the SLO16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



2698


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.10.11 SLO16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-101 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board. Table 28-101 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s


2699


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2


0 to 2

2 to 15

25 to 40

50 to 80

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


–10 to –3

–5 to 0

–2 to +3

–2 to +3


–18

–18

–27

–28


–3

0

–9

–9


8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows: l


l



28.11 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board

28.11.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2700


28 OCS System Unit


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S LQ1 6

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.11.2 Application The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-37 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-37 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.11.3 Functions and Features The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-102. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2701


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-102 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board Functio n and Feature

Description

Basic functions


Specifica tions of the optical interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.

Specifica tions of the optical module

l Supports SFP pluggable optical module.

Service processin g

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

Clock synchroni zation


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2


Overhead processin g



l Supports the configuration of the D1–D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2702


28 OCS System Unit

Functio n and Feature

Description

Protectio n schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection NOTE One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.

Maintena nce features


Protocols or standards complian ce


ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Supported


2703


28 OCS System Unit

28.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-38 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals. Figure 28-38 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board Backplane 155 MHz

2.488 Gbit/s

O/E SP E/O I

2.488 Gbit/s

DEMU 16x155 X Mbit/s

. . . . 2.488 O/E SP Gbit/s E/O I

2.488 Gbit/s

16x155 Mbit/s

MUX

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/ DEMUX


155 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2704


l

28 OCS System Unit




l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2705


28 OCS System Unit


28.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ16 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-39 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board. Figure 28-39 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board SLQ16 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

SLQ16

Indicators The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2706


28 OCS System Unit

l


l


l


l



Interfaces There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-103 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-103 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX4

LC


TX1–TX4

LC


28.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SLQ16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.11.7 Valid Slots The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. Table 28-104 shows the valid slots for the SLQ16 board. Table 28-104 Valid slots for the SLQ16 board Product

Valid Slots







28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-105 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2707


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-105 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLQ1601

01

I-16

N4SLQ1602

02

S-16.1

N4SLQ1603

03

L-16.1

N4SLQ1604

04

L-16.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-106. Table 28-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

NOTE


28.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-107 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-107 Parameters of the SLQ16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



2708


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description

VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.11.11 SLQ16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-108 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-108 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s


2709


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value

Application code

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2


0 to 2

2 to 15

25 to 40

50 to 80

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


-10 to -3

-5 to 0

-2 to +3

-2 to +3


-18

-18

-27

-28


-3

0

-9

-9


8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows: l


l



28.12 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board

28.12.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLQ64 board is available, that is, N4. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2710


28 OCS System Unit


8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4S LQ6 4

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

28.12.2 Application The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-40 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-40 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


28.12.3 Functions and Features The SLQ64 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-109. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2711


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-109 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board Functio n and Feature

Description

Basic functions


Specificat ions of the optical interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.

Specificat ions of the optical module

l Supports XFP pluggable optical module.

Service processin g


Clock synchroni zation


Supported.

IEEE 1588v2


Overhead processin g


l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.

Protectio n schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP. NOTE A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2712


28 OCS System Unit

Functio n and Feature

Description

Maintena nce features


Protocols or standards complian ce


ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON

Supported

28.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLQ64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-41 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2713


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-41 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board 622MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

E/O

S P I

9.953 Gbit/s

DEMUX

9.953 Gbit/s

MUX


622MHzPLL

Reference clock

16x622 Mbit/s


16x622 Mbit/s

RST MST MSA HPT

Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus Highspeed bus DCC

MUX/ DEMUX module

SDH overhead processing module Frame header



Power module

Clock unit


Clock unit

Communication SCC unit Fuse

-48V/-60V -48V/-60V







-




l


l

The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2714


28 OCS System Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



28.12.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-42 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2715


28 OCS System Unit

Figure 28-42 Front panel of the SLQ64 board

SLQ64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT


SLQ64



l


l


l



Interfaces There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-110 lists the type and function of each optical interface.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2716


28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-110 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX4

LC


TX1–TX4

LC


28.12.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches The SLQ64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.

28.12.7 Valid Slots The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 28-111 shows the valid slots for the SLQ64 board. Table 28-111 Valid slots for the SLQ64 board Product

Valid Slots





28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-112 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-112 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLQ6401

01

I-64.1

N4SLQ6402

02

S-64.2b

28.12.9 Optical Interfaces This topic describes the interface information on the U2000. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2717


28 OCS System Unit

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-113. Table 28-113 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

NOTE


28.12.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-114 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-114 Parameters of the SLQ64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2718


28 OCS System Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


28.12.11 SLQ64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-115 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-115 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b


0 to 10

10 to 40

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


2719


28 OCS System Unit

Item

Value


–6 to –1

–1 to +2


–11

–14


–1

–1


6

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows: l


l



Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2720


29 Cables

29

Cables

About This Chapter 29.1 PGND Cables The equipment has cabinet PGND cables, subrack PGND cables, PDU PGND cables, cabinet door PGND cables. 29.2 Power Cables The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND cables and subrack power cables. 29.3 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC. 29.4 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 29.5 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables. 29.6 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2721


29 Cables

29.1 PGND Cables The equipment has cabinet PGND cables, subrack PGND cables, PDU PGND cables, cabinet door PGND cables.

29.1.1 Cabinet PGND Power Cables One end of the cabinet PGND power cables is connected to ground bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the cabinet.

Structure Figure 29-1 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND ground cable. Figure 29-1 Structure of the cabinet PGND ground cable 3 2

5

4

1

L

1. OT single-hole naked crimping connector

2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector

4. Heat shrink tube

5. Cable

Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters Table 29-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables Item

Description

Cabinet PGND ground cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector


OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 2722


29 Cables

Item

Description Type of the cable

Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35 mm2-Yellow and green-135 A

29.1.2 Subrack PGND Cables One end of subrack PGND cables to the ground screw on the side column near the subrack. The other end is connected to the ground screw on the subrack

Structure Figure 29-2 shows the structure of the subrack PGND cable. Figure 29-2 Structure of the subrack PGND cables 1

2

X1

X2

1. OT naked crimping connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of subrack PGND cables are listed in Table 29-2. Table 29-2 Technical parameters of the subrack PGND cables

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A


2723


29 Cables

29.1.3 PDU PGND Cables One end of the PDU PGND Cables is connected to a protection ground screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU PGND Cables is correctly connected before delivery.

Structure Figure 29-3 shows the structure of the PDU PGND Cables. Figure 29-3 Structure of the PDU PGND Cables 1

2

X1

X2


2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables are listed in Table 29-3. Table 29-3 Technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A

29.1.4 Cabinet Door Ground Cables The cabinet door ground cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The cabinet door ground cables are correctly connected before delivery.

Structure Figure 29-4 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cables. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2724


29 Cables

Figure 29-4 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable 1

X1

X2 L


Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables are listed in Table 29-4. Table 29-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in. 2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core strand

29.2 Power Cables The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND cables and subrack power cables.

29.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND Power Cables The -48 V/BGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top.

Structure And Technical Parameters When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 29-5 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND ground cable. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2725


29 Cables

Figure 29-5 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND ground cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800) 1 2

W1

W1

W

X1

W2 W2 X2

1m

0.8m L

1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

Table 29-5 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800) Cable Cabin et power cable

-48 V power cable

Usage

Wire Used

Accesses -48 V DC to the cabinet.

-48 V DC power cable (blue) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the Ø16 mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the Ø25 mm2 cable.

Connector If copper fittings have been installed on the PDU, power cables must be shorter than 25 m and have a crosssectional area of 35 mm2

JG two-hole naked crimping connector

NOTE

l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the Ø35 mm2 cable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2726


29 Cables

Cable BGND cable

Usage

Wire Used

Accesses the BGND to a cabinet.

Battery ground cable (black) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the Ø16 mm2 cable.

Connector If copper fittings have been installed on the PDU, power cables must be shorter than 25 m and have a crosssectional area of 35 mm2

JG two-hole naked crimping connector

l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the Ø 25mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the Ø 35 mm2 cable.

When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 29-6 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND ground cable. Figure 29-6 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND ground cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) 1

2

3

1. Cord end terminal

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2. OT single-hole naked crimping connector


3. Cable clip

2727


29 Cables

Table 29-6 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item

Description

Cabinet -48 V power cable (16 mm2)

Cabinet BGND ground cable (16 mm2)




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024 mm-80 AInsertion depth 16 mm-Green

Connector 2

OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16 mm2-Blue-85 A

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024 mm-80AInsertion depth 16 mm-Green

Connector 2


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16 mm2-Black-85 A

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown

Connector 2


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown

Connector 2

Naked crimping connectorOT type-25 mm2-M8

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-35 mm2-0.03 m-105 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Cream-colored

Connector 2



2728


29 Cables

Item

Description


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35 mm2-Blue-135 A

Connector 1

Cord end terminal-35 mm2-0.03 m-105 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Cream-colored

Connector 2


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35 mm2-Black-135 A

29.2.2 Subrack Power Cables The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.

OptiX OSN 8800 Figure 29-7 shows the subrack power cable. Figure 29-7 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800 1

1 A

X2

X1 1

2

3 B

X4

X3 1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector


3. Cable

NOTE

When the DPD63-8-8 PDU is used, the B cable in Figure 29-7 must be configured. When any other PDU is used, the A cable in Figure 29-7 must be configured.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2729


29 Cables

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack/6800/3800 Figure 29-8 shows the subrack power cable. Figure 29-8 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack/ 6800/3800 1

3

X1

A A3 A2 A1

2

A

W1

X3

W2

X2

500

L

1. Cable connector

2. Cable clip


For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 29-7. Table 29-7 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables Cable

Cable Connector

Cord End Terminal

Mapping

Core Color

W2

X1 connects to A1

X2

A1 corresponds to X2.

Blue (-48 V power)

W1

X1 connects to A3

X3

A3 corresponds to X3.

Black (power ground)

The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 29-8. Table 29-8 Technical parameters of subrack power cables

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Cable connector X1

Cable connector-D type-3PIN-FemaleSolder injection molding type-No middle contact

Cord end terminals X2, X3

Common terminal-Conductor Cross Section-6 mm2-Length 20 mm-30 AInsertion depth 12 mm-Black

Type of the cable W2

Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable


2730


29 Cables

Item

Description


Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

29.3 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.

29.3.1 Classification The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is conducted before installation. The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 29-9. Table 29-9 Classification of optical fibers Type of Connectors at Both Ends

Optical Cable Type

Fiber Type

LC/PC-LC/PC

2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode simplex optical cable

G.657A2

2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multi-mode simplex optical cable

A1b


G.657A2


A1b


G.657A2


A1b

LSH/APC-FC/UPC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC

0.9mm (0.035 in.) singlemode tight buffer

G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LC/UPC


G.652D

LC/PC-FC/PC

LC/PC-SC/PC

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2731


29 Cables

Type of Connectors at Both Ends

Optical Cable Type

Fiber Type

LSH/APC-FC/UPC


G.652D

LSH/APC-SC/UPC


G.652D

NOTE

The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G. 657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G. 652D optical fibers needs to be verified.

29.3.2 Connectors Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/ PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them. Table 29-10 lists details on classification of fiber connectors. Table 29-10 Classification of fiber connectors Type of Fiber Connectors

Description

LC/PC

Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

FC/PC

Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC

Square fiber connector/protruding polished

LSH/APC

Fiber connector with a cap that provides automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 29-9, Figure 29-10, Figure 29-11 and Figure 29-12.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2732


29 Cables

Figure 29-9 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 29-10 FC/PC fiber connector

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2733


29 Cables

Figure 29-11 SC/PC fiber connector

Figure 29-12 LSH/APC fiber connector

Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 29-13, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 29-14.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2734


29 Cables

Figure 29-13 Protective caps recommended

Figure 29-14 Protective caps not recommended

NOTE

The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type of caps provides poor dustproof function.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2735


29 Cables

29.4 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.

29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable One end of a cabinet alarm indicator cable is connected to the LAMP interface on an EFI board, and the other end of the cable has four connectors, each of which is connected to the alarm indicator interface at the top of a cabinet. When multiple subracks are cascaded, straight-through network cables are used to connect the subracks through their LAMP1 or LAMP2 interfaces.

Structure Figure 29-15 shows a cabinet alarm indicator cable together with the appearance of the EFI front panel. Figure 29-15 Structure of the cabinet alarm indicator cable 1

3

View A 8

4 B

2

1

View B 1 2

X2 X3 X1 A

X4 X5

L

1. Network interface connector

2. Heat-shrink tubing

3. Common plug

4. Ordinary connector

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 29-11. Table 29-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector X1

Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5

Color

Relationship

X1.4

X2.2

White

Pair

X1.5

X2.1

Green

X1.1

X3.2

White


Pair 2736


29 Cables

Connector X1

Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5

Color

X1.2

X3.1

Blue

X1.3

X4.2

White

X1.6

X4.1

Brown

X1.7

X5.2

White

X1.8

X5.1

Orange

Relationship

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 29-12. Table 29-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Item

Description

Connector X1

Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5

Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.)

Type of the cable

Twisted pair cable -100 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26 AWG-4 pairs-black

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable An alarm output interface cable is used to output and concatenate alarm signals. There are RJ45 connectors at both ends of the cable. During alarm signal output concatenation, both ends of the cable are connected to the ALMO alarm interfaces in different subracks. During alarm signal output, one end of the cable is connected to the ALMO alarm interface, and the other end of the cable is connected to a power distribution cabinet or another set of equipment. In this case, alarms are displayed in a centralized manner.

Structure Figure 29-16 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2737


29 Cables

Figure 29-16 Alarm output interface cable 1 View A 8 6 3 1

A

X2

X1 L 1. Network interface connector

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 29-13. Table 29-13 Pin assignment of X1/X2 Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White-orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.3

X2.3

White-green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White-blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White-brown

Pair

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 29-14. Table 29-14 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ45 connector-uniconductor flat cable


2738


29 Cables

Item

Description


Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100 ΩUTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24 AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable An alarm input interface cable is used to input alarms of external equipment. One end of the cable is connected to the ALMI interface in a subrack and the other end is connected to the external equipment under monitoring.

Structure Figure 29-17 shows the structure of the cable. Figure 29-17 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable 8

8

1

1 1

X1

X2

1. Network interface connector-RJ45

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-15. Table 29-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White-orange


2739


29 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.6

X2.6

Green

Pair

X1.3

X2.3

White-green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White-blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White-brown

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-16. Table 29-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector

Type of the cable

Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

29.5 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables.

29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.

Structure Figure 29-18 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2740


29 Cables

Figure 29-18 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

1. DB9 connector

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 29-17. Table 29-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.1

X2.1

Pair

X1.5

X2.5

X1.2

X2.2

X1.3

X2.3

X1.6

X2.6

X1.7

X2.7

X1.8

X2.8

X1.9

X2.9

Pair

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 29-18. Table 29-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Connector X1, X2

Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type


2741


29 Cables

Item

Description

Type

Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100 ohmSEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack

Number of cores

4 pairs

Length

10.0 m (393.7 in.), 20.0 m (787.4 in.)

29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.

Structure Figure 29-19 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable. Figure 29-19 Structure of the AUX signal cable 2

1

B

Pos.64 View A

W8 W7

Pos.1

A

View B

X8

1

X7

8

X6

W6 Delander

W5 W1

X5

W4

X1

L1

X4

W3

X3

View C

3

Pos.9

W2

C X2

L2 L3

Pos.1

L4 L5

1. DB64 cable connector

2. Network interface connector

3. DB9 cable connector

For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8 and interface types, refer to Table 29-19.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2742


29 Cables

Table 29-19 Relationship between connectors and interface types Connector

Interface Type

X2

Serial

X3

ALMI1

X4

ALMI2

X5

ALMO

X6

LAMP1

X7

LAMP2

X8

ETH

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 29-20, Table 29-21, Table 29-22, Table 29-23, Table 29-24, Table 29-25 and Table 29-26. Table 29-20 Pin assignment of the W2 Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.3

X2.2

Pair

X1.7

X2.3

X1.4

X2.4

X1.1

X2.5

X1.6

X2.6

X1.8

X2.7

X1.5

X2.8

X1.2

X2.9

Pair

Pair

Pair

Table 29-21 Pin assignment of the W3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector X1

Connector X3

Relationship

X1.9

X3.1

Pair

X1.11

X3.2

X1.13

X3.3

X1.15

X3.6


Pair

2743


29 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X3

Relationship

X1.17

X3.4

Pair

X1.19

X3.5

X1.10

X3.7

X1.12

X3.8

Pair

Table 29-22 Pin assignment of the W4 Connector X1

Connector X4

Relationship

X1.14

X4.1

Pair

X1.16

X4.2

X1.18

X4.3

X1.20

X4.6

-

X4.4

-

X4.5

-

X4.7

-

X4.8

Pair

-

-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector X1

Connector X5

Relationship

X1.21

X5.1

Pair

X1.23

X5.2

X1.25

X5.3

X1.27

X5.6

X1.22

X5.4

X1.24

X5.5

X1.26

X5.7

X1.28

X5.8


Pair

Pair

Pair

2744


29 Cables


Connector X6

Relationship

X1.33

X6.1

Pair

X1.35

X6.2

X1.41

X6.3

X1.43

X6.6

X1.37

X6.4

X1.39

X6.5

X1.45

X6.7

X1.47

X6.8

Pair

Pair

Pair


Connector X7

Relationship

X1.34

X7.1

Pair

X1.36

X7.2

X1.42

X7.3

X1.44

X7.6

X1.38

X7.4

X1.40

X7.5

X1.46

X7.7

X1.48

X7.8

Pair

Pair

Pair


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Connector X1

Connector X8

Relationship

X1.61

X8.1

Pair

X1.57

X8.2

X1.53

X8.3

X1.49

X8.6

-

X8.4

-

X8.5


Pair

-

2745


29 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X8

Relationship

-

X8.7

-

-

X8.8

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 29-27. Table 29-27 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable Item

Description

Connector X1

Cable connector-D type-64 PIN-8 bit-straight through connector

Connector X2

Cable connector-D type-9PIN

Connectors X3-X8

Network interface connector-8 bit-8PINShielded

Type of the cable

W1

Communication cable-26AWGPANTONE430U-Sheilded

W2-W8

Communication cable-24AWG-8 coresPANTONE445U

Number of cores

8

29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable The straight-through network cable connects the equipment and the network management computer. RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.

Structure Figure 29-20 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2746


29 Cables

Figure 29-20 Structure of the straight-through network cable 8

8

1

1 RJ-45

X1

X2

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 29-28. Table 29-28 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White-orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.3

X2.3

White-green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White-blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White-brown

Pair

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 29-29. Table 29-29 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector

Type of the cable

Communication cable-8-core category-5 twisted pair-24AWG


2747


29 Cables

Item

Description

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

29.6 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.

29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections The cables for other equipment connections are used to connect to BITS/PTN or OptiX OSN devices. The cables applicable to these ports are available in four types, as listed in Table 29-30. Table 29-30 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices External interface of board

Port Type of OptiX OSN Device

Port Type of BITS or other Device

Cable Type

Description

TOD(time)

RJ45(time)

RJ45(time)

Straight through network cables

For details, see 29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable.

CLK/IN / OUT(clock)

RJ45 (clock)

SMB (clock)

Special cables

Single Conversion Cable to connect RJ45 port and SMB port and coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends.For details, see 29.6.1.2 Special Cables and 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. Cables made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm,75ohm Converter Box. For details, see 29.6.1.2 Special Cables.

SMB (clock)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

SMB (clock)

SMBSMB Coaxial cables


Coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends. For details, see 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.

2748


External interface of board

29 Cables


Port Type of BITS or other Device

Cable Type

Description

RJ45 (clock)

RJ45 (clock)

Cascadi ng network cable

For details, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables .

NOTE

The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1, and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2 ports are used to receive or output time signals. NOTE

The TN11STG board of an OptiX OSN 6800 device has two 120-ohm RJ45 (CLK and OUT) and two 75ohm SMB ports (IN and OUT). Users can use the CLK port or the IN and OUT ports to receive and transmit clock signals. The CLK port can also be used to output clock signals.

29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN equipment and the network management computer. RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable, connected to the equipment at two ends. For details, see 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable.

29.6.1.2 Special Cables Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices. Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.

Structure Single Cable, Conversion Cable The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. The length of such a cable is only 3 meters. Figure 29-21 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable. Figure 29-21 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2749


29 Cables

1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket 2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB 3: Network Interface Connector X1: RJ45 port X2: SMB port X3: SMB port Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios: l

When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable.

l

When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable.

l

If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector to the clock tester.

Figure 29-22 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side and an RJ45 port on the other side.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2750


29 Cables

Figure 29-22 Structure of Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box

1: Standard Parts-Cross Recess Head Screw,Flat Washer 2: A8010 Refiner,AS21TCTA,A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable,Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board 3: Box Body,Twisted Pair,Coaxial Cable Conversion Box

Pin Assignment Table 29-31 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2751


29 Cables

Table 29-31 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used Cable

Converter Box

Port on OptiX OSN Device

Straight-through network cable

RJ45

RJ45

Coaxial cable

SMB

SMB

NOTE

The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two ends of the coaxial cable are female.

Technical Parameters Table 29-32 provides the parameters of an Special Cables. Table 29-32 Parameters of an Special Cables Cable

Description

Single Cable, Conversion Cable

Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m, 2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S) +2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0 (BOM:04040582)

Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box

1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/ Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type, Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation Holes Spacing 5.1mm 2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board, 3*3 Assembled Board 3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male) 4. For more information of the parameters of SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. 5. For more information of the parameters of Straight-through network cable, see 29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable.

29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables The SMB-SMB Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on BITS devices at one end and to SMB ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Each coaxial cable uses an SMB connector at each end. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2752


29 Cables

Structure Figure 29-23 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Figure 29-23 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable

Pin Assignment Table 29-33 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Table 29-33 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable One End

Other End

SMB-core

SMB-core

SMB-ground

SMB-ground

Technical Parameters Table 29-34 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Table 29-34 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable Cable

Description

Cable type

l Trunk Cable, 10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368 l Trunk Cable, 2.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4362 l Trunk Cable, 20.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4370

Cable length

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

2 m, 10 m, 20 m


2753


29 Cables

29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections The type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices are mainly two scenarios: connecting NEs on an OptiX OSN network and cascading master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE. Table 29-35lists the type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices. Table 29-35 Type of cables for internal connections Connection type

signal Type

Cables Type

Description

connecting NEs

clock

Cascading network cable

Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables .

time

Straightthrough network cable

Straight-through network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports need to be connected for time synchronization. For more information,see 29.6.1.1 StraightThrough Network Cable.

clock


ascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables .

time


Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization. For more information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables .

cascading master and slave subracks

29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization.

Structure Figure 29-24 shows the structure of a cascading network cable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2754


29 Cables

Figure 29-24 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends

Pin Assignment Table 29-36 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable. Table 29-36 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.1 (White-orange)

X2.4 (Blue)

Twisted

X1.2 (Orange)

X2.5 (White-blue)

X1.3 (White-green)

X2.7 (White-brown)

X1.4 (Blue)

X2.1 (White-orange)

X1.5 (White-blue)

X2.2 (Orange)

X1.6 (Green)

X2.8 (Brown)

X1.7 (White-brown)

X2.3 (White-green)

X1.8 (Brown)

X2.6 (Green)

Twisted

Twisted

Twisted

Technical Parameters Table 29-37 provides the parameters of cascading network cables. Table 29-37 Parameters of cascading network cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2755


29 Cables

Item

Description

Cable type

Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted pair-24 AWG

Number of wires

8

29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections Clock signal testing cables are used to connect test instruments to OptiX OSN devices. Table 29-38 lists the main clock signal testing cables. Table 29-38 Cables for Testing equipment Connections Connecti on relationsh ip

Port Type of Test Instrument


Cable Type

Description

Connection to Clock test instrument

BNC(clock)

SMB(clock)

SMBBNCCoaxia l cables

The coaxial cables use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. For more information, see 29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables.

BNC (clock)

RJ45 (clock)

Clock signal testing cables

These testing cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables are together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. For more information, see 29.6.1.2 Special Cables, 29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable, 29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables.

BNC(time)

RJ45(time)

Time signal testing cables

For more information, see 29.6.3.2 Time Signal Testing Cables.

Connection to Time test instrument

29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables The SMB-BNC Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on clock test instrument at one end and to BNC ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.The SMB-BNC coaxial cable use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2756


29 Cables

Structure Figure 29-25 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Figure 29-25 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable

Pin Assignment Table 29-39 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-39 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable One End

Other End

SMB-core

BNC-core

SMB-ground

BNC-ground

Technical Parameters Table 29-40 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-40 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable Cable

Description

Cable type

Trunk Cable,10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521

Cable length

10 m

29.6.3.2 Time Signal Testing Cables The time signal testing cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to RJ45 ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2757


29 Cables

Structure Figure 29-26 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables. Figure 29-26 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector

Pin Assignment Table 29-41 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables. Table 29-41 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable Connector X1 (BNC)

Connector X2 (RJ45)

Description

Core

6(green)

Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the BNC port on the time test instrument.

Ground(Metal shielding)

1(blue)

Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the ground of the BNC connector on the time test instrument.

Technical Parameters Table 29-42provides the parameters of time signal testing cables.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2758


29 Cables

Table 29-42 Parameters of time signal testing cables Cable

Description

RJ45

l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

BNC

Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With Heat Shrink Tube With Itself-For Agintrust

Trunk Cable

Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m, 75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8, 4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25


2759


30 Optical Attenuator

30

Optical Attenuator

About This Chapter Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs). 30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2760


30 Optical Attenuator

30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. Figure 30-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator. Figure 30-1 Fixed optical attenuator

30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB. Figure 30-2 shows the appearance of a common MVOA. Figure 30-2 Appearance of an MVOA

NOTE

The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise. When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical power closely. When the attenuation stops decreasing, stop the adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2761


31 Pluggable Optical Modules

31

Pluggable Optical Modules

The eSFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver used in optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications. Figure 31-1 eSFP/SFP+ optical module

Figure 31-2 XFP optical module

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2762


31 Pluggable Optical Modules

Figure 31-3 CFP optical module (40 Gbit/s)

Figure 31-4 CFP optical module (100 Gbit/s)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2763


32 Filler Panels

32

Filler Panels

About This Chapter A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot. 32.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel. 32.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. 32.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel. 32.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2764


32 Filler Panels

32.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel. A filler panel has the following functions: l

Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack.

l

Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack.

l

Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.

l

Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.

32.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. Figure 32-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel. Figure 32-1 Appearance of a filler panel 21136047 21135823 21136389 21132664 21136680 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492

21135493

21136046

PUSH

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2765


32 Filler Panels

32.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 32-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 32-1 Valid slots for a filler panel Part Number

Product

Valid Slots

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

21132664, 21136680


IU1-IU18

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 6800

IU1-IU18

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 3800

IU11, IU2-IU5

21134882

OptiX OSN 3800

IU1, IU6-IU11

21135491

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU42, IU44

21135492

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU76, IU77

21135492

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU38

21135492, 21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU22

21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89

21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48

21135716

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU41, IU43

21135716

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86

NOTE Slot IU22 must be filled by two filler panels.

NOTE Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two filler panels.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

21135823

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU9, IU10

21136046

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU74, IU85

21136047

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44


2766


32 Filler Panels

Part Number

Product

Valid Slots

21136389

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU9, IU10 NOTE l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a board except the TN16XCH board, this filler panel must be inserted before the board is inserted. l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be covered with this filler panel and then with a filler panel identified as 21132664.

32.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 32-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 32-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Part Number

Mechanical Specifications

21132664, 21136680

25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H))

21134882

25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))

21135491

28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

21135492

25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))

21135493

50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))

21135716

25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

21135823

27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H))

21136046

110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))

21136047

34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H))

21136389

37.6 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))


2767


A Indicators

A

Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, yellow and green. A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2768


A Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1. Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

power

Power indicator

On (green)

The cabinet is powered on.

Off

The cabinet is not powered on.

Critical alarm indicator

On (red)


Off

There is no critical alarm.

Major alarm indicator

On (Orange)


Off

There is no major alarm.

Minor alarm indicator

On (Yellow)


Off

There is no minor alarm.

critical

major

minor

A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, yellow and green. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-2. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.

Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Power indicator

On (Green)

The subrack works normally.

Off

The subrack does not work.

On (Red)


OptiX OSN 6800: CRI Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



2769


A Indicators

Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

Off



On (Red)


Off



On (Yellow)


Blinking slowly (Yellow)

The MIN indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

Off


OptiX OSN 8800: CRIT MAJ

MIN

A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-3. Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Chassis power supply indicator

On (green)

The chassis is powered on.

Off

The chassis is not powered on.

On (yellow)


Off


On (orange)


Off


On (red)


Off


MIN


MAJ


CRI


A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4, Table A-5, and Table A-6. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2770


A Indicators

Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT

Board hardware indicator

On (green)

The board works normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical/major alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The board software is lost.

SRV

ACTb

Service alarm indicator

Service activation indicator

Blinking quickly (red)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.

Blinking quickly (green)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote service alarm occurs.

Off

No service is configured.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2771


Indicato r

LINK/ ACTn

LAS

A Indicators

Name

Data port connection/data transceive indicator

Laser emission status indicator

Status

Meaning


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.

On (green)

The data port connection is normal.

Off

The data port connection is abnormal.

Blinking quickly (yellow)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Data ports are receiving and transmitting data.

On (green)

The Raman laser is in the working mode.

Off

The Raman laser is ont in the working mode.

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. Most of the boards support this function except the following boards: ACS, APIU, ATE, BMD4, BMD8, CMR1, CMR2, CMR4, CRPC, DCM, DCU, DMR1, DFIU, EFI, FAN, TN21FIU, TN13FIU, GFU, TN11ITL, TN11L4G, MB2, MR2, MR4, MR8, PIU, SBM2, TN21SCC, TN22SCC, TN23SCC, SCS, SFIU, STI, TBE, TN11XCS. b: During the testing of the indicators on the TN51AUX board, the ACT indicator is lit orange.

Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The PQ2 sub-board works normally.

On (red)

The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.

On (yellow)

Logical sub-board is not configured.

Off

The PQ2 sub-board is not powered on.


2772


A Indicators

Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The board is working normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The NE software is lost.

SRV

ACT

Service alarm indicator

Service activation indicator

Blinking quickly (red)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.

2773


A Indicators

Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

PWRA

Indicator for system power supply

On (green)

-48 V power supply A is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

On (green)

-48 V power supply B is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

Indicator for protection power supply

On (green)

The +3.3 V protection power is normal.

On (red)

The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

Alarm cut-off indicator

On (yellow)

There is no audible or visual warning in case of an alarm.

Off

Audible warning is generated in case of an alarm.

PWRB

PWRC

ALMC

Indicator for system power supply

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. The boards that support this function include: TN11SCC, TN16SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC.

A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7. Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: STAT OptiX OSN 8800: FAN

Fan indicator

On (green)

The fan is normal.

On (red)

A major alarm occurs or two or more fans are faulty.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs or one fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on, is absent, or the software is not loaded.


2774


A Indicators

A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-8. Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: RUN OptiX OSN 8800: PWR

Running status indicator

On (green)

Indicates that the power is accessed normally.

Off

Indicates that the power is not accessed.


2775


B Bar Code for Boards

B

Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2776



The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2777



B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. NOTE

Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.

Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1) Delivery information


Board model number

2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG Serial number


BOM

Environmental Board friendliness flag name (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Characteristic code

Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2) Delivery information


Board model number

2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT Serial number

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


BOM

Environmental friendliness flag

Board Tunable name

Characteristic code

(Y: Environmentally friendly)


2778



Figure B-3 Description of the bar code (example 3)



Board name

2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 Serial number


BOM

Environmental Board model number friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Figure B-4 Description of the bar code (example 4) Third and fourth numbers of the BOM



Board name

030HFY 108A000199 Y TN12 LSX T01 Serial number


The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.

Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Board model number

The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2779



Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards Board Configuration


Description



0303

The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board.


0303



0307

The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.


0302



0231

Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.

N/A


Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l

For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed.

l

For the SSN3SLH41 board,

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2780



– The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. – When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305. Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration


Description



0302

The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.

3406


0305

The board is installed optical modules.

N/A

Table B-3 provides the description of the delivery information. Table B-3 Description of the delivery information of a board Item

Description

Vendor

Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.

Manufacture Year

Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured. For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.

Manufacture Month

Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B indicates November.

Serial Number

Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges from 000001 to 999999.

B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2781



B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-4. Table B-4 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU Code

Meaning

Description

The first five digit

The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

Indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module.

The sixth character

The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module

The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN.

The seventh character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-5.

NOTE

In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.

The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-5. Table B-5 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules Character

Dispersion (1550 nm)

Distance

Rate

A

1600ps/nm

80km

2.5G

3200ps/nm

170km

2.5G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

3200ps/nm

160km

2.5G

1500ps/nm

80km

10.66G

1600ps/nm

80km

10.66G

3200ps/nm

170km

2.5G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

6500ps/nm

320km

2.5G

B

C

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2782



Character


Distance

Rate

D

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

E

6500ps/nm

320km

2.5G

G

800ps/nm

40km

10.71G

H

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.66G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

1800ps/nm

90km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

1500ps/nm

80km

10.66G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.66G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

6400ps/nm

320km

4.9-5.4G

6400ps/nm

320km

10.66G

1500ps/nm

80km

10.71G

3400ps/nm

170km

4.9-5.4G

Z

800ps/nm

40km

10.71G

U

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

K

L

M

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-5.

B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-6.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2783



Table B-6 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Wavelength-tunable

T is the abbreviation for Tunable, indicating that the wavelength is tunable.


The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module


The third character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-7.

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-7. Table B-7 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules Character


Distance

Rate

T

1200ps/nm

60km

10.71G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.67G

3400ps/nm

170km

5.33G

-1000 to 1100ps/nm

60km

10.71G

4800ps/nm

240km

11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-7.

B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-8.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2784



Table B-8 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU Code

Meaning

Description

The first four digits

The wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

Indicate the wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module.

The fifth character

The type of the CWDM-side receiving optical module


The sixth character

The type of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

The value can be L or S. L represents long haul. S represents short haul.

NOTE

As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km).

B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.

B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1 The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table B-9 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2785



Table B-9 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-10. Table B-10 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits


Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Last four digits


Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l


l


B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-11. Table B-11 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First and second digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


2786



Code

Meaning

Description



Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


Third wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l


l


l

"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.

l

"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.

B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table B-12 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table B-12 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode

Meaning

Description

First to fourth digits

Optical signal frequency

Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2 The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-13. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2787



Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal.

Last four digits

Frequency of the second optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l


l

"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

B.4.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-14. Table B-14 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of first optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of forth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.



l

"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

For the mapping between the characteristic codes of the MR4 boards and signal frequencies, see Table 18-50 in 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2788



B.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-15. Table B-15 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits


Last four digits





l


Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


l



B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-16. Table B-16 Characteristic code for the MR8V board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

First four digits



Description

2789



Code

Meaning

Description

Last four digits



"V"

Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel

Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l


l


l

"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


l


B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-17. Table B-17 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2790



B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-18. Table B-18 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.

B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-19. Table B-19 Characteristic code for the HBA board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character

-

The second character is always G.

Third to the fourth digits

Gain

The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value.

Fifth character

-

The fifth character is always I.


2791



Code

Meaning

Description

Sixth and seventh digits


Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.

B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-20. Table B-20 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second to fifth digits

Gain range

Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.

Sixth character

-

Is always I.



Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-21. Table B-21 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain



2792



Code

Meaning

Description

Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2 The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-22. Table B-22 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain


Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-23. Table B-23 Characteristic code for the CRPC board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.


2793



Code

Meaning

Description

Two digits

Gain

Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.

B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.

B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-24. Table B-24 Characteristic code for the D40 Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Band





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-25. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2794



Table B-25 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-26. Table B-26 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-27.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2795



Table B-27 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band



B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-28. Table B-28 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-29. Table B-29 Characteristic code for the M40 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band



2796



Code

Meaning

Description

Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-30. Table B-30 Characteristic code for the M40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2797



B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-31. Table B-31 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-32. Table B-32 Characteristic code for the OLP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-33.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2798



Table B-33 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.

B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-34. Table B-34 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code

Meaning

Description

Digits 1 through 3

Attenuation value


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-35. Table B-35 Characteristic code for the VA4 board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First to third digits

Attenuation value



2799



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.

B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-36. Table B-36 Characteristic code for the DCU board Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km. NOTE

If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.

B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-37. Table B-37 Characteristic code for the GFU board

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Code

Meaning

Description

First and second characters

-

The first and second characters are always GF.


Gradient

Indicate the gradient of optical signals.


2800



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.

B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-38. Table B-38 Characteristic code for the TDC board Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2801


C

C Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards. C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, line boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards. C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback. C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function. C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection. C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of OCS Boards This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of OCS boards. C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2802



C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards The SDH boards and Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560 support various types of loopbacks.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2803



C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, line boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

C.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the Client Side The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU), tributary boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTUs, tributary boards and packet service boards Board Name

TN11ECOM

TN54EG16

Access Service Type

FE

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Optical Module

Note

Optical Interface Type Supported

Mean Launched Optical Power

Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm)

Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)

Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

100 BASEFX-10 km

-3

-11.5

-19

-3

100 BASEFX-40 km

0

-4.5

-20

-3

100 BASEFX-80 km

5

-2

-22

-3

1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2804


Board Name

TN54EX2

TN11L4G

TN11LDGD

Access Service Type

10GE LAN

GE

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

10 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5


4

-4.7

-14.1

-1


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-9.5

-17

0

-2.5


eSFP CWDM

SFP+

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2805


Board Name

TN11LDGS

TN12LDM

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm)


-9

-20

-3

0

-5

-20

-3

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2806


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-2

-23

-3

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

0

-28

-9


4 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

I-16-2 km


eSFP CWDM

eSFP DWDM

2807


Board Name

TN11LDMD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

2808


Board Name

TN11LDMS

Access Service Type


Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported

Note Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)





0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2809


Board Name

TN12LDX

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e


-1

-6

-11 (multirate )/-12.6 (10GE LAN)

-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


2

-3

–16

0

XFP DWDM


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

10GE LAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2810


Board Name

TN11LEM24

Access Service Type

TN11LOA

Optical Module



-9.5

-17

0

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

10G BASESR-0.3 km (SFP +)

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

10G BASELR-10 km (SFP +)

0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5


-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/FE

2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

FC400/ FICON4G

4.25Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km

-1.1

-9

-15

0

eSFP

4.25Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

-1

-8.4

-18

0

10G BASE-LR (SFP+)

-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

10G BASE-ER (SFP+)

3

-2

-14 (11.1G)

-1

FE/GE

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

TN11LEX4


10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

10GE LAN/ FC800/ FICON8G/ FC1200/ FCCON10G



Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASESX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

-2.5

1000 BASELX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

eSFP

SFP+

SFP+

SFP+

-15.8 (10.3125 G)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2811


Board Name

Access Service Type

10GE LAN

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

10GBASESR-0.3km (SFP +)

-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1

10GBASELR-10km (SFP +)

0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0


SFP+

eSFP

eSFP

2812


Board Name

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)



SDI/HD-SDI/ 3G-SDI

270 Mbit/s - 3 0 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

-7

-16

0

eSFP

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI

5 1.25Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

0

-19

-3

eSFP CWDM

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

5 2.67Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

0

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

4 2.67Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC800/ FICON8G

1600-M5E-SNI(SFP+)-0.3 km

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-3

SFP+

1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+)-10 km

-0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2813


Board Name

Access Service Type

GE

TN11LOG

TN12LOG

GE

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


eSFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2814


Board Name

TN11LOM

Access Service Type

GE

FC 100/FC 200/FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




Minim um (dBm)




0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)

-1

-9

-14

0


-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP

2815


Board Name

Access Service Type

GE/ FC 100/ FC 200

TN12LOM

GE

FC 100/FC 200/FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

-3

-10

-18

0


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)

-1

-9

-14

0


-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2816


Board Name

Access Service Type

GE/FC 100/FC 200

GE

TN11LQG

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

-3

-10

-18

0


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

2817


Board Name

TN13LQM

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

FC200/GE/ FC100/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

2818


Board Name

TN11LQMD

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)



OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE


0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2819


Board Name

TN12LQMD

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

2820


Board Name

TN11LQMS

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2821


Board Name

TN12LQMS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2822


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-5

-18

0


0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

TN11LSQ

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN11LSX

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP

TN12LSX



Minim um (dBm)


S-16.1-15 km

0


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2823


Board Name

TN13LSX

TN14LSX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN/ FC1200a


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


2

-3

–16

0

XFP DWDM

10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/

10Gbit/s Multirate -10km

-1

-6

-14.4

-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


XFP

2824


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


2

-4.7

-15.8

-1 (STM64 )/-1 (10GE LAN)


4

0

-24

-7 (STM64 )/-7 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ FC1200

10Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3km

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1 (STM64 )/-1 (10GE LAN)

TN11LSXL

STM-256/ OC-768

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN11LTX

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

OTU2e/ FC1200

TN11LWX2

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP

2825


Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

TN11LWXD


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2826


Board Name

TN11LWXS TN12LWXS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2827


Board Name

TN11TMX TN12TMX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


0

-28

-9

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC)

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2828


Board Name

TN11TBE

Access Service Type

FE

GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s 4 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

100 BASEFX-10 km

-3

-11.5

-19

-3

eSFP

100 BASEFX-80 km

5

-2

-22

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24

-7


XFP

2829


Board Name

Access Service Type

FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TN11TDG

TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX

GE

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ed

10GE LAN

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




Minim um (dBm)




0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

XFP

2830


Board Name

TN53TDX

TN54TEM28

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (Multirat e)/0.5 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

10GE LAN


-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

SFP+


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

1000 BASESX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


XFP

SFP+

2831


Board Name

TN54THA

TN54TOA

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minim um (dBm)

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 km

0


1000 BASELX-10km (I-1310-LC)

GE

FC400/ FICON4G

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



-5

-18

0

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-1.1

-9

-15

0


-1

-8.4

-18

0

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


eSFP

eSFP

2832


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

FC200/FC100/ FE/GE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP DWDM

2833


Board Name

TN52TOG

TN11TOM

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

SDI/HD-SDI

270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

0

-7

-16

0

Video eSFP

GE

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

eSFP

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

GE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2834


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-2

-23

-3

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

I-16-2 km


eSFP CWDM

eSFP DWDM

2835


Board Name

TN52TOM

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

SDI

1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

0

-7

-22

0

eSFP

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0



0

-19

-3


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

2836


Board Name

TN55TOX

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

SDI

1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

0

-7

-22

0

eSFP

GE

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

eSFP

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3

10Gbit/s Multirate-10km (SFP+)

-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


SFP+

2837


Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module



0

-24

-7

10G BASE-ER/ 4 EW-40km (SFP +)

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASESR-0.3km (SFP +)

-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASELR-10km (SFP +)

0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

TN11TQM


OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)



Minim um (dBm)

10G BASEZR-80km (SFP +)

4


eSFP

2838


Board Name

TN12TQM

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-20

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

2839


Board Name

TN11TQS

TN11TQX TN52TQX

Access Service Type




Minim um (dBm)





0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s 4 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM


-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ee

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

-1


eSFP CWDM

2840


Board Name

TN53TQX

TN55TQX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

0GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/


2

-4.7


-1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


XFP

XFP

2841


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

OTU2e/ FC1200


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN /FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

TN11TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN53TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN54TTX

OC-192/ STM-64/10GE WAN/10GE LAN/OTU2/ OTU2e

10G BASE-LR (SFP+)

-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

SFP+

10G BASE-ER (SFP+)

3

-2

-14 (11.1G)

-1

-15.8 (10.3125 G) 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

10G BASEZR-80km (SFP +)

4

0

-24

-7

10G BASE-ER/ 4 EW-40km (SFP +)

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASESR-0.3km(SFP +)

-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASELR-10km(SFP +)

0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5

a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services. d: Only TN52TDX supports OTU2/OTU2e services. e: Only TN52TQX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2842



Table C-2 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of TN12LSC/TN54TSXL Board Name

TN12LSC

TN54TSC

TN54TSXL

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interfac e Type Suppor ted

Tra nsm it OM A per Lan e (Mi n)

Tra ns mit OM A per Lan e (Ma x)

Rev eive r Sen siti vity (O MA ) per Lan e

Min imu m recei ver over load (OM A) per Lan e

Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer per Lan e (Mi n)

Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer per Lan e (Ma x)

Ave rag e Rev eive r Po wer per Lan e (Mi n)

Ave rag e Rev eive r Po wer per Lan e (Ma x)

Tot al Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer (Ma x)

100GE

100G BASELR4-10 km

-1.3

4.5

-8.6

4.5

-4.3

4.5

-10. 6

4.5

10.5

100G BASE-1 0×10 G-10 km

-2.8

3.5

-8.8

3.5

-5.8

3.5

-10. 8

3.5

13.5

100GB ASELR4-10 km (CFP)

-1.3

4.5

-8.6

4.5

-4.3

4.5

-10. 6

4.5

10.5

100GB ASE-10 ×10G-1 0 km (CFP)

-2.8

3.5

-8.8

3.5

-5.8

3.5

-10. 8

3.5

13.5

40GBA SELR4-10 km

-4

3.5

-11. 5

3.5

-7

2.3

-13. 7

2.3

8.3

100GE

40GE

Opt ical Mo dul e Typ e

CFP

C.1.2 OTUs, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the WDM Side The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), line boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2843



Table C-3 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards, line boards and packet service boards Board Name

TN11L4 G

TN11LD GD

TN11LD GS

Access Service Type

OTU 5G

STM-16/ OTU1

STM-16/ OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




Minimu m Receiver Overloa d (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-2

-25

-9

-


2

-3

-25

-9

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

-4

-8

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD

-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2844


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

TN12LD M

OTU1


3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LD MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP

2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

TN11LD MS

TN12LD X

OTU1

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2845


Board Name

TN11LE M24

TN11LE X4

TN11LO A

TN11LO G

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-

4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD

2

-3

-26

-9

-


2846


Board Name

TN12LO G

TN11LO M

TN12LO M

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2847


Board Name

TN11LQ G

Access Service Type

FEC 5G/ OTU5G






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-2

-25

-9

-


2

-3

-25

-9

-

TN13LQ M

OTU1


3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LQ MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-18

0

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2848


Board Name

TN12LQ MD

TN11LQ MS

TN12LQ MS

Access Service Type

OTU1

OTU1

OTU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2849


Board Name

TN12LS C

TN11LS Q

TN11LS X TN12LS X

TN13LS X

Access Service Type

OTU4

OTU3

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

40000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2850


Board Name

TN14LS X

TN11LS XL

TN12LS XL

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU3

OTU3






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-

800ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

800ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN15LS XL

OTU3


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN11LS XLR

OTU3


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2851


Board Name

TN12LS XLR

TN11LS XR

TN11LT X

TN11L WX2

Access Service Type

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU4

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPINa

-1

-5

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPDa

-1

-5

-28

9

-


2852


Board Name

Access Service Type

DVBASI/ FE

TN11L WXD

TN11L WXS TN12L WXSb

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-4

-8

-18

0

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-26

-10

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


2853


Board Name

TN11T MX

TN12T MX

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2854


Board Name

TN11N D2

TN12N D2

TN52N D2

TN53N D2

TN55N O2

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2855


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN51N Q2/ TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/ TN54N Q2

OTU2/ OTU2e

TN11NS 2

OTU2

TN12NS 2

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2856


Board Name

TN52NS 2

TN53NS 2

TN54PN D2

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2857


Board Name

TN11NS 3

TN52NS 3

TN54NS 3

Access Service Type

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN55NS 3

OTU3/ OTU3e

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

TN54NS 4

OTU4


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2858



Table C-4 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name

TN11E COM

Access Service Type

GE




Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

0

-19

-3

eSFP CWD M


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L DGD

STM-16/ OTU1


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L DGS

STM-16/ OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L DM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QG

FEC 5G/ OTU5G


5

2

-18

0

eSFP CWD M


5

2

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN13L QM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QMD

OTU1


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L QMS

OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2859


Board Name

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)


Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

TN11L WX2

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXD

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXS

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L WXSa

a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Table C-5 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards and line boards Board Name

TN11L EM24

Access Service Type



Minimu m (dBm)


Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Note

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2860


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN11L OA

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN12L OG

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN53N D2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN55N O2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN51N Q2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

TN11L EX4

TN12T MX

TN12N D2

TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2861


Board Name

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)



Note

TN54N Q2

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN53N S2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN54P ND2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN54N S3

OTU3/ OTU3e

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. Table C-6 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit Board Name

OAU100

DAS1/ OAU101

OAU102

Channel Gain (dB)

16 to 25.5

20 to 31

20 to 31

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB)

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm)

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

16

-32 to -14

-32 to -17

-14

-17

22

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

25.5

-32 to -23.5

-32 to -27.5

-23.5

-26.5

20

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

26

-32 to -22

-32 to -25

-22

-25

31

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

20

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

26

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28


2862


Board Name

OAU103

OAU105

OAU106

Channel Gain (dB)

24 to 36

23 to 34

16 to 23


Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB)

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm)

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

31

-32 to -30

-32

-30

-32

24

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

29

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28

36

-32

-32

-32

-32

23

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

30

-32 to -23

-32 to -26

-23

-26

34

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

16

-24 to -12

-24 to -15

-12

-15

19

-24 to -15

-24 to -18

-15

-18

23

-24 to -19

-24 to -22

-19

-22

OBU101

20±1.5

20

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

OBU103

23±1.5

23

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

OBU104

17±1.5

17

-32 to -17

-32 to -20

-17

-20

OBU205

23±1.5

23

-24 to -16

-24 to -19

-16

-19

Table C-7 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1 Board Name

Total input power range at the VI optical port(dBm)

Maximum total output optical power(dBm)

TN12OBU1P1

-30 to 7

9

Table C-8 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name

Channel Gain (dB)

Maximum Pump Power (dBm)

G.652 fiber

LEAF fiber

CRPC01

≥10

≥12

29

CRPC03

>10

N/A

29.5

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2863



Table C-9 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name

HBA

Channel Gain (dB)

29±1

Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 80 channels

40 channels

10 channels

Nominal Input Power Range (dBm)

-22

-19

-13

-25 to -3

Channel Allocation (nm)

1529 to 1561

Table C-10 Quick reference table for RAU1/RAU2 Board Name

Gain range (dB)

Max. OUT port optical power (dBm)

G.652/G. 654A fiber

LEAF/G.653/ TWRS/TWC/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G. 656/ TERA_LIGH T fiber

G.654B fiber

RAU1

19 to 33

19 to 35

19 to 29

20

RAU2

30 to 41

32 to 43

27 to 37

20

C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards. Table C-11 Quick reference table for board insertion loss specifications Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11MR2/TN21MR2

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11MR4/TN21MR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.5

MI-OUT

TN11MR8

Add/drop channel

≤2.2

IN-MO

≤3.5

MI-OUT Add/drop channel

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


≤4

2864



Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11MR8V

IN-MO

≤3

MI-OUT

TN21CMR1

TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2

Add/drop channel

≤4.5

IN-MO MI-OUT

≤0.8

Add/drop channel

≤1

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11DMR1/ TN21DMR1

Add/drop channel

≤2

EIN-EMO

≤0.8

EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel

≤1

TN11SBM2

Add/drop channel

≤3

TN11D40/TN12D40

≤6.5

TN11D40V

≤8a

TN21DFIU

EIN-ETM

≤1.5

ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC

≤1

ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN13FIU/TN14FIU/ TN21FIU

IN-TM

≤1.5

RM-OUT IN-TC

≤1

RC-OUT TN11SFIU

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

LINE1-SYS1


≤1.0

2865


Board Name


Insertion Loss (dB) LINE2-SYS2 LINE1-OSC1

≤1.5

LINE1-OSC2 TN11ITL01

RE-OUT

<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<2.5

IN-TO TN11ITL04

RE-OUT

<3

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3

IN-TO TN12ITL

RE-OUT

<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3.5

IN-TO TN11M40/TN12M40

≤6.5

TN11M40V/TN12M40V

≤8a

TN11DCP

Transmit-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤4

Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12DCP

TN11OLP


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12OLP

TN11SCS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


Single mode

≤4


Multimode

≤1.5

Wavelength dropping insertion loss

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5


2866


Board Name


Insertion Loss (dB) Wavelength adding insertion loss

TN11RDU9

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5

IN-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤12.5

ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤11.5

IN-EXPO

≤12.5

IN-TOA

≤1

EXPI-OUT

≤8.5

AMxb-TOA

≤12.5a

ROA-OUT

≤1.5

Mxc-OUT

≤9a

IN-DM

≤7

EXPI-OUT

≤14a

IN-EXPO

≤3

TN12TD20

insertion loss difference IN-DMxe

≤3

TN11TM20

AMxf-OUT

≤8a

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9

IN-DMxd

≤8a

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN13WSM9

AMxb-OUT

TN11WSMD2

AMxb-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd

≤4.5

TN11WSMD4/ TN12WSMD4

AMxb-OUT

≤8a

TN11WSMD9

AMxb/EXPI-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd/EXPO

≤12

TN11RMU9

TN11ROAM

IN-EXPO ≤8a

EXPI-OUT

IN-DMxd

a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8. e: DMx denotes DM1-DM20. f: AMx denotes AM1-AM20.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2867



C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. Table C-12 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board. Table C-12 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

CRPC

-

"MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)

D40

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

D40V

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

DAS1

"MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

"MONT"/"LOUT"=1/99 (20 dB)

FIU

-

l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN14FIU/TN21FIU: "MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) l TN13FIU02: "MONT"/"LOUT" = 0.1/99.9 (30 dB)

HBA

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)

ITL

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

M40

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

M40V

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

OAU1

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OBU1

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OBU2

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

RDU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

RMU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSM9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD2

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD4

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2868



Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

TD20

-

"MON"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)

TM20

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=3/97(15dB)

RAU1

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB) "MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

RAU2

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB) "MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-13. Table C-13 Basic functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Board Name

Tu nab le Wa vel eng th Fu ncti on

ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN11E COM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54E G16

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54E X2

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN11L4 G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11L DGD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11L DGS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e

PR BS on the Clie nt Sid e

PR BS on the WD M Sid e

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

N

N

N

SFP +

N

-

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N


2869


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN11L DM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L DMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L DMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12L DX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN11L EM24

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP /SFP +

N

Y

TN11L EX4

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP /SFP +

N

Y

TN11L OA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P/ SFP +

Y

Y

TN11L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN11L OM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L OM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN11L QG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN13L QM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L QMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

WDM Specificati on


2870


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN12L QMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L QMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L QMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12L SC

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

CFP

N

Y

TN11L SQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN11L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN13L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN14L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN11L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN12L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN15L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN11L SXLR

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN11L SXR

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP

N

N

TN11L TX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN12L SX

TN12L SXLR

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2871


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN11L WX2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

TN11L WXD

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

TN11L WXS

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

TN11T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN52N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN53N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN55N O2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN51N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN52N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN53N Q2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN54N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN12L WXS

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2872


Board Name

TN11N S2



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12N S201M0 2 TN12N S201M0 3 TN12N S2T02 TN12N S2T03 TN12N S2T04 TN12N S2T05 TN12N S2A TN12N S2B TN52N S2T05 TN52N S2T06 TN52N S201M0 1 TN52N S201M0 2 TN52N S2T02 TN52N S2T03 TN52N S2T04 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2873


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN53N S2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN11N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN55N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54P ND2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN11T BE

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P XFP

N

-

TN11T DG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN11T DX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN52T DX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN53T DX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN54T EM28

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P/ SFP +

N

N

TN52N S3

TN12T DX

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2874


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN54T HA

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN54T OA

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN11T OM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

Y

TN55T OX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

SFP +

Y

-

TN11T QM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN12T QM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN11T QS

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN11T QX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN52T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN53T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN55T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN54T SC

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

CFP

Y

-

TN11T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

-

TN53T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

-

TN52T OM

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2875


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

AL S Fun ctio n

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificati on

Opt ical Mo dul e



FEC

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FEC

DW DM

CW DM

TN54T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

CFP

N

-

TN54T TX

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

SFP +

Y

-

TN52T OG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

NOTE l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface. l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.

C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback. Table C-14 Loopback function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

ECOM

Y

Y

Y

N

N

LDGD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDGS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LOA

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2876



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

LOG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSC

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11LSXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWX2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TMX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

ND2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NO2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

PND2

N

N

Y

Y

N

NS3

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS4

N

N

Y

Y

Y

TDG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TDX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TEM28

Y

Y

N

N

N

THA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2877



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

TOA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

TOG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN11TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN52TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TOX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQM

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQS

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TSC

Y

Y

N

N

N

TSXL

Y

Y

N

N

N

TTX

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table C-15 Loop function of the Ethernet boards Board Name

Interface

Loop Mode

L4G

Client side

MAC inloop PHY outloop

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

TBE


MAC inloop MAC outloop PHY inloop PHY outloop


MAC inloop PHY inloop


MAC inloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2878


Board Name


Interface

Loop Mode





TEM28






PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC inloop


PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC inloop

LEM24











Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2879


Board Name


Interface

Loop Mode PHY outloop

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

LEX4




Inloop Outloop

EG16

FE/GE optical interface



MAC inloop PHY outloop

EX2



C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function. For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-16.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2880



Table C-16 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name

Protection Mode SW SNC P

VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P

Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction

IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion

OWS P Prote ction

OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n

Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion

DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

ECOM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

L4G

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LDGD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDGS

Y

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LEM24

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

LEX4

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

LOA

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LOG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LOM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LQG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQM

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMS

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

LSC

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSQ

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXL

N

N

N

Y

Ya

Yb

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2881



Board Name


VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

LWX2

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

TMX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

ND2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NO2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS3

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS4

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TBE

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TDG

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TDX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TEM28

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

THA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TOM

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TOX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TQM

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TQS

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TQX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TSC

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TSXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TTX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2882


Board Name



VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

NOTE a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection. b: TN54TSXL only supports client-side 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP protection. NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection. For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-17, Table C-18 and Table C-19. Table C-17 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection

LDM

N

LDMD

N

LDMS

N

LDX

N

LEM24

N

LEX4

N

LOA

N

LOG

N

LOM

N

LQM

N

LQMD

N

LQMS

N

LSC

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2883



Board Name


LSQ

N

LSX

N

LSXL

N

LSXLR

N

LSXR

N

LTX

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

ND2

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53ND2 supports ODUflex.

NO2

64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e

NQ2

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.

NS2

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 support ODUflex.

NS3

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3 NOTE Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 supports ODU3.

NS4

80 x ODU0/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4/80 x ODUflex

TDX

2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.

TEM28

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/8 x ODUflex

THA

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1

TOA

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/5 x ODUflex

TOM

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1

TOX

8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.

TOG

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

8 x ODU0


2884



Board Name


TSC

1 x ODU4

TSXL

1 x ODU3 NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports ODU3

TTX

10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e

"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table C-18 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

ECOM

1 x GE

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDM

N

N

LDMD

N

N

LDMS

N

N

LDX

N

N

LEM24

2 x 10GE

N

LEX4

2 x 10GE

N

LOA

N

N

LOG

8 x GE

8 x GE

LOM

N

N

LQG

4 x GE

4 x GE

LQM

4 x GE

4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1

LQMD

4 x GE


LQMS

4 x GE/1 x ODU1


LSC

N

N

LSQ

N

N

LSX

N

N

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2885


Board Name


Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

LSXL

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

LSXR

N

N

LTX

N

N

LWX2

N

N

LWXD

N

x

LWXS

N

N

TMX

N

N

ND2

8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

N

NQ2


N

NS2


4 x ODU1 NOTE It is supported by TN11NS2.

NS3

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TBE

16 x GE

N

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX


8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1/

TN11TOM

8 x GE/4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TN52TOM

4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any

TQM

4 x GE/1 x ODU1

4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1

TQS

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TSXL

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

NOTE Only the TN11TSXL supports ODU2/ ODU2e


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2886



Table C-19 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name


ECOM

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

LDM

N

LDMD

N

LDMS

N

LDX

N

LOA

N

LOG

8 x GE

LOM

N

LQG

4 x GE

LQM

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMD

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMS

4 x Any/4 x GE

LSX

N

LSXR

N

LWX2

N

LWXD

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

NS2

4 x ODU1

TBE

16 x GE

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX

8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

TOM

8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TQM

4 x Any/1 x ODU1

TQS

4 x ODU1

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2887



Board Name



C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of OCS Boards This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of OCS boards. Table C-20 lists the common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH boards. Table C-20 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH boards Board Name

SLQ16

SLO16

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Optical Module Type of Support ed Optical Interfac e

Mean Launched Optical Power Minimu m (dBm)

Maximu m (dBm)

I-16

-10

S-16.1

Type of Fiber

Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm)

Minimu m Overloa d (dBm)

-3

-18

-3

Singlemode LC

-5

0

-18

0

Singlemode LC

L-16.1

-2

3

-27

-9

Singlemode LC

L-16.2

-2

3

-28

-9

Singlemode LC

I-16

-10

-3

-18

-3

Singlemode LC

S-16.1

-5

0

-18

0

Singlemode LC

L-16.1

-2

3

-27

-9

Singlemode LC


2888


Board Name

SL64

SLD64

SLH41

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)




Maximu m (dBm)

L-16.2

-2

I-64.1

Type of Fiber



3

-28

-9

Singlemode LC

-6

-1

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

S-64.2b

-1

2

-14

-1

Singlemode LC

P1L1-2D 2

0

4

-24

-7

Singlemode LC

Le-64.2

2

4

-21

-8

Singlemode LC

V-64.2b (OBU10 1+ OBU101 + DCU + MR2)

-1 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

-1

Singlemode LC

I-64.1

-6

-1

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

S-64.2b

-1

2

-14

-1

Singlemode LC

S-1.1

-15

-8

-28

-8

Singlemode LC

S-4.1

-15

-8

-28

-8

Singlemode LC

16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

2889


Board Name

SF64

SF64A

SLQ64

SFD64




Maximu m (dBm)

Ue-64.2c

–1

Ue-64.2d

Type of Fiber



2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2e

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2c

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2d

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2e

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

I-64.1

-6

-1

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

S-64.2b

-1

2

–14

-1

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2c

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2d

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2e

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Table C-21 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2890



Table C-21 Common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards Board Name

Optical Module

N1EGSH

N3EAS2

Type of Supp orted Optic al Interf ace

Mean Launched Optical Power Minim um (dBm)

Maxim um (dBm)

1000B ase-LX (10km)

–9

1000B ase-SX (0.5km ) 10GB ASELR/ LW

Type of Fiber

Receiv er Sensiti vity (dBm)

Mini mum Overl oad (dBm)

–3

–20

–3

Singl emode LC

-9.5

–3.5

–18

0

Singl emode LC

-8.2

0.5

-12.6

-12.6

Singl emode LC

C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. Table C-22 lists the functions supported by SDH boards. Table C-22 Basic functions supported by SDH boards

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Fun ctio n

ALS

RE G Spe cific atio ns

PRB S

AU3

TC M

FEC

Enh anc ed FEC

IEE E 1588 v2

Fixe d Wa vele ngt h

Col ore d Wa vele ngt h

Tun able Wa vele ngt h

N4S L64

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N4S F64

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N1S F64 A

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y


2891



Fun ctio n

ALS

RE G Spe cific atio ns

PRB S

AU3

TC M

FEC

Enh anc ed FEC

IEE E 1588 v2

Fixe d Wa vele ngt h

Col ore d Wa vele ngt h

Tun able Wa vele ngt h

N4S FD6 4

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N4S LD6 4

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N4S LQ6 4

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N4S LQ1 6

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N4S LO1 6

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N3S LH4 1

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

Table C-23 lists the functions supported by Ethernet boards. Table C-23 Basic functions supported by Ethernet boards

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Fu nc tio n

EP L

E V PL

EP L A N

E V PL A N

M PL S

L A G

D L A G

Q oS

ET HO A M (8 02. 1a g)

ET HO A M (80 2.3 ah )

Te st Fr a m e

Qi n Q

R M O N

IG M P Sn oo pi ng

IE EE 15 88 v2

N1 E GS H

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2892



Fu nc tio n

EP L

E V PL

EP L A N

E V PL A N

M PL S

L A G

D L A G

Q oS

ET HO A M (8 02. 1a g)

ET HO A M (80 2.3 ah )

Te st Fr a m e

Qi n Q

R M O N

IG M P Sn oo pi ng

IE EE 15 88 v2

N3 E AS 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards The SDH boards and Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560 support various types of loopbacks. Table C-24 lists the loopback capabilities of the SDH boards on the OptiX OSN 9560. Table C-24 Loopback capabilities of the SDH boards Board

Port Inloop

Port Outloop

VC-4 Inloop

VC-4 Outloop

VC-3/VC-12 Outloop

N4SL64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SF64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N1SF64A

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SFD64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLD64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLQ64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLQ16

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLO16

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N3SLH41

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Table C-25 provides the loopback capabilities of the Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2893



Table C-25 Loopback capabilities of Ethernet boards

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Board

MAClayer Outloo p

MAClayer Outloo p

PHYlayer Outloo p

PHYlayer Inloop

VC-4 Inloop/ Outloop

VC-3 Inloop/ Outloop

N1EGSH

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N3EAS2

N

Y

N

Y

N

N


2894


D Parameter Reference

D

Parameter Reference

D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) D.16 Line Rate D.17 MAC Loopback D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) D.21 Maximum Frame Length D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2895



D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) D.25 PHY Loopback D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2896



D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in auto-negotiation mode.

Impact on the System Auto-negotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Disabled

Disabled

TN11LEX4

l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control

TN54TEM28

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control l Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow

The following table lists the description of each value. Value

Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends. (None)

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control

Enables dissymmetric flow control. (Asymmetric > Link Partner)

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enables symmetric flow control. (Symmetric)

Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow

Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control, which is determined in the autonegotiation process. (Asymmetric->Local Device)

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly based on actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Autonegotiation mode. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2897



D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) Description Board Mode: Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.

Impact on the System The board mode determines how a signal is transmitted inside the board, what functions the board provides, and how the board works. Therefore, switching between different board modes interrupts the running services on the board.

Values The following table provides the parameter values of the ECOM board. Value Range

Default Value

Service Mode, HUB Mode

HUB Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the ECOM board. Parameter Value

Description

Service Mode

In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE services into one GE service.

HUB Mode

In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE services into one FE service.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board. Value Range

Default Value

NS1 Mode, LQM Mode

LQM Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Parameter Value

Description

NS1 Mode

In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as a line board and adds/drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with a tributary board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2898



Parameter Value

Description

LQM Mode

In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as an OTU board and can aggregate four Any-rate signals into one OTU1 signal.

NOTE

The NS1 Mode value is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is deployed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11TOM board. Value Range

Default Value

Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode

Non-cascading Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11TOM board. Parameter Value

Description

Cascading Mode

In this mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 port pairs on the board can be used as WDM side optical port pairs. The board can multiplex up to six Any-rate signals into one OTU1 signal.

Non-cascading Mode

In this mode, the RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 port pairs on the board can be used as WDM-side optical port pairs. The board can multiplex up to four Any-rate signals into two OTU1 signals.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/ TN12LSXLR board. Value Range

Default Value


Electrical Relay Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/ TN12LSXLR board.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Parameter Value

Description


When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line


2899



Parameter Value

Description

Optical Relay Mode

board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN55NO2/ TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN54NS4 board. Value Range

Default Value


Line Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN55NO2/ TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN54NS4 board. Parameter Value

Description

Line Mode

The board serves as a line board.


The board serves as a regeneration unit. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.

Optical Relay Mode

Configuration Guidelines Set the board mode depending on the actual service application scenario.

Relationship with Other Parameters None.

D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Description The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2900



Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values Value Range

Default Value

10%-100%

30%

Configuration Guidelines

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value

Description

10%

Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 10% of the bandwidth of a port.

20%


30%


40%


50%


60%


70%


80%


90%



2901



Value

Description

100%


Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled.

D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. The value can be set. Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling service-affecting settings is invalid for the port.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Used, Unused

Used


Description

Used

Indicates that the current channel is used.

Unused

Indicates that the current channel is not used.

Configuration Guidelines l

This parameter is set to Used by default.

l

Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2902



D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) Description The Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. This parameter applies to the client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

The specific value range is related to the board.

The specific value is related to the board.

Mbit/s

Configuration Guidelines The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any/CBR_10G. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.


D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Description The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2903



Values Value Range

Default Value

Disabled, Enabled

Disabled


Description

Enabled

Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets is not limited.

Disabled

Indicates that excess broadcast packets will be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Relationship with Other Parameters Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.

D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) Description The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.

Impact on the System None.

Values Value Range

Default Value


Vary with different boards


This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service.

l

The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2904


l


If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.


D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) Description A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. The FC Distance Extension parameter indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled.


Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

-

The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value

Remarks

Enabled

Indicates the FC distance extension function is enabled.

Disabled

Indicates the FC distance extension function is disabled.

Configuration Guidelines If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to Enabled.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2905



D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Impact on the System Different FEC modes have different capabilities of enhancing the SNR of the optical signal at the receive end and support different extended distances of the repeater section.

Values Value Range

Default Value

FEC, AFEC, HFEC, SDFEC


The following table lists the description of each value.

Configuration Guidelines FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value. In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is recommended.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, this parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).

D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) Description FEC Working State: Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface.

Impact on the System Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2906



Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Varies according to boards.

The following table describes the parameter values. Value

Description

Enabled

Indicates that the FEC function has been enabled for the board optical interface.

Disabled

Indicates that the FEC function has been disabled for the board optical interface

Configuration Guidelines The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) Description The Zero-Flow Monitor parameter specifies whether the traffic on a port is monitored.

Impact on the System After the zero traffic monitoring function is enabled, the port can report the zero traffic alarm after the state of zero traffic lasts for a certain period. Hence, the user can check whether the service is interrupted due to the fault on the equipment side.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled

The following table provides the description of each value.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value

Description

Enabled

The zero traffic monitoring function is enabled on the port.

Disabled

The zero traffic monitoring function is disabled on the port.


2907



Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Set this parameter to Enabled if the traffic on a port needs to be monitored.

D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) Description The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of an optical amplifier board. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum value or larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

Impact on the System Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power of each wavelength on the line.

Values Value Range

Default Value

5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable)

None.

Configuration Guidelines Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23 dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.

Relationship with Other Parameters Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set within a range between Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical power value is beyond the range, the board might work abnormally.

D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm).


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2908



Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

20.0-40.0

None

dB

Configuration Guidelines None.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter, however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal gain of the board.

D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. The value can be set.

Impact on the System During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between the primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, SF switching occurs. The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power variance and affects the service switching.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

-10.0 to 10.0

0

dB

Configuration Guidelines After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula: Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2909



Relationship with Other Parameters l

The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows:

l

Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter, the protection switching occurs.

D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

Impact on the System This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.

Values For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range

Default Value

On, Off

For OTU boards: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off For amplifier board: On


Description

On

Indicates enabling the laser.

Off

Indicates disabling the laser.


Optical wavelength conversion unit – The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should be opened.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2910



When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter to Off to protect the downstream boards. – In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required. l

Optical amplifier board – In the case of the Raman board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the laser is disabled. NOTE

After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On. NOTE

In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted. NOTE

The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.

Relationship with Other Parameters To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.

D.16 Line Rate Description The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.

Impact on the System If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services are unavailable.

Values Value Range

Default Value




Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value

Description

Speedup Mode

Corresponds to OTU2e or OTU3e for the WDM side.

Standard Mode

Corresponds to OTU2 or OTU3 for the WDM side.


2911




This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical signal rate on the network.

l

When the WDM-side signal is OTU2e or OTU3e, or when the client-side signal is 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) for the client-side port, set this parameter to Speedup Mode. In any other cases, set this parameter to Standard Mode.

l

This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends.

l

The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be the same.

l

In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode), TN53ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), TN53NQ2(Relay Mode), TN54NS3 (Relay Mode), TN55NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required.

Configuration examples: l

Example 1: As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board. – When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. – In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-1 Example 1 M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

12LSX

l

M U X

52ND2 D M U X

D M U X

12LSX

M U X

Example 2: As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2 (2) works as a regeneration board. – When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. – In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2912



Figure D-2 Example 2 M U X

52TDX

l

52ND2 (1)

D M U X

D M U X M U X

M U X

52ND2 (2)

D M U X

D M U X M U X

52ND2 (3)

52TDX

Example 3: As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3 (2) works as a regeneration board. – When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode. – In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode.

Figure D-3 Example 3 M U X

52TQX

54NS3 (1)

D M U X

D M U X M U X

M U X

54NS3 (2)

D M U X

D M U X M U X

54NS3 (3)

52TQX

Relationship with Other Parameters l

LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Enabled.

l

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), TN53NQ2 (Relay Mode), TN54NS3(Relay Mode), TN55NS3(Relay Mode): This parameter can be set only when Board Mode is set to Relay Mode and Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled.

D.17 MAC Loopback Description The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Impact on the System A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2913



Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24


Non-Loopback

TN11LEX4 TN54TEM28


Description

Non-Loopback

Indicates that no loopback is configured.

Inloop

Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

Outloop



For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC loopback can be set to only inloop.

l

For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l

By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) Description The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2914



Values Value Range

Default Value

5 dBm-30 dBm

l ROP: 28 dBm l CRPC: 26 dBm


Relationship with Other Parameters If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.

D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) Description The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.


Values Value Range

Default Value

5 dBm-30 dBm

20 dBm


Relationship with Other Parameters If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2915



D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l

A board may transparently transmit FE, GE, or 10GE services by encapsulating them in GFP-T format. when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted.

l

In case of transmission of GE or 10GE services in the GFP-F format, when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded.


Default Value

1518-9600

9600


Relationship with Other Parameters When Service Type is GE or Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded. When Service Type is GE(GFP-T) or Port Mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted.

D.21 Maximum Frame Length Description Maximum Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU). Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2916



Impact on the System This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

TN11LEM24

1518-9600

1522

Byte

TN11LEX4 TN54TEM28

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter based on the actual service configurations. It is recommended to set this parameter to a value that is equal to or greater than the maximum length of a frame that users want to transmit.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the Enabled/Disabled parameter is set to Enabled.

D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.

Impact on the System Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through the amplifier board.

Values l

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800


2917



Value Range

Default Value

HBA: 29dB

The specific value is related to the module.

OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU102: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU103: 24dB to 36dB, continuously tunable OAU105: 23dB to 34dB, continuously tunable OBU101: 20dB OBU103: 23dB OBU104: 17dB OBU205: 23dB RAU1: l G.652 fibers: 19dB to 33dB l LEAF fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.653 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWRS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TW-C fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWPLUS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l SMFLS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.656 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654A fibers: 19dB to 33dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654B fibers: 19dB to 29dB RAU2: l G.652 fibers: 30dB to 41dB l LEAF fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.653 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWRS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TW-C fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWPLUS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l SMFLS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.656 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654A fibers: 30dB to 41dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654B fibers: 27dB to 37dB TD20: 23dB

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2918




Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.

l

The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links. The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed.

l

Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power.

l

If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain according to the intermediate insertion loss.

Relationship with Other Parameters The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level. In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of an increase in total gain. This is normal. In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters.

D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Impact on the System Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2919



Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24


Disable

TN11LEX4 TN54TEM28


Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.

Send Only

Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Receive Only

Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.

D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) Description The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2920




Default Value

Unit

Min. Attenuation Ratio Max. Attenuation Ratio

Max. Attenuation Ratio

dB


Optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit – Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset.

l

Other board – The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. – It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. – During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.

Relationship with Other Parameters You can obtain the value range of this parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

D.25 PHY Loopback Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Impact on the System A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.

Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

Non-Loopback, Inloop

Non-Loopback

TN11LEX4 TN54TEM28

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2921




Description

Non-Loopback

Indicates that no loopback is configured.

Inloop



For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l

By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

Impact on the System The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.

Values Value Range

Default Value

C, CWDM

-


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value

Description

C

Indicates that the current working band is C band. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2922



Value

Description

CWDM

Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.



D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) Description The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

Impact on the System If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received.

Values C band Value Range

Default Value

Unit

192.10 to 1196.05 (wavelength spacing: 50 GHz)

-

THz

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

1271 to 1611(wavelength spacing: 20 nm)

-

nm

CWDM band

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2923




In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the wavelength conversion board.

l

In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network wavelength planning.

l

The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.

l

If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these regeneration sections use the same wavelength.

l

It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured.

l

The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.

l

In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical wavelength but cannot change the band.

l

In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical wavelength only.

l

For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table D-1 lists the wavelengths available for the CWDM system. Table D-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system Wavelengt h No.

Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

11

1471

15

1551

12

1491

16

1571

13

1511

17

1591

14

1531

18

1611


D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.


Values For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2924



Value Range

Default Value

Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)



Description

Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)

10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2e signals by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This mapping method guarantees a desired FEC coding gain and correction capability. However, this method generates a line rate of 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than the standard rate of OTU2 signals.

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)

10GE LAN client signals are encapsulated using the GFP-F method and are mapped into OTU2 signals using 10GE MAC frames. This mapping method guarantees a desired FEC coding gain and correction capability and generates a line rate of 10.71 Gbit/s.

Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)

10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2 signals using certain FEC fields of standard OTU frames. In this mapping method, some FEC fields are used to transmit signals. Therefore, the FEC or AFEC coding gain of the signals and FEC correction capability are somewhat reduced. This method generates a line rate of 10.71 Gbit/s.

Configuration Guidelines For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l

Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode.

l

"Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the 10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field. In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

l

"MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2925



to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services. l

The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

Relationship with Other Parameters For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l

Relationship with the Line Rate parameter: – Set the parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). – Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G).

l

Relationship with the FEC Mode parameter: – When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode automatically changes to AFEC. NOTE

Users can also manually set the FEC Mode parameter based on the actual network requirements.

– When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode remains unchanged.

D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value

Description

Enabled

Indicates enabling the PRBS test. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2926



Value

Description

Disabled

Indicates disabling the PRBS test.

Configuration Guidelines The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.

Relationship with Other Parameters Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.

D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) Description The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried.

Impact on the System When the automatic adjustment of the optical power is enabled, this parameter affects the budget of the optical power on the optical channel of the system.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

-30.0-30.0

The specific value is related to the board

dBm


The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally.

Relationship with Other Parameters None. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2927



D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the board resides to Enabled. When the board receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the received alarms of the board as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a result, switching occurs in the protection group.


Default Value

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None

None

The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value

Remarks

B1_SD

Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade.

OTUk_DEG

OTUk signal degrade.

ODUk_PM_DEG

ODUk_PM signal degrade.

None

No condition is configured for SD switching.

Configuration Guidelines When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD alarm according to the actual service type. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2928




D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) Description Service Mode: Specifies the service mode for a board.


Values For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: Value Range

Default Value

OTN, SDH

OTN

For the ND2, NQ2, and NS2 boards: Value Range

Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic

Automatic

For the NS3 board: Value Range

Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic

Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA, TTX and TQM boards:

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

Value Range

Default Value


Client Mode


2929




For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: Set the line-side service modes of the local and remote boards to the same value. When the local board is connected to an SDH service board on non-WDM equipment, set the line-side service mode to SDH.

l

For the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA, TTX and TQM boards: When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode.


D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. The alarm can be queried.

Impact on the System This parameter is used to determine whether the input optical power is lost for the protection board, optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit. If the optical power is lost, the relevant alarm is reported. This facilitates fault diagnosis. When the optical amplifier boards work in the gain locking mode, this parameter triggers the boards to report the MUT_LOS alarm if the optical power is lost.

Values Optical protection unit Value Range

Default Value

Unit

-35.0 to -10.0

-

dBm

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

-46.0 to -23.0

-

dBm

Optical supervisory channel unit

For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be queried through the system. Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2930




Protection board – The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB. – In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range according to the actual situation.


D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. The value can be set or queried.

Impact on the System l

In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800, this parameter functions as the SF switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU + OLP/ DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.

l

During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, the SF switching occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in the channels with better signals.

l

If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified, the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

0, 3.0 - 8.0

5

dB


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

When the parameter value is 0, only LOS alarms are used as switching trigger conditions. The input power difference between the working and protection channels does not trigger a switching event. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2931



l

It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB.

l

In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation.

l

When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SF occurs.


Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2932


E Glossary

E

Glossary

Numerics 1+1 backup

A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to ensure that the system service is not interrupted.

1000BASE-T

An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed as 1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.

3R

reshaping, retiming, regenerating

A AC

alternating current

ACL

See access control list.

ADM

add/drop multiplexer

ADSL

See asymmetric digital subscriber line.

AGC

automatic gain control

AIS

alarm indication signal

ALC link

A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfills optical power control on the line that contains the link.

ALS

See automatic laser shutdown.

ANSI

See American National Standards Institute.

APE

See automatic power equilibrium.

APS

automatic protection switching

ASE

amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC

See application-specific integrated circuit.

ATM

asynchronous transfer mode

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2933


E Glossary

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.

access control list (ACL)

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a resource.

access layer

A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs.

active/standby switchover

A troubleshooting technology. When an active device becomes faulty, services and control functions are automatically switched over to the standby device to ensure the normal running of the services and functions.

alarm cable

A cable used to transmit visual or audio alarms.

alarm cascading

The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.

alarm output

Node or other signals that are sent by an alarm controller to peripheral devices when an alarm is reported.

alarm suppression

A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.

application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC)

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs.

asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone subscriber line (ADSL) lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s. attenuation

Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.

attenuator

A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

automatic laser shutdown (ALS)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic power equilibrium (APE)

A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end, ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.

B B/S

browser/server

BBER

background block error ratio

BC

boundary clock

BDI

See backward defect indication.

BGP

Border Gateway Protocol

BIOS

See basic input/output system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2934


E Glossary

BIP

See bit interleaved parity.

BIP-8

See bit interleaved parity-8.

BITS

See building integrated timing supply.

BOM

bill of materials

BPDU

See bridge protocol data unit.

BPSK

See binary phase shift keying.

BRAS

See broadband remote access server.

BWS

backbone wavelength division multiplexing system

backbone network

A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment, or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the networks connected to it.

backplane

An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.

backward defect indication (BDI)

A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth

A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

basic input/output system (BIOS)

Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

binary phase shift keying (BPSK)

2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation mode, the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1 represents the phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1 needs to be specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to represent digital information.

bit

The smallest unit of information handled by a hardware component. One bit expresses a 1 or a 0 in a binary numeral, or a true or a false logical condition, and is represented physically by an element such as a high or low voltage at one point in a circuit or a small spot on a disk magnetized one way or the other. A single bit conveys little information a human would consider meaningful. A group of eight bits, however, makes up a byte, which can be used to represent many types of information, such as a letter of the alphabet, a decimal digit, or other character.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2935


bit interleaved parity (BIP)

E Glossary

A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.

bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte) (BIP-8) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. bit/s

See bits per second.

bits per second (bit/s)

A rate at which the individual bits are transmitted through a communication link or circuit. Its unit can be bit/s, kbit/s, and Mbit/s.

bridge

A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses.

bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)

Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadband remote access server (BRAS)

A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.

broadcast

A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.

broadcast address

A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host.

building integrated timing supply (BITS)

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

bus

A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an electrical connection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are connected to a bus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.

byte

A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.

C Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2936


E Glossary

CAR

committed access rate

CBR

See constant bit rate.

CE

See customer edge.

CES

See circuit emulation service.

CPRI

See common public radio interface.

CPU

See central processing unit.

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check.

CSF

Client Signal Fail

CSMA/CD

See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.

CV

connectivity verification

CWDM

See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.

cabinet

Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be removable.

carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)

Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer networking access method in which: l

A carrier sensing scheme is used.

l

A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute (CPU) instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. chain network

One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.

circuit emulation service (CES)

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.

client trail

A lower level trail in a structure where trails of different levels have an inclusion relation. For example, a trail of a certain level contains multiple trails of lower levels.

clock source

A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration.

clock synchronization

A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known as frequency synchronization).

clock tracing

The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the network.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2937


E Glossary

coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

collection

A process of prompting a customer to pay outstanding bills.

common public radio interface (CPRI)

A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC, Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.

configuration data

A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key factor that determines the operation of an entire network.

connection point

A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

consistency check

A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data between two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the consistency of service data and resource data between the softswitches.

constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. control VLAN

A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.

convergence layer

A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.

cross-connection

The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections of NEs.

customer edge (CE)

A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D DAPI

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

destination access point identifier


2938


E Glossary

DBPS

distributed board protect system

DC

direct current

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground).

DC-I

See DC-return isolate (with ground).

DC-return common (with ground) (DC-C)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC

See data communications channel.

DCM

See dispersion compensation module.

DCN

See data communication network.

DGD

differential group delay

DLAG

See distributed link aggregation group.

DRDB

dynamic random database

DRZ

differential phase return to zero

DSLAM

See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.

DSP

See digital signal processor.

DVB-ASI

digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface

DWDM

See dense wavelength division multiplexing.

data communication network (DCN)

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data communication function.

data communications channel (DCC)

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

digital signal processor A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real (DSP) time. digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM)

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.

discrete service

The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the network management system.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2939


E Glossary

dispersion compensation module (DCM)

A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of the transmitting fiber.

distributed link aggregation group (DLAG)

A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.

dual feed and selective A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The receiving monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the overhead of the service signal. dual-ended switching

A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity, such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.

E E-LAN

See Ethernet local area network.

E-Line

See Ethernet line.

E1

An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32 timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization, and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.

ECC

See embedded control channel.

EDFA

See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

EEPROM

See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.

EMI

See electromagnetic interference.

EPL

See Ethernet private line.

EPLAN

See Ethernet private LAN service.

EPLD

See erasable programmable logical device.

EPON

See Ethernet passive optical network.

ERPS

Ethernet ring protection switching

ES

edge server

ESC

See electric supervisory channel.

ESCON

See enterprise system connection.

ESD

electrostatic discharge

ESN

See equipment serial number.

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

EVOA

electrical variable optical attenuator

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2940


E Glossary

EVPL

See Ethernet virtual private line.

EVPLAN

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.

EXP

See experimental bits.

Ethernet

A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.

Ethernet line (E-Line)

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet passive optical network (EPON)

A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.

Ethernet private LAN service (EPLAN)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-tomultipoint connections.

Ethernet private line (EPL)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point connections.

Ethernet virtual private LAN service (EVPLAN)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-tomultipoint connections.

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point connections.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

eDQPSK

enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

eSFP

enhanced small form-factor pluggable

egress

The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled.

electric supervisory channel (ESC)

A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable programable read-only storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs memory (EEPROM) contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2941


E Glossary

electromagnetic interference (EMI)

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

embedded control channel (ECC)

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.

encapsulation

A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.

encryption

A function used to transform data so as to hide its information content to prevent it's unauthorized use.

enterprise system connection (ESCON)

A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system. Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a rate of 200 Mbit/s.

equalization

A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

equipment serial number (ESN)

A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".

erasable programmable logical device (EPLD)

A logical array device which can be used to implement the required functions by programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly until the program meets the requirement.

erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

experimental bits (EXP)

A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.

extended ID

The number of the subnet to which an NE belongs, used to identify different network segments in a wide area network (WAN). Together, the ID and extended ID form the physical ID of the NE.

eye pattern

An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.

F FC

See fiber channel.

FCS

free cooling system

FDB

See forwarding database.

FDDI

See fiber distributed data interface.

FE

fast Ethernet

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2942


E Glossary

FEC

See forward error correction.

FICON

See Fiber Connect.

FOADM

fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FPGA

See field programmable gate array.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

Fiber Connect (FICON)

A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.

fault alarm

A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure, or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms.

fiber channel (FC)

A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.

fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits per second on token ring networks.

field programmable gate array (FPGA)

A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.

forced switching

The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.

forward error correction (FEC)

A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission can be corrected at the receive end.

forwarding database (FDB)

A type of database that Includes entries for guiding multicast data forwarding. There are Layer 2 FDB and Layer 3 FDB. The Layer 2 FDB refers to the MAC table, which provides information about the MAC address and outbound interface and guides Layer 2 forwarding. The Layer 3 FDB refers to the ARP table, which provides information about the IP address and outbound interface and guides Layer 3 forwarding.

G GCC

general communication channel

GE

Gigabit Ethernet

GFP

See Generic Framing Procedure.

GMP

Group Map Protocol

GMPLS

generalized multiprotocol label switching

GNE

See gateway network element.

GPON

gigabit-capable passive optical network

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2943


E Glossary

GPS

See Global Positioning System.

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined by ITU-T G.7041.

Global Positioning System (GPS)

A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to users worldwide.

gain

The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.

gateway

A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments.

gateway network element (GNE)

An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network management system.

H HD-SDI

high definition serial digital interface

HSDPA

See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.

High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.

handle

A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards in and out of slots.

hardware loopback

A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface of a board to the output optical interface of the board to achieve signal loopback.

hop

A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot patch

A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.

I IANA

See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.

IC

See integrated circuit.

ICMP

See Internet Control Message Protocol.

ID

See identity.

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IETF

Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP

See Internet Group Management Protocol.

IMA

See inverse multiplexing over ATM.

IP

Internet Protocol

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2944


E Glossary

IP address

A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself.

IP subnet

A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the submap icon in the topological view.

IPA

See intelligent power adjustment.

IPv4

See Internet Protocol version 4.

IPv6

See Internet Protocol version 6.

IS-IS

See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.

ISDN

integrated services digital network

ISO

International Organization for Standardization

ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important technology standards.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network. (IS-IS) Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)

A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a host server and an Internet gateway.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)

The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork.

Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)

An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

identity (ID)

The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2945


E Glossary

indicator

Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the performance collector.

integrated circuit (IC)

A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

intelligent power adjustment (IPA)

A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.

intersecting ring

More than two public nodes between two ring networks. The network is more complex if there are many intersecting nodes. Most devices support that two rings are intersected at two nodes.

inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA)

A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.

J jitter

The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

jumper

A connection wire for connecting two pins.

L L2 switching

The switching based on the data link layer.

L2VPN

Layer 2 virtual private network

L3VPN

Layer 3 virtual private network

LACP

See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.

LAG

See link aggregation group.

LAN

See local area network.

LAPD

link access procedure on the D channel

LB

See loopback.

LC

Lucent connector

LCAS

See link capacity adjustment scheme.

LCT

local craft terminal

LDP

Label Distribution Protocol

LED

See light emitting diode.

LMP

link management protocol

LOS

See loss of signal.

LP

logical port

LPT

link-state pass through

LSP

See label switched path.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2946


E Glossary

LSR

See label switching router.

LTC

loss of tandem connection

Layer 2 switching

A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2 switching.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed, LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.

label

A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.

label switched path (LSP)

A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration.

label switching router (LSR)

Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

light emitting diode (LED)

A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights, and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice, and laser printers.

line rate

The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

linear MSP

linear multiplex section protection

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link (LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.

link group

According to some principles, links are divided into the set in the logical term. A set of links is called the link group. The division makes management more convenient.

link protection

Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.

link status

The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2947


E Glossary

loading

A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is program).

local area network (LAN)

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

loopback (LB)

A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.

loopback test

Self-test of chips, including internal and external loopback. Loopback test is used to test whether interfaces work normally.

loss of signal (LOS)

No transitions occurring in the received signal.

M MAC

mandatory access control

MAC address

A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.

MADM

multiple add/drop multiplexer

MCA

multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit

MD5

See message digest algorithm 5.

MFAS

See multiframe alignment signal.

MIP

maintenance association intermediate point

MPLS

See Multiprotocol Label Switching.

MPLS TE

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

MPLS VPN

See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.

MPLS-TP

See multiprotocol label switching transport profile.

MS

multiplex section

MSOH

multiplex section overhead

MSP

See multiplex section protection.

MSTP

See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.

MTU

See maximum transmission unit.

MUX

See multiplexer.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/ RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2948


E Glossary

main topology

A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall network running status.

management node

A management node consists of multiple document security management(DSM) servers (four at most) in an area. Management nodes are created so that the DSM management center can synchronize the department and account information of areas from each node and then deliver all information to all nodes, thus realizing across-system authorization and roaming access of security documents.

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit (MTU) depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. member

A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical member of the time dimension.

mesh group

A group comprised of multiple MSDP peers, helping reducing the number of SA messages transmitted between these MSDP peers.

message digest algorithm 5 (MD5)

A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128 bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.

monitoring

A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent, an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the service agent to provide better service.

mounting ear

A piece of angle plate on a rack. The mounting ear has holes that can be used to fix network elements or components.

multicast

A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.

multiframe alignment signal (MFAS)

A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.

multiplex section protection (MSP)

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

multiplexer (MUX)

Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2949


E Glossary

multiplexing

A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP)

An extension to MPLS in terms of forwarding, OAM, reliability, NMS and control plane protocol standardized by IETF to provide sufficient transport functionality.

multiprotocol label switching virtual private network (MPLS VPN)

An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.

N NE Explorer

The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and maintain NEs, boards, and ports.

NE ID

An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID.

NE Panel

A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NNI

network node interface

NRZ

non-return to zero

NSAP

See network service access point.

NTP

Network Time Protocol

network layer

Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/ IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.

network segment

Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.

network service

A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.

network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available point (NSAP) to a Network service user by the Network service provider. network storm

A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network connection or configuration problems.

O O&M

operation and maintenance

OA

optical amplifier

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2950


E Glossary

OADM

See optical add/drop multiplexer.

OAM

See operation, administration and maintenance.

OAMS

Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System

OAU

See optical amplifier unit.

OC

ordinary clock

OC-3

optical carrier level 3

OCP

optical channel protection

OCS

optical core switching

OD

optical demultiplexing

ODB

optical duobinary

ODF

optical distribution frame

ODUk

optical channel data unit - k

OEQ

optical equalizer

OLA

optical line amplifier

OLP

See optical line protection.

OM

optical multiplexing

OMS

optical multiplexing section

ONT

See optical network terminal.

ONU

See optical network unit.

OPA

optical power adjust

OPU

See optical channel payload unit.

OPUk

optical channel payload unit - k

OSC

See optical supervisory channel.

OSI

open systems interconnection

OSN

optical switch node

OSNR

See optical signal-to-noise ratio.

OSPF

See Open Shortest Path First.

OTM

optical terminal multiplexer

OTN

optical transport network

OTS

See optical transmission section.

OTU

See optical transponder unit.

OTUk

optical channel transport unit - k

OWSP

optical wavelength shared protection

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology, which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2951


E Glossary

operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)

A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location, and repair.

optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical amplifier unit (OAU)

A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.

optical channel payload A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for multiple unit (OPU) services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and lowering costs. optical interface

A component that connects several transmit or receive units.

optical line protection (OLP)

A mechanism that protects line signals using the dual feeding and selective receiving principle, featuring single-ended switching.

optical network terminal (ONT)

A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.

optical network unit (ONU)

A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers.

optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.

optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain channel.

optical switch

A passive component possessing two or more ports that selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.

optical transmission section (OTS)

A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponder unit (OTU)

A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength.

orderwire

A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

P P2MP

point-to-multipoint

P2P

See point-to-point service.

PC

personal computer

PCB

See printed circuit board.

PDH

See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.

PDL

See polarization-dependent loss.

PDU

See power distribution unit.

PE

See provider edge.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2952


E Glossary

PGND cable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.

PHB

See per-hop behavior.

PID

photonics integrated device

PIN

See personal identification number.

PM

performance monitoring

PMD

polarization mode dispersion

PMU

power monitoring unit

POS

See packet over SDH/SONET.

POTS

See plain old telephone service.

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS

See pseudo random binary sequence.

PSI

payload structure identifier

PSN

See packet switched network.

PT

payload type

PTN

packet transport network

PTP

Precision Time Protocol

PTP clock

See Precision Time Protocol clock.

PVC

permanent virtual channel

PW

See pseudo wire.

PWE3

See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.

Precision Time Protocol clock (PTP clock)

A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.

packet loss

The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot accept any incoming data at a given moment.

packet over SDH/ SONET (POS)

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switched network (PSN)

A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.

packet switching

A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.

paired slots

Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane.

per-hop behavior (PHB)

IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2953


E Glossary

personal identification A code used by a mobile user in conjunction with a SIM card to complete a call. number (PIN) phase

The relative position in time within a single period of a signal.

physical layer

Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking.

physical link

The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted.

plain old telephone service (POTS)

The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted pair cables.

plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.

point-to-point service (P2P)

A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users.

polarization-dependent A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component loss (PDL) when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB. policy

A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met.

port priority

The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.

power box

A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.

power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution. (PDU) power module

The module that converts the external power input into the power supply for internal use. Power modules are classified into AC power modules and DC power modules.

power on

To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power

printed circuit board (PCB)

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

private line

A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.

protection path

A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working path.

protection service

A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

provider edge (PE)

A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of sequence (PRBS) the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2954


pseudo wire (PW)

E Glossary

An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. pulse

A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.

Q QinQ

A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs.

QoS

See quality of service.

quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users. R RADIUS

See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.

RADIUS authentication

An authentication mode in which the BRAS sends the user name and the password to the RADIUS server by using the RADIUS protocol. The RADIUS server authenticates the user, and then returns the result to the BRAS.

RB

See radio bearer.

RDI

remote defect indication

RFC

See Request For Comments.

RJ

registered jack

RMON

See remote monitor.

ROADM

reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

RSTP

See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

RSVP

See Resource Reservation Protocol.

RTN

radio transmission node

RX

receive

RZ

return to zero

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2955


E Glossary

Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized Dial In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its (RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the (RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC. Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an integrated services Internet.

radio bearer (RB)

The service provided by the Layer 2 for the transfer of user data between UE (User Equipment) and UTRAN (UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network).

reboot

To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.

receiver sensitivity

The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is enabled.

regeneration

The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

remote monitor (RMON)

A widely used network management standard defined by the IETF, and it enhances the MIB II standard greatly. It is mainly used to monitor the data traffic over a network segment or the entire network. RMON is completely based on the SNMP architecture, including the NMS and the Agent running on each network device.

report

A tool that displays data in a specific format to intuitively present service information.

resistance

The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators.

response

A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the request packet.

ring network

A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.

router

A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.

routing

The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from source to destination.

routing table

A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2956


rule

E Glossary

Rules define automatic management services or applications. Rules include triggering conditions and execution logic. Triggering conditions refer to the conditions for executing a rule and execution logic refers to a set of actions executed based on the rule.

S S-VLAN

service virtual local area network

SAN

storage area network

SAPI

source access point identifier

SD

See signal degrade.

SD-SDI

See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.

SDH

See synchronous digital hierarchy.

SDI

See serial digital interface.

SES

severely errored second

SESR

severely errored second ratio

SETS

SDH equipment timing source

SF

See signal fail.

SFP

small form-factor pluggable

SFTP

See Secure File Transfer Protocol.

SHDSL

See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.

SLA

See service level agreement.

SLM

signaling link management

SM

section monitoring

SMF

See single-mode fiber.

SNC

subnetwork connection

SNCP

subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP

subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol.

SONET

See synchronous optical network.

SPC

soft permanent connection

SRG

See shared risk group.

SRLG

shared risk link group

SSL

See Secure Sockets Layer.

SSM

See Synchronization Status Message.

STI

service trigger information

STM

synchronous transfer mode

STM-1

See Synchronous Transport Module level 1.

STM-16

Synchronous Transport Module level 16

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2957


E Glossary

STM-4

Synchronous Transport Module level 4

STM-N

Synchronous Transport Module level N

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

STS

synchronous transport signal

Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or Message (SSM) synchronization network. Synchronous Synchronous transfer mode at 155 Mbit/s. Transport Module level 1 (STM-1) security

Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.

serial digital interface (SDI)

An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.

serial port

An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers.

service data

The user and/or network information required for the normal functioning of services.

service level

The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by an evaluating party.

service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the (SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. service protection

A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.

shared risk group (SRG)

A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the failure of all the resources in the group.

signal degrade (SD)

A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active.

signal fail (SF)

A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2958


E Glossary

single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.

single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)

A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service.

smooth upgrade

Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption

span

The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.

standard definitionserial digital interface signal (SD-SDI)

Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.

static route

A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators.

steady on

Pertaining to a state in which an indicator light is always illuminated and no flicker.

subnet

A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.

subnet mask

The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched with the IP address.

synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN.

synchronous optical network (SONET)

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.

T TCM

tandem connection monitor

TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TD

transmit degrade

TDC

tunable dispersion compensator

TDM

See time division multiplexing.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2959


E Glossary

TF

transport format

TFTP

See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.

TIM

trail trace identifier mismatch

TL1

Transaction Language 1

TM

See terminal multiplexer.

TMN

See telecommunications management network.

TPS protection

The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board. After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board.

TSC

test system controller

TTI

trail trace identifier

TX

transmit

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.

tangent ring

A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.

telecommunications management network (TMN)

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of equipment, networks, and services.

terminal multiplexer (TM)

A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.

threshold

A limitation on an amount, scale, or level. Changes will occur when a threshold is reached.

time division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.

tolerance

Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard.

topology view

A basic component for the man-machine interface. The topology view directly displays the networking of a network as well as the alarm and communication status of each network element and subnet. The topology view reflects the basic running conditions of the network.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2960


E Glossary

traffic classification

A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.

transmission delay

The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the equipment forwarding latency.

transparent transmission

A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.

tunnel

A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

U UAT

See unavailable time event.

UNI

See user-to-network interface.

UPI

user payload identifier

UPM

uninterruptible power module

unavailable time event An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely (UAT) errored seconds. unicast

The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

unprotected

Pertaining to the transmission of services that are not protected. Unprotected services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection is not configured.

user-to-network interface (UNI)

The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V V-UNI

See virtual user-network interface.

VB

virtual bridge

VBR

See variable bit rate.

VC

See virtual container.

VCTRUNK

A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board.

VDSL2

See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.

VLAN

virtual local area network

VOA

variable optical attenuator

VPLS

See virtual private LAN service.

VPN

virtual private network

VPWS

See virtual private wire service.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2961


E Glossary

VRRP

See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.

VSI

See virtual switch instance.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.

variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and (VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service. view

The topological view that is presented in some rules. Customize the view according to requirements of every product and organize the data in the view displayed by the topology module. By default, the platform provides the physical view. The topology view can be planned according to the domain, maintenance relationship and so on.

virtual container (VC)

An information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. A VC consists of a payload and path overhead (POH), which are organized in a block frame structure that repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.

virtual private LAN service (VPLS)

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private wire service (VPWS)

A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.

virtual switch instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the (VSI) virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW. virtual user-network interface (V-UNI)

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS.

W WAN

wide area network

WDM

wavelength division multiplexing

WLAN

See wireless local area network.

WSS

wavelength selective switching

Web LCT

The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE management layer of the transport network.

wireless local area network (WLAN)

A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.

working service

A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)


2962


E Glossary

X XCS

cross-connect and synchronous timing board

Y Y.1731

Issue 03 (2013-05-16)

The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).


2963

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R007C02 Hardware Description 03

Recommend Documents